Skip to main content

Full text of "Cabinetwork and joinery [microform] : comprising designs and details of construction with 2,021 working drawings and twelve coloured plates"

See other formats


CIHM 
Microfiche 
Series 
(Monographs) 




iCMH 
Collection de 
microfiches 
(monographies) 





CaiMdian liwtltuM lor Htotorical MIcroraproduetioni / Instltut Canadian da mlcrofaproduetlona hiatoriquaa 



©1995 



TIN ImMtutt hn arampnd to otauiii ths ttit erifiMl 
COPY aniMto for filming. FnturM of this com wMdi 
mav b* HMiognphicollv uniqiM. which may iHw Miy 
of tha imatai in tha rapraductian. or wMeh may 
ii«nifieanilv changa Iha imal mathod of f ihniof. an 



Colourad conn/ 
Comartura da covieur 





r~~~| Coaan damatad/ 



□ Conn raatofad and/or laminatad/ 
Couaartun rattaurta at/ou pallicuMa 

□ Coaai tMa minini/ 
La titra da couaartwa manqua 

□ Cotoofad man/ 
Cartn (fayaphiqua) an eoulaur 

0Caloarad ink (i.a. othar than bhia or Mack)/ 
Enera da eoulaur (i.a. autra qua Maua ou noira) 

Colourad platas and/or illunratiom/ 
Planehai at/ou illuitrations an eoulaur 



n 



Bound with othar matarial/ 
RaM anc d'autras documanti 



□ Tight Mndint may cauia shadows or d-stortion 
along imarior margin/ 

La raliura sarrte paut causar da I'ombra ou da la 
distorsion la long da la marga intMaura 

□ Blank laams addad during rastoration may appaar 
within tha tan. Whanamr possiMa. thaaa haaa 
baan omittad from filming/ 
II %t paut qua cartainas pagas Manchas aiouttas 
lors d'una rastauration apparaistant dans la tama, 
mais, lorsqua cala ttait possiWa. cas pagas n'ont 
pasMfilmfas. 



D 



L'lnttinit ■ mteffofilmi I* nwillMir tiCMiplairt qu'il 
lui a M potsibit dt M procurtr. L« dttaili dt ett 
•xtmplaira qui wont ptut-4tv« uniqiMS du point di vua 
biblio|nphiqiw« qui pMivMit modifi«' una imait 
rtproduitt. ou qui pa u vtot axifar una modification 
dans la matnoda nonnaia 
ci-denottt. 

□ Colourad pagas/ 
Pagas da eoulaur 



n; 
n: 

n 




and/or laminalad/ 
at/ou paWlc uHaf 



ragas diseelourad. ttainad or foxad/ 



□ Ouality of print aarias/ 
Qualiti in4gala da I'imprassion 

□ Continuous pagination/ 
Pagination continua 

0lndudas indax(asl/ 
Comprand un Idas) indax 

Titia on ha a d a r takan from:/ 
La titra da I'an-tlta proviant: 

□ TitIa paga of issua/ 
Paga da titra da la liaraison 

□ Caption of issua/ 
Titra da dtpart da la linaison 



D 



Masthaad/ 

Giniriqua (piriodiquas) da la tivraison 



Additional commanti:/ 
CoRimantatras lupplimantatras: 



Thh itam is fitmad at tha raduction ratio chackad balow/ 

Ca documant ast filmi au taux da rMuction indiqui ci<dassous. 

10X 14X 18X 



22X 



26X 



»x 



J 



2DX 



24X 



28X 



TiM «0pv fUiiMd h«r* ha* bMn rapraduead thanka 
ta Iha ewM'M'tV of: 

BIMIatMqiM9Mfil(, 

UniiwnMUnI, 



Tha Imagaa appaaring hara ara tha baal quality 
paaalbia eonaMarlng tha eandMan and taglbUity 
af tha eriglnal cepy and in lMa«<ing with tha 



L'axamplaira fllm4 fut rapreduit ortea t la 
g4n«roait« da: 



IMnnht Lml, 



Laa Imagaa sulvantai ant tti rapreduiia* avae la 
plua grand aain, aampta tanu da la eendiiian at 
da la nattatd da l'a«amplaira lllm«. at an 
eanlannM avac laa eandltlona du eantrat da 
mmaga. 



Original eepiai in printad papar eavara ara Mmad 
baginning with tha front eovar and anding en 
tha laat paga with a printad ar liluatratad Impraa- 
aion, or tha baeli eovar whan appropriata. AM 
othar original oopiaa ara fUmad baginning on Hia 
firat paga with a printad or liluatratad impraa- 
aion, and anding on tha laat paga with a printad 
or illuatraiad impranion. 



Tha laat racordad frama on aaeh microflGha 
ahall eonttin tha aymbol ^^ (moaning "CON- 
TINUED"!, or tha aymbol V (moaning "END"). 



Laa ammplalraa originaua dont la oouvartura an 
papiar aat bnprimda aont filmda an Gomman«ant 
par la pramiar plat at an larminant aoit par la 
damitra paga qui comporto una amprr>nta 
d'impraaaion o« d'illuatration. aoit pat lacond 
plat, aaion la eaa. Toua laa autraa aHamalairaa 
origlnaus aont fiin.aa an eommanvant par la 
pranMra paga qui aomperta una ampratnta 
dimpraaaion ou dlliuatration at an tarminant par 
la darhlAra paga qui oomperM una talla 
gmprainta. 

Un daa aymboloa auivanta apparattra aur la 
damMra Imaga da ehaqua mierofieha. Mion la 
eaa: la tymboia — » aignifia "A SUiVRE". la 
aymboia ▼ aignifia "FIN". 



Mapa. plataa. eharta. ate., may ba filmad at 
diffaram raduetion ratioa. Thoaa too largo to ba 
antlraly included in ana axpoaura are filmad 
baginning In tha upper left hand eomer. loft to 
right and top to bottom, aa many framae aa 
required. The following diegrama illuatrate the 
maltiod: 



Lea cartaa. planchee. taMaaux, ate., pauvent *tre 
filmto t dee taux da rMuetion diffirenta. 
Loriqua le document eat trap grand pour ttra 
rapreduit en un leul elleha. 11 eat film* t pertir 
do I'engle aupdriour geuche. do gauche * droite. 
et do haut an baa. an prenant le nombra 
d'imagea ndceaaaira. Laa diagrammee auiwenu 
IHuatramla mdtlwdo. 



1 2 3 





6 



...KKOCofr HKxunoN mi oun 

(ANSI ond ISO TfST CMA«T No. J) 



M 



M^ 



IS " ^ 

■a la 12.2 

Sltt |20 

8 



1.6 



A 



/<PPUED IIVHGE Im 

16S3 Eait Main SIrmI 




CABINEPS'ORK AND JOINERY 







rOLVHES VNIFORM WITH THIS WORK. 

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION: c«pri«.c 

Not., on Mumik, Pracaaa. Prineipl.^ ud P^kijc,. 
^'■J^- "^""^ ^OAMS. MI-iCE.. M.I.M.E. WW, 

CABINETWORK AND JOINERY- 

CompriMKl DefiiM ud Deuib of CcuinictHMi. 



CARPENTRY AND JOINERY: c«.pH™., 

NolM on Mtumb, Pirocewa. Princple.. ud Pncdce. 
E*^ b, PAUL N HASLUCK. WiU. I«i !«„,«*». ™| 

ENGINEERS' HANDBOOK: c«„pri.i.« f«u 

Md Fornrnk. P™„ipl« „d Pr«tice, in .11 bf«cli« of 
CJiimeenng, 



By Prrf. 
S'«PVi>. 



HENRV ADAMS. M.IM.C.E.. 
7: «d. M. 



M.I.M.E.. eu. 



METALWORKING : A Book of Tool.. M.,«y.. „d 

ProcaKi for the Hudynun. 

WOODWORKING : a Book of t«j.. m...™!.. „d 

Pfoceuet for the Handynun. 

md Workmi Drat>n(i. 760 ftfu. 9k. 



CASSELL » COMPANV. L,..,„, L„.^„, ,,^, ;,„ ,„,, ^.^„ ^„ „,,^,^ 






CABINETWORK 



AND 



JOINERY 



COMPRISING DESIGNS AND DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION 
WITH 2^1 WORKING DRAWINGS AND 
TWELVE COLOURED PLATES 



PAUL N. HASLUCK 

EHUr 0/ •■BuiWt WnU." lU. 




CASSELL AND COMPANY, Limited 

LONDON. PARIS, NEW YORK, TORONTO «. MELBOURNE. MCUVIl 



PREFACE. 

CABmrrwoBK and Joinery is a natural outcome of, and sequel to CAssEtL'« 
Cakpentby and Joinery, with which work if ;. <• ^ . ' ^''^^^^>' 
price. Whikt the chief object oTthat w»k wm tTfT-'" ''''" ■"' 
principle adopted in the relited crafutf ^^enl^ ^a^^ Z'Z^ 
purpose . to give some hundreds of e.anipL showing 'furtZ; howTeL 
principles are applied in everyday practice 

anoe^Ihr^'^ ^^ ^"'" '"""?"* "* ^ '"">™'"«'' ^'"^ •"""1 '""l^ and appli- 
ances— their shapes, care, and uses- with timf,.. u. i-.- 7 ^^P 

panied by full explanatory notes. No less than vin ^,iv . j • 
details a^ included in thiThook. the ili^nurbe^^To .t^ "'' 
In ahnost eveiy case the objects here illustrated have ^n made by their 
W r:; fBtlTt*^ "^ T^ '""^"^ ^-' descriptions 1 rt 



La Bblle Sadvaoe, 
London, K,(_\ 

September, 1907. 



P. N. HASLUCK. 



CONTENTS. 

I Tables (79 lUiulmtwM) 

I Chaiks (39 lUtiMmtiam) ... 

I Sideboards (62 lUualmitwm) ... 

Overmantels and Chimney-pieces (96 lUnMrulwm) 
I Bookcases (44 lUustratima) .... 
Cabinets (48 lUuatrations) . . . ' 
Couches, Sofas and Settees (44 lUuatmtims) 
Coal Vases and Cabinets (22 lUwtratumB) 
I Mdsic Furniture (46 lUustrationa) 

I Hall Stands (65 Illuatrationa) . 
Bedroom Furniture and Fitments (244 lUmratioru^) 
WBmNo Tables and Office Furniture (233 lUvMmions) 
Kitchen. Larder, and Pantrv Furniture (82 lUu^ratiJe) 
Cupboards (74 lUuetnaions) . ' 

j Brackets (42 lUmtratima) 

I Waiters and Travs (18 ZUvMmtions) 

I Chests (38 lUvslrations) 

I Screens (1:3 lUuatratiom) . 

IPlant, Flower and Lamp Stands (55 ' lUvMratiom) 

IJewel Boxes (16 lUuatnUions) 

I Workboxes and Other Boxes (32 IUustrati<„^) 

ICuRio Cases and Tables (16 lUv^ratione) 

ISea,.. Cosy Corners, and Settees (58 lU^tratione) 

iSHAViNo Cabinets and Mirrors (20 lUu^lnttione) 
■Overdoors (32 lUustratima) ' 
MSSES (20 lUualratiom) 

HURCH FURNT -RE AND FiTMENIs' (155 IUu,tnUi<y,^) 

paiP Furniture and Fitments (56 lUmtration.) 

M^CELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FURNITURE (110 lUustrutions) 



1' 

■ . 21- 

31 
. 55 

80- 
. 9.1- 
. 107 
. 118 
. 124 
■ 141 
. 155 
. 219 
. 291 
. 316 
. 338 
. 351 
. 358 
370 
399 
412 
418 
428- 
434- 
448- 
467- 
473' 
479 
485 
527 
541 
565 



LIST OF COLOURED PLATLo. 

L Games Compendium 

• frontispiece 

11. Bijou Dressing Table and Washstand r v 

" ■ ^0 face page 48 



III. Saloon Doobs 

IV. Window Consebvatorv 
V. Chiffonier 

VI. Porch and Doorway 
VII. Screen for Bav Window 
VIII, Chimney-piece and Overmantel 
IX. Ottoman and Music Cabinet 
X. Dados, Overdoors, Etc. 
XI. Writing Bureau 
XII. Corner Wardrobe 



96 
144 
192 
240 
288 

336 

384 

432 

480 

528 



I 
I 



'rontiapiece 
page 48 



144 

192 

240 

288 

336 

384 

432 

480 

528 




CABINEi'WORK AND JOINERY 

DESIGNS AND DRAWINGS 



TABLES 



Introduction. 



ill 



This book is unifonn.io style, size, and 
price with " Cassell's Carpentry and Join- 
ery," and whilst the chief object of that 
work was to describe constructive prin- 
ciples, the present purpose is to provide 
a wide range of designs and working draw- 
ings. Information on first principles, tools, 
materials, and processes is quite outside 
the present scope; for these subjects 
the reader should refer to a companion 
volume, "Woodworking" (Casaell * Co.), 
which fully describes the manipulatii.n of 
tools and materials, and devotes much 
space to the discussion of elementary 
exercises and oim^ie examples ; and he 
should consult, also, "Cassell's Carpentry 
and Joinery," already mentioned, which 
consUtutes a reliable treatise on the tech- 
nology of the two related crafts. The 
present purpose being chiefly to illustrate 
and describe typical examples of work, all 
other matters are but minor considerations 
bore. 

Kitchen Table with Turned Less. 

With regard to kitchen tables, a turned 
leg generally gives more satisfaction than 
the ordinary plain tapered leg, common 
to chrap tables, and costs but little more. 
Fig. 1 is a section through part of a kitchen 
table, shuwiug one of the legs as well as 
the general construction. Into this table 
18 introduced a slide for a drawing-board, 



or it may be utilised for a baking-board. 
There is also a drawer below. Pig. 2 
shows the appearance of the front of the 
table. Part of tho front rail is cut awa> 
to allow for tho thickness of the board, 
and then stretche's are dovetailed down 
to it as shown in I'lg. 3. The size of tho 
drawer is next decided on. tl e necessary 
amount of Btufi is taken out. and rebated 
stretchers are inserted between front and 
back rails. The drawer (Fig. 4) has pieces 
screwed^ to the sides to travel along the 
rebate in the stretcher, as clearly shown 
in Fig. 1. The bottom of the drawer is 
checked in square, and blocked with square 
fillets. This kitchen table may be made 
of good yellow pine throughout, with pins 
mserted through the legs into the tenons. 
Blocks may also be glued in at the back 
of the leg and rail. Bottom stretchers 
may be dispensed with when the rails 
and legs are well bound together. 

Rectangular Side Table. 

The next table to be considered is a 
side or hall table. Fig. 5 is a half elevation 
of the front of such a table. The legs 
are checked to receive the rails, which 
are carried all round, mitered at the comers, 
and screwed from the back through the 
legs. They are also blocked at the back, 
similarly to those in the previous ex-amplc. 
A fielded channel is cut down the rail, 
finishing in a diamond pattern at the 
centre. A narrow rail is also carried 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINEHY. 




TABLES. 



I •k»g tht tent, and clianndlad oat in > 
I S: I, ?»™«- A inuU monlding (m 
I *?«■ °l " c«ni«d tlong the nib imnw- 
di»t«Iy under the table top, and thii top 
u iecarad as ihown in Kg. 7. SmtU 
°^'*"» •" cut in at the baoli of the 
mile, and blocia, having a amall tenon 



A i">- Kg. 9 shows a half design for a 
suitable leg far the table. 

Sqiwrc-fraiiM TaU* with Elliptical 
Top. 

A parlour table will next be considered. 
A design far such a table is shown at Kg. 




Fig. 9.— Half DMisn for 
TaUa Ut. 



n(. 8.— Horimttal SMlon 

through Con ix at Side 

Table. 



to correspond with the mortice, are screwed 10. The part pUn (Fig 11) shows the 

S„ "', 'P'"?°8- ^'S- 8 >s/ honzoatitl .trcteheis, which carry » shaped riielf 

Bhor. triL^.wT/' '^'- *^^b "'"' ' '™'" '"« Vplaated'^down on 

mSrwhilh 1. * °^- "S ««»!»\«" top of it. The legs Ire turned, and the 

nuls, which have a projection of about outside comers of the square ar^ rounded 



* OABIMBTWOIU: AMD JOIKXBT. 

oi. Tlia •tntokan an half oluakad whan la fiaUad in tUa eaaa ioataad of baia| 

tha^ oiDii aaoh othat. and an taaoaad aqoan. Fip. 13 to 16 ahow diSanat 

to tha lagk 1h» ahalf ia ahapad and amiiiaiBanta of monldiiiga. Tha ad^ of 




T\g. IL— UBdtzatath Flan of Iqitan-fram* Tabic wtth 
BUpUral Top. 



bradded down on top of them, the fore 
edgea being fixed to the ihelf. A drawer 
ie placed in the middle of the nil ; it haa 
a moulding run on the top and bottom 
edgea of the front. Thia moulding is alao 




L 




riff' IS.— leotloB tfaroafh Table Drawer. 



the ahelf ia also moulded (aee Fig. 17). 
The top ia fixed in the same way aa that of 
the rectangular side table (see Fig. 7, p. 2). 




rici. IS. 
— Sectloiu of Tarlom Uonldliigs. 



Fig. 17.— AltanatlTe Houldlngi 
for Table Shalt 



nin on the thr^e other rails to carry out 

the ssme effsct. Fig. 19 is a section ^ ___ ^ 

through the drawer, showing the mould- table (Figs. 18 and li)) is good red or white 

ing and also the drawer bottom, which deal, or the best pine. The sizes of the 



Extending Kitchen Table. 

The iaaterial for tnaking the extending 



TABUa 



IT" 


— — : — 


< . 


— » 


r 
1 


: ' i. 


1 


1 

1 

'«, 

1 
1 

L 







nt. Ml— 1Ta4«> 

BMlbnaBoflx* 

tmUtf KMokn 

TkMc 



Ml 




.'--r — 




Eltrmtiflai of 
Tabla Ex. 
tondad, with 
iMl In- 
Mitod. 



iHi 



<iu'*J "••««■• mil 



OABIKETWOM AMD JCJiniT. 



two I 



S^^i."'w .Tr ""^ *». 4 t'sin.- 








T>kto.ik«>tat>MlM4 
of iMwtaif n«m. 



Ji in. ; and two cross rail, e .nd » (Fi« 20) 
- It. « ID. by 64 in. bv IJ in Tk *' '' 

ft m. at tie bottom as shown Tl. 

joints cnnnectini! the rail. .„j f' '' 

"howu in Rs«'t% ^ ''S" »» 

'" 'ig- =.», the moilicra are at 



Flf. »1— CoBTeattauU Tltw 

"•"""•a TM. Top. *,«,, 

*«o«""« Airaapmoal 

the mil. «f^- »='«^^>1M f„r holding 
the ra.U firmly m p^rition is d,„,n^ 



TABLU. 



fifi. n to 34. It U ol iqiun ifoa, bat 
to o riikt Mifl* ud toumM it tk* ontn 
•no, which to Mra»«d lot • sat. Ttg. 23 
•kom tkol br ti^tnini tlw nt tlw two 
nito m grippd tofatW. 




iniMt nib or JidM ud tko two mm niU 
^oM bo o( Sudwood, neb u bnch ot 
birsk. Tk* ipoeiil wmw ou b« obttiaod 
faom almoL't uy fimiikiiif insBonni, 
b MHutnictiac tk* inmnrotk, pbu tk* 
•tun to tbo irim firai, ud Ht out tko 



moiticM of tho iMi'ud tko'toami of 

(m,r.gM - 



tk* nili ( 



Tke mortieM niado 



- — -- — \-— ••■• — '/■ *Mw uiurHKva maov 

for tbo inntr aliding nil« in firtkn faom 
tko faont tin of tk< l>gi tbon tkoM lor 
tki ontotnili, m ihown in Figi. 28, 30, 



rif. tt.— eunt u< Wtt 

Extondinc A-tt. to v-ft. DInInc TaMo 
with Scrtw. 
Tk« umplo extendini dicing table ihown 
by Kg!. 26 to 28 iboiild b< nude of m»kog- 
uj, ook, or w»Inat Is Kg. 28, a i< o b*l1- 
plu from nndemaotb, uid b » bnlf-pinn 



ud 31. Flongk tk« ilidet from tkeir top 
•dgei, 1 in. wide and } in. deep. TkU 
gnwn cu be nude with > |-in. plon^- 
iron, or witk ■ raboto pUne by lUng > 
■trip of wood at the tight dietuce puSbl 
to the top edge. A piece of htidwood 
•hoiild be ploned lo aa to it nioelv in the 
ffroovea, and ihotUd then be finnfy glued 
into tha gtooT* of the inner tail. The 
moulding on the bottom of the enter raila 
o (Rgs. 31 and 3?) ia next fixed with glue 
and iorewi. The oroaa tails a and b (Figg. 
30 and 31) ahsuld be dovetoiled to On 
eliding raila— B to the inner raila, and a 
into the projootiug moulding, aj ihown 
m Figa. 28 and 33. Make thne doveUile 
carefully, or the taili, through not being 
paiallel, will prevent ptopet working. When 
the jomta ate ptopetly fitted, thoae ' . ireen 




Plf. M.— Eiteadlii» e-fl. to e-lt Bmat Tabl. with Boimr. 



with top temoved. The legs are turned 
from etuB about 6 in. equate. The outer 
rails for th* fromowork may be aoiij, 
or the outside portion m .y be of J-in. 
stufi glued to a backing as shown. The 



the legs and the rails, and between the ctoss 
rails and the tails, should be glued to- 
gether, keeping tLo legs and tails square. 
The ctoss tails should also have a couple 
of sctews insetted, aa shown II '..,,. 33. 



w 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEKT. 



Top of Extending Tabl..— WeU-«eaK)n«d 
matenal for the top can b» obtained 
in widths about 1 ft. 6 in., and each half 
will then require only one joint The 
leaves are also I ft. 6 in. wide. The top 
should be dowelled and glued, and the 
under sides o£ the top and leaves trued 
up. Neit join together the two portions 



of the permanent top and the two leaves, 
and dowel them wi:h hardwood pins about 
t in. in diameter, projecting about 4 in. 
(see Pig. 34). The whole top should then 
be turned bottom side up, the frame- 
work stretched out to its full length (see 
Fig. 30), put on and fastened to the two 
permanent parts of the top by screws 




Fig. so.— Part Plin of Franuwork of TaWo, 



TABLES. 



— ".[ 



inserted obliquely, its clearly shown in an 
illustration (Fig. 32) given below. 

Fixing the Screw and Barrel.— The screw 
and barrel should now be fitted. Secure 
the handle end of the screw to the end 
rail of the table. To the cross rail a (Figs. 
30 and 31) fix the box in which the screw 
works, and which holds one end of the 
barrel; fix the other end of the barrel 
to the under side of the top, a wood block 
probably being necessary for this purpose. 
Slightly tighten the screw so as to hold 
the top firmly together, plane the top and 
leaves, and work the moulding round the 
edges. 




i !i 



Tig. 33.— Joint between Crou and Side Bails of 
Table 




Fly. 81.— Framnrork of Extending Dining 
Tabla. 




the joints of the leaves should occur, as 
shown by o, H, and K (Fig. 30) A stop 
L prevents the framework moving too fer. 
The table when closed is 6 ft. long, and 



Fig. 33.— Section tbrongb SUding Sailt of Table. 

Completing the Extending Table.— The 
tbicknessing fillet shown :n section by d 
(Fig. 32), having a smal bead worked 
on one edge and the other rounded, should 
be mitered at the angles E and F (Figs. 
28 and 30), and fixed with glue and screws. 




Fig. 34.— Comer of Table Leaf 

will extend to 9 ft. with two 1-ft. 6-in. 
leaves. It would be firmer if it extended 



Have tae two side pieces long enough to a ft. 6 in. only, with leaves 1 ft. 3 in. 
tfl reach from cud to cud, thus taking in wide. This would give the sliding rails 
the two leaves ; cut with a fine saw where lap of 2 ft. instead of 1 ft. 6 in. 




CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. SI.— nuuiig-iMt 

Omt«-leg Tftble with 
TniBfld htgt and 



Falling-leaf Qate-leg Table with 
Turned Legs and Rails. 

Pig. 35 is the general view of a table 
with a flap supported by gate legs. Ail 
the legs and lower rails are turned. 
Mahogany, oak, watout, pitchpine, and 
yellow pine are suitable woods. The sizes 
of the various pieces may be varied to suit 
requirements. Having cut the necessary 
pieces to the several lengths, plane them 
up to the proper sizes. If desired, the 
legs and rails may be turned before being 



planed, but this is not always so satis- 
factory as planing up material true 
beforehand. Next set out the legs and 
rails for morticA-and-tenon joints. Fig. 36 
shows all the fi mework. The ends of the 
turned rails havj the tenons mitered at the 
extremities (see Pig. 37) ; this allows the 
cross mortices in the leg to be made so 
that the tenons nearly meet. The long 
turned rails to which the rails of the movable 
legs are attached are set further back from 
the face of the legs; therefore the tenon 
must bo made nearer the front of the rail, 



Fig. 36.— FramevorlE 
of FaUlng-leaf 
Ctate-leg Table. 




TABLES. 



«nd a thicker piece taken from the back; 
Me A (Kg. 37). The upper rails at the sides 
and one end have a shoulder on the out- 



legs, the upper rail being a little on the 
slope, as shown at Fig. 38. This is to allow 
of the upper rail being connected to the 



-Iwf 

Mill 

and 



atis- 
true 
and 
. 36 
the 
the 
the 
) so 
ong 
>ble 
rom 
Qon 
sil. 




Fig. ST.— Joint! in Framevork of 
Fallin(-leaf Tablo. 

side only with a haunch as at b (Fig. 37). 
The lower rail for the drawers is stub- 
mortised and tenoned together (see c), 
and the upper rail is dovetailed into the 



Tig. 3S.— Plan of Framework of FaUing-i 
Tablo. 

upper main rail by means of back Saps, 
as shown at E (Fig. 36). Af*er the joints 
have been made and fitted hey should 
be glued together. Then the top of the 




Fig. 39.— Side Elevation of Falling-leaf Table. 

leg as shown at D. The turned rails to the legs and rail should be planed oil level 
movable legs arc tononed; they have square with each other, and the movable legs 
shoulders, and are at nght angles to the and rails secured in position A good 



M 



I 

It 



1'. 



I 



5 if 



>«.jii 



12 



le™^?tk connecting the rail .nd mov^bl. 
ITj J 1 , """' '■'"' " ^y 'Merting 8 flat- 
headed bolt secured on the under Jde wfth 

L^ ' s.?*,* ''°'" """" answers. The 
width as the distances between the legs, 
or It may be narrowed, as shown, by in- 
sertmg a block at ea.h side. In the latter 

the whole width, the runner can be flied 

o?tS°i"°"* ?"*° '"■'»■ The drawer^ 
of the ordinary dovetail construction. Nert 

the best plan will be to join the pS 
by doweliing and gluing 'them tog^Sr 
H pine or similar soft wood is usrf the 
'ZfTt be ploughed, cross ton^S 
^kf *lf * ?«*"■"• %»■ 35, 39, and To 
Bhow the edges of the top moulded, and 

would have a much better appearance ft 
the inside edge of the flap were hollowed 

edge would be m the form of a rule io^t 
as shown at Pig. 41. ' ""' 

Small Table with Round Top. 

on'^th,™'' V"? }'^ ^'«- *^ » supported 
on three shaped legs made from atuS 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 



^i.U"edr.h^sL-id"- 



Pfe. M.-End a,,ati„„ „, piuiag.i,^ t.„^ 



the dimen«c.n3 given in Fig J. ihl 




FI«. «. -Joint hitWMa Tabl. Top ai PUp 



ZTTifd^?"'''' f"^ 'I"" ^'^' dowelled, 

S'orvwj'r;it^'':vf 

^w. and the moulding on the X for^rf' 
Rg. 44 IS an underneath plan of the taW, 
top, showing the position of the le^ and 





Til. 43.-Sm.U Tabl. ,rith Boo^j j,,p. 



brackets. The legs are stub-tenoned to 
the top as rtown in Kg. 45, the jointa 
of the legs iir.n,^ately under the ow« 



TABLES. 



7 1 in. 

more 

ed ap 



«heU, and the Btub-tenona that fit in the 
morticei in the ihelf being ihown in Pig. 



tan 

Blled, 
the 
bow- 
med. 
:able 
and 




table top. The legs should be .haped at 
the centre joint as ahown, and firmly 
brought together while marking at right 
angles across each joint the position o< 
the grooves. Take the legs apart, and 
work out the grooves ) in. deep and f, in. 




''!°iniM<t«i of Table Lep to n>p. 



wide. The joints are then ready for 
gluing. They are brought together, and 
oak or mahogany cross-grained feathers are 
slipped into the grooves. The shelf and 
table top are glued on over the tenons, and 
weighted to keep them firmly in pk-e 
while the glue is setting. When the glue 
joints have properly hardened, fit the 
brackets to their respective pUoes. If 
the table is to be enamelled, the bracketb 
may be bradded on ; but if it is desired 
to stain and poUsh the table, they should 
be glued and blocked. 

Square-top Table with Fretted 
Brackets. 

The table shown by Fig. 47 has a square 
top with moulded edges, square tapered 
legs, and fretted braoketa, and also has 




Pl». «.-Joliito of Table Ugt anilerXown 
Blull 



Pl«. 44.- 



-Underneath Plan of BmaU Tabta with 
Bouod Top. 



a shaped shelf underneath. The ■ top is 
1 ft. 6 in. square by 1 in. thick, Fig. 48 

46. The shelf •>, a .„ „ ji . v JT"* *,'"!' **? »""* ■"'* under-side plan. 

J in tbi,.f i ,? diameter by It mar hr. in one or more pieces. The less 

i,™j '^"k, and a moulding is worked are 2 ft. 3 in. long by IJ in wnare at tt. 

round Its edge simiUr to that on the top and IJ in. at* the fooi TT^ Me 



; I ' i 'l 



14 



oorreo. ^Uy „, bat.™ for thXcto. 



CABINEIWOBK AND JOINERY. 




"«Je for the tongued blocks which an 
"«d to «cure th. table top in porftio" 




ng. 41-H.lf PI„ „d Half BadmiMth in«r 
of Squn-top Table. 



Tig. 47.-.a,u.r^top Tabl. wia, ri.tt.d BraclMta 




Hg. «o.-Part Plan of Table 
Bbelf 





Hj. »l._Shelf Rouad to 
W of Tabla 



Hg. «.— Prettod Braokat 



rig. »a.— Securtng aholf to 
log of TaWa 




mg of one aide of the taW The bracieb, 

are prepared from 4-in. ,t„S Wm f! 

shown in Bin 49 ,„h ,„ l ' T. "' 

•" ^ig. »», and are haunch-tenoned 



Fig. ts. -Piling Table Tof to 
Bracketa 



Put the brackets and legs together tem. 

n^i'T^.r ""' "'c^re^nite home 
to the shonlders: then mark I distance 
"IK^:^^ f »'='' '^8 *«' «"« groove"-; 
which the shelf is to fit. and Tke the 



TABtEB. 



dunonuoiu between the lege for Mttisg out 
the «he«, which u shown in part pUn by 
ftg. BO. The >hel{ i, housed to the len 
M shown in Pig. 51, and further seourml 
from spreading by a small block st^b- 
tenoned to the under side of the shelf 
and bradded to the legs (see dotted lines 
in iTig. 81, and the side view. Fig 52) 




16 

table is 3 ft. 6 in. high. The top is 
octagonal, 1 ft. 9 in. wide across the flat. 
I /'P" /" "q"*™ turned. First set out 
the legs for i,ne haunched mortices at the 
upper ends, and for the stub-mortices 
towards the lower ends. The rails are 3 in. 
by J in., and the upper ones have haunched 
tenons which mitro together in the legs 




Hj. SB— EHyaMon of Octsgoul Oooadonsl 
Tabls. 



Pig. 8S —Joint betwMn Top Bails 
and teg. 



Fig. B8.— a»!tion of 
Table Top. 



The method of Hsdng the table top is shown 
by Fig. 53. The work should be glass- 
papered off and given a coat of size and 
whiting. When thoroughly dry, it should 
be rubbed down smooth and given a second 
coat; then again rubbed down, dusted, 
and given a coat or two of enamel paint. 
Alternatively, the tabic may be stained, 
sized, and varnished. 

Octagonal Occasional Table. 

Fig. 64 is a perspective view of an octag- 
onal table. Fig. 65 is an elevation. The 




Kg. »7.-Eii(ls of BaUi aiued 
and Blocked. 

as shown at Fig. 56. The tops of the legs 
are Ij m. square. The two lower rails 
cross each other with a halved joint. The 
ends of these lower rails are stub-tenoned 
to fit the mortices in the legs. WTien the 
legM and rails havn h^^n worked and properlv 
fitted, they should be cleaned oS and glued 
together; also glue blocks in the ancles 
ol the upper joints as shown at Fig 57 



till 



fS' 1. • " ".."Ktw of the octagon.] top 
wluoh u bmlt up o< two thicfaSwi, t£ 
top pijc. being ,V in. tluok .nd thTund.' 

thi. part, can should be taken to mt 

fonmng the lower part of the top. 'nj. 
done, they .hould alfb. glued to t£ up^r 



CABINETWORK AlfD JOINEBY. 




L«dy'. Work.T.bl. with Slidinr 
Body. 

Jl^nJ«^X'Sf:/r?ft%"- 

box, w.th additional accommXion "« 




Tig 61. 



part and then the edges may be moulded 
suitable. " -"S"'"' *"!>" '"Slit be more 



n»* « to •L-BlTOUOM. V.ltl«l 

tKOm,, ua HoFtamtal SeoUoaa of 

J^lyi Work-laU. with sUdlni 

Body. 



6.-nall pieces of unfinished work. A trav 
ftirmshed with the usual assorted S 
partments for needles, cotton, efe, reste 
m the top of the well (see Pg. eoy"^ 
may be removed bodily, but aSs to 
the .nterior of the well is obtained Sri^ 
through he central compartment, whfch 
.s bottomless, but which may, if preferred 
be covered with ., lid, /tuaj omS 

Immediately over the sliding fcdy is a 



TABUS. 



dnwn worldag bctwaen uUd gnidn D 
(Fi(. W) fruned into the nili of the toblt 
u ihowa in Kp. 61 and 62. A ihapad 
itntcW ii fnnud b«twg«n the lege, and 
otrriei a unall oval theU, ai ihovn in the 
half-plan, Fig. 63. The top and drawer 



tail ia ton^ed and gtoored to the well, 
aa abown in Kg. 62 ; a plough groove ia 
made in ita edge, in wtiioh wotka the 
hardwood tongue. Thia muat be fitted 
aocnrately ao that there ia no aide plar. 
It ii best to fit it fint rather tightly, and 



-if. .Tj Iv.' -,' /.v ,>^ ■ """" " '• Mst to nt It mat rather tight r, and 

Vi i„ V !^- ^ ''*" '"•'* '?•' '''""!« "" '<"'«"•• The rim of the weU abouM 
to } in., the jointa connecting them to the be dowelled at the mitre^ aa ihown in 




ri». ei— Jolat In Hj. ar.— Joint la 
Work-table Uf.. Elm. 



Pig. 6e.-WtU, Paptljr WltM awn. 



raila being abown in elevation in Figa. 
62 and 64, and in plan in Pig. 66. The well 
" "} r". pine, aqnare jointed and bradded, 
and afterwards veneered with wood to match 
the remainder, which might be either 
mahogany or walnut, the marquetry in- 
Uya being hoUy, sycamore, or satinwood. 
«g. 66 illustrates the sliding body. A 
wide rail is framed between the sides of 
the table, and a hardwood tongue, oak 
for preference, is grooved and glued in 
It; this is stopped back 1 in. from the 
front edge. A aimihir but sKgbUy thinner 



Fig. sa— 
Joint la 
Stnteher. 

Kg. 67. The tray, wk^h is 2 in. deep, 
18 made of ,Vin. stuff bradded together 
and glued, and lined with silk. It is 
advisable tn glue a piece of green baize 
on the bottom to prevent scratches on 
the table top when the tray is taken out. 
To provide an opening for the drawer, 
the front rail of the table ia cut throurii 
from the bottom edge to within | in. of 
the top, .and the cross guides d (Fig. 61) 
are kept flush with the ends of the open- 
ing. These guides muat be well fitted 
and fixed with glued angle blocks, and 




CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 

•Uding rim miut li. *.t_ .K^If '" ~* 



th.b«w,j(Kp.'6iVnd%lJw;g««!JJS "»t 0. ,!.» ^j._ ^ 



wid«. 



-, . * Z Z5'.-2 X^SWl^SfffS 



I' 

ft 




TkbU. 



Hi. 7ii-n,«u„i«u. vtow « Tkbi., wiu. un 



i 




n». TI.-I _ 

B«»»Uoii of Folding 
Tablt. studlog. 



r^lT'7 ?Pi''"'S '\^'«; "2- The moulded 
th"e t ''^i'^- " "'" >>« '"'«<^«i that 



Fig. 66). 
is shown 
are first 
grooved 
tuey are 
forming 



.The joint in the shaped stretcher 
."^ Rg. 68. The two curved end. 
jointed together square, and then 
diagon»Ilv through the middle: 
then glued up and bradded, thus 
a tapenng mortice into which 



TABLES. 



u 



lh« twoD OB thd itnight nil it flttri, 
tli« oppodt* end* of tlw cnmd poitioiu 
Ming taaoned into tlw legi. 

PoMlns Maknblft Tabto. 

Kg. 60 iliowi > table tlut it veiy iudy 
when ■ luge table ii requind out of doori. 
or for extn •ccommodetion indoors, anU 
which cen mho be uied la a paperhanger'l 
table. Hoit folding tablei are jomewhat 
■mall, but thii one ia B ft. 10 in. long bv 
2 ft. wide. When folded it i> 5 ft. 10 in. 
by I ft. by 3J in., and ai all the narti 
are connected there is no fear of any por- 
tion being niiilaid when wanted. A luit- 
able wood for conatruction is deal, painted 
green or stone colour. Figs. 70 and 71 
show the construction. The leg a (Kbs 
70 and 71) stands in H in. from the ed^ 



Pi •'f? ?' """^ •" = 'o' «op. two boards 
» ft. 10 in. by 1 ft. J for the ends, four 
Uttona F (Kg. 70), 1 ft. bv 2 in. by 11 in. 
thick i two bfocks o, 3 in. by 2 in. by ll in. 
thick, and four legs 4 ft. 7 in. by U in. 
wiue and 1^ in. thick, with just the aharp 
edgea pUned off. The battena are screwed 
to the top, and I}-in. iron butt hinges 
»re uaed lor joining the two halves fomunii 
the top. The tope and bottonu of the 
legs are bevelled aa in Fig. 71, and the two 
inaide lege d and h are bored to take the 
1-in. round iron atretoher, the two outar 
lega A and o being slotted for the aame 
purpoae. The platea j (Figa. 71 and 73) 
prevent the nuta bruising the wood; tliev 
•re 11 m. wide and of J in. sheet iron. 
The hinges for the top ends of the legs 
(see Figa. 74 and 75) are about 6 in. long 



Flf. Ta.-roldla( TaMe, (Xomil 



Flf. ia.— ZItvatIn of (trstobsr. 



Pig. n- Fit. T*.-Bi«n 
Slotted Plate. for Legs. 




of the top. The wing nuta b (Fig. 70) 
should be as short as possible, say i in. 
long, because the shorter they are the 
nearer the leg o can be to the outer edge 
of the top. This leg when folded comes 
as near D as the nut will allow it. On this 
also depends the distance apart of the 
logs when touching the floor ; the farther 
they are apart the firmer the table will 
stand. The iron stretcher must have its 
centre i emctly opposite the centre of 
the hinge o, and the part E must be sunk 
to allow the lega and H to close over ii 
(see Fig. 76). To obtain the length of the 
slot m the plate j (Fig. 71), draw the arc 
I. M from centre K, and then h o from N. 
Closing the leg d to the top moves th» 
stretcher and nut up the .ot. When 
the lega are closed the two halves of the 
top can be folded together aa in Fig. 72. 



B*. 7T. nt- ta. 

Fl(s. TT aad Ta. - 
Stretehsr Clamp. 

1^ 1| in. wide at the narrow portion, and 
the wide part is 3 in. by 2 in. long ; the 
platas are countersunk at op^site sides, 
as shown in Fig 75. In fixing the hinges, 
the narrow ends are screwed to the inside 
edges of the legs, and then the wide ends 
are screwed to the top. The stretcher is 
shown in Fig 76. The straight threaded 
enda go through the inside legs, and to 
prevent turning, half the diameter is let 
into the side of the leg, and the plate B 
(Figs. 76, 77, and 78) on the leg prevents 
the stretcher pulling through when the nuts 
ore slackened if the table ia being closed. 
When the table is open it is 2 ft. 6 in. high, 
and the nuts are screwed tight to prevent 
the legs cloaing. Ths dot^ted lines ia Fig. 76 
'us and H when 
%ttiB«87S&t>.of 



show the position of the 
closed about f over tl 
the stretcher, 



I 



llll 



ifti 



'y^^ 






OABOrtlWOBK AKD JomiBT. 



•«ron« PttrUM* Peldliit Trtlt. 

•Li-.!' . ^" l!" *■» IV. wWoli feu up 
■wuU, wkm hoBwd, 



?«•'"•' Moh otliw, ilioi 



•* »• 8 in. ; tie width a*j my t^ 



jc^t. .how. m n,. 79.'»l«. , ohJS! 
" ••" ,«"• oqt with t nun iJTTt 
•V»" ilioohte &r th. hS^' thT kS- 

.« is r^ ^ p™»«i«i with, iw 




.bout 2 ft upward., sccoidinB to reonir. 

.X.frt»t::;s.'£" 
f/rooLr-d^.-rti5 

th. edge, £a.r. Mark ofi. on the top M^^ 



"» Tt-«n>H Rrtabli nodlac Trtl» 



are mortiMd .nd twionri into th. !,« 
at the top, and narrow .par, ar, fixed S 
the «.me manner at thrbottom PI." 
iinge. are uKd, and are .ra»w^t„ ^S 

:s"^'^pj?theon,oa':s':fd^ J 

kS .1, 1 ^ F'~» i" the other. To 

I^? ^u ''«; *™ "'"'■ down, .mall flnlh 

^JtV^-^^K^ '"' '-"^ them, the 
plat, to receive the bolt, being ,^k in 

^ leTinto^h."""/?,'" "^'"'P *»"• "-ouW 
M let into the ontaide edge, of the riuht- 
iand pair oi leg., to keej them in tC 
fnK. 7Tr'™l"P- n» dotted h'^™ 

%°Vu^ltn".S"ft'"'- """"'» ^ 




CHAIRS. 



DlnlnK-raom Amwtuilr. 

0« ii tht bMt nutarial to uk for cluin 
01 tha dMoriptioa iliown by Fig. 80. Fig 
81 ii s Motional elantion of the fnm« and 
Fig. 82 an Blovation of the back. A thin 
wood mould for th« back lega should fint 
o« mado to the dinieniions given in Fig 81 
After Uning out, cut the legi out of 
IJ-in. wood, and dreu them up to the 
•hapa of the mould. From the bottom 
edge of the leat rail, taper the lega, the 
inner ude only, to 1 in. think at the 
foot (Ko Fig. 82). Mortise <he l„,a for 
the Beat rail and atay rail, vhich should 
be tenoned at shown at Pig. 83, and rebate 
the inside edges of the upper part of the 
legs i in. deep. leaving a belt ] in. wide, 
which should be rounded to form a bead 
(see section. Fig. 84). The ehiiped lop 
rail IS Sniahed to the same width as the 
legs, and is rounded in the same woy 
being secured to the top end of the legs 
with dowels. Prepare the front legs as 
shown in Pig. 81. The part above the 
sett rail, forming the pillar tor the arms, 
IS turned, while below the seat rail the 
leg is topered, and shaped at the toot as 
shown. This done, cramp the legs and 
rail together. Draw a full-size plan ot 
the seat, to give the bevels and shoulders 
of the Bide rails. The part plan (Fig. K>) 
shows the positions of the tenons. The 
short tenon on the back rail ollows 
the tenon ot the side rail to pass it, thus 
giving strength to the side rails where it 
IS most needed. Make a thin mould fu- 
the arms (ffig. 80), which are IJ in. thick 
and flat-rounded on the edges. After 
bemg fitted to the back legs, each ,s 



•aeured with glue and a aoraw, which ia 
driven through from tha back and sunk 
below tha fact, the hole being lillad with 
a wooden plug (saa Fig. 80). In tha front 
of tha arm ia bored ■ hole * in. in <Uametet 
for tha pin tutnad on tha lag pillar. 




Tig. 80. -bminjr-room AnnoUalr. 

Small Chftir to Match Dinlnjr-roont 
Armchair. 

Thn em^H ch^ir shwwii ^i F^r. ?.7 wouid 
go well with the armcbiir lust described. 
A sectional elevation ot the frume ia given 
at Fig. 88, and an elevation of the back 



if 
I 



'Itt:! 




•t F.g. 89. The back leg i. u i„ ,^^^ 
VLZ" .""• ?»P«™8 down to |1, 
rroin 1 m above the seat rail the Ws 
are reduced to 1 ia. thick. The back lem 

I ft. at the floor. This necessitates the rails 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY. 



it is connected to the rails with .1,„,^ 

Ij- «^oi^*-^-„itX"':i^so'2 

stay' ail Th. 1*^5!:."'° '™° " ">f 
»"•/ ran. lie moulded caps {Pig. 91) 




ng» 81 and M.-B«tl„.^ ^ B.^ ^^^^^ 

■AnnduUr, 

being bevelled to the rakp n,>.;«i, 

S^fFilTr^'f-" ^i«- ^>- The stav 

S.»2? tJ '" *"" ""e front. Th« 
fretted slat b is made of 4-in «t„« . j 
« kept flush with the ra"L*a?-the fro""! 



of Dlaiag-room 



•" -13. .,.,:. _,• 
«g. ss.-PIan of Boat RaUi 
of Armofaair and Small Cbalr. 

are ted to the top of the legs with riuo 
and two fine brads^ Wood 2! in i„ Z. 
turn ,s required for shaping the fron? 1'!° 
^r bemgcutto the shape shown in %' 
»h:„ ?,." 1"* * '"""'d time to th .ame 
shape on the front, thus producing a Jner 
leg. The comers are rounded with ,. 
pokeshave gradually from the t^pTf the 
leg down to the foot, where Up ..„f- 
bec„„« cfeular. The .3^ 'J^\^f^^ 



CHAIRS. 



should be left projeoting } in. above the 
top edges of the rails (see Fig. 88), to giv, 
greater strength and to allow a dee- - 
tenon on the rails. The small bracl t 
D should be glned in place after the ob - 
is cramped together, and shonld be shap 1 
to match the leg. Fig. 85 shows the pari, 



*he only wood parts seen are the legs. In 
.-■•.flr-'Ki vork the arms and head are . 
atiiili»; ii;i '" form round bolsters, but 
the '• juui'ir ' easy chair is finished up 
.:.|uare, B a or beech may be used for 
i.He ili&rc t members, the visible parts 
ul ih,: l-g? being veneered with some choice 




Fig. ST.— DbUng-nMm 
Small Chair. 



plan of the scat rails for the small chair, 
and gives the sizes. The directions given 
with Fig. 83 for obtaining the bevels for 
the side rails, tenons, etc., of the armchair 
apply equally to this case. The clamps on 
the seat rails (Fig. 90) are kept flush with 
the squares on the front legs, and the 
rebates carried across the legs, after the 
chair is cramped up. 

"Quaint" Easy Chair. 

The "qu.iint" easy chair (Fig. 92) is 
ft strictly a "stu«-over" chair, although 



Figs, as and 89.— Seotional and Back Elevations of 
Dininff-room Small ClialT. 



wood, or worked from the solid to nar- 
monise with surrounding furniture. The 
back framing (Fig. 93) should be taken in 
h.-nd first. The legs are 2^ in. square, cut 
as shown to a 4-in. sweep at the foot, which 
is chamfered ofi to li in. from the inside, 
as shown in Fig. 93. The head rail is 2 in. 
by 2i in., with a sweep as shown in toe crown 
of 3 in. The stuifing rail is li in. by 1} in., 
and the seat rail 2J in. by 2J in. These rails 
are joined to the legs by mortice and stub- 
tenons, which are afterwards draw -bored and 
pegged. This completes the back frame. 






ill 



iii 



Mi . II 






24 






Ih S V ?•> "• "«•' *° <*« top of the lera 
Tie front leg, are 2} m. ,q^„ t^^' 
to U u>.,,t the toe. 'the U,^ portioned 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. »a.-"Quiaat" £uT 01i,Jr. 



cut down the centre to a depth o£ 1 ft 

tin J ?^ '''™- The front seat rail is 
tenoned into the legs 9 in. from the boMom 

and froT™ '""" "" 2 "■ " i"- The S 

getier. The seat rails are jointed with 



ot'1ilow'rn'/?h"et'',rl' '""*'««' '•«' 
lo™ tC^the froS?°''l^.o""''^'"8''«>- 

Uphcstering "Quaint" Easy Chair 

s^Msee Fi^-^oTshon^/hT^ ° hS 

sTt J^' "" 'P""*' "^ P"t in the 

Sn) Th^» "^ ''°" »■"* 'l"™ '"the 
top). These are sewn to the webbing 



PIgB. 93 and »«._Back ud Bide 
Ele»aUon. of "gnainf Easy chair. 







CHAIRS. 



1 ft. from the top. The coverings are 
tacked on the back of the stufling and 
..o Oil =*'* '"■'»■ The iasides of the arms are 
mvered ''"' '^ *""• '•>" *"? "dge being stitched 
id with 



Pig. IB. —Front !■•( of " Quaint " Eu7 Chair. 

up square (see Fig. 08). The front edge 
of the seat, and the top and sides of 
the back as far as the arms, are also 
stitched up square. The chair should be 
stuffed with horsehair, but cocoa-fibre 
or alva will be quite suitable for stitching 
up edges and first stuffing. Finish the 
work right out in calico, and then lay on 




Pis- 97.— Vertical Boctloo of Easy Chair BbowlDg 
Springs and Upholiterjr, 

the outer c )vering of cotton or hnen tapes- 
try, which can be procured 50 in. wide. 
If care is taken in cutting out, 3 yd. will 

■* sufficient for both coTerings and out- 



side linings, which are of the same material. 
The outer side of the back and arms should 
be webbed with a cheap cotton webbing 
to prevent the linings sagging. The tack- 




rig. 9e.-Half Plui of Eas; Chair Boat Framo. 

ing lines arc hidden with a IJ-in. chair 
braid, secured and finished oS with j-in. 
copper-headed nails; the braid and nails 
can be procured from any upholsterer's 
warehouseman. The nails are inserted IJ 
in. apart ; no advantage is gained by 
puttiLg them closer, while the effect may 
be entirely spoiled. To keep out dust 
the seat is underlined with a piece of black 
forfar. 




Fig. 98.— Siulflng Imldo of Easy Chair Armi. 



Hall Chairs. 

Hall chairs are generally made of 
mahogany, oak, or walnut, the selection 
being governed by the stvle of the other 
hall furniture. Figs. 99 and 100 show a 
suitable design, and later figures will give 
alternative designs for the back. The 
measurements about to be given are for 



m 




i.m-u 



21) 



a chmr .mtable for a narrow hall or pas. 
sage. The construction i, the same in 
all the designs, as also is the thickness of 
the wood. The baclts are of Lin. stuff 



CABIXETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




tTh^rta ,„r«of ; ''T ■'.'" "■• 

height of the ilTSom Z Z'; r,f 'of i^"' 
ne«theo„tsides„flegs,,ft.Vjin.aV.°V 



Fig. 99. 



rig. 100. 





rig. lol-SMtlon of Ball 

Ohalr Ue, TmoM and 

Horttcss. 



Pig. 103.— Saetlon showing 
Wood Plug and Screw. 



Pig.. 99 and loo.-Front and Sid. El.™Uoa. of Hall Chair, 




Pig. 104. -Elevation of Part of Chair Back, 
showing Flu^. 




Pig. 10l.-Bnd.ni..th View of H.U Chair Seat 



front legs 2i. in. square, this being the 
argest diameter of the turning Wk 
legs, IJ m. by H in. at the top, aid U^. 

wde by Ii,n thick; and seat if In 
stuff. Begin by setting out the 4nt 



Pig. 10».-AltoniaU»e Seat Mouldings. 



the seat projecting } in. at front and sides 
which makes ,t 1 ft. 4J in. across the front 
then the back and back legs. Hi in. across. 
To simplify the copying of the backs, 
the nght-hand side of each design is spaced 
out in 1-in. squares. The side election 



CHAIRS. 



Mil 






N 


/WmS^m- ii; 


e '^^ 




'~UL~ 


VihM'uwCsl." 


uif ^ 


\ii\liMe± 


■ivi 


\llP«^ 


Wj7 


\ll w/M- 


ttu. 


Imh-- 


pE~' 


mMmk- 


wIgvj- 


^^K'w - 


\^j 


iirtPi^' ' _1 


itI^ 


M^M: 1 


-JkS" 


1 !|i<i:-z" 


^^u^' 


U^M!nMlil((!(A\*(( 


"jf 



Fig. I07.-HI11 Clulr Back. 




1%. wa-Plnt AIHrMtlTe Doigii fjr Hal! 
Chair Back. 




Kg. I09.-S«oiid Alternative Design tor Halt 
Cbair Back. 



Pig. no. Fig. 111. 

rigj. HO and lll.-De.ijM for BaU 

Ckair Lega 



1:1 



III 



m 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINERY. 



Tig. Itx 




If I 



Figi IIJ to 114.— Sida aid Pront 

£I«Tatiiiiu and Horiaontal Section 

of Carrod Oak Hall Chair. 



Fig. IK. 




CHAIRS. 




rig. 116.— Part of Top of Hftll Chair Back 
CiM A. Fig. 113). 




bi3^ 



Fij. 117.-CrOM SMtion and Detaili of Carvlii^ at Front 
of Hall Chair Boat llae B, Fig. Ha). 




Fig. in.— Oarviiij on Ha.. Chair Baok 
(100 C, Pig. US). 



Fig. in.— Front Lag of Camd Hall Chair. 



i» >hD«n m Fig. 100. The pitch of tk. 
back and back legi is obtained bv drawi'ntf 
a perpendicular line (rem the bottom o1 
the leg, and then allowing the leg at the' 
seat to .tand back 3 in., the back 21 in 
and the top of back I in. The length 
from the outrides of the front and back 
l«g» w 1 ft. OJ in. Next set out the plan 
of the seat as in Fig. 101. the rails stand- 
ing back f in. from the face of the front 
egs and } m. from the back of the back 
legs. From the plan get the shoulder 
bevel, of the side rails. To obtain the 
fullest length of tenon, the side rails should 
i? '°!^°„™'„"''"° ^^V meet, as shown in 
Fig. 102 To strengthen the frame, braces 
i| m. thick are glued and screwed to the 
rails (see A, Pig. 101). When fl.ted, ther 
arc planed level with the top edges of the 
rails, and the seat is glued to them. The 
blocks B are glued in for further security of 
the seat. The back legs are cut away 
near the top to allow the chair-back to 
M close against the back seat-rail (see 
c. Fig. 100). The chair-back is fixed 
with screws and glued, a centre-bit hole 
being first bored } in. deep, and then the 
hole IS countersunk to receive the screws 
The top hole IB plugged to match the same 
way of the gram as the chair back (see Pigs 
103 and 104) ; or a turned button mly 
be used to fill the hole, as in Pig. 105 
The comers of the front legs and the front 
ot the seat are bevelled (see Fig 101) 
■ections of alternative patterns for the 
seat moulding being shown in Fig. 106 
The backs are cut to shape with a fret^ 
or bow-saw and then carved. Fig 108 
IS the simplest in form, baring merely 
an ogee moulding worked on its outer 
edges and a hollow d forming a marginal 
hne (see section on right-hand side). The 
oval patera in the centre is made up of 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



,two glumgs of i-in. stnS. the lower having 
a hollow on It. edge and the upper being 
Wy rqundcd. If preferred, the paterj 
W fee tarved out of » single pieci 1 in. 

iwh wf ^:^ ""' "q-i" levelling 
at the bottom to give it the necessarj- 

in Fig. 107 ,s more elaborate, and requires 
greater skill in earring. The quirks k 
are first cut with a parting tool-that is, 
a tool of a V-8hape-end the round and 
lollow sections ofterwards carved with 
gouges and chisels, the centre shield 
t in. thick, being glued on as in Fig. 108 
The design given in Fig. lOl) is executed 
in tne same manner as that in Fig 107 
the shield in this also being | in thick.' 
The en arged patterns of legs shown by 
."'iu"? ',■"* "' "« '"'""'le for any 
°I ™„^'^1"; the turned members p 
(Fig. Ill) may be carved, and the shafts 
Author reeded a. at o. The chairs should 
be haSshed ofl with french polish. 

Carved Oak Hall Chair. 

A hall chair in oak is shown in side 
and front elevation by Figs. 112 and 113 
and in horizontal Miction on the line xx 
(Fig, 11.3) by Fig. 114. An enUrged detail 
of one front leg fitted to the arm of the 
chair I. presented by Fig. 115. Details 
, ? "J^*- "•'*' "" "town on a krger 
Kale by Figs. Ho, 117, and 118. Fig. IP 
to U4 are drawn to a scale of approxim- 
ately li m. = 1 ft., and Figs. 113 to 118 
to a scale of approximately 3 in. =1 ft 
In working from Figs. 112 to 111, first con- 
struct an accurate K,ale, noting thot the 
distance from the ground line to the top 
line in Fig. 112 measures exactly 47 in.; 
from this all other dimensions can be ob- 
tained. 



tCOLE (Us BEAUX-ARTS 
de QUBBRC 

matepiel 



SIDEBOARDS. 



Plain Sideboard witli Pedestal and 
Full-length Shelf. 

The sidcboanl dfaign (Figs. 119 to 121) 
affords opportunity for variation in the 
treatment of details to suit individual 
requirements, and wonld look well if 
executed in wainscot oak, birch, or Italian 
walnut. If made according to the direc- 
tions about to be given, a very substan- 
tial and handsome piece of furniture will 
result. The back is made movable for 
convenience of packing. The principal 
dimensions are : Height over all, 8 ft. 9} in. ; 
width of body, 4 ft. 4 in. ; depth, 1 ft. 9 in. ; 
top, with flapo, 6 ft. 3J in. by 1 ft. lOJ in. ; 
shelf, 4 ft. 6 in. by lOJ in. ; pedestnl. 
•■i ft. 6| in. high. Fig. 119 shows the frci, 
elevation. Fig. 120 the end elevation, 
and Fig. 121 the general plan ; the half 
i being above the top, and showing the 
flap raised, and the half B below the top, 
being sectional. Fig. 122 shows a hori- 
zontal section in two heights drawn to 
a Urger scale, the half section A being 
taken through the loc^ters, and the half- 
section B being taken tljough the drawers. 
Figs. 123 and 124 show the complete ver- 
tical section, broken, however, in order to 
economise space ; as all dimensions are 
marked, no difliculty will be experienced 
in setting out a full-sized drawing. 

Variations.— The top is shown wrought 
solid, chamfered, and carved in low relief, 
with a tongue moulding ; this necessitates 
a special and somewhat diificult joint 
for the flaps, so that the appearance of 
the top may bo the same w;...ther the 
flaps are up or down ; a joint easier to 

31 



make, though not so well in keeping with 
the di'sign, would be the common rule 
joint, with a half-round worked on the 
edge of the top. The top and flaps, for the 
sake of economy, might be built up with 
a Jin. top, glued and blocked to j-in. 
by 3-in. marginal pieces mitered at the 
angles. The brackets for the flaps also 
might be hinged with brass butts in place 
of the wood hinge to be described. The 
JMnel under the shelf might be replaced 
either by painted tiles or by silvered 
glass, in which case the framing would 
have to be rebated instead of being ploughed 
as shown. The joints of the door panels 
im'ght be placed diagonally instead of 
vertically, and flat chamfirs might be 
substituted for the hollows on the stand- 
ards, if these are found too ^fficult to 
work. 

Working Drawings Begin by nuking full- 
size drawings of the sections shown by Figs. 
122, 123, and 124, of course not cmploy- 
mg broken lines. It will be found best 
to make two separate horizontal sections, 
repeating the drawings on each aide of 
the centre line shown in Pig. 122. The 
dotted line in the half-plan marked 
A indicates the top front rail shown in 
section at m (Fig. 123). The dotted lines 
in B half are the drawer runners and division 
rails (see also Fig. 123). Figs. 123 and 124 
will be drawn in line with each other. 
Fig. 123 above Fig. 124, at the proper 
distance apart, according to dimensions 
given; and it will be advisable to make 
horizontal sw-tinn; through the Iriczc rail 
E E, the mirror back r p, and the framed 
panel between the shelf and cupboard 



M 



top o. Th,. doM , take oil th, ,a.ntitiM 
of .tu« wqoirri; the cutting Urt " tW 
on ,p. 33 will probably be *fo„nVu«T 

prepjnng; the dimension, giren are the 

fr,s\r"i"'">'"'«^ "- Singobr.in^° 

Jrom the dniwmg,, .„d c,„f„ii* ^„^^ 
to m planing, ft will be found, in "m, 
.n.t.nce,, that the rough «„ i. ^r^ neZ^ 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 




pt^'* w^,i" • '^J* ""^•"' » unimportant 
piacea, Where a ihaving mote orTita ia 

i7xr.n:rn;^rort 
rotL'^.ir"-''''^"'"^-^''' 

«»rd a. mea.ured from the «,tting out, 




49Bin 


,^ T 


i: 


-i j 




-to 


i^ 


3 


C--— r,. 


— k 



ngi. 11, to lJl.-rrMit and End Eleration. 

•aa Plan of Plato «Id.board with PM„UI 

tad FuU-l«ijth SbeU. 



Tit. 131. 



•ulHoicnt nbitance b«iiii alloved br dMn 
ing np to tlu Sniihed nn> :— 



8IDBBOARD8. 

CiiMoc LM (emtlimui) :- 



Ji'.-'.'S: « ^i 



Ooraiee .. .. 
Do. bxMb 

Do. bttikliu 
Stuibnb ,. 
Frino . . . , 
IfMki 
SluU 
OturdbMd . 

Uirnr Bntk— 
Hull .. ,. 
8tU« .. .. 
Muntini 
Paoeb . . . . 
Olua eitot .. 

«»•!/ «•»«!— . . 
8IUm .. .. 
R*Ui .. .. 
Purl .. .. 
Bruknto 
Mirror . . . . 

Tabu Topt— 
CHCtre . . . . 
FUpo . . . . 
Brukota 
Do. fillets 

Pnfcafo/— 
StADcUrdfl 

Do. 
Top rails 
Bottom do. . . 
Top partition 

Do. .. .. 
Bottom do. . . 

Do. 
End paneb . . 
Front rail 

Doori — 

Stilei . . . . 
Top ra-la 

nottoin do. . . 

Panels . . . . 

Stops . . . . 

Smt- 

Stiles . . . . 

Top rail . . 1 1 

Bottom do. . ■ j 1 

Mimlirt . . i 1 

Panelfl ..12 



I 4 i 21 

II a il 
I « to tl 
> 4 a 1] 
I 4 > si 
IS iO il 
1 '4 TO lOi 
14 1 ,0 li 



12 4 S !o 

2 9 210 

2 3 2 

3 3 II 



Wainwot 

Do. 
Fine 
Wainscot 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 



Deal 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 



I I I 

2 1 3 2} II 

2 !4 3 2|: } j 

1 3 9J loji A 



Wainscot 
Do. 
. .- Do. 
» |0 6 I li I Do. 
li 3 <H {Brit, plate 



n 



10 

B ;o 
11 !0 
11 I 

3J0 21' 
3J,1 6 I 

Sj!" *( 
2i0 2 



I 

i 

l| u 

2 I 2 



4 2 lOfO 
2 2 :0 
2 2 lo 
8 i2 4i,0 
4 |2 10 



3 4 : 

4 3 
4 3 

'; 10 I 
■2 e i 



3 

3Ji 

7 



Wainscot 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 



Wainscot 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 
Pine 
Oak 
Pine 
Wainscot 

Do. 



I Wainscot 
; Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 



Deal 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 



!!)' 



Jl 



Cttnatf.~ 
Mid bottom.. 
Do. .. .. 
Framed do. . . 

Do. 
Drawer runners 

Do. 
Dust boarda . . 
Drawer front 
Do. aides . . 
Do. backs 
Do. bottoms 
Do. blookiiu 
Buttons 



1 
2 
I 
1 

2 

4 11 
2 2 
2 2 
I 7 
10 





2,' 

2! 

S 

I 3 

1 10 1 
|2 0)0 3) 

2 0., 
il 7 



010 3) 

7(0 3J, 

Olo 3 

Dll 7 

e 'o Oil 

ijo ||{ 



Oak 
Deal 

Do. 
Oak 

Do. 

Do. 
Deal 
Oak 

Bass wood 
Do. 
Do. 
Oak 

Do. 



Filtingi.— Two 2J-m. braia lever locka • 
four pairs of SJ-in. brass butts and pUtes ; 
two door pulls, mediajval, to pattern ; four 
drawer handles to ^ttem. 

Preparing Stuff.— The stu« being out 
out, plane up the best sides and edges, 
straight, square, and out of winding. When 
all is faced, set gauges to the various 
thicknesses and widths, and reduce each 
piece to the requisite finished sizes, nuiik- 
ing each, as finished, with its appropriate 
name. If the stuff has to be left unfinished 
at any time, carefully pack the pieces 
together and weight them, or fasten them 
down with handscrews, to prevent warping. 
Pick the stuB for figure, try to baUnce 
the grain, and keep points of figure up- 
wards. Joint up the partitions, dust boards, 
drawer bottoms, panels, etc., ploughing 
and tonguing the joints where possible. 

Setting Out— Assuming the stuff all 
prepared, begin to set out the carcase. 
Take a front standard or leg and lav it 
on the rod upon the vertical section drawn 
from Pigs. 123 and 124, in the position 
It will occupy when framed. Square up 
the top line, floor line, width of end rail, 
thickness of front rail m, the two drawer 
divisions, and the bottom end rail, remem- 
bering that the end and front lines go upon 
the adjacent inside faces. Square up also 
the chamfer stops and the V-chases at 
top and bottom. Mark over the mortices 




I 



I 



lit. I 



a* 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEHY. 







TIw lop 
•ft« the 
iwmetrio 



"f »l-H,rt».ui *«.« u^^ ^.,^ 



•Jick, while t^fj^''',-™ly i. in. 

«h. wme ,hiokne„ .7 Ck .S„i*J"' 
this IS to providp r„„„ . .1 ■rand«rds ; 

A ,",-:». ..noB .Houfd V",^"?'"r'- 
'■«Pt.«theo.n.„„,'Si.1..»-„,'"» 




"* ""--Top faa 0, p^, 3^^^^ __^ 
Sideboard. 

th. m^ic'rin't t°"r "''• C»' i" 
^ ■« U ">• deep, and may g„ through 




ri». H4. 



BIDBBOARD8. 



1.-.. * . "."! ' »• '«>" nil: 9 
.t M.iJ'-irK'"'- . V" •" ■U'^-'n mill; 
of tUokuM of •tand.rd 1 in. dwp ; thm 

•tuncUrd Unti now TOmpl«t«ly Ht out 

"d «. on th. oth„ f«„, ,i.^rf, ,^ 

mIw '"■" •'"'"'W •« •»"•<■!£ over in p,ncil 
M.k. • wood gauge. .„d line in th. chimfet. 



nt. im. 




Fif. m. 



u,- »^' »««n*mu mpMUnly, en 

8« shown by detail. (Fig8. 12(i, 127.and UH); 
then set a flne tooth gauge and run it down 
the face of the panel groove; this will 
tw I in. from end faces. Gauge l-in. bv 
i-m. rebates on the bsck standards ti 

rebate U in from the fl«,r Tn..* ^t 

;r*J ?' °i'"™« '"'^ 'J-'n- tenons at 
the front ends, and IJ-in. at the back. 
These tenons should have square shoulders. 
The top rail should bo set back } in. full 
from the fare „f the .l.udard, k, use a 
l-rn. riip with the gauge. Gauge J-in. 



^T J-i»- (roovM for tha Mnl. i i. „ 
tor th. bntlon. (m X ^2J 'rJ?' ,™ 

th.b,.„„r.ii.ii..'Sf,i»-, tgj:"''; 

"W to reemm the division.. 8«e Fig. 1», 
which is a croM-section through th. l^ttOB 




Plf. m.-DrtafU .,1 aid.lio.rd Top Staadud. 



rail, as seen from the back of the case, 

(Fig. 122); Fig. 129 is one-quarter full 
MM. Having shot the front edge of the 

standard, and square over th. sight lines 

bLt°"'K'^-'^f,^«-b;'*°="''- 

for the housing (see Fig. 130, which is 
an isometno view of the drawer rails 



ilWi 



.1 1 



'il 



f.n. tenon,. Oange a J-in. by » in ^i* 

lor the door-stopB, line in the chamfera 
and square over the lenirth Th. I„ ' 
partition reqmre, dimply Sng to jyT 
and .quaring over to the e^Sf Sie" bj-' 
tween tlie two bottoms, an al owance o 

-ng. A small flute is worked on the front 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINEKT. 




n«- ia».— BMtlon on Um rr in, i.. 

Bottom, etc., of gldeboni ^^ 
edge, as shown in Fii lis ti.. • 

claim'^ .ttention.%rt^* '"Z"..'?' 2!=^ 

i>- ?■ poo™ without stopping. The width 
of the top mortice should be u in ^ 
that of the bottom one U in L> 'o^^ 
chamfers ™it. ti ?T * °*' °* 'h« 

be square »..i; I ^f '"""JdMs should 
»^"are, as the chamfers are stopped ; 



»»uge the tenons and the &ce lines of 
the ploughed grooves; the top ™S ° 
not be so gauged at this stage, as th'^re 

T^^'t-Jckon'thet^hlyS 
fro; V 'ZinTortt r^nTn'r,"'^ 

,-?«>.,?'' 'ound. T^iec'ei in by 2T 

made correspondingly deeper 

Tl,! .".?"*• «:«»« Partition, etc - 
The pedestal back will U. ..r » • 

being stnb-teno'ned in"' the %ai?s"" In 
this case the best side will be inside Th^ 

nS V?''L'» fl-'' i-"ido and rebald 
and chamfered aU round 8«t tkV -i 

t^t tk! u '*J''" "' qnantitiea (p. 33) 

I,™ laiis f in. as shown in Ki 121 
ttike due allowance for the rainetS 
ings /in io^^l*- ^"- S*"? *•" iou^? 



SIDEBOABOS. 



ninner is a double one, and is grooved 
to receive the partition. 

Setting Out Drawen.— This may now 
be dealt with, though it would be ad- 
visable m actual work to leave the set- 
ting out until the carcase is put together. 
Shoot the fronts jV in- wider than the 
hnished size; square them to length be- 
tween the partition and the standard ■ 
set back the thickness of the sides, and 
square the lines over on to the worse side. 
Kun a fm. cutting gauge on the ends; 
pair the back, and square over. Lay one 
of the sides on the rod, and square up 
inside the back and front. The back 
should be kept ) in. clear of the back of 
the pedestal m order to provide room for 
a stop. Allow i in. on the front end and 
f in. on the back end v (Fig. 129) for dove, 
tolls, and square over. Gauge a fin. groove 
I in. up from the bottom edges. In setting 
out the bottom, allow yV in. extra at each 
end for a tongue into the sides, and i in 
at the front. Gauge the width so as tci 
overhang the back i in., and run a rebate 
round three dides wide enough to receive 
the blocking, which must be glued to the 
sides only, and not to the bottom. 

"«*.— It is not necessary to repeat 
the instructions fc. jetting out the framing 
as those that were given for the pedestal 
will apun apply. Bear in mind, however, 
that the upnght pieces wiU be mortised, 
and the horizontal ones tenoned. Keep 
the panel of the mirror back flush on the 
iMide. The shelf panel, which is framed 
of l-rn. Btufl with a T-V-in. panel, is set 
back I in. from the face, and has stopped 
chamfers wrought all round. This panel 
need not be rebated, but may be bevelled 
" ""j"™ in Kg. 123. The lettering in 
Kg. 129 sigmfies :— s, standard ; E E, end 
»il ; I, panel ; y, sohd bottom ; v, framed 
bottom; d k, drawer runner; w, drawer 
bottom ; z, drawer side. 

Top Standards.— Lay one of the top 
standards, face upwards, on the height rod 
with the lower end projecting IJ in. be- 
yond the sight line of the top of the pedestal 
and square up on the inside edge the sight 
lines of the top and cornice, also those 
01 the shelf, the groove for the neck mould- 
ing, and the stops for the chamfers. Square 



over on the face the sight Unes of the 
brackets, and a hue J in. within each to 
form a stop for the grooves. Square also 
on the face the sinking for the shelf; the 

T^*',,*" *''° '"^'^^ »nd cornice 
should be squared across the face, and 
al« outside Pair the other standard 
with this, and square the lines over. The 
different sections at the various heights 
are shown m Figs. 131, 132, and m, 
half fuU sise and they must be gauged 
accordingly from the face side, linldng 
the plough grooves and rebates | i ,. deep 
Ihe portion between the necking" and 




rig. iao.-Psrt of Sldtboint Drawer Balls uil 
PaiUtioiu. 



the cornice must be ploughed for the 
frieze panel, that between the necking 
and shelf rebated for the mirror, and 
that between the shelf and the top ploughed 
with a i-in. groove for the shelf panel. 
A mortice should be cut in the top end 
in line with the ploughed groove to re- 
ceive a tenon on the cornice backing, which 
can be continued righ*, through and wedged, 
as it will be covered by the return cornice' 
The bottom end of the standard will 
be rebated back half iu thickness 
and screwed into the table top. Set out 
the cornice backing (see Kg. U4, which 
is half full size) from the plan, square up 



i^il 



m 




"■g- 134. Thi. will complete the Mtting 



OilBINErWOHK AND TOINEBY. 




rui. Mi.-»«t,oj ,f «M.i«rt Top auBd^ „ 
'^ BE (ng. m, f, ny""^ "" 

T'the'^^T'"'"' r"""" ^^ fitted 

Ler.c[^ r;c- „r<^%f::^ 

o«. and Mt .Mde till waS fi? 

bottom panels ta^ov! the ^'^ Sf 
dovetailed groove «e shown at X 133 

ana mark the position of the brackets. 



fltt«i,t1,et„pb„tton4onfh.T "T *« 

.^•'profth'-e-rFf^^^^^^ 

at each end so tli«t ♦!.. . «"oui y, m. 
in tiiht Tk. . i '■* **■""• ^'U drive 

ence in thickness. r7C td '^hS; 




"'"'■i^^o'^^X^Zr^ 




iiiit rr (Mg. laa, p^ «), 

Take them out, and form a dovetailed 
groove m the table top » in de™ n^ 
yp the standards and brackets Se ,fl 
-to position on the ,„p. and Ic^w °„p Z 



the top side Ho3 ?n *k' '»''««.=.'"' 

d1f^'wVnr"'Ck=tr''"t^'^- 

bottom in the .ZL „ """ ""Pboard 



SIDEBOABDS. 



pUn« ofl to width (see Fig. 124). The 
two partitions should b« rednced to exactly 
the same width ; the lower one will re- 
quire nothing else to be done to it. The 




Pl«. lS4.-8Mttoa of Sldiboard Oomlce. 



upper one will want ploughing on each 
side i in. by } iu. for the door stops, 1 A in 
from front edge. Cut a Jin. tenon at 
the top end i in. from the lace to go into 
the top rail. Do not fit the top front rail 
in until the carcase is glued up, as a dove- 
tail is required that will be partly in the 
rails and partly in the standards. Square 
a hue over on each side of the partition 
level with the shoulder, and on these set 
out three IJ-in. by fin. mortices for the 
,. ™*°'"'™ '" ^'P- 123 and 125, p. 
34). When the shoulders are all up and 
the carcase is true in both directions, knock 
It to pieces and work the chamfers; and 
when these are finished, cut the stops 
to the lines with sharp chiseh. The top 
stop is a plain chamfer with the hollow 
butting square against its bottom; the 
lower one is a triangukr pyramid with 
tllo hoUow dying down upon it on each 
side. A cardboard tempUte should be 
cut to the shape of the foot, and applied 
all round, the V being cut with a chisel, 
and the bottom bevelled ofl with a tenon 
aaw. Scratch in the flute at the bottom 
and this will complete the standard. Work 
the chamfers on the partition, and the 
flutes on the bottom and division. Clean 
all ofi, and glasspaper the inaides of the 
standards. If they are to be wax-poUshed 
they can now be glued up ; if to be french- 
pobshed, the face edges of the standards 
the edges of the rails, the end panels 
and the sight margins of the partitions 
and divisions should b« polished before 
being glued up. The work being ready 



for glmag up, fit the end panels into the 
raib, glue the tenons and mortices, enter 
them, and knock up. Lay the work on 
the bench out of winding, and cramp it up : 
wedge the back standards, and turn » 
li-ln. screw into the front tenons from 
the mside. Having glued up both ends, 
clean ofl the inside, glue and nail in the 
drawer partition, glue the end tenons 
and tongues, enter them in their places 
and cramp up. Try with a rod for square- 
ness, and brace the work in position- 
leave the cramps on until dry. Neit fit 
in the top rail keeping it 1 in. back from 
the face of the leg, insert the partition 
in the hous.ag of the bottom. Glue the 
tenon and the dovetails, and drive on the 
top rail ; nail it down at the -uds, and 
wedge the teaon in the centre ; j.ut screws 
through the back edge of the bottom 
anglewise into the back standards. When 
the work IS dry, clean off and level the 
top ready to receive the table. 

Table Tops and FUps.— The top t (Pig. 136) 
may be prepared in one piece, the breaks 
being cut and the moulded edges returned 
in the solid, but the appearance would be 
nearly as good and the work would be 
much easier if the breaks were formed 
by glcng on separate pieces after the 
mam top was worked and moulded, the 
joint being made in line with the margin 
of the moulding, and the internal angle 
being mitered as shown at Fig. 124 This 
method having been decided upon, pUne 
up the top, shoot the back edge, and lay 
the top on the carcase. Mark a 1-in 




n*. ISl-SMtlon throtwh Top of SUaboird. 



margin to the face of the standards in 
tront, and a /j-in. margin at the ends ■ 
then cut and shoot to siie. Set a cutting 
gauge to 1 in., and gauge the front edge 



!l 



(I 




^5' i • ! V,'^,P'™«'' grooves i in. deep 
«nd fim.h the chamfer with . rebate pS 
Work . qu.rter-cirde hollow onTeh end 
fn • er„"i !i«- '?'• '" *•" «"P» to "ork 

of the .tandaid, oint them on, .nd dowel 
them m p„«bon. Work th. ch;mf7r 3 
'"'.lt'^.'^.&''"^."^ ont 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



m Fig. 12 . Form th. joint ^ ,how» 
nJ -^f"™ <"* 136),Vd hing. the 
flap, with . pair of table bntta^Keen 
the centre of tL knuckle, in line with the 

■unk aa required Bo careful to form 
Jh. r»JY '".' *''"°- " indicated W 

« .hown at , (Pig. ,22,. The full uSi X^Tl^Tt ""^t,' ^''Xl ^- 




rur. m.-S«>UMi«l Tl«r •Imriig 
Htageint of Sideboard Plap. 



at the top and the dotted line at 3 the 

IS flown, which is. howei-er tl,. ■ K 
edge of th. Utter, a, ZTC'JnXy'^l 
sec^on (Fig 136), where that li„e°s aLwn 
«t M ; see al*, Pig. 123, where ropreSs 
the joint edge of the flap. Lay ^,00 
face-down on the bench, turn the Mrca^ 
out on It, button the top to the crrST 
and screw the front rail Next n™3' 

flapsB(Fig.i36),th,fron?rigean?.nK"g 
moulded in pairs. Stop thi front chamfe? 
at the joint ends for 1^ in. back This 

" """S '" "*' '<■ fonn a mitre, a. shown 



nga I»r and ls«.-B.™tiM and Hm, rf H«. IM. 
Sideboard Bimoket 



'!'1n " !?„''' fX°' *■■" ™'"'- Sink them 
ij in. deep at the top, and diminish to 
nothmg at the bottom. Lift no th. fl.„ 
scribe the outline of the moLldiTg, take t% 
fcps oS, and work the return ; then, when 
the flaps are up, the top will appe^ ." 

I'n F^' t^ 'f'«- 1.-1'= "h™ dTwT a 
L^oltlilV'"'"''' ="»-««'■' out. 

Br.cfcet5.-The bracket, v should be mt 

r :U;LrFV°i.t tt'^rj^T '■ 

tlr^"'- « '^'•Ven.ia'^ S a L°lf 
round, bore a i-in hole through the centre 
of the round, djnd, the width iut« ttee 
equal parts, and cut out the cent,^ j^A 



8IDEB0ABDS. 



41 



Shape pieces | in. by 1} in. by 6J in. 
to St the backs of the brackets accurately, 
thus forming a hinge joint ; bore the 
hole through the centre, and insert pieces 




Fif. 1S9.— Seotlon tbronch Sideboard Shstl 



of iron wire for pivots. Cut a J-in.^by 
1-in. bracket rail b b between the standards, 
as shown in Figs. 120 -id 136. Stub- 
tenon the bracket back luto it, and glue 
it in position, screwing from the inside. 
Fig. 137 shows an elevation, and Fig. 138 
a plan of the bracket, one-quarter full 
size, with the top and flap removed. 

Fitting the Back.— Work the rebates, 
and plough grooves in the standards ; 
form the sinking for the cornice necldng 
and the seat of the table top. Groove in 
the brackets -^^ in. deep, the lower one 
with a dovetail groove ; work the chamfers 
and stops, and prepare the panelled frame 
under the shelf and the fri<' i panel. Place 
them in position, and glue up the standards, 
first, however, grooving the cornice rail 
to receive the tongue of the cornice. Kt 
the shelf (Fig. 139 being the section) tight 
between the standards, the ends running 
over, and returning in the solid on the 
outer face of the standard. Between the 
standards the shelf will run back to the 
rebate line to form a seat for the glass 
and a rebate for the back. Plough a 




Fig. 140.— side Qgyation of Sidaboard Drawer. 

groove in the shelf to receive the guard 
bead, which can be put in after the shelf 
is fixed. Bowel the shelf on the brackets, 
house the guard bead in the standards 



I in. from the back, and put in the gUss 
and its back hist of all. When all is fitted 
up, mitre the cornice between the standards, 
and glue and screw from the back (see 
Fig. 134). The standards being sunk } in., 
and the cornice upon them projecting 
i in. in front of the general line of the 
cornice, the break will require to be 1| in. 
thick. Mitre these up, and glue and 
fix them with handscrewa. Next place 
the back on the table, and mark the position 
of the rebate and the bracket grooves ; 
form the Utter slightly tapering, so that 
they will be easy to release. A screw 
can be turned in from underneath ; one 
can also be put in from the back end of 




Fig. 141.— stops on Pld>Mard Standard. 



the standard, which shouid run down to 
the rebate in the top. 

Preparing and Fitting Drawers.— Fit the 
fronts tight in the opening, and square 
ofi the backs to the same length. Square 
the sides 1 ft. 5J in. between the sight 
lines; allow J in. at the front end and 
t in. at the back for the dovetails, which 
should be set out as shown in Fig. 140. 
Pair the sides, handscrew them together, 
out the sockets with a dovetail saw, and 
remove the core. Plough the sides { in. 
up from the bottom edge, the groo e 
being i in. wide and ,», in. deep ; the grooves 
in the fronts should be Jin. deep. Fix 
one of the fronts in a bench screw, take 
one of the sides, and run a |-in. cutting 
gauge on each. Put a J-in. slip in the 
ploughed groove, drop the side upon it. 
keep the end to the gauge line, hold it 
firmly with the left hand, and draw the 



'JIK 






CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 



Iti 




SIDEBOARDS. 



doTttail uw through the cuts with the 
nght, naaping the mw about the middle. 
Turn the front round, iquare down upon 
the inaide the marks 08 the pins just made, 
and out doira with a dovetail saw, leaving 
the lines showing so that the pins may fit 
tight. Mark each end in a distinctive 
manner so as to avoid confusion, and repeat 
the process at the other end. For the 
back, put the slip in the side groove, keep 
It pressed tight against the back and also 
to the gauge line, and run the saw through 
the cuts in the same way. Cut down the 
pins as before, and remove the core with 
a bow saw and chisel. Having cleaned 
out the pins and sockets, take a shaiing 
off the insides of the drawers, then glue 
and knock together. Cut the bottoms 
to sise, rebate wide enough to receive the 
blocking, slot the back for the screw, slip 
the bottom into the groove, and glue in 
the blocking, the drawer being first care- 
fully squared. When the work is dry, 
clean off the ends of the pins and try the 
drawers in the openings ; they rhould ran 
easy, yet without any play. A slip J in. 
by 1 in. will be required at each end 
to bring the rail up to the thickness of 
the standard and form a guide for the 
(bawer (see z, Fig. 129). Place stops in 
the J-in. space at the back. Keep the 
drawer fronts in position, and glue and 
brad these stops to the standard. Screw 
m the case-back, work the chamfer round 
the drawer front, 8.jk in the handles, 
and clean off ready for polishing. 

Fitting Doors.— The doors can next be 
fitted in. Cut rods to the size each way 
of the openings, transfer these sizes on to 
the doors, and cut off to the lines. Shoot 
all the edges, after which the door should 
fit exactly ; but if it is too tight, ease it a 
little. Rebate the top rail i in., as shown 
at Fig. 123; let in the butts, the knuckles 
bemg allowed to project the tliickness 
of the ornamental plates, which afterwards 
are screwed on with round-headed screws 
(see Fig. 127). Place one of the doors in 
position mark the position of the butts 
on the standards, set a pair of dinders 
to the distance of the butt edge from 
the inside of the door, and scribe down 
against the stops of the standard (shown 



in Fig. 141). Sink the butts into this 
line, tapenng up to nothing at the knuckle 
and screw them in. Fit the locks and 
handles, insert the mirror, brad in the slips 
screw up the back, and the sideboard is 
complete. 

Sideboard Pedestal. 

A sideboard pedestal mav be constracted 
m solid wood, as illustrated in Figs. 142 
and 14.% Generally the same methods might 
be adopted for veneered work, ctcept that 
the doors would then be framed up in 
a manner similor to the end frames, and 
veneered over all. Briegy described, the 
construction of the pedestol is as follows. 
The ends are panelled and moulded frames 
of 1-in. stuff, mortised and tenoned together 
the panels f ;ing flush inside; the back 
stiles, 3 in. wide, an rebated on the 
edge to receive the oack framing, ond 
the front stiles, 21 in. wide, are tongued 
on the edge to fit the fluted pilasters ns 
shown in Fig. 144. The moulding should 
be fixed with screws from the inside. The 
pilasters are worked, glued on the edges 
of the ends, and cut in flush between the 
top and the plinth mould. The divisions 
B (Figs. 142 and 144) are of 1-in. dc-1 
tongued to fit the pilasters, and are housed 
i in. in the bottom, the top edge having 
three mortices for buttons. The drawer 
divisions are housed i in. into the 
upright divisions, the housings being 
covered by ths pilaster. The framed 
drawer dmsions should have their side 
rails in oak or other hardwood, the front 
rails being of wood to match the remainder. 
The solid dirision may be of deal, edged 
with hardwood. The bottom is of }-in 
deal, tongued into the plinth mould and 
also into the end frames. The divisions 
are grooved into this, and are glued and 
nailed through the pUnfh mould, which 
IS of 2-in. by l}-in. hardwood, glued and 
blocked to the bottom. Its ends run 
across the pilasters, and mitre with the 
return mould, which is glued and screwed 
to the sides as shown in section in Fig. 142. 
The top is of 1-in. hardwood, rebated for 
the back, aad overhanging the front and 
ends by IJ in. It is soUd moulded on the 
top side, and has a planted mould 1 in. by 



J 



ji| 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 







rig. i«.-gu.b«ri ,1th c^^ p„„. ^ B,,,,,^ ,^^^ 



SIDEBOARDS. 



41 




'I 



Jj 



nj. iw.-Ttniiai 
■•otiea « Cnln 
list of lldtboud 
wIthOumdruMi. 




OABINETWOWt AND JOINERY. 



IJ in-, glaM underneath to add to 
apparent thiclcnew. The end niii«- -< 

ta.ht'"r"',.r"" "•'««« 'f ^ «» 

and to nuke the top appear lolid Tki. 
«o«ld i. better if reEatiSrintre framing. 




"f. UO.-P.rt Bortonui I«Moa .f ild.ko.rd 
« Un. A A <n,. 147, p. «) ™"°*" 



•ta. of Sld.bo.rd «. Ua. B B (nHeT, ^^ 

i^»^ " i" a '"^ Jlued to the framing 
It may curl off. A top rail crosjinir thf 
div,«on, « notched into them and dove! 
taded mto the end,. The door, h^C. 

wide top rail a. a backing, and the beat 

Z ?S ™'' .» ""rtixd and tenoned to 
the .tile, which » rebated on the face 
and he raU la ipped acroa, it, thu. hiding 

fere 'Zh' ,1^'} ^""''^ ""*""'''» i»«"* 
trX, .tie desipi. The shoulder of 
the rebate m the stile i. made level with 
the top edge of the cornice mould that 
from the T'f Pfdiment being acrell^' 
method of making the door would be to 
iapenae with the tenoua, and aimply Uve 
the mil and .tile together, gluiL them 

th-u add a few panel pi„, „„ the inside! 



to it> 
w of 
>ut on 

nking, 

Thu 

lining. 



BIDEBOABD8. 



The door ii bulection maaklnl, with a 
iliuk niMl iiuidt ; when hung, it u rank 
i in. Eebw the Imct of tha (font, u ihown 



in Fig. 144, which ii a Motion on i A (Fig. 
142), ud tha itopt • (Fig. 144) «n n- 
batad to ncaiva it. The back ia a |-in. 




Fi^ IBS ud lB4.~Fart Vertical Sectimi thronch Vppar 
Part of 8id«l»ard. 



ll 


t 




oixommosK ako jonmr 



|mmIM Inaw, wilk S-ia. •Mm ud an- 
tini Two mrtjjd. of ftuMf m Aon 

•ogrtSw in tk. uHl w.jr, and h>n » 



•M i iMU with Cwvrf PaMbamI 

■•vdM MIrron. 
* «»«»l »iw of • food skua lidt- 




(1(1. iw to UT.— lad ItoTa- 
tlm, HiU Itnit ItonUga 
u< Half LoojitaHul iw. 
tien, ud Balf Plu aad 
Hall BoliaiUl ImUod (at 
E, til. IM) of BiHf laf uak 
SUaboanl 



tig. ur. 



tidt- 



tori* 






SIDEBOARDS. 



lontal Hctions taken raapectiveir on the 
linei A A and B B (Fig. 147) ; the second 
figure being diawn to a larger scale. Fig. 




Pig. IM.— Veztleal Crou Swtion of Earl; 
Enflidi Sideboard. 




Fig. 1»9.— Joliiti In Front EaU of Sldaboard 
Cupboard Top (B<i F, Fig. IM). 

162 is a part vertical section of the lower 

part ihruugU the side cupboard and diawer , vnui. 

sections through the npper portion, showing of Eailr EngUsh lldoboard. 




df.-»aHM( 



li 'i 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 



«ide mirror, panel, and cornice, a> well 
«« a detail of the framing at o (Kg. 149). 

Early English Sideboard. 

The design ahown by Figi. 155 to 168 
would look well H executed in oak, and 
either stamed brown or fumigated, the 
chamfers being left in the natural colour ; or 
If mahogany is chosen, the chamfers should 
be stained a deep red. Figs, im and 156 



i» required; but care should bo taken 
to select stout and fairly true stu«, and, 
in the prohnunaty preparation, to plane o« 
only just sufficient of the best surface to 
ensure the parts being straight and out 




Fl([. isi. 

Pigs. Ml and UL-Joint for Wiror mm. of 
Sideboard. 

represent elevations, and from these and 
the pUn (Fig. 157) a general idea of the 
construction can be gained. Fig. 158 shows 
a vertical cross section. As wiU be seen 
with the exception of the top and bottom' 
and the two shelves, which are solid, all 
the carcase is composed of framing. This 
method of construction, whilst entailing 
slightly more labour, yields much mote 
satisfactory results in economy, strength 
and hghtness; but there is no objection to 




Tit. lS4.-Enlai(ad Vtrtio.1 gnstion tteongh 
Bottom Fart of Sidaboaid. 

of winding, as the whole wiU have to b« 
gone over again. Thicknessing ia not 
absolutely necessary, unless the original 
thickness of the stuff varies eonsideribly 
I he top, if possible, should be got out of 
one piece, but if jointing is founj necessary 




ng. i.s.-K,u.,^ Hori««»., g«^.. a^^ ^,^ ^ g,^^,,^ 



rnd''irir^^'i^pf™-\«i-",PWd doweO^l jomts are more suitable th.,n 

ception of the drawer fronte whch «e Si' 1'/''.'°"','' ^ "" I"""" '"d 

Uin. thick, no stuff tW^S ♦han i!^ Tl,. J^°"'? .'^ P'r*""^ ""d tongued. 

-han 1 in. The Vjomted panels in the doors and 



SIDEBOARDS. 



ends should preferably be made up in 
narrow widths with tongued joints, but, 
if desired, may bo made in one width, 
and the V-grooves worked with a small 
rebate plane. The case bottom, cupboard 
top, and division are housed into each 



SI 

division, and have a tenon cut on theT 
ends as shown, which fits into the pani'. 
groove in the 'ront and liack rails. The 
corresponding rails above the drawers are 
mortised to receive a J-in. tenon cut on 
the ends of the division stiles, which run 




other and into the sides ,",, in. deep. The 
method of making the joint in the front 
rail of the cupboard top is shown in 
Fig. 159. The front rail and the 
stile of the division are each notched 
half-way through on opposite edges, and 
dnvon tightly together ; the drawer runners 
A are grooved into the top rail of the 



rip. 169 to l«7. - 
Front Elovation. 
End Elevation, 
and Half Plans 
(with and without 
Top) of Dinnor 
Wtflfgon. 

Fig. H7, 

right up for this purpose. The top division 
B is made to stand 1 in. above the runners, 
to act as a guide for the drawers, and a 
tiltmg piece c (Fig. 1.56) is screwed to the 
under side of the top to prevent the drawers 
tilting up when being drawn out. Similar 
pieces are glued and screwed flush with 
back and front rails, upon the two ends, 



I t 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 






i 



as shown in the section (Fig. IMl, and to 
these the top is fixed by menus of screws 
passing through slots to alloi for shrink- 
age. The back is square-framed of l-in. 
stuff with f-in. panels, nailing flat on the 
edge to the bottom, and setting in rebates 



square, are tenoned through the top 
and are notched to receive the sheff.' 
The raiU of the gallery, which finish re- 
spectively f in. and } in. thick, are stub- 
tenoned in. The face of each standard 
has a sunk ovolo with double chamfer 




Fig. 188. 




Tig. 170. 

in the sides and to) The mirror-frame 
below the shelf is doni;uled at the angles 
as illustrated by Figs. 1«1 and 162, and fitted 
tight between the end standards, and sunk 
iulo |-in. rebates in the shelf and top. 
The frame is out of J-in. stuff, and stands 
i in. below the standards ; these are 1 in. 



Figs. 188 to 170.— 
Half Back Eleva- 
tion and Half 
Loagitodjnal 8m- 
tlon, Croas Seo- 
tloa, aad Half 
nndenuath Plan 
aJld Half HoTl- 
soatal Bectloo 
tlmagh Drawer 
Level of Dinner 
Waggon. 



scratched in, and the ends are moulded 
into square finials (see detail. Fig. 160). 
The shelf is V-moulded on the edge and 
ends, and is supported by two l-in. turned 
columns. 

Doors. — The doors are hung with a pair 
of 2-in. by j-in. brass butts, and fitted 



SIDEB0ABD8. S3 

with 2-in. br«M cupboard lock., and bran 1 ft. 4 in. by 2i in. by 1 in. ; two ditto 
medjBval dioi. handle. ; th^r are kept 1 ft. 4 in. by 5 in. by 1 in. Panels : Eight 
I in. below the flush of the framing, and pieces, I ft. IIJ in. by .3 in. by f in. Doors • 




Fie. 171.— Half Hoxisontal Seetion of Dlansr 
Wifgiia tliroivli Sbelf l»nl 

are stopped against |-in. by |-in. cham- 
fered slips. 

Drawers. — The drawers are dovetailed 
and grooved in the usual maimer, and 
stopped against J-in. square blocks at the 
back (see Fig. 163). 

Cutting List— The following cutting list 
shows approximately the quantity of stuff 
required, the actual sizes being obtained 
with exactness from the rod when the work 
is set out full size r — Carcase : One top, 
:i ft. 6} in. by 1 ft. 6J in. by 1 in. ; one 
bottom, 3 ft. 3 in. by 1 ft. 4J in. by 1 in. ; 
two shelves, 1 ft. 7 in. by 1 ft. 2i in. by 
i in. Cupboard top : Two rails, 3 ft. 3 in. 
by 2 in. by 1 in. ; four runners, 12J in. by 
If in. by 1 in. ; two panels, 1 ft. 4} in. 
by 1 ft. 1 in. by f in. ; two top rails, 3 ft. 3 in. 
by 2 in. by J in. ; one cross rail, 1 ft. 1 in. 
by 21 in. by | in. ; two end ditto, 1 ft. 1 in. 
by 1 in. by J in. Division : Two stiles, 
2 ft. 5 in. by 2 in. by 1 in. ; one rail, 1 ft. SJ in. 
by 4} in. by 1 in. ; one ditto, 1 ft. 3} in. 



Fig. lT2.~8Ktioii tfarongb Dijuitr Waggon 
Shalt. 

by 3 in. by 1 in. ; one panel, 1 ft. 7} in. 
by 1 ft. 1 in. by } in. Ends : Four stiles, 
2 ft. 9 in. by 2} in. by 1 in. ; two rails, 




^ig. 17S.— Section throogli Top Sqnart of Dinasr 
Wafgai Log. 

Four stiles, 2 ft. 1 in. by 2} in. by 1 in. ; 
two rails, 1 ft. 7 in. by 2i in. by 1 in. ; two 
ditto, 1 ft. 7 in. by 2} in. by 1 in. ; two 
ditto, 1 ft. 7 in. by ^ in. by 1 in. ; six 
panels, 4 in. by 4 in. by } in. ; ten pieces, 
1 ft. IJ in. by 3 in. by J in. Drawers : 
Two fronts, 1 ft. 6| in. by 31 in. by ij in. ; 
two backs, 1 ft. ej in. by 2| in. by 1 in. ; 




Fig. 171.— Section tfareogh Part of Dinner 
Waggon Top. 

fou' sides, 1 ft. 3 in. by 3} in. by J in. ; 
two bottoms, 1 ft. 6 in. by 1 ft. 4 in. by 
1 in. Back : Two stiles, 2 ft. 7 in. by 






:i 



llh 



I'f 



mi 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



Dinner Wanron. 



_ _ — „,. „uiimiiuii seciion ate 
shown in Fig. 170; a half horijonta 



3 in. by 1 in. ; one muntin, 3 ft. by .T in. 

by I in. ; one rail, 3 ft. 3 in. by 3J in. by 

1 in. ; one ditto, 3 ft. 3 in. by 7 in. by View, of a dinner \.-.ggon are nre«nted 

1 in. ; two panels, 1 ft. 9 in. by 1 ft. 3 in bv Pira Itri tn IBO i i, i. i P""*""'' 

by } m. ; one back, 3 ft. 3 in. by 9 in. by 
I in. ; one shelf, 3 ft. 3 in. by 10 in. by 
I in. ; two standards, 1 ft. 3 in. by 1 in. 
by 1 in. ; two columns, turned, 9 in. by 
1 in. by 1 in. Gallery : One rail, 3 ft. 3 in. 
by 1 m. by } in. ; one ditto, 3 ft. 3 in. bv 
1 in. by J in. ; eighteen balusters to pattern 
out of I in. by } in. by 2} in. ; sundrj- strips 




Fig. 176.~EnlargMl Section throngb Part of 
Dinner Waggon Bottom. 

for fillets, etc. The interior and the backs 
may be of deal; the bottom is edged 
with a 2-in. sUp of hardwood ; the foot 
pieces, 2i in. by 1 in., are glued on to 
the edges of the ends. Figs. 155 to 1.5,-< 
are printed 1 in. = 1 ft. ; Figs. 160 and l(i3 
are 3 in. - 1 ft. ; Figs 139 and 162 are 
2 in. =. 1ft. ; and Figs. 161 and 162 are 
half full size (approximate). So manv 
exact dimensions are given in the illus- 
trations that it is an easv matter to 
construct accurate scales. Fig. 104 is an 
enlarged vertical section through the bottom 
part of the sideboard. 




ng. i7t. 



ng. 180 



Figi. m to 180.— End Elavatloa, Plan, Crou 

Section, Vnilanioath Plan, and Back Elevation 

of Dinner Waggon Drawer. 

section through the shelf level is shown 
by Fig. 171 ; details of construction are 
illustrated m the sectional views (Figs 
172 to 173) ; whilst full particulars of 
the drawers are given in Figs. 170 to 180. 
Figs. 165 to 171 are reproduced to a scale 
of 1 in. = I ft., as are also the views of 
the drawer above. 



OVERMANTELS AND CHIMNEY-PIECES. 



Dining-room Overmantel. 

The overmantel shown io elevation by 
Figs. 181 and 182 should be made of oak 
or of walnut. It has three bevel- 
edged mirrors, two semicircular brackets 



shelf, and backing could be made of bass- 
wood- and the remainder of American satin 
walnut. This bass-wood, or whitewood 
as it is often called, will require two or 
more applications of stain to bring it to 
the same tone as the satin walnut, and 




Rg. 181. 
nft. ISl and 182.— liront and End Elarationi of Dining-room OvemtanteL 



Tig. 183. 



being fixed immediately below the side 
mirrors, and above the glass a narrow 
shelf is carried the full length of the over- 
mantel and supported by four carved and 
fluted pilai!t«r». Tbe cornice projects con- 
siderably, the top forming a wide shelf 
for pottery, etc. Thoroughly well-seasoned 
timber should be used, and if a less expen- 
sive material is desired the frame (Fig. 183), 



if this is carefully attended to, the differ- 
ence between the two when polished will 
be scarcely perceptible. Both these woods 
bruise rather easily, so that care must be 
exercised to gnard against jniury while 
cramping up the work, etc. In Fig. 183, 
which is one half the back view, dimensions 
are given from the centre line. The four 
stiles are 3^ in. by 1^ in., while the rails are 




w 



2} in. by IJ in., 2 i„. by u in., ,nd U in 
by li in. wqwctively, .J mirtSSd .nrf 

and Fig. 186 on c D. Th„ piffi„ „. 
attached by «r.w, driven from th "back 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 



Sl,S:',"l"'l '"''''•„ ^"« •«"« «>" Jour 
•tra ght bracket.. Kg,, is; .nd 188 alinr 
•"Cfaon, of tk. Anting and Sad, on th^ 
njUater. and bracket!. TheToJl of the 
bracketa are covered by a boari « i„ 
by i m. by 3 ft. 8 in. 4g, a^i*,h^ 
the comic, .pnng,. The top ahelf i, ,„„" 







Pig. 184.— Vertical 

CroM Section of -*=-=^^^' 

""S'Si^'*' "*■ ""-^ Hort^t.,^s.c«„ ., o„n«n« .a , 



Tig. i9a._j«ttoB 

of Pilaun for 

OrennantoL 



OVERMANTELS AND CHIMNEY-PIECES. 



in a nbata in the top of the cornice, and 
I in. below the top edge, which serves 
as a stop to prevent articles sliding off. 
On the quarter-round ovoto part of the 



The pattern is niade with hand-car^-ing 
tooU, and machine-carved egg-and*dart 
moulding, or dentils, may be introduced 
with good eflect. Figs. IW to 1D2 show 




A 

Tig. isr —Front Elevation of Ovsnuantel irith Bholvss and TunBd Pillui, 



cornice moulding suitable ornamentation 
luay be iutrouuced to relieve the uniiormity 
of 80 much straight work in the deep 
cornice, the effect being shown in Fig. 182. 
A suitable section is shown in Fig. l?iy. 



the method of securing the small beadines 
that are mitered round the pilasters. The 
semicircular brackets are turned from one 
piece, which is afterwards sawn through 
lengthways, the ornamentation being formed 



f i -i 



! 



I 



CABIXETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. IM. Fij, 1,,. 

n«i IM ud 1M.-Blcle Daration ud 

CroH S««tlo]i of OrannuitoL 



Tlf. SOOl— Oroii Swtloi of 

OTmnftntel on Una B B 

(III. lU). 



Pig. in. -Elmtloii ud 
Half Croii BaoUou of 
Pillar for OronnantoL 



Pig. 901.— Horlioital Swstloa of Dppor 

Part of Omrnantel on Lino S D 

(Pig. IM). 



Fig. ISS. Jig. itt. 

Pigi IM aid 19».-CroM Btetlon of Omrnantel 

SholToi at and P (Hg. «j) rooiMotiwlj. 



OTEBHANTBU AND CHIHNBT-PIECES. 




rif. •u.-HoriMotal •mUw IhiMfkOnmuM on Uu (flf. IM). 




Flf. too.— Enlargtd SmUob of Oror- 
nitntol Bam on Um O a (Ftg. S08). 



Jig, NT.— CroM Flf. BO*.— P«zt of PUlor Support 

SoettoaaailllOTAtion aad of Bottom of Onrauuital Baok 
of Onniutol 8UU (mo % tig. IH). 

riiUl (MO K. rig. 





Fix. no.— DotaU of Tit- «».— SoroU 

Fig. SOS.— Front and Sldo Elentiono of Monlding on Orer- ot Ovonnutol ftt Q 

Orormantol Contn Fininl (not ihoira in Fl(. mutol >t N (Fig. (Fl(. US), 
inj. 100). 



l ; 



CABISETWOBK AND JOISEBY. 




Fl(. HI. 



Oramutel wftli Ctainiljir Minor. 



OTEMIAHTEU AXD CHIMMEY-PIEOGa. 




nf. n<.-iMiiM, 

"•wtaf Shapt of 

Oiofoul Una m 

Ovtniutd. 



•^\7 




Pig. 217.— AltMMUTt 

Moulding for Ortr- 

mantvl Mirror. 

Fig. aJl— ng. ««.- 

End ElvTttlon of Vnrtle&l Btctlon tbnragfa 

Hugliig OronUBtoL Haoging OrenQuitoL 




Fig. SIS. Fig. 21«. 

Flga 91S ud »3.— PIui of OronniBtfl 



with the band'carvin^ toots. Finally, a 
■mall holection mouldmg ii miternf round 
tb« framing for th« minors, whils th« 
backing itcd glass ar« retained by slips 
braddad on. 

OvtrmwiUl with Sbalvas and Turned 
Plllftrt. 

Figi. 103 to 10' are views of a hand- 
some oTermant'^ f chief fJMtnra being 
the turned , » uicb sqpjion the 

shelves. Tb' •■ - .ni »> .... •! flgum 

(Pigs. 196 »'* .■:ii, ■■« Li.'..-> ''.' whole 
of the co»"-' I "f.. iJf%.4,iit . .cii f tba 
detail fir '- 1 ■ c iiU) 's n . crfp- 

tive ti^■ ■ fciitUr li-'Terci- i hca 

in Uie it'\t "A .1 \^ he aiipt-rHur'/ r may 
be sai'r *ii,.t t'l rv.vp ni. i,-^; <d ex- 
treme .'oioi ■■%■< -1 ' matie -i o:'l| with 

dark \«ouU inonnlri , >ii '^e (^ge^ of the 
shelves. 

Hantins 0%crm ntel wi.i Cfrcular 
,**!.■ roi-. 

The overmantel shown by T\%. 211 
ma^ be made of pine, painted and enamelled 
white or a pate shacle of green, with the 
outer edges, ornamental lines, and edges 
of the shelves gilded. Fig. 213 shows 
the end elevation, and Fig. 214 a section 
through the mirror. The extreme width 
is 5 ft., and the height 5 ft. 1^ in. A full- 
sise drawing should first be made on sheets 
of blown or white lining paper parted 
together. To secure the exact shape, make 
a tracing of the left-hand half of Fig. 211. 
and draw hnes at right an^es to each 
other to form squares of about \ in. ; then, 
on the full-sise drawing, space out the 
same number of squares to occupy 2 ft. 6 in., 
this being half the width of the overmantel, 
and get the height in the same way. Th? 
iines in each corresponding square are 
then copied. Should a smaller size of 
overmantel be preferred, decide on the 
width required, and space out with the 
same number of squares as in the tracing. 
The wood should be about 1^ in. thick, 
the sizes of the various pieces being ob* 
tained from the full-size drawing. The 
top centre portion a (Fig. 211) is tenoced 
into the sides B as shown by the dotted 
lines on the right-hand side, the lower 



ifi 



M 




CABINETWORK AND JOINEBT. 



centre part o being treated in the same 
way. To make up the comers d, separate 
pieces are fitted. To receive these, the 
sides B should liave grooves about | in. 
deep and the same vidth as the mortices 
worked on their edgv.i. The comer pieces 
are then provided with a tongue to fit 



bottom at the joints, as shown by the 
dotted lines E, i, and a (Kg. 211). To 
accomplish this, a template or mould of 
thin wood or cardboard should be made 
from the working drawing; then, by 
placing the pattern on the timber, the 
shaped pieces are cut out of the board 




Tit. s«o.-Fnmt Elavatlon of CUiiuuy-plaM Onumnted with MoidiUiigs. 



ltd lJw.ri,V J-'" ?^'r' ,•■". "^r' '' "I"'"'*- The i,rominent portions of 

sC .^\t ^ ? ""«''''• " "^"^ ■""" ''"'' mortised. The whole frame is then 

!&Ji?k t '=™"'" "P^^'ag ^"t «o cramped together. After levelling the face 

In Cf "^l S' ■'"!."''^ •". *"''"' ''"'"'"l ^ """""^ ™ »■"! tk™ cut with 

to select well-seasoned wood, or it may a bows,.w, cleaning up with a spokeshave" 

rXdl^T''"/'*^',,-^ r™"."' file, and glasspape?. V outer's^, mly 

matenal may be egected by glumg the be bevelled as in a (Fig. 215), or hollowed 

promment parts of the sides, top, and with a gouge as in I iRg. 215) ThT 



OVERMANTELS AND CHIMNEY-PIECES. 



63 



marginal lines H (Fig. 211) and the diagonals 
(see Fig. 216) are formed with a small 
gougq or parting tool. The moulding which 
surrounds the mirror may now be glued 
on, and further fixed with screws driven 
through from the back ; it should be about 



are shown in Fig. 218, and a side elevation 
in Fig. 213. Figs. 218 and 219 are alterna- 
tive patterns for the shelves. The brackets 
are screwed from the back of the frame. 

Circular Mirror. — A plain glass mirror 
may be used for the centre ; but a bevelled 




Fif . 3S1.— End Elsra- Fig. 332.— HorisoBtal Ssotioii throngli ChlniMy- 
tion of Cbinui^pleoe, iMsee JambL 



li in. wide and | in. thick, and should 
project to form a |-in. rebate for the glass 
(see I, Fig. 214). The moulding is got out 
in curv^ sections, each section being 
jointed and butted against the next, and 
when all are glued on it is turned or carved. 
If carving is not desired, a bevelled edge 
(see Fig. 217) formed with a spokeshave 
may be substituted. The shelves and bracket 
are made of |-in. stuff. Flans of these 



one is much more effective, and to get the 
full benefit of the bevel, which should 
be 1^ in., the glass should measure only 
I in. more than the opening, thus taking 
up yV in. of the bevel all round. The mirror, 
which should be coated at the edges 
with lampblack, is then fixed in position 
with small triangular blocks k (Fig. 214) 
about IJ in. long. The blocks should be 
of such a thickness as to form supports 




for th« }-iii. wood back i, which is teound 
with thin nnwi driven in a slanting direc- 
tion mto the tame. The overmantel i> 
hied to the wall by means of brass plates 
screwed to wooden plugs. 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



wide, and H m. thick; the jamb, .re 
9 '"■ "'d' over all and the opMung i. 

the front elevation, and Rg. 221 the end 
elevation. Two boards a a (Fig 220 




rif. 2U.-TnM Elmtion of Ohtem.,.w«e ^n tm OtuMM. 



Chimney-piece Ornamented^ with 
Mouldings. 

The chimner-piec? shown bv Fii; S""!) 
13 not complicated, and it has m elective 
and substantial appearance. The dimensions 
are : height 4 ft. f, in. from hearth to top 

"iJl '', T'!**'"' * '*• * '"■ »«■■ 'lie jaml)4 
width of f-ieie and shelf together 1 ft 
i in. ; the shelf is 5 ft. 10 in. long, 11 in' 



and shown in section in Fig. 222) form tin' 
jambs ; these tre 7J in. broad (without the 
tongue), and thej- extend from the top 
of the base to the under side of the shelf. 
Ihe panelled frieze (shown in section in 
Fig. 22.3) js made to fit Utwcen the iambs 
and IS neatly jointed and fixed with dowels 
and glue ; there is only 3 in, of the joint 
feen (<. Fig. 220), the rest of it being 
hidden behind the bracket b. The panelled 



OTERUANTELS AND CHIMNEY-PIECES. 



frame shows a margin of 1 in. all round ; 
the top rail is wider by 2 in. than the 
margin shows, to accommodate the neck 
moulding (see section Fig. 223), and the 
bottom rail requires an extra width of 



form the ends of the chimney-piece (see 
section, Fig. 222, and side elevation. 
Fig. 221). The plinth or base of the 
jambs is a solid piece of wood, repre- 
sented by the outer lines of Fig. 222, 10^ in. 




TtMoa of emumy- ^ CwMMHiy yrw 

piecR with fw- on Lte«' 4 f 



rig. MS.— 

B«tiuB tad df 



Omamsnt. 



(Hg ««•■ 



31 ill., and i& to&^^K>H into th.r mouldin); 
E ; this rail can l>e made id two pieres 
if morp convenient, as shown la Fig ^23. 
and tht! stilea arc also kept the extra width 
required to pnss behind the brackets b. 
Two pieces d, 2^ in. broad, the same lengA 
as the jambs, are tongued into tl»m to 



riff. in.~Toy 

Coraer of 
Jambt. 



ttfoad, 7 in. high, aa4 4^ in. thick. For 
tiziag this a stump lAould be allowed to 
proj^r up bebiwi the jambs, tilting the 
■pa<'»- F (Pig. T2'>). 

The Mouldings. — The montding e is 
planted round, mitercd at the ao^es. and 
stop^Msi againiit the block or ^se ; it 



Nilii 



m 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



muit be well glued nnd angle-blocked 
behind, a> shown in section. The moulding 
H is planted upon the frieie and jambs, 
"hewing a 2-in. margin between it and the 
moulding E. A break of 1 in. is made 
over the top of the moulding M (Fig. 234), 
which helps the appearance greatly. This 
moulding is glued on, and screwed from 
the back of jambs and frieze. The base 
moulding n (Fig. 324) butts on the square 
edge of the moulding H, and returns round 
ench side of the jambs, as N (Fig. 221). 
The mouldings M (Fig. 224) and p (Fig. 224) 
butt on H, and are returned on the ends 
in the same way ; all are glued and screwed 
from the back of the jambs. The brackets 
B supporting the shelf are 9J in. long, 5 in. 
broad, end 5 in. thick (Fig. 23.5 shows 
part enlr.rged elevation and a section of 
the edge) ; they have an open space of 1 in. 
in the centre, and need not be solid. The 
easiest way is to make two brackets, 3 in. 
in thickness, and glue a 1-in. strip, shaped 
as shown, between them, at the top only ; 
the part plan of the edge shows the fluting. 
These brackets are fitted between the 
shelf and the moulding h. and are glued 
and screwed from the back of the frieze ; 
a 2J-in. screw is also put through the 
open space in the centre of the bracket 
into the shelf ; the shelf is also well screwed 
and angle-blocked from the inside. The 
neck moulding o, shown in section and 
elevation, butts on the brackets on each side, 
and returns on the sides of the jambs. The 
sizes of the mouldings are as follows : — 
Neck. moulding o, 2 in. by IJ in. ; mould- 
mg p, IJ in. by j in. ; moulding M, 3 in. 
by i in. ; base moulding N, 3 in. by 1 in • 
moulding h, 2 in. by 1 in. ; moulding k, 
3 in. by 1} in. ' 



Chimney-piece with Fret Ornament. 

The chimney-piece shown in front eleva- 
tion by Fig. 336 and in side elevation by 
Pig. 227 is suitable for a large room furn- 
ished in oak in the Oassic style. The 
fret ornament sunk in square in the 'rieze 
breaks up the large plain surface ol the 
deep frieze-board, and harmonises with 
the stopped sinking mnning round the 
interior edge of the under portion. The 
•centre piece, shaded dark, is preferably 



inlaid with ebony or a rich-coloured wskmt 
accoiding to taste. The plinth blocks are 
round-faced, as indicated by the dotted 
line in Fig. 228, the jamU being double- 
dovetailed, housed in solid, encept the 
front edge, and well glued and screwed 
to blocks. The cornice above the frieze 
IS dentiUed, and finished with a mantel- 
shelf as shown. Pig. 228 represents a 
section on line a b (Pig. 226), and shows 
how the fneze-board is tongued to the 
under portion and also into the cornice • 
the cornice at the top being tongued to 
the r -antelshelf. Fig. 329 is a conventional 
view from the back, showing the details 
of the plinth blocks, and also showing how 
the jambs are cut and continued up till 
they reach the under side of the mantel- 
shelf, into which they are tenoned about 
f in., the cornice being glue-blocked to 
this extension as shown. Between the 
two extensions two othor pieces are partly 
housed m, and are well screwed to the 
fneze-board and to the under portion 
These also tenon into the shelf, and are 
blocked in the same way. The cornice is 
mitered at the comers and well secured 
the comer block being glued in as shown! 
The mantelshelf is half rounded on the 
front edge, and ploughed for the cornice 
tongue, the ends having tongued to them 
a return piece, which is blind-nailed and 
glued to the main shelf (see detail Fig. 330) 
The under portion of the chimney-piece 
18 double-tenoned, and the margin mould 
18 worked in the solid as shown in Fig. 231, 
the ends of this mould mnning across the 
tops of the jambs to mitre with the re- 
turns that break out from the upright 
moulds on the jambs as detailed in Pig. 332. 
The moulds on the jambs are preferably 
worked solid, but can be planted on— that 
18, glued, and screwed from the back. 
The break at the comer, shown enlarged 
in Fig. 233, is worked in the solid, or built 
up in two pieces, to , onceal the end grain 
of the overhang of the jamb underneath 
(see Fig. 22!l). At the top, also, a piece 
must either be planted or left on the 
bottom external comers of the frieze- 

^"t <",'' ^'«- --')■ "^^^ «"'"« togetier 
should be done with extreme care, and 
the screwing, gluing, and blocking should 



OTEBUANTELS AND CHIMNEY-PIECES. 



67 



be thoroughly workmanlike. The mantel- 
piece may be screwed to the cornice 
with brass screws filed flash, or may be 
blind-nailed. Half of the fret ornament 
should be drawn full size on stifi 
tracing paper, and reversed to mark the 
other half. Where the fret band crosses 
on the diagonal lines, the sinking should 
be somewhat deepened. Alternatively, the 



design might be executed in whitewood, 
enamelled white or cream, with the sinkings 
and centrepiece finished in gold loaf. The 
scale of Figs. 226, 227, and 229 is | in. 
to 1 ft. ; that of Fig. 22d is 3 in. to 1 ft. ; 
and that of Fig. 233 is half full size ; while 
Figs. 230, 2:U, and 232 are reproduced 
to the scale of 1} in. to 1 ft. The above 
scales are approximate. 




■ U-i'O.-J Rff. SM, Pig. 2S0. 

ngi. t34aiid 339. —Front and End Elsvattont of ^bilBBay-piMe taui OrermftBteL 



( 



II 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



Chimncy.plccc and Ovemumtel. 

The cliimMy-pi«!« and OTetnunttl tliown 
by Rg.. 234 and 236 wai dnigned and 



iheU nmi level witi the top of the dado 
rail fixed round the room, the Motion of 
the moulding on th* edge of the mantel- 
shelf correaponding with the moulding 





Fl(. U7.-Eiiluie4 fMt noat DmUen of 
OrmimnM at A (Flf. >M). 




Plj. aM.-EiUaij«l OataU of Ornmastel at 

c ini. n«). 




T\t. l».-Eiilai|a« iMUeB •( Onnnaiitol 
niler at B (Hj . tM). 



Fig. 33«.-s«ctloii of II|>pn Part of CUauuy- 
pioco and Ovonnaatol. 

executed for a study. The material u 
wainscot oak of selected figure, and fumi- 
gated to match the furniture. The total 
height IS 9 ft. IIJ in., and the width .5£t. 1 in 
ex.lusive of projection. Full details ani 
shown by Figs. 236 to 242. The mantel- 



Flj. 24e.-Flia of OTonnaatoI Bboll 

on the upper part of the dado rail. The 
walls of the study are covered with an 
ingrain paper of dark apple-green tint ; 
the picture rail is of oak ; the cornice roand 
the ceiling is tinted to match the paper 
and woodwork. 



OVEKMANTELS AND CHIMNEV-PIECE8. 



Chimatj'piwt. — Th« chimnev-pi«cfi t« wn- 
•tmcted of IJ-in. w«in«cot, with moiild«d 
hm and twin tnuses ; these arc shaped 
•« shown, with sunk moulded panels in 
the shaped part. A small astraftal mould- 
ing, j in. wide, is housed into and mitered 



n«. Ml.-Pirt Vsrtical lection of OmmaatsI 
Tap at I (Fig. 334). 

round the truss at the springing of the 
shaped part, a space of 1 in. being left 
between this and the neck moulding. 
The moulding is IJ in. wide, and is housed 
and mitered round the truss. A space 
of 4J m. is left between the truss and the 
cap, the latter being formed with a mould- 
ing 2} in. wide, prepared for and carved 
into an egg-and-dart moulding support- 
ing the mantel-shelf, which is IJ in. thick. 
The space between the neck and cap mould- 
ing on the truss is ornamented by five 
i-in. reedings with J-in. projection, the 
space of 3 in. being divided equally. The 
lower moulding or plinth forms the base. 
The frieze between the mantel-shelf and 
marginal moulding is planted on the face 
of the frame ; this is swelled and returned 
at the ends, the returns showing the same 
as the face; it stands on the top edge 
of the marginal moulding filed round the 
opemng to fireplace. Sienna marble shps 
are fimd between the oak moulding and 
the stove. The moulding on the mantel- 
shelf is formed partly on the shelf itself, 
the 2-in. thickness being made up by an 



«» 

additional moulding tongued to it ; this 
makes the edge bold, and also acts as a 
clamp at the ends to prevent the shelf 
warping. 

Ovennuitel.— The overmantel is 5 ft. 
10 m. high by 5 ft. wide, and is fitted with 
six shelves, three on each side. These six 
shelves are carried by scrolled brackets 
and square-turned and reeded intermediate 
pillars, and are shaped and moulded on 
the edges, the diminished end finishing 
or the muntin. A plain 1-in. by J-in. 
nllet projecting J in. is fixed into a groove 
in the muntin. The fillet is cut away 
where the shelves come, to allow them to 
fit up to the frame, which is put together 
and formed into open panels, the dimen- 
Mons being as given in the front elevation. 
A boleetion moulding is mitered round 
the panel, and fixed to receive the glass, 
which is of plain pohshed silvered plate ; 




Tit. Ml.-Eatar|ad DotaU of Mantelpiooa 
and PUast«r (see E, Fig. ass). 

bevelling was objected to on account of the 

?rismatic cokmrs which frequently show. 
he frieze and cornice are built up as 
shown ; the lower part of the frieze has 
a small moulding as a necking, the plain 
edge being relieved by small scrolled aprons 



» 




CABINETWOBK AND JOINERT. 




---l^^^-^fe?^; :- 


8 — 

i"- -Si; 


"C^--" 


- -- J- — 


-sr-'^jji- — 


A^r 


*3i 


mm 


^--::^_;..-.:^. 


,— 


-=^^^'' ■~^;:= 


=^^ 


-= — ^. 


--^=-^^ 



FI(.2M. 



n(.Ma. 



OVERHANTEUI AND ORIUNET-PIECES. 




i: 



rf 



n 



OABIVETWORK AND JOINERY. 



<l»d to it. The wffit it foniuii with • 
piece of dlvend pl*t«-gliM fltted into t 
•mall moulded Inme, which ii rappotted 
on a moulded Ulat groored into it ai 
ahown. 



Chlmncy-plw* and Ovemwiitol butd 
on Rmalnance Dwlgn. 

Figi. 213 to 247 ahow a chimnej-pieca 
and orermant«l of Rensiuance character. 
It ahouU be executed in dark maboEanr 
or walnut. Kg. 21.) ahowa a front eleva- 
tion; Pig. 244 a half-plan below the 
mantelpiece; Fig. 245 a half-plan above 
the mantelpiece; Fig. 24« an end eleva- 
tion ; Fig. 247 a vertical aection through 
the centre; Fig. 248 an enUrged aection 
of the cornice, etc. ; Fig. 249 an enlarged 
elevation of the mantelpiece and details 
of the mouldings; Fig. -JM an elevation 
of the head and jamb of the chimney- 
piece showing the method of making the 
joint ; Fig. 2.51 an enlarged detail of the 
phnth of the chinmey-piece ; and Fig. 282 
an enlarged section at a (Fig. 243). The 

following is the required cutting list : 

Cutting List.— Overmantel : Mantel back, 
two stiles, 2 ft. H in. by 4} in. by U in. ; 
two muntina, 2 ft. 4) in. by 7 in. by 1* in. • 
three bottom rails, 1 ft. 2 in. by 4} in' 
by IJ in. ; three top rails, 1 ft. 2 in. by 
4} in. by IJ in. ; three pieces of deal to 
joint on these, 1 ft. 2 in. by 4^ in. by IJ in. ; 
three pieces of silvered ' plate with |-in. 
bevelled edges, 1 ft. 3 in. by ^ in. by 
{ in.; one fcieie, 3 ft. H in. by 1} in. 
by f in.; four piUsters, 1 ft. 9} in. by 
2i in. by ) in. ; one cornice, 5 ft. 4 in. by 
5j( in. by IJ in. ; one cover-board, deal, 
4 ft. 4 in. by 3} in. by j in. ; one plinth 
piece, 2 ft. 2 in. by 4} in. by { in. ; one 
piece for necking, 2 ft. 2 in. by IJ in. b^ 
j in. Chimney-piece : One mantel-board, 
ft. 4 J in. by 11 in. by 2 in. ; one head- 
piece, 4 ft. by 4i in. by 1 in. ; piece of 
deal to joint on 6} in. wide ; two plinth 
pieces, 7 in. by 84 in. by ij in. ; 10-ft. 
run of 2 in. by ij-in. echinus moulding; 
two jambs 3 ft. 9 in. by 8^ in. by 1 in. ; 
one bed-mould, 5 ft. 3 in. by 8 in. by 2 in ' 
two plinth blocks, 8i in. by 4^ in. by 1 J in ■ 
7ft. run of 'J-in. by j-in. double ogei! 
moulding. 



CoMtructot ol CMiwH7.pi«e« «d Owf- 
nwnljl.— The jamba and head tn framed 
together first aa ahown in Fig. 280, a pair 
of /,-in. atub ttnona being uaed. These 
MB well glued and screwed Inm the back. 
The ogee border moulding is rebated aa 
shown in Fig. 247 and the Same grooved to 
receive it. This ia fitted tight and glued 
in. The plinth blocks are glued and 
screwed from the backs, as is also the 
carved ovolo moulding. The mantel- 
piece has the end mouldings returned in 
the Bolid, and is stiflened with three |-in. 
iron bolts as shown in the aection (Fig. 247). 
These may be left projecting 3 in., and mav 
be cemented into the wall. The piece 
IS secured to the head with screws counter- 
sunk from the top. A |-iu. groove should 
be made in the under side to receive the 
tongue of the bed-mould, and thia must be 
stopiMd 'J in. from each end. The bed- 
mould IS fixed to the back first with screws. 
and the mantel dropped on it. The return 
ends of the bed-mould are mitered on, and a 
cross tongue should bo grooved into the 
joints; at the back end the moulding 
finishes partly against the face and partiv 
running over the edge ; alternatively the 
carved beads may be got out separately and 
sunk into grooves J in. deep in the bed- 
mould. The back of the overmantel is 
framed up in one piece, the inner stiles 
being shams ; they ate slot-mortised over 
the rails. All the tenons are stopped and 
screwed from the back. The framing is 
double-checked, once for gkss and once 
for the wood panel, as shown in the detail 
Fig. 232. The piUsters are all sunk 
i m. into the back, and glued in ; the two 
outside ones should be rebated as shown, 
•r.d a good joint made at the outside 
Ikots finng them. The plinth and neck- 
og should be mitered round and fixed. 
The plinths should be sunk in J in., and 
glued on, the fronts first, and allowed 
to dry, then the end pieces fitted and 
glued to them. The outside pilasters re- 
quire their neckings and plinths to be 
carried on flush with the back side of the 
framing. The frieze is next fitted. This 
is simply glued on the face of the framing 
on the top of the pilasters. The cornice 
18 worked out of a parallel piece of stuff 



OVEBMANTELB AND OHMNEt-PIECEB. 



^\nnn nn[^ 



lannijiiz 



(zzmnEnnzzi 



I \n!i:.iiM. 





i 

i 



ii 



m 



Plf. iM.-EtoT.«Mi PU« of OUBOMjiiMt "Ml 0»p»o«id OwnunMl 



MKIOCOPY IfSOLUTION TBT CHART 

(ANSI and ISO TEST CHART No. 2) 



1.0 



1.1 



i|22 |Z5 
'Hi |2.2 

116 m^m 
US 1 2:0 



1:25 II u 11.6 



A 



/APPLIED IK/MGE inc 



CABINETWORK AXD JOIXEEY. 



as shown in Fig. 248, and fixed with screwg 
from the hack. It is lipped ,», in. over 
the frieze, and rebated out f in. for the 
cover- board. 

Chimney-piece and Cupboard 
Overmantel. 

The design for a mantel fitment shown 
by Fig. 25.3 comprises a chimney-piece 
with framed jambs supporting elliptic 
shelves in the corners, and an ogee central 
shelf below the mantel-board. The over- 
mantel contains a bevel-edged mirror and 
a panelled back, the wings being fitted 
with cupboards having glazed doors ; the 
cupboards surmount shelves which rest 



shaped ends of the cupboards are boused 
i in. into the mantel-board, as shown in 
Figs. 254 and 236; the bottom shelf of 
the cupboard is housed into the standards, 
the moulded edge running across the 
front and mitering with a return piece 
planted on the face of the standard. Tae 
tops run over the standards, and are m ded 
m the solid, the standards being h, ised 
mto them end nailed. The mirroi is 
framed into the back as shown in Figs. 
235 and 238, being fixed with sprigged 
fillets. Should the wall be at all damp, 
it would be advisable to brad on an addi- 
tional deal back, but in ordinary cases 
painting is sufficient. Fig. 259 shows a 




Pig. ast-Half Seotiraal Plans of CUmney-plHe and Capboani OvermantsL 



on the cupboard ends, which are shaped 
into brackets. The size of the opening 
for the fireplace is 3 ft. 4 in. by 3 ft. in., 
and the outside dimensions of the fitment 
are— Height, 6 ft. 6J in. ; width, 4 ft. 11 in. ; 
greatest projection, 12 in. The design 
would look equally effective in fumigated 
oak, or yellow pine stained and pohshed. 
Fig. 254 represents a plan showing on the 
left a half section through A A (Fig. 233), 
and on the right a half section through 
B B (Fig. 233) ; the dotted lines indicate 
shelves and mouldings above the line of 
section. Fig. 2.55 is a vertical section 
on Une c c (Fig. 254), and shows the general 
construction. Fig. 256 shows an enlarged 
detail section through the cupboard and 
parts above mantel-board. Fig. 257 shows 
a horizontal section of the same parts. 
The doors, which are made of 1-in. stuff, 
dovetailed at the angles, are rebated and 
moulded with a j-in. by ,',->n- lamb's- 
tongue. The back framing is of 1-in. 
stuff, with J-in. sunk square panels. The 



vertical section through the base and 
surbase of the jamb ; the surbase is formed 
with a hollow boxing, having |-in. panelled 
framing in front, 1-in. plain ends, and 
the 1-in. jamb at the back. A J-in. board 
forms the top, oversailing and forming 
part of the ovolo moulding planted round 
the front and ends. A j-in. by 8-in. 
ovolo moulding phnth forms the base, 
and this is screwed and blocked to the 
framing. Fig. 200 represents a horizontal 
section through the surbase, and shows 
two methods of construction, that on the 
left being suitable for painted work, that 
on the right for polished hard woods. 
Fig. 258 gives a sectional elevation (to a 
somewhat smaller scale than the other 
details) of the parts immediately below 
the mantel-board, E indicating the central 
bracket, f the shaped side of the jamb, 
and o the head Hning. Fig. 281 illustrates 
the method of fastening the head lining 
to the jambs by a slot dovetail ; the shelf 
H (Fig. 258), being housed both in thf- 



OVEEMANTEIS AND CHIMNEY-PIECES. 7; 

It' Vnn? I'f"' T* ''f, °°*''','^ '""''' "' -5^' 231. and 235 are reproduced to a 

h^^TAZ7C:^' T "' " 'ir 'f '^ °' 1 '"• '" ' "■• *•■» detaiU to » scale 
lorwaM and clear the back lining while of 3 n. to I (t., with the exoention of Vw 
the latter la being driven into place ; after- 238, which is to the scale of 2?n to I ft^' 




rig. ae«.-Detai: of 

OTeimantel Cupboard. 




Fig. 268.~8flctioii through Mautel- 
board and Shelf. 





Fig SBT.-Half Plui of Oremantol Cupboard. 



wards the shelf is knocked back into the 
groove and nailed through the jambs, 
the comer shelf hiding the nail holes. 
The jamb D and the bracket E should be 
dovetail grooved into the mantel-board 
to keep It from casting; and the stufi 
for this board should be speciallv selected, 
ana cut radial to the annual rings. Figs. 



Fig. 2B6.— Vertical Section 
on Line C C (tig. 204; ^l 
Cbinmey-piece and Cup- 
board Overmantel. 






it f 



■ill' if 
' i ; I' 



CABWETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



9-ft. Chimney-piece for Drawing, 
room. 



the 8ide of tk ?"""' »''=''''■' ">rough 
"■■ng tte method of connecting them ; 




n«- a»9.-Ba» of Chinmny-pieo, Junb. 



M^i, J half-sectional plan through the 
cupboard above the mantel-board fKg 
fbo, a s,m,hr half - plan through the 
Ztlr'-- ^K^'^' » W'-Plan of the 
Z of T'"" '• ^%-^'' " =»'=«■"' •'■rough 

larU det.n"'^'V-''«'V-"« ""^ *i9, en- 
larged detail section through centre of 

thtuX'' '*'■■ ^f -"»• ■"letaTStion 
trough overmantel and chimney fr,n.™ 

fl,!' i' ""l "'^^hon of the top com^. of 
and the method of mitering the bars ; Fig, 




"K. a.o.-s««„ ., oi.imn.y.ptoc. 8„ta.. 

jJ.ped'Vvl.Xrpit.e^X-lit 

being moulded i^ The »oM and The '""'''' 
panrfs square ,„nk. T^Xl',^ l^^l 

i^'^^^.ed-Vp-V-.^^^J 
ihe overmantel back ia fram.j ■ 
piece (see Fie "wf ti,! ""^i,"? "■ ™« 
being donbirreba't'd or^gut'lltT 
aZnd'tV""^" '" !■«■ ^Tthe m'ultg ■ 
face TU °'™' ^™K P'»« on hf 




Hit. ».i.-D.t.ii ., jouit u, Chtav.pi,c. (.., 
D, Hy. a»a). 

round the square co umns which .t.„j 
diagonally, a, shown in the^n (%■ 2m? 
This position causes the salient adtre to 



OVERSIAXTELS AXD CHIMXEY-PIECES. 77 

appear as a straight line in the elevations, finiala. The sides of the cupboards are 

Ihe columns are earned through the housed into the soffit of the cornice to 

cornice, finishing flush with ihe under side which ther are nailed as shown m Fig 

of the cover board. They are bored to 271 ; a dovetail tongue, worked on their 

receive a ^in. dowel, turned on the sphe ical lower end; , fitting into a similar groove 




Ftg. »2. 
Hgi. W2 ud »es.-Froirt and End Elevatloni of Drawlnj-room Chiimiy-piaoi. 



Fig. 36S. 




"«■ »«*• Fig. S6S. 

Fig.. 2(4 and 261 -Half Boriiontal Beotions of Chimnoy-pises on Lines B B and C C (Pig. 262). 



■ t 



111 

III I 

nil 



)|i| 



r 



I — '-^y- — -fr '"- — i' •»■- 



Fig. 2>e.— Half Horizontal Section of Chimnay- 
piece on Line D D (Fig. 262). 



m 

U I 



CABLVETUOBK A.VD JOLVERY. 



i 



-,or-; 



A 



Pig. a«7.-Oro» g„ti„„ 

of 01iimi.y-piece on Lin. 

•*A (PIj. 884). 




Fig.. 271 and 272.-Enl!irg«l 

D.tail, of Comw ,f Chinm.y- 

f'"' Cnplward Door. 









rij. 268. 



.^ 



Pig.. 268 and 299 - , 

Enlarged Vertical Cro., 

Section, through 

Chimney-piece. 




"g- >7a -Central 

Vertical Section of 

Chinmey-piec 




Fig. 273. -Section 

•"d Plan of 

Chimney-piece 

Cupboard Side. 



■ f 
i f 



OVERMANTELS AND CHIAIXEY-PIECES. 



in the mantel-board, serves to secure them 
t this. The central portion of the mantel* 
board is lined out, to increase its apparent 
thickness, as shown in Fig. 270 ; the wings 




Tig. 274— Elevation and Plan of Chimn^y-plece 
Cupboard Sid«. 

are fitted with shaped apron pieces, 
blocked solid over the dwarf columns. 
These colunms are dowelled at each end, 
are turned square, and have volutes carved 
on each angle of the cap. It will be seen 
that the brackets supporting the lower 
shelf are housed into the latter, and they 
are secured to the back with screws, their 



lower ends running down to the floor, 
where the plinth breaks around them as 
shown in Figs. 265 and 269. The upper 
shelves are shaped elliptical, as shown 
in Fig. 366, and are housed into the columns 
at back and front. The cupboard doors 
are sunk f in. below the sides, and are 



Fig. a7B.— Moulding on 

Edge of CliUnnay-plece 

BrackeU. 



Fig. 376.— Moolding on 

Edge of Chimney-piece 

SheWei. 



hung with the knuckle of the hinge flush 
with the edge of the aide, so that the door 
will open back clear of the edge. The 
marginal bars in the door are dovetailed 
at the angles, the moulding cut away to 
the mitre line, and the angle bars saddled 
over the square, as indicated bv the dotted 
line in Fig. 271. Figs. 262 "to 2G7 are 
reproduced to ^ in. to 1 ft., and Figs. 268 
to 275 2 in. to 1 ft. (approximately). Fig. 
270 ia one-third full size. 



11^ 




I; 



! i h 




BOOKCASES. 



Simple Bookcaie. 



-d the depth Ctckti'/;/, "■• 

parts Lt°I7ded\frt.K'hV''r"° 

plinth ,. ,,„ n,it:j IJtt -^,:d' 
o?tff '.rr^li' t?1 '"•■» a pSe 
round. ThedooM wr ""'""""'"^d 

and rest o? ;; J.T fi,£ "It Tf''' 
when fitted in thi, -, "" shelves, 

one, 2 ft. II in hv 1 1 ;„ V ^, f '"v *"' "des ; 
one 2 ft. ll°n bv 11 ■• \*"i-'"'"'«om 

^^tri^ini^"!?*"'^"^: 

by 3ft bv i ,^'' ; '■'^'''f : on". 8 ft. 



Spi^4'^}?'i5'";'^Ji?-. for comic,; 
panels: fourpiece, 3ft V,„* T' i°? '^°" 

t«o Pieces,7ft.- of in'bf/ftTin"'; 

&'eSt'h£^^,■^??'V-'^^^^^ 

bolts I four pairaof :,,Tl, '° ..'"'"■''"'''d 

two do»n ?rtn*-'s'^;tr?o'n\''drn^ 

l:m.No.7s..ew.;a„dilb.W|"rprel 

Coiutruclion of Simple BookcM-Tb. 

ends are dovetailed or rebatrf t/Z. -^ 
tie top, and the hntt„,» j *° "°c'™ 
on the inside Sin ;.„^" ™''' »" 8«>oved 
and »lToftr- ^ *° ""'"" 'bo bottom, 
shelf ThV ton '"■ 7v° "'«'™ the tabTe 
prepa Jttfti^»'lev^/t.?h '^'^ "', 

mitre arrch"'e?d"<:'r:^^!rfhrt:«'' *" 

tarn mouldings as .ho^K^%^%T 

a°STo7 '^* 2*' " -rL,^o: 

"aybenlS-T Ji""^'"™ ""-'i-g 

mortised and tenoned together, and 



BOOKCASES. 




Flf. 9n>.-Tw(toml iMUoit 

of BookoaM CondM ind 

Top Part. 



Fig. 977. 



Fig. 17S. 



Flgi m ud J7».— FrOBl EloraUon ud TorUoal BoeUon of 



m 




^m 




¥ 



Fig. J7».— PKTt Horijontal Boction of Simple 
Bsokeaae. 



Fig. Ml.— SwUoi . of 
BookesM Pllitli, ate. 




a 



V: k 



^1. 



! 



Ilie iippor iloon „re rol„,t«l to revive 

""' . "■■'" "ilh P«n.l pin,. Fig. i.sn. , 
section of ttie plinll,. «• - i i» a 



CABINETWORK AXD JOLVERY. 



;rur'«:ft„tU';?tH^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

nn,l fl,.,h with each end r„n (^ "^4" Vjf 
These hooks hang on roller. • • '' 



nnd are 



, Jlf. JM.- Method 
0' PlJtliit 81iel»„ 
•nil RolUr Baarlngi 
of Stfltional Book. 




Hg- a8j.-a«iM»l V1.W of SeotlomU 
Bookcaie. 

Sectional Bookcase. 

The bookcase shown bv Fig. 2f>2 is con 
structed in sections, each part being a 
cnse m .tself, 50 that more or fewer sections 
7L "'".i "i "?''"^- The chief feature 
ot this method of construction is that the 
parts such as the doors, ends, shelves, 
and backs, are interchangeable. Xo nails 
screws, or dowels are used ; the shelves 
have ma«eable iron ends, with tongues at 
top and bottom, which fit into the grooves 



Tie. M4.-Enljrg.d 8«Uoa through Iat,nn«U.t. 
Part of Sectional Bookoaie. 

easily removed by lifting off the roller. To 
open a door in order to reach a book from 
the case, the door is raised by the knobs 

the case sliding along on the roller and 
steel guide B. When the case is not in use" 
he door is withdrawn and allowed to fal 
into Its onginal position. Fig 003 .1, ' 
t e door lying on tL roUer ; al'£ tifmShTd 
of fi.\,ng the end of the steel guide The 
fixing of the opp„,ite end i, «,eni Fig. 2^ 
liic backs are dovetailed to the ends ao as 



BOOKCASES. 



f:!| 



to sUdo in or out an desiriKl. An enlarffed 
Hction throuxh tho Ijottom Mctinn is 
preaenteii by Fig. 2>*ti. 

Cabinet Bookcaw. 

A cabinet bookcase ia shown by Fig. iSl. 
The finished sites of timWrs are ; Top, 




Fig. ass. —Enlarged Bectlon through Upper 
Part of Beotlo&al Bookcase. 

3 ft. 3 in. by 1 ft. 4 in. ; outside ends. 
3 ft. 11 in. by 1 ft. i in. ; two shelves and 
bottom, 2 ft. 11} in. by 1 ft. 1} in. ; two 
inside ends on each side of door, 1 ft. (ij in. 
hy 1 ft. 1} in. ; and the shaped span-rail 
beneath the bottom, 2 ft. llj in. by (i in. 
wide. All are Oi 1-in. stufl, which should 
finish about jj in. thick. Two bottoms 
beneath the drawers are 10} in. long bv 
1 ft. IJ in. deep, of }-in. stuff. The door 
stiles and rails are of l}-in. stuff, and tin- 
panel is of J-in. stuff. The shaped liaik 
above the top is of 1-in. stuff, and 'J ft. 1 in. 
long by 1 ft. 5 in. high. The shelf, 2 ft. 1 1 in. 
by in., and the brackets beneath. !> in. 
by 6 in., are also of 1-in. stuff. The drawer 
fronts are 1 in. thick, and the sides and 
bottoms are of J-in. stuff. The back of 
the carcase consists of three muntins. 
3 ft. C in. by 3J in., of 1-in. stuff, and the 
backs between are :i ft, ii in. lonff and 
anout 1 ft. 2 in. wide and J in. thick. ' First 
mark out half the front elevation and 



the end, full sin. The height of tho door 
compartment is 1 ft. il in., and tho rocesws 
along the side are IDJ in. wide, and the 
drawer front* are 4 in. high. Tho top 
projects 1 ., n round. The woi«l must 
first tw plane*, to thickness, length, an.i 
wiclth. The ..,1) has an nvolo moulding a 
(Fig. 2At) worked on the front and end 
edges, or if this is inconvenient, a bevcllnl 
edge B (Fig. 288) will bo suitable. Xcxt 
groove the ends >, in. deep for tho two 
shelves and bottom, but take care that the 
Itrooves stop } in. short of the front eilges 
of the ends, so that they will not show 
on the front. The back edges of the enils 
A {Fig. 289) also require rebating to receiv 
the side muntins. In the two ling shelves 
plough J-in. grooves, } ir from tho front 
edges, to receive strips E (Fig. 290), on 
which are glued the leather valances which 
hang over the books. The shaped span- 
rail beneath the bottom 's also grooved 
or housed in | in. deep and stands J in. 
from the face of the ends. In putting to- 
gether, first fix the two long shelves and 
bottou with nails or thin 2}-in, screws 




Fig. 286.- Enlarged Section through Lower Fart 
of Soctiooal Bookcase. 

next the inside ends and bottoms under 
the (Iraweis ; and finally the top, nailing 
it through into tbn ends "from the top side. 
T' e shaped span-rails under the drawers 
are fitted between the ends and then secured 



III 

i ' 



u 



CABIXETWORK AND JOIXERY. 




*mwi 



Hg. U». -Orom lactlou 
thnnili CtUiet Book- 

»M Top. 



H». m.-Omnl v>n of Obtain Bwkom 




J? Ttg. «•».— »Mtton of Oblul 

*«*M« Carcase Back 



f 



Hr. >U.— Strip for 
XiteUior Value* of 
OaUiut Bookouo. 



B0OKCA8E8. 



M 



with nails, Ut thrm itand back ,V in. 
The munt .u of the bacic may now hx Sxnl, 
the ahelvee beinn cut away a little at B 
(Fig. Iff)), and for the centre muntin c. 
The latter and the «ide» are ftrooved to 
receive the thin backi n, which alide op 
from below and are screweil where they 
come over the ahelvei and liottom. The 
»ide» of the drawers are lap-dovetailed to 
the fronta ai in Fig. 2!»1, and. instcail of 
weakening the tides by grooving for Imttom*. 



i-in. slips » {Figa. i'.il and 202) are r.rooved 
and the top eilge « ii half-rounded. The 
drawer Imttoms are pushed along the 
grooves and into the groove h (Fig. 2«l) 
of the drawer fronts. The door stiles and 
rails are 1} in. wide without moulding, 
and are mortised and tenoned together. 
The lines J (Fig. 211.1) on the panel are cut 
with a gouge, and the oval fan-like pattern 
is carved to the ».i tion shown. Figs. M 
to 2!W show the mntho<l of marking the 






k 



riff. »S.~Door PUMl of 
O&Unvt BooVaaM. 



Flff. SffC— Patient for OaUiiat Booke&M 
Spait-nlL 



Fig. 294.— Pattern for Shaped 
Back of Cablntt Bookuaia 



jf 





""s. 


~^. 


\ 




"2 


[" — 


T 





Fig. Sft7. Fi|-. 3V6. 

rtga. wi and nt.— Pattanu for Catlatt Bookoaai. Braektti. 



rig. «»•.-- Section of CaWnet 
Beokeass Door. 




I H t. 



designs for brackets and span-rails If 
the mortismg a.d tenoning for a door as 
Fg^299 cannot be done, make the d„°r 
of a piece of Lin. stufi, with two battens 
behind .t to prevent it warping, and work 
a hollow to take the placT of ToulZg 

the centre of the tc:.'„tThtu'girTre 



CABIXETWOKK AXD JOINERY. 



wE ^ ?""=■ *'"' construction 

would be somewhat different, as S 
could not then be used 




H« 300-E.voMnj; Bookoe win 1^,,^ 
Pineli. 

J™'^^ftrt?:ti--Ti: 

^-'i^'nTcrr-i-dfr 
S^Sw^^iSfdi— 

<-abinet would also lo„k^.e,v%itm™e 



Revolving Bookcase with Inlaid 
Panels. 

3M t S'°''^''l?. 1!°°'"'°*' ''">™ bv Figs 
300 to 303 might be constructed in EnS 
oak but almost any hardwood would kofc 

3o1;„?™°''t;" '""'""'^d '""y by F^.s 
304 to JOa It consists chiefly of two Mrt s 
the revolving case and the support "rs^nd 
J> "■"?<• '«' tke centre box of the case 
should be grooved and tongued toLther 
as sh„»^ in the horizontal seS. Tefor" 
fitting together, the insides should be ro 
bated at the top to receive the coUar which 

borcd'Toln? * '"• '^''^- '"«'» bo e 
*l, V j""**" 'be centre a trifle larger 
than the diameter of the pole (see X m) 
Its object IS to keep the S^se ™^* Z,, 1 

-bft2::^rt^sf^H 
s;}^ih-^^tir"l^£ 

r:A^b^"Lfcr« 

two shelves only are illustrated, but'other^ 
may be added to suit requirements S 
to tr^'fuT ^ S'-^i before fastening 
1° 'b\box but the shelves in the centre 

].„!■ J- ., ."'' "" screwed round the 
box directly above and beneath the shelvl, 
to form additional support and to prev«'t 

pa tment' 't^ f^'' '"'" "'"'the'r c?m! 

pfl ptrtt-anta-rr^: 

J\^"T, '"" *'""" '""^ the under sides 
the shelves The top and bottom ends 

shouM h /" ""^ ''"'"''* «' ™cely, and 
should be fixed into position with screws 
A hole IS bored through the bottom T; 
the centre pole, A pin and plate (FrjOm 
must be procured; Sie plat.%houl?be* 
mto the under side of the top, and should 
be firmly bedded to the wood The ton i, 
square, with a moulding worked ro.ndfte 



BOOEOABEB. 



top edges to the section given. Four pieces 
about 7 in. long should be strewed to the 
under side of the top in the positions 
indicated, the outside faces of these being 
directly over the edges of the shelves 
below. The strips should be chamfered 



along one edge and returned in the ends. 
To hold the top firmly, a few screws should 
be put diagonally through the top of the 
box and into ihe bookcase top. The plinth 
(see Fig, 304) is made of two pieces glued 
and blocked together. Both pieces are 




r^ac 



ii: 



ii 



Figa. 301 to 303. -Front ElAvation, 

Vertical Section (on Line T T), 

and Horisontal Section (on Line 

X X) of Revolving Bookcaia. 




Tig. 303. 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINERY. 




Pl«r. SM.-P11I «d Rate for 
»«™wiig BookotM. 



Fit; S04.-EiiUrK«l Part 

VsTtlcal BeeUon of BnolTlag 

BookcaM (A, Tig ma) 




"g SO! -Top of E.TOi,ing 

«»kca.e'i Puiar Caaiig (C 

"« »oa). with Collar 

•■mwi nparatoly 




Ttg. S07.-root and Bottom 

of BavolTiig Bookcaie 

"Uw (B, Hg. SOI) 



BOOKCASES. 



I 



mitered together at the comers ; the top 
one, having a thumb moulding worked 

i?/ *S.' ^^'' '' '"«"«! to the bottom 
shelf. The sides or iaces of the plinth 
may be rectangular if desired, or may be 
cut to the shape given in Fig. 301. The 
panels or laths round the aides should be 
screwed to the bottom and intermediate 
shelves, also the strips under the top, using 
round-headed screws. As an alternative to 
the panel, five laths are shown in the hori- 
zontal section (Fig. 303), and these may 
be reeded on the face. 

Stand for Revolving Bookcase.— The con- 
struction of the stand is clearly shown in 
the sectional elevation (Fig. .302) and the 
enlarged detail (Fig. .307). The foot con- 
sists of two bearers halved together at 
the centre, a mortice being made through 
the top one for the reception of the stub 
tenon on the end of the post (see Fig. 
307). The centre post is turned to IJ in. 
in diameter, and should be left square at 
the bottom as shown. Four blocks of the 
shape shown should be well glued and 
screwed to the foot of the post and the 
bearers. The ends of the bearers are 
rounded as shown, and should have ball 
castors fixed under the ends, and one in the 
centre if desired. The pin should be screwed 
into the top of the post, care being taken 
to get It in the centre. The bookcase is 
slipped over the post, in which position it 
will remain. 

Finishing Rsvolving Bookcase.— The de- 
sign on the panels lends itself to various 
ways of treatment, and careful consider- 
ation in arranging the coloured woods 
IS desirable. The grain of the wood should 
follow the main and radial lines of the 
design as far as possible, and the horizontal 
and vertical lines should be kept in some 
of the larger masses, this procedure imparting 
strength to the design. Another method 
of making the panels would be to stain the 
designs by the aid of a stencil process. 
Should this method be adopted, the design 
would require altering sUghtly to ,.otain 
the ties m the stencil plate. The book- 
case should be finished by polishing, etc., 
and this will vary according to the wood 
used If desired, briiss handles may be fixed 
to the panels for revolving the bookcase. 



Reading: Tuble with Revolving 
Bookshelf. 

A reading table with revolving book- 
shelf is illustrated by Figs. 309 and 310. 
The table consists of a circular top 1 ft. 7 in. 
in diameter and 1 in. thick, with an ogee 
moulding worked on the edge ; this stands 
on a 2J-in. turned pillar 2 ft. 6 in. high, 
supported by four shaped claws H in. 
thick. The table is provided with a re- 
volving candle-holder working immediately 
under the top and just clear of its edge, so 
that the whole surface of the top is avail- 
able for papers, etc. ; lower down, and at 
such a height as just to clear the knees of 
a person sitting at the table, is a revolving 
bookshelf having three arms radiating from 
the centre, each 11 in. long by 6 in. wide, 
and provided with side galleries 3 in. in 
height. Fig. 310 shows on the left hand a 
half-plan of the top (the dotted outlines 
at A indicating the position of the claws), 
and on the right a half-plan just above 
the bookshelves, the dotted lines indicating 
the candle-holder and arm. Fig. 311 is a 
section through the centre of the pillar, 
showing the iron stem to which the 
table-top is attached and on which revolve 
the candle-arm and the plate to which 
the bookshelves are secured. These parts 
are shown separately in plan and elevation 
m Figs. 312 and 313 respectively, Fig. 314 
being the plan of the candle-arm. 

Pillar of Revolving Table.— Referring to 
Fig. 311, the ire-, otem, which is HJ in. 
long and t in. in diameter, is welded to a 
plate /, in. thick and 6 in. in diameter, 
with two 6-in. by Ifin. by J-in. arms 
welded on as shown in Fig. 312. These 
arms are placed at right angles to the 
direction of the grain of the table-top, and 
are sunk flush with its under side, the circular 
portion being screwed on the surface. The 
pillar of the table is made in two parts, 
each being bored through to take the stem ; 
the hole should be of such size that the 
stem will pass through with slight pressure ; 
it should not be too tight for subsequent 
removal, or so loose that there is side play. 
A small washer shrunk on the stem as 
at A (Fig, 312) would prevent wear of the 
end of the pillar by the revolving arm, 



I I 



90 



CABINETWORK AXD JOL\ERY. 




Fig. 80». 



Tig*. 309 and 810. 
— Elevation and 
Half Plaui of 
Beading Table 
nith BeTOlring 
Bookihelt 





I 



Hi. Ui.— SMtlin 

of PUlu of 
Boding Table. 



.1.. 



A 



Fig. »12.— Tmble-plRte and Stem 
for Beading Table. 




Tig. 3I3.~Shelf-pIate and Sleere 
for Beading Table. 



BOOKCASES. 



91 







I 



Flg^ 818 and 8l«.-Und«neatli View and Croti Section of Reading Table'i Bookshelf ( 




Fig. 31«.— Plan of Gallery Post and Bails of 
Beading Table. 



Fig. S2t.-~Crosi Section of Beading Table 



Fig. 319. 




rig. 320. 
Figi. 319 and 320. —Foot of Beading Table 



m 



tiMMi'f 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEKy. 



but la not absolately nccMsary, and, if 
It la used, the candle-arm muat be placed 
in poaition before the waaher ia fixed The 
lower end of the upper half of the pillar 
18 turned down to ij in. in diameter where 
it paasea through. the bookahelf, and the 
upper end of the lower part of the pillar 
18 turned out to receive the eleeve attoched 
to the Imokahelf plate (aee Fip. 313). This 
hole should be the exact depth of the sleeve, 
and of such a size that the pUte can re- 
volve freely. 

Bookshelf of Revolving Table.— Pig 315 
IS an enlargement of the central portion 
of the bookshelves, the under side beinB 
shown with the metal plate attached' 
this need not be sunk in, as it cannot be 
seen when in position. The ends of the 
shelves are mitered and cross-tongucd to- 
gether as indicated by the dotted lines 
m Fig. 315 and shown in the section (Fig 
316). The blacked portion in Fig. 315 shows 
the aperture in the plate for the stem and 
the dotted circle the one in the woodwork 
for the shank of the pillar. The side gal- 
lenes of the shelves are formed of i-in 

,J->*"'"^ ™''' ^'*^ "'"«' «••««» (see Fig. 
•il/). They are tenoned into j-in. by 
i-iK. standards with ball-and-cushion ends • 
these are tenoned through the shelves and 
wedged a« shown in Figs. 317 and 318, the 
standards at the junctions being mitered 
and glued ; the spindles between the rails 
are j -in. plain rods dowelled in J in at 
each end. 

Claw Foot of Pillar.-Figs. 319 and 320 
show the method of fixing the claws in 
dovetail slots in the pillar on four squs'ed 



faces; the dovetails are lotched down 
1 in. from the top, and ahould fit tightly, 
and may advantageoualy be made with 
slightly tapering sides, so that they will 
tighten as they are driven in place. Fig. 
321 18 a section of the claws on the line 
*/ <J'«- 319). The wood for the claws 
should be aelec'ed of strong, even grain, 
and the pattern for cutting 'should be 
placed on the stuff, so that the grain may 
run as long as possible through the curved 
parts. 

Finishing Revolving Table.— Cut and fit 
up all the parts before any carving is done. 
When fixing the iron stem in the pillar, 
the lower half should be coated with Bruns- 
wick bl',ck or varnish, which will adhere 
both to the wood and iron and make the 
parts secure. It may be desirable at some 
future time to remove the upper portion 
passing, through the pillar, and it should 
therefore be ci .ed with grease and black- 
lead ; all the orking parts should be 
similarly treated. These metal fittings can 
usually be obtained of manufacturing iron- 
mongera in dozen sets only; but any 
skilful blacksmith could make them if 
supplied with full-size drawings of each 
part separately and a scale sketch similar 
to Fig. 311. The candlestick could be of 
brass, sciewed to the arm, and a small 
brass hook as shown at E (Fig. 3U) should 
be brazed on to clip the edge of the table 
and preven the arm dropping. Figs. 309 
to 314 are dti..,n to a scale of li in. to 
1 ft., and Figs. 318 to 321 are 3 in. to 
1 ft., with the exception of Figs. 317 
and 318, which are half full size. 




'A ]tr 




CABINETS. 



Small Museum Cabinet. 

A SHALL muBeum cabinet for the display of 
curiosities is shown to a scale of } in. to the 
foot by Figa. 322 to 325 ; in addition to 
which figures, details one-quarter size are 
shown as follows: Fig. 326, detail plan of 
part of case; Fig. 327, detail vertical 
section through front ; and Fig. 328, detail 
section of plinth to base. The outside 
dimensions are— 4 ft. wide by 1 ft. C in. 
deep by 6 ft. 3 in. high. The ease is con- 
structed of Austrian wainscot oak for all 
outside parts, which are french-poliahed ; 
while the parts that are hidden are of best 
yellow pine. All the materials must be 
perfectly seasoned. The lower part of the 
case, comprising the base, is panelled and 
moulded, and is made independent of the 
upper part or case proper. This h*-t is 
constructed on the air-tight principle, the 
opening sashes or doors having hook joints 
on the meeting stile and air-tight beads 
to the hanging stile. The frame has air- 
tight fillets at top and bottom, the ends 
being framed to match the front, and glazed 
with ^-in. British polished plate glass. 
The case is lined inside on the back and 
bottom with velvet plush ; the back of 
|-in, matchboard is papered before being 
covered. The caso is fitted with plate- 
glass shelves, shaped as shown, and sup- 
ported on bronzed iron or brass shelf brack- 
ets, fastened with set screws to vertical 
standard bars, which are tapped at intervals 
of 1^ in. to 2 in. for convenience in raising 
or lowering the position of the shelves. 
The doors are hung on brass arrow butts, 
three to each door. The left-hand door is 
fitted with a br<i8s bolt at top and at 



bottom ; the right-hand one, with an eccen- 
tric handle and catch, and a small sash 
lock. 

Materials for Small Museum Cabinet.— 
The materials required are :— For the 
base : Wainscot plinths, one 4 ft. 2 in. by 
4 in. by 1 in. ; two 1 ft. 8 in. by 4 in. by 

1 in. Pine rails, one 4 ft. 2 in. by 4 in. 
by J in. ; two 1 ft. 8 in. by 4 in. by 
} in. Wainscot rails, one 4 ft. 1 in. by 

2 in. by 1 in. ; one 4 ft. 1 in. by 1 j in. 
by 1 in. ; two 1 ft. 6 in. by 1} in. by 1 in. ; 
two 1 ft. in. by 2 in. by 1 in. ^V'ainscot 
stiles, six 1 ft. 3 in. by 3 in. by 1 in. Wain- 
scot muntins, two 1 ft. by 3 in. by 1 in. 
Wainscot panels, two 1 ft. 8 in. by 8 in. 
by } in. ; two 1 ft. 1 in. by 8 in. by ^ in. 
Wainscot moulding, two 4 ft. ti in. by IJ in. 
by J in. ; two 3 ft. 2 in. by IJ in. by } in. 
Wainscot base capping, one 7 ft. 3 in. by 
2 in. by 1 in. Pine top, one 3 ft. 10 in. 
by 1 ft. 5 in. by | in. Deal back, one 
4 ft. by 1 ft. 3 iu. by J in. Deal bearer, 
one 1 ft. 6 in. by 3 in. by Ij in. Twelve deal 
angle blocks, 3 in. long ; 3| doz. |-in. No. 9 
screws for panel moulding ; 1 doz. IJ-in. 
No. 10 screws for fixing plinth ; 14 ft. run 
|-in. feather cross-tongue. For the case : 
Wainscot stiles, two 4 ft. 8 in. by IJ in. 
by 1 in. ; two 4 ft. 8 in. by IJ in. by 1 in. ; 
two 5 ft. 2 in. by If in. by 1 in. ; two 5 ft. 
2 in. by li in. by 1 in. ; two 5 ft. 2 in. by 
2 in. by 1 in. Wainscot rails, one 4 ft. 
by li in. by 1 in. ; two 1 ft. G in. by 2| in. 
by 1 in. ; one 4 ft. by If in. by 1 in. ; two 

1 ft. 6 in. by 2f in. by 1 in. Pine rails, 
one 4 ft. by ^ in. by J in. ; two 1 ft. 6 in. 
hy 3J in. by | in. Wainscot rails, four 

2 ft. by IJ in. by 1 in. Wainscot cornice, 
one 8 ft. by 4J in. by 2J in. Pine lining, 



m. 






u 



OABINETWOHi AND JOINEHY. 



II 



1:! ! I 



one 4ft by ,1} ,„. l,y } in. Wain^ot fillet, 

, . • ^J '* '»• ''y * '»• Km filK 

one 4ft. by 1ft. „ (n. by Jin. Pi„, 
twttom. one 4 ft. by 1 ft. 5 in. by } in. Deal 
raat.'hcd back, one 5 ft. by 4 ft. by J in 
Feather tongue, one 7 ft. run J in. Wain- 



P«per; 24 ft. mper. velvet pluih; two 
braw-necked bolts ; three pain Wh butti j 
one eccentric handle ; one bmsa laah lock. 

China Cabinet. 

_ Figs. 329 to 331 show a china cabinet, 
m making which a pair of sath doo>» 




Fig. ill, 

scot glazing bead, 50 ft. run J in. by 4 in. 
Plate glass, two 4 ft. 3i in. by 1 ft. 8» in. 
by i in ; t« 4 ft. 3J in. by 1 ft. 3 in. by 
i in. Standard bars, two 4 ft. 'JJ in. long, 
with base and top plate drilled and counter- 
sunk for screws ; ten 12-in. shelf brackets 
and set screws ; five glass shelves, 3 ft. 8 in. 
long by 1 ft. 1 in. wide, cut to shape, edges 
ground and polished; a yds. white lining 




Fig. S9S. 




He. >M. 



PiBS. 131 to «M.— Front Elsyat.':.-!, Side 

Elmtlon, Vartloal Crois gntlon, and Flu 

of Small HuMnm Cabinst. 



has been utilised. The following materials 
will be requited : Deal bottom, 3 ft. 5 in. 
by 1 ft. 6 in. by 1 in. ; two deal shelves, 
3 ft. 5 in. by 1 ft. 5J in. bylj in. ; deal 
division, 2 ft. lOJ in. by 1 ft. 5J in. by 
J in. ; deal matchboard back, 3 ft. SJ in. 
wide by 3 ft. 1 in. high by 4 in thick; 
two mahogany ends, 3 ft. 6 in. by 1 ft. 7 in. 
by 1 in. ; mahogany top, 3 ft. 9 in. by 1 ft. 



CABINETS. 



8 in. by 1 in. ; nuhogany skirting ot plinth, 
7 ft. 3 in. by 3 in. by | in. ; aesl filltt 
under top, .1 ft. 4} in. by { in. by J in. ; 
m^ihogany rebated (top on doors, 2 ft. 10 in. 
by 1} in. by | in. ; brass cut 3-in. cupboard 
lock and screws; two brass Hush bolts, 
4 in. by f in., and screws ; two pairs of 
3-in. brass machine-made butt hinges. 
First set out the work to the dimensions given 
in the illustrations. Figs. 329 and 33U 



the outer side and thicknessed. The exact 
length to which they should be cut is 3 ft. 
1 in., which allows | in. to go into the groove 
in the top and suilicient to run down to 
the floor level. From the lower end on 
the inner iace a groove is prepared, 3 in. 




Fl(. 3SS.— Fllnlh anil Bass of Mas«nn 
CaUntt. 




Tig. 836.— Part Borinmtal Section of Hcseom 
Cabinet. 



Fig. 337.~Vartical Boction tliroagh 
Front of Hnssnm Cabinet 



are front and side elevations, and Fig. 331 
is a horimntal section. The doors being 
each 2 ft. 9i in. by 1 ft. 8J in., the carcase 
must be framed accordingly. The ends are 
prepared 1 ft. 7 in. wide ; and if the ma- 
hogany --.innot be obluincd in one width, 
they must be put together with a tongued 
and glued joint, and afterwards faced on 



up, to receive the deal bottom (see Fig. 332). 
The mahogany top must be prepared in 
the same manner as the ends, and cut 
3 ft. 8 in. long by 1 ft. 8 in. wide. Grooves 
are prepared at each end on the under 
side to take the ends (see also Fig. 332), 
the outside of the groove being | in. from 
the end ; they should be stopped 1 in. 





i^ijmM 



CABINETWORK AND JOIN 'RY. 



m 



from the hro edge (aee Fig. 333), the 
tmoont of the projection. Retwtei mut 
be foraud in the baclc edgee of the top 



•hown. The top ihould then be moaUed 
along the front edge and return ende (eee 
Fig>. 333 and 333). The bottom ia of deal. 




Fi(. 918.— FMnliii 
of Chiu CaUiMt. 



Fig. 334.— EnUrgad Part Horlxontol 
8«otim of China Cabinet. 




Fl(. 330. 

Fifa 3W to 331.-ni>nt ad 

lid* BlmUou and Horliontal 

Suction of China Cablntt 




Fig. 333.— Enlaiied Part V«r- 
tioal Section of China Cabinet 



and ends to receive the j-in. baclc (see 
Kg. inji). The rebate in the ends to re- 
ceive the doors must be prepared the exact 
thiclmess of the doors and sunlc -,', in., and 
a J-in. bead glued on the front edge as 



prepared from two 9-in. Iwards glued to- 
gether ; it is rebated on the front edge only 
tn receive the doors, and groo\'c-i in the 
centre to receive the vertical division. 
A groove is similarly prepared on the under 




IC0LE4H BEAUX-ARTS 
de QUEBEC 

MATERIEL. 




iil'^l 



! 




tt 

h 
In 

tt 



n 

Tl 
■t 
tb 
•t 



dc 



Tl 
th 






Sb 
efi 



ap 
in 



sta 
fro 
Ma 
fin 

4 sol 
, arc 
• to 
33i 
! 34! 



OABnnni 



•id* of tka Buhopnjr top, but thii ii atoppwl, 
whibt thjt in ttw bottom mm tight 
thnagk. Tin axaot oattiu Itngtl. o( th« 
bottom ii ) in. otm th* elMt dinumion 
botWMn the groovM in tha top, 3 It. 4) in. ; 
th« oxtn ) in. goM ( in. rach Mt into th< 
groovM in tha anda. Tha vartieal diviaion 
ia out a It. lOi in., and ia 1 It. 5) in. wida. 
Tha ahalvaa ate cut cleat between the enda 
and th* diviaion, and teat on deal Alleta 
•ci«wed to tha anda and the diviilon. 
The tldtting, which ia moulded, and miteted 
at th* anglea, ahould be glued to the edge ol 
the bottom along the Itant, and futthat 
•trengthened hy angle-blocka glued on the 
inaida. The letutna aT« gxed by meana ol 
BOtewa thtough the enda, which continue 
down to the floot level. The joint at the 
meeting atilei ol tho doota ia coveted hy a 
moulded and lebeted atop (ae* Fig. 334). 
The dimenaiatta f an ate caloukted to aUow 
the doota to flniah 1 in. thick. 

Sheraton Comer Cabinet. 

Bhetaton, the oelebtated cabinet-maker, 
conattooted lumitute which was vet/ light 
and gmcelnl in appeatanoe, but which waa 
io akillully put together that many ex- 
amplea, alter the wftjt ol a centniy, ate 
ptactioally *a petfect aa when they left the 
wotkahop. Roaewood and Spaniih mahog- 
any, both aolid and in veneer, were hia 
favouiite wooda ; and theae wete genetally 
inlaid with sandal, or aatinwood anu ebony. 
Sheraton also largely employed stained aud 
ahadad wooda in inlaying for decorative 
effect, featoona and running scrolla being 
much emploved, anii the bara in the cabineta 
were conv 'ted and extremely fragile in 
appearance. The Sheniton cabinet shown 
in elevation in Fig. S33 and in section by 
Figs. 336 and 337 is intended to stand in 
a right-angle comer, anc^ ia of 1 ft. 10 in. 
side, out to out, with 6-in. returns. It 
stands 7 ft. 1 in. high, with a 1-ft. lO-in. 
front. Fig. 337 is a section at x l (Fig. 335). 
Make tho cabinet of dark mahogany. The 
fine lege ran through both compartments are 
got from IJ-in. atuC. The shelves are cut 
around and sunk into grooves in t' e legs 
to a depth of i in., as in Figa. 338 and 
339. The lower shelf ia shown by Fig. 
343. Tho ends of the legs are tenoned 
• 



thtough the top, and n^Uad. Th* 
o( |-in. atttfl. ia doed and bnddad 



oomio*, 
on th* 




ahiiMl latum pieoea, a« >.hown in Via. 3.V 
and 336. Tha cotnic* and ovet-ootnio* at* 
both inUid, aa shown in Kg. 340, th* lin*a 
being of black walnut or ebony, or atainad 
to teptesent the Uttet ; the loaangaa ate 
aatinwood ; the enclosed shaped panel* at* 
toaewood oi beefwood ; and the tendril 
otnament eithat aatinwood ahaded ot gteen 
aah. Th* vationi panoia and bottom ehall 
can also b* inUid with a aimilat pattetn oi 
running tandrila ot line-wotk. Figa. .^3» 
and 341 ahow altetnative methoda ol in- 
setting the panelling in the fnming. Fig. 
330 haa the panels apti;*^ into teMtea or 
checln ; thia la the cabinet-maket'a method, 
and it ia eaaier, but weaker than th* 
joiner's method ahown in Fig. .341, which 
la a section at a (Fig. 337). The gUied door 
in the upper part ahould be mortised aud 
tenoned toother, the dotted lines in Fig 
3.38 indicating the sin and position of the 
tenons. The rhouldera are made sqiuite, 
the rebate for the glass being formed by an 
inaeited alip bead, which ia m ^nd tuund 
after the frame ia glued and cleaned oil. 
This bead ahuuld be gauged to width and 
glued in. The ban, i in. by {} in., are 
cut square against the atiles and tails, but 
ate mitered to each other aa ahown in Fig. 
342. The circular bars may be made in 
various ways, the best method being to 
bend the bar in the solid round a shaped 
drum, aplicing the end< aa shown in Fig. 
342, and working to section after gluing 
up. An easier method ii shown in the 
upper part of Fig. 342. Two rings for 
the bead and for the tongue are turnet? 
in the lathe ; then a small groove is turned 
in the back of the bead, and th© tongue 
ring inserted into this, crossing the grain of 
the two rings as much as possible. A third 
method ia to work each bar in four pieces 
in the solid, cut them out, aud dowel them 
together with butt joints. The doot of the 
lower cupboard, shown in section ir. Fig. .' 
is mortised and tenoned together and soad 
moulded with a J-in. Grecian ovob, the 



m 



i 



OABINETWOHK AND JOINERY. 



M 



M 



ii 





Fig. 936. 



Flpt 330 to S37.-rroiit HeTatlon, VKtlcaT 

SecUon, and HiiriMnt«I Section of Sheraton. 

Comer Cabinet. 



Hfl. 837. 



CABINETS. 




Fig. a3».-Sertion of Door ^ rij. »M.-M.thod of 

and ComlM of Bhsratoj! Fif 341.— HorlTOsta! Swition throngh JolElag Bar^ rf Shsraton 

(^li^'t. Corner of Sheraton Cabinet Cabinet. 



\im 



100 



in Fig 341, and i-m. slip, are glued on for 
fZ: T\ Th* "Pron rails beneath the 
cupboard should bo framed info the leg,, 
and the cupboard bottom is glued and 
blocked to them. The back of the gCd 

or Cloth. The bottom part is left open 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



Comer Cabinet for Drawing-room. 

The cabinet illustrated at Fig. 3U looks 
well If made of pine or deal, painted and 

!„!?► °'. h^dwood, such as mahogan/or 
Zrl' ''"'*;™-«^''-P°li»hed. The cupboa"d 

The „1'° * r^ *•■= "pp" '«"n A to i 

Ihe upper part is intended for the display 
o bnc-i-brac, the door panel being of cS 
ghss, and underneath 'the cupboard are 
t»o Atc-glass mirrors. Before starting 
the construction, nuike a full-size p an 
of the lower part, as in Fig. 34D, the top 
l'°wT' '•T? <"^"^- The sides against 

D LTs r/ '*• .l'"; '■"'«■ ■""» fe breaks 
r *° '^ 8 '"• '""ig. the front being about 1 ft. 

L-^T;; ,'''^'=t,'™8"> ''^■' he obtained 
from the plan The legs are of l-i„. stuif 
.i ft. long by 2i in. wide. The back leg f 
shows the thickness of the legs-less in 

^r out t„ r '"«" ''"''™' ''""-e heen 
SouHbe * " P^P" '■'<' ""d »hape, 

! ,j«'- ^'^^t get out the top, which 
should be an inch larger all round tC 

bottom shelf is in., and that of the shelf 
tt7 I *■ 8 '"■,=*I-'k the positions 
of The 1''™', ™ '^^ ■}'«'■ ""d the widths 
The ™1^k^.? span-ra,ls and arches as well. 
Ito method of setting out these rails and 
arches IS shown at Figs. 346 to 349. Thev 
must stand back J in. from the face of the 
X m'^ ">-' be got out J in. longer than 
sight measure to allow for housing them 

to be t'^ '^i" "'" t«'- The next parts 
Fi. iflr^f "" '^"^^'^^^ from .» to o 
as ?h. 1 ' ■ "'«'«. "e of the same thickness 
as the legs, runmng the same way of the 



nlXu /"^ *■"* i"'"*^ to the legs. 

S the b"".? 'Tr"? fr"" underneath 
into the back. The inside ends of the 
curteined recess, indicated by dotted line 

£Jf^{ ' f f «'"«^ «■"! jolted to the 
front legs and backs. Before the legs are 
finally put together, they must be shapt' 

e™ ?;/"?• ?° '"P " """ed to ...e 
tegs and shaped span-rails. The top is 

Slow r'*'* '■ '"■ "' '^ •»«'^ i° ord 
to al ow the upper part of the cabinet to 

get close to the wall, otherwise it would nol 

o so, owing to the skirtir , Wrd that usuaZ 

runs round the bottom of the wall. Two 

brass screw eyelets are screwed behind the 

top centre span-rail, as a support for the 

hun/°^rh". "''"Il "l^ r'* «i'k eurtain^ Ire' 
nung The small shelves at h (Fie 3441 
are i m thick, and are fixed with nails 
driven through the backs and inSde end 

Upper Part of Comer Cabin.t.-For the 
upper part of the cabinet, make a fuU-size 

to be 1 ftT-'° f* '^'' ''"°™8 ^' «des 
Tb„ 1 ,. ,,• *i"-.iou« and fully jf ii. thick. 
The left-hand side of the plan Aoto a 
section through the door, and?he right-hand 
side a section through the mirror. The 
door posts J are 1 ft. 1 in. from the corner 
and are got out of IJ-in. stuff, bevelled t^ 

fro rFif -744, ■'^JV^''""-' '•''■■«''* from 
A t„ f 1, ' i?'i, f ^ " ^ "• " '"■ ; height from 
A to the shelf below the door, U in.1 height 
from A to the top of the cupboard, 2 ft 7 if 
door stiles and rails, 3 in. wide including 

fmm'^bfV '"'?''.', °' '""" «°™« »helf 
from the top of the cupboard, 7 in The 
small shelves near the Inirrors are halved 

tL- i .l. f ;/"'' "^ ^'"^ " iu. from the 
top , both shelf and bracket are | in. thick. 
Enlarged drawings of the shap^ parts o 

F„c), V, l""?'™'' "* '''««• 352 and 333. 
Each back is jomted to make one piece of 
the necessary width. To allow the backs to 
ntersect at the corner, one is made the 
thickness of the stuff less in width than the 
cut^nt "'"""''? '"' ""= "'"ors are 

for wh V "'^'' °' '* '"■ '"''■'8 ""owed 

3' i r ,.° ^°'^ * "hate for the mirrors 
which .should be of bevelled glass, half-rZd 
mouldings are glued a„.i nait.j t„ ^^^ ^^^ 



CABINETS. 



101 




Fig. S44.— Draving-room Corner Cabioet. 



Fig. 34a.— Pattnm for Bottcm 
Side Span-r&il of Cabinet 



||: 





1 




llifl 



102 



.n«rted. The .hoftC \Ci^l «.» 

matarialii i„ i-*^ nraier m fretwork 

if linir -.i, '"' ""P'x'snl will look well 
t m»l >, ? ?" i"* ''"^° 0* velveteen 1" 

this is '^;:^ :, 't '°3jr '^r; i-^™*". '- 

-ews dnven from the undeX of '^^t 



OABINETTVOBK AND JOINERY. 



Cen,„ Cabinet for Drawl„g.,«,„. 

'^i.ii siae IS tlie same in appearance h„t 
o-e IS constructed to open as a do™ ■su„l, 
«,^'renr tb 7"' °'.»/^» to st 

ioin.;b\igrtto'':tV"t;f,r'.t^^- 
w-i^h^Sstr^t^rb^a-^rouZ 

the glazed cabinet are Tft 9 I wH?' ".' 
are made ;. dependent of the ^p T^'C^ 

i^ tfe L '"l""' P""* *<" •>= '«)'«■' i» hand 
s the lower frammg. The legs are each 

tapenng to 1 m. square at the bottom 
stuff 1li„"''y <''j8- 338) are of S 
£ tlf; '"''''■ T* "" '^■""'ed into the 
'egs , the tenons should be made as l„n^ 
as possible by mitering the ends „ !l, ^ 
■n the sectional plan X 3S™ Tk Z" 

"«B,Fig.358)''isi^w?d;;aS''pq:^^- 



cawSt pro^::t?ii!'n":i|-''''; l"? »' «■• 

£at^4^°l;rf^:l't^-^t,J- 

inward. IJ m. at the eomers (see Kg 36lT 

obtains torn Xei""r I ""^ J" 
omitteH I- ■ , "■'era. or it may be 

li in Ti.„ =1, 1® iuwuros at tne Corners 
the "rs S?'':^ pieces (Fig. 364) under 

CM, 1 m square, standing in I i„ l~„ 

tttn^KLi'^^*'"*^''" 

a side elevftion as in Kg'^^o/.TilSf ™' 
the exact contour is obtained T^ °J 

""t to make one roughly in pi:., for " 






CABINETS. 



103 




D 



li^ 



^ 




-^v. .IJ 



Pig. >u.— Ptttmi for Ptrt 
at C&blnst Back 



Hg. «»0.— Ptrt of 
htg of Conior 



ng. aw.— Pitlmn for Top of Cabiiat 
Buk. 



Pig. SM.— Detaa of 
CaUntt Minor. 





Pig. «».— TTMory of Door of CiMnt 



Pig. 366. — Door iiuuad of Carulni in 
Lower Part of Cabinet 



n>l 



ii= 




104 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINERY. 





ng. tn—ug. .to., of 

OMtre OaUsat 




ng. »8».-0eiitK Cbtart 

Span-ralli mortiuit to 

l>eg. 




Hg. m.-Cntr. Cbtoet ,„ D„,rtng.r 



Hjr. 360.— Top MonMing for 
Centro Cabinet 



CABINETS. 




Fig. Ml — Top of Otntio 



Citbiiut. 




Pit. m-Top Shtlf Md Support, <rf o«,tr. 
CtbtiM. 



Tig- au. 



Hg. »ea.— Top 

Shelf MotUding 

of Contn 

Clbliut 





Fig set -Top Sholf Bopport Fig. 3.T. 

for Centre Cbinet. p,„ .,. 

Flgn 3»» „d 3.7.-a«rtl„.„ of Ota„d 
Framing of Centre Cabinet 




»• 



"»•»•'■ Figs... 

Fig, jsa „d 365. Part s«,Uon »ad Plan 

1'e'rtng CMitr. Cabinef. Top conn«it«l 

to Bottom. 




■'f^'' 



% 



Iffi 



106 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



tnal. Thii may then b« owd u a pattern 
for marking out on the mahogany board 

C»™m to cutting out with the bow or 
»nd-Mw. To fix the .haped comer piecei 
to the «heU, two atrips about 1 in. wide by 
f m. thiclc are helved together, and their 
ends eunlc into the shaped eupport. and 
screwed as shown in Kg. 365. The lower 
eud« oJ the shaped pieces are screwed from 
the under side of the top. To simplify 
the work, the npper shelf and the comer 
supports may be omitted without impair- 
mg the appearance of the cabinet. 

Carcase of Centre Cabinet.— The carcase 
now remains to be made. The putting 
together by mortising and tenoning of the 
framework requires careful and neat work- 
manship. The upright comer posts on the 
opposite aide to the door are 1^ in. square 
with the inaide comers bevelled oil, as at 
D (Fig. SIX). Those right and left of the 
door are 1} m. by { in., as H e (Fig. 367) • 
and the door stiles are 1 in. wide by I in 
tluck. The middle bars and cross bars are 
i m. wide on the face by j in. thick. The 



top and bottom nils are IJ in. wide by I in. 
thick and an reb.t«l to r«M.iv. a pii, top 
and bottom, each { in. thick. Kb sek 
1. a section, and Fig. 369 a part pUu, 
showmg the method of connecting the too 
and bottom to the framing with screws To 
receive the plate glass a A-in. rebate is 
worked on the crost bars and framing; 
and the edgos next to the glass are hollowid 
with a quarter circle moulding, as shown in 
Figs. 366 and 367. A line of satinrood 
strmging is inlaid in the middle of the cross 
bars, corner posts, and top and bottom rails, 
rwo shelves are required opposite the 
cress bars ; these may be of pine, covered 
mth a suitable shade of velveteen, the 
imttom of the carcase being covered with 
the same material. The shelves are f xed 
by sUntmg screws at each comer. The 
glass may bo fixed with putty, or with 
beads, as shown in Kgs. 366 and 367. 
Three small butt hinges and a very 
narrow lock are required for the door. 
Ihe u^ual french-polishing will complete 




; 



COUCHES, SOFAS, AND SETTEES. 



Sota. 

Thb parlour sofa shown at Fig. 370 is 
good and substantial, and by no means 
diflkult to make. The whole of the wood- 
work,may bo yellow pine ; or, if preferred, 
ejroosed parts may be walnut or mahogany. 
The bottom frame (see half plans, Figs. 
371jand 372) is made of 2i-in. by 2-in. 
stufi (see section of front rail. Fig. 373), 
which should be free froji twist, the comers 



375, are cut from J-in. stuff. The narrow 
outline is the show-wood or outer scroll, 
and the wider one the stulKng scroll. The 
stuffing scrolls are framed up with housed 
braces to the ojact width of the bottom 
frame (see Fig. 370), and are jointed to 
the bottom frame by three dowels at 
the bottom of each scroll. The outer front 
scrolls are extended at the bottom to meet 
the plinth on the sofa front, as shown in 
Fig. 370, and are rounded or beaded on the 




Tig, 370.- :,TOit Elevation of Bofa. 



being halved together. The braces are 
housed mto the front and back rails, and 
take the centre dowol of the iegs; these are 
turned from blocks 10 in. by 5 in. square (see 
Fig. 374), the toe being cut to take cither 
pin or socket castors. The position of the 
legs IS shown in Pig. 371 ; thcv are fixed 
to the braces by means of dowel's, and well 
glued. The plinth (see Fig. 37.'i) runs 
right along the front rail and along each end 
the cornera being niit«ed. The arm serolis 
which should be set out as shown in Fig 



edge; they are then glued \i the front 
stuffing scrolls. The back is made of 
fin. stufi. A half elevation of this is 
shown at Fig. 37', and a section through 
the top rail at Fig. 378. It should be 
framed together with dry hardwood dowels. 
Before the ends are trimmed, the back frame 
should be screwed in position; then the 
ends can be marked off to the sweep of 
the stuffing scrolls and dressed down to 
the linos. A hail-i'uuud mould is fixed to 
the top edge of the back, two curved 



iri 






108 



.iufcd ; J" '"odwork. A action "^ 
ng. 379. Ti,, ^, ^,j .^ ^^ « 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



"■"• """"nn* for a wU of thji Idnd. 
Cromwtll Couch. 

Of tl» Cromwell conch (Rb .TSIl »k.« <, 

"y l| m. will bo required. PI.;, nji^^; 




ru- «ri. 

nrnau; 



If. STl. 



"»■ ««. -SmUoii er 
••"'i rrent Ball 




Rg' <74.-lt( ,tf 

Sofa. 




rH- »'».-P.ttoni for 
■oh Senlli. 




up with thr!? "■« ?™5 are well stitched 
of thrstu&J r\' °' l"'^'"''- A section 

touched up then 't^ """^ ""«?''«'• »<• 

-p.aced'^utSt*!::T;<s"^sn 



ng. J7e.-B,d Fhime 
of Sofa. 



wbyi fnirri^"^'.? ^™ 5 ft. 6 in. 



dyth ol 3| In. from th. top, .nd .n lecnnd 
iroin tha front and bark with naili. Th. 

•tuff 2 in. by 3 m. ; Imve it of th. full 



COUCHES, SOFAS, AND SETTEES. 




lint 

a co^on mat i. de«r«l, the .pring mil. 
can b. .ub.t.tu.«l hv a «lif bJariid 
botto^ or a CTow-webUi bottom covaml 
with HeMuui cloth. Th. .tuffing „roui 



Plf. IIT.-Half Elmtion of Buk rum. 
«Ilo<k. 




width in tho centre and work out the 
curve to the end., making it 1 ft. 8 in. over 
all. The curve u nailed on the foot rail. 

of the castor.) and 5} in. wide, and are wifh 
.ecur«l to tho frame with three dowel., 
t»o 01 the dowels pauing into the .ide rails 



If- itO.-»«otlMi of ItaflM 
Back of lolk. 




n«. S7».-SeoHoii of Sofa'. Bpriag Soat Mid 
Stuffed Aim. 

tT^, " 1°*° "^^^-K ^'■- Kl-^ them ., 
refl r *" T,"" '" '^'^- Th« foregoing 
refers to a couch having a spring Mat; if 



are made from l-in. .tuff, and are wwa 

.aw "to "th"""^ T' " ¥ »"' " » »»P»« 
saw, to the patten, .hown by Jig aai 

(reproduced to Kale of ]} ;„. ^ ttfj^^'J' 

template of .tout paper or oardbolird, place 
>t on the wood and mark off the pos tbns. 
After sawing, dre« th. edge, of the curve 
w th a .poke.have, and shoot the bottoms 
with a trying plane. Frame up with two 
croM-p,<«e. fitting in groove. ^2 la. fror^ 
the top and 6 in. from the bottom of each 
irame. The outside measurement of the 

of the bottom frame, measured across the 
end. Gauge from the outside for the 
tri" '."' ""C ™ntre «nd along the bottom 
frame, bore the hole, with a centre-bit 
glue, and drive the dow.I. in, being carofu 
1,7?.''= " f^ fit. The outsid! Mron 
moulding, and back, with the exception of 
the stuffing rails and the bottom rail, should 
preferably be made of hardwood, such as 
mahogany, walnut birch, etc. Tho mould- 
ing 18 of a ample quarter-circle pattern. 

round the end, and up the back to the 
terminal. If any difficultv i., .xperieneal i^ 
forming the bend at the end, iake a few 
saw kerfs half-way through the moulding 



II ' 



I 



i 



'ii 



OABINBTWORX AKD JOINBBT. 



no 



•omri from tha iniide o( th* ttuffing i 




If. m-Ptan of B,M<« ft.» of OMm,.H Owiob. 





"*• Mi-rutm te lenli 
M Onmwoli Ooaob. 



Fig. SM.-gpliu|l, of 
Conch. 

The edges of both scroll, are flush with each 
other under he coueh head, the front of the 

fron^^Jv"! ^T ™'<^ ">»•" 2 in. on the 
front, which, when stuflcd, will eive a 
height of 3 in above the outaid scroll- 
thua making what is known as a Gennan 
arm, which does not require a pilUr. 




Tit- 3U.~ Lag of 
Couch. 



rig. >ai — Baction of 
Couch Handrail 



should be made 5 in. wide at the bottom, 
and IJ in. thick, and the curved edge, afte^ 
being sawn and dressed, is reeded «^th four 
i-in. half-round reeds, and the top pointml 

r»,U ^^''Vi'-'^ '.'."• '™«- 'f'"' '»■" "Pindle 
rails are ij in. thick, and are beaded on the 
iMiLe edge ; they are stump-traoned into the 



OOCOBEB, SOFAS, AJH) SETTIBa 



tftmiiul ud middle nil, Imtju * idm. 
•> in. wida for tht •pindln. Tha htiidnil 
«t tlw (op ol the (piiidle (nnu ii o( tha 
•hape ahaara at Pi(f. .Ml. Tha apindlea 
(Fin. 3Sa) an il in. long, enluaiv* o( tha 



111 

tail, and with . aoteir through the foot 
ornament. The aupporting raili o< tha 
ontve are mide from pine 3 in. wida and 
1 in. thick, and the upright raili are atump- 
tenoned into the curved hack and bottom 




Tig- <•!.— SMtlon of 
Ooneb Baa 



lit- sat.— BUtutw 
of Couch. 



Fig. 893.— Stnffliix 
Scroll of Couch. 



tenon at each end, and IJ in. thick. Care 
must be taken to see that they are quite 
upright before being glued. The curved 
back IS made from IJ-in. stuff, and is sawn 
out to the pattern shown at Fig. 387. The 
back is made full in order to leave sufficient 
material for dressing, etc., and is fastened 
Willi dowels to the inner side of the middle 



back rail. When all the , „.b have been 
made and squared, gluo up, and cramp 
until set. The back is secured to the 
carcase with two 3-in. screws in the terminal, 
two similar screws in the middle mil, and 
four 2-in. screws in the bottom back rail- 
two .3-in. snrearj sr? put through the end 
of the curved back, passing into the back 



I i 



.t • r 



112 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



stuffing scroll. The carving is simple in- 
cised work and is worked as follows :- 
Alark out the design on the wood, follow 
the lines with a V-tool or veiner, then go 
over It with a J-in. spade tool, finally clean- 
ing out with a regulator. The snwil 
roset.es can be made with the V-chisel 
alone, and the long lines on the back can 
be marked out with a scratch gauge. After 
brass socket castors have been fitted on 
the couch legs (Fig. ,388 shows one of the 
legs) the frame is complete and is ready for 
upholstering. 

Drum-head Couch. 

hJl^' f*", ^^°^' •' ''<"" elevation the 
Srame of a drum-heau couch ; for it. stained 



moulding. If worked independently of the 
rail (see Pig. .TOl), will require kerflng to 

JrL '"'"'?•«'' ?f """'"'• Tl-^ bottom 
frame is stiffened by a rail housed into the 
side rails as shown in Fig. 390, and also hv 
an iron rod 1 in. wide by i in. thick, screwed 
flush on the under side of the frame. 

Head and Back of Drumhead Couch.- 
After the bottom frame is glued and cramped 
the conch head can be set out. Pig ■J92 
shows an outside scroll. Pirst, from li-in 
stufl, with a compass saw or band saw cut 
a pair of stuffing scrolls (Fig. 393) ; these 
are framed up by cross rails housed into 
their inner faces as shown by the dotted 
lines m Pig. 393. The head, when complete, 
should measure 2 ft. 2 in. across, and is 




rig. 3>e.— Box ottoman. 



birch or mahogany or walnut to harmonise 
with surroundmg furniture may be used. 
1 he style of decoration lends itself readily 
to incised carving, and the rosettes may 
be worked m lo.i- relief, when brown oak 
would bo a suitable wood. First make 
the bottom frame (Pig. .390) ; the side and 
end rails are each 3 in. by 1} in. thick, and 
are dovetail-mortised into the leg stumps 
whch are 2} in. square by 1 ft. long without 
castors The curved foot-rail ia dowelled 
into the leg stump ; this rail, if worked 
from the solid, will require rebating on 
the outside curve to a depth of 2 in., leaving 
a projection i in. wide by 1 in. deep for 
working a plain centre beading to match 
the one which IS stuck on the fr it The 



secured to the bottom frame^by three 

isTved I ^"f""^'- /'"' ''™»'»"itol scroll 
is fixed by gluing and screwing through the 
mside of the stuffing scroll, and should lie 

in Fig 389. The couch back is made of 
two IJ-in. rails, each 3 in. wide and 4 ft 
J in. long, the bottom rail being centre 
beaded to match the front moulding These 
rails are secured by mortice joints to the 

,t""^lr!l^'*'.; "-"l '"''"= *te rails are 
secured the three balusters (Fig. 395) must 
bo cut and fitted. The terminal 1 h" 
ointed 3 m. from the bottom and secured 
to the side rail by three screws. The two 
rails are cut halfway through where thev 
meet the back stuffing scroll, and are screwed 



COUCHES, SOFAS, AND SET.EES. 



113 



into the back. In this pattern of couch the 
bolster arm and head are firmly stuffed, and 
the seat and head swell are sprung ; but 
before beginning stuffing, rasp all the edges 
over which the covers will be laid. 

Box Ottoman. 

A box ottoman (see Fig. 39G) is often 
quite roughly nailed together, as the inside 
is lined with print or calico. A useful size 
is 3 ft. 6 in. by 1 ft. 7 in. and 1 ft. 2 in. deep, 
all outside measurements, with the lid 3 ft. 



pleating being shown in Fig. 398. Next 
cut out the festoons, which, when finished, 
must men sure 5 in. at the widest part, 
and 1 in, at the ends below the bottom edge 
of th" I 'vt;. As thown in Fig. 399, the 
enr" - ) re siijp.:d "Wj^-, '» that when gathered 
th( e win not i.j tt^ auch bulk of stuff for 
th' till \ing. The < stoons are tacked on 
ple> u. jiiden3Cii,th( le fringe. Before cutting 
out ihe loaUj/'f. -.iractise on a waste piece 
of material, which may be used as a pattern 
to mark ""out the finished material. The 



Pig. »««. Folding of 

PlflBti for Box 

Ottoman. 




Fig. 397.— Box Ottoman before Covering. 



7 in. by 1 ft. 8 in., this allowing J-in. pro- 
jection all round the box. The cross battens 
on the lid {see Fig. 397) are 4 in. wide by 
1 in. thick, and a little shorter than the 
inside width of the box. For the covering 
of the outside, cretonne or damask will look 
well, with a slightly different shade for 
the festoons and tails. When the box is 
made, the first thing is to put on the pleated 
sides and ends. These should be tacked 
on ^ in. lower than the top edge to prevent 
all the tacking parts coming over each other. 
Four castors, about 2 in. high, should be 
" Tewed to the under side of the box. 
iliU pteikttni bidea uud euds must reach to 
within 2 in. of the floor, the method of 



comer and side tails may now be added, 
and should be set out on paper to Figs. 400 
and 401. For Fig. 400 the centre line be 
is 12} in. long, b f 1| in., f d 2| in., d to H 
4| in., B A 5| in., d c 8} in., and H G 5| in. 
The sweep of line c G e is obtained by 
the intersection of lines a g and G h. The 
segments are about equal, and are, say, 
1 in. wide at the top and 2 in. at the bottom. 
Set out Fig. 401 from the following measure- 
ments : — B E 12 in., b f 1 in., f d 3| in., 
D H 4| in., B A 3i in., d c 6J in., and h a 
3i in. The segments are about j in. wide 
at the top and about If in. wide at the 
bottom. A narrow fringe is sewn to the 
bottom edges of the tails. The plan of 



114 



folding 13 shown in Pigs. 402 and 403. In 
toclang on the festoons and tails, the 

Zfft^.^^ *"" ^^'^^ »' *« fringe, 
lor If the fringe ,s of an open trellis pattern, 
the festoons and tails woulu be seen through 
the fnnge. This is fixed on by suitable 
nails or gimp pms. Neirt cover the inside 
of the box with the print, calico, or glazed 



OABINETWOHK AND JOINEEY. 



Box Ottoman Settee. 

The box ottoman settee shown in K» 404 
has a framework nearly aU the parts of which 
ran be got out of l-in. by ll-in. boards, a 

Itti. i.^'«";^>y '™'^"8 «>« box or 
settee body (Figs. 405 and 406). For 
dovetail joints at the comer- the dimensions 







ng. «M. Fij. us. 

npr. 402 and 403.— Folding Tails for Box 




ng. 400, 



Fig. 401. 



Fig» 400 uid 40I.-D.Trtopnimt of TUl. for Box Otlomaa. 



hoUand, letting It lap on the top edges of 
the box. If preferred, the box may be lined 
hrst, the hmng being brought to the out- 
sides of the box before the pleated parts 
are fastened. The lid may have a flat 
stuffing of hair or flocks. The outer cover- 
ing 18 brought to the under side c; Ihe lid 
and then the lining is added, the battens 
being first covered. The lid is now con- 
nected to the box with three brass butt 
lunges; and to prevent the lid falling back 
and wrenching oil the hinges, tapes are 
connected with each end to inside the hnj. 
tthcu the lid IS closed, the tapes fall inside 



nven will apply, but when cross-cutting 
the boards for plain lap joints, the two 
end pimes should be 1 ft. 7 in. long, the other 
dimensions remaining the same. To get 
the depth, it will be necessary to join two 
pieces of stuff, ind with care a full width 
and a half of ^ue ll-in. boards will, after 
Somtlng and shooting, come out the correct 
width for each side. Before the carcase 
18 put together, the rebates for the bottom 
should be ploughed out as shown in Fig 406 
The bottom is strengthened by three cross- 
braws, 21 in. wide by 1 in. thick, let in 
dush with the bottom boards (see Fig. 405). 



COUCHES, SOFAS, AND SETTEES. 




Fig. 404.— Box Ottoman B«tt««. 




Fig. 406.— Front EIeTi^t<(m of Body of Box Ottoman BottM. 






Fig. 40«.~Box Body of 
Box Ottoman Settee. 



Fig. 407.— ScroU Arm of Fig. 408.— Scroll Frame of 



Box Ottoman Settee. 



Box Ottoman Sotte*. 



1: 



Hi 




i$:)JmM 



118 



At each comer, gl je and screw a castor block 
3 in. square by 1 in. thick. Next get oat 
four scroll arms as Fig. 407, dressing all the 

^£" V uH """", '^™P- The bottom 
edges which fit on the box sides are shot 
■quare and true with the trying plane- 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY, 



frame should correspond with the width of 
the box, and when placed in position the 
two faces should be a good fit. The frames 
are secured to the box by dowel joints, 

eient if the work is properly don.' Use 




Tig. 40,.-H.tt Front El.«ti™ „, DWdtag Srtf. .nd Fimm.w.rk 




'r> — p . o* — M 2% 



^'"^v ^yir^'^ 



2.0 

rig. 4U.-P.Ir of Toinrt Log. brto,. Cutting In Two. 



Tig. 410. Seat Frame of Dividing 
8ett««. 





ths ,B important, the correct fitting of the 
Mttee head to the body depending on it 
Frame the scrolls in pairs, as shown in Fig 
408 by housing two cross rails to a depth 
of } m. into the inner sides of the scrolls, 
am by a head-rail, which is cut to a sweep 
of 2J m. in the centre to 1 i„, at ea=,h ™d 
rtlien put together, the outside width of the 



Fig. 4ia,-Top Rail of 
Dividing Settee. 



Pig. 413.- Joint of Settee's Top 
Rail and Coiner Leg. 



dry hardwood dowels and fresh hot glue. 

It would be advisable to check this measure- 
ment before cross-cutting, as more or less 
rake may have been given in fitting the 
two arm frames. The top and bottom rails 
are jomted oj a centre piece a in. wide, 
and^by two shaped end pieces, which are 



COUCHES, SOFAS, AND SETTEES. 



marked and cut to the outline of the back 
scrolls after the back is made up. The 
dimensions given in Fig. 405 are fpce meas- 
urements only, and if it is intended to 
mortice-joint the back, allowance must be 
made for tenons in cutting the stuff. The 
top comers are rounded, and the back is fixed 
by screwing to the box back and the back 
scrolls. The seat frame is 3 ft. long by 
1 ft. 9 in. wide and 2 in. thick, and the 
comers are dovetailed and four cross rails 
are let in flush with the bottom edges (see 
Fig. 405). For a loose cushion seat, the 
seat frame need only be made on the flat 
from 1-in. stuff, the loose cushion lying on 
the top. Special attention should be paid 
to castoring, as the settee when the box 
portion is filled with goods will have con- 
siderable weight ; use 2-in. plate castors 
with solid brass runners. Before beginning 
to stuff, shave or rasp off all the sharp 
edges over which the covers will pass. The 
back is removed and stuffed on the bench. 
The lower part of the back and the insides 
of the arms are tufted and buttoned. The 
seat is sprung with eight G-in. chair springs, 
fixed two to each cross-rail. A cotton 
tapestry or cretonne, at about Is. a yard, 
will be a suitable material for covering the 
settee, and the whole of the outsides of the 
box and scrolls should be covered by pasting 
and tacking, the edges being finished with 
coloured furniture cord, sUp-stitched on. 
The inside of the box should be either 
stained and varnished or painted light blue. 

Dividinsr Settee. 

A settee constructed as shown in Fig. 409 
is found very convenient where room is 
a consideration. Fig. 409 shows the com- 
bination as used to form a settee, but if the 
parts were placed back to back, the result 
would take the place to a certain extent 
of the useful though cumbersome centre 
ottoman. Another position, gained by 
partly dividing the front, and allowing the 
back corners to touch, would result in each 
sitter being independent of his neighbour, 



or the settee can be properly divided and 
used as two corner chairs. Full dimensions 
for one-half only are given, as these will 
apply exactly to the other half, the only 
difference in the halves being that they are 
right- and left-handed. Fig. 410 shows the 
seat frame. To begin with the constmction 
of the settee, the legs and stumps are got 
from 2J-in. square stuff. Two legs can be 
set out and turned from a piece 4 ft. 2 in. 
long, the turning being done before sawing 
out the legs {see Fig. 4U). Four legs, as 
shown in Fig. 409, will bo required, and also 
two stump feet, each 1 ft. by 2J in., and 
two back comer legs, which are left 2J in. 
square for the full length, the oAer legs 
being cut down to avoid undue heaviness. 
To get the two seats close together, the 
rails are sunk ^ in. behind the level of the 
feet ; and if the edges of the upholstered 
seats are properly stitched up, they will 
slightly overhang and close the breach. 
The rail can be either stump-tenoned or 
dowelled into the legs; and if the former 
method is adopted, allow for tenons when 
cutring off the stuff. The seat frame will 
be greatly strengthened by wood dogs 
glued and screwed to the rails, as in Fig. 
410. The top rail is shaped and tongu^ 
as shown in section at Fig. 412, and 
the method of attaching this to the 
back comer legs is e.tplained by Fig. 413, 
the top of the leg being cut away to the 
thickness of the rails. Stuffing rails are 
fitted all round the seat frame, and two 
such rails are added to complete the panel 
rebates in the back. The decoration of the 
show-wood portions can be of inlaid 
stringing or reeding. The settee is mounted 
on eight socket castors, and in order to 
prevent motion when in use as a settee, four 
brass catch hooks, two underneath and two 
behind, engage with the. brass eye-screws, 
and keep the two halves together. The 
dimensions given are suitable for pine or 
whitewood ; but for hardwood, such as 
mahogany, walnut, oak, etc., the various 
members can be diminished by about one- 
fifth. 



1 


TT-Tf 






s 


-"i 




ijj 



COAL VASES AND CABINETS. 



Coal Vase. 

The conl vase shown by Figs, iu to 416 
should be made in oak. The two sides 
must be got out first, these being ul J-in 
fuU board when finished. They are cut 
to the shape shown by Fig. 41j5, the 



above the extreme top point of the sides, ^t 
IS cut 1 ft J in. long by 10 in. wide, i in. 
at each end bemg dovetailed on the under 
side to fit the grooves. The front edge is 
planed to a bevel; the back edge comes to 
the comer of the rebate. The bottom, of 
4-m. board, is 1 ft. } in. long by 1 ft. 3 in. 




Fig. 414.— Coal V«M. 



extreme measurement being 1 ft 6 in 
* •"/ ' ,h 1 '"■ Wgh. They are then 
grooved halfMiovetaU and rebated on the 
back edge, us shown by Fig 417 The 
back and bottom are of J-in. board, and 
the rebate and bottom groove should be 
made accordingly. The top is of J-in 
board, wh oh should not be more than 2 in 



wide, the length being measured along the 

f "^ \.f^ '' *'"'° *™''*<* ""« »«™8 as the 
top. Whan this is done, the pieces are slid 
in place in the grooves, using glue, which 
must be hot and not too thick. Sec that 
the bottom is not out of square ■ then 
stand It upside down and glue four blocks 
at the corners as at Fig. 416. 



COAL VASES AND CABINETS. 



rif. «U.— Sldi Elentlon of 
Coal Tmo. 




Fig. 417.— Inner Tiev of Bide Piece 
of Coal Vase. 



,1: 

I; 

l' 








r 




p 


■-M 



.'i 



1» 



^Ck of Co«l Vmim Tl, 1. ■ 

fdiment attached, Till , i^'f' "l"" 
'ft- 3 in. high by i in ,l.:V"':>"8 '•y 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEI.Y. 







Fig. «»,_SMjtioa 
of Coal Vase Lid. 



"p. 421 Mid 43t-ShOT,l 
Hold«r for Cornl Vaia 



nre then worked on the front with „ a ■ 
gouge, and a piece of l-in bv Tin *''".• 
ogee moulding is put on ^7 *""■; """^d 
section by Fi/ U tT 1^1 ?' ?*"""■ '" 
in place ^Kt lo^he'tir'Stl^'^ 
aud top. The foot piece It k^T""l 

also used Th ■ ""ttooi. glue being 

Wow'tte r acTThelT" t"""'"^' 
with « .»„ ".""ace, the holes being filled 
«'.th a stopping to match the wood 

iu^nd X^^-'^l: 'i^ t"-' 'aken 
2J-,n. by J in „T •'f'^'l'' •>" "^de of 

mUse^^an*d";nrS™iu'tor'^ "ir^ 
worked on the inner frtnt"SgesTnd a 
1-.U. groove IS made to receive^^hh \td 




Hy. 4M.-Coal CabiMt 



Srd"'a^:!X-rth':rk-''.--dor 

ability, m which T. 1 "^"^^"'^ taste or 

matejal usel^does'n' t'ttt""?h' t*"" 
h-nged to the front cdeToStL . '"^ " 
being planed to fit. anf ,1 w „?f ' ^^''' 
^behadforthepurposV'Se'sirri™ 



GOAL TA8ES AND CABINETS. 



1:!1 



put 
loold 

■ide 
>ard. 
1 for 



as those used for piano [aUb, but shorter. 
Strap hinges in brass or copper may be 
used {see Fig. 420), and are much flasier 
to put on, though they are generally used 
to give orname t to plain Hds, vhich 



shovel can be obtained to match, on which 
may be put a wood handle of the Hame 
material as the box. Figs. 421 and 4:^2 
show the shovel holder, which is made from 
l|-in. by iV'in- thick strip brass. This is 




Fig. 424. Fig. 43fi. 

Figs. 424 and 43B.— X'ront Elevation and Cross Section of Coal Cabisot. 



are simply of board, the grain running 
vertically, with a narrow clamp at each 
end to prevent warping. The coal vase is 
now ready for polishing. When this is 
done, add the fittings, including two handles 
for the sides, the hinges, and the brass knob 
towards the lower edge of the iid. 
Coat Shovel and Holder. — A small brass 



easily hammered to the shape shown, and, 
when properly polished and lacquered, is 
screwed to the back, .") in. from the floor. 
This holder keeps the shovel handy, though 
out of sight (see Fig. 415). A lining of 
galvanised sheet-iron should be made ; 
but this, of course, is certainly a job for 
the sheet-metal worker. 



il 1 



m 



CABINETWORK AND JOI.VEBY. 



Iff 




V, Tig. 484). 



^M"** (0, rig. 426j. 



COAL VASES AND CABJNKTS. 



Coal Cabinet. presented liy Fig. iiC; (hi, illu.frution 

required, the coal and coal shovel Wing the mwing at K (Pig. W4). Enlarged .IrtiiiU 




ng. «St.~-I>«tftU of Back of Coal Cabinet {F. 
Flf. «B). 




Fig. 4SS.— Fart Horlioatal Seotlon 

tbroagli Fr<mt of Falling Cabinot 

{Q. Fig. 484). 



quite hidden from sight when the box 
is pucihed back into place. An illus- 
tration of the pivot and grooved piece by 
means of which the rotating movement 
of the coal box is obtained will be given 
later. Fig. 424 is a front elevation. The 
construction is fully explained in the vertical 
cross section (on Une a a, Fig. 424) shown 
by Fig. 425. Some instructive details are 







s 

J 


1 




1 

'i 1 


J 




f 

^ 


i 


V 





Iff- 4t4— PUtM tnd OrooTt for BoteUag 
OmI B«. 




Hf. ut.— 81iMt HMal Coal Box 
for Cabintt 

at B, c, D, E and F respectively are shown 
liy Figs. 4l>8 to 4.i2. An enlarged part 
horizontal section on the line G (Fig. 424) 
is presented by Fig. 43.'). The arrangement 
(already referred to) of supporting the coal 
1)0.1 on pivots is illustrated Ijy Fig. 4.i4, 
the actual coal imx of iron, "without its 
wooden container, being shown by Fig. 



ir 



MUSIC FURNITURE 




rig. 438. 



"- «. «* «r.-„™. „, .„. ,.„„^ ^ ^ J^-- ^ 



MUSIC FVRNITUaE. 



lis 



nifiit KivinK oiiay tmm to nhn-t nml othm 
mu.il-. The Hapa may all Im i)nwn at Ihn 
Muni- time it n«M«iir.v. and Iw hrlU Invfl 
with the (liviiinn on wKirh the trav nliilea l>y 
the bt- , quadrant itaya. Theae" atari are 



Hapa are ■eiuied, when rioaed. I... aprinn 
oatrhea fixed oil the inaide. and can lie opened 
only by a key. For itome purpoMea, it will 
Iw found more ronvenient to uwi Huah 
■pring oatcben on the outaide. without a key. 




Fig. 4U. 
Figi. 4S< and <».~-Cniii Saotlon and 

miido of |'„-in. sheet lirass turned up at one 
end and fised to the flap and slotted in the 
centre to work on the screw. The troy i» 
drawn out by a finger being placed through 
o hole in the division, the latter being in the 
centre of the tray. The flap when down 
forma a table on which the troy rests when 
partly drawn. It is unnecessary to draw 
the tray out the whole distance, except 
io place it on a table or counter, and the 




Tig. 43a. 
Longitudinal Section of Moaie CabiDOi. 

Material for Muiic Cabinet.— The walnut 
required will be n» follows : Four legs, 
each 4 ft. in. by 2 in. by U in. ; nix front 
rails, each 2 ft. 3 in. by 2J in. by 1 in. ; 
two end rails, i«eh 1 ft.'l in. by ij in. by 
1 in. ; one division, 1 ft. 11 in. by 1 ft. 4} iii. 
by 1 in.; five divisions, each I ft. if in. 
by 1 ft. 3J in. by 1 in. ; one bock roil, 
a ft, 2 in. by 2} in. hy 1 in, ; rnir t,-.,-., 2 ft. 
5 in. by 1 ft. in. by'ii in. ; six flaps, each 



11*1 




128 



I '■ 

I 



shelf " ft "?'•"* ["• W '"• : ■>'«' l^ttom 
snelf, 3 ft. 2 in. by 1 ft. 5 in. by i in • 
two ra,l8 each 2 ft. by 1 in. by I in. * Z' 
™.l8, each 1 ft. 5 in: by I in.U J i7° 
one starting, 2 ft. 3 in. by 2i in. Mr I ^' : 
two startmg,, each 1 ft. B in* by 2* in bV 
1 )f' -U'-'^ ^l^y,^»<"<^. each 1 ft. 11 in. by 

each Ai n- ■ 'f' Y* '"• = '''^ *™y ''«k'. 
each 1 ft. 11 ,„. by 4 in. by i in. ; six trav 
dl««on8, each 1 ft. 3j in. gy"* in. by] ™^ 
one back of cabinet. 2 ft. 11 in. by 2 ft b^ 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



locks and screws ; six pairs of 2-in brai 
arrow butts and screws ; ^elve Mn. by jT 
by Ti-in. brass quadrants; twelve No 12 

iheV„"p1^?jt.Te"p''°-* *""■"' "™^ 
„ '•*«'„''' <iW'>'=t--To set out the various 
parts, first face the four legs straight and 
square one edge and gauge each side to if "n 





ri«. 440. -EnlugKi itetau of Top 
of Mutlc Cabinst 

f ';"• = '?■"■ ^d stiles, each 3 ft. by IJ in by 
1 in. ; four end rails, each 1 ft. 2J in bv 
H in by 1 in. ; two end panels each ' ft 

"ftt.'i",^*'"-,;'°"'»™wi:;s,;ah 
^iihi^^2'i-,:-/ii::,;,'5~ 

mouldings each 2 ft. Uin. by /in by'* t 
four mouldings, each II in. by 1 in. by * i^' : 
SIX astragal mouldings, each 4 f, ZVIn 
H i m. ; SIX brackets, each fi i„. by * \n 
by.!S'hY'"t"«"'<'^^'=»^l'lfi3^- 

required. Four IJ-m. Acme ball castors 
and screws; si.v fancy brass dmp '^°ll 



Fi«- 44a.— Oartor 
for Uniio 
Cablnat. 



Fig. 441._Part Horlmnta] gaetlon 
of Mulo Cabinet 

thick; select for the front the two leirs 

across thl . ^ ""'' ?"' "■ "I™"' «■«= 
ZtZ, '■"■from the end selected to 

3 ft o» ?; 'l''T .""' ''"" ^'^^ <-« 
ho cn^m ' ' '*,""« ""' distance to 
lower enro^rr?"' "'j""" •"™'^»'' «' the 

uf f^ It "* "■■ '<• determine the extreme 
length. Next set out for the 8inl-in„ „f .T 
panels on the face side of the two fit I's' 
he length of the panels being 3 ft M in 
ea™g U in. fr ,i, underside of f 
top »,„l from the ijno „£ ,1,, diminish 



■ 



MUSIC FUBNITCHE. 



127 



nng 
rasa 
-in. 
12 
ron 
are 
Ige 
ind 

>a8 
nd 




Fig. 4M.— View ihowiiig P«tail. of Mn«io OabiMt 



Flipi. 



I 



,-rrfl 



f 1 



m 



128 



M 



«ff! 



(»ne Pigs. 440. '41) i, „„, 

t" the maker t, „ u" "^ "onvenient 

pita after the MnUlT'" «,!'"' ""• ™«"« 
^- the L'-^/ZttciToa^^t 



CABWETWOBK AND JOINEHT. 




r«. 444.^PartV.rtlc.lS«tionofEnd„f 
Mailo Cabintt 

of the caL^r ;4 44 T Vh ^ T''l' 
legs may now be prepared ...J.^ ^^'^ 
panel. t'^epared, but without the 



Set off from the li„ h?"? '"*» *» 'eg,, 
of 64 in and „r '° °' ^'T"^'^ « ^«»«nce 

Fromtet?* f" t*-'^- o£°'t t'^- 
of tTe r il 'ani a"^""":!! "1 ""> """''»«» 
width of the fllTS ""■ '«■«*•' '" the 
until si. s;t,t^'„\»,tr^*.«W»pn.cess 

sitirc™*^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

mortice being in 'from thT™"; '^ «"' 
allow » J i„ * ■ "' ""^ '*ee of the leu • 

»pac'. ani "a iTm' t*""- '"''""edia't^ 
i^/onth^li^rre'tfrV^Tr 

sSitToL;ndte\'^*''''^i' 

width, othefwiseThtn af Z™Ts 'Stfj 
a gapmg oint will show Si .*?,'* 
which fit these mortices will 1^%^,/"'' 

outthesho'u&Ss^ri'^tlS'" 
tetnrafeg"tfrt'''r""' "-'■"• 

reL't^^cI'Vt "deeV '■"? "" '' """ 
for the flap (see C S tJ"™ ',.""' 
18 then worked on .£ ^ 1' J*" moulding 
of which pSs Mn*"?' ^«^' 'l"^ »?<«« 
the flap. The Lr^ beyond the face of 
for the'side tiJ:*^ (X^ TiZ 'TJ"^''^ 
case a double tenon is n„V t. '' ^ '" ""« 
a mortice * in w™e i, 1 T "^i^' '" """ 
: in. from tl^Sffe oTtt I'e^'tl' i""^''- 

sntif,n-i^X^s 

Next groove tit t"wo tltTeg^llh"'?"!- 
face to receive th. T * " ""' "^^ 

peiledfrlZ;tin'''^r«l''Ttf' 

-t rwr;'ii' at:d'iit?4^ ^- ''« -- 

inner face o receive thiT' ^""''^ ™ ""e 

bourd. Slop ail the L*"' ™ "« '•^'i' 

P ail the grooves at the line 



MUSIC FUBNITUKE. 



of the mortice for the lowest rail. Then face 
up the four end gtiles and square the edges, 
and gauge to U in. full by { in. thick. The 
top and bottom tails must also be pre- 
pared to the same ai». On the face edge 
of the four stiles set out 3 ft. 1 J in. and l\ in. 
from each end. Take the rails 1 ft. 2 in. 
long, and set out on the face edge lOj in. 
between the sight lines, and in each end 
of the stiles prepare a mortice, IJ in. wide 
from sight and j in. thick ; these mortices go 
nght through the stiles, and the remaining 
} in. beyond the mortice forms the haunching. 
Prepare the rails with a tenon on each end 



groove m the bottom rail of the side 
framing. The length of the bottom will 
be 1 ft., lOJ m. between the shoulders, 
allowmg m addition the |-iu. tongue on 
each end, and the width will be 1 ft. 3} in. 
On the top side, along the back edge, is made 
a groove for the tongue on the lower end of 
the back ; the latter is { in. thick, so that 
the face of the groove will be f in. from the 
back edge. The grooves for the remainder 
of the divisions may then be set out, and 
will be 5J in. from the under side in each case, 
the finished thickness of the divisions being 
i in. Sink them W in. deep, and cut the- 




ng. 44T.— sliapMl Eaii or 
Iduic Cabliut Diviilim. 




rig. MO.~Quidnuit Biaotot 
of Kiulo CaUint 



to fit, and the two panels 2 ft. 8} in. long 
by U| in. wide by | in. thick finished, 
ftepare on each a tongue | in, deep by ,', in. 
thick to fit the grooves in the stiles and 
rails. When the ends or side framings are 
glued up, the back shoulders must be bevelled 
off, and the tongue fitted into the legs so 
that these are quite flush with the inside 
face of the legs. 

Tray Divisions.— The grooves to receive 
the divisions on which the trays shde must 
now be set out and sunk. The under side 
of the first division or bottom will be level 
with the top side of the rail, and on each 
end of the bottom is prepared a tongue J in 
square (see Fig. 444), to be fitted into a 



Fl{. «M.-Eiid of Hnsle 
Cabfnet Tny. 



divisions to exactly 1 ft. 11 in. long by 1 ft. 
3|in. wide, fitting them tight up to the back. 
Now from the front edge of each division 
set out the J^n. housing at each end for 
the quadrant. Cut in i in. from the end as 
at A (Fig. U-i) ; the guides B for the trays, 
will be 2 in. wide by jin, thick, and are cut 
and fixed with jin. screws, the counter- 
sunk heads being dri >i just below the 
surface. 

Top of Cabinet— The top is 2 ft. 4 in. 
ong b} 1 ft. 5} in. wide by IJ in. thick, 
and a moulding is worked on the face and 
return edges, while on the under side grooves. 
are prepared to receive the tongues on the 
side^ framings, and back (see Fig. 444). 



ISO 



P» "PP" '"«« i» also grooved to rereive 
the tongue on the lower edge of thesS? 

Bottom Shelf—The bottom shelf fiv«, 
«bout .n. from the floor Una, ^TboTH. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 








Tin. 449. 



MUSIC FURNITURE. 



181 



and then fit them into the taces provided. 
Mark each one as fitted on vuv bottom edge 
with a amall chisel, hang each at the bottom 
edge with a pair of 2-in. arrow butts, and 
fit on the quadrants (Fig. 445). The top 
screw (Fig. 443) is a No. 10 round-headed 
brass screw, f in. long, fixed into the leg 
(see also Fig. 446). 

Spring Catches, Trays, etc.— The spring 
catches or locks should next be fitted to 
the flaps, and the striking plates let into 
the rails. The astragal moulding fixed on 
the face of the flap should be prepared and 
polished, but not mitered round until the 
polishing of the flap is done. For the bracket 
shown in Fig. 445 the legs and rails should 



the tray is withdrawn. The bottom is 
fixed to the back, sides, and divisions by 
screws inserted from the under side. 

Music Cabinet with Swinging 
Drawers. 

The music cabinet shown by Figs. 448 
and 449 is convenient of access, and occupies 
very little floor space, the width over 
mouldings being 1 ft. 11 in., the depth 
1 ft. 2 in., and the height 3 ft. 9 in. Fig. 448 
is a cross section through the middle of the 
cabinet, Fig. 449 showing a half front eleva- 
tion and a half sectional elevation. The 




Fiff. wo.— Eoriiontal Bsction titrouf' Mosio 
Cablnat with Bwliigiii( Dntwns. 

be sUghtly housed, so that no gaping joint 
shall beseen. For the trays, cut the six fin. 
bottoms to 1 ft. 9i in. long by 1 ft. 3 in. 
wide, with the front edge slightly rounded. 
The six backs are 1 ft. 9i in. long by 3} in. 
wide by | in. thick, the twelve sides 1 ft. 
2| in. long by ,3J in. wide, and the six 
divisions 1 ft, 2J in. long by 3| in. wide by 
i in. The sides are dovetailed to the back 
at the angles in the ordinary manner, the 
pins being cut on the back. Also the front 
ends of the sides are cut to shape and the 
top edges are slightly rounded. The centre 
division is tenoned at the back, three small 
mortices being prepared in the back, am' 
are finally gluc.l and wedged. The front 
end of this division is cut to the shape shown 
in Fig. 447, and may have a hole by which 



r>«. 461.— Section throngh Upper Part of 
Muile Catilnet showlBf Drawer Extended. 

thick linos on the drawer fronu i the half 
front elevation indicate strips of inlay. 
Two side pieces a (Fig. 448) are shaped as 
shown, and tongued and tenoned into the 
feet B. The upper ends of the side pieces 
are connected by the top piece o, which is 
tongued and rebated at the ends (see Fig. 
449), and tongued along the front edge (see 
Fig, 448). The tongues, of course, are for 
securing the moulding attached to the ends 
and the front edge. The side pieces are 
further connected by two frames, one at the 
front and the other at the back. The 
three rails of the back frame are shown 
at D in Figs. 448 to 451, and the stiles of the 
same frame .it k. The rails of the front frame 
are shown at F, and the stiles at o. Both 
frames are attached to the sides by means of 




111 



ii 



]« 



i 



I! i I 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEBY. 







Hg. 4S9. -CombliiKl Muiic 
Jr™w.'° strengthen the framework To 



CaWMt and Writljig Tabl., 



'd/if///, 



'-' "f fte bi.ge piL m„r^*trt 



MUSIC FUBNITURE. 




Flff. 48S.— V«rtie4l SaotioB Umnfli ComUned 
Cabinci and Wrltiiig Table. 



Fiff. 4S4.-Part Hori- 
xontal Baction of Com- 
bined Cabinet and 
Writing TaWfc 




Pif. «».-Top;Drawer 
DiTliionB of Comblnad 
Cabinet and Table 
Doretalled^io Oablos. 



133 





Tig. 487.— 
Section of Huiio 
Stand for Com- 
Uned Cabinet 

and Table, 



Tig. «08.— Part Plan of Combined Cabinet and Table, 
witb Deik Lid Bemoved. 






'*i^»>J*:jV' 



Fig. 488.— Uneio 



V 

I 



ii 




IM 



'I 



W. been trimmed to ^ SWly in pLceTw 
«n.y be removed, .nd the wZ^feth-i^ 

drawer, ,„d «,ribed off, .nd rece«^ cut „ut 
Then, replacng the drawer., before the 
hinge, are screwed into place, a Triber iS 

order to avoi{undue .train u,«n ti^4 J^ 
tte drawer, .hould rest.when'c^osS .St 

hinge^'wl^hrfXTeSmrtltt 

must not be \L than 11 in At th^ "T 
'tshouldbeaboutlft li: 6ak JA °'" 
or black walnut may b"u«.d L -i^"^' 



CABmETWOHK AND JOINEBT. 



Combined Music Cabinet and Writing, 
table. 

Ik. V ■ ' , ' ™''d gables A (Fii 4-,<il 
these bemg j in. thick f the bottim*,he1f n',' 



and the drawer divinona o wifk »k 

the moulded top. , d.S J» ' 

de.k hunlr . . fi J ' * bottom ; h, 

K de,k lid rf — •"." "' '•'»'' »»P .■ and 
„i,i t ,. ^^' " "hown in Fi. 454 ;„ 
whjeh A show, the gables; 00 drawer di^ 
won.; and D, drawer .lid.^ >; ", orawer dm- 

fvotrburn'^betHS 

the de7 Thei fce.^"" »* ""= ^<^^ »^ 
to the top of tM anTth'"""'"* ''°™ 
mitered and bradded Th. 1 ,. •"™? "" 

therrSt^-- w^th'-a^rXt o? 
top p' de"k b^ottt' ^ '^r' '^' ■"""W'd 



MUSIC FCBNITUBB. 



»w»y to about f in., and the moulding cut 
in and returned on itself. The lock i« then 
fixed, and the yellow pine r fitted to the 
•pace which haa been cut out. A division is 
fitted into the back part of the desk and 
bndded on the angle to the top and bottom. 
Light shelves are put in between, and either 
raggled to the sides and division or carried 



Iffi 

Music Stand.— A music stand would be 
almost a necessary accompaniment to the 
cabinet, and details of it are shown in 
Fig. 407, in which a shows the brass rod, 
B pieces of flanged brass for the rod to 
slide in, and c the music easel. It consist! 
of a brass tube a, bent at the top to receive 
the easel o, and is intended to be portable. 




Fig. ML 



on a small fillet. The drawer front is 
moulded to the same shape as the gables, and 
dovetailed. The small projections on the 
front edge of tie gables are rounded over 
and bradded on. The construction of the 
shelves is seen in Pig. 43.3. A piece of pine is 
screwed on to the back of them, and another 
piece immediately at the back of the hole 
for drawing them out is screwed up from 
the under side. Ellels to carry them are 
screwed to the gables. 




Ilg. UO. 



I1(s, 4S« to 4«.— mat ElsvatiiM, Part 

Tsrtleal Ssotloa. sad Horisontal IniUoB 

at Hnato BtooL 



Pieces of brass b are bent to suit the siie 
of the tube and flanged. Two small pieces 
are screwed to the back side of the easel, 
and two small pieces and a larger piece are 
screwed to the back of the cabinet, and near 
to one end. A hole is bored through the 
large piece and tapped to suit a butterfly 
tap. This prevents the stand from slipping 
down when in use. The bottom piece of 
brass will require to be plugged up to keep 
the rod from slipping to the floor. Fig. 458 
is a design to suit this music stand. 

Music Stool. 

The music stool shown in elevation in 
Fig. 459 is intended to hold sheet music, the 
space inside being divided into three. The 



\k 



IM 



CABINBTWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



tTWl 








1 1 


J • ' 




r 






ll.''l 





MfSIC FOENITUBE. 




W 



^'te.II^'sS.r^^'*' I^ej"-*'"' c™ action Pig. 471,-Horl.ont.l S.CUO. 

for Uuie StooL „, Murio Stool S..t. otc., at through Hu.ic Stool Pott at 

J (Fig. 484). K (Fig. 4<S). 



I.'M 



\fl f 



<wo end tnn,, .JTZ^iI"."^ •■"* 



CABmEIWOM AND JOINEHT. 







»l»p«l Port, ua B,.^ 1^^ •■ 



•'ottomodgeof'^h" mmes Thrr"' ""' 
t len taken «i,.l ] .'^ frames are 

hottomZelttV^" "!« P»»'» Che 
thp lin. *^- , * "''™ come dine with 
the Ime previously drawn upon the Llts) 
and lines are drawn for tl,„ i i I"^"'' 

ea.onKet;:.'rnS"rlU"X?.t" 



with 81up«| mum ud Bldii iMt. 



botlomintumbeingserewodtoit. Previou. 



MCBIO rURNITUKE. 



tin ollwr to the undar licia of tha Ion. Thi« 
»rvM to IcMp tho top ridid. Thp top itwif 
« totmad of » hardwood Inacd with iron. 
andi mitpra<l to it. m i,» to ahow aide wood 
all roiuid tha moulding, Tha top ia thfn 
hinged, and thi- Wk AxM on, altar wluch 
It nuy be talten ofl. and the whole atool 
poliahed. The mouldinf) thould be poliahed 
at the aame time, but atained a aliiihtly 
daiker colour. After the top ia poliahed, 
the aeat ahould be upholatered, and the 



hy Fii, 4«* end elevation bj" Fig. 4(11 
vertical oroia aection by Kg. 4iH, and in 
half honanntal aaction (on line o d. Fig. 4(1") 
and half pUn br Fig. 4fl.-< (aee p. l.W). 
Kg. 4<W la an anlarged detail ahowing th.. 
method of framing up. The method cif 
mortiaing, ate., for the leg, i. ahown in 
rig. 4(17, and enlarged dctaila at o, H l 
and K reapeitively by Figa. 4W to 47l.*4,' 



M 



Tig. 4ri-Bha|Md Pott 
for UwAa ItooL 



IS 



Hg. <T>.— Ea r .11 «:i 
Itaol Btnti.ua.. 



mouldings planted. The inside of the 
atool ahould be stained and «lightly treated 
with polish, so that it may harmonise with 
the outside when the lid is opened. Fig. 41)1 
IS a horizontal section through the stool, 
showing the general arrangement of the 
inside. One of the sides in Fig. 401 is 
ahown with the fielded panel, but the maker 
can vary it with a small surface moulding 
if the field is likely to entail too much labour. 

Music Stool with Box Seat. 

A niuaic stool with a K->x ssst k illustalcd 
in half elevation and half vertical section 




n*- «Tt.-lltiala ttool BaUa Taaaned 



Fig. 477. Doulila-taEen betwaan Diaaar 
naming and Fast af Haalo StoeL 

Music Stool witli Shaped PosU and 
Rislngr Scat. 

Figs. 473 and 473 illustrate a music 
stool with a seat that can be adjusted to 
any suitable height; a drawer is also 
arranged below the seat for holding music 
etc. Mahogany or walnut would bo a 
suitable wood. First prepare a mould of 
tbiii wood to Fig. 474. Line this out on 
IJ-m. wood, and cut and dress it to the 
mould. The turned stretchers, half of one 
being shown by Fig. 473, are fixcu to the 
brads of iho Bciolls, holes being bored to lit 
the end pins. They may be enriched by 



'■ 


i- 


if 
j 


1; 


■ \^'l 


(:!: 


^linH 


,iT:'!i 


I ' '^ 




m 



140 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY. 



flu ing the plain parts. The »id. and back 
rails, i in. thick, are tenoned int.. the posts 

i in. from the flush. The two fore edges for 
the drawer are IJ in. deep by f in. thick, 
and are doubbj-tenoned into the posts (see 
f'g- 4.0, and kept } in. from the front. 
Two top rails, IJ in. by j in., are tenoned 



and screwed from the inside. The drawer 
IS dovetailed together in the usual way. 
The stuSed seat consists of a frame of 
birch or other suitable hardwood, the 
sties and rails of which are 2 in. by 1 in 
A bead D (Fig. 480), } in. deep, is glied on 
the edge to form the check for the stuflkg. 
fhe seat is kept in place by being checkA 




Hg. i7(. 

ng» 4TS ud 47». -SMtlmu of 
Hniio stool Ormwer. 

into the posts at the front and back in the 
same manner as the drawer fore edges. Fies 
4i8 and 479 show sections of drawer Two 
bearers a (Fig. 479) are glued and sprigged to 
the side rails to carry the drawer sides, 
and guides b make up the thickness of the 
posts. Two guides c (Fig. 479), of the thick- 
ness of the top fore edge, are glued to the 
mside of the rails. A top, } in. thick, with 
a thumb moulding on all four edges, is 
carefully fitted round the posts at the corners 



He. 4(1.— Plan of Hulo Stool S«t 
Frame. 

at the boraers (Fig. 481), and two brass rod. 
are placed between the end posts ; the last 
have racks cut in them to the depth of i in 

*?!.^1*- *?*• '^° """ "' 'o"" 'he seat.' 
sniit the rods which form a support for the 
seat to the required position. The fronts 
of the posts are fluted, and the scroll parts 
are channelled. The stool would look well 
If trench polished, the seat being covered 
with velvet; but many other materials 
would also be suitable. 



Miit. 



HALL STANDS. 



Umbrella Stand with Turned Posts. 

A CONVENTIONAL view of an umbrella 
Btanil to be made in oak ia presented bv 
J/g. 482. The flowing are the general 
dimensions : 2 ft. 6 in. long over the posts 
by 10 in. deep, and height from floor to 
top rail 2 ft. 4 in. It is divided into three 
equal spaces by the two cross rails as shown 



in Fig. 48.1. First prepare the four posts 
(Fig. 484). Sijuare tham up to 1 J in. by IJ 
in., and mark off the squares and mortice 
for the top and bottom rails before turning. 
The top rails are IJ in. deep by j in. thick. 
Two flutes are worked on the face. The 
flat round (similar to that shown in Fig. 
48.J at the top) is added after the stand is 
glued up, for simplicity in working. Tenon 




I 



I-* 

I 



Hf. 4M.— Umimiia Sttai with taut g„^ 
141 



HI! 



in 



the r«iU to the po8t», keeping the latter 

o' the bottom rails, which are 2 in. deep 
by IJ i„. tUelt. They are rebated ta 

ram. The rails are tenoned to the nosta 
and set back i in. The flat round on the 
top edges ,s left off mitil the job is glued 



CABINETVVOBK AND JOINEKY. 



Oak Umbrella Stand. 

«t«n!i°„«"T*u ^S^ M"-iceabl6 umbrella 

f. 3 ft hil^''!. ??■ **' '' » «•■"»' view 
a J ft. high and 2 ft. 3 in. long, and ia best 

at the bottom, tapering to ti in. at the too 
and are curved and fretted a. shown in 
the Illustration. The lines in the Z^m 




Kg. 4M.— g«tlmi of Uabnlta 
StMid'i Bottom BaU am Pan. 



together. The two cross rails, U in deen 
by J m thick, are iixed to the 'two loJZ 
rails with short rebated tenons. When he 
«tand IS cramped up, the top rails can be 
&..shed off with the flat round moulding 
mitenng them into the long railsTee Fg.' 

Dost's t\ ""■" '"* ''""*'* '""'«■«■> the 
posts. The zinc pan fits between the 

.; r 't^ "fj' .■''"■"J"'! into thre 

p^in^:^':br''t;^rii-2e^ 
^nriu'ite^.'""''"^"""'''"'^^^^^' 



«»■ «6.-Pl»i, 0, va\nll» 
attnd'i Top-raU Joint 



Ij. Mt-Tnmed Foit 
ot (Tmbnlla stud. 



P-ces A (Fig. 487)''are%"in. by^jThf 
ends with two'^^'ma 1 dow'r T^f '" '1" 

£Y^;^.::te^Lrao;:;:S§ 

The lower framework, having rar.! „ 
take a anc pan ,n each end and » tile or 



HALL STANDS. 



Srlil T- ""'f^g^ »»tion of the 

The method of eoMtructing the fiminir 
» set out at Kg. 491. The end raU if 



Ih-^^u ""^ ""■» *■'*'' »»WW3 driven 
through the outside. A few reed, along Ihe 
face of the ra,l8 would improve the appear! 



Hg. «o.-B»ll, TU., Mid Pwi 
of Dmbniu Btand. 



the middle ra.U being housed in. Both the 
ong rails and the middle rails are poovri 

e.lln!^'' '° 'T'T° *■" ««■ ""d " "mall 

ead nailed round the under aid^ to hold 

il in position, the comers of the frame befng 



n». *»l.-Umr Tnmlng of Oak Umbrella Stand. 



«nce of the stand, or .inv other kind of 
ornamentation may lie introduced. 

More Elaborate Oak Sund. 

The stand shown by Pigs. 492 and 49;! 
would look welt if mode in figured oak 
fumed or stained a dark colour, and oiled 





IM 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEKY. 



IV£:l\r«fl.utii^-bfiirL'2 l; •«!?«. •»-«« home before tightening 

mortices J in. wide bv U^ l„„„' flL , i Fl " ""^ ""''"l ■•' '»''■ "«" l™gth 

I in. mae by ij m. long, the top of the tenons should be increawd. Fig. 4!»G 




ne. <M.— HOrt Etabonte Ook Umbnlta st»nd. 




- -5.0 . 

n*. Ml.— Fut Flan ud Fart Swtlon of UmbnlU SUL-d. 




Fig. 4M.— End Bourd of 
UmbnllA Stand. 




pair being inclined at 15°, the lower pair 
at 4a. Next square all the tails to one 
length; they shoulder to the end pieces, 
and the tenons (see Pig. 495) project about 
i in. The keyway should be slightly under 
the face line to allow th- key sufficient 
draw, otherwise it wouli i,i<.bably choke 



tig. 4U.— BaU 

and Fan of 

Umbnlla 

Stand. 



Tig. 4BB.— Tenon and Keyway 
on Umbrolla Stand Bail. 



shows a section of the lower rail and pan, 
only part of the latter being illustrated. 

Comer Umbrella Stand. 

The comer umbrella stand illustrated by 
Pig. 497 may be constructed from pitchpine 
and varnished. The finished thicknex; of 



gfateninf; 
the rails. 
p length 
Fig. iim 






ed. 



id by 

hpine 

R* of 




J 1 



HALL STANDS. 




Fig. i»e.— Prat DMign fo, corner 
StanillUU 



fini^hed^ The finiata are made separatelv 
doweUed and glued on. Fig,, aoo and rm 

the jomta. P,g. 502 i, an alternative pkn 



Hg. «».— Horljoniai Sactlon 
of Comer Stand. 



Fig. 301.— Part Enlarged Sec- 
tion of Comer Stand. 



A full-size plan should be n^de, and The 



I'' 



1« 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



i 



dimpiwions marM off frtim it to tho 
matetiol ; then nquarp tlip endu onil «lgp» 
of the leus. wt the Iwvel to on angle of 
45°, mark two lines on each end repre- 
aentinu the width of the mortices, set the 
marking gauge to the face ends of the 
lines, and scribe from them ; this will give 
the diagonal or face widths of the mortices. 
A snuir gauge, similar to a bevel, could lie 
made from a thin piece of hnnl wooil ; if small 
enough to enter the mortice it would he 
useful for correcting purposes. There are 




Tig. »04.— Huiginj Back with Braih Drawn. 



three tenons on the upper rail (see Figs. 
501 and 503), The back leg is in two parts, 
mitered, and finally glued together. The 
top and bottom side rails are framed to 
A and B (Fig. .jOO), and c and D. The two 
front rails are then entered at b, and the 
free ends of the front rails are entered at c. 
The mitre at a and D and the shoulder on 
the rails at c should meet. See that the 
shoulders fit well to the legs ; then remove 
the top front rail, and space it out for the 
fretwork. Starting at the centre, make 
a template of cartridge paper similar to 
Fig. 198, marking the curves wilh a lead 



pencil; then after the fretting is finished 
hx the parts with fresh hot glue. Next 
fit the lower shelf as in Fig, ISOO, which 
shows a plan of the under side of the liase. 
The shelf is formed of three boards } in 
thick, glued and bradded to the rails and 
mitered at the angles; three fillets an. 
shown, and to stiffen the mitre extra blocks 
may be glued under the joint. When the 
glue has set, trim off the top and the space 
for the drip tray ; the latter should lift out 
easily and lie given a coat of enamel paint. 
The cap moulding is ploughed to fit on the 
fretted rail, and mitered to the front legs, a 
side elevation or profile of one of which is 
given by Fig. 4(111, 

Hanrlng Rack with Brush Drawer. 

Fig. rm is a general view of a hall rack 
with brush drawer, which can be made of 
deal, stained and varnished, oak, mahogany, 
walnut, or any other similar wood. Fig! 
503 is a side elevation, and Fig. .Wii a 
transverse vertical section. The rack is 
.'! ft. wide at the top and I ft, li in, at the 
bottom, and has a total height of 4 ft. 
The round rail a is 1^ in. in diameter ; the 
pieces B (Fig. 507) are li in. thick, IJ in, 
wide, and 1 ft, long ; the shaped pieces c 
(Pig. 50"), the shelf d under the drawer, and 
also the top, are | in. thick. The aides and 
back of the drawer, and the ornamental back 
piece, are of Jin. stuff, the drawer bottom 
being f in. thick. M\ the other wood may 
be I in. thick. The curved sriles » are 
If in. by J in., and are cut out so that the 
grain runs tangential to the curve, or 
parallel to the line x x. The top end ia 
stub-tenoned to fit the piece b, which is 
morrised to receive it and also the stuh-tenon 
on the rail o. This joint is shown in Fig. 507, 
The upper rail H is IJ in. by | in., and ia 
dovetailed into the uprights as sho v« in 
Pig. .''07. The ornamental supports for 
the round rail having been shaped and bored 
are screwed to the uprights ; the positions 
of the screws are as shown on the piece 
B in Fig. .507, The brackets supporting 
the drawer j stop-housed to receive the 
lower shelf, whilst the upper ends are 
tongued to fit the grooves in the under side 
of the top shelf, which has a moulded edge- 
and ends. These joints are shown at j, k. 



BALL STANDS. 



nnd L ; wh«n it will alrn be Men that the 
«traight ends of the cun-ed itilea are notched 
out to receive the back comer, of both 
BhelvM. The back of these straight ends 
should be rebated for the ornamental piece, 
and provision should also be made in the 
same way for the backinn of the. drawer 
division. The drawer is of the usual con- 
struction. Suitable hooks and drawer hondle 
are fi.\«l in position as shown. 



147 

njouldings having straight memlwrs, the 
chamfer predominating. Almost any haid 
wood would be suitable; fumigated oak or 

Erne, stained a rich brown red, being per- 
«p» the best. The Iwck is upright the 
sides and front tapering to the top, to 
ensure steadiness. 

Side^ Back. etc. -The two sides ijre pre- 
pnreii from 1-in. board, tongued into a solid 
plinth at the base (see Fig. ."il.")). and housed 




r\t. MS. Fl(. BM. 

Figs. MS aai 6M.-<liU ElsvaUou and Cross 
Ssotion of Hanging Back. 

6-«. 6-iii. Hall Stand with Cupboarvl, 
Drawers, Shell, and Mirror. 

Figs. .508 and 009 give elevation.s of a 
no\-el hall stand which is of easy construc- 
tion, _ and quite rigid and substantial. 
Fig. 310 shows a vertical section. Fig. .011 
is a half-horizontal section at a (Fig 308) 
and Fig. 812 a half plan of the top. Fig. 313 
Aows the umbrella rack in half plan, and 
Fig. 5U is a half section shov ing drawers. 
The stand combines a liat-, oat-, and um- 
brella-stand, a cupboard fi r small articles, 
glove and brush drawers, a dressing mirror 
and a small table or shelf lo hold a Hower 
Vase, etc. The top may aUi be similarly 
utiUsed. The design is severe, most of the 




Fig. 007.— Joints for Banging Back. 

solid into the top, which overhangs about 
7 in. at the ends to carry revoUing coat 
hooks. The sides should be checked or 
rebated out J in. to receive the framed back 
as shown in Fig. bU, the checking to receive 
the mirror frame being made 11 in. deep 
between the shelves at t and H (Fig 310) 
For cheapness, the back might be filled in 
with matchlining, hut the appearance would 
not be so good. All the horizontal members 
shelves, rack, tray, brackets, etc., should be 
housed in the sides i in. full deep, and well 
glued; if they are all fitted tightly no 
nails or other extraneous fastenings will 
be reqmred. The frame shown at o (Fig 
olO), which carries the mete! umbrella tray 
18 mortised and tenoned together, and secured 
to the sides by angle-blocks ; but a more 



i ' 



CABINETWORK AKD JOINEBY. 



Il'il 




Fig. 811. 



Pig. 818. 




Fig. 818. 



Fig., 614. 



Flgi. 808 to 610.— Front BlanUon, 8ida 
ElAntion. and Vertieal Swttion of 
6-ft 6-tn. Hall Stand with Cupboard, 
Drawers, tie 



Flgt. oil to B14.— Half Section at Bottom, 
Half Flan at Top, Half Section at 
Centre, and Half Section throngh 
Drawen of HaU Stand. 



I 



BALL STANDS. 



I 




ng. •i».^otat> m. 5i».- i«rtioii thnuh 
snwn tf BaU Itud. Foot of Hill Itud. 



flf' ai7.— OMiUi of Hall Stul FtUH. 




rig. tao.— Oataili of Fig. oai—nirther Dataili 
H«U Stand Top. of Ball Stand Framo. 



Fig. nt — Bootlon tbTongh Pajwllod 
Back of Hall Stand. 



"rJ. 



.M'' 



I 



I 



ji 



tl ;-ti 



IM 



CABINETWOM AND JOINEBY. 



..i.i 
■ i IS ' 



».il»t«nti»l joint nur h» nuilo l.r ruttini 
ihi. hniiHng to . ,|nvrt«il «i,.ti„„ ,„rt 
ilriMng m the tnmt from tlw hark is at 
Fig. .■.i:). 

Umbrdte .»«k Sh,M. rtc.-Thc urahHU 
r«.k .hown in half pl,„ I,,- Fig. .-il.j prej^,, 
in th. cfntn., and i> divid«l into thni or 
more Uy. !,}• di»-i.ion rail.. Thi. n,k is 
madf of ) ,n .tu«, mortiH^l ,nd fnioned 
together •• shown l.y the dotte.1 line, in 
ng. .1 11. The bark tenons m»v lie taken 
through the rail, and wedged. t,ut the Jront 



L 1. . — "cuaru. nut ine ironr 
.ne, should Ih. .toDjwd ; the inner e,lge of 
tiie frame I. rounded and the front rail V 
moulded a. at Kg. .Mil. The two br.okel, 
under thi. frame should he grooved in the 
siiles, dowelled to th frame, and inserted 
in the side, with the former. The shelf n 
(Mg. .ilti) II of j-in. .tuff. it. edge having 
» wave mould and chamfer (we Fig. 517) 
Drawer Ca.e..-The drawer eaws, of | in 
•tuff are put together a. .hown in Fig. 318 
which 1. an enlarged section. The«, c«m« 
should be glued together and into the shelf 
nrst. and when dry can be iwerted in the 
sides of the stand as part of the shelf. 
A block should be uwd to keep the top of 
the case at it. proper distance from the 
«neH at the end.. 

. ^"""—Ihe drawers (see Figs. 514 
■ IN, and .-ilil) are lap dovetailed at the front, 
as indiciited in Fig. .517, and the back may 
l« also dovetailed; but a .impler and an 
equally effective joint for .mall drawer, i. 
shown m Fig. 51!). The outside of each 
■Irawer, a. well as the front, must be inclined 
so as to fit the slope of the case 

Cupboard Door..-The cupboard door is 
made of fin. stuff, mortised and tenoned 
together, a J-m. chisel being used. The size 
ot the tenon is indicated in dotted line, at 
r '*■»■' ' ™"t'"><i«tion of which is shown 
by Pig. ,>21. The top edge of the door 
must be square from the face, and should 
be kept down, as .hown in Fig. ji'o to 
clear the front edge of the top ; the open 
oint will not be discernible at the height 
but If desired the joint can be made clos^ 
by chamf. nng off the under edge of the 
top unti u IS square with the pitch of the 
iTont^ A quadrant stop should be glued 
round the two sides and the top of the case. 
Ihe panelled back, which should be Mrewed 



in dry, i. nade u three pieee^ framed and 
«u.hj»im.|led inrida aa diown in the n- 
arged section (Fig. i33), the dotted line 
indicating the tenon. 

SIO, ii3 and .•W4) i. mt,ni and screwed at 
the angle, and .houhl he twice checked- 
once for the ghm and once for the back 

glau and the back. 

ConMruction of Hall StanA-To set the 
^^.T."".';.""''.' '""■•'•rt drawing, of Fig,. 
51. to 514 Plane all th. .tuff ,f^„.,^ 
«n< gauged, fiiper the aide, to the pattern 
and place mu- „l them on the rod, andsquare 
UB tte width of all the houring. on the Sont 
edge, and the .houMers at the top and 
bottom a. .hown in the detail.. Pii, the 
other Mde with it. and repeat the marking on 
the edge ; then, from the back or upright 

in«de with a knife. Stop all the housing. 
i in. back from the face edge, gauge the 
reba e for the back, and work*the hoSsinp 
J^ 1l*?"' i"'! * '" «'ntt»-t>it hole, in 
them out with a l-in. cUkI ; then run in 
the tenon «w, cutting from the back edge 
to the notches, down the line., and cut out 
the core with chisels, finishing to a reguUr 
depth with an "old woman', tooth "for 
UM a grooving plane. Then work the 
tongues on the end. with a rebate plane, 
and also plough out the back rebate. Next 
mark on the open and lattice panels, and 
cut them out with a bow saw. Their 
edges are best cleaned off by shooting .traight 
andsquarea pieceof 1-in.stuff of convenient 
SIM ; hold it firmly by band or handKrews 
o the edge to be cleaned off, and draw a 

face of the chisel close to the piece f rnieat 
the process on the opposite side till the cuts 
meet, which will produce a clean, square 
surface. Next prepare the .helves and 
frames, their length, being taken off the 
Plans. Mark one side first, allowing i in. 
for housing, and mark the centre line ; then 
turn the piece over, adjusting it again on 
he centre hue, and on the other side repeat 
the markiug. The open frame, should have 
the sight lines of the rails squared up to give 
the size of the mnrticei Tho front rail at 



I 



, 



BALL 8TAXI>8. 



1 



l!::;K::£!^Sl.trin,:; rin^i:-^-.'^ - - t-- - 



th» HilKl. thf ntxM Mlm < leannl off l«.fi.r.. 
Ibe mortuc. »«• upt out. Th^ fnrnlj o( ih.' 
tupbfwnl nuy W ^B»ivr.l in. „r .imply , ut 
in tifht Iwtwnn ths >t'iiM and iMi|„| 




Hf . »>».— TU«d HiOl stud with Viiror ud 
■brbltllib. 

through top and liottom. If the first course 
18 decided upon, the fronts must be set out 
and made before the carcase, and in this 
case an elevation of the top part must be 
set out tn obtiin the sii?. Th.- back frames 
may be left until the carcase is together, 



"/etailed Mui.>'. 

I in,; ^-lu."! 

'1. Tu,;i h, 

i...!i'(i in 

:.■!.,• !., \i/ 

n-.e ot: 



11. r 
ihc 
I on 
■i'l. 



lU 

. , ■ . ,- - ■ ... Tht 

-helves, etc., Iieinn prrpami, comnvnre 
hltmu m; oil „hould W Hlled tinhily 
making any msinx requiml underneath. 
■Sfiuan- them with a Vvel <et to the eleva- 
tlu.i Miope ; th.' Wvel shnlild l>e used with 

the blade un i .ide of the st.nk to prevent 

It lieiiig applied wn.ngly, and should be trie<l 
on the (ace sides <>f the work. When the 
•helves have Im-n fitted in.Uviduallv, insert 
the shajwl rails in their uriM-n, and mark 
Ibe.r ends on the sides and groove them 
111. Next try all the divi.L.ns in pUce and 
.■ramp up the sides to . ' „ „lf j, right. 
If the sides are not st. ; '.„rt«B • "helf 

where ree|iiir«I, then t. In •. 
tion and mark and 1 ■ Ik.ii-,. 
clean up all the p«i» „■,.;, .', . ,. ,,,^1, ,i 
the case is rea'' 
The bottom fr« uf 
insertf.d first, the ..... 
ktiockeil in fror.. .'i.. li«( |, 
divisions are , . ,' m. > 
liroovea on one sid ' ihic' 
the bench for that |mi pi> 

lieing lifted slightly to ill, ,„ , 

Then the side is brough 'i > i , , the , r, 
which are glued and in»eii.i.. Lraiup the 
shelves, then fix the top bv nailing, square the 
carcase, and leave the cramps on until the 
glue IS drj.. Th. iMck can then be set out 
by lajnng the stiles with their outside edges 
on the rebates, placing the rails acrosa them 
inposition as shown in Fig. u<)8, and marking 
the edges of each on the other. The inside 
ines of the mirror frame con be obtained in 
like manner; mark the mitres on the face, 
work the rebates and moulding, cut and 
shoot the mitres, and screw them together 
OS shown in Fig. 334. 

Tiled Hall Stand with Mirror and 
Marble Slab. 

A perspective view of a tiled hall sUnd 
complete IS given by Fig. .JL'.j, and elevation 
and plan by Figs. n->l\ to 528. All the 
necessary details of construction are illus- 
trated on a larger scale by Figs. .J29 to 5Wi. 
The mirror, tiles, and marble slab, it will 
be seen, greatly improve the appearance of 
the stand, which can be made bv anyone 
'd ayjTAgo abiiity. A suitable hardwood, 
oak for preference, should be used. The 



ii'^i 



' ' 



a 






V,2 



rails and stiles for the back frame should be 

IJ in. long cut on both ends of the four 
bottom rails. The top rail is mortal o,> 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



'■4 




the under »,de to receive the 2-in. tenons 
s^de ^f I"'"- • "" """t'™' •»" on each 

f^m .L ■"""°' '»/ '^"'"n tl>» tile, 
form the mam part of the framework, the 



H». e«7. 



Flp. ne to Ml-Hai, irmt Elevation 
and Half longitnainal 8«rtion, Cro,, 
Seotion (on Lin. Y T), and Half Horirontal 
Sootion and Half Plan of Til«l Hall 
Stand. 



HAU, STANDS. 



I 




J 



Tig. M3.-CroHi SMtlni Omnth 

°°* "« Btll. ud miM 0/ BUI 

Stand (V V Fig. Bj«), 




Tit. m.-tixt Vmlc.1 a»..», .k u w. "*■ »"— "^ '•""»> «««<« through Prmt and 

* ran YMtiMj SMtion throogh Mliror of Back Framoi of HaU Btanl 

luM Hall Stand. 




Tig. »ai.-DrtaU of TUed HaU Stand Bail) 
Btawr and Sholf (B and D. rig. M»), ' 





ng..6SJ.— DotaU of Drip Pan. «to.. of Ball Stand 
(Z X, Fig. ou). 



II 



tne latter by stump tenons. The sluwrt 
piece between the rails e and ,7, iZ^ 
on, and serew^ from the back The S 
0. «h>ch are J in. thick, are placet/iT 



CABIXETWORK AND JOINEHY. 




Tig. »3..-Jotat. of Sid. u.d B«k Eall, t. BMk 
Dprill.tofTUadH.ni.tand, 

from the lace of the stiles, etc., and are 
glued and blocked behind. A s^lC 
rebate or the tiles is worked on the back 

enlargeu part section (Pig. ;5.'i4) The two 
«rt,eal bars between the tiles are "bated 
along both the back edges. A K^bn 

for r in ? "'I™ »'"• "« stop-rebated 

for in. to receive the end tiles. The bo7t 
uprights and coinecting rails are morS 
and tenoned together. The rails a7° } '„ 
thick and are set back i in. from the fa"; 
the tenons being IJ in. long. Either 
ordinary or bare-faced tenons* mar X 
rf: Four rails, 8} in. long, conZv the 
front uprights to the bark. Two J-in 
dowel, should be used in the end of each 
rail, these being i.t into the frame as far as 

fC; ^ JlV™*^ "' connecting the 
front and back frame, is shown in the enlarged 
detail (Fig. 530). Tie ends of the bear3 
which support the marble slab, are dove' 



tailed about J in. into the cross rail, , and 

Mol 'te" iTl'-'^J" 'ke detail (Kg 
,h, h. ''"^ '*'»•''"* he cemented to 
'^J. ^?«" '"•ith plaster-of.Paris Sxri 
with thm glue. The bottom board, S 
ha, two holes, 6 i„. i„ diameter, cit in k 
for the trays, should rest on the front Ld 
«de rails and butt against the S ^^ 
t^ie comers being cut to fit the two from";.' 

s\%lr "^^ '■'-''^ ™^-e.t "it 
shelf below the mirror is suDDorted ht 

w^h'tcre*"'"- •*"■« --edT^^^m: 
with screws inserted from the back A 

a tb. K I, ?" "' "" •"•'d in position 

Sr^HhoJ^L^x;^-^ 

section through the mirrorThrdrflr 
tra.v, are made of stout «nc, with a sSj 

o>er. The hooka should be fi.W in the 




P* B»e.-Joiat bMweni Itont Bail and 
1»l>ri»htofH.lI«,.nd(A.n»„j,. 

positions shown afte. -he work of con- 
be eft m It, natural ,ta e ; but if it i, to 
.« 2 bef '■r^"'.^'-^'- this sn'o'ud 



BEDROOM FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



7-ft. Wardrobe in Stained Wood. 

The coaTentioniil view presented by Fit 
oSl shows a wardrobe forming part of a 
complete suite which will be illustrated and 
described in this chapter. Figs. 3;J8 to 541 
are the working drawings. The suite mav 
be made eitner in ash or American pine 
and IS to be stained peen. As a prelim- 
inaiy to the construction, a scries of full-size 
working drawings must be set out accuratelv 
hut not necessarily with completeness of 
detail. It may be noted that Fig. 5.18 ueM 
not be drawn to its full depth from WL to 
front, but broken, »a shown in Fm ,541 

full depth must be given in .»,clw section. 
This method may be aj^Ued to all seetions 
which are too wide to go or. Ike board, but 
Hll must he full «ad unbroke. in one direc- 
tion «l least. In copying the drawap. 
take the main dimensiom jn.m the complete 
sections (Pig,. .5.58, 539, an-l 540), and the 
minor dimenaioiu mai siies of the com- 
ponent, from tlie enlarged sections. Fie 
■i-'S 1. . section .t „ A (r» ,540), Pig. ,3;i9 
auction at B B (Kg. rM).«,n Wing Jhow. 
enlarged at F^ 543, and fg. 5W , s« tion 

at CO (Pig. 55*), 

&u-«« ^ Wwdrabe. -Tie carca*. ,. 
made m two piece,, the capbo«d» bemg 
framed separate from the drawer ,«se for 
convenience m fcaodlisg ; the ^,>nke is 
also framed separately, and lift, on m* o«. 
Hie method of fitting toj^ther the <avtyM4 
carcase is shown in Pig. .542, p being' side 
01 the (bnsion, and k an* f the top and 
sub-top respectively. The bottom is fitted 
similarly, but runs through the two com- 
partments, and the divi.-lon is grooved into 



it as shown in the transverse section (Fig, 
041). Lap dovetails, about 2^ in. wide. 




P» «7,— 7-ft. Wanmiw. 



-»< stopped bat* i in., sei.ure the angles 
snd are aU used in the lower ea«. (Fins 
^ «.d i.4.5) The sub-top , (Fig,. ,541 ,S 
SfA IS honsed »lid into ,L diviS>n at ™ 




\4 ' 




M 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY. 




Tig. m 



n;. 9S9. 
Pip. BM mui M».-V.rtical BMtloiu of 7-ft. WutMx. 

At 




Tig. MO.— BorUmtal 
8«ctioQ throog^h 7-ft n- 
Waidmlw. 




BEDROOM FUBNITUHE AND FITMENTS 



end, and stop-grooved to receive the side p 
at the other, this arrangement being neces- 
sitated by the overhanging mould&il edge 
shown enlarged in Fig. jili. The hanging 
cupboard is fitted with a 1-in. square and 
sunk framed door, with a jg-itt. silvered 
and bevelled-edge glass panel, and a IJ-in, 
by J-in. rounded rail for hanging garments. 
The dwarf cupboard is fitted with a 1-in. 
square and sunk panelled door, three fixed 



187 

shelves, and a sliding trav fnt shirts, etc. 
The back (Fig. 7A1) is a 'j-in. square and 
sunk panelled frame. The lower case is 
fitted with a large drawer, a }-in. panelled 
back, and a }-in. chamfered plinth. The 
cornice consists of a l-in. by J-in. frieze, 
a 0-in. by 1-in. cavetto-ovolo cornice mould, 
and a 2-in. by J-in. astragal necking, with 
cover and back lioards complete. Prepare 
oil the stufi, gauging it to siie, and place 




H 



^ 



Tie MS —Fart Ttrtieal iMtioa 
of Wuilrobs. 



Il« H>. -riaa of Top of WaiArobe. 



IM 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBT. 



the face narla of the carcaw ,tu« on the 
inferior .ide., as the working i, from the 
inndes; and, if the aides reqnire jointini, 
endeavour to nake the grain ran in the 
»8ine direction in both pie. ,.,. Set oat the 
Hides, marking .11 the dimension, that occur 
on both pieces on the front edge in pencil 
pair the two sides, place the division between 
them, and square the lines across the three 
edges ; next square these across the sides 
with a knife where required. The insides 
of the top and bottom shouH he cut in 
J.ut the line representing the outsid. s should 
be marked ,V in. long to allow for cleaning 
o«. In marking the sizes of the grooves 
keep the upper aide e.xnct, and make the 



after having fitted each portion individually 
into place, smooth up but do not ghsspapelr 
all the insides ; place the side p on the bench 
and glue in the shelves, carefully squaring 
them upright ; let the top end overhang the 
bench, and fix oi. the top », which may be 
braddcd on, as it is too high to be seen. 
Then drive the division g on the ends of 
the shelves, and brad these through from 
the top side. Next stand the case on the 
floor on its top end, packing the shorter 
side level, and drive on the bottom, nailing 
the division through ; then turn the carcase 
over and drive on the top, first inserting the 
hanging rail o (Fig. 5.'i8) in its sinkings. 
The carcase, after being squared diagonally 





Hjr. BM. Balr PUn of 
Watdroters lower Case. 



Pig. Ms.— Horizontal Section 
of Wardrobe's Drawer, etc 



lower rather tight to the thickness of the 
shelves, so that these may be bevelled 
slightly underneath to fit tightly. .Stop 
all grooves i in. behind the front edges of 
the shelves, and gauge the rebate for the 
doors 1 J in. from the face edge, the extra 
im. being for the sinking ; the back rebate 
should be gauged also from the front edge 
The division q (Figs. 541 and 542) is cut 
flush with the rebate to the top r on its 
back ; above this it o^ersails and lies flush 
with the outside of the back, this part being 
rebated on the right-hand side to receive 
the back as in Kg. 547. The door rebate 
ot the left of the division stops at o (Kgs 
j.39 and 541) The top e (Fig. m) is re^ 
bated at both edges, and the bottom K is 
cut m the clear between the rebates. In 
setting out the top, allow J in. extra on the 
shoulders at each edge to fill the spaces 
tormed by the rebates in the sides as shown 
m Fig. 642. In putting this part together 



Pig. H«.— Edge of Snb-top 
of Wardrobe. 



with a rod, should be stood aside to dr}- ; 
then the back may be fitted in and the out- 
side cleaned off. 

■«* of Wardrobe.— The back may be pre- 
pared as in Pig. 547 ; this inside back eleva- 
tion IS not necessary for the setting out, 
but IS included to make the disposition ot 
the rails clearer The lengths of the stilts 
may be taken from Figs. 538 and 539, and 
the lengths of the rails from Fig. 540. The 
top rail on the left side is shown tenoned 
through the muntin, which is the better 
way, although, if preferred, it may be 
stubbed, as are the other rails. When done 
as shown, the muntin must be wedged to 
the rail before the panels on that side are 
inserted. 

^*'""-— Tlie doors are framed up square, 
the rebate on the longer one being formed with 
a small cocked bead as shown in Fig 548 
which IS a section at a a (Rg. 540) enlarged ' 
this 18 glued and sprigged round after the 






BEDROOM FUHNITURK AND FITMENTS. 




»%. Ml.— Upper P«it of W«nin>b«'. 1 



^- M«. — Brokon EnJaiivd CniB 
VerticKl Section of Waxdrobo. 






mm 











ini) 



CABINETTH'OHK AND JOINEHY. 



door ia e]ntnrA ofl ; a ghang fiUrt T Wing 
sprigged round inndr the gUw. and all 
ooverfd with the IJ-in. Iwrktioanl B, which 
H icifweil on. Tenons one-third o( the 
thickness and one-half the width are !:sed, 
as shown liy the dotted lines at T (Fi^ .W). 
The shorter door is sunk-panelled on the 




He. uo.— Hanftsc Itlls of WardnlM Door. 

face, and bead-butt panelleil on the back, 
the upper part being divided into four 
narrow upright panels with lancet heads. 
The construction is shown in Fig. 541t, 
where the muntins go through, and arc 
grooved to receive the panels ; but in the 
cheaper class of furniture all the rail and 
muntins between X and .x' (Fig. 549) would 
be planted on the face of the panel, the 
latter then running from the top to the 
bottom rail. The top rail must be cut with 
a taper shoulder to prevent the edge breaking 
away in cutting the arch. The doors should 
!« iitted in the case upright, with a joint 
all round equal to the thickness of a piec<> 
of brown paper, and should hang on opposite? 
edges as shown in Fig. 530. the centre of 
the knuckle of the hinge being in line with the 
edge of the case ; the doors will then open 
fiat back. Three hinges should be used 
for the mirror door, on account of the 
weight; and in glazing the door, pack a 
piece of washleather, or blotting paper 
folded, under the bottom edge of the glass 
close to the hanging stile, so that the weight 
may be taken at the inside lower end of the 
door, thus preventing racking. 

Lower Case of Wardrobe.— The lower case 
is shown in Figs. 544 and 545, the fiist- 
named being a half plan of the top, and the 
latter a horizontal section at N n (Fig. 541). 
The sides should be rebated for the back, 
but not at the front, and the outside dimen- 
sions must be exactly the same as for thy 
upper case. The bottom is grooved solid 



into the aides, and blocked in the angles 
underneath ; it should be cleaned ofl out- 
side before the plinth is fixed, and the two 
lower ends shaped afterwsida. The case 
should be squared before the back is fitted, 
and the latter then nailed in tightly. The 
drawer front can then be fitted hand-tight 
into the opening, and the back set out from 
it. The construction of the drawer is shown 
in Fig. .")51, the sides being dovetailed in 
the usual manner. A strengthening batten 
is do-.p* Jed to the front, and rebated over 
the hv ., because the drawer is rather long 
and th- ' • ttom would be liable to sag 
section of this rail will be 
:. ■-»41. The plough gvooves for 
( M should be made with a }-in. 
iron, . jut } in. up from the edge ; the 
bottom itself is rebated on three sides as 
shown in Fig. .Ml to receive a hardwood 
blocking slip, which is glued to the sides 
and front of the drawer (not the bottom), 
and cleaned off flush to form a runner. 
The ends of the drawer sides should be 
finished square, and made to butt against a 
small slip glued to the back of the case. 
The drawer, like the doors, sets back } in. 
from the face of the case. 



without 
seen ii 
the 1 




Tig. BBl.— WaidTobt Drawer, Bottom Upwards. 



Cornice, etc. — The cornice is beguu by 
making a frame with the frieze rail b (Fig. 
548) and the back rail I, anfl. these may be 
mitered and blocked in the angles at the 
front side, and the backboard rebated into 
the frieze at the back. The cornice mould, 
worked from 1 m. stuff, is mitered round 



^ 



BEDROOM FUBNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



the fritw and blocked in the angle aa ahown. 
Tke cover board ahould be screwed tight 
to the front cornice, and alot-icrewed to the 
end piecea and back, lo that when it ahiinka 
it will not aplit. The fretted back rail to 
the aub-top ia a conventional representation 
of the raya of the rising son ; it is cut out 




«$. su.— HaUDtaliii of Fretted Bask to 
Wardrobe. 

of a board J in. thick, the margins and the 
rays being | in. wide. The half-design 
given m Fig. 6D2 may be enlarged to scale, 
or by the usual geometrical methoda, and 
the rail is fixed by screwing to the shelf and 
side of the case. 

Cutting Liat for Wardrobe.— The rough 
cuttmg hst for the wardrobe is as follows :— 
Main carcase : Two sides, 5 ft. 6J in. by 1 ft. 
10 in. by 1 in. one aide, 4 ft. 8J in. by 1 ft 
10 in. by 1 in. ; one top, 1 ft. 9J in. by 1 ft. 

10 in. by 1 in. ; one top, 1 ft. 9 in. by 1 ft 
' in. b" 2 in. ; one bottom, 3 ft. 5 in. by 
1 ft. S in. by I in. ; one shelf, 1 ft. SJ in. by 
1 ft. H in. by 1 in. ; one shelf, 1 ft. 8} in. bv 

11 in. by I in. ; one shelf, 1 ft. 8} in. by 1 ft. 
5} in. by I in. ; one shelf, 1 ft. SJ in. by 1 ft. 
5} m. by I in. Back : One stie, 5 ft. 7 in. 
by 3J in. by 1 in, ; one stile, 4 ft. 9 in. by 
H m. by i in. ; one muntin, 5 ft. 7 in. by 
H "> by I in. ; one top rail, 1 ft. 9 in. by 
H in. by I in. ; one top rail, 1 ft. 11 in. by 
3J m. by } in. ; two mid nils, 1 ft. 8 in. by 

3 m. by i in. ; one bottom rail, 3 ft. 6i in. 
by 51 in. by i in. ; two panels, 2 ft. 3 in. by 
1 ft. 4 in. by 1 in. ; one pant 1 3 ft. 1 in. by 
1 ft. 4 in. by i in. , one panel, 9i in. by 1 ft. 

4 in. by ^ in. ; two tray aides, 7 ft. by 2^ in. 
by J in. ; one bottom, 1 ft. 8 in. bv 1 ft. 7 in. 



161 

by I in. Doora : Two itiUs, B ft. 6| in. by 
'•H in. by I in. ; two stiles, 3 ft. 9j in. by 
3J in. by 1 in. ; one rail, 1 ft. 8) in. bv 3| in. 
by 1 in. ; one rail, 1 ft. 84 in. by SJ in. by 
1 in. ; one rail, 1 ft. 8| in. by 4| in. by 1 in. ; 
two rails, 1 ft. 81 in. bv 2} in. by 1 in. 
Panola : One, 2 ft. 5 in. byl ft. 2 in. by » in. ; 
four, 1 ft. 4 in. I.y 2} in. by 1 in. ; one rail, 
lit. 8 in. by If in. by j in. , and one gUss 
back, 4 ft. 101 in. by 1 ft. I'J in. bv ,', in. 
Drawer case : Two aides, 1 ft. 5 in. by 1 ft. 
10 in. by 1 in. ; one top, 3 ft. fi in. by 1 ft. 
10 in. by } in. ; one bottom, 3 ft, 6 in. bv 
1 ft. 9 in. by 1 in. ; two back rnilj, .1 ft. B} in. 
long ; two stiles, 1 ft. 4 in. by 3 in. by J in. ; 
and one plinth, 7 ft. 4 in. by 31 in. by 1 in. 
Drawer ; One front, 3 ft. 4 in. by 1 ft. bv 
1 in. ; one back, 3 ft. 4 in. by 11} in. by I in.'; 
two sides, 1 ft. 6 in. bv 1 ft. bv 1 in, ; two 




Fig. SM.— Druiiac Table. 



bottoms, 1 ft. 8 in. by 1 ft, 8 in. by 
1 in, ; one rail, 1 ft. 9" in, by 3 in. by 
1 in. ; and blocking oak, 6 ft. 6 in. by 
} in. by 1 in. Cornice ; Monldi^, 8 ft. 
U in. by 5J in. by 1 in. ; frieie, 7 ft. 
by 4 in. by | in. ; astragal, 7 ft. 1 'in. 



i'Wfli 



3 

i 



f.m- 



1« 



CABINETWORK AND JOIXEBT. 




Figl. BM to B04.— 8«etloiul 

fltTfttloii, Crota SMtioa, ud 
Plu or Dreniiif Tabli. ° 



Hg. tu 



BEUKOOM FUBNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



br 2 in. 
.t] in. by 

I ft. (){ in 
») in. by 



by I in. ; biclc, ;! ft. « in. by 

1 in. ; and covn, .'1 ft. 11 in. by 

I. by I in. gumlrini : (Out. 4 ft. 

1 ft. 11 in, by ,«, in. ; gluing 




rif . HT.— Half HorimUl iMtloa of Brmlai 
Tkhte. 

mould, 7 ft. B in. by } in. by | in. ; two and 
a half pain of 3|-in. rolled brass butts and 
screws, two 2-in. door 'locks, one drawer 
lock, two antique drop door handles, one 

C'r of similar drawer handles, two wardrobe 
iks, and three hanging pegs. 

Drcwinr Table In SUIned Wood. 

The dressing table illustrated by Fig. 533 
forms part of the bedroom suite of which 




Fli. gn. 



ngi gii asd gg>.— Joint of BaU and Lei of 
OroiXit Table. 

the wardrobe has already been described. 
The method of preparing the working draw- 
ings need not be a^in described. Drawings 



1«8 

•imilar to Fip. .VM. .M3, nsti, and 897. 
which are aeetiona respetlivelr at d d (Pig. 
■>M), CO (Fig. V.4), 4i, aid B, will be 
required ; set them out carefully to full ai» 
liefore preparing the stuff. All the chief 
dimensions are here shown, and no difSculty 
will be found in tilling in the minor ones. 
The table measum over all .3 ft. 1 in. by 
1 ft. .1 in., and is i ft. a in. high. The top 
IS of 1-in. stuff, ogee moulded, and fixed 
to the frame by buttons. The legs are 
thrown in ;) in. from the ends at the top, 
and 1} in. from the l-^nt and back; they 
are cut out of l|.-u. stuff, and tapered off 



Hf. IM 




tig. Ml. 



rifs. HO and S61.— Part lootioB and Plaa of 
DiMslai Table's Bottoa Diawor. 

to 1 in. at the bottom, and spread at the 
bottom to the size of the table top. The 
top rails are of j-in. by 41-in. stuff, and are 
framed to the legs with bare-face tenons, 
and mitered together as shown in Figs. 5iW 
and 539. The front rail has an opening cut 
m for a drawer 1 ft. 2 in. by a in., and two 
runners are framed between the rails to 
carry the drawer, as shown in Figs, i).54 and 
'M). These runners are stub-tenoned into 
the rails, and may be rebated out of the 
solid, or formed by nailing a guide piece to 
the runner, as shown in Figs. ,560 and 561 
A tilting piece i (Fig. 3(in) should be fitted 
across the rails, flush with the under edge of 
the opening, to prevent the drawer tipping. 
A j-in. by }-in. groove should be run round 
the inside top edges of the back and end 



1 h 



'•'•oeonf nsounioN tbt ouit 

(ANSI ond ISO TEST CHMT N». 2) 



I.I 



la 12.8 
lit tji 



(2.0 






A 



^PLIED IIVMGE If 

IfiSJ Eait Main St»M 

SochtiUf. Naw rorfc 14609 ua« 

(716) «B2 - 0300 - Phon, 

(716) 288 - 39BB - Fox 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 






rails to receive the l.uttons, and the front 
ml 18 screwed direct to the top from the 
inside, so that when shrinlpng it shall not 
alter Its position in front. The cross 
stretchers are kept up in., and stub-tenoned 
into the legs, and the long stretcher is 
housed into them and fixed with angle 
blocks at the back. The bottom shelf, being 
wide in the middle, requires a rail to keep 
it from twisting, and this rail should be 



first, and then polish all sunk parts or re- 
entrant angles, as these cannot be finished 
properly afterwards ; of course, they can be 
botched over with a brush, as cheap furniture 
IS prepared. At the same time it will be 
wise not to do more polishing than necessarv 
before fitting together, as it is liable to get 
damaged in the working. "Vhen the frame 
18 made, prepare the top, f possible in 
one piece; but if there must be joints 



Pig. »M.-Part Plan of Drwiiag Table Skslf. 

•W r 



Fig. ws. 




Fig. 664. 



Fig«. s«3 and set.— Siglit 

End of Top Fitting of 

Droning Tabio. 




Fig. »«».— Uft End of Top 

Fitting of Draiing 

Table. 



Fig. o«7.— Jointa of Baoli and 

Bottom Baili of Oreiiing 

Tabio. 



notched over the stretcher. If the notching 
IS done the other way, the rails will probably 
colbpse when loaded. Angle blocks can 
bo glued all round the joint as shown in 
J<lg. 062, which is a section at e e (Pig 564) 
and blocks should also be glued to the under 
side of the shelf. 

Method of Construction.-In constructing 
the table, make and glue up the frame first, 
and put the end legs together and let them 
dry before gluing the sides together. If 
the work is to be french-polished, it will be 
better, before gluing together, to fit it up 



dowel them at 6-in. intervals, starting at 

L'/'j uT ""^ "'^- f'"' drawer should be 
fitted before the top is fixed on. Next cut 
the lower shelf to shape, as shown broken 
in Fig. 362 and fit it in place. The top 
fitting should then be proceeded with, and 
the two shaped standards that support the 
mirror may either be cut out of the soUd, or 
be partly solid and partly framed (see Pigs 
0(.3 and 364), the latter method being more 
dilhcult, but stronger. The curving of the 
front edge of the standard is continued down 
to withm } in. of the shelf groove, where it 



BEDBOOM FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



finishes iibraptly in a straight line at right 
angles to the back edge of the shaped arm, 
to which it forms a shoulder ; it is mortised 
to receive a tenon, as shown in Fig. 563, and 
the back edge oi the standard continues 



IBS 



sunk i in. and pelleted. The frame is re- 
bated i in., and slipped at the back of the 
glass, the whole being covered in with a 
,"a-in rounded edged backboard screwed on. 
The mirror is hnn^ 1 in. above its centre 




"f »'»• Tig. 969. rig, 870. 

Tift. M» to STO.-Bide Elnatloa and Sactions of Orauin; 



Tablo'i Small Drawar. 

down to the bottom rail, to which it is 
secured by a dovetail as shown in Fig. 564. 
The front edge of the rail is also fastened by 
a dovetail to the front arm, and the back- 
bottom rail is connected to the standard 
by a j-in. dowel. The bracket at the oppo- 
site end (Fig. oli.5) is framed together in a 
similar manner, and the short straight rail 
carrying the shelf is dowelled at each end. 
The fretted back is framed as shown in Fig. 
.jl)6, and is secured to the shelf by brads or 
screws inserted from below. The joints in 
the bottom rail are shown in Fig. 567, the 
lower end of the central standard lipping 
over a notch tenon on the back rail. The 
two back rails are shown mitre-dovetailed 
into the end standard, but may be dowelled 
if preferred. The intermediate brackets 
■supporting the shelves are cut out of the 
solid and dowelled at each end, and the 
shelves arc housed J in. deep at the ends and 
run over Hush with the back, the middle 
portion of the two under the mirror being 
rebated i in. deep to receive the J-in. back 
of the drawer case, as shown in Fig. 568. 
The sides of this case are housed i in. into the 
shelves, but are stopped J in. from front. 
The construction of the drawer is i. rated 
in Figs. 508 to 570. The top u ing is 
secured to the table, as shown in Fig. 355, 
by screws from the under side. 

Mirror Frame. — The mirror frame (shown 
in section by Fig. 571) is mitered together 
and secured by a screw in the ordinary 
manner, the holes fur the screw heads being 




Pig. B71.— Part Seotlon of Dreaslng Tabla'a 
Mirror Frama. 

with a pair of patent brass catches, shown 
in Figs. 572 and 57.3. The pivots are fixed 
to the standards, and the locking sockets 
to the mirror are sunk in its edges until the 
hole stands in the middle of the thickness. 

WashsUnd in Stained Wood. 

The washstand shown by Figs. 57i to 578 
forms part of the suite of which two articles 
have been described above. It has a Sienna 
marble top, 2 ft. 11 in. long by 18 in. wide 
and i in. thick, with an ogee moulded edge ; 
this is surmounted by a pair of square 
bracketed standards, carrying a round 
curtain-rod, and having a J-in. by 6-in. 




Fig. S73. 
Pig. »7S. 
Plgr m ud t7S.— Minor Pivot for Draulu, 
Table. 

shaped splash-board framed between them 

fitted with a pot-board, an enclosed cupboard 
and a towel drawer. Fig. 675 is a aectionai 
elevation on o c (Fig. 577), showing the 




:( 



166 



CABINETWOItK AND JOINERY. 



back and door of the cupboard. FiB 571; 
■8 a cross aection. Pi,, m i, ,he half' plan 
at the top of the table frame. Fig .578 is a 
section at BB (Fig. .,7.5), and Fi|. 579 is a 

„^ .S^H \*'>?,"'« t°P- Fig- -M illustrates 
one o< the back legs, and the ends of the back 
and «de rails, showing barefaced tenons 
mtered at the ends. Fig. .58] gives the edge 
and side views of a door stile, showing the 
setting out required for the rails and panel 
and Fig. 582 a side and edge view of the 
bottom rail, showing the tenons full length 
Construction.-The construction of the 
frame and brackets is fully explained above, 
but It should be note<i that the back legs 




Fig. 074.-W..hitM«l with Oopboa^-d, Marbl. Top 
Curtain, etc. 

are upright in the side elevation, and will 
require square shoulders on the back ends 

are housed i in. into the shelf or pot board, 
and are earned up (lush with the top edgej 

into tk ? »'' *•,"?« ''°'*'"''* ■»" »■'<' """k 
Affi^ ."*',* '"•■ "" ^hown in Fig. 5*!. 
h„ l^ T. "^^r*^" ""^'^^ P"" should 
the fiill thickness, one s,^. of the housing 
will he cut away when th. opening is madf 

(Kg. 584) are screwed to the cupboard sides, 
and are grooved to receive a dust panel 



forming the top of the cuplward. A simibr 
"'■J 'J"","'"''™ 's glued and nailed to the 
mside of the front rai! as shown in Fig .585 
and carries the front edge of the dust panel' 
forming also a fixing for the door stop under- 
neath. A rail is not needed at the back 
tne hinder edge of the panel being grooved 
into the frame rail Two rails are tenoned 
into the sides of the cupboanl as shown in 
Kig. ■.},.!, to carr;- the back panel, which is 
also grooved into the sides (sec Fig 378) 
As the top is of marble, buttons ate not re- 
quired to fix It. its own weight being suffl- 
cient to keep it in place ; therefore mooves 
are not required at the top edges of the frame. 
1 wo end spreaders and one stretcher are 
required to carry the shelf as shown in Fig 
.),.•!. but a central cross rail is not necessarv 
as the shelf >.s fixed to the cupboard sides. 
Ihe top fitting IS mortised and stub-tenoned 
together and kept in position by dowels, as 
shown in Fig. .57(i. 

Drawer of Washstand.-In making the 
drawer, cut the aperture in the rail first to 
the required size, as shown in Figs. .57,5 and 
■J«-^, then fit in the drawer front tightly 
and cut the back to the same length as the 
front, but j in. narrower : then prepare the 
sides to the same width as the frontT and to 
the length shown in Fig. ,58.5, cutting the 
front ends accurately to the bevel of the lees 
Next plough a J-in. groove in the drawer' 
front and sides, i m. from the bottom edges 
and J m deep in the front and /j in. deep 
in the sides. Proceed to lap dovetail in the 

"T ,™?.\ ^'^'- ■'*" *■> ■>^ »'«»'''i be con- 
sulted. The parts should fit fairly right 
but not sufficiently to cause splitting' 
Having ascertained that the parts come to- 
other accurately, separate them, clean o« 
the insides and then glue them up, trying 
the drawer for squareness with a rod ■ after- 
wards fit in th^ bottom, which should be 
cut exactly to the length between the backs 
of the grooves, its grain running parallel 
with the drawer, front. Chamfer off its 
ends and front edge to fit the groove as 
shorn in Figs. .584 and 585. and drive it 
m ; bore a small hole in the middle of the 
back edge, cut a slot, and screw the bottom 
in place. Fit in strips of oak or deal about 
J m. square on the front and side» (see Fi". 
uS4 and .583), and run a series of saw cnt8°in 



BEDROOM FURNITURE AND FITMENTS, 



these, nearly through from the bottom sur- 
faces, to enable them to bend freely over 
any irregularity in the bottom, and glue 
them to the drawer sides. When these 



side play. Then, with a knife, the front 
should be nu,rked all round on its edges by 
running the tool round the margins of the 
opening, cleaned off to the knife marks, and 




FlgB. STB to 678.— Front Elevation 
and Longitadinat Sflction, Crou 
Section, and Two Half Hoii- 
zoatal SMtions of Washstand. 



Tig. »77. 



Fig. S7>. 



b ocks are dry, the drawer may be fitted in 
place. It should be planed down in the 
bench screw with the trviug plane until it 
will pass freely into the opening, but without 



then be stopped J in. from the face by thin 
hardwood stops glued on the fare of the 
front rail as shown at s (Fig. 5H.5), The 
drawer front, the door framing, and the 



iiri^'ln 



H I ' 3 



tUm 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. M3. Wuhitud Snnr tad 
nttlngi. 



Fig. 980— Jointing lUili to Wuhitud Log. 





lig, 984.— Part SootioB of Waalutuid 
Drawar, otc. 



Fig. 881.— Edg« Viow and Sido View of 
Waahstand Door Stile. 




G3= 



Fig B82.— Ed^e View and Side View of Waak- 
Btand Bottom Bail 




Fi(r. 686.— Fart Section of Waibatand Drawer, 
etc 




BEDBOOM FUaNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



PIf. »««.-Bal Vitwi of 
Waihatand Drawtr. 



m 



Fig. 8ST.— Iniidc ElcTstlon of 
Drawer From. 



ri 



ng. us.— End of Dnwer 
Back. 




!l 



Fig. BU.— Ui at Foot of Bwbtoad, 



170 



Hi 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



:! ! 



jMme mib are of |-in. ,tufl; t«ble lein 

IJ-m. by IJ-in.; ,heH, drawer .idea and Bed»t««d, Chair, and Towel Hone in 

bottom, door, back panel., and dnatboard Sulned Wood. 




Pig. M8.-DrtaU Of BMUteiut Conatroction (A. Fig. m»). Tig. BM.-B«iro«n Chair. 





Fig. 6»fi.— OhalT Framing 



Figi S96 — CroM Vartioal SMtion of Cbair. 



BEDBOOM rURNlTUBE AND FITMENT* 



in 



and waihstand have been deacribed in 
detail, a bedataad, chair and towel hone 
may be required. Of the bedatead, a 
Senoral view ia presented by Fig. 589. 
Fig. 390 shows the patera covering (or the 
bedscrews ; Fig. 391, a detail of the leg at 
the foot of the bedstead ; Fig. 392, a detail 
at A (Fig. 589) ; and Pig. 39.), a detail of 
the post at B (Fig. 580). Views of the chair 
are presented by Pigs. 594 to 39«. A plan 
of the back is shown by Pig. 397, a plan of 



171 

the seat frame by Fig. 398, and a detail of 
the joint o (Pig. 598) by Pig. 599. The 
towel horse is illustrated by fi^,. floo and 

Wardrobe of Modem Deiisn. 

In.^designing the wardrobe shown in 
elevation by Figs. ik|-.> and ««, the purpose 
hiia been to guard ajpiinst sacrificing beauty 
to the prevailing fashion (if severe plainness. 
The wardrolw is part of a complete suite— 




Tit. BM.— Plan of Ohali SMt 
Framtk 




Hj. SS9.— Joint In Chair 8Mt Frame (0, Hg. ma). 




Fig. 600.— Toirel Horis. 




m 



•Tnmxag of Towel Hons; 



r 

■i 



ii 

m 



172 



i 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBT. 



the •«ond (IcKrilwd in thi> chapter. It 
(tanda II ft. hi((h. and the two sidm. which 
•hould lie got out of the Bolid hardwood 
will be 3 ft. 11 in. long hy 1 ft. if in. by j in., 
and are iihaped at the lower enda, aa ahown 
by Fig. lilW, not deejier lluiii :> in. Fig, IMI4 



the front, and ia fixed with dowela, tnd a 
rail of deal ia dovetailed aa Fig, ()()6 ahowa. 
The raila may now be taken out. and the 
■helrea faced on the front edge with |-in, 
»tuH, then finally put together with glue. 
The full aiie of the top ia 4 ft, by 1 ft. 




"«• ••»• Til. <o<. 

rigi. aos and aoi— Front and 81d< ElaTatlona of Hodani Wardrobe. 



shows a cross-section of the wardrobe. 
The back edges must then be rebated on 
the inside for the back (see Fig, 60.5), and 
two shelves of 1-in. deal, trued up to 3 ft. 

5 in, by 1 ft, 5 in,, are let into half-dovctaii 
grooves, J in. deep, made in the sides and 
stopped } in. from the front edge ; one is 

6 in, from the floor, the other 11 in, above 
It, A rail of solid stulf, 3 it. 4J in. by 3 in. 
by 1 in., is fitted at the top, ^ iu. back from 



9 m. by 1 in. ; it may be made from the 
solid, or a piece of deal 3 ft. 6 in. by 1 ft. 6 iu. 
may be clamped 3 in. on each end with 
hardwood, then 3 in. on the front edge. 
It is moulded as shown by Fig. flOfi, and 
fixed with screws through the rails and aides, 
which are thumb-notched on the inside for 
the purpose. 

Front Framea.— For the front frames, four 
stiles, 4 ft. 2 in., and four rails SJ in. by 2 in.. 



BEOBOOU lUBNITUKE AND FITMENTS. 



But h« nudd from l-in. aolid rtuS, the rail* 
being tTOon«l to il in. •nd let into mortic™ 
is the Uiles at the extreme lower end«, nnd 
1 ft. 4 in. (rom the top enda ; theie «re then 
dowelled to the wide rail, the framet being 
Mcured in pUce with wrewt through the 
•hell and the aide atilea, which muat be 



in 

behind. The omamenta of the top panelt 
(Fig. Ii08) are at j-in. itnfl, flied with glut 
and needle pointa. It may lie remarked 
thet the bottom ahelf ia dovetailed to the 
'"'• in the ordinary wuy. 

u ckata, Drawer, etc.— The braeketa an 
of 1. material, put on in pairs 1| in. apart, 








rif. eoa laetlon •( 
Waidroba Top. 



Plf. w».—av\. Oonar o» Ward- 
robe (Top tmani). 



rif. MT.— laotioa of Lower Paula of Wardrobe. 



Fig. 60a.— gtetton of Top PaaeU of Wanlrobfc 



Fig. eot.— aocUon of Wardrobe 
Drawer Front 



Tig. eio.— Sootion of 
Wurdxobe Door. 



Pig. 604.— Croai Beetion of 
Modem Wardrobe. 



i*j 



Fif 611.— Soetion of Fart of Wardrobe Back. 



notched. Use also glue between the joints. 
An ovolo beading is mitered round the panel 
spaces i in. from the front, being fixed with 
glue and needle points. Panels of |-in. 
material are then fitted, the long ones (see 
Fig. 607) being ornamented with pieces 
3i in. wide by | in. thick, which are bevelled 
from iLe centre to J in. at the edges, and 
are put on with glue and small screws from 



as shown in Figs. 602 and dI)3 ; the long 
bracket at the foot is cut from j-in. board, 
being fixed with glue and blocks placed 
behind. For the drawer (see Fig. 604), 
choose a piece of figured 1-in. board for the 
front , the sides and i)ack may be of J-in. 
deal, and the bottom of 7-in. stuff. Th? 
front is bevelled (Fig. 609) after it has been 
dovetailed and before being put together. 



Ill 



1 


w 


1 


!' 



174 



CABmSTWOU AND JOINIBY. 



ft. 



i 1. 






0»or — To nuke thi' iliwr, tbi> two itiln 
•hould be 8 in. bv 1 in., >nit thv mill 4 in. 
bv 1 in. They ttr mnrtiant anil tenoned in 
the utunl wijr, and • iliiiht •weep ii ciil nut 
of tbe top mil. In putting on the lieudinii. 
it will he bnl to rebate it to Bt the corner. 
Ki u not to cover the bevel of the mirror, 
which ibould fit looaely, and be regulated 



"hould lie put quite central, and a board 
•houW Im- titteil each aide (iH>e Fid. 1111), 
then the other muntini. and finally the other 
Ixwrda : they are nailed to the baolia of the 
ihelvea, the top rail, and the aidea. When 
the handlea are put on. the drawer may be 
adjuated, and the wanlinlH- is then ready 
for lining. A piece of the material ia cut 




rig- "i Tit- «"■ 

Flgi. Ul and «ia.— Pnmt and Bide Elnatioiu of Modam DnMng-obeit 



with amnll triangular blocks. It is then 
protected with a panel of j-in. board kepi 
in by a beading as in Fig. (ilj A strip of 
wood, 1 in. wide by J in. thick, should be 
put behind the stile of the left frame to form 
a rebate for the door, which may now be 
hinged, and the handle added. 

Back, etc.— For the back, three muntins 
2J in. wide by J in., to be grooved } in. 
deep on each edge, and four 9-in. boards 
J in. thick, will be required ; one muntin 



I in. larger all round than the inside measure- 
ment of the top ; this i in. is doubled in, 
and it is tacked in place with line tacks. 
The bottom, back, and sides are treated in 
the same way, and then the hooks may be 
put in. The wardrobe is then ready for 
polishing. 

Dressint; Chest of Modem Design. 

The dressing-chest illustrated by Fi)!a. 
612 to 1)14 IS intended to match the wardrobe 



BEDBOOM rPBNITUBB AND PITMIKta 



i«t dMcrilMd. TIm •ztnm* ibmiuk- 
mmu tn : Height, 5 ft. 4 in. ; width, .1 ft 
" in. ; depth, J h. 7J in. Th. two M^ 
aur ht (ot out «nt in the Klid hardwood 
2lt. 7 in. long hy 1 ft. « in. wide by 1 in. 
Whfn olmnnl np and •atund. the lower 
endt Me cut to the ahape ahown by Pig. au, 




I7S 

by two taib ol d«l 3 ft. ^ in. by 2 in. by 
1 m., the ironl one beiap hoed llki- th'« 
bottom ; they are then doretniled aa ali..wi 
by Fig. Dili. The draweia are to be 9 in., 
7 in., and .'J in. deep, ao the aidea muat lie 
grooved an-ordin^lr lor the raila and hearera 
(iee Fig. 1117, which alaoahowa how thev are 




Fit. Ilg.— Joint of Bottom to Slih of 
Dtautag-ohMt 



Fit. aie.— Joint of Top 
■alia of Dioialiif -ehaat 



Plj. ait— Vortloal Crou 
Sootlon of Modoin ')Toiiiiig- 

obflot. 



n*. aiT.— nung Pnunlm; of DronUif-cheit 
BaUi tnd Bmrota, 



not worldng into the wi,od more than'4} in. ; 
they are then grooved on the inside at the 
back edges about J in. deep, with the inner 
side of the groove 1 in. from the edge. A 
bottom of 1-in. deal is now required, 3 ft. 
2J in. by 1 ft. 4} in., and this is joined to 
the sides as shown by Fig. 615, by being let 
into half-dovet4iil grooves | in. deep, 6 in. 
from the floor, and stopped J in. from the 
front, the bottom faced with a slip of J-in. 
hardwond to bring it flush with the sides. 
The top ends cf the sides are connected 



grooved to receive the dust-boarda). The 
division for the top drawers should be 
mortised and tenoned, and faced with the 
hardwood like all the rails. The whole may 
then be taken apart and afterwards glued 
together. 

Top.— The top is made in the solid stuff, 
and measures .3 ft. 6 in. by 1 ft. 7} in. by 1 in. 
An ovolo mould is worked on the top side 
of both ends and front, working about J in. 
on the lop aide and i in. on the edge. It 
is fixed to overhang 1 in. at the front and 








176 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEEY. 



ii 



: r 



Bides, by being jcrewed through the rails ; 
long blocks should be glued under at the 
top ends of the sides. A centre bearer for 
the top drawers, grooved on both edges, 
and the dust-board of J-in. deal, are now 
made and put in. For the back, two deal 
boards 2 '!. 7 in. and one 2 ft. 2 in. long, all 




bottom ends as shown by Kg. 819, and 
when in place they may be either screwed 
or rongged. The shaped plinth piece at 
the front should be of 1-in. stuff, weU fitted, 
Mid glued in place | in. in from the edge of 
the bottom and sides ; a sprig may be driven 
in at thf ends, and blocks glued behind. 



Fig. dls.— Part Horliontal 

Saction throagb Dretiiiig- 

ohnt's Top Drawara 




Tig. 699.— Part Plan of Top 
of Sratliiig-chMt. 




Tig. 83S._Part Eoriwntal 

Section through Droning- 

oboBt's Jewel Drawers. 




Fig. ei>.— Fart Back Vlaw 
of DresBlng-chMt 



Flga 634 and 698.— Dowel 

Joints in Dnssing-chost's 

Mirror F^ame. 



Fig. 691.— Fnuning of Dreiilng-olust'a 
Jewel Drawer Casing. 




Fig. 696. _ 

12 in. wide by J in., and two muntins, also 
of deal 2 ft. 2 in. by 3 in. by | in., are re- 
quired. The muntins must be cut at the 
ends to fit the back rail and bottom, then 
secured with screws in a position to allow 
the boards, when bevelled to fit the grooves, 
to be slid into place (see Kg. 618). The 
two outside boards .ihonld h^ cut at the 



Fig. 696.— Part CroM Soction of 
Diviiing-cliost'i UiiTOr. 
Casing for Jewel Drawers.— This com- 
pletes the carcase except the drawers, so the 
casing for the jewel drawers can now be 
taken in hand. Two sides in the solid are 
required 6} i.i. long by 8^ in. wide by 1 iu. ; 
they should be cut to the shape shown by 
Fig. 620, not deeper than 2 in., and grooved 
the same as the carcase sides ; the two inner 



BEDKOOM FUBNITCBE AND FITMENTS. 



sides are made the same, bat 1 in. narrower 
and not grooved, the 1 in. to be o« the back 
edges only. The top will be 3 ft. 8 in. long 
by 9} in. by 1 in., moulded like the carcaw 
top and grooved to match the sides, to 
receive the top edge of the back. The sides 
are let mto grooves made in it, to allow for 
drawers 9 in. long, the shelves for these 
being made of deal faced with hardwood and 
joined to the sides exactly the same as the 
carcase bottom (Fig. 621), allowing 3 in. 
for the depth of the drawers. A piece of 
}-m. board, 3 ft. 2J in. by 6J in., must be 
got out for the hack, which should be of 
hardwood, and made to slide in piace, being 
fix^ to the back edges of the inner sides 
with screws; then the brackets mav be 
made of J-m. board glued in place' and 
spngged. 

Cornice.— The next thing will be to make 
the cornice, and for this a piece of solid 
stufi IS required 3 ft. by 2 in. by I in., and 
another 3 ft. 4i in. by 3i in. by I in., the 
latter to be moulded on the under side and 
screwed on the top edge of the former, 
flush at the back and overhanging equally 
at the ends ; then the small brackets can 
be made of J-in. material and glued under. 
For the standards, two pieces, 2 ft. 8 in by 
« m by : in., are cut to the shape and well 
finished up, then dowel-jointed to the cornice 
and screwed at the beck to both tops, 
which must be cut out as shown by Fig 622 
also to the shelves of the casing and the top 
back rail 'see Figs. 618, 619, and 623) 
Two screws should also be driven through 
the top from underneath into the ends of 
the inner sides. These screws, and those at 
the back which go into the carcase only, are 
to be withdrawn when removing the upper 

Mirror Frame.— The extreme measure- 
ments of the mirror frame will be about 
1 ft 8 m. by 1 ft. lOi in. ; but to be accurate 
in the width, the space between the standards 
should be measured and the movements 
n lowed for. The stiles and lower rail are 
of li-in. by fin. stuff, but the top rail will 
require to be 2 in. wide, so ;hat when the 
curve IS cut out it will not be less than I in. 
in the centre. It is dowel-jointed together 
as shown by Figs. 624 and 62'), then a bead- 
ing of l-m. by l-in. material rounded on the 



177 

front edge is mitered round, and a small 
ovolo moulding rebated at the back is 
planted to make a rebate for the mirror. 
This should lit the frame loosely to be 
reguUted by small triangular blocks so as 
not to take from the width of the bevel • 
then the back of the thin board is put in and 
beaded (see Fig. 62B), but it is not put in 
permanently till the frame is polished 
ihe movements may be put on, and the 
drawers made in the usual wav, alreadv 
fully shown, using l-in. material for the 
fronts, i-in. material for the sides and backs 
and i-in. material for the bottoms The 
centre bearer can be kept in place by nailing 
through the back, a guide piece being fi.ted 
on the top side. The jewel drawers of 
course, must be made lighter in pro- 
portion to size, say f in. for the fronts and 
t in. for the sides, backs, and bottoms. 
Ihe job IS now ready for polishing, and it is 
advisable that the rebate of the mirror frame 
should be stained black, so as not to show anv 
reflection. This done, the mirrc mav be 
put in and swung, and the fitting of the 
copper drawer handles completes the work. 

WoshsUnd of Modern Design. 

The washstand shown in front and end 
elevations by Figs, 627 and 628 is designed 
to match the wardrobe and dressing-chest 
above descnbed and illustrated. The overall 
measurements are: Height, 4ft i in • 
width. .1 ft. G in. ; depth, 1 ft. 7* in. The 
two sides, 2 ft. 7 in. by 1 ft. 6 in. by 1 in 
are made first ; they are of solid hardwood' 
cut to the shape shown, and grooved for 
the back. The two shelves, which mav 
be of deui slipped on the face edge with hard- 
wood, are 3 ft. 2i in. by 1 ft. 5 in. by 1 in. 
i in. of each end being let into the sides in 
the same manner as in the dressing-chest 
the top side of the bottom one being 64 in' 
from the floor ; a space of 1 ft. 51 in. is 
allowed for the cupboards. The two top 
rails and the division piece for the drawers 
as well as the front plinth piece and the car- 
case back, are done in the same way 

Top of Waahjtand—For the top, a piece 
of deal IS got out 3 ft. 2 in. by 1 ft. li in. by 
f in. It IB made 4 in. longer by clamping 
the ends with pieMa of the hardwond 2 in 
wide and the same thickness, which may be 






178 



CABINETWORE AND JOINERY. 



dowelled on or tongue-and -groove jointed, 
but not nailed ; a 1^-in. piece is plain jointed 
on the front edge to make it the full width. 
The top, as shown by Fig. 629, is tiled ; 



will be necesaar^r to glue hardwood the 
thickness of the tiles, | in., the front comers 
being mitered as shown. An ovolo moulding 
is then worked round (see Fig. 630), and the 




Fig. S3ft. 



3-in. square tiles of a medium green shade 
will contrast well with either oak or mahog- 
any. They are cemented on with a mixture 
of plaster-of-paris and glue made to the 
consistency of thick cream, leaving a margin 
af 3 in. at the front and ends, over which it 



Figs. S3T to «S9.— Front and Side 
Elevationt and Half Plans of 
Modem Washstand. 



top fixed to overhang 1 in. at the front and 
sides. 

Door Frames, Shelves, etc. — The door 
frames are made of 2-in. by 1-in. section, 
dowel-jointed, with panels of J-in. material 
fitted to them. Pieces of J-in. stuff, bevelled 



BEDROOM FURNITUBE AND FITUENTB. 



off from the centre to | in. at the tidges, are 
glued on the front, leaving an equal margin 
of 1| in. When the moulding has been 



not be fixed permanently, but by screwing 
cleats of l|-in. by ^-in. section to the sides, 
they may be placed on and removed at 




Tig. 68S.~CroH Beetlon of Uodeni 
Waihitand. 



Fig. 634.— Fart Back Elevation 
of Modem Wathitand. 




Fig. 681.— Half Horixontal Beotlon of Modem Waitastand. 



secured to the frames u. form the rebate, 
the panels are put in and beaded behind. 
A shelf is fitted to each of the cupboards, 
and also one in the centre (see Pig. 631), 
the latter being shaped aa shown by Fig. 
4332, and all tht«e rounded off. They need 



will (see Fig. (>33). The cupboard shelves 
are 1 ft. 2 in. wide, and the middle one is 
1 ft. 1 in. Before fixing the two brackets, 
which are made of ^-in. stuff, a J-in. brass 
rod is fitted for the curtain. 
Curtain Rod. — One way of fixing the brass 




Jl 



180 



OABDfETWOEK AND JOINEBY. 



li 



rod i« to nut a length of braaa tube just to 
nt betweiti the rides, then to drive a screw 
into the left side, leaving it standing op 
about J in. ; a hole should then be made 
in the right ride to take a thumbscrew. The 
curtain, which should be of a pale green 
material with a hem at the top to take the 
rod, is then put on, one end of the rod being 



Urn. by 2 in. by 1 in. ; and one top rail, 
2 ft. 11 in. by 3 in. by 1 in. The two short 
uprights are dowel-jointed to the rails 
allowing a space of 2 ft. for the tiles ; the 
outside uprights are then jointed on like- 
wise. The oma lental pieces are of }-in. 
material ; they should be tightly fit! .„, 
glued in place, and secured with fine springs. 




Fig. ess.— Modem Wood Btdstoad 



put over the screw, and the thumbscrew 
screwed into the other from the inside of the 
right-hand cupboard. Or small rings could 
be sewn on the curtain, and the rod put on 
two brass cup hooks screwed above. 

Back of WashstanH.— The drawers are nc-tt 
inade and fitted ; „nen the back is taken 
in hand. For this, a framj made of the 
following pieces is prepared : two uprights 
1 ft. ,") in. by li in. by 1 in., .and two 1 ft. 
by 1 J in. by 1 in. ; one bottom rail, 2 ft. 



A piece of fin. stuff, 2J in. wide, is cut to a 
curve and fitted under the top rail, flush 
with the front, to fit the tile space, and when 
the moulding is filed round, a Jin. back- 
board is prepared, on which the tiles are 
cemented; this is placed in and beaded 
behind {see Figs. 634 and 6.33). 

Cornice and other Details.— The cornice 
piece is 3 ft. 6 in. by 3i in. by 1 in., fixed on, 
a= alre-ajy explained, with bluukets beneath. 
Two ride pieces must be made H in. long by 



BEDKOOM FUKNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



181 




Pif. m. Kg. m. 

Tip. «9T aid «S8.— gtiln for BnUtwd. 




Fig. 6«l.— Pint of 
icdsteai). 



rif. H3.— 8<ctlon of 
BwUtoad PaML 





Ft(. 63t.— laeUon of 
Bodatoad'a Top BaU. 



Ttf M> FaulOma- 
mat for BtdaUad. 




ng. 640.— Half of Badatoad Biaekat Flaco. 

" in. wide by 1 in. thick, and when these 
are cut to the shape they should be screwed 
t(» the uprights, the screw-heads being sunk 
below the surface and the holes filled with 
wood. Shelves are made for the side pieces 
ii in. by .JJ in. by 1 in., moulded on the under 
side and fixed with dowels. The back is 
placed on the carcase flush with the back 
edge of the top, through which screws must 
be driven from underneath into the bottom 
rail, a screw on the slant also being driven 
through each end of tht; top to catch the 
foot of the side pieces. The doors may be 
hinged on, but should be taken ofl for 
polishing ; the panels and tiled back must 
also be removed. When the polishing has 
been finished, they are rephiced, and the 
drawer and cupboard handles aflixed. 

Wood Bedstead of Modern Design. 

The wooden bedsteads now in use are 
very difierent in design and construction 
from the old-fashioned forms which became 
so unpopular on account of their tendency 




I J I 



•Ni) 



MJI. 



^ 844.— Pedlmtnt and T6p BaU of Baditaad. 



182 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



to harbour vermin. The modem becUtead, 
however, has a bottom reiembling that of 
an iron or brass bedstead instead of the 
h»v7 wood side rails and laths which form 
the great objection to the old form. Fig. 
636 shows a very effective design, which 
looks particularly well in mahogany or oak ; 
it is fuU-siM, that is, 6 ft. 6 in. by 4 ft. 6 in. 
It matches the -..'ardrobe, dressing-chest, 
and washstand just described. The posts 
are of 2-in. square material, those at the 
foot being 3 ft. 6 in. long, and at the head 
4 ft. long. Eight rails are required, each 
4 ft. 5 in. by 2 in. by IJ in., which are tenoned 
1^ in. at each end, making them actuitlly 
4 ft. 2 in. long. The foot-posts ore then 
mortised to receive the tenons, one rail 
being H in. from the 3oor, another above it 
allowing a space of 5 in. for the panel, and 
the others are 4 in. from the top ends, v ith 
a 4J-in. space allowed for the spindles. 
These are plain turned, I in. thick in the 
centre, tapering to ^ in. at the ends ; thir- 
teen will be sufficient, and they are simply 
let into |-in. holes bored in the rails at 
equal distances apart. The ornamental 
pieces (Figs. 637 and 638) are made of |-in. 
material, 5 in. wide, and should be well 
finished ; five are required for the foot, 
and should be tightly fitted between the rails. 
Whilst in their exact positions, they, with 
the rails, should be marked for dowels, 
two in each end. An additional mark should 
be put on each to ensure finding their right 
places as fitted. The frame may now be taken 
apart, but the ornaments are first dowelled 
between the rails, glued, and cramped up 
close. Two saw kerfs should be cut in 
each tenon of the rails, as they should be 
blind - wedged. When quite ready for 
being finally put together, the spindles should 
be placed between the two top rails, using 
a touch of glue. The cramps may be taken 
ofE the rails, and used on the posts to bring up 
the mortised joints. A coping, shaped as 
shown by Fig. fi.'ii), is made of 2-in. by |-in. 
material, and fixed on the top rail with 
dowels. The bracket below the lower rail, 
of which Fig. G40 gives a half view, is cut 
from j-in. board ; it should be neatly fitted, 
and fixed with glue, with a sprig or two at 
the ends, and small blocks should be glued 
behind. The lower ends of the posts have 



a moulding worl d round them as shown 
in Fig. 641, which also illustrates the 
ornamentation of the upper end. This top 
consists of a piece of j-in.,8tuff, 3J in. square, 
the edges being shaped to a thumb mould ; 
it is then fixed on with two dowels, and a 
scotia moulding, 1 in. by } in., is mitered 
round below it ; then the turned hall, 2 in. 
in diameter, is held on with a dowel screw. 
An ovolo moulding, J in. by j in., is fixed 
round the panel space. ^ in. back from the 
front of the rails, to form a rebate ; then 
the panel, which is of J-in. board, is placed 
in and beaded behind ; see Fig. 642. It 
is ornamented on the front by a piece of j-in. 
stuff, 2J in. wide, bevelled off to i in, at the 
edges and ends, and is fixed with screws 
through the panel (Fig. 643). 

Head of Bedstead. — The head is made the 
same as the foot, except that the space for 
th* ornaments will be in. higher ; of 
CO rse, the ornaments themselves are 6 in. 
lon^^r, but they need not be slotted, and 
the panel may be quite plain, or even omitted 
altogether ; also the bracket may be left 
out. Fig. 644 shows the shape of the pedi- 
ment with the carved design of a cherub. 
It illustrates also the method of fixing on the 
top rail with dowels glued in the pediment 
to project I in. The pediment may be 
taken off for convenience in removing, ete. 
A cornice of ogee moulding is worked on 
as shown in Fig. 645. 

Cumpleting Bedstead. — A set of good 
castors should be added, when the bedstead 
will be ready for polishing. Bed bottoms 
are manufactured specially for wood bed- 
steads, and consist of head and foot and two 
side angle-irons, laths, and streteher. The 
head and foot angles are secured to tlie posts 
with four strong screws at each end, the 
upper side of the angle-iron being 1 ft. 5 in. 
from the floor. They are then connected 
by the side angles, as in an ordinar}* iron 
bedstead. 

"Tallboj *' Chest of Drawers. 

A " tallboy " chest of drawers, as illustrated 
at Fig. 646, is useful where ample accom- 
modation is requii-ed for holding bed linen, 
blanketa, ete. It is intended to be made 
of solid mahoga- v, inlaid with satinwood 
stringing and flushed with french polish. 



BEDBOOM FXJBNXTUBE AND FITMENTS. 



188 



The out-of-sight parts may be made of 
pine or American whltewood, but lor a good 
job baywood is more suitable. To olitain 
the dimensioDB of the various pieces of wood 
required, a fuU-sised drawing should be 
made of half the front elevation and the end 
elevation (Fig. 647). The main dimensions 
are as fol' ws : Extreme height, 5 ft. 6 in. ; 
width from end to end, 4 ft. ; depth from 
front to back, 1 ft. 9 in. ; height of plinth, 
including moulding, 6 in. ; height of drawer 
fronts, n in., 10 in., 9 in., and 8 in. ; thick- 
ness of bearers between drawers, | in. (bare) ; 
top, about l|in. »hick, and projecting l^in. 
over the front and ends. The front comers, 
with the quarter*circle fluted columns (see 
enlargement of left-hand comer, Fig. 648), 
and including the fillet a, are '2^ in. wide. 
A sectional plan of the comer is shown at 
Fig. 649. The fillet a and ends B are got 
out of 1-in. stuff, tis thick as the working 
will allow, the centre filling o making up the 
2} in. required. The columns are a quarter 
of a 3-in. circle ; this should leave a bare 
l-'m. fillet down each edge. The tablets d 
(Fig. 648) are 4 in. long ; and the turned 
capitals and bases of the columns are each 
1 in. in height. The stiles and rails of the 
dojrs are 1| in. wide, including the ovolo 
moulding (see section^ Fig. 650). The inlaid 
lines of stringing form a l|-in. margin 
round the door panels, the comers breaking 
inwards l\ in. The margins of stringing 
on the drawer fronts arc 1^ in., and the 
comers 1| in. The diamond-shaped string- 
ing in the door panels measures about 9 in. 
by 6 in. ; this is shown enlarged at Fig. 051. 
The margins of stringing on the tablets 
above and below the columns are ^ in. ; 
those on the carcase ends are 2| in., the 
corner squares breaking inwards 2^ in., 
and the diamond stringing is about 2 ft. 
by 9 in. 

Carcase of Chest of Drawers. — First pre- 
pare the carcase ends out of 1-in. stuff, and 
joint on the pieces top and bottom to form 
the face of the front tablets. Next get out 
the upright fillets a (see section, Fig. 649), 
31 in. wide, and the same length as the ends ; 
then the packing pieces o 1} in. wide, with 
pieces jointed on the top and bottom to form 
the centre part of the face tablets. Ulue 
the three parts 4, b, and c together. Rebate 



the back edges of the ends to receive the back, 
as shown in Fig. 649. The top front bearer 
above the cupboards and the one below the 
bottom drawer are 4| in. wide, and are dove- 
tailed to the ends and side fillets as shown. 
The other Iwarers are .IJ in. wide, and 
are tenoned through the side fillets; the 
quarter-L-olumns hide the ends of the tenons. 
The back top and bottom bearers e are 
dovetailed into the ends. Tho back is 
made up of three muntins about 3| in. 
wide, grooved on the edges to receive the 
}-in. hacks f. The nmners and guides for 
the drawers are m^ide in the usual way. 
The carcase should )ie put together tem- 
porarily, and the sizes obtained for the 
doors, the top, and the plinth. 

Plinth. — In making the plinth, a founda- 
tion framing (shown in part plan at Fig. 
652) is required } in. shr>rter than the car- 
case, and 1 ft. d| in. from front to back, 
the 1-in. rails a being 5 in. wide. The 
shaped front and ends of the plinth, raitered 
at the comers, are glued to this framing, 
as shown at H. The contour of the face is 
first worked with suitable hollow and round 
planes ; then the pieces are marked and 
cut to shape with a bow saw. If desired, 
a straight-faced plinth may be substi- 
tuted. The moulding on ^e top edge 
of the plinth is formal on strips of 1-in. 
stuff, 2J in. wide, mitered at the front 
corners, and screwed and glued to the top 
edge of the plinth. The plinth is secured 
to the carcase with screws driven from the 
under side of the strips. The top is in two 
parts, the upper j (aee section. Fig. 653) 
being of |-in. stuff, and the moulded lining 
strips K of 1-in. stuff, about 3 in. wide, 
mitered at the corners. The moulded strips 
may be fixed to the carcase, and the top J 
secured with screws from underneath, inside 
the cupboards. 

Fluted Columns, etc. — Before fitting the 
carcase together, the corners, with the fiutcd 
columns, mu^ be finished off, and the 
stringing inlaid in the carcase ends and on 
the tablets. In cases wh->re a large number 
of columns are required, it is usual to have 
them turned, for which purpose the four 
quarters are jointed together, with paper 
between the jomts ; after they are turned, 
a thin knife is inserted in the joints, and the 



>'J. 



184 



OABINETWOBZ AND JOINERY. 



four quarters aepanted. But fop only two 
coluniM, the limplMt way m to work them 
with ■ hollow pUne. The fintei an carved 
with a gouge, and Sniihed with glanpaper. 
Almve th.' turned capitals and below the 



giain of the wood an channelled with a 
•teel cutter fixed in a cutting gauge ; but 
when the stringing crosses the grain or ii 
at any angle to it, the sides o< the channel* 
are cut with the aid of a sharp penknife 




Hi. 6M.— "TaUboy" Oh«t of Diawsti. 



bases are square pieces L (Fig. 648), j»j in. 
th'-^k, rounded on the two outside edges. 
Tl »e having been placed in position, the 
capitals and bases are butted against them, 
and the fluted columns fixed between, the 
whole being secured with glue. 

Stringing. — In putting in the stringing, 
those hnes which run the same way as the 



and a straightedge, and the channel routed 
out with a ^'j-in. chisel. The latter method 
is used for the diamond pattern in the doors 
and carcase ends. The small circular dots 
are cut out of solid satinwood, about ,V in. 
thick. The straight lines are first inlaid 
and then J-in. diameter holes ;>» bored 
with a centre-bit (see section. Fig. (i.54). 



BEDBOOM FUBNITURE AND FITMENTS. 




lU 




ri». M».— Part Flan of Uft-hud 

Fraat Conur ud Orwu Buk of 

CbMt of Dramn. 



Flf. <w. lootlon of Door fot 
Ohort of Dramra. 



ng. MT.-End ElavaUon of "Tall- Hg, e4».-nut«l Colamii, 
boj" Chert of Onwon. ttc, on Front of Chart of 

Drawora 



Fig. 094.— Sactlon of 

Circular Dota in 

Stringing. 






Fig. 661.— Diamond Stringing in 
Z>oora of Chart of Dravara. 



Fig. 666.— Saction of 
Cocked Baad on Dra««r rig. 6811.-Part Plan of HMl 
**"■*• of Chart of Drawera 




if 



Fig. esa. — Stction of Top of 
Cheit of Dnwin. 



186 



OABINBTWOU AND JOINERS 



««»Plrtnf am of Df«««fi._Wlim tiu 
wur ,, glurf togrthw, th. doon Buj b« 
Mtri und hinggd, the lock flzad, and the 

&"'.u'°l*'' ^''» *'» drew.™ an 
attrf, the franti mut be level with the 



m two Kpante part*. The lower pert u 
2 <t. 3 in. wide, 1 it. 4} is. deep, and 1 ft. 
6 in. hi^h ; and the upper part ii 2 ft. wide, 
1 ft. 3 in. deep, and 2 ft. UJ in. high. A 
auitabte material ia pine, which can be 








Til, MT. 



Fife, eee to «».— noat aa4 End 
EloTatloni, aid Borlioatal lM*.lcpu 
of QUMa Aaaa CbMt of Oiawara 



bearers, and then rebated to receive the 
cocked beads, as shown in section at u (Fig. 
6B5), these being mitrred at the comers. 

Queen Anne Chest of Drawers. 

Fig. 656 shows the front elevation of a 
Qtt«a Anne chest cf drawers to be made 



Fig. eii. 



ebomsed. The lower part must be strongly 
built, the end pieces being of 1-in stufi 
They are 1 ft. 5i in. high and 1 ft. 41 in. 
wide; two widths dowelled together will 
probably be required for each. In the 
back edge of the end piece (see Pig. fi.57) 
an opening, j in. wide, and running down- 



BEDBOOM FDBNITUBE AND FlTtlENTS. 



w.r<l» (n>m th« tup 1 fc., h ont at a to 
r»Mi« the lockhMid i it> lower urt ii 
•h>p«d tn ftimi bgi, and in tha fa«iit «)•' 
M cut an opening a j in. wide and 9 in. high 




fur the front piece. Thii front piece ia of 
l-m atuff 2 ft. 3 in. long by in. high. It 
i» ahaped to form three legi, ,nd ii fixed 
with acreva into the openings in the end 
piecea. Behind the middle leg is a support, 
shown ,n ,«,tion at e (Pig. 608), which is 
of f-ln. atu« 3 m. wide and 1 ft. 54 in. long. 
In the lower part of its front edge is an 
opening J in. V » in., for the front piece, 
with which It comes flush above and forms 
the division between the lower drawers. 
I ho front piece is screwed to it, and at the 
back there is a corresponding support i 
fig biM), which is screwed to the back- 
board. To c and d are screwed the middle 
runners «, } in. by 1 in., which carry the 
drawers, and similar runnera » are screwed 
to the inner side of the end pieces. The 
bcckboard a (Fig. 658) is of J-in. stufi 2 ft 
J m. long by 1 ft. wide, and is screwed t» 
tbe end pieces and back support d. 

Top and Upper Part of Queen Anne Chest 
of Drawera.— The top ia of j-in. stuff 2 ft 




187 

it ia screwed to the end pieces, the back- 
board, and the supporta c and d, un which 
it rests. Within the hollow is strewed a 
J-in. moulding h (Fig. B59). which ke-pa 
the upper chest in iioaition. The upper 
part has end pieces of jin. stuff I ft. 2) la 
wide and 3 ft. 5 it. long. Fig. H.W ahova 
how one of these id pieces ia pierced at j 
with mortices for i ■ t*nona of the horiiontal 
partitiona. The cuts at k arc nude for 
horiaontal strips. There are two hnriaontol 
pnrtitions, those on which the two upper 
small drawers and the middle Irni^ drawer 
slide. The partitions are of Jin. stuff. 1 ft. 
2J in. wide and I ft. 10} in. long from shoulder 
to shoulder, berand which they have tenons 
1 in. long at each end ; for the tenons project, 
as shown, J in. Iieyond the end pieces. In 
addition to the tenons, these partitions are 
fixed with strong round-headed screws driven 




Ptg. eao.— Front of Jy-m Drawer ia QuMa Anne 
Chstt. 

3J in. by 1 ft. 4J in., as it overhangs J in. 
at the front and the ends. As shown 
ciikrgcd at G (Fig. U0»), a hollow is run 
along Its upper edge at the front and enda • 



Hf. aai.— Front ot Upper Drawer la goMa Aaae 
Cliaat 

into their ends through the end pieces. 
The lower and third drawera slidi on J-in. 
square runners lore* I'd on the inner aides 
of the end pieces, flush with which come the 
horiaontal front strips K, which arc also 
J in. square, and which are screwed into 
the OTenings in the end pieces. Alxive the 
top drawers is another strip i (Fig, 637), 
which is 2 in. wide and fixed in the same 
manner. The backlmard is i in. thick, 
2 ft. long, and 2 ft. 5 in. high. The upright 
partition between the two upper drawers 
is j in. thick, ahd is fixed with screwa driven 
into it through the upper borisontal partition, 
the backboard, and upper front strip t, an 
opening being cut in the front of the partition 
for the latter. The top of the chest is of 
J-in. stuff 2 ft. by 1 ft. 3 in., and ia screwed 
to the end pieces, backlmard, and upright 
partition. Its edges are hidden bv the 
cornice moulding, which is fixed over them 
and mitered at the comers. 



iif 

m 



M 



IM 



ft! 



Jr«w«..- I lit «». „( th» drawni will 
nil.™ thfm (.> Ih- lightly m»de, ur with l-in. 
■tufl io- iht liarkt nnd front., to -hich Ua. 
•idn and bottoms m Knwnl. r>oin 6ont 
to hark ih> out«d< mraramiwiit it thow 



CABhSRTWOnX AND JOIKBBT. 




>lk>wu» miut b. m.d, is ,fc, d„w„ ., 
th. lo».r p,rt. The onuin»ntal krn i. 
»»» «fcly g>ri with ™.U m^ihSdrf 
«ww.. rt«.. «.W, 647, „»d sas^T,^ 
dud I in. .0 th. foot ; Kg. m i. h.H J« : 



If. H4. iMUoa ihowlBf Waihitu4 
IMipUn IM Into OimtM Top. 



If. Ml. 




rig. 6H.-HortKmtal (Mtlon through 
WMhituidi Onwar Buiuini. 

of the upper part will be 1 ft. 2 in. only, as 
they are to he ornamented with an outer 

and t.,,1. Th,8 will bring them flu,h wiS 

un«ghtly in th^ir construction. A ^milaf 



Fig. «««.-S«itlon 

through Waih- 

■tand'i Drawer 

Framing. 



rig. HI. 

rigi. M7 and •«».- 
Drawar for 



fart 



Viaakataiid. 



and Figs, (ilio and (iC.l are to a acale of 2 in to 

the foot. These scales are only approamate. 

Simple Washstand. 

The washstand shown at Fig. i-.fi.) ),.„ 

the advantage of being very easily iiade. 



BEOBOOU rUBKITVBE AND FITMENTB. m 

at "J hr.ilT; V'' ■I'll; "''''• "!^ ■■' "■ ■'*»'" '» •"»»•<« «" th» b>R> the KT.W. 




»(. no. 



rif. u>. 



Ttn- — ut «•. -rront ud |,d. Elmthm. of Umlorr 
Wuhatud. 

Fl». Ml-T«rtto«l Swtloa of UraUry 
Wuhnud OB Lliio 7 T irif. S(0). 

If. •.».-Hortaon»u iMtioB of Ut«- 
~7 Wwhnud on Lint Z Z (Fig. «T0). 



Fl(. 6T1. Vanleol Sm- 

tloa of Uvotor; WMb< 

■taad 01 Uu z z (nx. 

<MJ. 





Wubiiud 



f 



- 


'i"' 


f 


: 






•A J 


(;■ 






' 


j J 




ri 


'r'lT" 


^ 



no 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEEY 



ilii 





Fig. 6T«. 



Fig*. 67fl to 877.- Ftont Elevation, Vertical 

Crosfl Section, and Horizontal Section of 

Comer Washstand. 



BEDHOOM FUHNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



191 





Fig. 6«0.~Se<!tlini 

tlmugh Cupboard 

Bottom of Corner 

WathBtaad. 



Fig. Ml.— Comer Wadi- 

•tand fort out to t«- 

celTO Ball (tee B and C, 

Fig. 6TS), 



Fig. 67«.-Oea8ral View of Comer Waahetand. 





fW.,679.-Enlarg«i DetaJI Seetion of Comer Wadi- Fig. «8».-^Detall of Comer 



stand at A (Fig. tu). 



Comer Poet at D (Fig. 878). 



ffaslietaiid's Back 



J 

1 


i-' 




1 



192 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



■ P 

R Ij 



them in the top. These side pieces are 
■hown separately at Fig. 663, and in section 
at Kg. 664 ; they are 1 ft. 4 in. long at the 
bottom, 8 in. at the top, and 7 in. deep, the 
curves being cut out with a bow saw. The 
back c (Fig, 662) is simply fixed on ilush. 
and need not be let into the top. The front 
and two side edges of the top are rounded 
as shown in Fig. 664, which also shows how 
the side pieces are let into the top, these being 
fixed with screws driven in from underneath 
the top. The back legs are rectangular in 
section, l|in. by IJ in., while the front legs, 
if not purchased read}' made, may be turned 
from a piece 1| in. squire to the pattern 
shown. The extreme length of all the legs 
is 2 ft. 4 in., the square part in the two front 
ones being ^ in. from the bottom and 7J in. 
long. The legs are connected below by 
stiffening rails d (see sectional plan, Fig. 665), 
J in. thick, and let into J-in. grooves. As 
indicated by the dotted outline in Fig. q65, 
the top projects | in. beyond the legs all 



round. By marking out th^ position (qf. -*fae ]atti 
the legs on the under side of the top,^tHfe^-'5lt fSSo'- 



required. Paint the washstand, with the 
exception of the top, a light oak colour 
which should be suitably grained, or paint 
it a light green ; the top should be painted 
white, in iimtation of marble. The top 
could be primed with pure whitelead paint, 
say two coats, and finished with best white 
enamel paint. 

Lavatory /ashstand. 

Figs. ()(»!» and 670 are the front and side 
elevations of a lavatory washstand, Figs. 
671, 672, and 673 being sections on x x 
(Fig. (i69), Y Y (Fig. G69), and z z (Fig. 670) 
resp: -tively. The two front posts in the 
lower part are 3 in. square, and the 
two back posts are 3 in. by 1 in. ; they 
should be cut to shape, chamfered, moulded. 
and beaded as shown in Fig. 673. There 
are two front rails, and two in each side, 
2^ in. by 1 in., the posts being mortised 
to receive them. Frames and panels are 
prepared for the door and the two sides, 



fixed with cross tongues 

1 i.u' t^\. ^-ji ■ .. ~ "' '-' ""' '"™ vJe'fclfes and posts (see Figs. 673 

length of the stiffemng rails can be obtaiM|l^ t* &Jldj67^)t Th i boarded bottom of the cup- 

*°^rri°^ ' *=ourse, for the hoSid and a fiilet screwed to the upper rails 

The width of the «iA^a«dr.veMpfteit».(Bee Fig. 671) form a rebhte 

3i in., and that ot-the-fe^^ ^ frftfieSt^ - » . .,/ . . 



allowance being_ made, of course, for 
J-in. grooves, 
back rails is 

rail under the "drawer 2 in. Two runners, 
f in. square, are fixed inside the legs for 
the drawer. To strengthen the legs at the 
top, stiffening rails 2 in. wide are fixed 
between them just under the top, similar to 
the lower rails. The back of the washstand 
may be curved to any outline desired, and 
a hole for the basin may be cut in the top 
if preferred. The method of constructing 
the drawer is shown at Figs. 666, 667, and 
668. The sides, front, and back are ^ in. 
thick, and the bottom is i in. thick. The 
depth of the drawer is 2J in. outside, making 
the sides 2J in. deep, but the back is only 
IJ in. deep. The pieces are framed together 
as shown in Figs. 667 and 668, after screwing 
a couple of china knobs in the front. Over 
the drawer is a shelf or top 2 ft. 8| in. long 
by 1 ft. 3 in. wide by J in. thick, and notched 
out at the corners to fit the angle of the legs. 
To prevent dust getting into the drawer, a 
dust strip E (Fig. 666) should be nailed on 
the bottom of the |-in. runners, as shnwn ; 
and blocks are put in under the shelf as 



ottom and top of the sides, and act 
as a stop for the hinged door at the front. 
A shaped piece of 8-in, by 1-in. material ia 
mitered round the top, on which the basin 
rests, moulds^ also being mitered romid; 
and a shaped plinth is secured at the bottom 
(see Figs. 669, 670, and 671). The upper 
portion of the washstand is composed of 
a frame of the shapes shown in Figs. 66'.t 
and 670, rebated and moulded to receive a 
slab of marble or tiles, with a shelf supported 
by brackets (see also Fig. 672). The supply 
pipe and the waste pipe in the cupboard may 
be boxed up if this is thought to be desirabh-. 

Corner Washstand. 

Elevations and plan of a corner washstand 
are presented by Figs. 675 to 677, a general 
view being shown by Fig. 678. Fig. 679 
is an enlarged detail at a (Fig. 676) ; Fij;. 
680, an enlarged detail showing the fixing 
of the cupboard bottom; Fig. 681, nn 
enlarged detail of thi' post from b to c 
(Fig. 675) ; .ind Fig. fi.a2 is an nnlarg^'-H 
detail at d (Fig. 675), showing the joints. 




ta)LE(l,sBEAlJX-ARTS 
de QUEBEC 

MATERIEL 




BEDBOOM FUBNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



1(»3 



Bedroom Lavatory with Reservoir. 

, The bedroom lavatory about to be 
described consistB of a framed pedestal with 
a pair of doors (see Figs. 683 to 681), a 
loped top (see Figs. 684 and 686) with two 
daps, and a raised shelf with a shaped 
pUnth ; it contains a stoneware lavatory 
basin and splash tray fitted with waste pipe 
and metal receiver, and with an iron reservoir 
to contain about 6J gal. of water. The 
lower part of the pedestal has divisions and 
shelves as indicated in Fig. 683, and one 
door is fitted with brackets and a towel 
roller, both doors being hung to the central 
division to fold in on each other (see Fig. 687), 
and be Sutened with cupboard locks. The 
upper pa. ., on the siilt- not occupied by the 
wash basin, may be : ted with toilet acces- 
sories, a mirror being uauwlly fastened 
under the lavatory '^'vp, oi a stationery* 
case may be formed and the slope utiUsed 
as a writing desk. If the reservoir were 
reduced to half the length, the remaining 
portion of the top enclosure might also be 
fitted as a stationery case, with a falling 
flap hinged at the bottom ; and with slight 
alteration and addition to the lower internal 
arrangement, the water in the reservoir 
might be heated with a paraflin lamp. 
The tank is filled through an aperture by 
the aid of a spout water-can, cither bv lifting 
ofi the shelf e (Fig. 686) or by providing in 
the shelf a hole which may be covered by 
a wood cap. Suitable woods for the design 
would be as follows : To finish in polish, 
American birch or black walnut ; to finish 
in paint or ename!, yellow deal or American 
pine. All the interior parts, such as shelves, 
bottom, back, etc., may be made of white 
deal for economy. The sides or ends consist 
of framing of 1-in. stuff, mortised and 
tenoned together, the tenons on the back 
ed^es coming through and being wedged, 
while those on the front edges are stopped 
J in. back from the front sinking ; if not 
fitted tightly, they should be secured with 
short, stout screws on the inside. The stiles 
[are shaped as shown in Fig. 684, after they 
^re jramped up and cleai. ;d off, and the top 
jails are shaped to fit the slope, the dimen- 
sions being given on Fig. 68;j. A moulding 
j[Fig. 688) is worked on the rail either with 
» 



hollow and round planes, or with a Bpecint 
scratch tool. The raised and chamfered 
panel is of }-in. stuff, and is flush inside. 
The framing is stop-grooved to receive the 
shelves at the bottom and top, and is rebated 
at the inside to receive the back. A ^-in. 
sinking is made across the level portion of 
the rail to receive the return ogee moulding 
of the top, and the panels may be either 
ploughed in or inserted in rebates and fixed 
with beaded slips as shown in Fig. 689. 

Reservoir Case, etc.— The reservoir case 
is formed separately, and inserted after the 
pedestal is glued up. The piece forming 
the front may, if of hardwood, be jointed 
just below the rail g (Fig. 686) to a piece of 
deal, this piece (see Fig. 685) being grooved 
i in. into the sides, and running down and 
resting on the lavatory top, to which it is 
glued and screwed. The return ends of tlu- 
enclosure are made lying (that is, with the 
fibres of the wood disposed horizontally), and 
may be jointed to the front piece either by 
groove and tongue or by mitre dovetailing. 
The fiaps are shown made in the solid, 
with mitre-clamped ends. A pair of 2-in. 
butts should be used for each flap, and these 
must be fixed in the side grain, not end 
grain, of the clamps. The back is framed 
up with |-in. stiiff with J-in. flush panels, 
the end stiles running from top to bottom, 
and the three rails shown in Fig. 686 tenoning 
into them. The muntin, shown in Fig. 687. 
is framed between the two lower rails, but 
there is no mimtin in the top panel, which 
is a lying panel. The back legs should be 
strengthened by soUd blocks endways of 
the grain, as shown in Fig. 690. 

Completing the Lavatory.— In putting the 
carcase together, after each part has been 
properly fitted and brought to size, nail 
together the interior division and shelving, 
keeping them flush at the front ; then fix 
the top and bottom to the upright division, 
inserting at the same time the standard f 
(Fig. 687). It may be noted that che hollow 
for the basin in the division j will be cut 
only approximately at first, the final cutting 
being made with a keyhole or pad saw 
after the basin has been scribed in pusition. 
Next turn the interior on one end and drive 
on the end framing, putting a httte glue in 
the grooves ; then reverse the position and 



f ;" 



J I •> 



if < 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



treat the uthei end aimilsrly ; then atsnd 
the pedestal on its feet, cramp up, and 
•qnare the carcase. For painted work, 
nail through into the top and bottom, but 
in poUahed work do not nail, but use angle 
blocks wherever possible without showing. 
Leave the cramp on until the glue is dry. 
Having fitted and fixed the reservoir case 



together, drive it down into position and 
glue the joints. Drive in the rail H (Figs, mi 
and 686), gluing its lower edge, and brad 
the edge o (Fig. 6«6) into it. Fix the rail r 
and the back, which may be bradded on but 
not glued. Flush off the top edges and fit 
in the shelf e. Hang the flaps ; mitre mould- 
ing I (Fig. 683) up to them. Fix the shaped 




BEDROOM FURNITURE AND FITMKNTS. 



bottom rail, M and hang the doot«, bore 
holM for the tap and waste pipe, and the 
httmg np will be complete. In the caae of 
poU»hed work, all parti below eurrotmded 
parts ghonld be bodied in with polish before 
being put together. 



Night Commode with Folding Arm». 

Details of a night commode with folding 
armj are given in Figs. 691 to 695, the first 
three figures being produced to a scale of 
1 in. =1 ft. The further explanatory 




Fig. <SS.— Fart VarUeal Sactloa of Bwlnwin 
Lavatory Door. 



Pig. .«6.-Cro.. s«Uon of Bedroom Uvalory Fig. .89.-P.rt HoriionUl S«tlon of B«lroom 

with Sownroir. I^„,^ Boor. 





Pig. seT.-HoriKmtal 8«,tioii tSm^igk Bwlroom Lavatory. 



Pig. 890.— DotaU of Back Lag, 
etc, of Bedroom Lavatory. 






[' ; 



li 



i M 



IM 



CABINETWOUK AND JOINERY. 



ill 



fimirej (Figs. (i9« to 701) givo all nMesutr 
information. Figs. 090 to 099 are drawn 
to a scale of 4 in. = 1 ft., and Figs. 700 
and 701 to a scale of i in. =1 ft. 



1 ft. 6 in. deep, on each side of the chimne}r- 
hreast, are arranged of equal width, and are 
fitted with wardrolwa as shown, the fireplace 
having a wood mantelpiece surmounted by 




Tig. m. 




Tit-ni. 



"^^^^^JZ^ 


"--"-:' 


'-l-H^S. 


-'^^^=^- - -•-■^■=ZL 


-^^^- 


--- _ 


^f 


!3 


-SSS^: 


rftffl 


=??-^- -^^ 


i?^ 



Wardrobe end Mantel Fixtures lor 
Bedroom, 

rtlere a bedroom is large and spacious, 
and the fireplace is in the centre of one side 
of the room, ample wardrobe accommoda- 
tion can be obtained, and a highly effective 
decoration be added, by such an arrange- 
ment as illustrated in Fig. 7u2. The recesses, 



Flga an to •»•.— PiOTl Elevation, 
Vertical Section, anil Plan of Night 
Commode with Folding Anns (open). 



Fig. 693 

an overmantel. In this case the wardrobe 
frames and the mantel framing have their 
principal surfaces in the same plane, the 
joints between them being covered by a 
pilaster around which the plinth, necking, 
and cornice moulds are broken. Fig. 703 
is a vertical section through the wardrobe, 
and Fig. 704 a vertical section through 
the mantel and overmantel. The various 



BEDROOM FURNITCBE AND FITMBWTS. 







CABINETWOSK AND JOINEBV. 




BZDBOOM rUKNITUBE AND FITIIEKTB, 




If- Tl«.-««MoB Umnth 
HutabluU, (to. 



Pl(. TM.-«MtioB thmih 

Oonioa, Mo., of Wu4»l» 

ud Ilutol ntamt 






ni- m.-Hn of Wudnb. d„w« mu 



T 1 — 

Rj. Til — BntloD tlmagh 
PwUmMit of Wudnbo ud 

HiMtl ntnunt 




rij- TIS— S«3h Prictfi 
BoUor. 




rig. 714.— Joint! in Wanlnbo (iw E, Fig. 



i 
1 


; 




i 

^ 1 







i 



90O 



CABIXETWOBK AND JOINEBT. 



■ i 



drtaili of ronstruction »n iilio ftilly illtu- 
tratrd. 

Conttnietlon ef Wardroba.— The word- 
roliM an forinnl hv lint lining the ttem 
at thu Uclc and lidn with jin. jointnl or 
l*nd«l lioarda a (Fifi. "IW) fix«l to Mn. 
hv 1-in. gronnda «, one o( the l«(t»r Mng 
plur«l at a convenient height to receive the 
wardrotie hoolca. ao aa to allow of longer 
«rrew« than could he emploved if acrewed 
through the thickneia of the hoania only. 
A gfiod avitem of ohtaining hanging accom- 
modation i> to fljc a hrasa rod or tutie acroaa 
the centre, with aliding hooka, aa indicated 
at c (Fig. 7ai). The rod niav lie supported 
l>y paterw screwed to the hoarding at each 
end. To the enda of the side grounda the 
wardrohe frame ia aecured (see Fig. 70.1), 
the drawer runnera D (Fig. 7(Xi), .1 in. by 
Ij in.. Wing inserte<t at the anme time; 
the liack end of the Utter reata on packing 
pieces of the necessarj- height, and ia nailed 
on or dovetailed. The hearers E ( Kig. 707) 
for the shelf are 2 in. by IJ in., and are dove- 
tailed at the front into the rail of the frame, 
and at the liack into a piece of stuff T, 2 in. 
by 1 in., screwed to the lining of the cupboard 
(see also Fig. 703). A thickness of 1} in. is 
necessary for the frame and door, the detail 
of rebates and mouldings being such as to 
allow of the J-in. bevelled plate mirror being 
inserted from the face, and the ,",-in. back- 
hoard and minor fixed by screwing the 
mouldings from behind (see Figs. 70(i and 
708). To irevent dust entering the ward- 
robe, the top should be boarded with 1-in. 
tongued and grooved boards and covered 
with strong paper. It will be found best to 
have the length of the boards at right angles 
to the face of the frame, sufficient overhang 
being given to provide for the proper secur- 
ing of the top edge of the cornice (see Fig. 
7011). The wardrobe doors are rebated all 
round their edges to assist in the exclusion 
of dust. The cornice t (Fig. 70!i) is .5J in. 
by IJ in. ; dentils o, 1 in. by J in. ; piece H, 
;> in. by 1} in. ; frieze J, 'g in. bv | in. ; 
necking k, out of stuff IJ in. square ; pedi- 
ment L, 1} in. by IJ in. ; and piece m, 
jj in. by Ij in. 

Mantel and Overmantel.— The mantel and 
overmantel are prepared to similar detail 
to the wardrobe frame, snd fixed in the 



aame phne. and a iunk-mouMed>iUater 
coveta the edges of the framea. The shelf 
X (Fig. 710), 7 in. by 2 in., is tongued to the 
iKittom rail of the ov-rmantel. and is AxmI 
to the bed mould o, n, in. by 4 in., which is 
provided with dentils r, ) ia. by | in., the 
mouW having lieen nrevioualv secured to 
the mantel frame with screws 'from behind. 
Avhere the bed mould is of large site, it 
may be built up with advantage, or roav take 
the form of a sprung mould and lie lei . iioilow 
behind : this would necessitate thj t.'tumeil 
ends of the mould being mitered on instead 
of lieing worknl in the solid. 

Comica, FritM, Pedimant, «tc.— The cor- 
nice, frieie, and necking are built up of 
medium-site sections, and rebated or housed 
together to avoid open joints through 
warping or shrinkage (see Fig. 7011), and are 
nxed by nailing through the rebates or 
screwing from behind, a deep top rail being 
provided in the framing for that purpoae. 
The pediment is built up separately, as 
indicated by Fig. 711, and is dowelled to 
the cornice and further aecured with 4-in. by 
4-in. by 1-in. angle irons screwed to the 
pediment and cornice mould. Dentils q, 
1 in. by | in., are glued on as shoin 

Drawtr Rollers and Runnan.— T e waia- 
robe drawers, being large, and liable to 
become heavy, should be provided with 
friction rollers (see Figs. 713 and 713) to 
ensure easy motion, and it ia imperative 
that hardwood runners be used, so as to 
prevent the rollers working a groove in the 
material. Fig. 714 ia a detail of the joints 
as seen at r in Fig. ' .', s representing the 
muntin rebated for the door. 

Special Points.— If the work ia to be 
painted (which is the usual mode of decora- 
tion for fixtures), the whole of the face-work 
should be executed in thoroughly well- 
seasoned American yellow pine. If it is to 
be polished, any of the ornamental hard- 
woods of good figure might be chosen. In 
that case the whole of the moulds and 
built-up portions must be fi.\ed from behind, 
as shown in the details. This method of 
fixing, indeed, is advisable in all cases where 
possible, as, if this is carefully done, and if 
the screws are inserted in the most effective 
position, warping will bf prevented and a 
better (ace will be produced. Where there is 



BEDBOOM FUBNIIUBE AND WTMEKTS. 



JmU bn,M brick. ,bouW b« inwrtJfci 
waeni tho mill .» u jn. ,y k ^*- 



sot 

fcimiBg tb. oormn .ad «:^g tbTw°b 

/J'*"'!?*^""'"'" ?«>••«•' i» nude Mwraio 
bug : tb. ude. and bottom ,« „f l-jn. "m 
tb. top .nd back of l-ia., tbo bottom S 
hott«Kl .n „, .howa in kg. 71?, Tb. im 



ComMMtlon Wardrob. B«Utc«l 

ii"S;d.'^.r:"ot.;^5^-;^^^^^^^ 

P«rb«p. „mewh»t taller than u.,ul wS 

.r^mt.^n'tbrrtLtAA""'^"' 

cupboa«l a full-,!.. bed,Su , foldX^ 
oco„^,.ngabo„Uin„nb.i 

J/«J„ll:t^.■''"Tb',t"^^ 

fr«m. .. binged at tb. bottom, and Xn 
a.d „a.., ada^a^n^rtnl 

nght half a w;tion below. Fig 719 ,» „ 
m.«tr.tions are enla'^^^ta't^-pTTsg 
kI' 722 eJe^r '*hT ""'"'8'" ""« dooS 
(Kg 7221> IKc. 7oi*'i ' ' "«''on at A 

oft I!!L% '%"T,?'"' '! ^^ »" 

(Fie 724>- Wit ,o5*; "*"• ''"""' »' B 
* * 7*' ■ *^'«- 726, longitudinal section 



the bottom («, Fii. 71«). Tb. bfck i. ^ 
?n S ""T °' V'"- ^"» placed in «bite' 
™tSm". •T"'"' '•"■*''.• '^«" "' «>« top and 
the hi?.; ^'i"- "'^'"^ •'""'I '• Pl"t-d round 
™>?» "d.'^h end of tbepodeatal top 
^ break the joint, and «l.o to form . w.fi 

o ^h. cupboarf to «t in ; tbi. i. ^:^:f, 
t,.JS'h . dnnrer which a intended 

X/J-'L^;":- gt'ed'^ts^n^d' ♦■'",• 

dovetailed in the' uTTZiu.^!"'"^' "^ 

Cupboard -Tbo eupboard conairti of two 

.' lid 8,aoa of l.,n. dr ,T ,, .jb top and bottZ 

;:wnn%-T^--rt'eiett 
^i.:.^.^TtLtati-f£"^t 

Plauted ,hp. The door, are* framS u^ 
•.? }'■'"• P'""' " shown in tbe detail. 
vtin'tM 'H" "T "l-n-fc" and i t: 
y-jointcd paneU, and bung with 21.in 

flu".htb"*'^\"f'' i-atened ^ith two eSg": 

fame ?f„ ,1- i' " .'S""" "^ panelled 

"Leiher tV °"'"'- """''^ ""d 'enoned 
aetail by Fig „ ^jt^^ j 

In' i iS"'".*"""^' »■«> «""''ed with a 
<vL ^r* f^ """"^'i "erting. At b 
&■ "" m"^ "7' "" 'town two bra.. 
^°rf,5"'^-«-«' 'o thedoo''r,rH 
ov^ ^l- 1.° , xi^°' '• * "lovablo wood bar 
over which clothe, may hang 

B«l.t««l._The bedrtead i. compo«d of 



lllri 



™^ CABINETWORK AND JOINEEY. 

!!';?.■'!.'*.'= /^i'' .-'-•.'?>' - '".••.""i "«=« "°»? worked roudd the inner top edge to receive 



voiio «* Q :- v ,1 ■ r \ . r"™ nuiaw luuuu cu« inner top edffe to receive 

Ind tLni 5^ ^i,""- P""'.P™' rU?^ **" «"»' *•«" «»«» ">» ''Ebbing w, which 
727 and 7J8. A rebate, J in. by \ m.. i, bands, pa»ing over and under each oth^ 



Fig. 716. 




Fig. 7l». 



"^ '" "* "•-"*" ""s ss:£isrw2iM'.tis '•"'"■ •"" "^'^ ""«"' 



BEDBOOM FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 




Bnhtead. 



Wartwbe 





n«. 7aO.-D«t«il of Wardrab. 
Top. 



Comblaatloa WKdrob. Bestead. 





ng. Tia, 

rig» 721 and TS3.— D«t«Ul ot 

HlddJe Bail of Wardiobo 

Door. 



Rgi. 7a« and 7a».— Part 
BoTatlon and SMtion at 
Bottom of Wardrob, t,aa. 



Tig. 7... ng. ,ai.-H™^«„,al 8«ti«, thro.,1, Wardrob. Doora. 



sssRsii 



ill! 
1 1 If- 



i i 



11 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEEY. 



their ends being rove on the fillets, which 
are then screwed into the frame (see Pig. 72(i). 
The bands should be the length of the 
opening when they lie flat together ; the 
spreading necessary to introduce the side 
fillets will then shorten them somewhat. 
One side fillet is first fixed, then the opposite 
fillet is pinched up with hand screws and 
fixed in position with wood screws. One 
end fillet is next fixed, the webbing interlaced, 
and the other end served the same as the 
side, pulling all up taut. The join in the 
webbing should be lapped and brought 
under the fillet, and it is an improvement 
to make a slight notch in the bottom of the 
rebate under each band of webbing, so that 
the fillet may sit close down in the rebate. 

Bedstead Frame.— The bedstead frame is 
hinged to a rail 3 in. by IJ in. (d. Figs. 715 
and 7 It)) fixed inside the cupboard to two 
elbow-pieces o, which are sloped off slightly 
to prevent the frame riding on them when 
it is down. The two legs E are framed to- 
gether by a chamfered cross rail, of such a 



enclosed behind doors, and the drawer below 
will hold the pillow and bedclothes. The 
design is of a plain and simple character, 
and the front elevation (Fig. 7.'iO) and the 
end elevation (Fig. 731) are drawn to the 
scale of 1 in. to a foot. 

Cabinet-bookcase.— The cabinet-bookcase, 
being entirely separate from the interior 
fittings, may be first considered. It will 
look well if made of mahogany stained a 
dark red in imitation of Chippendale ma- 
hogany, or, in fact, any of the usual hard- 
woods, to match the rest of the furniture. 
The flat top or the cornice, the outer and 
inside ends, the bottoms, the shelves, the 
drawer front, and the shaped pediment and 
span-rails are all of 1-in. stuff. The door 




size as just to pass easily within the frame, 
to which they are pivrf^ with 3-in. by |-in. 
screw-bolts. The leg frame is p'evented 
from slipping when in use by two iron hooks 
fixed under the bed and fitting into two eyes 
screwed in the legs ; these hooks should be 
hung so that they enter the eyes from outside, 
otherwise they may be accidentally knocked 
out by anyone who is standing at the bed- 
side. The head- and foot-boards, 12 in. 
and 9 in. by j in. respectively, are hinged 
to the frame by back flaps, and are held in 
position by cords, as shown in Fig. 719. 
The bedstead is held securely when in the 
wardrobe by two curn-buttons, screwed 
under the frame as shown near E (Fig. 716). 
Figs. 715 to 718 are drawn to a scale of j in. 
to 1 ft., Figs. 720 to 726 are IJ in. to 1 ft., 
and Figs. 727 to 729 at 3 in. to 1 ft. 

Combination Cabinet - bookcase and 
Bedstead. 

In the cabinet-bedstead about to be 
described, the bedstead and mHttrease-i? are 



Fig. 737.— Plan of Comer of Bed-frmme. 



stiles and rails are of IJ-in. stufi. The 
tracery pattern in the doors may be made 
with the usual bead and fillets to the section 
shown in Fig. 732, or an eftective way is to 
cut out the pattern in very thick brown 
paper, and gild the face with Ardenbrite 
gold paint. The gilded paper is placed 
against the glass, and to keep it in position 
a frame covered with some suitable fabric, 
- jch as serge, cloth, or silk, is placed behind. 
In getting out the outer and inside ends to 
width, the construction of the carcase back 
must be considered. The side brackets A 
(Fig. 730), the framing of the back panel 
over the doors, and the upright muntins B 
(Fig. 733), are all of 1-in. stuft. A (Fig. 734) 
is a section of the side brackets resting 
against the top above the bookshelves, and 
(^ is the back framing, at the oame height. 



BEDHOOxr FUBNITUEE AND FITMENTS. 



!i 



The outer ends are rebated to receive the 
muntms and the latter are ^^ved to 
aeeommodate the j-in. backs D aFig »■!) 
The bracket A and back panel c, and the 
i^unting B and back d (PiL 733 and 7-Ul 
rest e,ual,yagajn,t the e'dge'lfrhetTp'ab'oi 

'ig- 733 also shows a sectional plan of the 
carcase Wk fitting against the bottoms 
above and below the drawer. The ouSe 
ends stand back 3 in. from the front e it 
thro f^b 'T^'J"^'- The latter are lul 

t^.p over the door are dovetailed across the 
nslde ends as at r (Fig. 735), which v ew s 
lookmg from the back. The groove mut 




Hit- 728.— Section of Bel-ftame ihoviiig 
Wabbing. 

finish i in. short from tht front so that the 
dovetail does not show. Th. bottoms, tops 
and shelves are fixed in the same way to 
the outer ends, but the ends of the bottoms 
and the shelves which intersect with the 
ins.de ends must be mortised and tenoned as 

stand back J m from the face of the ends, 

(Jfig. 730). The com.ce is fixed to the ends 
w.th screws dnven through from the top 
side the small brackets H {Figs. 730 and 731 ) 
are also secured with screws. If desired, the 
bookshelves may be movable, and supported 
on brass pins as shown in Fig. 737 which 
represents a portion of the end with holes 

v1 -ll' }' P"" ^^'^^ ^"PP^rt the 'helf. 
J.g. (38 shows a peg or pin which can be 
oMaiucd of any ironmonger. The drawer 



ioiZf" " *'"' ■"""' T^- ""l the lines with 
square corners are hollow in section a" 
shown m F.g. 739. The door, and the back 
panel above may have ovolo mouldings 

iNg. 7W. The shaped valances under the 
shelves are of leather, and are fixed by firat 
glmng the top edges to a strip of pine about 

tbl ;.,?■■ ^ ?°''™ '" 'ho ""der side of 
the shelves .s made to receive the strip ,see 

stand back VV ,n. from the edge of the sholt 
The ornamental part in the centre of the 

liK^if """* 'y'""^- '■'"'^ PO'"' being 
half-circular m section, and the ends rounded 

™mts'th:'i:b!'^"^"""'^*-''°«^"''«"'" 

Folding Bedstead.— Fig. 742 is a side 
elevation, and Fig. 743 f part plan drawn 
to l-m. scale, of the folding bedstead The 




Tig. 7J0.-s.c«on of OomlM of ComMaatlon 
Wardroba Bwlsteid. 

best n^terial for the framing is well-seasoned 
birch 2 in. wide and 1 j in. thick. The side 
ivt «? !*• I*^i "° connected to blocks K 
ii\ iV '''"^? ^'° 2 "'• "'de and IJ in. 
thick. These blocks must be firmly fixed 
with screws driven into the ends and the 
bottom above the drawer. It will be seen 
that the whole of the strain of the bed- 
stead framing on the cabinet lies at the 
bolts L (Fig. 743). The side rai', m (Fig 
-42) are connected to the rails 3 by j-in 
diameter bolts, and the end rail i (Fig' 
.43) IS dovetailed into the side rails «. 
Pine laths o (Figs. 742 and 743), U in 
wide by j in. thick, are screwed to the 
side ra.ls, with a space of 2J in. be- 
tween the laths. Two legs p (Fie 7421 
are bolted to the rails; they are 2 in. by 
18 in. at the top and taper to IJ in. at the 
bottom These leg, are fixed to the other 
sides of the rails 3, the other legs q (Fig 742) 
teng fixed to the inside of the raYls m! 
itop pegs K (Figs. 742 and 743) are fixed 



iti^'' 




BEDEOOM rUBNITUKE AND FITMENTS. 



207 



'mm 
'mi' 




Kg. m.—Sat UcnUOR of OrnWnw- 
bookoua ud Biditamd. 



bookaw ud Biditrad. 




rut. »«».-««lIon Ihrc^h B«k 0, Cbtaenookou, 
and BMUtMd. 



•nd Bedatoad. 



•^Wfe 



fiPL 



Fig. 79». 




Hg. T3». 

Pign. 7S» and 73«.-Method. of FiUng Carcaie Toiw. 
Bottom., ud ShelTM of OaUaot-bookcaie 



.«'0,i;|ti,;;«V,o 

Tig. 7J7.-B01.. In Sid. of Oabtart-bookoM. to 
iMOiTO Korabl. Shtlna 









!l[litflj 



to the 
shown. 



BEDROOM FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



To prevent the bedstead framng 




--ewed 'toi:V Q "mJ To ^''\^ 
frame, at right an^a Uft 't Pi^;?^'" 

lath, o WhenTh. h!J.™;'" '"'" "' ">• 
J- lo make up the level of the 




H''™'^ '"""i"?. a i-in. board u (Fig. 7«) 

Lfratt^:it?tjr„tl]^5;r"I 

oftheWateadfto.t'he'^o^ttl^Vrd^i!; 

Combined Wardrobe. Washstand. and 
Cupboard Fitment. 

wa^stand, a mirror, two set, of drawer, 
a boot and shoe cupboard, and a tow" S 



I jMlf 



210 



OABDfETWOBK AND JOIKEBY. 



It should be sude of clean dry whitewood, 
and finiihed in enamel, the paneli being 
lined out with curved comers. The back 
framework, with sections of the rails, is 
shown by Fig. 747, the several parts being 
mortised and tenoned together. The back 
for the wardrobe and cupboard is panelled 
withj-in. rough boards, glue- jointed together. 
To obtain the width, 1 n. 6 in. for eadi end, 
three widths of 6-in. bj j*in, itufi are 
tongued and glued ; the face side is trued 



panel opening to the framing. Hang the 
door with 2i*in. brass butts, and fiumish 
with a knob and fastening. Battens of 2|-in. 
by {-in. stuff are fixed mside the wardrobe 
to carry some brass hooks for clothes. 

BSirror. — The swing mirror is of bevel- 
edge plate glass, mounted in a framework 
of stuff 2 in. by | in. ; the rails and stilea 
are secret tenoned and wedged together, and 
rebated at the back for glazing. A backing 
board ^",| in. thick protects the glass at the 





Fiff. TU. Fig. 746. 

FIgt. 740 and 746.— Gtneral View and End Etovation of Combined Wardrobt, Waihituid, 
and Cupboard Fitment 



and cleaned, and the inner side cleaned and 
grooved for the bottom (see Fig. 748). The 
inside end of the wardrobe is | in. thick, 
grooved and tongued to the floor, which is 
afterwards nailed to it (see Fig. 749). The 
dotted lines in Fig. 749 show the hanging 
stile of the small cupboard, and the pluth 
over the division. The wardrobe door is 
framed of |-in. stuff, and is grooved to 
receive a panel | in. thick, which should be 
fitted in the grooving when the framework 
is knocked together. It is finished at the 
front with a bolection moulding, shown in 
section in Fig. 750. The door is finished 
inside with a beaded fiUet nailed round the 



back, and fillets nailed in the rebate keep 
the glass in position. The inside front edge 
of the framework is moulded in the solid, 
and on trhe face another moulding is planted, 
being so arranged that the square edge of 
the solid moulding forms part of the planted 
moulding (see Figs. 751 and 752). The 
mirror is hung with brass pivoted plates 
let into the woodwork flush with the surface 
and screwed. Fig. 753 shows a pivoting 
plate ; one is fitted at each side of the mirror, 
and Fig. 754 shows the drilled plate to receive 
the pivots. One plate must be drilled to 
the solid lines, and one plate must be slotted 
as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 754. 



BEDBOOU FUKNITTOE AND FITMENTS. 




211 



n*. 747— BMk rr»m«orl. of Coinbiii«l 
Fltmnt. 




n« 7M.-S.oUm ot Wuizm, Door . 
OonUo. of CombiiiKl Htment 





n» 751— Hrottar 
PUto. 



ri». 748.-Bottom of ComUaod 
Fltmont Jointad to End- 



Pig. 7M— Wardrob. End 
Onond lito Floor. 




Pig. '»l.-Soctloa of Hiiror Pnunlng. 



Hg. 7»a.— PMt of Fr«inliig of CombUuu 
ntmMt, ■howiBg Honldlogi ia Sootlon. 



H' 





M fl 




!f^l 








' '1' '- 1 


\ 


^1m',I 


• 1 

I 

1 ; 


1 ^^H 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



Thew plates are let into the surrounding 
framework, and the wood is cut away to fit 
the slot, BO that the mirror can be taken ni>* 
if required. Cut the plates from sheet in>n 




rig. T04. - Plata to notiTS Pivot. 

or brass, round up the pivots, and rivet them 
into the drilled piece. 

Washstand Top, etc.— The tiles at the 
back of the washstiind top fit between two 
rails in the carcase frame, and are fixed 
against a small angle moulding mitcred in 
and pinned at the front, and by means of 
strips pinned behind the tiles. The washstM r l 
top and side fences are of marble {w\ ite < > 
coloured) fixed together with screws and 
plaster-of- Paris. Fillets screwed to the 
wardrobe end and back rail support the 
marble top (see section on b b, Fig. 747). 
For economy a wooden top and fence could 
readily be adt>T>ted. A cornice moulding, 
If in. by | in., surmounts the mirror portion ; 
groove it to fit the top rail (see Fig. 752), 
and return the outer end, the inside being 




Tig. TBS-— Front Cornsr Joint and Drawtr of 
Combined ntment 

cut square to tiie wardrobe. A nosing 1 in. 
by i in., glued and pinned on the vertical 
edge of the fmming above the marble top, 
gives it a finished appearance (see Figs. 751 



and 752). The low carcase end it | in. solid* 
Hnd to it the towel rail can be fixed with 
wooden blocks, shaped and glued on» or 
fancy brau brackets. If wooden blocks are 
used, they should be recessed to receive thf 
ends of the towel rail. \Vlien they are glued 
to the carcase, drive a screw into them from 
the inner tide. The joint with the end and 
front comer stile is tongued and groove<l, 
and when it is glued and nailed together, a 
number of small blocks should be glued in 
the angle to support it ; see Fig. 755, in 
which r. is the carcase end, f the front 
L-orner stile, d f the drawer front, d s the 
drawer side, and c b the glued comer blocks. 
Putting together the various parts of the 




Flff. TB6.— DrawoTS and FUnth of OomUBod 
FltmoBt 

carcase should leave a flush surface at the 
front (with the e'<'ception of the projecting 
tongue on the right-band comer), on which 
the whole of the front framing for the drawers 
and cupboard door can be fixed. In framing 
this part together, the bottom rail projects 
I in. above the flooring, and shows | in. 
above the top edge of the plinth or skirting 
(see Fig. 75t)). The hanging stile of the 
small cupboard door is cut away at the top 
left-hand edge to admit the wardrobe dooi 
in folding, consequently a comer block must 
be glup^ inside, in the angle, down to the 
point at which the stile again covers the 
division (see Fig. 757, and also the dotted 
liae in Fig. 749). In Fig. 757, c b is the 
comer block, d the end division of the 



BEDBOOM FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



Mrdrobe, w d tW wardrobo door, and 8 tho 
hanging »til< of the anuU cupboard door. 
Below where the portion u cut away, the 
•tile M fixed to the division by Krew. driven 
from the inner .ide, and it is advisable to 
leave out the final fixing of the back until 
the front u flnuh«i. I'he drawer fronU 
«e pnpaied from stuff | in. thick, the sides 
.? «•"• •*»«. »nd the bottoms from |-in. 
stuff. They are dovetaUed and grooved 
together, and the front top and bottom 
edges are reheved with a small bead. Knobs 
or handles can be fitted, and locks added if 
desired. The drawers move on runners let 
into the feammg and grooved into the 
adjoiung sides. 

Cupboard Door, Partitions, etc.-Tlie cup- 
board door CD (Fig. 787) has U-in. by l-in 
sti es and top rail, and 2-in. by fin. bottom 
rail ; these are mortised and tenoned and 



:.'13 

hoards fixed in vertically. In fixing the 
various parts, the front, bottom, and 
divisions should !« put toKother, and the 
part of the back framing carn-ing the mirror 
screwed to the wardrobe division as shown 
in Fig ,58. The back of the wardrobe can 
then be screwed to the rebate and ends, 
i he framing of this part being j in. thick 
« |-in. strip must be nailed to make nii the 
difference at the bottom, compared with 
the rest of the framing, which is I in. ; or 
the rebate can be cut J in. deep, and mav 
S^ » i'nproJM'ion above the framing. 
Plinth.-The plinth is of 4J.in. bv jin 
stuff, with chamfered top edge, mitered at 
the comers to return the ends and nailed 
to the carcase. Along the front a number 
ot small blocks are glued in the angle to 
support it, as shown in Fig. 730. 
Cornice Moulding.— The cornice moulding 




757.— gMtloa of Capboard Bui(lii{ |tu< 
and Doer ot Combined Fltsmt 

grooved for a panel J in. thick. A moulding 
IS planted on the front aa a finish to the 
panel (see Fig. 787); inside, the door should 
be left square. Hang it with IJ-in. brass 
butts, and also fix a knob and catch. The 
cupboard partitions are formed on one side 
by the wardrobe end, and on the other by 
boards nailed to a fillet screwed to the door- 
closing stile or jamb, and another batten is 
screwed to the carcase backing. If this 
batten is recessed into the floor and framing 
rails, a stronger job will result. This batten 
18 also used to take the ends of the drawer 
runners, aa the cupboard division is not 
strong enough to carry them, and if firing it 
to the back only, mark it in place. Try it 
in position, and screw it up before raising 
the back, the drawer runners meanwhile 
being held by a waste strip. If a wooden 
washstand top it used, it could be grooved 
along the bottom to receive the division 



'is- 7»«.— SMtlon of Oaroasa Back and JoUtlir 
of Framlnt wttb Wardrobe DlTision. 

IS 3 in. deep ; a suitable section can be 
obtained ready made. This is built on a 
framework of 2}-in. by f-in. stuff (see Fig. 
760), and IS kept in position on the wardrobe 
by four small blocks glued at the angles and 
ends. It must not be fi.ted to the wardrobe 
but should be left detachable for moving 
puqioses. On a level with the lower cornice 
a shelf 6 in. wide is placed, and the near end 
IS supported on a bracket, which mav be of 
wood or brass. At the opposite end it is 
lapped into the top part of the cornice 
moiJding. A small angle moulding is fixed 
m the joint at the wardrobe end and back 
framing, as shown in Fig. 758. 

Sliavins Pedestal. 

The shaving pedestal illustrated by Figs. 
7.W to 773 looks effective if constructed of 
light wood, such as Hungarian ash or light 
wahiut; dry white pine, stained and poUshed 



iW'! 



214 



III 



"ill ' 



11- 



CABINETWORK AND JOINKBY. 




Fig. 798. 



nr» "» to T«l.-V,rtloil S^otion, 

Itont EUratlon, aid Bmiiiiiital Part 

Bectloiu of SlUTlag PidMtal. 




In- "• ud 7eT,_Bsrtte,. ttrough Tod i 



BEDBOOM FUBNITUHB AND PIT1IEKT8. 



»« 




IMMtal. 




«f- TO.-D.«(Ul. pf «lu»ta« 



''«'««1 Dnwtr. 



K.:,k^: '^m:-^ 






tv-^'^'>^ 



r*. 7«-,««„ ^ a..^ ,^, ^ ,^^ ^,^^^_ _ 




Hf. 7i6. 





t »b.TiBf PwlMUa 



"«• "•.-BWIM a To, 0. Bl„«^ p«,^ 



«g. 7,,.-U^ ^j^ ^, ^ ^^ 




iu 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINEEY. 



or enameUed, is less expensive. The pedestal 
consists of two solid shaped ends, a solid 
and moulded top, framed soffit, a drawer 
two panelled doors, enclosing a cupboard 




housing for the upper and lower guard 
raUs from the front edge. The housings 
should be sunk A m. deep. Prepare the 
top soffit and shelves of equal len^hs, and 
to the width, shown in Fig. 759. Prepare 
their ends to fit the grooves, then mould and 
shoulder the front edges and work a small 
chamfe- on each front edge of the ends as fa. 
down as the moulded foot at the bottom of 
the cupboard. Nert fit together, clean ui, 
the face sides of the top and shelves and the 
outsides of the ends, and glue up, leaving the 
clamps or cleats on until dry. Then turn 
tne carcase upside down and skew-brad 



Fig. 771. 

Flp. 770 ud 771.-8«tlMi sad Elevation' of 

Oonier of Shaving Pedestal's Biiror. 

containing a deal shelf, a framed and 
panelled back, a swing mirror, and guard 
rail. Prepare the two ends in the solid to 
the shape shown in Pig. 73'J. The mirror 
elbows may be economically produced by 
jomting on the dotted lines "xx {Fig. 739) 
the plough groove then necessary being 
stopped at the upper end. If this method 
IS adopted the elbow may be worked and 
the top end squared off before jointing up ■ 
all the Imes for the housings for the top' 
soffit and shelves should be struck across 
on the worse side of the stuff in pairs 
keeping the best edges to the front. Mark 




twT 



Fig. 778. — Ssetion of Capping of Shaving 
Fodistal'i Hlmr. 

all the housings to the width of the thinnest 
part of the particular piece going in, and 
stop these i in. back from the front edge. 
Gauge the checks for the back and the 



Fig. 77S.— Flamed Baoli of Shaving 
Padutal. 

through all the under sides, and frame up 
the back, of j-in. stuff, as shown in Fig 77' 
Fit it tightly in the checks, and mark the 
position of the groove to receive the toncue 
on the soffit a (Fig. 739), which is fixed i.v 
screws. Then fix the door stops and cle.ili 
on the outside of the carcase. The back 
should fit in tightly, as the rigidity of the 
case depends on this. Prepare the doors 
from 1-m. stuff, stopping the chamfers as 
shown m the details (Figs. 766 and 7ii7| 
M bemg the mortices in the rails. The tenons 
should be wedged in the usual manner. 
The panels are in one piece, with false joints I 
made with a V or rebate plane. Rebate the 
meeting stiles in the centre as shown in Fig. 
763. Pit the doors in with a joint that mil 
just take a piece of stout notepapei all round 
and hang f in. below the face, and with all 



BEDEOOM FUBNITUKE AND FITMENTS. .r,. 

and a 21-m. neck bolt. !? j * "? *" *"'»' 'or the shrinkaee. Fit 

™- of'th.T"°I'",'^"'"'^'''"'h«a"«I' 

the end grain aa shown in Fig. 759 

MuTor.-A comer of the mirror frame ia 
shown in section and elevation by Figs. 770 



and a 21-in. neck bolt. 

Draww.-Fig. 763 is a side view of the 
drawer, showing size and spacing of the 
dovetails. The front ends are spaced J in 
apart, made small and lapped in front ; the 




n*. 778.— side View of 

Pediment and Xonlding 

of ToUM aiau. 



Tig. 777.— Ontlino of 

Front Standard of 

Toilet aiau. 



back ones arc larger and cut through ; they 
also finish flush with the bottom. The left 
^ "ifl^-Ji^ '' °'' "-t^'de view, and in 
the nght half the side and back are supposed 
fe> be removed. Glue a fillet round the two 
sides aiid the front (see Fig. 763). This 
should be of hardwood and bl glued to the 
drawer sides only, not to the bottom. The 
grain of the bottom must run parallel with 
the drawer front. The estts depths of 



Pig. 775.-Ontlin. of nndWhun. 
of Toilet Olass. 




ng. 77s.— Online of 

>i<lo Standard of 

ToUot Olass. 



i 



rsg. 710.— Put Seouon 

of Tottet Olasi 

Pnuno. 



rig. 7T».— Ontlino of 

Podinunt of Toitat 

Olan. 

and 771 It is double checked i in. for the 
gUss and ,V.n. for the back ; the checking 
s so arranged tut there is a space betweeS 
the glass and wood. A deep chamfer is 
worked round the inside of the frame • a 
pUm mitre joint is used at the com'ers 
f/.'^'""' » U-in. screw a. shown in Fig! 

J .. Zr' '"'?'' ''°''" *°>''<1 •» in the top 
and bottom pieces and pelleted. Whrn th» 
frame is made, the shaped panel can be glued 



!il 



I 



kn 






CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



{ 



m 



hi 



in the centre, and the mittoi capping, shown 
in section by Fig. 772, mitered round and 
fixed bv means of dowels, shown by dotted 
lines. The mirror may be hnng in the old- 
fashioned pivots or pegs of hardwood work- 
ing in holes in the disc shown in Fig. 759. 
A bracket towel-rail of hexagonal section, 
screwed on the right-hand side, will complete 
the fitment. Figs. 769, 760, 761, 762, and 
77.'J are drawn to a scale of 1 in. to 1 ft., 
nnd Figs. 763 to 772 half full size. A (Fig. 
7i;l) shows the section at A (Fig. 7li<)), and 
B (Fig. 761) the section at B (Fig. 760). 
Similarly c (Fig. 762) is part horizontal 
section at c (Fig. 760), and d (Fig. 762) is 
part section at D (Fig. 760). 

Light Toilet aiass. 

In many toilet glasses the standards are 
made of extra stout wood, but in the glass 
shown bv Fig. 774 the thickest stuff measures 
I in., and the rest is only i in. The wood 
suggested is pine ; but, of course, hardwood, 
such as mahogany, ash, or walnut, will look 
well. The shaped under-framing a, of Jin. 
stufi, is 2 ft. 6 in. long, and measures D in. 
from front to back ; it is dovetailed at the 
comers. Half an elevation is given in Fig. 



775. The top B is i in. bigger all rounc 
the under-framing, and is of {-in. stuff, 
an ovolo moulding worked on its edge, 
an alternative, a bevelled edge would U 
well. The top, if painted, is fastened 
the under-frame with glue and nails. 1 
standards (Figs. 776 and 777) are of J- 
stuff nailed and glued at the sides, and then 
screwed from the under side of the top. 
Their shapes may be drawn by copying the 
illustrations, but using 1-in. squares. Fig. 
778 illustrates the pediment, which should 
similarly be set out to Fig. 779. The mirror 
frame is 1 ft. 7J in. by 1 ft. ^ in., sight 
inside measure, this allowing for a 1-ft. 8-in. 
by 1 ft. 4-in. silvered plate glass. The facing 
on the frame (see Fig. 780) is IJ in. wide, 
and the frame underneath is 1 in. wide and 
deep. The 1-in. pediment moulding (Fig. 
778) is mitered round the frame, and the 
pediment is of j-in. stuff. A thin backboard 
(Figs. 778 and 780) is screwed on the back 
of the glass frame, which is supported by 
brass screw centres fixed to the frame and 
standards. These should be fitted and 
fixed before the standards are screwed to 
the top, there being then no fear of the 
standards being too wide apart or too close. 




WRITING TABLES AND OFFICE FURNITURE. 



Pedestal Writinsr-desk. 

Fio. 781 shows an ordinary pedestal 
writing-desk with drawers. Figs. 782 and 
783 are elevations, while Fig. 784 is a cross 
section. For the carcase, each of the 
four sides should be made by jointing 
together three 1-in. boards, as indicated 



planed to their breadths; afterwards the 
sides and backs should be ploughed and 
tongued together, these joints being plainly 
illustrated by Figs. 785 and 786. The four 
sides should then be set out for the housings, 
which extend from the back edge to within 
} in. of the front edge (see Fig. 37). It will 
be an advantage to place all the sides together 




Pig. 781.— Psdestal Writlng-daak. 



in Fig. 783 ; a much stronger job results 
if the joints are ploughed and cross-tongued 
and then glued. The two backs to the 
pedestals should be similarly formed, as 
shown by Figs. 785 and 786. The different 
rails forming the horizontal divisions between 
the drawers should be prepared from 1-in. 
stuff finishing about J in. thick. The four 
sides and the backs of the pedestals may be 
trued to a thickness of about J in. and then 



and square down the front edge with a 
SLuare and pencil line to ensure all the cor- 
responding divisions being alike. To make 
the housings, the simplest way is to cut 
with the mallet and chisel a portion, a 
(Fig. 788), taking care to pare exactly to 
the hnes ; this m^kes an entrance for the 
tenon saw, which can then be used to cut 
along the lines b c and T> b, The waste mav 
be remove^' with a chisel, and the housinj^ 



I 






22« CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 

made to an even depth by means ol a router, together and ploughing to receive t\| 

as in Fig 788 divisional panels ss mdicated. io preveO 

Front RmIs, etc— The front rails must be shrinkage, cut small notches in the back, 

accurately out oB to length just b'tween as shown at Fig. 787, so that the end. of the 

the housings, and then pieces notched out to rails may enter ; or the ralk may be kept 

form the shoulders, as illustrated at Fig. a little short. The rail along the front 

789 : these front rails and also those fitting immediately under the top must be dove- 

into the housings will require tenoning tailed at each end intB the two inner sides 




Fl(. TS3.— Front Etavatton of fslMtsI Writiif^eik. 
I. a' 



4i 











n»i 



BMtlon (thToutli Dnwers; of Podsital Writini-dwit. 



WRITING TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITUKE. 



.. .hown at Fig. 790, and the diviMonal 
panels should next be jointed, the best way 
bemg to shoot the edges on a shooting 
toaid after which they should be glued 

lengthwise of the table so that the end 
grain fits into the plough grooves of the 
rails, as illustrated at Pig. 786. When the 



glue IS diy, these panels should be smoothed 
oa on each side and cut to length and breadth 
and then muUetcd; that is, the edges are 

irf '^.'".u*' "' "■' P'""* «««"«» The 
woole of the carcase may next be fitted 
together and g ued up, this of course being 
done in sections. The pieces for the 
plinth can be sawn out and planed to thick- 



Rf. TU. 




Hgs. TSSland 78e.-H.rlioal«I Seotlou of p,d,«j d^ 




ni. 7as. 



(!«.'' 



with ud without Dnmr. 




i 



Padattal Desk. 



222 

ncBS and breadth, and then ohamfeted and 
roitered, each to it« proper length, and 
fixed by gluing to the «de« and back ; they 
may b« tether Moured by a few naila or Mrewi 
driven from the inside of the backs and 



CABINBTWORK AND JOINEET. 



plough them for cron tongues, and glue 
them up. The outer edges of the top are 
formed by two stiles and two rails, these 
being stub-tenoned, haunched, and mor- 
tised together, the inner edges of the 




Fig. 7»».— JotatlBg Botiioatal DUMons o' 
Fidwtal Daik. 



Fig. 790.— Joints of Top Eall with Ends of 
FKlostal Dolk. 

sides. To the front lower rails the plinth 
can be fixed by a few triangular blocks A 
(Fig. 784) glued on. 

Top of Desk.— For the panels of the 
top, obtain two perfectly seauoucd pieces of 
pine 11 in. wide and { in. thick ; joint and 





stiles and rails being ploughed for the 
panel (as shown by Fig. 791), which can lie 
faced up true and then cut quite square 
to length and breadth; then the retote 
should be set out accurately to the dis- 
tances between the stiles and rails. Ihc 



WEITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FURNITUKE. 



top lurhce of tho panel .hould be about 
,'„ in. below the stilesand rails when finished 
n' "■ "'!?«'•«" •• little more should b^ 
*j°".'Ir .^'" "'*'« ""y ^ "•'le with a 
side fiJlister or a rebate plane. The under 
side of the top towards the ends and ediies 
should be phiced so that the tongued part 
may just fit into the plough grooves. The 
framing and panel must be fitted together 
and the panel should be narrowed nearly 
i la., so that the shoulders of the frame 
can be cramped up tight. HTien this 



£!3 

The top is secured to the sides, ends, back 
etc., by gluing on blocks, which if carefully 
done will nuke a strong job. 

Drawers.— The various pieces for the 
ttonts, sides, backs, and bottoms of the 
drawers can neit be sawn and planed to 
thickness and brtadth. The bottoms should 
be made from two pieces of 11 -in. stufl 
jointed and glued as indicated at Fig. 78.5 
from which it will be seen that the grain of 
tile bottoms runs crosswise. The sides and 
backs may be cut o« and pUned to length • 



ni. TU.— Hsthod of Joliitli]( Top 
Ball to Paul of Onk. 




Hi. T98.-Joliits of Onwirs of Fedsstal Onk. 



IS found to be correct, the joints of the 
frame should be well glued (without gluing 
any part of the tongues of the panel ot the 
grooves), and held together with a couple 
"l cramps until the glue is dry. If iron 
cramps are not to hand, two strips of wood 

TfL ^,1 -T"^ "" »■"* P"'" "' "<^dgos 
(Jig. 792) will answer the purpose. When 
the glue is dry, the top of the frame should 
be planed og true, to project ,', i„. „r a 
Mttle less above the panel. Of course 
the exact distance wiU depend on the thick- 
ness of the leather or American cloth with 
whrh the top i, to be coverud. The edge, 
can next be trued up, and then chamfered 



Fig. »>.— InpnnrlSKl Cramp for Top of Oosk. 

then the fronts must be carefull- fitted in 
by pUmng the edges and ends, all the 
sides and fronts being ploughed tor the 
edges of the bottoms. The pins for the Up- 
dovetaihng at each end of the fronts should 
be set out, and made by cutting with a dove- 
tail saw just by the side of the line in the 
waste, and removing the waste with a 
maUet and chisel to leave the pins and 
sockets finished as shown at a (Pig. 79.J) 
The pins B to the backs must be set out and 
made, the pins of the fronts and backs being 
next marked on to the sides to obtain 
the shape of the sockets ; these should be 
carefully sawn in the waste just insid- th» 



if 



i, 



CABIXETWORK AND JOINEKY. 




F1«.T88 

Fig& 794 and 795. FrOnt Elcvaticn and Half Fioo and HorizonUI Sectioa (on Line A A) of 
B«gist«rtd PedsBtal Itoik. 



WWTINO TABLES AND OFWOE FUMflTUBE 

I 




HI 



PL 




ng. 7»T,_B.If Back BnaUon of 
B<lliUnd ?«dnt>l DmL 



Dtik. 




FIf- «9.-Bi>TlTOBta! Sectira 
or Bagbtand Pedaital Oeak 
on Use B B {Fig. 794). 
10' 




c c (rig. 7M). """ 







J 


'J 



OABINETWOBK AMD JOINEBV 







WBima TABLES AND OFFICE FUBNITUBE. 





^ m 



338 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINEBY. 



tiiMB, and out out with a ckiMl, ■» at o and d. 
The dovetail jointa will nqnin glning 
together, but the lidea and enda muat be 
quite Sffuare with each other. Then the 
bottom! muit be planed up and trued to 
■iie M aa just to slide into the pbu^ 
grooves. Some strips about } in. wide, and 
a little thicker than the distance from the 
bottom edge of the side to the plough groove, 
should be prepared, these having saw kerfs 
in them about 3 in. apart, so that when 
they are glued on to the sides and bottom 
they will M better. When the glue is dry, 
the sides of the drawers should be smoothed 
ofl and the drawers then carefully fitted 
into place. To prevent their being pushed 
in too far, stops about \ in. thick and 2 in. 
by 1} in. should be glued and further 
secured with a couple of small sprigs to the 
front rails, one (b) being indicated in Fig. 
789 by dotted lines. These stops catch 
against the bottom inner edge of the front 
of the drawers, and two of them will be 
required for each drawer, each being fixed 
about 2 in. from the ends of the rails. To 
make the drawer fronts and rails quite 
flush, all the drawers should be pushed 
into place, all the stops then butting against 
the fronts. 

Completing Desk. — Then the carcase, 
with drawers in, should be placed back 
downwards, and all the fronts carefully 
planed ofl flush with the rails, the plane 
being set fine so as not lo split ofl any of the 
edges. Finally, the leather for the top 
should be cut accurately to size, and then 
the wooden panel quickly covered with an 
e-. en layer of glue. This should be done in 
tt warm place, and quickly, the glue being 
made rather thin ; the leather must be laid 
in position, and well rubbed down, working 
from the middle to the edges so as to rub 
out any superfluous glue. Any glue on the 
frame can bo removed with a cloth dipped 
in hot water. After this process it may be 
necessary to take oS a few shavings from 
the top so as to bring it flush with the cloth 
or leather ; this should be done with a 
smoothing plane set very fine. 

Material Required. — The quantities of 
material are as follows : — Vertical casing, 
*J in. by j in. by 40 ft. ; plinth, a in. by | in. 
by Ifi ft. Horizontal divisions : front rails. 



2 in. by i in. by 10 ft. ; stiK 1] in. by } in. 
by 40 ft. : and panela, 7| in. bv | in. by t7 
ft. Top : frame. 3 in. by 1,^ tn. by 13 ft. ; 
and panel, II in. by | in. by 7^ ft. Drawera : 
bottoms. 11 in. by I in. by ID ft. Top 
drawers : fronts, 3 in. by { in. by 3| ft. ; 
and sides and backs, 3 in. by ^ in. by 16 ft. 
Next to top drawers : front, 5| m. by { in. by 
2| ft. ; and sides and backs, 5| in. by | in. 
bv lOi ft. Next to bottom drawers : fronts, 
61 in. by } in. br 2| ft. ; and side* and backs, 
6} in. by } in. by 10| ft. Bottom drawers : 
front, 6{ m. by { in. by 2^ ft. ; and sides 
and backs, 6{ In. by ^ in. by lOf ft. 

R«glaUrcd PeduUl Desk. 

Full working drawings for a registered 
pedestal desk with curved front will now 
be presented. Fig. 794 is a front elevation. 
Pig. 705 a half plan and section (on line a a. 
'S^g. 794, with drawer removed), and Rg. 79ii 
a side elevation. Fig. 797 is a half back 
elevation (to a smaller scale), and Fig. 798 is 
a vertical cross section on bne o o (Fig. 
794), with drawers removed. Kg. 799 
is a horizontal section on the linn b b 
(Fig. 794), also with drawer rcinovt'd. In 
explanation of the pedestal of small drawers 
above the desk top to the right, attention 
ia directed to the section on lines d d, be, 
0, and hh (Fig. 794), shown by Figs. 
800, 801, 802, and 803 respectively. The 
locking stile is clearly shown iu the last- 
mentioned illustration. To the left of the 
desk, the pedestal takes the form of a three- 
compartment cupboard, detiiila of which 
are given in Figs. 804, 805, and 806. The 
rail over the spindles at the back of the 
desk over the four small drawers with 
curved fronts is of the section shown by 
Fig. 807. Of the drawers, Figs. 808 to 810 
show that at m (Fig. 794) ; Fig. 811 is a plan 
of that at L (Fig. 794) ; Figs. 812 to 814 
show that at N (Fig. 794) ; and Figs. 815 to 
817 show those at k (Fig. 794). Figs. 794 
to 796 and 798 are produced to a scale of 
approximately 1 in. — 1 ft. Fig. 799 and 
ail the detail views of drawers are to a 
scale of approximately 14 in. = 1 ft. An 
accurate scale for the chief views can be con- 
structed by noting that the distance in the 
clear from x to y (Fig. 794)— between the 
two lower pedeatals — is exactly 24 in., and 



WWTINO TABIJS8 AND OmCS FUKNITUBE. 



bt >U tba othtt viawi by noting tlut tli* 

IW 8U« to »,o, i. .„„,|y M Twidi Ur 
»U. lu dMcnfUon of tha dnk it may 
b. Mid th.t ti. I,ft.h.nd pottioa o» the 
URJwr pact of thg d«k hu a dummy drawer 
«»nt to conrapond with th» other lide. 
whwh cont«M . n™t of four draw.™. 
Tta diffcreac. brtwren the two lide. will 

"*■'']' ^ " *■'«■• *• "Xl <»« •« 
compared. The arrangi-ment of the riiht- 
hwid upper part of the de.li i. a. followiV- 
fta left-hand pilaater (• «x«d, while the 
nght-hand piUater is locked, overUppini 
the drawer fronu euffloiently to prevent 
them from bemg withdrawn. The loclcini 
M aocompUehed by mean, of a lock in the 
nght-hand pik.ter. The lock faatena into 
a projecting staple in the atile behind, the 
•taple entering a rece«i in the piUAer con- 
Uimng the lock. The front, of the central 
drawer, are built to the diape iUmtrated 
in the vanou. Bgure., and veneered, no 
beat wood being required. The leather can 
bo hied to the table top with thin glue 
or ahoemaker a paau,. To prevent buckling, 
fir.t bmah over the back of the covering 
u thin solution of the adheaive, the thicker 
preparation being apread over the wood, 
and the leather whilat atiU damp being well 
prewed into poaitio,. < more plwung 
&mA may be given by tl. «id of ^t-ed^ 
chain banding; thi. oonaiat. of leather, 
i m. wide, gift on the outaide edgea. The 
major portion of the leather ia laid aa uaual 
but, whllat atill damp, a atrip of i-in. wood 
correaponding with the width of the gilt 
bandinga la laid along the outer edge: 
a aharp knife ia drawn along thU, the aur- 
plua leather withdrawn, and the gilt banding 
inserted m its pUce ; the comers of the 
oanding are initered. 



the hue on (Pig. »l«)_,h, flap , i^„. 
alao ahown-and in the horiionul wction 
(«g. mi) on the line A (Fig. Ml»l. A 
haU plan ahowing the framing of the top of 
thedMk la pmented by Fig. 82a (Kak, Jin. 
- 1 ft.), bnlarged detaib (Kale, 15 in' =- 
IK ''PP'»*',"»tely) of », 0. D, X K, and t 
(Kga. 81» and 820) an shown by Fig., mj 
m. m. 82«, and 827 reapecti .1^ 



ResiatcKd Pedestal f)esk with Side 
CuplMMrd. 

A conventional view of another registered 
pedestal desk is given by Fig. 818. There 
18 a cupl..ar(l in the lower pedestal on the 
nght, it wiU be noted, the cupboard door 
containing a carved panel. A front eleva- 
tion «ahn«.-a by Fig. S19 (scale, 1 in. = j ft.), 
the left-hand pedestal is clearly shown in 
the vertical section (Fig. 820) taken on 



Kim-hol* WriUnc Table with Turned 
U«i. 

Figs. 828 and 82K are front and end eleva- 
tion. re.pectively of a knee-hole writinit 
table intended to be made in walnut, and 
containing live drawen for holding writing 
matenala, atationery, etc. The top ia 
covered with leather, riiowing a woo.1 
margin 2 in. wide. First plane up four 
poat^ the finished uie. of which are 2 ft 
r>J in. by 2 in. by 2 in. The turning ex- 
tend, from the rail of the bottom drawer 
to the floor. The two end raila (Fig. 8.J)) 
are 9 m. deep, and mav be made op of j-in 
walnut clamped with pine on the inaide. and 
atub-tenoned into the poata, keeping the 
rail ^ m. in from the outaide to break 
joint, and fluah inaide to act a. a guide for 
the drawer. The back rail is of the «,me 
depth aa the end raila, ; in. thick, tenoned 
into the poats, and kept back J in. from the 
outaide. It need not be walnut; pine 
Jtained to match the rest may be substituted 
The front raib are all 2} in. wide by 1 in 
thick. B and (Fig. m) are each in one 
length, B being lap-dovetailed into the posts 
at the ends, while o is tenoned to the posts. 
Ihe two short fore-edges D are (ixcd to the 
post, m the same way, and to the upright 
pieces E by lap-dovetailing. These up- 
rights are j in. thick, fitf i to pieces of 
pine of the same thickness, and joined by 
grooving the two edges and gluing in a 
feather and cramping. They are housed 
in the back rail to the depth of J in. c is 
screwed t»the t»p edge of n, and the di\-isiou 
«■ IS tenoned at the bottom and screwed 
through B at the top. The frunt rail, are 
all flush with the posts at the frcnt. When 
the table is cramped on the r'"'"'"-s r may 
be carefully glued and sprigged in their places, 
me drawer spaces Ijetwcim the runners 
should be slightly wider at the back to 



1 I 



iW 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




■ 








1 




I 








■ 


• 




IJi 


I 




^^""^MRV 


bb 


■ 


~ '^.^ ~. 


HB 






■ 






iB 




DMk wltb Ud« Cupboard. 


1 


it 







WKITINO TABLES AND OFTICE FUBNITUHE. 



^ Fl». nn-Vntloal Im- 
f' tloa or Dnk vltli sut 
Cupboard oa Uu a O 
IFig. U9). 





231 



"I. »M^Hori«ml.I SmiUob of Purt of Drtc 
Cgpboinl on Lino (Tig. tu). 




Fig »j7.-CroM8»otlonthron«li '''*■ •»»■— Hoiiiontal Stc- !iiXi_ 

Top of Dnk Fmtoitol « j Uon anagh Desk on lis. "' M'-OrOM <«tloii Onash 

iFi»- "i"). A (H, ,,,, " J>r«w«r Front., ote. (u, d, 
'■ '• Flf. aio). 



,i 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 



' 1 

i 




^^^SS3*SJ 



WRITING TABLES AND OFFICE FUBNITUBE. 



premt the dmw.r .ticking a. it reaches the 
«»«. The runner h (.'ig. 8321 thnniA k 

Zt 'T?'' ^ '^"y 'he^d™; r^ ™ eact 
«de, and w glued and sprigged to the top 




n«- M».-Draw« 

Bwuiar of Knae-lul, 

Table. 




T\t- «»».-Braokrt 
'or Knae-iuio 



to^h.'?' ^^ '>"« K'-^J '""J 'Prigged 

»rrrthT!;Srit^p'.^ 
*d?hr?- ^s 

The S 'i V^ ""^ "" top* »' tie sides. 
Ij^i; u *'"' ^"'^ '""""Id be » in thick 

«»d IS grooved into the sides and fru.nt; 



I3w '",• '" ''''?"'• ""I »« 'topptJ by ilu. 
.ng blocks at the back; they .„ set bick 
iT from the fore-edges. The top, of dry 

«iges with wa nut. and wh»n i;„; k j 

J^ g'V'arof^tnj'^r'an^j 

™5. 'k Ti"" «™'" "' "-e walnut for the 

the pi'ne""'!™? '" "" -™ direction a 
ine pine. The two pieces for the front »n^ 
back edges should nLt be put on by *pSn 



Pig. >u. 





n«- Mt-nrawer of !tne<Khol, Tabto. 



the grain of the wood nrnning naraUel 
with the front. The bottomry Kft 

rSge^^'niii'^''""'"'"""-'"'"^ 
nnukage. The drawers can be made 



c-'Zws't^n^t-'of^r^Tfd"'" 

the moulding and^sunl'a.^"™ "Sits 

top t:i.i""ij?'''"s'^«-w»h covers';": 

WtheTor *^f »v ^"^ ^^- ^« 'n»"'^co 
«Ve AmL- *? " "on^idered too e^en- 
sive, American leather-cloth of a Jeen 

tbe^ground and Jvi^g aTn'^luYounft^f 
Davenport with Rising Top. 

section by ^i^'^^sast Mt r; brcoi-: 

-tructed m any fancy hardwood, or fn 






t«s 



]# 




II 



CroM-raii of Flgg. 880 and 
DaTenport. «fll.— Top 

Crow-rail of 
Davenport. 



23j 

American pine veneered. Fig. 844 ia an 
interior elevation, enlarged, of one end of 
the stationery cane, and Figs. 845 and 84f3 
give enlarged details of one comer of the 
desk flap. 

Cutting List— The following is an approxi- 
mate list of quantities : Pedestal.— Front : 
Two stiles, 2 ft. 1 in. by 2J in. by | in. ; ^in. 
rails, one, 2 ft. 4 in. by ;)J in. ; one, 2 ft. 
-t in. by 21 in. ; two, 10 in. by 2 in. ; 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINEKY. 



two, 7 in. by 2 in. ; four, 9 in. by 2 in. ; 
four panels, 9J in. by 11 in. by I in. ; 
one panel, 9} in. by 9! .„. by | in. ; mould- 
ing, 18 ft. by I in. by } in. Back : Two 
stiles, 2 ft. 1 in. by 2} in. by } in. ; one rail, 
2 ft. 4 in. by 3i in. by } in. ; and one, 2 ft. 
4 in. by 2) in. by ] in. ; one muntin, 1 ft. lOin. 
by 3 in. by } in. ; two panels, 1 ft. TJ in. by 
10} in. by J in. ; one deal top, 1 ft. by 2 ft. 
by } in. ; and hardwood, two pieces, 1 ft. 





Fig. SH. Fl(. ui- 

Figs. S64 and 80B.— Half Plans of Davmport Desk, with and 
witbont Top. 




Fig. MS. — Section thrMgh DaTsnpoTt 
Drawar. 



Fig. S99.— Bcctten sf Frost of DaTonpoEft 
Fsdestal. 



WBITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FUBNITUBE. 



by 2 in. by | in. 8ix diviiions, 111 in. by 
? "[■.V i "■ ; "* deal ninnets, 2 k 1 in. 
^y i*""- oy J '»• ; throe dnrt-boaid., 8} in. 
%■ i ' ."?•• ^. * '"• • •'«''* drawer front., 
10| in. by 5i in. by I in. ; seven drawer b»ok» 
101 in. by 4i in. by } in.; drawer sides, 

2 ft. 2 in. by SJ in. by } in. ; drawer bottoms, 

h V« '?i -^ l"; !* '"• '•y * "• : »■». w i"- 

by2ft lim.byjin. ; two bottom bearers, 
1 ft. 9} in. by 2i in. by IJ in. ; two tor 
bwrers, lljm.by2iin. by lin. ; two pillars", 

fftl •'\''T, •* ?• '"' ^* »• ■■ »™ P'i""'. 
2 ft. 1 in. by H m. by ^ in. Desic : Two ends, 

j ft. 1 m. by 7i in. by j in. ; one front, 2 ft. 

4 in by 3 in. by } in. ; one back, 2 ft. 4 in. 

by 8 in. by J in. ; one deal division, 2 ft. 3 in 

by 7J in. by i in. ; one deal bottom, 2 ft. 

31 in by 1 ft lin by i in.; one top, 

? **■ '."-Xli. ">• It i in. Flap : Two, 

2 ft 5 in. by 2} in. by J in. ; two, 1 ft. 7 in. 

by if m. by } in. ; one deal, 1 ft. Ill in. 

by 1 ft. Ij in. by |in. Case: Two ends, 

10 in. by 5} in. by } in. ; one back, 2 ft. 1 in. 

by 8 m by I in. ; one top, 2 ft. li in. by 

»i m. by ,V in. ; one bottom, 2 ft, 1 in 

by 5} in. by |in.': foar .,v-in. divisions, 8 in. 

by Bi m. ; two, 9 in. by 6J in. ; one plinth, 

2 ft I m. by 2 in. by J in. ; three drawer 

fronts 9 m. by 1} in. by | in. ; three backs, 

J m. by H in. by i in. ; six sides, 5 in. 

by H in. by J in. ; three bottoms, 9 in. by 

J m. by J in. ; one fretrail, 2 ft. 1 in. by 

IJ in. by I in. Also siiteen 1-in. turned 

knobs, SIX fin. knobs, seven 2-in. brass 

drawer locks, eight escutcheons, one 2t-in 

desk lock, ose pair of 2i-in. boss butt^ and 

lour IJ-m. screw plate castors. 

Pedestal, etc-The pedestal and desk 

are made separate, and screwed together 

The pedestal itself is conjtructed with J-in 

paneUed sides, and open framed ends to 

receive drawers, the top and bottom beinu 

sohd. The top is dovetailed to the sides as 

shown m Pig. 840, and the bottom is grooved 

in as shown in Fig. 842. The division 

rails are fixed to the sides with double 

stub-tenons, and the drawer runners are 

housed in Jin., the ends of the runners being 

tenoned into the division rails ; also i-in 

°"'' Panels are inserted in grooves in 

^ - ??«iS sEd runners. "The uppermost 

drawers in the pedestal are in three pairs, 



237 

drawing from each end, but the lowest 
drawer move, from the left-hand end, and 
IS a through drawer, the front at the oppo- 
site end being a dummy. The top aVd 
bottom raiUi of the front and back frame, 
are stub-tenoned to the stiles, and screwed 

th^,.r?i= *if '""■" «""'<" """no 
through because the edges of the stiles are 
«en The interior rail, in the front frame 
are framed together as shown in Figs 

™I. , ^if • *°"°"' *«'"« '""»«) ™ the 
Ln . I.J" ""t"". »°d the incUned 
rails forked over the tenon. The bottom 
cross-rails (Fig. 849) are^rewed undementh 

moulded .imilarly and mitered into them 
fhe top croM-rail (Figs. 8B0 and 831) i, 
ZZ^ '"''; ""..."de of the pedestal Ld 
bradded. The pilUra are tenoned through 
t»nL" "^"^i^'W^ Thedrawersaredove- 
beaded all round ; the bead acroM the end 

™ fc 'ft ',"'"'"'■ ^'8- »«2 .how. the 
method of blocking the bottom at the front 
Ihe drawer, are prevented going too fir 
in by means of two thin oak stops glued 

Jftg. 853 illustrates the method of con- 
necting the top and drawer rail, of the 
pedestal. Secret dovetailing is employed 
m the angles of the desk (Figs. 854 and 855). 
«g- 8o6 IS a section of the stile of the front 
framing, etc the dotted Unes showing the 
tenon, and sinkings. 

Dedc—The desk has a hinged framed 
and moulded flap the pine panel being suni 
T„ in below the hardwood margin to receive 
a leather top, and is croM-tongued all round 
to the margin, the mitre, of which are also 
tongue, . The back part of the desk C 
an enclosed well, into which slides the 
stationery case. 

tk^^^iT^ ^— This case is fitted with 
three shallow drawers and four pigeon-holes 
and can be drawn to the t»p, where it will' 
remain sustained by the friction of its- 
end, until pushed down. Should the case 
work too stiffly, rub a little powdered French 
chalkonitssdes. Some cases are made with 
balance weight, in the enclosure b in Fiir 839 
and Fig. 8,55. The ends of th,, «=e sLuy 
have the grain running up and down, and the 
top, bottom, and back should be housed 



I '. 



S38 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



in. The two holes on the fretted top 
are ior the fingers when lilting the caie, 
and the noceaaity of having the grain 
running in this direction will be apparent. 
The back fret is a tteparate piece fixed on 
the top, the back of the case being tongned 
and grooved into the end under the top, 
at shown at h (Fig. 844). A narrow rail a 
(Fig. 843), fitted under tt e bottom of the 
case in the groove a (Fig. 844) prevents the 
case tilting when drawn up to its full height. 
The top of the case is made | in. wider 
than the ends, and .la edges are rounded. 
Two slips are mitered to the edges of the 
top and glued across the ends to hide the 
joint in the top of the desk when the case 
IS down. 

Completing Desk. — The top of the desk 
is cut out flush with the aides and end of the 
well ; see Fig. 855. The sides of the desk 
are dovetail-mitered at the angles, the 
bottoma being rebated in as shown in Fig. 
857. The bottom is allowed to project ^ in., 
and after it is fixed a ^-in. cocked bead is 
planted round the ends and front, a portion 
of the bottom being tebated out to receive it. 
It is best to make the stationery case before 
preparing the well ; then, placing the case 
in position on the desk top, mark all round 
it with a pencil, and cut the aperture tight 
to the mark. Next arrange the top so that 
the inside of the aperture is flush with the 
back of the desk, mark down the opposite 
aide on the desk ends, house in the front 
of the well to this mark, fix the top by glue 
and screws to the sides of the desk, and fill 
in pieces at k (Figs. 838 and 855) flush 
with the ends of the aperture in the top. 
Next fix in the bottom, and then hang the 
flap. A light spur working on a screw is 
fixed on the right-hand side of the desk, 
as shown in Fig. 855, and a shallow rack ia 
formed in the under aide of the flap to re 
ceive it. 

Bureau. 

A bureau as in Fig. 853 consists of a solid 
carcase with framed divisions and back, two 
large drawers, a hinged flap or table which 
rests upon sliding brackets when down, two 
small drawers, a cupboard, and six pigeon- 
holes for st-ationory, rfr-. The dimensions 
are :— Height to top. 3 ft. 2 in. ; to table, 



2 ft. 3 in. ; width, 3 ft. ; and depth. 1 ft. 
10 in. A bureau ia made when in the solid 
of oak, walnut, or mahogany ; when veneered, 
of pine, covered with roaewood, maple, or 
satinwood, with covered inlaya. The pre- 
sent design is suitable for aolid treatment. 
The sides are 1 in. thick ; the division 
raili, sub-top, flap, bottom, and back, are 
} in. thick ; the moulded top measures 
1| in. ; the two sliders are | in. ; the sta- 
tionery fittings I in. ; while the door is { in. 
and the drawer fronts are | in. thick. Fig. 
809 is a front elevation, Fig. 860 a section 
on B B (Fig. 859), and Fig. 861 a section on 
A A (Fig. 859). Fig. 862 is a vertical section 
of the side, Fig. 863 section through top 
fitting, Fig. 864 section through plinth. 
Fig. 865 shows the upper part of one of 
the pigeon-holes enlarged, Fig. 866 is a sec- 
tion through the hanging stile of the door, 
' Figs. 867 and 868 show a portion of the 
flap and mitered cUmp, Fig. 869 is part of 
the side showing the method of framing 
the divisions. Fig. 870 shows the taper dove- 
tail at the end of a division rail, and Fig. 
871 is a section of the moulded top. The 
top is fixed to the sides by a groove-and- 
tongue joint stopped in front (see Fig. 862). 
The table, divisions, and bottom are grooved 
into the sides i^^^ in. deep, the groove being 
stopped back from the m>nt by the width of 
the division rail, that part of the side bLing 
worked into a tapeied undercut groove. 
This is also stopped | in. back to hide the 
sinking (see Fig. 869). Each rail and the 
table must be cut to Fig. 870 and fitted 
separately ; file rails ■•'X. then fitted round 
the panel or dust-board. The runners have 
tenons at each end as shown by dotted tines 
in Fig. 869, and are glued up. Then each 
frame can be treated aa a aolid division 
and fitted into the carcaae bodily. The 
bottom need not be dovetail-grooved, as 
it can be nail^ through from outside, the 
nails being covered by the plinth. This 
should be sunk ^\ in. and glued and screwed 
on from inside. Plough grooves are made 
at each side of the top drawer openings, and 
^-in. by ^%-m. oak slips are inserted to form 
runners for the sliders. These must be 
stopped back f in. to prevent the grooves 
showing ; and if the slides are not to eome 
right out, a ^-in. groove should be worked 



WBITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITOKE. 



actOM the nde, carmpondiBf; »tud» beinc 
glued on the tail end of the .liden, which 
mart be inaerted before the back ia Axed. 
Orawen — The two top drawers are ar- 
ranged to fit between the iliden and the 
vertical division; the other two drawers 
run in the clear of the sides. The drawers 
are composed of 1-in. fronts, l-in. backs 
and sides, and |-in. bottoms; they are 
dovetailed at the angle., and the bottoms 
are chamfered and slipped with oak as 
shnn in Fig. 862. The drawers are sunk 
♦ in. below the frame, and are checked 
by oak steps glued and nailed to the divisions 
as shown at d (Pig. 869). 

Ftap.— The aap is made of |-in. etnfl 
mitre-clamped and stub-tenoned as shown 
in Pigs. 867 and 868, and hung to the table 
with a pair of Ifin. brass flush flaps. The 
inside of the flap is covered with leather, 
the margins, elbows, and table being polished 
Two l-in. by J-in. guard slips are filed at 
each end of the flap, and a bevelled and 
rebated lock-tail, screwed under the top 
forms a seat for the flap when the latter is 
closed. 

Top Fitting, etc—The top fitting (Pig. 
»«>J), of sycamore, is made separate from 
the carease and slipped in tight. The top 
and bottom are dovetailed to the sides, the 
shaped crowning is sunk ,', in. in the 
divisions, and the divisions are housed at the 
ends, etc. The drawers are grooved and 
tongued at the comers, and the bottom 
IS grooved in flush with the sides. The 
small cupboard door is mitered around 
the panel, the mitres being dowelled or 
veneer sUpped. The back is a panelled 
frame with 3-m. stiles and rails and 2-in 
muntlns, with |-in. flush panels between 
them ; it is mortised and tenoned together 
and sits m a rebate in the sides and top 



breadth, and lengths of the various piece. 
B^t^b.^ '•™««ined from the illustration" 
Both fflde. can be got out of a board 1 ft 4 in 
wide and 8 ft. long, Ihu. prevenHng w«te 
and jomting. The broad .helve.™* ^^h 

tat it 11 i° K°" "^•'' " ">• "d". 

S.r^ I. *'* ■'"'™ * "d b; the 
Aelf however, diouU be without . 

Sin. ,K "f« ""' ",•" *•" ™ri<»» piece.! 
pUne them true to dimensiomi. The sides 




Pig. sis.-o,ntnU View of Barsai. 



Bureau Writlnjr Desk and Shelves. 

The bureau writing desk illustrated bv 
Figs. 872 to 874 will have a neat appearance 
It of mahogany, walnut, or similar hardwood 
or even pmc, stained and varnished or 
ebonised and polished. 1-in. stufl, finishing 
to i m will be most suitable for the sides 
Droad shelves, flap, main vertical divisions. 
jiBti drawer fiouta, material 8 m., tinished,' 
l'«ng suitable for the other parts. The 



should be set out to shape, a stout paper 

Lr^rl^'r^'' •«?» -"■•'' '" «S[ 
^.; i !u ■"»"""«« also should be set 

as „ (Fig. 873). Next make the housings, 
their forms bemg shown at Fig. S76 • it 
will be noticed that they are stopped about 

IS notched out of the shelves as indi^trf 
at E, p and o (Fig. 876). A reUte should 

tor the back, as shown at h (Fig. 876). 
The thjee broad shelves a, b, and o (Fig 
875), when prepared to length, may be fitted 
r„!r ! L' i>o^m. and then the shelves n 
and should be set out for the housing 
for the division between the drawers, and 
also for the bvo vertical di™„n.. The 
upper shelves can also be fitted in The 
carease should be fitted together, and. 





ill 


1 


til 



CABINETWOBK AND JOIMEBy 




nr ut. 



r-~ 11 nj. «ei. 




rifi. 8U to UL— Front Elnstioii, 

Tntloal On» Sietloii aad Hoii- 

niitAl Sootton of Brmao. 





iff 



i £.: 



WKITINO TABLES ASD OFFICE Fl-RN.TUHE. 



tlut th. curvM of th. M» Buy W-r 



S4I 

rtn»«, obliq„,|y f„„ ,h/ „„Tr^:j ^, 
Ih' rf«lv« ,„t„ th. Bd«. Th. .h"lv« 

glDcd and.riw,th. Th. tnr, SZi l ,! 
"*"" "■ ""W dirtct OB the top 




H». IW.-FM of Btu-MB lid. ui DlrtriM. 



Flf. STOl— EBd tf 

Bann DiTidon. 



Tig. rn.-UciiUm of 

MmliM Top of 

BniWQ. 



242 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERlf. 



ends of the main vertical divisions. The 
two top side shelves (one of which is shown 
at l) have one end nailed on top of the side. 
These shelves are vebated as at u (Fig. 



pieces shown can be prepared and fixed in 
position by glue, fine sprigs being inserted 
from the back wherever possible. Round 
the edges of the top shelves a neat piece of 



' 




Tig. STL— BtiT«au Writing Deik and ShtlvH. 



875) on the back edges to receive the back. 
For this, narrow matchboarding, smoothed 
on the face side before fixing, can be used, 
und shonld be nailed to the shelves. If the 
case is of hardwood, this back should be 
Btttiued to match. Next the various cur%xil 



moulding should be mitered and fixed. 
The fronts of the drawers having been fitted 
in, and their sides and backs prepared. 
should be dovetailed together, and the 
sides ploughed to receive the bottoms ; 
handles t-sn then be fitted. For the flap, 



WHimo TABLES AND OFFICE FUBKITUBE. 



243 



Flap-lront Writln* Desk with 
Divisions. 



« weU-«awiied piece of hoard .hould 
be cUmped .t the ends and fitted bet^Mn 
^A '"?. ""^ vertical divisions and aU° 




Kmi and Shtlna 




;,? 



If'! 



»l 



1:: ::! 



I OtTaUon of Bi«au WilUiig 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



according to requirements and taste ; to 
save jointing, basswood would be suitable ; 
but if pine in used, it will be necessary to 
joint up and glue tbe flap, bottom, back, 



be screwed or bradded in ^poaition. The 
flap should be made about | in. small^all 
round, and, to keep it true the inner sur- 
fdce should be grooved and two dove- 
tailed keys should be inserted, as shown at 
Fig. 880. The lower edge of the flap re- 
quires bevelling as shown in Fig. 879. 
Leather, green baize, or other suitable 
.Tiaterial, may be glued on the inner sur&ce 





ii 




■ 


! ^ 


i 


L 


It 


i 




Fig. 876.— Vtrtioal BMtion of BnrMU 
Writing Detk ud BhtlvM. 

and sides. As tbe divisions and shelves 
are to be housed together, the construction 
will not be difficult, and the leading points 
are as follows : — The shelves, divisions, and 
sides are house-jointed together, and the 
bottom, top. and sides are rented at c 
(Fig. 87'>) to receive the back, which may 



Fig. 876.— Honifng for Shrives of Banau Writing 
Tabl*. 

of the flap, the cloth being fastened well 
round the edges. When the glue is tho- 
roughly dry, the surplus materia! should 
be cut off flush with the edges and ends of 
the flap. Then four pieces of |-in. stuif 
should be prepared, che width beinir equal 
to the thicknc-s of the flap, and one edge 



WHITING TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITUHE. 




If m 



Figt. m» and 879, fros* *- -■ „. __ 








1*|! 



'* •W-^WriMlw D-» n.p 



wllh OoraUUri Ke^. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY. 




of each piece should be rounded. The 
piece for the bottom should be rather wider 
than the others, and the inside edge will 
require bevelling as at a (Fig. 879). Then 
these pieces should be mitered, glued, and 
nailed to the inside edges and ends of the 
flap, the square inside edges fitting flush 
with the material glued on the flap. The 
top and bottom may be rounded, or may 
have thumb mouldings worked on them. 
To form a stop for the upper edge of the 
flap, a piece of wood should be rebated as 
shown at B, and this fillet will also improve 
the appearance of the front and assist in 
strengthening the top shelf. The flap should 
be hinged to the bottom with a pair of 2 J -in. 
butt hinges, and a suitable lock should be 
obtained and fixed on the flap. 

Pedestal Desk for Office Use. 

Figs. 881 and 882 represent, respec- 
tively, a side view and a half end view of a 
pedestal desk intended to be executed in 
mahogany. The upper part of the desk 
consists of a double slope and flat, with 
solid returned ends and framed fronts and 
bottom ; it is fitted with ten drawers, and 
provided with brass standard rails for books. 
The six fitted pedestals on which it is 
mounted have framed, moulded, and re- 
turned ends. It will be seen by reference 
to the plan (Fig. 883)— the right-hand 
half of which represents a section through 
the upper portion of the desk, and the left- 
hand half a section through the pedestals— 
that the pedestals are framed separately, 
and phtced back to bp.ck with about J in. 
between them ; the face side of one pedestal 
runs over the back and fits close to the otL t, 
a J-in. bead being used at the junction! 
This is a much more convenient and econo- 
mical method of construction than to make 
each pair of pedestals in one fitting, as, 
when made as above described, they arf 
lighter to handle, there is less danger of the 
sides splitting through shrinkage, and the 
drawers are easier to fit, as the backs can 
be seen. The sides of the two end pairs 
of pedestals, which are covered by the 
framed ends, may be of deal, but both sides 
of the centre pair must bo of mahogany. It 
is usual in narrow fittings hke these to make 
the drawer di^iiiuu» uoiid, as the vaiue ot 



the stuff ia less than that of the labour in 
preparing framed dirisions ; they can 
be of white deal, edged with mahogany from 
H in. to 3 in. wide, the joints being ploughed 
and tongued. There is no necessity to 
dovetail - groove for framed divisions, as 
they will be quite strong enough if fitted 
tight and glued. The ends in the deal 
sides can be secured by nails, and, if the 
other ends are secured by angle-screwing 
them to the side at the back edge, there 
will then be no danger of the drawers starting 
them. The tops are fitted into the mahogany 
sides with lap dovetails, and with common 
dovetails into the deal sides. They must 
be kept flush with the rebates at the back, 
as also must the deal sides ; the back- 
boards lie on the edges of these, and fit 
into the rebates in the mahogany sides (see 
A and B, Fig. 88.5). The divisions are housed 
i in. into the sides, and the grooves stopped 
i in. from the front edge. The fi^nt pUnth 
18 wrought IJ in. thick, and framed between 
the sides with a mortice-and-tcnon joint, 
as shown in Fig. 884, the piece marked c 
being sunk and lipped over the front edges, 
and mitered to the return plinth, which 
is I in. thick, and also sunk i in. to hide the 
joint. When setting out the divisions, 
mark a small mortice on the under side of 
each for the bolt of the locks, as the mortices 
are awkward to make after the framework 
is fitted together. The position for the 
mortice can easily be found by laying the 
lock with its keyhole in the centre of the 
opening ; keep the mortice in a trifle, 
so that there will be no play if a front 
happens to be thin. The beads are stuck 
on the drawers after they are fitted ; in the 
case of the cupboard, they arc stuck on the 
sides of the pedestal and stopped and 
mitered at the division, thus necessitating 
a bevelled shoulder. All the other divisions 
have square shoulders. 

General Construction.— Before setting out 
the framed slope a will be well to run 
over the plan (Fig. 88.3), and the section 
(Fig. 88.5) which is taken on the fine ri D (Fig. 
f^8-:>), and to note how the various parts 
arc put togethnr. The top is formed of 
two wide pieces of 1-in. mahogany running 
lengthwise, and overhanging the frame f in. 
all round ; they are secured to the flat 



WKITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FUBNITURE. 






with a gloed and tongued joint. The fronts 
are fanned, by means of rails and cross- 
dmsions, into a number of openings for the 
reception of drawers; the cros.^vi,iona 
are formed with upright pieces of l-in. 
mahogany o cUmped on each end of shaped 

h!fL'""*^ "^ '??• *?"* ""* "« ""fheS 
halfway through in the middle to receive 
longitudinal centre division F (Fig. 883) Tod 
rails K are of the same width as the clamps g 
(Fig 886) and li in. thick; they are 
double mortised for the divisions and dove- 
tailed into the ends as shown at Fig 887 

t!,^!^"'' J "i'"'. '■■ i ™- •>y li i*-. "e 
tongued and glued to the framed bottom M 
flush on the top side, and, as the latter is 
1 m. thick, a rebate 1 J in. by J in. is formed 
to receive the cocked bead a, which breaks 
the joint of the desk and also hides the ends 
ot the tenons on the divisions (see Fig. 88(i) 
The ends of the fronts must equal in width 
the combined thickness of the framed end 
and pedestal side, so as to line with the latter 
when in position. They are dovetailed to 
the rail, and mitered to the soUd ends, 
which are leaped to the outUne of the top 

boftoS '° '^°"'' """ ™''' •■' *'■'' 

"he Case.— In setting out the case, great 

rr'.-T ,""!■* ^, o^rved, as errors 

correct. Take one of the top rails, an< lay it 
on the plan rod face up. Mark the diyW™, 
a tnfle .small, the shoulders of the end divi- 
sions, and two other lines J «. and 1} in 
resjKctively beyond for the dovetails shown 
in Fig. 887 ; gauge the line H at each 
end to the thickness of the end piece, and 
draw the dovetails. Two morti«e gauges 
will be required for th. division mo^ie*^! 
usc^ 1-ln. chisel J m. from each edge • no 
wedging need be allowed. »« the paring of tl»- 
ll^T 'r ?"">■ "■'" '" ««cient. Oauge 
the front edge J in, t,udc from the under- 
side ; the rail will be bevelled to thi» aft-r 
mortising, etc. Pair the c«.responHir.g 
rail to this one, also pair ch,. bottom rails ; 
andocrew them all together, and square the 
lines over : transfer these to the faces, and 
mm: It wil! be found that only one 
mortice willjnnie m the bottom rail, the 
"^ :.-i u-.r c.^,..i,,g „i iiu- dcai bottom when it 
"• glued on. The division r may be set out 



247 

from one of these rails, the mortices giving 
the me, for the notches to receive the cross- 

the length till the case is together The 

«mT\''"'!,'^"'° ""'""'''■■• The clamps 
will be set out from the section (Fig. 885) the 
fength between the shoulders' bfing equ. 
to the width of the drawers, the tenons 
»„L !'«'•'""« ««"K^d with the rail 
^y* Vu \ '^""P "'"'•'•■'' """St t» set 

shlw K ^f "'?5 '* '"• ^y i ''■■ '"d this 
should be in the middle of the thickness ; if 
mortice gauges are scarce, one of the others 
may be used, but care must be taken to gauge 
both d«l and mahogany from the ^4 
sho^,! k r' T'"" -' the divisions 
uH?b I, ■7',°"' '"'» ""• *'">'' »«tion, 
with shoulder lines at E, the notches for the 
centre division m the middle, and tenons at 
the ends ; one of these may be cut to shape 

the others. The two ends must be paired 

eL i" -l"* *° *^° "PP'^d "t the top 

cage the inside bottom edge gauged for 

markIS* ^ Z i'J * '"• "■"* «'^ '"P -dge 
marked with the template. The bottom 
will be set rut from the plan; the two 
side ™,|s should run through, and be mor- 

bv -l^lf'"""" ""■ '■""'-™"'' ""d """"tins, 
,.J1- "'■''"«="«'»* ""d «tain will not 
..r.r ""u '"""'■ The mortices can 
come through and the tenon, be wedged, 
but their end.-, must be cut back ' in. The 

»l«e with a l-m. groove i in, deep for the 
panel.,, the length, of w^ch will VUZ 
from th,- rauntm,, and the widths from the 
raiLs , gnujp fr„m the face side a full l-in 

plangent to ,,«, full in width, the joints shot 
to the bevel obtained from the section, 
and ploughed square with the edge from 

ta>m the ends. If it has to be ploughed by 
the h V'l "' ''"« '•">"'<» be tacked on 
this »ill form a fence for flic plough to work 
""".nst. Fig. ^i, „ , pJt "Z Jth. 
"S: t'f. °' 'he desk^,hLl,ig joints.' |5ig: 



' 



w 



HI 






m 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




™ti»o „,i„ „„ „„,^, Fuas.™„, 



l~™niy glued „„ (j, ,,_,^^ ^__^ ^._^^^^ 



togethei with h»ndM:r,w« Wt .1. • ,. . 




11^^ 




i i 



290 



OABINETWOBK AND JODfEBY. 




n*. ••4.— End of Pllitli or 
PtdMtal Dfik. 





rig. tM-Vertlaa Itotlim of Ptdutal DMk m Lin D D 

, (Fit. U». 



Tig, m.-Znd of CrMi Dlvliios of 
Ttttutl Dwk. 




Fil. UT.— End of Top BaU 
of Pedootal DMk. 




m^-^m 


1 


~^^^^l 


a 


-^ .zn ^:T^i— 








— zrCIJ~ 






nTfjiiisa 



Tig. >n.-UBd« Hdt of Deik, 
•hoiriag Joint!. 




Fig. aao.— Bottom of FMlMtal 
r» o.. «_ "***•' "i^owing Sinking, etc.. 

lig. a»«.— Crooi DiTiilon, FMmed Bottom, ate., of Fadntal Dsik. for Plinth. 



WBITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FUBNITt'RE. 



•nd gln« on the bottom nib aiuh on the 
top Hd.; when thwo are dry, ,S" „! 

for th. diviMon.. NailorKr.»thed»«J 
(judea or t. tin^ piece, j (Pig. w.^) „'" 
th.cro«^,v,„on. parallel with the bott™ 

.i,*'?!^ "•" •"' CwnpWint D«k.-Uv 
the bottom on the bench, lace nde up, Xe 
the fewer tenon, ot the divirion., in»rt in 
nntlhe^^' "*?™ ""I "^ •■■• •»■' ««»" 

ZJ? '""^i '''''"« '" 'l™™ in bo?h 

?nX°.""™ I'f f P'^ "'°^'»'" -livil" 

tail. m the end (the». need only go half- 

^hL'^^K^^"'- "^ ^"'" homef clean 
the oa«, 08, turn it over, clean out the rebate 

"in i^ '»'?»'' the cocked bead, brrddl^g 
I «; rt i'" '^^. '* *'" he convenien? 
will L ^'T" " ""y «« «ady, a. it 
tie tl^ '" *° ^t"''™ "■•J' bind before 
e^t ^^ fr u°- J" "* O" the top, lay it 
fct on the bench, face down, aSd turn 

Zi ?„t "'' T " i, P"* • k'niKrew on the 

glue m plenty of angle block.. Then turn 

r.rf ,„ ♦r*^' ■"'' "P' """l «' 'he »'ope«. cor- 
recting the no«,ng or joints where required. 
A cramp .hould be provided for each 2 ft. 
length and a atifi piece of quarterini! to 
I^in r^K^r' '°P '" "■« ""-P» W 
TT ' ''?'""' ""' «'^™' Pieec. of .tug 
for the no.mg end of the cramp., and put 

»me.hav,ng.m.ide under the join. to cateh 
the glue that may fall. R„b a little cS 
on the jomt., glue in the tongue, and joint, 
and cramp up both .ide. equall^ ' feave 

btrtbf "", '"' ?.' ''"' ^^ '«'"". then 
tZ^ the under .,de, and clean off. If 
P'=°'y ,0' help i. not available, it will be 

toZ''l'''fi«'rr'j "» «''« " a time 
lettmg the first side dry before the reoond 

andlt f^ it' f'T " '" '"'"l the* drawers 
tein. 1 i' 'f^ ""* '""""™ the bmss 
a te?*,i° / r! -^"i ". ^™''«* '" position 
"Iter tne desk 1. fixed. The pedestals can 
be brought to the exact width of tt desk 
placed Uck to back, and the phn'h 'itted 
but not fixed, the socket- for the footS 
brewed on, and the rails ,..,t in • a°^n 



■M 
a. the pedestal, an fixed in poMtion the 

?« th'el^r '".''"'^ •'■»• i^«™o;Lg 

th" text » "''^'"". "" '»«'"''"«» in 
ine text :— s, noiing of top ; o, nedntal 

"■■V; ., pUnth; u, drawe^ fmST^ • V 

drawer bact; v,p.„.ll,d end framing ; ll 

[»de.taltop; .^, drawer bottom. ; ,, ^de, 

t»l iKittom; ,, ,„gie block.; W,Xwer 

SJ T'.'r'.P"""': «»..idoff«rt 
', pede.tal back. ' 

Portable Desk. 



rl .4- 



haJui ,? ^hown by Figs, m and «M 
ha. been de.igned for uk a. an entering 
maTT ■" '^1^"'^ '^"^- It ma, 1« 
r/ • ^^'' *""• "'■ "<•»». "nd painted 

polnhed. The choice must he governed 
by the .tyle of furniture in the Office In 
r„M" ,■' "■ "" "'""'"'• The piee« form 
WJ) are fir.t proceeded with. Fig wn 
.how. a part w^tioual elevation. Each 
piece IS 2 ft. li in. by (!} i„. by ,) i„ ^Jh 

on th?'? "T'"" ""d V-grilve wX 
If in wide by 11 m. deep is cut for the 
rewptlon of the .id.-piece s p (Fig, .4,1 
m, and my The top framewJJk tf 

£Ln^*' , i "\ ' """'"' ""nuer to the 
J^f tU K rl'' ''f ""' '"'*"™ i» made 
of the back bar .hown by «b (Fig. ^U.!). 

eH». k'™™'?^'"'? *■" "-l^' the moulded 
edges being cut back t« get square shoulders 

We onlv"""""- ™' ^' '' ■'""'""I »»»■>• 
Bide only, as seen m section it Fig. 8M The 

twoMdepieces SP (Fig,. 891 and 892) are 

ZIT L"* *° ""' '•""''''«' 'he ornamental 
jweeps being cut with a pad-saw. The 

Ir hf r "* ''!,•"'>■ ehamfered to relieve 
the thickness, and at the Wk edge imme- 
d^te^ above the bottom stands aVess i. 
ffL" ■ l'^\^^ ' '»■ ™ and J in. deep, 
(Figs. 891 and 892) ; this ties the two side- 

for the desk proper, ma;- now be fram-1 
together, the sido-pieees being fixe,i into ih" 
bottom rta„ds and top frame by sere,.; 
which are driven on the spUy, and sW 

wsjds iinei up. 



Iff'' 



ifS 



ita 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



i. hand"" It 0...... ii Li ™r piiuS ^v'vxinh;''ucrplT.T,^^ 




Tig. an.— sua EI«t«Uoii of Portatto I)«k. 



mSSsB^m S^?SAȣ^iS 



WBITINO TABLES AXD OFFICE FUHKITURE. 



•nrngement u crritd out in the front p.iu| 

wWtht en b. obumed from th. dnwing. 
SfiS'* "d^b«ck P...I. „. left ph£ 
m. md I»«ta.k.v. . .m,ll corner moulSng 

8»7. TlM bottom «)«. of the front pwfi 
« rebated to receive the floor (we Fig. 898) ; 



JSS 

!nrf h "°°''»"»'« »•« upon the top fremiS 
Md butt egainit the nweb (eee W^i 

axed »t each end, ud s hinced fleo worW 

•hown m Fig. 8»3, and ran . b«d .bw tK 
■"«d. edge to breelc the joint^e uC 





Portable Oiek. 



MOKKOrr HtOlUTiaN TBI 


r ou>T 


(ANSI und ISO TEST CHART No. 2) 


|..o 


IS 

Itt 
lit 

■Si 

u 


|u 


|Z5 
927 



I.I 



|Z0 



= L& 



1^ 11^ I 



1.6 



^ 



/fRJEDJVHGE Inc 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. S9S.-P.rt V«rtical SaoUon of Portabto OMk. 



fviAA^ 




jillil 




Hg 8»«.— BtctlOE of Bottom Stud ud Slde- 
piaca of Portable Deak. 





Tig. sss.'-SeGtlon of Pillar and DoTetaili 
8id« and Faneli of Portable Oetlt 



Fig. «86.-SectioE Of Top Pranw and Side-piaco 
of Portable Desk. 



WRITING TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITITRE. 



Sap ,. made of I-m. stuff, jointed and glued 
to the required width-2 ft. 1 in. The ends 
«™ then elamped, and the hinges fi ted t 
flat p,ece p (Fig. nm,, ^ ;„ g j j °— ^ 
v.des accommodation for inkstands e'T 
and acts as the hinge-piece for the flap or lid' 



itr .T" *'"' ""'"'■ ""> f^"""" >t the butt 
ends of the corner pillars fitting in corre" Dond 
mg morfces in the top framf mouldings fo 

cated bv dotted lines (Fig, H!i;)), Two end 
P-ces EP (Fig. 8!>1) are cut out to the size" 




rig. 897.-8„H„n of End Pm,,] J,„„u„,g „, ^5=SS 
PoruWe Deik. _-^- 





or Fortabls Desk; 




riR. an -Onameatsl Hec, o 



Inside the desk under this flat piece the 
^pace may be conveniently partTtioned 
off for different lot, of invoices with Zi 
■ons i ,n. thick cut as shown at "p (f"' 
«J.i).^^GIue will be sufficient to keep tU 
Computing Desk._The de.,k can „„„- ,„ 



-tau. Desk, euiying Eras. EaUi. 

ft"'J,^? """'''«"' '"*" "-e flat piece y 

:vSti-::frt^p-"£^^ 

are to .t,,^ j,^ diamel^irh ;„?4r 

wl..ch are let m J in. deep at each end! 





256 CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 

These rods are useful for books and papers 
to lie upon when not in actual use. At the 
foot of each piece a small ovolo moulding 
is fixed, to give a finish, and also add to 
their support. An edge board E b (Figs. 
891 and 892), 4 in. by j in., is fixed along 
the back of the desk flat, to guard against 
things being pushed over. It fits flush on 
the top, and is dovetailed into the uprights. 
The making of the desk is finished with the 
fitting of a lock and escutcheon. An alterna- 
tive and better method of putting the 
bottom stands and side-pieces together is 
shown in Fig. 000, the side being dovetailed 
instead of grooved in, as shown in Fig. 
894. 

Office Stool. 

Fig. 901 is a general view of a common 
form of office stool which could be made in 
deal, mahogany, birch, pitchpine, and similar 
woods, to match the other fittings of the 
office. Figs. 902 and 903 are elevations. 
The dimensions hero given are frequently 
adopted, although, of course, they can be 
varied to the requirements. The legs are 
made of stuff IJ in. thick, and it viil be 
noticed that they are IJ in. wide for the 
greater part of their length, spreading out 
at the bottom to 2i in. To economise 

material they should be cut out in pairs IJ in., the top rails being 3 in. by 1| in. 
as shown at Fig. 904. All the lower hori- WhenaUthepiece8areplaned,therail8should 
zontal rails should be trued up to 1| in. by be set out for stub-tenoning and the legs for 



Fig. 900.— Joiati in Office Stool. 



ill 




L^ -^ 



_— - .-- . . . ■'~- -^ 


^ >*XB ■ lU 




i 




Tig. 901.— 0«naral View of 
Office StooL 



Fig. 903. Fig. 903. 

Figs. 909 and 903.— Front and Side 
Elevations of Office StooL 



Fig. 904.— Leg of 
Office BtooL 



WHITING TABLES AXD OFFICE FUKMTURE. 



mortising. The bost way to sot these out 
«. a, to have them all thoiame i, to plaTe th. 
egs together and mark out the position of 
the mortrces. The same methS applies 
to settmg out the rails for tenon, care being 
taken to have the proper rails toge her 
■Hn 'T't "^ '*"■"» conventionally ft Fig 
Mo which Illustrates one leg and the ends 
of three side rails and two back rails VVhen 
the joints are made, the whole of the frame 




Office Chair Stool. 

The stool shown in Figs, imii to IKiH i, »„ 
similar in construction to the foregoing 
that a detailed des.nption is unnece8.,,rv 
The sizes of the legs and rails are the saii'ie 
as those of the stool shown bv Fig. !«i| 
The back, which is 3 in. by 1 in., should be 
hollmved in p^an to give greater comfort 
to the user. The top ends of the back legs 




Hg. «0«.— Oeneral View of 
office Chair StooL 



Kg- »07. _. — 

Pig. »M. 
Tig.. 907 «,d 90,._Fr,at aad Sid. Elevation. 



work should be htted and knocked together, 
f„ J A """"' l"'"^" ■"'■nhered, so as 

JhL .1°' '*■" fr'""™»'k mav noi be 

^lued together; or perhaps an eisier wav 
» to glue together the two front portion^ 
leaving them in „ ligbt cramp uStil d v,' 
n IS cramp may simply be a piece of wood 
th .wo cleat., nailed on and tightened 

ee tharflf" ■ '" "^"^ ""^ P"'' '»Vher, 
see that they are square with each other 
The joints of the side rails may be treated 
m the .same way when the fronis are dn- 



of Office Chair StooL 
are notched out to receive tliis re.,t. two 
iXt^eTsl "''"*«*''■'''''«'• ''■'■''»^''' 

Table.desl< witii Rounded Corner. 

The desk shown by Figs. W,!l to 911 i., 
suitable for fitting i„ „„ i„,„„^, ' » 
formed by two walls or screens ; the outer 
corner i, rounded, and the central com 

IIZ""^ "' "'^ '^''^ '"P '» «"cd with a 
hinged flip ; when a flap is not fitted the 
upper portion is termed a .lope! D, fc' 
of this class are usually mounted upon legs 



lii 







258 



m 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 



niiiilar to thoM of a table, hen. f the name 
table-desk. Figs. 909 and 9Hl are respec- 
tively front and end elevations showing the 
desk resting upon the table, and surmounted 
at back and ends with a skirting ; end rails 
are framed between the legs near the bottom, 



Fig. 912 shows a cross section through the 
centre of the desk top ; Pig. 913 is a pUn, to 
an enlarged scale, of the block at the comer 
of the desk front ; Fig. 914 is a development 
of the front and end of the desk ready for 
being bent round the block ; Fig. 91.5 is a 






—i I 



Tig. 90», 





rig. no. 



Flgi. M9 to 911.— front and 
Side Elevations and Half 
Plan and Hair Horliontal 
Section of TaUe-desk with 
Bounded Coraor. 



Fig. 911. 



and between these a footrail is prorided 
about (1 in. from the front. The portion of 
Fig. Ill 1 to the left of the centre line c is a 
plan of the desk ; that to the right of the 
centre line is sectional, showing the framing 
of the desk ; the dotted linos represent con- 
structional details, but the framed bottom 
has been omitted in order to avoid confiisinn. 



sketch of the top of the comer leg, showing 
the method of framing in the rails. The 
figures will provide almost all the neces- 
sary data f-ir the full-sized setting-out from 
which to get the quantities and sizes of the 
stuff. The corner of the desk top should be 
set out to a 4-in. radius, and the framing 
should be of '-in. stuff, and the skirtins 



WRITINa TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITHBE. 



tV. .1^^ ■■ J*" '^} P""'"" «* "■« lock of 

f. m^^ r °' T'"?' "'■•*''■ ""'' t^' fl»P 
Hiv^Lr r?"^ *'"• '^•'°- '•l'""P»- The 

^W « T T ''"P' """^ i i°- t» form 
rebat™ for the flap,. The front leg, are 




H«. M>.-Blook .4 Hoimd«I Co, 
of Oeik Froat. 



^ilV"^!."'"' '"'"' °"'J'' P*'' "-e other lem 
with this one and square over all the 
Ime,, all but the ft«,r line being in pencil 
Set a mortice gauge to a f-in. chinel, and 
gauge It J in. from the fac^ ; thi. will bring 
the mortice, nearer the outside of the le,- 

sides, in which the tenons meet, a longer 




'it 



n«- nt.— Taming of T.bIo-d«ik Logs. 



r*. .11-Pr.n. „, End of T.W.^.rt w.„ „„^ 



3 m square, the square of the comer 

the shaft. The desk bottom is J in. tLk 
with i-in. panels; the back is 7i in by 
I in and the front, which is U i„. by I in 

up i in to form a rebate for the edging bead 

»,1^ iT;'" »«*«"« out the stand the frtnt 

^Luf^'t^T? "' "*"'''™' »nbstancTs 

lay one of the front ones on the rod and 

Urerof^h"' '"f ""' ?°" 'i-i-i the 
iine.i of the rails, markini? th. li„„ „. 

-h. U.P rail on both faces, but the bottom 



tenon is ensured. The mortice shn„U 

.ng'st„°i7w r ''; f "• "■""" '■^ ^ 

ing should be sloped from nothing at the 
inrough The prbfile of the tumini! may 

te^or '«ir^ 
-^v^^lToirtLrsM/r-;^':- 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



M m 



» 2-in. by j-in. raortico in the bottom rails 
for the foot-rail, and in setting out this rail 
allow I in. extra at each end for housing. 

•^l*'— After the legs are turned, they 
Bhould be mortised, the nils tenoned and 
fitted, and the foot rail rounded, housed, 
and mitcred into the end rails ; and after 
being fitted together and marked, the frame 
should be knocked to pieces, and have the 
rails and mortised sides of the legs polished. 
The two end legs may then be glued up 
and be left cramped up till dry, when they 
should be cleaned og and have the front, 
back, and foot rails glued in. 

Desk Top.— The desk top may now be 
proceeded with. The framed bottom is 
rebated } in. into the front and shaped end 
of the desk, but runs over the buck and 
the wall end as shown by Fig. 91^. Two 
intermediate muntins should be arranged 
beneath the divisions ; the tenons can 
all come through and be wedged, and 
the panels will be kept flush on the top 
side. The back of the desk is a pkin 
board dovetailed into the ends, the pins 
bemg cut on the back so that the ends 
can be driven on. Mark the housings 
for the divisions, and sink them } in. deep. 
The two divisions and the wall end-piece 
can be marked alike, between the sight 
lines of the frant and back, allowing J in. 
extra at each end of the divisions for 
housing, and 1 in. at back, and | in. at 
front extra on the end for the dovetails, 
which arc stopped at the front end as 
shown by Pig. yi4. One of the divisions, 
after being marked to length, should be laid 
on the section (Fig. Uli), with its lower 
edge in line with the face side of the bottom ; 
the respective sight lines on the back and 
the front, and the lines of the under sides 
of the top and the slope, can then be accu- 
rately marked with square and straight- 
edge ; shoot off to the lines, and use this 
as a template with which to mark the 
remainder. Next take the front and round 
end. which, as will be seen by Fig. i)H, 
is all in one piece ; shoot the bottom edge! 
gauge the rebate for the bottom, and 
square over a line 1,', in. from the right- 
hand end for sight-hne of back (all lines 
to be on the inside) ; then take the divi- 
sion and set its bottom edge to the reKite 



gauge line, and its back sight-line to the 
line just squared rver. and mark the shape 
of the top. Ther is no need to mark the 
front end, but measure the exact distance 
from the inside face of the back to the 
centre from which the comer waa struck, 
and set this off on the end, and squfvre a 
line across ; this is the springing line. 
Knife-cut another line ,», in. farther aloi g, 
which will be the end of the tongue seen 
in Fig. 913; then make a template out of 
thin stuff to the shapeof the block (Fig. 913). 
To do this, lay it in position on the phin, 
and strike the sweep with the compasses 
from the same centre. Care should be tak :i 
to get the two edges forming the abutment 
of the template square with each other, 
and exactly at the springing of the curve, 
otherwise the desk will not be square when 
finished. ^\Tien the template is ready, 
hold it upright on the front, with its tongue 
end to the springing line, and steadily 
' roll it along until the other end is reached, 
at which point square over a line, and allow 
i in. more for wedging room ; the wood 
between these two lines is eventually to 
be cut away to a veneer for bending round 
the block. Gauge the front 4 in. wide up 
to the first springing line, and as a portion 
of the slope comes in the comer, more 
width will be wanted at the bend, and it 
will be found best to cut the stuff rather 
full, finishing off to the required line after 
bending. 

Bending Veneer Round Block.— Mark 
and work the rebates, dovetails, and 
grooves; form the \ iieer for the corner 
by gauging ,'„ in. from the face on each 
edge, sinking ,■< series of grooves to the 
required depth with a router, and cleaning 
out the core with a rebate plane. Care 
must be taken not to make the veneer 
either hollow or round on the back, as any 
such fault will be reproduced on the face 
of the finished work. Next cut the tongue 
to fit the groove in the block ; then pre- 
pare the block itself, for which a piece of 
clean yellow deal or pine B in. long, 2J in. 
wide, and 5 in. thick will be required ; 
where possible, the grain should run the 
same way as that of the veneer, to minim- 
ise the danger of splitting through un- 
equal shrinkage. Mark the shape of the 



WKITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FURNITURE. 



block from the template, keeping it. edge 
fair with the back of the block and .quare 
down the rebatei, then place the tem- 
pUtea on the other side, keeping the re- 
baU. exactly to the lines and the edge 

Alter the face u worked, using the same 
precaation. a. advised for the veneer, 
lay the tongue end on the veneer, mark 
the thickness of the groove, and cut it 
to a rather tight fit ; bore holes for two 
screws on each side, and make ready for 
gluing up. Well soak the outside surface 
ot the veneer with boiling water for about 
five minutes, then turn the front over and 
secure it firmly to the bench with band- 
Borews. Score the face of block and inside 
of veneer with a bradawl, glue the tongue and 
abutment, and drive home the two screws 
at tb«t end ; then thoroughly glue the 
faces of both block and veneer, and. steadilv 
but quickly, bend up the end, at the same 
time pressing hard on the bench to squeeze 
the glue out. When the venoer is bent 
quite round, and the abutment of the block 
18 well down, put in a pair of folding wedges 
previously glued, and gently drive them 
with a hammer above and below. This is 
the critical part,- for if the wedges are 
overdriven, the veneer will be torn off- 
and if they are insufficiently driven, blister-' 
mg and buckling of the veneer will occur 
y^, dry If when the face is tapped 
lightly with the handle of the hammer 
the sound is solid and everywhere alike, 
stop further wedging, and turn in the two 
screws; then turn the work on edge 
brace it square, and leave it until the glue 
IS thoroughly dry. The back may then 
be glued m, the end driven on the divi- 
sions put m from the top, the rebates 
flushed ofi, the bottom dropped in and 
screwed, and the whole cleaned off and 
papered ; then level off the framing with 
a straightedge ready for the top. . 

Preparing and Fixing lop.-To prepare 
the top, get out the back rail and plough 
a i-in groove for the skirting, stopping 
It at the return end ; work the nosing on 
the end ; then set out about three mor- 
tices for each wing, 2J in. wide, 3 in. deep 
and V m, thick, m.ike a table launching 
at the seen end and an ordinary one at 



the wall end. Hit out the wings, mark- 
ing the shoulders with the requisite bevel 
allowing ,', in. extra on top side for bead." 
lo gauge the tenons, set a Iwvel as *hown 
by dotted hnes in Fig, Hi. and from 
that work off the top ends from the shoulder 
ime; gauge the tenons from this face 
and cut and fit them in position on the 
desk. Mark round the margin, also mark 
the shape of the nosing, then take the 
wings out and work the nosing, also a A-in. 
bead round the Hap opening. To fix 
the top, lay it face downwards on the 
bench, unscrew the desk-bottom turn 
the framing down on the top, ,,,„| fix 
the back rail in position with screws and 
angle block). Agiin turn it face upward 
glue the tenons of the wings and drive 
them in, and cramp the work up till it is 
ary ; then screw each tenon from underside 
fix the wmgs to the framing with blocks, 
and finally screw in the bottom. Plant 
m the edging bead on front and end, mitre 
in and fix the back head in the flap open- 
ing, and finish the skirting grooves, stoo- 
ping them j in. from the end of the skirting. 
Uean off the top, and fit up and hang the 
Hap, which should be mitre-clamped at 
the front sides, the mitres starting from 
the hnish of the nosing, and the tenons 
coming through. The grain of the flap 
will, of course, correspond with the desk. 
1 he starting must be cut to fit the top 
and be rebated at the back to fit the groove 
in the top, and should be dovetailed at 
the corners, the outer end being secret 
dovetailed. The desk may now be either 
screwed or dowelled to the frame, the 
latter method being best. Put one i-in. 
dowel projecting J in. in each leg, black 
the ends with a little oil from the stone, 
carefully place the desk in position, and 
the places for the dowel holes will be accu- 
rately marked. 

Secretary's Knee-hole Desk. 

The desk described below contains cup- 
boards accessible from the front- tl'o 
two end cupboards arc deep, but the centre 
cupboard IS a shallow one, because of the 
knee-hole, the back of which is indicated 
,1 "'^,<'°"=d lines in the end elevation 
(trig. »!(,); the shelves are not shown 



ff 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



, I 



I'^l 




WBITIXO TABLES AND OFFICE FIRXIHre. 



but the ™a cuplHwnl. mav eaih con- 
tain two .h. ve,, which .houlJ 1« ,„nvM 



'h. '.I!! !V".,°"'"."." '•"nvcnicme. Along 

ind 



h. top of th, d™k, and o,K.ning Whi..,. 

d««lcl. 4 ft I, ,„., .„d ,t i, .liviacd into three 
«l«al portion, ; „, ,h,. centre on,.,"i"; 

width of the de^ic i, -J {,. r, in., „„,, 'Z 

lcight,».ift. i,i„. Fig. »i; ,how, .^k 

olev«t,„„, F,g niH front elevation, and F,> 
.11,1 section of the frnming. The d.'sk i. 



and the hottom are dovetailed into the end. 
»nd morti^l for the divi.ion, ■ Tu2Z 

l» worked up the l«ck e,lge, of ,1°.. f". 
-.on., and the M iZin, ^.^.Z^ 

up h, h edge, of the end,, to hreak the 
oir. of the door, and the l„„k ftlin. 
In putting together, the l«.ck, an. I'lnZ' 

g ued, ,, nd ,, locked on and the":,,:;";;^,' 

up. An , ,„. ,j ,j.„ ,„„,|^,^,^^, 

L.; ,1, ' • ;'"'"''' 'r "'"'•«<■■' in the 

lornied of fr„nmm nmilar to tl,„t „|re,i,ly 



In thi ^t, P"'*'™*-'' top ""d a bottom, 
are of ll^n r ,T"^ ""^ ""'"-d" end, 
m7i, 4i*r- Vi""- ''^'""'«- ""e bottom 

m f!™l' Ti "^ *•"■•/«'«''''. ftush inside ; 
m forming these ends, allowance mu.t 
be made for the doors and back pareZg 
The doors and back panelling are Z' 
of similar construction to the ends The 
nner dmsions (two) are solid, are 1 in 
thick, and come through on th^ front face 

IdTh'Wf" ™P^"'' ''''"'; the top 
and the bottom are also of l-in. stuff, the 
hot om bemg the full width, but the top 
of this carcase m-iy be formed „l ll.r-.? 
peees. 5in. orBin. wide; both the top 



"I- »H.— Itactlo-, iliowliv 
Jointing of DMk Frunlng. 



described for the bottom, the front angle- 
pieces being 3 ii. square; the top and 
bottom rails are i-bout 4 in. bv 14 in 
and must be dovetai:,,! into the end framine 
and mortised for the divisions that have 
1 be inserted to form openings for the 
three drawers; proper runne. must be 
provided for these drawers. To keep the 
two carcases in their proper position, a -'-in 
by f-in. bead should be mitered round 
the underside of the top carcase, and 
blocks corresponding to the size of the 
beading should be fastened to the top side 
of the bottom carcase : n few screws from 
the inside of the top carcase into the bottom' 
■Jill secure the blocks. The desk top 



!lii 




CABIXETWORK AND JOINEBY. 



Hs .A 



i 



(which ihould he buttonptl nn) ia 1 1 in. thick, 
•nd m«jr be •• ihown (Fig. U17), or it 
may be cUmped ; two »tretcher« ahould 
be dovetailed into the front framinn and 
the iMilt top rail, to lupport the top, and 
■<n the fUt portion, which ia <i in. wide, 
a rim ahouid lie fixed. In thia flat portion, 
reseptaclea ahouid be nude lor the ink 
poto, with a hinged lid to cover them when 
not in uae. A railed platform ia required, 
and the deak can be aecured to thia phtt- 
form by acrewa through the cupboard 
lK)ttom«, The deak may be nude of red 
deal, yellow pine, or pitchpine varnished— 
pitchpino for preference. 

DrauchUman's Knee-hole Wrillne 
Table. 

Fig. !)20 shows a knee-hole writing-table 
which is specially suitable for a draughts- 
man. IS the top can be raised so as t'l be 
used tttnding, and it can be made to 
slope for colouring purposes ; moreover. ' 
the table ia eaKily taken to pieces for travel- 
'ing. Fig. 1(21 is a croiss section showing 
the method of construction. The four 
drawers are shown in the block at the 
right-hand side, the spaces on the opposite 
block being closed with flaps hinged at 
the top and fastened at the bottom with 
spring pins, simiUr to the large flap on 
the top portion, which is seen in section 
at Fig. •Jil. The gables of the top part 
can be screwed from the under side of the 
bottom piece, and the long rail immediately 
below the top dovetailed to them. Fig. 
921 shows the top lying level ; and to 
slope it for use when sitting it is lifted 
up and drawn forward, thus taking the 
pin which is fixed to the top out of the 
socket which is screwed to the back, and 
inserting it into the socket immediately 
ebofe it. The bar a, shown in section 
bearing against the front rail, prevents it 
from slipping forward. To slope it for 
use when standing, the pin is placed in 
the upper hole, and tho strut 8 inserted 
into one of the spaces in the saw teeth t. 
The space immediately below the top, with 
the flap F, can be used to stow away draw- 
ings. To render the table aa portable as 
possible, the top part is dowelled to the 
carcaws below, and can readily be taken 



•part. The back portion is fixed by 
meani of brau pUtes, which can easily be 
taken oH and the liack laid on the top. 
Immediately below the top ia another 
long nil dovetailed to the gables. Fig. 
022 ia a vertical section through the drawer 
block, showing the construction. The (piblea 
•re dovetailed to the top •nd bottom 
piecea, and fillets are nailed to the under 
aide to keep the carcases free from poa- 
aible dampness. The carcases are covered 
by a small base, carried along the front 
•nd enda. a (Fig. «2.)) ia an enUrgement 
of the pin and socket shown in Fig. U2I ; 
B (Fig. 82.1) showing s modification. 

Pedestal containing Two Drawcra 
and a Cupboard. 

The solid mahogany pedestal, fitted with 
two drawers and a cupboard for ledgers, 
etc., shown by Figs. «24 to !»2(i, conforms 
to the following specification ; IVepare and 
fix, in Cuba mahogany, a pedestal, :i ft. 
by 1 ft. (i in. by 2 ft., constructed in the 
strongest possible manner, one side and 
the front to be of 1-in. mahogany, one 
aide of 1-in. yellow deal, top and sub-top 
of 1-in. yellow deal edged with 2-in. by 
1-in. mahogany slips, and the bottom and 
hack of 1-in. yellow deal. The drawer 
division to be framed and panelled. The 
front rail to be of mahogany ; the back one 
of yellow deal ; the sides of oak ; the 
panel of basswood. The door to be framed, 
panelled, and moulded with 1-in. by f-in. 
mahogany ; ogee moulding. The bottom 
to be finished off with 2J-in. by Ij-in. 
chamfered plinth, with J-in. by 2-in. return 
plinth, sunk. The door to have 1-in. by 
J-in. chamfered mahogany stops. The 
drawers to have 1-in. mahogany fronts, 
t-in. basswood backs, and |-in. basswood 
sides and bottoms ; the whole to be rebated 
and blocked with clean oak slips. The iron- 
mongery will consist of two 2-in. lever locks, 
two .'I-in. brass handles, one 24-in. lever 
door lock, a 1-in. brass knob, and a pair of 
2i-in. patent brass butts. 

Rods. — Given the specification and the 
drawings (the latter would be similar to 
Figs. »24. (123, and U2li), the first thing 
to do will be to set out the rod. Three 
sections will be t^fquired ; one vertical, 



WHITINO TAB'.KS AND OFFICE Fl'RXITURK. 



" "k. W->, Iron, »hi,h ,„ obtuii, t|,H h,.iKl,t, 

hon», ,tul ■„ KiK. •Jn, ,h„winK tl.,. .),.„t|, 
«i»m l«clc t.. (r„„f. Tl ",„■ |, ' 



I"- taknn IhrmiKli thr .upUml. W, k 
lh»t I. rof.uir«l „l„„.. „r l».|ow ,|,n ij,,,. 
t>f m-tion .lioulil W ,h„wn in (l.,it,Hl lin... 
Befiiinini the ConitrucUon. Tli,. i„.,|,.,i,.l 

.ii..»tn,.,.,i hy KiK. ,,,, i. .„,,, , ,'„ ;;:;;;! 




n». Me.-Di.,,btBium', Kn».i,oi. wniui, T.bi.. 




n«- Ml.-PMt CroM BMtion 

Imugb I>rmii(btniiu'i 

Tabla. 





Tif. Ml— TtrUcl BmUoh 

tironib Onirtr CaieoM of 

DraQKbtnrjui'i Tablt. 



drawn with broken lines, so as to get thorn 

tang however marked where the sections 
Hrc broken. In determining whero to 
make a section, select a point from which 
most work can be done f in thn pre=ert 
instance a more useful section can~ be 
taken through the line x x than could 
1> 



Fig. na.— Altnuuva 

AmngamanU of Pin tad 

Socket of DraaghtBmu'i 

Table. 



under a desk with it, l„„.k an.l left n„,l 
against the walls. It would be unnece.„„rv 
to go piece by piece through the table o'f 
materials required; the worker will be able 
to obtain the quantities from the rmi 

the lengths for squaring. Assuming the 
stuff to be cut out and planed up out of 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 







Fl(. M*. 





Tig. ns 



Figs. >u to »«.— FiDDt El^raUim, 
Vortical Soction (on Line TT), and 
BoTliontal Bootion (on Lino X X) of 
Psdoital oontaining Tiro Drairen and 
Cnplward. 



Tig ntk 



WHITING TABLES AND OFFICE FCRNITUBE. ier 

Fig. 925), and mark on the edge the flZ nl; If, ^u^" ''"° °' "■" ••>?• ■""• «"■ '"P 
line, and linea to indicate toth fue, of tte to the ™I t '!?' "'i™''' ** ''""^ «"'=*>^ 
top, the hotto., and the ^oM^^ ^^Z''C^' ^^^^'tTiTZ^Z 




Tig. ,J7.-P.rt Horinnui S«tlon of P.d.rtal. ,10,^.. 
D«pth. 





^^^^^^^^^&3 'tuTm^'^-."ir.,"prL.°' 



ng. no. 

ngi. »a9 and 99a-Top DowtaU*! to Sld« of PodotiL 





Pijr. 9S9.— Saont DontaU 

OB Top Dirtiioii Hall of 

PMMtal. 



Tig. 983.— Framod Dlviaton of 
Padratal. 



n». 9S4.-Patt Ti.w of . 
of Pedoital Drawer. 



Mark also, the top of the plinth; paii 
he other side with the one in hand, and 
transfer the marks. Ne;it Uy the two sides 
inside up on the bench, and, with the mark- 
'?j? ™'fe',?'!">re the hnes across the face 
Ihe top hne of the top, also tliat of the 




9»l.-M.tliod of Plttlag iPUaai to P«l„taL 



ensure the grooves being small enough to 
alow of the divisions, etc., fitting tight 
after having bee" cleaned ofi. Qaugl a stop 
for the pooves 2 in. from the front edge 
and, m the two top groove,^ .,1, additional 
stop, 1 ,n. from the edge ; the portion 



lib 



368 



between these two stops will be formed into 

F'g. W8 and, ,f well fitted, will form an 
mmovablo joint. The bottom, being held 
together by the plinth, does not need this 
dovetail, so the groove can be housed up 
square to a l-in. gauge mark ; the grooves, 
or housings, should be i in. deep. The 

vVlt "'L' }r ■'""'"M as shown in 
Figs. 929 and O.'iO, but must be left until 
the pms are cut on the top. Gauge for the 
rebate to receive the back ; this should 
L?"T. '1" u*1l.. '™' * '-."rf" to 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 



ensure the depth being parallel. Obtain'the 
distance from the section (Fig. 927) • thp 
rebate should be only deep%nough to 
take a screw-J m. will be ample. It will 
be seen by reference to Fig. u;il that the 
plinth being solid, affords an opportunity 
of making a mortice-and-tenon joint at the 
bottom the wedging being covered by 
the return plinth. The oversailing pike 
of the iront plinth is sunk i i„. iL'^the 
fcce edge of the side, so as to provide 
^^"""'/•■nnkage. Set out the mortice 
i m. below the Ime of th, plinth ; this will 
be sufficient to hide the wedge Set the 
gauge to a ,Vi„. chisel, 1 in. from the face 
also gauge the J-in. sinking. Run trhis also 
across the face of the niho^ny X t 

"tlr^n'^hS-''''-''-''-^'--''-^ 

Top._The top may now be taken in 
(m.\'^^ ■* worse side down on the plan 
(Fig. 926), and mark over the inside lines 
of the sides Next set off on the right-hand 
end a hne J in farther out ; this il for the 
lap dovetails (see Fig. 9.%). As the left 
side s agamst the wall, the dovetails may 
be allowed to nin through, so set off !,■ i/ 
here, square the lines over the face and 
proceed to set out the dovetail pins. As these 
wi 1 not be seen, they may, il the sake o1 
r»tH., !'"'«"'.■'""' '"■""•^y' ^^ »ade 

width fT' A'"""* ■■' '■"• '' ""^ ■™'-''™-"' 
width for ..afcty; greater width might 
result in the failur, of the dovetail through 

^f th l^'i^^^Tf » '•'" "'-"' i° the middle 
of the length of the proposed dovetails, and 

l^^fl,'™'^ /"•"P"'"'™ '0 3 in. or whatever 
width IS determined. Commencing at one 
end of the Ime, with half the width in thi 
compasses oversaihng the stuff, mark off 



on the ine a series of points ; commence 
with half a socket and finish with half a 
socket. Next set a bevel to 72°, and mark 
off the pms through the points just made ■ 
gauge the width of top with the gauge 
used for the back rebate in the sides 
Divisions .tc-The divisions and bottom 

upon them, and the shoulder lines squared 

and sohd division are glued up, but it is not 
necessaij- that the framed division should 
be glued up before setting out. On all 
these divisions, allow an extra i in. at each 
end for housing. The divisions will be 
gauged the same width as the top ; the 
bottom will require different gauging 
trauge the front edge for a i-in. tongue 
and a J-in. rebate ; alter the width gaSge 
to J in. less, and gauge the rebate at the 
back (see B, Pig. 92.5). Run on another 

off Ime. The back may be left to be fitted 
in when the case is together. In actual 
work the settmg out of tne drawers would 
next be proceeded with, but these directions 
will probably be rendered more clear if 
the carcase is finished first. Cut the 
dovetails in the top with a dovetail saw 
and, before removing the core, pUce the 
top on the sides and mark the sockets 
m the usual way, care being taken to keep 
the top to the lines, and flush at the front 
otherwise the carcase will be out of square' 
and there will be trouble with the drawers' 
INext cut the sockets and remove the core 
with a bow-saw and chisel; keep the 
bottom of the lap sockets square. Work 
the housings with a grooving plane, or 
bore out about 2 in. with a J-in. centre- 
bit. Bite a straightedge on the line with 
handscrews or clips, or even a couple of 
fine brads and run the tenon saw tight un 
to It to the required depth. Remove thc 
core with a chisel and router, then cut 
the sockets for the secret dovetails {sor 
tigs. 928 and 9;!2). If many had to l,e 
done, ,t would pay to make a template, 
but m this case It is not important that 
they should be all alike, as each pin is fitted 
to Its own socket. They should be tapered 
about iin and undercut i in.; and some- 
times the front edge of the pin is also dovr- 



WRITING TABLES AND OFFICE KUKNITURE. 



tailed. The body of the divisions should 
lit fairly tight, but not tight enough to 
prevent them being driven through from 

^A / «»'^'""' "P ""' P^"'"'^ division, 
and for fitting, treat it as solid. The panel 
or dust-board, can be ploughed in j in.,' 
and stub tenons may be cut on the side rails 
to fit the groove. When glued up, the 
division will be found stiff enough to handle 

by Fig. 9.)!', the form of dovetail being 
clearty shown. (Fig. M:i is „ view of t 
framed division.) 

Pltoth, etc.— Mortice the sides for the 
pUath and cut the sinking; the shoulder 
Imea of the phnth will be the same as at the 
top Gauge s ^V-in. barefaced tenon on the 
back^ and a line J in. from the back for 
the front sinking. Let the right end run over 
? ' u i'°-. *" '<'™ a ""'re with the return 
pUnth. Having fitted the plinth, drive the 
liottom m pkce and mark the tongue upon 
the back of the phnth. Run a i-in. ploughed 
groove to this mark, and the carcase will be 
ready for gluing up. The plinth should be 
glued on to the bottom, care being taken 
to keep the shoulder lines right. Enter 
the tenons in the mortices, and glue up 
quickly. Place the divisions in thei? 
grooves just up to the entrance of the 
dovetails, glue the latter, and drive on, the 
assistant holding a piece of stuff against 
tne end of the groove to prevent it being 
burst. Cramp up the plinth. Glue the 
top dovetails, and drive on the top. Give 
all the shoulders a squeeze with the cramp 
and a spare cramp may with advantage be 
left on at each shoulder. Then serve the 
back the same, turning in a Ij-in. screw 
n the back edges of the divisions and the 
bottom. Turn the case down on its side 
and hammer the sides well down on to the 
ends of the divisions ; then try the inside 
with a straightedge. The wall side may be 
nailed If desired. Clean out the superfluous 
glue, and stand the case aside to dry 

1 u J' ?"■-"' *'"' *°P' ''«. "de, and front 
should be cleaned off, the reti.. .. plinth fitted 
iind glued on, and the bottom blocked, 
Hfter which the case will be ready for the 
drawers and the door to be fitted. 

Drawers.— On referring to the illii.tra- 
fions. It will be noticed that the drawer 



■im 



Ucks 8-e kept about } in. away from the 
pedestal back ; this is to allow room for the 
insertion of a J-in. square block on each 
side, ai^inst which the end of the drawer 
sides abut. These blocks are marked H 
m the sections. Cut the drawer fronts 
OB square, ,'„ in. longer than the opening 
and, in gauging the width, make the same 
allowance. A wa.vs face up the worse side 
and edge of the drawer fronts, as th-se will 
go mside and to the bottom. The outside 
need not be planed till the drawers are fitted 

length as the fronts, and to the widths 
shown m the section (Fig. y25) at j, the illus- 
trations being to a scale of IJ in. to a foot. 
The sides will be squared off to the length 
shown m Fig. 927, namely, from the block- 
ing at H to the front, less i in. which was left 
on for Up ; gauge them to the same width 
as the fronts Plough all the lower inside 
edps, with the exception of the back, with 
a i;m. groove, I in. up from the bottom 

I'Jf' T^P '°,"'° *'' ■"■* J »• '» the 
■J / sockets must next be cut in the 
sides ; for this purpose, set a cutting edge 
I? i "'•.and lightly gauge both sides at 
the front end. Run the same gauge, 
somewhat deeper, upon the ends of the 
fronts from the inside. A second gauge 
should be set to the thickness of the sides 
and run on the insides of the fronts and 
both sides of the backs, and a third gauge 
to the thickness of the backs, plus X in 
tor clearcnce, as shown in Figs 926 9'>7 

°?i "^j ""\ *^' «»"«» '"' "^"^ si'de 
of the sides at the back ends. Fix the sides 
m the bench screw in pairs, and set out 
the dovetails. If for the front end, mark 
ott i m. at each side, and, with the same 
bevel used for the case top, draw a half- 
socket similar to Fig. 929. Divide the 
intervening space into equal parts not ex- 
ceeding IJ m. each, square the lines over 
and draw the sockets as at Fig. 9.M Cut 
them in with a dovetail saw ; on the back 
ends set off half a socket in line with the 
top side of the ploughed groove, and a 
whole one i in. down from the top edge 
and divide the others equally between: 
The back dovetails may be i in. wide at 
the outside, the front ones ,,', in Fix 
one of the drawer fronts in the bench- 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINERY. 




WBITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FURNITURE. 



icrew, put s fm. wood slip in the ploughed 
poove and drop the side upon it. This 
ehp will keep ,t ia position lateraUv. Keen 
the end up to the gauge line, draw in the 
puis, and run in the cuts with a dovetail 
aaw Mark a corresponding number on 
the front and side, turn the work over and 



371 

In preparing the bottoms, clean up the best 
side of the stuff, and cut it off so that the 
bottoms fit tight between the grooves at the 
back of the drawers. Set one gauge J in 

,k 't.'?''!''"."'" ' "■' ""1 """ »'»»« 
the back side for the rebate for the blockini 
(see Fig. 9.34). The front edge will bf 




H,. MT.-Plan « Top rf Draaghf-uu,'. A^jlulaM, T*bK Mtk B.l«tr«l. E™,™,. 




"g. sss-niagram of Sloping Biaekot for 
Orau^htsmos'i T^bls. 

"r^J^l l"",' "?"*• ^"^''" ""= V'oms 
upon the backs, keeping the bottom edee 
pressed tight up to the wood slip in the 
groove. Cut the pins down outside the 
marks, so that they will fit tight, and cut 
away the core with a bow-saw, finishinK 
up square with chisels. Next clean up the 
insides ; take a slight chamfer off the 
in-'ldes of the sockets, enter the pins, .ud 
glue up, set square, and stand aside to dry. 



r 



DO 



rig. »S>.-Lockliig DrawM of Dranghtmu.', 
Tablo. 

rebated j\ in. deeper, as the front is ploughed 
deeper than the sides. The grain of the 
bottoms should run in the direction of the 
length of the drawers. The bottom must be 
dnven in tight, and slot-screwed at the 
back, the oak blocks fitted tight in their 
rebates and glued in, but to the sides only 
not the bottom ; the front block mav L 
glued to both. When thoroughly dry: the 
drawers may be fitted in, the fronts cleaned 



:itj 



it72 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



08 flu.h with the carca.e, a i.in. bead 
.tuck on the edges, a return planted on the 
ends and the locks and handles put on. 

glue and brad them in, clean o« flush with 
the rebate and screw in the back of the 
case A J-in. air-hole should be bored in 
the iMck, opposite each drawer, otherwise 
thp drawers will take a long time to close. 
„l»°"""!'K'*f ' '"!<■«'»'— Have the inside 
edges of the door framing, the face of the 
panel, and the moulding polished before 
putting them together. It will be noticed 
that a }-in. bead is stuck on both stiles, 
and a similar one pUnted on the top rail • 
this must be done, as the bead caniot be 
stuck on the ends of the stiles ; it may be 

flush with the bead, and the whole of the 
knuckle sunk m the door. After every- 
thing has been fitted, the furniture shoifld 
be taken off, and the case damped down and 
given a final rub with No. glasspaner 
when It will be ready for the poUshe?. In 
the Illustrations, T represents the top of the 
case, B the bottom, d the divisions, the back 
r the drawer front, e the drawer bottoms 
J the drawer backs, H the drawer stops 
r the phnth, r the drawer runners, o the 
drawer blocks, a the sides of case, and u 
vlie door stops. 



Draughtsman's Adjustable Table. 

The drawing table illustrated by Figs 
Mo and 936 is a very handy piece of fur^ 
niture for a draughtsman's room, as regards 
Its receptacles for storing drawings, note- 
^ks et«. With the exception of the 
balustrade on the top, it is devoid of orna- 
*w ;i J " po^^'^ted i" such a manner 
that the drawmg-board, which forms the top, 
can be used level while sitting, or, by turning 
up a bevelled bracket, it can be used sloping ; 
then by turning up another bracket along- 
side the slopmg one, it can he raised level 
for use when standing. Fig. 9.53 is the 
front elevation. Fig. !)3(i, the end elevation, 
and Fig. 93, the plan of top with the balus- 
trade removed, showing the method of using 
the board. Fig. 938 shows an elevation 
of the sloping bracket. The construction is 
complicated, and would require great care in 



w?h .? "■"'if '*"*'• The gable, are ph,i„, 
Tw!^ 11 °™''/' » "«'«" moulding 
phinted on the outside. The bo'tom shelves 
of the carcase, as well as the upper ones 
would require to be solid to prevent vermin 
getting access to the inteiior. The rest of 
the drawer divisions would be 3 in. brood 
and would be in pairs-one at the front add 
one at the back, though the one at the back 
could, in the majority of cases, be dispensed 
with. These drawer divisions are kept 
back so as to bring the -aargin stiles mm 
flush with the outside edge of the gables. 
The mamn stiles are hinged, and have a 
cupboard lock, the bolt of which is turned 
into a socket fixed to one of the drawer 
divisions. This locks all the drawers at 
once, though the saving is questionable, as 
it entails extra labour in the construction, 
inis method is shown at Pig. 939 f b^ 
sloping bracket s and the level ouc'l (Fig 
935) are hinged at the bottom; the sloping 
one t a small block, and the level one to 
the top shelf or runner. The dotted lines 
show the position of the top and brackets 

rtl fT/^u""'.*"? ■>' *>" ""case. 
The balustrade, though portable, is dowelled 
to the back rail of the top, and can be 
easily hfted o« or on. Pig. 936 shows 

»i° J'»T* ^i^'""' "' "" *°P' "Wk 
rig. »« shows the manner of using The 

paper p is passed through the space*! 

marked s p (for these spaces see also the 

end elevation at Fig. 936). A straight- 

vd' u-S ^""^ *°, ""^ *°p ^y "■»">?* <^- 

*-ig. 938 18 an elevation of the sloping 
bracket, showing a raised part in the centre 
to correspond with a groove in the top. 
This prevents the board from sUppinc 
downwards. Fig. 939 is a sketch of a part 
of a margm stile, showing the method of 
locking the drawers. 

Writing Table and Cabinet. 

Fig. 940 shows in elevation a small writini! 
table and cabinet which would look well 
If constructed of walnut and polished, 
the interior fittings being of white wood. 
Ihe table part should be taken in hand 
hrst. In setting out the legs, see that 
the mortices are in their correct places and 
the legs in pairs with one .another. Takii.t 
the tight-hand end .irst (see Fig. 941) 



WMTING TABLES AND OFFICE FUKNITUKE. 



the Mill and panel ue nude fiuili with 
the innde of the lega (m« Pig. 942) Two 
morticei an out in the back leg for the 
back raili (aee Fig. 943), and one mortice 
in the front leg takea the bottom rail. 
Two grooves are also cut right acron 
and receive the partition, that form the 
cupboard they .hould be stopped i in 
from the front, and the partitions shoul- 
dered to fit them. The top front rail of 
i-in. stufl, is dovetailed to each outside 
leg, and mortised to take the centre one 
see Fig 944). The centre legs are joined 
by two rails, the top rail being 5} in. by 
1| in., and the bottom rail 3 in. by I» in 
and are fitted with a bevelled panel, as 
at the right-hand end. In the back centre 
leg SIX mortices will be required, one each 
at the top and bottom to take the back 

S 'V,'!^'''' ,°"'y *''« •""''' P"'«'l (see 
Fig. 945), and one mortice at the bottom 
for the rail a (Fig. 940). The other mor- 
tices are for rails which carry the bevelled 
side panel, simiUr mortices being made 
m the front centre leg. Other mortices 
in this leg take the rail b and the rail under 
the left-hand drawer. The left-hand end 
is constructed like an ordinary table, 
and needs no detailed expUnation, except 
that a rail similar to a and in Une with it 
IS mortised between the two legs. A sec- 
tion of the rails is shown at Fig. 946. In 
putting the framework together the three 
pairs of legs should be glued up first, the 
nght-hand and centre 'egs having their 
panels m place. They should be cleaned 
off, and the back panel and the part con- 
taimng the cupboard and drawers glued 
up ; then the remaining end should be 
glued on. The runners for the drawers 
should also be added now. The drawers 
are dovetailed together in the ordinarv 
manner, and have sunk bevelled fronts 
fitted with turned wooden knobs. The door 
to the cupboard is also fitted with a sunk 
bevelled panel, held in place by fin. bead" 
(see Fig. 947), and is hung with U-in 
brass butts and fitted with a brass cup- 
board look. The legs are turned to pattern 
and the feet fitted with patent ball casters. 
Table Top.— The top of the writing table 
IS j m. thick, and has a thumb moulding 
worked on it (see Fig. 94«), and should 



273 

overhang the leg. Ij in. ; it i, aUo dove- 
tal-grooved to receive the ends of th» 
cabinet, and stop-rebated at the back 

«bL°t *■ '*' *" "'"' *'"' ^'^ »' *•>• 

C«btaet.--For the cabinet the end. should 
be prepared first. The under top d (Fig. 
943 1. face-dovetailed to the end. and cut 
back H m. to take the doors (see Fig. 949) 
Mortices are cut in the ends to take the 
rails between the drawers (see Fig VM 
and grooves are also cut for the drawer 

Tif "■/»■ ^""^ '" "'*> "^de for the 
shelf E (Fig. 943), and a groove i in. deep 
18 worked to the sweep for the sUding cover 

nto the shelf e (Fig 943), and tenoned 

I ij u "'"'" ^P ^'^ ^'«- 919); they 
should be mortised and grooved to corre- 
spond with the ends. The back should be 
made m three widths, and the joints arranged 
so that they meet behind the two partitions 
SUdmg Cover.-The sliding cSver may 
be made m narrow strips, which should 
be perfectly straight, play being allowed 
m the groove so that the cover sUdes quite 
freely. The bevel for the strips can be 
obtained by scttmg out the sweep full size 
and drawing radial Unes. The strips are 
fastened together by a sheet of sailcloth 
gusd on the back, but the joints must 

pL r,=ti'° ^"^ «'"'■. ^ i-'"- '«"'» Ne 
*ig- 9ol) IS put on the ends around the 

sweep and a small chamfer is worked on 
the edge of each of the strips, as in Fig 
Jo The bottom strip should be fitted 
with a brass lock having a hook bolt, and 
the plate should be let into the top of the 
table The pigeon-holes, shown in eleva- 
tion by Fig. 953, are constructed of 1-in 
stuff, which IS grooved, glued, and bradded 
together. They may, of course, be altered 
so as to smt individual requirements. 

Cupboard.-The cupboard is fitted with 
two shelves, and enclosed by a pair of glass 
doors, hung with Ij-in. brass butts, a 
section through a H (Fig. 940) being shown 
at Fig. 9o4 The drawers are dovetailed 
together with plain fronts, and fitted with 
'!°?1 TS""*™ '""''"• The top J and 
shelf y (Fig. 943) b,v. a thumb moulS 

r . r "" '^8"'' ""« moulding on 
the top being returned in the soUd ; but 



'- 1' llVl 



■la? 





'r 



m 



CABraErWOHK AND JOINEBT. 




WBITINQ TABLES AND OFnOE FOKNITUBE. 



27( 



n 




FIf. MS.— Section 

of End Fanol 

Framing of 

Writing Tablo ind 

CaUut 



Fiff. 946.— SMtlon of Foot B«U of Writing Table and CaUnat. 



Fig. HT.^Soctlon of Door 

Stile of Writing Table 

Cupboard. 



»• 



OABINETVOKX AND JOINKBT. 



tho mouMiiig on th< thrif ii mittnd it 
the coraw, Md > Mpcnte pi«c« ntnraed 
«o It (m Kg. 986) on the ontiid* o( the 
Mid. 



tion oi oat with • iin|l. Oull. Km. tM 
!• • horiiontel wotion. 0»k. mlnnt, at 
m»hMMy wouU b« the moat tuitabU 
nul«i»I to ue, but any chenpn kind 




JIf. Ni.-Jolu af 

Omr aad Bid of 

WrItUt I»bU. 





M 


^A' 






^ 


^^^^a 



n» •M.-Mu of uu 



rif. •M.-Jolalo of' raitiuon and bd of 

WMtllf Table aad OaUasi 




n». «ea.-»«oHoB of Covor 

of •WiUbm Table. 



Hf. (54.— 8tUoi of CaUut Doon. 



Bookcase Tables. 

A ^okcase (able is an excellent substi- 
tute for a revolving bookcase, with the 
adva,.tage of greater simplicity of form 
and consequent greater ease of construc- 
tion Fig SdO gives a general view of a two- 
tiered bookcase table, and Fig. 957 an eleva- 



lit- »e.-IIItorod Oonier 
of Cupboard (belf. 

of hardwood, stained and polished, will 
do. Both forms of table are 3 ft. equare 
by 2 ft. 6 in. high ; but these dimensions 
niay. of courae, be increased or diminished 
to smt special requirements. 

L^— The legs, which are got out first, 
are 2 ft. BJ in. long by 2 in. square. Thev 
are shown square in the iUustrations, but 



WBITINO TABLES AND OFFIOE FUBNITUBE. 



tlMv oujr be tntiMd U dnind, taking e>» 
to tan two portiou, in the uw oi the 
ungle-flitU table, untouched, the upper 

«">' *^ "" '•"" ' '"• '""« •' • diitance 
M 1 ft. 1 in. from the lower eztrenity 
Two S-in. •quare pirta ere required if two 
•hclvee are fitted ; they ere 6^ in. diitent 
from esoh other, the lower beinc 5i in 
from the bottom end. 

Top nM^ etc—The top rail, of the 
table are 2 ft by 4 in. by } in., and are 
douhle-mortued into the leg., .. indicated 
m Fig. 959. The mortice, are IJ in. long, 
i in. wide, and 1} in. deep, and are diitant 
t m. from the outside face.. The haunched 
pert, are i in. long and | in. deep. Fig.. 
959 and SHiO .how how the extreJnitie. of 
the nil. an .haped. The rail, lupporting 
the .helve, are 2 ft. by 1| in. by J iiT, and 
•re alM mortiwd into the leg. (we Fig. 
961), the mortice being { in. .qnare by U in. 
deep; the outer ihoulder ia J in. wide 
They an mt back i in. from the outer 
P*, "K "■" '•«• ^' poiition of thr 
tall, in the ungle-ahelf table i. 1 ft. 1} in 
from the lower extnmity; in the other, 
the bottom rail i. 6i in. from the end, 
and the one above midway between that 
and the top rail. 

Putting Table Together.-If the table 
ha« only one ihelt, them variou. part, may 
now be glued together; but if there are 
two tiers, the riielve. will have to be pre- 
pared before this is done. Each ^elf 
1. made up of a couple of board. 2 ft. Oi in. 
by 1 ft. Oi in. by j in., glued together. 
»aw a rectangular piece If in. square from 
each comer lo admit the table leg., and 
bore a i-in. hole in the exact centre for 
the extremitie. of the pillars that support 
the lath, against which the books rest. 
Then cut the notches on the four edges to 
take the vertical laths connecting the 
shelves and top rail, as in Fig. 962, which 
shows the shelf complete. These notches 
are J in. deep by 1 i».. wide, and } in. apart, 
the inner one being i in. from the m&dle 
point of the side. If there are two shelves 
both will require to be notched. One side 
of the bookcase table rfionid he built 
up permanently, and the remaining rails 
glued to the other legs. Then place the 
shelves in position, glue the two portions 



tn 

»o«j*h«, .nd Hciire the lower or .ingt* 

PUtai».-Two pillars, 1 in. uinare, an re- 
quind for the two-ahelf bookcase, the 
lower hdng M in. Img and the upper 1 ,1. 
U| in. Both end' n f..hioned into a pij, 

Ta ^i.''^ ^i' *! I" '"''" '» «''• "P •»«». 

and the other ) lu. long to St holes in the 
lower shelf, and a block ncured to the 
under surface of the table top (see Fig '1(1.1) 
The length of the single pillar i. 1 ft. 21 in.' 
Pass each pillar through the centn of a 
couple of 5-in. squares of Lin. stud, and 
glue the ktter to the pillan at equal dis- 
tance. from the extremitie. and each other 
(.ee Fig. 963). The book-.upporti.ig laths 
aro to be attached to the edges of these 
squares, which obviata the necesnty for 
"tang the pillar. 8 in. thick. Glue he 
.mailer pilUr to the two shelves, and wcuri- 
the top .helf with glue and screws passing 
through the rail, from the under .ur&ce. 

Table To|..-The table top i. 3 ft. .quare 
by fin. thick. It i. made by gluing two 
or three length, of material together, 
ptamng up, and working a suitable mould- 
ing on the edge. It i. Mi,ured to the rail, 
with screw, driven into it obliquely through 
the rail., » cavity being first made to take 

m.T?[''"*'J'~ ^?- ^>- »' •>"*•■» 

(Kg. 96.1) may be employed at two or three 
points on each side. These have a tongue 
to fit a slot in the rail inner face, and an 
screwed to the under surface of the table 
top. Another method is to glue triangular 
blocks m the angle of the top and rail. 
Before the top is secured, the upper pilUr 
njust be glued to the shelf and block; and 
the latter glued and screwed to the top 

Vertical Laths.-The vertical lath, are 
I in. wide by i in. thick, and long enough to 
reach from the top to the upper edge of 
the lower or single-shelf rail. In the one 
case, therefore, they must be 1 ft. 101 in 
long, and in the other 1 ft. 2i in. Six- 
teen are required. Similar laths, 1 ft. 0»in 
long, are needed to form book supports' 
eight for the single-shelf table and sixteen 
tor the double, a couple running outward 
from each ade of the pillar square, to the 
innermost vertical lath, to which they an 
united with a lap dovetail (see Fig. 966). 
These kths shouU be at an equal distance 



■I I 

■ ( 



ITS 



from «eh oihn, .uj fro„ a„ ^ ^ 
IwttoBi of the tier. Ohu ni ^.n tk. 

Bake no attenpt to ooBcMfth. lUt-hMdtd 
OM., which ,houU b. «u,h ,i,h ,1,, ^"^ 

Writint Taw. with Ptou, Draw.™. 

Th. wiitiag ttbh) ilhutnted by Fig. IKI7 

Itf„.'~'5 <r" '" ■»••«'?»■'/ with or 
without .nhid Mtiawood Wm. An .wi 



OABINXTWORX AMD JOINKBT. 



g rv»o'i:r..*^g.'^r!rt'S 

tor th. front end end nih nrt ont | in. from 
h. outer «lK^ A, ,l„„ ,„ Wm. 
the tenon, ofthei. nib ^^ Mch otl^. 

The mortice, lor the woond nib ,4 „f 
top. B«twern the mortice, tor the end 




FIf. •W.-Tvo-tlmd BookDM. UbU. 



view of the tablclfrom the left eide, i. 
.hown at Hg. 9fi8. The eTtreme dimen- 
«on,are : length, 3 ft. 2 in. ; width, 1 ft. Sin • 
.nd height 2 ft. 4 i„ The .ix l.g. ar^ 
♦ A '".• '<"■«■ ""d 2 m. square in section 
at the widest part. The four leg, on the 
rigM are left square for a distance of 1ft. 5 in 
from the top, and the other two for a dis- 
tance of 7 in., from which points they 
taper to IJ m. at abcjt 4 in. from the 

r^""! ,^'!t*,''* """^ »'»!«' outwards 
to the full thicltncss on all six alilte If 
casters are required, the taper should be 
earned to the end. 



raib run a groove J in. deep and i in. wide. 
i in. from the outer edge, for the end board 
see Fig. 969) ; and in the rear face of the 
leg, and at a distance of a in. from the 
bottom, make a mortice for 'he bottom 
rail, J m. by J in. by 1 in. dcp. Finally 
bore two holes, J in. in diameter and i in. 
deep, for the dowels of the angle brackets, 
li m. and 3 in. below the morticjs of the 
second rails. The rear left leg (Fig 97U) 
18 BimiUr to the other, but it has an addi- 
tional groove for the back boards and an 
addltioual mortice for the back bottom rail 
while dowel holes for the bracket are needed 



WWTINO TABLES AND OrFIOE FUBNITUHE. 




17» 




n» Mt.-IMU of Uf ud Ttp 1 

Ttblf, 



rif. tw 



flfi. MI tat »M.-B««tlo« nd 

nXKBtal iMtlon of Sla(It-iMf 

BookUM TaUt. 




If Nl.-Jitat >r Uf ud Utif lau of 



"^Ht'lgi^ 




nt. •M.~Bnttoa S«nulii( 
Top of BookoLM Table. 




1 ■ 
1 ,-'" 






~-;"S 



Pig. M4.— ten wad Top of ^flofciftt 
Tkbla. 



Tig. »«s.-Plllara and 

Sqnarai of Bookcaao Table 

in FoatUuL 



Fig. 1(9.— Wielf of 
Bookcaao Tabla 




Hg. »tt.~Iwut Utha of Bookccao 

Table lUod to Iquarea and 

npitgkta. 



M 











1 


1 







CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



t'i 




Til. MT.-0«»«1 View of Writta, Tkbl. «u, Fmir Drawer.. 







_iL 



Fig. »68._Eiid Elgratlon of 

Writing Table with Four 

Drawers. 




Fig. 969.- Fig. 970.- Pig. »7J _ 

Fnmt Left Leg Rear Left Leg Bear Bight Leg 

of Writing Of Writing of Writing 

Table. Table. TaMe 



i*~;= 



WEimo TABLES A.VD OFFICE FURNITURE. 





Pig. »7». -Joint of Top lUili ua 
J-1 of Wrttlnj T«M«. 



of WrlUng of WrlUag 

Tiblo. Tablei 




«g. «76._Jotat of ProBt BiLll ud 
Middl. Log of Wrfltag T«bl» 




Fis 978. -Joint of Bottom Balli 
and teg of Writing Table. 



I'i 













n«- >79.-P.rt Vertical Section 
Back of Writing Table. 



282 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



on one face only.»Aa the-baek and end 
boards on the right-hand «ide of the table 
are grooved to the rear right leg (Fig. 971), 
this leg must have a groove cut in the front 
and inner sides 1 ft. 3 in. long, reaching 
from the mortice of the top rail to that 
of the bottom rail. The sizes of the grbovea 
and mortices are the same as those of the 
legs on the left. Fig. 972 shows the front 
nght leg, which is prepared in the same 
way, with the difference that one of the 
grooves is repUced by mortices for the 
three rails running beneath the drawers. 
Ihe bottom mortice is IJ in. deep, ind the 
others 1 in. deep, aU being J in. square. 
They are situated 4} in., 10 in., and 1 ft. 3i in 
respectively from the top of the leg. Fig' 
973 shows the front middle leg, with drawer 
rail mortices corresponding with the front 
nght leg, a rear groove for the inner end 



long respectively, by i in. deep and * in. 
thick. The rails, with the exception of the 
bottom ones, may be cut from yellow pine 

^ JJ L* t""^ "^ I-"- "wkogany is 
glued. The front and back top rSls are 

\ I '"• ?y '* '"• V i '■>• Kg- 975 
shows how the ends are sha- ' to make 
UMon with the legs. A J-in tch, 2 in. 
long, should be cut in the .....r edge of 
each rail where the middle legs come 
to bring the edge of the rails i in. from 
the face of the legs (see Fig. 976). The 
end top rails are of the same thickness 
^ »" I ft. 5 ;.,. long by 2i in. wide, these 
bemg aso the dimensions of the rails 
immediately below and the one connecting 
the two middle legs. These three rails 
have pegs at each end to fit into holes bored 
in the inner edge of the front and back rails 
(see F,g. 977). The rail under the long 




Flj. 9«1.— Top of Writing Tkblo. 



board, and a mortice for the rail running 
beneath the inner end board (see Fig 968) 
It has also a mortice for the tenon of the 
long drawer rail, this being a continuation 
ot the mortice for the rail separating the 
drawers on the other side. The top of 
this leg is rebated, as shown, to 1 in to 
take the front top rail, which extends 
from corner to comer. Dowel holes are 
inade for the bracket to correspond with 

fr ™ o-*; v*^""* ''f '*S- The rear middle 
leg (Fig. 9(4) is similarly cut at the top but 
is grooved on three sides for the two back 
boards and the inner end board, and has 
mortices for the three rails. 

Rails, etc-The back of the right-hand 
portion ot the table is 1 ft, 3 in. long by 
1 ft. OJ in. wide by J in. thick. The two 
inds have the same length and thickness, 
and a width of 1 ft. 2J in. The left end 
.™d back arc 1 ft. 2i in. and 1 ft. u^ in 



Fig. m.-Jolnt of Top pruning oJWiiting Table. 

drawer and the corresponding one at the 

S^nLwJ ?■/* if- '°"8. and the rail, 
beneath the first and second small drawers 
are 1 ft. 2 in., the one below and its com- 
panion at the back being 1 in. longer; 
all are IJ m. wide by J in. thick. The outei' 
edge of all these rails should be i in. from 

*Z tr. "' '!;'' '"«'• ^""^ '"'* «•"! I'ft 
ena bottom rails are respectively 1ft Si in 

Belli h ** "■ '™« ^y li i"- ^i-w^e: 

Bevelled tenons are worked on the ends to 
nt tile mortices, as shown in Fig 978 The 
tapenng of the legs should be borne in minil 
when cuttmg the tenons of the two bottoiri 
rails, so as to make the shoulders a closr 
fit. The width of the rail beneath the en.l 
of the long drawer, and that of the two 
beneath the bottom drawer, provides threo 
drawer runners (see Fig. 979) ; the others 
consist „f 1-ft. i-in. pi,„_ ,j ,.^_ 
glued and screwed to the end boards, tho«. 






WRITING TABtES AND OFFICE FURNITURE. 




Fig. »«s.-a.ii«u Vie* of CroM-I,gg«l 
Writing Tkble. 




Tig. Mr.-VwHoal SmUoh tbnmgh Top of Ttblo 
(onLtoeXT, Fig. »«4). 




ng. M6.-l.g of CroM-l,gg«i Toblo, 




Oron.Iegg«| WriUrg T«W«. 



i 



M I 




384 



CABINKTWORK AND JOINERY 




FIgi. 9U to 190.— FroBt ud Ent 
EInmUou ud lodda PUn of 
Dnwlsg-mom Wiitliic Ttblt. 



1« w 




ng. »9I.-8«iUoi. throuj* Top of Table (.t A. Fig. 988). 



WHITING TABLES AXD OFFICE 



FURNITURE. 



»■! 




:^^^^^: 




rte- •M.-SMorlog Top of 
WriUnt T«Uo. 



n»- »M.-Cai«d End Biui of Writtoj T.bl.. 





Pig. M4.-H.If of Wrlttog TM, Podtaont 



Plj. •9».-PKt view of Plgooa-b 
of Wrttlur Tablo. 




Fig. 993.-0.nr.d Front lUU of Wpiti»g T.M,. 




Tie. 997.-Mlt,r.d Clamp, for Writing T.M. Tig »9«.-v.rti„l « .• 

Plap, *"'-^"H="'S.ctio>iofT.bte(,tB,Pig.»8o) 

■howlng Hgeon-hoHa 



!il 




for the short drawers being 1} in wide 
and that for the long drawer 1 in. The 
front end may be pegged to the iront rail, 
or secured with a double -pointed imil. 
Drawer guide, 1 ft. long, and thick enough 
to be flush with the edge of the leg, are 
glued to the slide rails and end boards To 
prevent the upper drawers rising at the 
inner end through the absence of a rail thwe 
screw to the top edge of the inner end 
board a piece of j-in. stuff, 3 in. wide 
long enough to reach from the front to the 
back rail. Fig. 979 is a sectional back view 
showing these details, the rear legs, back, 
and rails bemg omitted. Glue up these 
various parts, and secure the five boards 

must be done previously. 

Brackets.-The brackets (Fig. 980) for 
the angles should have 6-in. ddes ; they 
are dowelled to the legs, and fixed with 
double-pointed nails to the rail above. ' 

1 ft 9 • ^'I'—V" *»•>'« «»P (Kg- 981) is 
3 ft. 2 m. long by 1 ft. 8 in. wide It con- 
sists of a framed board 2 ft. 8} in. by 1 ft 
bvTi^tl* if- P'fr^n^-g « 3 in. wide 
are 3 ft. 2 m. long, and the ends 1 ft. 6 in. 
ihey are mortice-and-tenoned together 
haunched tenons, 2 in. long by 2 infwide 
and I m thick, being used. The haunch 
projects i m.. is f in. wide, and starts i in. 
from the outer edge of the frame length 
(see Fig. 982). Run a groove, J in, dSp 
and wide down the middle of Mch inside 
face for the board, which is tongued so as 
to bnng the underneath surfaces flush 
thus leaving a depression above for the 
^ther covering. The edges should be 
worked into a moulding. Secure the top 
to the table with screws passed into it 

tT^^^"" !t' '"P, ™"»- T'"' drawers 
are made in the usual way, and are fitted 
wits brass or copper handles. 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEHY. 



Cross-legged Writing Table. 

Fig. 983 is a general view, and Figs. 984 
and 98o are front and end elevations of an 
easily constructed writing table, for which 
pine IS the most suitable material To 
ensure perfect firmness, so desirable 'in a 
vritmg table, the crossed leg, should bn o.t 
Irom It-m. stuff; if this is not easilv 



obtainable, 1-in. stuB may b« used. Fig. 
m, show, how these legs are sawn. The 
board, indicated bv dotted Knes, is 2 ft. 9 in 
by i m. Each leg is halved where the 
pair cross, and a mortice *, 3 in. by » in 
llV, ""'"-''' "■" "iddle bar, pierces 
S.''*'- ^\'J"^ "' farther' 4u7ed 
with four round-headed screws. The middle 
bar B (Fig 984) is of j-in. board 3 ft . 
,1 t '!">•■ ^"PP°»'"« «l>a legs to be U in. 
thick this bar will be 2 ft. 7 in. from 
shoulder to shoulder, and each teZ 
-*'.»• fong; The tenons are pegged 

I"^L ""= '"«"■ A frame o (Fim 984 
and 985), of J i„. h„„d, J,„^f, »«* 

top ends of the legs, to which it is 
screwed. Its front and back piece, are 

areTfJ" lT-'°? " "2 <*''■«• ^8^>; these 
are 2 ft. 11 ,„. long, the end pieces being 
1 ft. 8 in long, and aU are 4 in. wide. Thi 

but the back is left pUin. The frame is 
dovetailed at the comers ; and the S^pe 
edge, when fixed, comes level with the 
tops of the legs. The table top d (Firo 
983 and 987) rest, on the frame. aK 
screwed down to the frame and le«. It s 
of i-ln board, 2 ft. n i,. by 1^. 8 ' " 
Over his top, leather or American leather- 
cloth 1, stretched, and tacked down over 

ilrri^^r-J*"'. T^ """ xecesMrily be 
carried farther back than the strip , (Fig. 
987). as the latter can be nude to hide the 
edge and the tacks which fasten it. Out- 

S M» ''"fL™'"*' "■« "^Mig " (Figs. 
984. 985, and 987). This is of fL. board 

1 ft. 9 in. by 11 m.. the front being 3 ft. 

;L * '°j "1 ^''^' »« dovetailed 
and screwed together at the corners; and 
the casing is screwed upon the frame, thus 
bding the edges of the table t»p and 
the tacks by which the covering is fastened. 
The upper edge of the front strip of the 
casing comes level, when fixed, with the 

between the pigeon-holes rest on the table 
top as shown in Fig. 987. They are of 
J-in. board, and are 7j in. square. Two 
openings are cut in their front edges, one 
at the bottom, J in. square, for the strip 
F and iinother at the top, 2 in. by 4 in., for 
the canopy strip o. The shelf h, which 



WRITING TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITUBE, 



rests on the psrtitioos, is i in. thick. The 
partitions are fixed with screws driven into 
them through the table top, back of the 
case and the strips, and with dowels into 
the shelf H. The two horizontal partitions 
(see Fig. 984) are of fin. board, and slide 
m y-shaped grooves cut for them in the 
uprights. All screws left showing should 
be -ound-headcd. The illustrations, with 
the exception of Fig. 983, are reproduced 
to a scale of 1 in, to 1 ft. 

Small Wrltingr Table lor Drawinjc. 
Room. 

The writing table shown in front and end 
elevations by Figs. 988 and 989 should be of 
walnut or mahogany, and may be carved 
as shown, or left plain if good figured wood 

" Tf-^ "," ^ '*■ ^^- 2 ft- k in. long, 
and 1 ft. 7i m. from back to front. The 
front legs are 2 ft. SJ in. by 2* in. by U in 
and are rounded as shown in Pig. 990 
which IS a plan with the flap and ton re- 
moved. The back legs are 2 ft. 6 in by 
^ in. by 1 m., and should be cut t» the 
shape shown in Fig. 988, and left square 
and stoaight on the sides. The fiiUshed 
sizes of the various parts are is follows -— 
Front rail, 2 ft. 3 in. by 5J in. of J-in. stnfi • 
back mJ, 2 ft. 3 in. by 8J in. of J-in. stufi 
the end rails are also of fin. stvil, I ft 51 in 
long by 9} in. wide. The flap is made up 
of three pieces : one 2 ft. 61 in. by 1 ft. 2i in 
and two for clamps, 1 ft. 2i in. by 2 in. by 
Jin. One piece, on which the flap is hinired 
2, ft. M in. by 5i in. of J-in. stuff; one 
piece for carved pediment, 2 ft. 3i in by 
H in. of i-in. stufi ; two pieces for brackets 

.\ u^J"- "'^ 1 **• "i '°- »' l-in- »'««. for 
the bottom, which may be of basswood, 
stained to match ; and two pieces, 7 in. 
by H m. of i-in. stuff. The pigeon-holes 
also may be of basswood, } in. thick ; two 
pieces for top and bottom, 2 ft, Oj in. by 
H m. ; two end pieces, 7 in. by 4} in • 
two middle uprights, 6i in. by 4J in. ; two 
smaU vertical division pieces, SJ in. by 4} in ■ 
two horizontal division pieces, 9J in. by 4} in ■ 
foi'. small curtain pieces, 4| in. by J in •' 
and one piece for the centre curtain, SJ in" 
™i„ qS, .^. «'^'«''d section through a 
(Fig. 988) IS given at Fig. 991, showing the 



pediment tongued into the top, and the 
basswood bottom fitted into the plough 
grooves of the rail,. The rails are tenonrf 

K «!.'.)'' f "■* ''™''' ""y ; 'W should 
be fitted m dry, and then taken out and 
carved. Figs. 992 and 993 are enlarge 
ment, of the carving on the end and front 
rails, together with the haunchings and 
tenons necessary ; the tenons arc shouldered 
on the W side only. Fig. 994 is an 
enlarged half of the pediment, giving a 
section, and a detail of the carving These 
designs for the carving will be fo^und easy 
to cut. The small brackets fixed on the 
top are shaped to form a support for pens ; 
they are dovetailed into the pediment, as 
shown m Fig. 995, and are secured to the 
top by screws driven from inside. The 
top piece to which the flap is hinged is 

S^in^tr™' "'"^™ *''«"'«'' "" "■"I' 
insiae, in the manner set out in Pia 99(5 

f'«- f "'"»'"•«<» the method of dlpfng 

„^i """i .™tered to receive the tenons 
and haunchings, and to fit the mitres of the 
flap ; 2-in. brass butts should be used for 
hanging the flap, and a 2-in. brass box lock 

(Fig. 990) showing the pigeon-holes in 
front elevation ; these are mitered together 

Z^n^ ^'«- '"*■ "^ fi^^d »;«> small 
oraos. Ihc curtam pieces are cut in tight 
between the division pieces, and glued. 
Small Pedestal Desk with Drawers 
and Pigeon-holes. 
The pedestal writing desk illustrated 
by Pig. 1000 would look best in oak, with 
the int«nal fittings of the desk in mahogany. 
frSb J*,.* ,"'*° elevation, while Fig. 

aS f y iV",^''''" ,"* "■= 'op "' '■"> -lesk 
t\ l>^}\ P^ "' "■« •««°"' '"Is of 
the pedestal. The desk, which is 1 ft 8 in 
square, is fitted with five drawers and four 
pigeon-holes at the back, and has a loose 
tray at the front (see section, Fig. 1003). 

Ji^ mi ^^'vf^ ^i'*™ of the desk ari 
i in thick ; the hd and top are J in. thick, 
both being clamped with stuff 1} in. wide ■ 
mJt i?«'"°-7'»''^'' ™>- te of pine, i, J in! 
thick. The sides are dovetailed to the 
back and front, and the top a (Fig. 1003) 
IS screwed to the back and sides, , he screws 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 





"*■ "^w^.s.':;i::f::rp!rr.r°"" '^- "•^-•"' «"•"» 



of SmaU Pedestal 




■ Fsdegtal 



WRITINO TABLES AND OFFICE FUHNITURE. 



Iwiiig kiddtn by the nin.ll tuniMl pillan b. 
Thrw icnw. in tho Uck and two in ra,h 
Mde will b« .ufflrirnt. The .mall pilUn 
•n> J mm diameter, and are relieved bv 
hyniw three turned groove, in the centre 
of ench, u ihown ; they al«, have a i-in. 
diameter pin left on at each end lor Mounnit 
them to the ink top and to the top isil. c 
Theie raile are | in. in diameter, and are 
.1.0 reheved by .mall turned groove.. The 
lid and top .hould overhang J in. !1 round, 
and ahould be fitfod with two 2-in hrau 



■•'"■, ^ '"■ h'Kli I') I (t. 7 in. »,|u.re over 
the leg., which are 1} in. .quare for a length 
onj m. at the top, tapering to J in. at the 
Iwttom. The .mall .quare feet, .hown in 
jection at Fig. loo:.. an I Jin. long, and are 
ntted wparately, a. .hown, to fuciliUte 
working. A J-in. .quare by |.in. long pin 
■« left on the bottom of the leg for enter- 
ing a corre.ponding hole in the foot. The 
front rail, above and below the drawer are 
IJ in. wide by } in. thick, and are aet ImcIi 
i m. from the front face of the leg.. The 




rif. lOM.-nmt Etentin of Kf^m, 
Dnwm of radMtal DoA. 



n«. ioo».- ui of 

DHk JoIMM to 
Fool 




Fi». looc-rrent 
Ban. or Do.k 
JolatMl to Uf . 



rif. lOOT. -Joint of 

Front Ball to Ui 

of Dodi. 



ng. looa. -Joint of lUo 
BaU to Lo( of OoO. 



n(. 1001.— Drawor 

Btuutr aad Onido 

atUd to (Ida Sail 

of DoA. 




butt hinges and a desk lock. Fig 1004 

T^ "v*^"" ,™* »' •*« 'n'™"' fl"i"g8 
at the back of the desk. All the material 
■» i in. thick, with the exception of the 
ilrawer fronts, which arc J in. thick. The 
joints D of the outside frame arc either 
dovetailed or bo.v pinned, and all the par- 
titions are made a sliding fit in shallow 

E^T't' M .'^"7" "• •■■ A ^i"!' lion,: 
knob should be fitted to each drawer The 
joints for the loose tray at the front arc 
tne same as those shown at d in Fig 1004 
and there are five partitions in he tray! 
Ihe ^ges of the partitions in 1. ;h tittini. 
should be nicely rounded. The pedestal Is 

IS 



rif. loia— Conor 
BraeLot of tluk. 

upper rail is joined to the legs as shown in 
*ig. loot), the joint of the lower rail being 
as shown in Fig. 1007, which is a view lookinc 
from the back. The groove is i in. deep 
and must be undercut on the lower edge 
iis shown, and extends to within j, in. of the 
front face of the leg. This joint must be 
larefully done with the chisel. The Ijutk 
and side rails are 3| in. wide by | in. tliick 
and arc jointed as indicated at Fig. IO(J»! 
Each of the two side rails has a IJ-in. by 
i-in. fillet o screwed to the bottom edge, pro- 
lecting j m. inside, to serve as t'lc drawer 
runr.TO, »nd pr.:,jecting J in. outside, ll,u lop 
edge being rounded (see Fig. lOO'J) A 



II. 



Ili, 

iii 

r 



. J.1 J '' "' '*'■'' ■'•'• "»• '"i • liiird- 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




MiiiK I'tchnl out about 1 in rf«ij ". i 

i>r..k.t. m,y b. .t, rf IS 'u;; ,T 



radniai Dnmr. 



thf?,'*^"~Z^''° '"° '"">» bracket, una^ 
the drawer ,hown enlarged at Fig. loio, a" 
■'J. ■>■. by « m. ; these are not for .trenitth 
ening purposes, but are intended 3v 

J m thick, the hole being bored with a'l-in 

mT'- ."fo"^'"'™" h-l". br^e.hroVgh 
till the centre can Ik seen; then turn the 
'•racket over and bore right out. Ar»rgi!a 



"««•" •' FsdMlal Dnmr. 




. >01l — tMuta( Oasii 
toMMtal 




face (see side view, Fig. loll) with « !.,„ 
'Irop handle fitted in the centre Tl. 
l«.ttom of the drawer fit. in a .ZvTinlh ' 
-■de. as shown at Fig. 1012 *^ ° "" 

in slots cut in the rail.; two buttons i ,,;i, 
»i<le rail wUI be sulHcient. The delk ^i ,1 

hnished by wai-poli.hing. 





KITCHEN, LARDER, AND PANTRY FURNITURE. 



Kitchen Dreuvr. 

Thm fir«t exoDipIo in thii mction U» dnun 
auitablo for a houm ol medimn lin. Fim 
1014 and 1015 ■how front and end elova- 

lv"[^,'R "4'.'' ■'•»"• » •""''on on Uno ab 
(Pig. 1014) ; Fig. 1017 a pUn ol the framing 
under drawer,; and Wig. 1018 a pUn of 
the cupboard m th» ureraer. The material 
used for the drener ehould be good sound 
and dry Chnstiania white deal, free from 
icnot., .halcea, and reainous .ubataacee. 
rhe lower portion of the dreaaer is divided 
mto three separate cupboards, with one 

1018. The pot-board and th^ division, 
m the cuplward are J in. thick, finished. 
Ihe two ends of the lower portion of the 
dresser are framed and panelled as shown 
in Figs. 1015 and 1019. The top of the 
lower portion of the dresser is 1 ft. B in. wide 

1020. The three drawer fronts are 8} ii. 
wide by j in. thick; the drawer Jdes, 
Si in. wide by i m. thick ; the drawer 
backs. 7J in. wide by i in. thick: the 

1020). The two end standards for the 
top portion of the d-c8.,er are 8} in. wide 
at the top, and g in. wide at the bottom, 
the standard at centre being } in. less 
-the thickness of the matchboarded back. 
Iho two end standords arc rebated to 
receive matching, as shown in Figs. 1015 

M iJ,- ?,", *°P '•«'" » 8i '■» wide; 
lie middle shelf 0} in. wide; 'the bottom 

tiniahed (see Figs. 1015 and 1016). The 
runners c d for drawers should be fram-d 
'u the front and back (rails, ancT panelle<i 



a. tkown in Figs. 1017 and 1020. th* 
runner o being of 3in. by IJ.in. stuB, and 
the runner d 4-in. by Ij-in. The adoption of 
this dust-proof method allows of the lower 
cupboard being kept clean. The drawer 
guides E are 3 in. by I in. The two ends 
of the lower cupboatd are housed to receive 
the pot-board. The pot-board is also 
housed to receive the two sUndards the 
homing being stopped i in. from the front 
edge of the two ends and the pot-board 
The front and back rails of the lower por- 
tion of the dresser are grooved so that the 
top of the dresser can be buttoned down 

the end of the lo«er portion of the dresser 
is tongued as shown in Fig. 1019, and 
rebated at the back to receive the match- 
boarding, as shown in Fig. 1018 The 
small round at the angle of the dresser 
la stopped at the bottom us shown in 
the front elevation (Fig. lOU), and the 
comers of the dresser-top are rounded 
Iwo bearers o of the same width ond thick- 
ness as the drawer runners (4 in. by IJ in.) 
are <i.wd under the dresser top (see Fig. lol(i). 
These bearers answer as tilting pieces for 
the three drawers, which, when pulled out 
will not drop, but will keep in a level posi- 
*{""• "he drawers are j in. shorter than 
the depth of th" dresser, and are stopped 
at the front at -n at h in Fig. 1020— 
not at the back against the matching. 
In the latter case there is a telidencv to 
push off the matching ; the drawers "then 
go back too far, and present an unsightlv 
appearance. The drav-ers are fitted eithe'r 
with metal grip handles or with turn 
■i-nod knobs. The doors arc hung with 
two 3-in. steel hinges, and fitted with small 








.fii- 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 

r 




Pig. 1017. 




Hgl. 1014 to 101«._m)iit and 
End EltYitloii ud Vertical 
Bastion (on Una A B) of 
Kitchen Dresier. 



Figi. 1017 ud 1018.-PIU ot 
Kitchen Dreeeer Framing. 
under, Dnwera and Plan oi 
Cupboard. 



ng. 1018. 



KITCHEN, LAEDEE, AND PANTRY FURNITURE. 



mortico locks or ordinary cupbonrd handles. 
The top of the lower portion of the dresser 
IS sunk as shown in Fig. 1016, the sinking 
being stopped at each end in a line with th- 
inside face of the standard. The thi 
^u'"^"^' of the top part of the dress i 
should be set out and cut to shape as sho- . 
in Figs. 1015, 1016, and 1021. A sinkiri! 



i!>3 

in the shelves is formed as shown in Fig. 
1022. The standards are housed i in. deep 
t-' receive the shelves, the housing being 
.1. -Bc:. cas( .stopped j in. from the front 
edge oi i' standards. The housing is 
•;u'. cue to I. . the sinking in the shelves. 
ihe soffit , the dresser is housed in the 
stnnd.rd, f..id stopped as before described. 




Tig. lols—Horiiontal Section through Front of Dreuor Cupboard. 




Pig. IMO.— VarUcal Saetion 

throngh Dr»«s9r Drawers and 
Cupboards. 




Fig. 1011.— Vertical Section 

through Dreuer 

Cornice. 



Fig. 1013.— Section of Ouit- 
fnuning between Drawers 
and Cupboard of Dresser. 



■Mi 




The top end of the standard is cnt fa, i.„^k 
under the cover-board as sboZt^Tm 

LT ,k "" ' "" ^«J ''«'«en the soffit 
and the eover-board. Glue bloclL V iL 
shown in Fie mai Tt. V^T^ * *"* 
back of thfr ■ ^'^ ""tohboarded 

ina for tk f^" "^^ °' ^^ 'natchboatd- 
% 1023 ^^'"""^ " P«™W by 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY, 



Enclosed Dresser. 

Pne-iosVrh r^J7iv^ "r 

of panelled Ws reba ed toItL K 
chnof dj^eyi :-HeighTrdre^^ 

lower enelosure 1 ft , ,„ ',"■■ "J 

.^Vi:tai^"^,^r!^-»"ea 

designed f'ada'pttiott rn^eSn^ 
dresser, and is removable. Fie loai^r * 

tma i- , ^"*"=»1 section on a a rPio 

compartment ; K, i,w7^° i ?""" 

fo^ra LTf " ''I V-^ endostr% 

J ». ' "" enlarged detail of Via imr 

fL S«; ^''^''' " "-Slar det^ 1 ofZ S' 

iranung, oliowmg the pre- 



paration for the drawer; Pig. 1032 i, . 
similar view of the sliding ra' of the unner 

Ipi^^tJ^^^ifrr^n^^ 

1031,.f , """^f """^ shown in Fig 
„? tl 5 "°, """"^ '"' "" bottom edge 

:fa:re^""''''"<'p-i-"--froS 
fr?ftSt^^j^f^tpi:r 

^Vvira-th-r---t?£i 
to ™. against. The top front rail. ofTr 
by 2J.m. stuff, is dovetailed into the le~ 
r.%«T 'H^'*- "31, and the middle Z 
•B fitted with double tenons, | in tWck ?he 
front ends of the drawer ranne~ K ■ 
tenoned into this i in deL Tl, ■I".'!* 
rail may be got oufof^jt^'byU^n^luff 
and rebated as shown at^D in Fig' W3I for 
the doors, or out of 2J-in bv I in A o 
with ft 3 .-» «n i. .. ^ y ^"'n. Stuil, 

C lol) Th "'.''f .'"' «^ ^l""™ in 
m?,r J . ""^ "^tral division e (Fics 
1026 and 1029) is double-tenoned into 

h„ 01 ■ * """^ *■"= ^li fai's, out of l-in 
t*"/ ^1-m. stuff are dovetailed up from 

's outt t?.U w' ''«'■ ""* «>« P°t-borrd 
« out m tight between and around the lees 
when the carcase is put together two 
cross bearers not shown in the illustm 

Z^efTHJ'' '^'•^'' portions'*'" 
Dresser Top, Sham Panel, Md Doors.-- 

iTi ^ J "■"■ 'P™™ boards, ploughed 

by^ 3"* *5«"=^l' ■' ^■'d "t tlie front 
by r lews, and at the back and ends bv 
buttons as shown at o (Fig 10311 m.' 
buttons must not be 't&ef \'han ft 

mnni„?o'f rt*"";^ ""' '"*»''"» ''"li h 
running of the drawers. The drawers are 
dovetailed together as usual, and fittrf a 
shown in P^. 1025, a sham panel Wu^ 

f^f u^^^'!,*' •>y mitertag round f 
bidde^^':?d''f1:7''''-''"^5'beeit!ersimpi; 
bradded and glued on, or sunk into a groove 



KITCHEN. m'DER, AND PANTEY FURNITURE. 



as shown in the section. These should lie 
inserted after the drawer has been made 
and fitted. The panelled doors are framed 
tf,->ther with mortice-and-tenon joints, out 
of .J-in. stuff, with J-in. panels flush 
on the inside ; a l-in. by J-in. bead and 
ovolo moulding being planted round on 
the outside. The doorc are rebated to- 
gether ; therefore the meeting stiles will 
require to be } in. wider than the hanging 
stiles and to have a j-in. bead worked 
on the face side. The doors are hung 
with pairs of 2i-in. iron butts, ,',-in. below 
Hush, the left-hand door being fitted with 
two .'i-in. thumb-neck bolts, and the right- 
hand door with a l-in. brass knob and 
tumbuckle. The bottom stop should be 
iiplayed as shown in Fig. 1030, for facility 
of sweeping out. The enclosure aonsists 
of two ends out of l-in. by 13J-in. deal 
Olio top 1-m. by laj-in., one shder rail l-in 
by :.'J-in., and J-in. by uj-in. matchhncd 
back planted on. The top is dovetailed 
into the ends as shown in Fig. 1028, and 
the slider rail is dovetailed in a similar 
manner to withstand the shocks of the 
doors. 

Oak Runners.— As shown in Fig. 10-30, 
Il-in. oak slips or runners are inserted 
tightly into grooves in the slider rail and 
top of the case. These grooves should 
not be ploughed until the diors are cleaned 
off, because they should be arranged to 
fall m the middle of the thickness, and at 
such a distance apart that tK-e is a clearance 
of J in., this opening being hV.-d in, when 
the doors are closed, by the slip h (Fig 
1029) fixed to the inside of the outer door 
I wo other striking tongues, which mav 
be of deal, are grooved into the sides of the 
case, and enter grooves in the stiles of 
the doors. These may be filed, as there 
will be no necessity to remove them. The 
oak runners should be cut in two pieces 
with the joint about J in. under the door 
when right home. One piece may then 
be fixed, the door slid on to it, and the 
other piece phiced in position by raking it 
in. The doors are prepared out of l-in 
stuff, with stiles 3 in. wide, rebated upon 
the inside f in. hy J in. for glass, and beaded 
on the face with a J-in. bead. The two 
middle stiles overlap, and only one shows 



the size of the doors being alike. A similar 
bead may be worked round the front of the 
case to break the joint, if desired. 

Completing Dresser.-Thc doors are framed 
together, the size of the tenons being 
shown m Pig. 1030. The shelves are 
housed in the sides of the case i in. each 
end, or may rest on fillets. None of the 
outside of the case except the front need 
be planed, as it will be hidden in the recess 
Ihe cornice is out of 41-in. by l-in. stuff 
cut in tight between the walls, and nailed 
to the top of the case. A cuvcr-board 
may be nailed on to the top. The case 
IS hxed to the dresser by screws through 
the runner rail, as shown in Pig. 10.10 and 
in the quarter-round fillet nailed to the 
matchhnmg. Two 3-in. brass scoop handles 
T '"■™A" *''« door stiles, to open and close 
c'^^'.^i? *" "'^''on'Panyi'ig illustrations. 
Figs. 1024 to 1028 are reproduced to the 
scale of } m. to 1 ft., Figs. 1029 and 1030 u, 

: '?■<"' I"- ^'^- "'■'" "'"' 1032 to 1 in. 
to 1 ft. The letter references not explained 
m the text are as follows :— i, shelf • j, plate 
rack ; k, runner for glazed sliding doors 



Dresser with Sliding Doors. 

In small rooms, a dresser with slidiUL' 
doors IS generally to be preferred to one 
having the doors hung in the usual way 
and opening into the room. Pig. 1033 
IS a front elevation of such a dresser, and 
on It are marked dimensions that will be 
suitable for most purposes. Fig. 1034 
IS a side elevation. Fig. 10.35 a vertical 
section, and Pig. 1036 a sectional plan 
iirst set out the dresser to full size. The 
top A (Figs. 10,3.3 and 1034) is 1 ft. 9 in 
wide, and should be selected from ll-in. 
by Ij-in. seasoned red deal, the pieces 
being cross-tongue jointed with good glue 
and tongues The shelf b (Fig. 103.5) should 
be of l-m. red deal; the shelf c and 
bottom T (Fig. 1035) may be of l-in. white 
deal, and all three should be glued and 
tongued. The angle posts D d (Fig. 1038) 
when finished, should be about 2^ in' 
square: into these the top and bottom 
rails E p (see Fig. 1035) should be dovetailed 
glued, and screwed. The middle rail should 
be tenoned into the angle posts, but should 
not go through. The top rail e (Fig 



CABINETOOHK AND JOINERY. 



Fig. 1039. 




Flff. lOSi. 



Flgi 1024 to loa.._p,mt Elevation, 

Vertical Section, and Half Hoiteontal 

aectioM of Encloud Dnsier. 




Fig. 2026, 



KITCHEN, LABDEB, AND PANTBY FUKNITUBE. 



297 




Pig. loai.- -Boriimtal Sntioi of Uppw Pwt 
of Eaoloied DrMHr, 




«!■ loa«,-H»lf PUn of Top of 
Enolond Dtmiw. 




Vig. 1030.— Ealu^d 
Vertical Sflctlon of 
EneloMd DroMor. 
If 



Fig. lom.-EiilugMl H»lt HoriioDUl Soctlois of Endoied 



i; k 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEEY. 



lOou) should be about 3 in. wide by 1 in 
thick, and m the centre and between the 
top rail and the first shelf b (Kb. 1035) 
trai e in a vertical piece 3 in. by 1» in 
and about 7 in. deep, to form a diriaion 
lor the drawers (see Fig. 1033). To con- 
struct the ends (Pig. 1034), prepare the 
top rails 3J m wide by IJ in thiols, and 
bottom rails 4i m. by 1} in., and frame 



width of the top rail e would be 1* in., and 
of the bottom rail 2J in. Both raiU are 
grooved i m. deep, and into them is in- 
serted a J-m. by ,'„-in. bead p p, over 
which the rails of the door arc rebated, 
the width of the outer linings o h should 
be the thickness of the rails e f, plus 1 in 
The hnmgs should be glued and bradded 
on to the rails, which are set back the 





"»•""■ Fig. 1.34. 

Figi 1033 aad 1034.-rrm.t uid End Elevation, of Dresser with Blidiag Doors. 



on= of each into the stile s and into the 
angle post H, ploughi,,g them for the panel. 
AUCD (Pig. 1037) are enlarged sections 
of the top and bottom rails of the doors, 
and E and F are enlarged sections of the 
rails in which the doors are made to run. 
Their thickness should not be less than 
li in., and their widthss must be gauged 
according to the thickness of the doors. 
Thus, as.«uming that the doors are 1} in. 
thick when finished, and the outside lininps 
o H (Pig. 1037) i in. thick, the approximate 



thickness of the linings, in order that thev 
may finish flush with the angle posts d d 
(Fig. 1036), and the outer door also will 
be flush when rebated over the linings as 
shown. The stiles of the doors may be 
3J in. wide, plus J in., if tonguM into the 
angle posts as shown at l l (Fig. 1036). 
Top rails and muntins are 3i in., and the 
bottom rails IJ in. wide, mortised, tenoned, 
and ploughed for panels, and stop-cham- 
fered S.1 sbnwn in the loner part of Fig. 
1033. Having fitted ind secured the raila 



KITCHEN, LAEDEB, AND PANTRY FUENITURE. 



and linings to their respective places, clean 
ofl flush with the angle posts, and fit in 
the framed ends. Get the shelves to their 
proper lengths and widths, and secure the 
same to fillets which are screwed to the 
inside of the ends, as shown under the 
shelves (Fig. 1035). To fi.x the top, put 
•crews through the top rail about 12 in. 



dards, shown at M » (Figa. 1033 and 1031). 
are 1} in. thick. The shelves should be 
grooved for plates similarly to the top at 
N (Fig. 1035), the space between the shelves 
being arranged to requirements. They 
should be grooved into the standards 
.-.boat I in. deep. Stopping the groove 
about } in. from the front edge, and pro- 








Pig. loss.— Part Vertical 

Section of Dreuer with 

Sliding Doors. 



Pig. 1038.— Section allowing 

how Top of DreiHr is 

Fixed. 



u 







t0 



S3 



Fig. 1036. — HoTiiontal Section through Dresser 
with Sliding Doon. 



Fig. 103T.— Vertical Section through 
Dreiser'8 Sliding Doors. 



apart. To secure the top to the ends. 
plough a groove (see Pig. 1038), and make 
some wooden buttons of hardwood, pre- 
ferably mahogany, on which cut a tongue. 
Insert the tongue into the groove, and 
screw through the buttons into the top, 
A being tLd top, B the top rail of framing, 
and c the mahogany button. The fronts of 
the drawers should be IJ in. thick, planed 
true and well fitted into the opening; 
the sides should be J in. thick and dove- 
tailed together. 
Dresser Standards.— The dresser stan- 



vidmg the shelf with a shoulder, makes a 
better-looking job. The standards also 
should be grooved into the top, and pushed 
in from the back ; and to make a good job, 
both shelves and dresser should be match- 
boarded at the bqnfc. The cornice is 3i 
in, by }in., fitted with a piece of 2J-in' 
architrave moulding mitered at the ends, 
and kept flush with the top edge of the j-in! 
piece. Fix these together with screws 
from the back, and ou the top of all brad a 
board J in. thick, and of sufficient length 
and width to project i in. beyond the 



.'II III 



moulding hoth at the front and end., a. 
shown in Fig. l().i.J. 

Completing Drewr -Having cleaned oH 
t doorH and , hot them to their respective 

I A "°i. '"■'«''•'■ ""no™ th" parting 
bead, P P (Fig. 1037) and rebate the outef 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY. 



T,J ■ ^i^' ■•"'""• *''™ i» " com- 
pleted, may be painted, or, if ,t.i„ed 

twice .ued. and twice varni.hed ; if painted 
four coat, .hould he given. The driw™ 
.hould have a l«.k and two .IJ-in b™" 



1 




1 

! 




■f 






Fig. 1041. 



door over the linings o h. Replace the beads, 
and in a similar manner rebate the inner 
door, and brad on the fillet k (Fig. 1037) 
When fitting these doors, allow sufficient 
space between the beads and rebates for 
parat nr varnish. The doors should be 
finished and quite dry before being put 



Tip. vm to 1042.— Front 

Elovatlon, V«rtlcal Sootlon, 

and Half HoriMotal Sactloni 

of DroMir with HIrror. 



drop handles, and into the edges of the 
shelves should be screwed some bra«» 
dresser hooks, on which cups may be hung 
To make the doors run easily, two small sash 
rollers to each door should be let into fh.^ 
under side of the bottom rails of the slidine 
doors at g Q (Fig. 1037). 



KITCHEN, LARDEH, AND PANTRY FURNITURE. 



Drcuer with Mirror. 

Figi lOTB and 1040 illctnite the con- 
struction of s kitchen drewir which nuiv 
be of pine or canary wood. The lower 
part (lee Fig. 1041) conaista of a cup- 
board, enclosed by two doors, which are 
divided by a fixed panel, and contains a »l.»lf 
supported by fillets screwed to the gables. 
Three drawers of a handy size are ar jng.d 
above the cupboard. A plinth, ehapi ) a, 
the front and ends, supports the lower car- 
case, and the upper part consists of four 



M —4.1 J:. 



ends. Cut the dovetail grooves b in the 
ends of the plinth to receive the back 
keeping it in 1 in. Then mitre the ends to 
the front, and glue them to the comer 
blocks. Glue a piece, 1} in. wide bv j in. 
thick, on the inside of the front at the top 
edge, and fix pieces to the ends in the 
same way. The shaping of the front 
and ends should lie done before gluing the 
whole together, and a sash moulding should 
be run on the edge at the front and ends. 
The gables of the lower carcase should 
be squared up to i ft. Hi in. by I ft. 7 in. 





Fig. l04T.--8sction showliig Poslttoa of 
DiwsM- Drawer Stop. 



ng. 10«.-Part BectlOD of Drsutr's 
Lovar Doors. 



rijr. 1044.— Comer Block of Dressw PUatlL 

shaped gables, shown in Fig. 1040, the two 
inside being in. longer than the outside 
gables, and forming a cupboard, which is 
enclosed by a door witl a glass panel. Four 
small drawers (see Figs. 1039, 1040, and 
1042) on each side of the cupboard com- 
plete the arrangement. 

Construction of Dresser.— Beginning with 
the plinth, plane up sufficient wood for the 
front and back, and two ends 4J 'n. wids 
by I in. thick. Cut the front to the sizes 
given in Fig. 1043, and make a mitre at 
each end. Dovetail together two pieces 
4 tt. long by 3J in. wide by | in. thick 
(see Fig. 1044), and glue two of tli.'se corner 
blocks A (Fig. 104,3) inside the front at the 



Kg. 104B.— Balls, DiTliloas, rtc. of Dnssir. 

wide by J in. thick. They are rebated 
on the edges for the J-in. back, which is 
made of tongued and grooved stuff 3 in. 
wide. The bottom is lap-dovetailed to 
the gables, and should be set back H in. from 
the front to allow the doors to overlap. 
At the back, the bottom, which is } in. 
thick, is narrowed to allow for nailing the 
back to the edge. The four long rails c 
(Fig. 1045) are 3 in. wide by J in. thick, 
the two at the top, front, and back being 
dovetailed to the gables. The rail at the 
front under the drawers is fixed to the 
gables, with two short tenons on each end, 
and the back rail is housed in the gab?'; 
with a dovetail groove. The two upright 



Mi 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEBY. 



^^v^:z:^:z^^X it:i::^:^i:x^:-x:.^ 






^ 



7' -11 ,i! il ll"^ 



9 <t 

Hi 



"::..■' 'I-,,!' •;.„; 



ir= 



U_ 






k' 




3r' 



rigi. 1041 ud 104«.-ProM to,- s,d ElmUou of Ptett Smck. 



^ 



:^ 



i| 



I I 



u 




Fig. loso— VtrUnl Baction of Piatt Back. 

on the ends and mortising the rails to receive 
them. The two drawer runners E are 



on the ends. The guide F is glued and nailed 
to the runner, while the drawer runners 
o are IJ m wide by f in. thick, and screwed 
to the gables. 

Doors of DrM.er.-The doors are mor- 
tised and tenoned together, the stiles and 
raiU being SJ in. wide by 1 in. thick, with 
a sash moulding run on the front edges. 
Rebate the inside edges at the back for the 
panels, which are | in. thick and bevelled. 
Fig. 1046 shows an enlarged section of 
the doors. The panels are fixed with 
beads nailed to the edges of the stiles and 
rails, and the panel between the doors is 
framed up in the same way as the doors 
and screwed to the top and bottom rail». 
Work a i-in. bead on the edges of the stiles 
next the doors to break the joint, and glue 
and nail a fillet h on each edge of the dividing 
panel to form steps for the doors. 

Drawers.— The three drawers above the 
doors are dovetailed together in the usual 
way, the fronts being bevelled all lound 
the edges. The drawers are stopped bv 
glmng and nailing thin pieces of wood— two 
for each drawer--about H in. square, to 
the ra;!. Fjg. 1047 shows the pMiti^u „i 
drawer stop. 
Dresser Top, Shelves, etc.— The top pro- 



KITCHEX, LARDER, AND PANTRV FURNITURE. 




CABI\KTW()RK AND JOINEKY, 



h 



jnti 2 in, over thii galiln at thu rndii. li in. 
ut Ihfr Iwcic, and } in. at the fnint. ft ia 
4 It. 4 in. lung liy 1 (t. it in. widn by I in. 
tliiilc, and i» k.thwimI to tin- miU at thu fro.it 
and l)«clt. Screw two Hllcta j (Kiij. luKi) 
l| in. widf by I in. tliirk to the gablm. to 
■upport the »hel(, which ia J in. thick. The 
ahaped gablea for the upper part are ahown 
in Fi([. 10411. the two on the outaide being 
1 (t. 7J in. long Ipy !p in. wide by ] in. thick. 
Ketiate the hoik eilgea for the J-in. back, 
Tlie top and Imtlom ahelvea K are | in. 
thick, and are houaed into dovetail grooves 
cut in the aides of the gablea, the groovea 
lieing atopped J in. from the front, and the 
ahelvea rebated. The shelf I, between the 
ilrawers ia { in. thick, and grooved in the 
gablea, the short division between the 
drawiTB being 1' in. wide by J in. thick, and 
fi.ved to the «helvi'8 with abort tenons. .\ 
fillet 1 in, thick u glued to the shelf at the 
back of the divixion to guide the drawer. 
The ahelt above the door is ti.xed in the 
g.iblea in the same way as the othera. 
The back for the upper part is | in, thick, 
and ia in two pieces half checked together at 
.M, and ncrewi'd to the edge of the bottom 
ahelf. It is fi.\ed in the relaite in the out- 
side gables, and placeil over the edges 
of the inner gables, which are made } in, 
narrower for thJB purpo,se. Leave the back 
projecting over the back edge of the top of 
the lower part, and fix with screws. .\t 
each end glue a piece to the back edge of 
the lower carcase top, where it projects 
over the gables. The upper half of the 
buck is fitted in the rebates in the gables, 
and shaped on the top edge as shown in 
Fig, Kli'lll, and screwed in place. Turned 
knobs should be fitted to the drawers and 
doors, and the latter are hung with bra.ss 
butt hinges. The dresser would look well 
if stained walnut colour and polished, 

Plate Rack. 

A rai'k for draining plates and dishes is 
illustrated by Figs, 1048 and 1049. It 
should be made of sound red deal or yellow 
pine, of which the following quantities are 
required : Two bottom rails, 2 ft, 10 in. by 
2 in. by 1 in. ; two top rails, 2 ft. 10 in, by 
1 in. by 1 ill, ; Iwo middle rails, 2 ft, :i in, by 
li in, by 1 in, ; four end rails, 7 in. by 1} in. 



by 1 m. ! four atilea, •> ft. .IJ in. by 11 in, 
by lin, ; two stilea, aft, l»in, by Uin, bv 
1 in, ; and one top board, 2 ft, 10 in. by tij iil . 
by J in. The rails and atilea >rn mortiseil 
and tenoned together, and wedgeil from the 
outer edge). The upright liars ara | in. in 
diameter, and are fixed in position after thi' 
framework ii wedged together, the holes 
for them being previously bored in the 
raila. The rods are of birch, and tho*.- 
sold by house fumishen for curtains eti- 
will lie suitable. Pig, lavi ia an enlargiii 
view, showing how the rods are placed in 
the rails, A handy ahelf is formed by screw- 
ing a board til in, by | in, to the top («,.,. 
Fig 1050), the plate rack is flx«l „„ 
wall dogs, usually over the sink. 

Portable Ljirder or Safe. 

A convenient form of portable krder or 
safe is shown by Figs. l().-,l to 10.).1, and 
should be m.,lo of good white deal. The 
sidi*. top, bottom, and back are each formeil 
"f boards ploughed and tongued .ogether 
the sides of the boards being bocded on 
their front eilgea to give a better appear- 
ance. Reference to ,* (Pi«, 1054) ahows the 
stopped housings to receive the bottom 
which is cut to tit them, and also to con- 
tinue over the edges of the sides, whore it 
IS mitered to fit chamfered fillets nailed to 
the lower ends of the aides. The top i.i 
screwed to the sides, but to give further 
support a fillet shown in section in Fig 
105,1, and by Fig, 10.54, is dovetailed to 
the sides. This fillet is rebated for the 
door and also beaded, this bead ond the 
beads of the sides being mitered as shown 
at c. In Fig. 10.5.1 it will be seen that tli,- 
boords forming the bock are continued to 
the floor, and are nailed to the back edge 
of the bottom of the larder, A chamfcrc.1 
fillet is screwed to the under side of the 
top, and to this the upper ends of the 
boards are nailed. Rebates should bi- 
made in the back edges of the sides to 
receive the edges of the back boards. To 
give a finish to the bottom of the lanlci. 
a flat plinth should be dovetailed into tli.- 
lower ends of the sides as shown at b {Fig. 
1054), the ends being mitered Ui strip; 
nailed on the sides ; whilst a moulding 
mitered round the under side of the top 



KITCHi-X. tARDKR. AND PANTRY FIRNITL'RE. 



?vn ft better ftp^>araoce tg that |nirt. 
he door U of a umple uharucter. con»i4t- 
ing of itilei, raili, and muotin rebated and 
chamfered, the jointii at the rornen lieins 
haunched mortice and tenon, and thom 
connecting the muntin and ratU being 



(hould be hung with a pair of li-in. liiitlg, 
and n iiuitable faitening ithould ti)iM> Ik* 
provided and fixed. The .helve* an' sup- 
ported on fillet* irrewed to the sidfK at suit- 
able heightm. and ahould not lie flxetl to 
the 6llet^. hut left free, co tlint thev run 





Pig. lose.— ProTisioa Safe wltb Scmlolroolar Top. 



stub mortice and tenon. The netting, 
which is of a very fine mesh, is held in 
position by means of beads, mitered and 
screwed into the rebates. Door stopa, 
one of which is shown at d (Fig. 10.')4), 
are screwed to the sides and bottom, the 
rebate in the top rail acting as stop for 
the upper part of the door. The door 



iie ea.Hily removed in order that they may 
receive thorough tleansing. 

Provision Safe. 

A provi»ioD. safe with a si-mifirj-nlsr 
top is shown by Fig. 10.").5. Front and side 
elevations are shown by Figs. 105() and 
1057, details of the mouldings, etc.. at a a 



OAMNKTWORK AND JOINERY 





■^- ""• Pig. 1087. 

Tip. I0»« and lOJT.-Pnmt and Sid« Elaratioiii of ProTiilon 8>f<. 





Hj. 1W9. 



Fig. loot. 

ng. .oas „, »...-a„«.„.u> s.ct.on. ti„.ugk „.„, etu«. ..., ., s.,., „ l.„. a a ^ 

B B (rig. 105«) 



KITCHEN, LAHDER, AND PAXTKY FURNITURE. 





Pig. 1060.— Joints in Semlclnmlax End 

Ship's Pantry-safe. 

The pantry-safe illustrated by Fip. 
10C2, I0«3 and 1064 is fitted with blinds 
and perfor. t«d zinc, and a ring plate for 
hooking up. This form of safe is used on 
ships and yachts, and the wood employed 
18 usually teak - mahogany, but for domes- 
tic purposes pine is suitable, while the 
back, if filed near a wall, could be match- 
boarded. Two methods of maldng the 
frame are shown in Figs. 1065 and 1066, 
which are alternative sections at a b (Fig. 
1063). In Fig. 1066 there are four stiles, 
in which the eight rails are stump-tenoned 
and pinned, while in Fig. 1066 there are 
eight stiles and eight rails mortised, tenoned, 
and wedged, making four pieces, which are 
ploughed and tongued, and fixed with 
blocks screwed from the inside, or by nail- 
ing through from the outside and stooping 
the holes with putty. Prepare timbei to 
the following dimensions, allowing ^ in. 
extra at each end on stiles, and also on 
the tenons of any rails that come through ; 
the e-tcess lengths are trimmed ofi after 
the work has set :— Pour stiles, 2 ft. 1 in. 
by 2i in. by 2j in. ; eight rails, 1 ft. 9 in. 
by 2| m. by IJ in. ; two door stiles. 1 ft. 
7i in. by 2f in. by ij in. ; two rails, 1 ft. 
6J in. by 2j in. by IJ in. ; and the shelf, 
3 ft. i in. by 11 in. by 4 in. The top, 



Tit. lOBL-Jointi of Angle Post of Safa 
with Bails. 



mm 



II 



usially got out of one ♦idth, i, 2 ft. by 

«^H,7 ?!!' down to i in. on the edg™ 
and the bottom can be made from two pleS' 
ploughed and tongned together, 1 ft 'iun 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



m,,wt ""^"^ .'"P" '« retaining it, and 
4TL?h tnri "'^ »' an%ngle o1 
for'each ^f ih'*';^'" ' '".8'"«'"'«' «quired 
m the door. The grooves ai, ,v i„. jeep, 




'y 1 ft. 11 in. by i • The binds will 
take about 96 ft. of ,tuff, and oriinlnr 
Venetian laths cut in iwo will aS 

he purpose. Pl.ne the materia/ a^fT: 
the mortice, ,„ the stiles and the tenons 

i .n. wide hy } ,n. deep to receive th^ ri„c 



and are stopped ,v in. fto„ j^ j 

from r- T^ »"^ '•"'«'• Cut a notch 8 in 

^hrel ?"f'''.«'"i bore and counter-bore 
tnree hoi™ m each top rail (Fig. 1069) 
for fiang the roof (.,e/Fig. 10S8) The 
counter-bore ,s afterward. Med with wood 



KITCHEN, LAHDER, AND PANTRY FURNITURE. 



plugs cut across the grain. Then form a 
i-ln. bead on the rails under and above 
the door, and frame the whole together, 
trim the ends of the stiles, shoot the top 
and bottom of the framework level, and 



.Ti)!l 

are on the outside of the frame, and this 
method is adopted when the blinds are 
omitted. The fillets for the shelf are 
screwed on, the shelf being in two pieces 
(see Pig. 1070) for taking out when large 




Fig. 1009.— End of Top 
Bail of Putrj-iafo. 



Tig. loot. ng. ,o„. 

Flgi. lou and 10»fl.-Boriiontal Sootlou of 
Bblp'i Fantr7-ufo at A and B (tig. iiwj). 



;^ 



3 



^^^3^ 



zrg^"yD!BSSlj J 







Fig. 107a— 

Shelf and Batten of 

Pantzy-iafe. 





fi.\- the top m position. The blinds mnv 
next be inserted (having been previonslv 
httcd, and painted or varnished), some 
allowance being mode in the grooves for 
the thickness of the paint. Then the zinc 
13 secured bv wood slips r (Figs. Kieii ,->nd 
lUMi) braddrf on. In Fig. lOfi'e the rebate 
and the beaded slip for securing the zinc 



Fig. io«8.— In-- 's of PMifiy^if. Frame and 
r :.^ing stile of Door. 

joints of meat require hanging. The bottom 
is screwed on from the under side, and 
the door (see Fig. 1071) is neirt fitted, a 
J-in. bead being worked on the stilps only ; 
the hinges are let in their full thickness on 
the hanging sttlc, the lock stiie being rulmted 
to meet the slip at d (Fig. 1065). It can 
be carried on at the lower rail and hanging 



i 



JIO 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEKY. 




K CHEN. LAHDEH, AND PANTEY FUHNITUEE. 



•tile, the hinges being } in. wide at this 
case. The door should have a cupboard 
turn and lock, the eye bolt or ring plate, 
whichever is Btted, being galvanised The 
screws hinges, lock, etc., should be of 
brass li the safe is intended for sea-Eoinu 
purposes; and, finally, the dimensions 



.111 

ments ; but of course the dimensions can 
bo altered to suit requirements. All the 
outer boarding, except the top and bottom 
should be J in. thick, ploughed and tongned 
or rebated together. The boards for the 
inner casing may be about j in. thick, the 
joints being tongued or rebated as for the 




..— .f-i_.^* 



^•^ 



rij. 1077. 



FiB. 1078. 



Til.. 1076 t. 107.,-H.- Front EI.v.tloa and Vrttal 8.=Moa, Quarfr Plan, and Msthod 
of Obtalrlag Bevals of Knife-bor 




Fig. 1079. A!t«niatlv» Design for End of 
Knife-box. 

given are extra for sea usage, and may be 
reduced for home purposes. 

Cold Safe. 

The cold safe illustrated by Figs. 1072 
to 107.5 is suitable for keeping butter' 
meat, etc., cool during hot weather \ 
handy sise is about 2 ft. fi in. high, 2 ft. 3 in 
wide, and 2 ft. deep, outside measure- 



Fig. 1080.— Section tlirough Side of Kulf^box, 
showing Metliod of Incising. 

outer boards. Good matchboarding will 
be suitable. The bottom and top should 
be of 1-in. boards, jointed and ploughed, ind 
tongued together, and the appearance will 
be improved if the outer edges are rounded 
as shown. Fillets of wood about 2 in. 
by 1 in. should be used, to which the inner 
and outer boarding can be nailed, ''he 
end.-) of some of these Sllets are shown in 
section in Fig. 1075. In making the safe 
the best plan will be to nail the inner casing 



■Mi 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




and ftlUts togethar, and then to nail on the 
outer boards, fiUing in the spaces tightly 
with dry sawdust ; but care must be taken 
not to force in so much as to bulge the 
boarding. The door will require carotol 
work, and should be n»de to fit fairly 
close. Its construction is clearly shown 
in Pigs. 1072 and 1075 ; it should be hinged 
with double garnet hinges. The fastening 
may be any of the ordinary forms as de- 
sired. Bearers and shelves can be fixed 



low IS an enlarged section of the side 
in Fig. 1076 at the centre, and shows clearly 
the nature of the ornamentation. To 
make the incisions after they are drawn 
on the surface, prepare a block a few inches 
long and with one edge planed to an angle 
of 4a as shown dotted in Fig. 1080. Hold- 
ing this carefully to the lines, pare down 

!?.! *u n'*'' *,*'" '"""P "^i'"'- Rub a 
little chalk oa the under side of the block 
to prevent its slipping. The curved grooves 



"(. ion. 




Tigt. losi and !!»>.— 

Otneral Views of OmuMntal 

Knifs-bozM without and 

vitli Drawn*. 



Tig. lOsl 



as required. A metal or earthenware dish 
to contain ice should rest in the bottom 
of the safe. 

Knife-box. 

For making a knife-box such as is illus- 
trated by Figs. 1076 to 1078, the best wood 
is sound, dry Honduras mahogany or white 
beech ; and, relief carving being unsuitable 
for an article subjected to the rough usage 
of the kit«hen, incised ornamentation can 
alone be suggested. Two designs are given, 
and^each of the four sides may be finished 
either as Fig. 107(i or as Fig. 107U. Fig. 



are better cut with a V-shaped bent chisel 
or "veining tool." The edges of the 
bottom may be ornamented with beads 
as m Fig. 107(i, by drawing the circles ami 
semicircles on a strip of thin paper ami 
pasting this on the edge previously rounded : 
then little nicks are cut between the circles, 
and the ends rounded down with a small 
chisel. The dovetails should be made in 
the direction of the grain as shown, and the 
top edge mitered. The division, which also 
forms the handle, should be housed intc. 
the enH.s slightly, as shown i^ the ri"h! 
of Fig, 1070, and the bottom is screwed" to 



KITCHEN. LARDER. i^^.D PANTRY FURNITURE. 



it. The quarter plan (Fig. 1077) shows 
the half internal dimensions of the box, 
while Fig. 1078 illustrates the method of 
obtaining the bevel for cutting the shoulder 
lines on the end pieces. To make the draw- 
ing, turn down the edge a b (Fig. 107t)), 
as shown by the dotted line, and project 



the section shown in Fig. 1080, with the 
exception of the beading of the top edge, 
whicn is better done after dovetailing. 
Hark the lengths on the bottom edges, and 
set a bevel to Ji' a} (Fig. 1078), and apply 
this to the marks on the inside fuce ; knife' 
cut these in, square this line over the edges. 




Flff- lots. Fig. 10S4. 

Figs, loss tad 10S4.— Storet DovstaU for 
Kalfe-box. 



Fig. lOSB. Fig. 1086. 

Flgi. 108B and 1086.— Ordinary Dovstail for 

KBlft-boK. 




Fig. 1088.— Centre DiTidon for Knif«-boz without 
Drawer. 

it into the plan to intersect a projector 
from the corresponding edge of the side in 
plan, the lettering indicating the same 
point in its various positions. Join the 
intersection a^ to b', the interriection of 
the lower edges of the sides, and a' b' is 
a aide of the true angle of the end, and 
also of the side, as rhe inoliiiatioU:^ are 
equal. To set out, prepare the sides to 



Fig. 1090.— Centre Oiviiion for Knife-box with 
Drawer. 

and pencil it in on the outside. Next allow 
the thickness of the stuff, | in., and mark 
down a second bevel line, cutting the pieces 
off to this line square through. Next plane 
off the top edges to the same bevel as the 
bottom, being careful, however, to bevel 
the two edges parallel with each other. 
Then apply an ordinary mitre template 
to the top edges, and to the inside sight 



r^ 



314 



Uter „d Wore th. rig. j. „„„ded, nn 
m 8 fine-cut uv, not quite down ti the 
dovetail, „d .et o»t the dovetail .^ket. 

Slf ^ '"i";.. "?H ""•' ""Wde .pace 
h.U the width of the interior one., wd 
from these point, draw line, with th. bevel 
u.ed for the bottom edge, and on th. S 

equally on each .ide. The angl. „f ?h° 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



out the dovetail, with chiaela : finjah 

the groove for the diviaion in the t^ eS 
piece, .qnare from the bottom rig, fa^ 

fit on th. bottom, rounding it. rigea Dr. 
vioualy, and Hang wilh^e andlo^wf 




TSf. INl.— 1 



Ead of Knlfi-bai. 





Tig. mi^nd V1.W rt Knu^t„ ^a, ^,„ 



ng. ion.— MmldMl Ed(a 
of Bottom of Xnlfe-boi 
•hown by Plj. un. 



n». 10M.-AltMm,H„ Bide Eientlon 



sides of the socket should be about 80°, 
Sni^f 1'*^°^ ?' '»«'*'« «" ensure Vhe 
b^th et. *",* "" ''^^'- Having markri 
endsf»?„M ""■ P^"' Pla-^e the two 
ends face to face m the bench screw, and 

Hh. T '^l' "'^' '''*'' «•>= bevel run 
m the dovetail saw within the lines, then 

mfi; .I^M "' '"tP'''^^ ™ "■ keepingthe 
■nside sight hnes m Ime with the inside face 
Hold th'."'''/"? the bott^^ ^ 
HoM the end down firm y, and draw the 

the'td 'Z '^"'"«\*''' cuts, Tmbe 
the end, and repeat the process at each 



of Eilif.-boz. 



Fig. loas.— Knob of 
Kalfo-box Diawtr. 



Other Knife-boxes. 

Kgs. 1081 and 1082 show knife-boxes in 
perspective, the latter having the addition 
of a drawer underneath. Hardwood such 
as mahogany, oak, or wahiut, finishri 
with trench polish, should be isri^ X 
Z^^iv"' '='"^f*^ by mitre, or secret 
dovetaihng, as shown in Figs. 1083 and 
1084 Jf a more simple method of con- 
struction IS desirri, the boxes can be made 
of pine, nailed together or dovetailri in 

1086 The prmcipa! sijes are the same fur 
both designs : Extreme length, 1 ft 3 in 



KITCHEN. LARDER, AND PANTRY FURNITURE. 



ftod extreme vidth 8 in. la getting oat 
the wood, a little extra in length muat be 
allowed for working. The aidee and enda 
are { in. thick, and are ganged to 3 in. 
wide, with the top and bottom edges aquare. 
The correct angle for the ends can be taken 
from Pig. 1087, which is drawn one-quartpr 
full sixe, or to the scale of 3 in. to 1 ft. 
The dotted lines at a (Fig. 1087) indicate 
the length of the endii. When the sides 
and ends have been taken to length and 
width, the next thing is to dovetail them 
together ; the pin b (Figs. 1083 or 1085) 
is made on the ends of the box, and the 
sockets (Figs. 1081 or 1086) to receive 
them are on the sides of the box. Before 
the box ia glued together the enda must be 
grooved iV in. deep to receive the centre 
division ; see the dotted lines d (Fig. 1087), 
and also at e. Note that the groove doea not 
extend to the top edge of uie aides. The 
half of the centre dividion (Fig. 1088), 
showa one-quarter full sise, is got out f in. 
longer than the inside meaaurement of the 
box, in order that each end F (Fig. 1088) 
w ill fit in the groove in the ends. The centre 
diviaion ia put in before the sidea and enda 
are glued together. When the latter is 
done, the lower edges of the box must be 
planed level so as to fit against the bottom, 
which ia i in. thick, and provided with a 
half-round edge ; see Figs. 1081 and 1089. 
The bottom is fixed to the sides and enda 
with screws driven from the under side. 
The turned feet o (Fig. 1081) are 1} in. 
in diameter and i in. thick, and are fixed 
with glue and screws. It is usual to glue 
cloth or baize on the under side of the feet, 
80 that the box may be laid on a polished side- 
board or table without scratching the sur- 



face. An alternative pattern for the centre 
diviaioaiaahowainFig. 1090. The hand hole 
in the divisioapieoa should beslightly rounded 
on the inside edges. To relieve the sides and 
ends of the design (Pig. 1081) they cau be 
panelled out in incited lines (V or hollow in 
section) as in the end view (Fig. 1091). 

The construction of the knife-box with 
drawer (shown by Fig. 1082, p. 312) 
is nearly the same as described for Fig. 
1081. The ends H (Fig. 1082) and the 
back are } in. thick and 1} in. wide, the 
back comers being mitre-dovetailed as in 
Pigs. 1083 and 1084. The drawer front is 
2 in. thick, and the sides, back, and bottom 
are } in. thick. The drawer can be made in 
the usual way by grooving the sides to 
receive the bottom ; or, to give more inside 
apace, the latter can be rebated to the 
sides and front, the bottom standing up 
rV in. just to clear and avoid friction, the 
top portion of the box is fixed to the lower 
ends H (fig. 1082), and the back with dowels 
and glue. The bottom j (Pig. 1082)— see 
enlarged section Pig. 1092— is fixed as in 
Pig. 1081. The linea K in the end view 
(Fig. 1093) are incised, but they can be 
further elaborated by the cross lines and 
the carved centre as ia the alternative 
side view (Fig. 1094). It will be seen that 
the shaped outlines of the sides and the enda 
(Pigs. 1093 and 1094) can be applied to the 
design Fig. 1081 ; also, the diamoud 
centre of Fig. 1091 could be carved as a 
centre in Fig. 1094. lakewise the upper 
part of Pig. 1082 could be incised as in Pig. 
1091. The turned drawer knobs of Fig. 
1082 are shown iu side view by Fig. 109.5. 
Brass handles on the drawer instead of 
knoba would also look well. 



CUPBOARDS. 



Kitchen Cupboard!. 

Fm. 1098 shows an elevation of a Idtchen 
cupboard over a >ink; Pig. 1097 showing 
anendv,ew.ndFig.l098a.ection. Fig. 
1099 and 1100 .how «,pectively eleva- 
tion and section of a Idtchen cupboard for 
a recess. It haa been assumed that only 



. fronta^d T;o« are n^^^r; in X c'upboarf for'Tfr" /"J-'^vd? 'ofa' 
t*:;i^J.JV^ framework.Tholt bl^a'' h "r^.' t^"L '™'' 'v?* »« 



hitter case. .411 the framework should be 
made of wood IJ m. thick, working up 'to 
about IJ m.; j-in. board, will be re- 
quired for panel., l-in. board, for the 
Dottom of the cupboard .hown at Fig 109(> 
•nd J-in. boards for the top of the same. 
ne dimension, of the parts are given in 
the illustrations. The frames .hould first 



The design, might al«> be adapted for cup. 
boards m dming-room. or lledrooms fn 

ulr "" " ""■'" "'"''"«"<' ■»'«'■' 

Damp-proof Harness Cupboard. 

.„?*'Ji.'"' ,"*'•.■"<' "<»«" front, cud 
and back elevation. re.pectively „f 
cupboard for hnM{n« i,.JZ.. nf .. 



f^m*fk '■"""""l "oction. The height 
1. 7 ft. 6 m., and the width 3 ft. out to out 

I'nTi '"'T' °««'«''ce of damp 

in harness room, that adjoin stable, it i, 
necessary to adopt some means by which the 
damaging effect, may be obvkted. The 



be made. The doors" can "blT Wnrnd w'/Tk T^^ ■'"'"?. ""^ ^ obviatedr~The 

2Hn. butts. Tofi^t-h-eMbJlS '^^-/l^dt t -t^T^ni' i' 

of wood about proof: and th. ™. Tn';l?"fT ^"P" 



, ^„ „^ ^„„ „„^ cupooard 

shown prepare three piece, of wood about 

I."'' ^ L"'- '"^ *" *»"> '" «li<- wall as 
shown. The top should be fixed by drivinu 
two or three holdfast, into the wall, and 
screwing these to the top. The frame of 
1 1^'"'?!??'"^ illustrated at Pigs. 1099 and 
llOOwiU have to be fixed to the wall or .ides 
of the reces. Shelves are not .hown, but 
can be added as deaired. Some moulding 
lixed to the cupboards as shown will greatlv 



improve their apperralc The oSCg rmourd"::. ''"'"'^, "!*'' ^'"'^ J"'"'. -' 
qu_antities of woTd are required 'tThf ^fTSr^'/i'L".'?"?-'' '« '"e fac 



' ----- -t-i-.-.-uii-. A lie loiiowing 

quantities of wood are required for the 

;«?« l^*""™ "♦ *■'«'■ '09«. '097. ind 

1?Z' ^ ■•.i™ ?'. -i '"• •>>• '1 ■"• '<"■ 
front and sides of frame, stiles, and top 
rails of doors ; 5-ft. run of 3 in. by U in 
for bottom rail, of doors; 12 ft. of pine' 
11 m by i in., for panels of doors ; 13 ft of 
7 m by } in. for top ; IL' ft. of 9 in. by 1 in. 
for bottom ; ahnuf ft. kngti, of ...dn 1,,- 
l-m. ogee moulding to fii round the top 



«. t 1 — 7 ""-iiguc ana damn- 

proof; and the one illustrated has l«en 
designed to meet these requirements. S 
yellow deal should be 'used. The hZ 

doors The lower paneU of wood are 

gUss being divided into three squares each 
with moulded bars, a action of ^ich U 

til?/' " '!?■ ""3'- The meeting 
stiles are prepared with hook joints and 
a mniiM<»1 /./..fa. flii_t :. .__ . ,' . ' """ 



816 



,f »!,« ;:„V.. I J J ""I'guea to the face 

' P^« nn- Tu"*""'' " »'"""' '■> action 

; ' J- ^•''•'- T*"* ""'cr or hanging stile, 

heel \Tii "^ J"""""! ""t « 'on^cd 
heel which fit. mto a hollow groove pre- 

ends, the lower edge of th» doors shuttine 
into a rebate prepared along the front edge 
of the pot-board. The upper end on th» 
mside of the top rail of the door shuts on to 
a bead prepared on the fillet fixed on the 



CUPBOABDB. 



.117 



inaide of the cornice nil (h« Fig. 1III7). 
The ends are framed tugether with fluih 
panels un the inaide, the outside being aunle 
and bolection moulded. These entu are 
made the hi! height of the cupboard to 
the under side of the cover-board or top, 
the Utter being ftxed down to the top rails 
with screws (see Fig. 1107). The Irattom 
ends are grooved to receive the pot-board 



(see Fig, IIIM), which is held in position 
by being nailed through the ends, and 
additionally secured with glupd angle- 
blocks on the under side, as shown. The 
plinth, when Sxed, will cover the holes 
made by the nails in fixing the pot-board. 
The back is framed together in six panels, 
flush framed on the inside. The luck stilei 
of the ends are prepared with rebates 



It 1, 





n*. iMT. rif. toH 

Figs. lOM and lwl.~Txau% and Bad Blsrattoa of C=pboaid to ftt over Blak. 




Fig. 1098.— T«rtlcai;B«<iUoii 

of Cupboard to fit otof 

Sink. 




etg. 1099. Ti^. 1100. I 

Figs. 1099 and 1100. — Elevation and Cross Ssotjon of Cupboard 
for Kscest. 



n» 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



1 in. Vr I in. to neciT* tin pwelM b«ck. 
tk< <x«t width o{ wkiok ia obtaiiwd *ft«r 
tJw mdi ban bMn fiztd to th* potbcrd. 
It ii nmitul that th* bulc nhoald fit in 
tight batwMD the nUtn, and br pcr- 
muMmtly fcring, the edgn ahouM b« gioed 
•nd aecntnl by iaaetting Kiowa at cloie 



InUrrala, aa ahown is Kg. U(W. Tha 
pUnth and oornioc are mitend at the front 
angba, and aonwed in noaitioa fa«m the 
inaide of the front and end framinB, After 
the oarcaae haa been pat together, the inaide 
moat be treated with a damp-proof pre- 
paration, anoh aa Palma eraam, thie b^ng 





nc uos. 

np. 1101 to 1104.— rront, Eul, and Sank 

EltTatiau, and Horimatal iMtiim >f 

Oamp-proof BamtM Cupboard. 



rif. 1104. 




H 



"^■""■ir:;!,^^' ^-^ ^- ---trcrs s^-~ 



CUPBOARDS. 



appliwl with sn ordiury paint 
hnuAt. The raod« of proceclurfl ii 
u loUowt ;— Harinft carefully nibbed 
down the boe of the woodwork with 
gljuepaper, and dusted over, give the 
work one ooat of ordinary whit»-lead paint. 
When thi* ia dry, apply two or thrwn coati 
of the cream, allowing each coat to get 
perfectly dry and hard before applying the 
next. When the laat coat ii quite dr> and 
hard, take aome WiUesden three-ply paper 
and cover the whole of the interior with it, 
hanging the paper in the uiual way with 
strong paste. The edges of the paper are 
prevented from coming away by fixing 
roonded filleta along the edges and in the 
anfles, aa shown in the detail illustrations. 
The following is the table of quantities :— 



BtilM 4 

Roila 4 

ikn 4 

MoukUng* I 



Stop 



' MouAllon 
( Stilet 



Miutiu 'i 

P«nela 6 

Pot boud 1 

Top 1 

Plinth 1 

Comioe 1 

FUbt 1 

Top Rail I 

Fillrt 2 



10 B 



1 'J i 



All th« mKteriul 
to b« yellow 
dml. qwcinlly 
aelflotvU for 
MUininK and 
varuiahtnit. Tha 
whole of the 
deal to be 
wrought, aud to 
hold the fiiU 
nominal tbick- 
iiPM and width. 
j The iniide «>( nil 
< friimitig, ezGvut 
dunn>. will >>«• 
' covertHl with 

E]wr. and tutut 
fliwh f mmed 
' ami nnoathad 
with tha jack 




Fir HOT. 



-Tartlcal ;S*etloB throuh 
of Hanass OtipboarC 



Upper Part 



Uortice latch, left htiixl. 
Braiw-iiei'ktHl barrel UoUn. 
Super Jin/, t-'leur aheot tftaiw. 
.Sup*TWillB»ilt>n3-plypiiiier. 
Coct^utric citti:li and htttidli). 



Figs. 1101 to 1104 are reproduced to a 
scale of I in. to the foot, and Figs. U05 to 
1108 to 4 in. to the foot. 

Corner Pedestal Cupboard. 

As the cupboard illustrated in Fig. 1109 
is intended to be painted, deal will serve 




rig. 1108.— Vertical SMtion through Lowtx Put 
of Oapboard Doon and PUnth. 



\rj 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



11 




Pig. ll09.-Connr Pedartil OnpboKd. 





tit. 1111. -Door of CouT Ptdntal CupbMni. 



Fig. 1113.— HoilsonUl Section of Cornor Pedeital 
Cupboard. 



Fig. Ills.— Section of MooldiBg 1 
PedeitU Cnpboud Door. 




Pig. 1110.— Side Piece of doner Pedeital Cnpbou'd. 



CUPBOARDS. 



321 





T\g. 111&— Front ElOT&tltm of Dresi Cupboard Hg. 1116.— Tvrtlcal Soetkm of Onu CnplMard 
fmr Btdroom Hmom. for Bedroom Booms. 



m^>^'>^\>>M^wCi>^^>>-^>>>m^ 




Fig. 1116.— Boriioiital Stotion of OrtH Oapboard for Bodroom BotOM. 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



mM 





E 



CUPBOARDS. 



as material. The back is made of two 
pieces of ^-in. board, 2 ft. 2^ in. long, 
one 1 ft. wide, and the other wider by § in. 
to allow for the overlap at the comer. These 
are screwed together and t< the side pieces, 
one of which is shown separately at Fig. 1 1 10. 
These side pieces are of }-in. stufi, of the 
same length as the back boards, and 4 in. 
wide. The front edge k of each is splayed 
ofE BO that the door (Fig. 1111) and front 
strips may lie flat. Fig. 1110 also shows 
the arrangement of the moulded ornament 
on these bide pieces. The back and aides 
are braced together in their lower parts by 



being screwed to the cupboard bottom, which 
Is of J-in. board, and which is placed so that 
the door closes against one-third of its 
thickness. The front strip f (Fig. 1109), 
which continues the lines of the d or, is 
also of j-in. board, and is 1 ft. long by 4 in. 
wide. It is fastened on the side pieces, and 
its lower edge is shaped. The upper part is 
held together by the cupboard top, which 
is made of |-)n. stuff. This is screwed down 
on the tops of the back and side pieces, 
and on the upper front strip v, which runs 
above the door, .and is of J-in. board, 1 ft. 
long and 1| in. wide. It is flxed to the side 




Fig. 1119.— HorliDatal Ssetion tliroash Hanging Oomn Oiip1)o.i.*d. 





Fig. 1132.— Section throned OUii of Cupboard Fig. lltS.— Part of IDddle Ball of Cnpboard 

Door. Door. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



pieces, and along its under surface i . (aatened 
a slip of J-in. wood, which projects J in. 
helow its under edge, and against which 
the door closes. A line of moulding, as 
shown, runs along the front of the upper 
edge of the cupboard, and hides the fasten- 
ing-on of the lop piece. Another line of 




Fl;. 11S6. 

moulding runs along the lower part of the 
front, H m. below the door, and shallow 
openings have to be cut through the slightly 
rounded front edges of the back pieces to 
accommodate these mouldings. The middle 
shelf, shown in pUn y„ r,g. 1112, which is a 
section on A B (Fig. Uuiij is of i-in. board. 
and IS fixed 1 /I. above the cupboard bottom. 
For Its support, strips H of j-in. wood 



are fixed to the backs o and sides D. The 
door is a piece of }-in. board, I ft. 9 in. 
high and 1 ft. wide, and on this are bradded 
the slips of moulding (Fig. 1113) which 
form the pattern. These are cut from 
ordinary steam-struck moulding, such as 
may cost about 3s. a 100-ft. run. Ont- 



I 




iw. Ills. 




Tit. IMT. 



ng» im to 1U7.— rmnt HsTatlm, Eoilsanta 
Bsckja, Side Elantion, and VnUcal Saction 
of Cupboard for Antique China. 

side the rectangular figure, pieces of J-in. 
board, cut to shape, are fixed on the i-in, 
base, the upper and lower ones crossing 
Its grain at right angles. The space within 
the central diamond is filled in the same 
manner. In painting this cupboard, the 
mouldciKs, Ptc, may be kept of a darker 
shade than the other parts, but this is 
much a matter for private taste. Fig. 1109 



CUPBOARDS. 



82& 



is to no exact scale, but Figs. 1110. 1111, 
and 1112 are 2 in. •» the foot, and Fig. 1113 
is half size. 

Dress Cupboard for Bedroom Recess. 

A diess cupboard is shown in front eleva* 
tion by Fig. 1114. Fig. 1115 is a horizontal 
section (enlarged) of the cupboard, and 
shows the shape of the recess. First pre- 
pare the front of clean yellow deal 1| in. 
thick and about 2 in. wider than the recess. 
If a ready-made door is used, the opening 



fix the ledges b, 9 in. wide and 1 in. thick, 
in a similar manner, and fit in the shelf 
so that the outside edge is flush with the 
ends. Fix the front in position, screwing 
to the ledges, the floor and skiiting, and 
to the angle block c (Figs. 1115 and 1U6} 
behind the stile d (Fig. 1115). Ascer- 
tain by how much the cornice overhangs, 
and prepare and fix the top so that the 
rounded outfidc edge projects 1 in. all round. 
The wide bead e is then scribed to the wall 
and skirting, and bradded to the stile f to 





Fig. li28.-HaiiglBff StUt and 

Angle Foi^< of Cupboard (or 

Antlqo* China. 



Fig. 1139.— Falling StU* 

and Angla Post of CUna 

Cupboard. 



Fig. 1181.— DetaU of 

Bar for China 

Cupboard. 




Fig. llSO.~Baok Angl« (tf 
China Cupboard. 





Fig. li8a.~8Mtlon of NBcking 
to Frion of China Cupboard. 



Fig. 1138.— Bootlon through 
Base of China Cupboard. 



should be of standard size, showing as 
nearly as possible 4} in. margin all round. 
With a very wide recess, folding doors would 
be used. Brace the front securely and 
offer it up. Adjust the head level and 
scribe to the floor, and then scribe the 
stile D to the wall and skirting. Prepare 
and fix the ledges a (Fig. 1116) 4^ in. wide 
and 1 in. thick round the recess, level 
with the top, allowing the ends to project 
the thickness of the skirting. Use 3-in. floor- 
brads for nailing to brickwork, and, in the 
case of a kth-and -piaster partition, fed 
for the studs with a bradawl, and screw 
to them with .^-in. screws. For the shelf. 



hide the joint and the end of the rait tenon 
and to make a neat finish. The cornice 
is then mitered round and fixed with 1^-in. 
oval wire brads to angle blocks o (Fig. 
1116), glued round under the top. Then 
hang the door to the stile d, using 3-in, 
butts. The shelf acts as a stop, but, if 
thought necessary, a common stop may be 
nailed to the floor. Treat the cupboard to 
harmonise with the surrounding, and 
then provide and fix the necessary door 
furniture and also the dress hooka, which 
arf snresred to the ledges B aa required. 
If the cupboard is intended only aa a tem- 
porary fixture, the use of screws as described 



■ 

I 

I- 
f 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



is ad\i»ed, bat for a psraianent fixture 
ni.iling would make a better job. 

Hanginc Corner Cupboard. 

The corner cupboard shown in elevation 
by Fig. 1117, in vertical section by Fig. 
1118, and in horizontal section by Fig. 




11 



Tig. lue. 



1119, should preferably be executed in a 
dark, rich-coloured wood, such as mahogany 
or Italian walnut. The chief dimensions 
are : Width across front. 3 ft. 10 in. ; width 
of sides, 2 ft. ; central depth, 1 ft. 8} in. ; 
returns, 5 m. ; and height over all, 3 ft. 1 in. 
The top shelf is of J-in. stuff, the bottom 
shelf of 1-in. stuff, and the middle shelf of 
8-m. stufl. The sides are j-in. boards, 
glued up to the width required, and may 



be of pine stained to match the remainder. 
The door standards are IJ in. square, and 
the doors themselves are of 1-in. stuif. 
The return ends are of j-in., and the shaped 
top plinth and the fretted brackets are 
of |-in. wood. These two members are 
dowelled or screwed » the carcase, and the 



^ 


^W\ 


- 1 


''1 ikii'l 
IP 




\i mi 

M f] 

J'// 


i 


1 


i 


i 


V. 


'^*i^ 


m 


1 




1 






{___} 


—t. 



Fig. USD. 

Figs. 11S4 to I13<.— Froat and Bide ElevaUrai 

and Horlstmtal Ssctloo of Ornamental Wall 

CnpboanL 



return ends are housed into the top and 
bottom shelves J in. and bradded, as shown 
m Figs. lliO and 1121, the top ends being 
preferably dovetail-housed from the back, 
as shown by the dotted lines. The sides 
of the carcase can run over the edges of 
the top and bottom, and be nailed directly 
thereto, as shown in Fig. U18. The 
standards should he tennnwi, foi-wed-'ed 
at the top, and through-wedged at the 



CUPBOARDS. 



am 



bottom, and the inner thelf may rest 
on bearers (not shown). The doors, made 
with shaped rails in the upper panels, are 
rebated for glass, and left square in front, 
as shown in Fig. 1122. The lower panels 
are left square. The rebato for the bevelled 
edge glass panels is formed with a )-in. 
boTection ogee moulding and a f-in. glazing 
bead. Fig. 1123 shows how the joints in 
the middle rails are made, a -rV'in. mortice 
and tenon being used to secure them. 
The meeting stiles of the doors are square, 
a |-in. planted bead covering the joint. 
Fig. 1119 is a section on ab (Fig. 1117), 
Fig. 1118 being a section on D D (Fig. 1119). 



Figs. 1117, 1118, and Ill9 are to a scale 
of 1} in. to 1 ft., and the remainder are half 
full aire. 

Cupboard for Antique China. 

The cupboard shown in front elevation 
by Fig. 1124 is intended to be made of 
mahogany, with plats-glass panels in the 
front and side lights. The door is hung with 
ornamental brass hinges, and iu fitted with 
a brass lock and ornamental drop handle. 
The f rieie is decorated with short Autings and 
sunk patere. The elliptical panel in the 
pediment is worked in low relief, and the 
scrolls are farmed with the V-tool, the cornice 




Fif. 1187.— Horlsoatal Section of Door and Side 
of OmanunUl Cupboard. 





Fig. 11S8.— Top Front Comer of Cupboard. 



^S.x- i 



Fig. 1140.— SMtlon of 

Moulding to form Pasol 

on Cupboard. 




Fig. Ills.— Top Back Comer of Cupboard. 



Fig. liu.— Cupboard Sbilf with Plusll 
Edging. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHY. 



over the ptdiment being deutilled. Fig. 
1125 repreMBti a horifontal section above 
the bottom tail of the door on line A A (Fig. 
1124). The angle pieoei near the door 
are provided with a groove and hook joint to 
prevent duat entering the cupboard, the 
back angles being rebated to receive the 
backboard. The backboard may be framed, 
or if preferred it can bo one plain board only. 
Fig. 1126 is a aide view of the cupboard, and 
Fig. 1127 a vertical section. The iniide 
of the cupboard is fitted »ith four shelves, 
i in. thick, and moulded on the front edge. 
The details of the cupboard are illustrated 
as follows :— Fig. 1128 is the angle poet 
and hanging stile of the door ; Fig. 1129 
the angle post and ' lling stile of the door, 
with the hook joint ; Fig. 1130 the back 
angle showing the glass panels, which are 
secured with coloured hard stopping on 
the inside ; Fig. 1131 the section of the 
bars for the door and aide lights ; Fig. 
1132 an enlarged detail of the necking to 
the feieie upon which the pediment is 
built, and Fig. 1133 shows the base enlarged. 
The phtte-ghsB panels should be i in. thick, 
and the woodwork, if light, should be toned 
down to represent Spanish mahogany, and 
frenoh-pohshed. 

Ornamental Wall Cupboard. 

Fig. 1134 illustrates the front elevation 
of a small cupboard, made in polished 
wahiut or mahogany, fiied to the wall with 
brass plates, or screwed through the back 
to wall plugs. Fig. 1135 shows a side eleva- 
tion, and Fig. 1136 a sectional plan. The 
following pieces of timber are required :— 
For the top, 1 ft. 9 in. by 9i in. by j in. ; 
bottom, 1 ft. 9 in. by 9J in. by ( in. ; two 
sides, 2 ft. 5 in. by SJ in. by | in. ; back, 
H ft. by 6 in. bv J in. ; two door stiles, 2 ft. 
5 in. by 3| in. by | in. ; two door rails, 1 ft. 
2J in. by 2 in. by j in. ; door nosing, 10 ft. 
by f in. by J in. ; folding rebate sUp, 8 ft. 
by ,», in. by ,', in. ; glass fixing slip, 7 ft. 
by i in. by J in. ; top scroll, 1 ft. 6 in. by 
H in- by I >>>■ ; bottom scroll, 1 ft. 6 in. by 
6i in. by j in. ; and moulding for diamond 
panel, 4 ft. 3 in. by f in. by A in. The 
sides of the cupboard are rebated at the back 
edges to receive the back, which is of J-in. 
stufi, placed orossways of the carcase, glued 



and pinned in the rebate, the joints of the 
boards being grooved and tohgued. The 
face edges of the sides are ornamented 
with a moulding, shown in section by Fig. 
1 137. The top and bottom of the onpboard 
are similarly moulded, being fixed to the 
sides by acrews either from the top or from 
the under side. A fillet ,V in. by VV in. is 
grooved into the framework ( in. on, to 
form the folding rebate for the door, as 
shown in Figs. 1138 and 1139. The scroll 
at the top and bottom is cut from |-in. stufl, 
and the panelling is (with a carver's punch) 
cut I in. deep and decorated, and is glued 
and screwed into a rebate in the top and 
bottom, as shown in section in Fig. 1139. 
The diamond panel on each end of the cup- 
board is formed with a moulding J in. by 
i', in., shown in section by Fig. 1140 ; this 
can bo worked with a router or moulding 
pUnes. 

Cupboard Door.— The door is of fin. stu«, 
cut to the shape shown in Fig. 1134 with a 
band-saw. The stiles are 3J in. wide at 
the joint, and 2 in. at the widest part of the 
sweep. The rails are 2 in. wide at the 
shoulders, and IJ in. wide at the narrow 
part. The rebate for the glass can be cut 
with a router, after which the piecea should 
be framed together with secret moriices 
and tenons, wedged and glued. The nosing, 
I in. by } in., is pinned in the opening aa 
shown in Figs. 1137 and 1138. It can be 
worked in a straight length, and then soaked 
m hot water for an hour or so, when it can 
easily be bent into the shapes required. In 
the small comer circles it will be necessary 
to cut one or two small saw-kerfs on the 
inner aide of the nosing to help in bending. 
The nosing also forms part of the glass 
rebate. The glass is », in. or i in. thick, 
and fixed with a slip i in. by { in., shown 
m section in Figs. 1137 and 1138. The door 
18 hung with 2J-in. brass butt hinges, and 
is closed with a brass lever lock. 

Completing the Cupboard.— The interior 
of the cupboard is lined with plush, green 
and dark red being suitable colours. This 
is fixed with thin glue, brushed lightly 
and evenly ove- the woodwork, and the 
plush pressed against it. In pressing out 
the creases, place a sheet of tissue paper 
over the plush. The comers of the ^;up- 



CUPBOARDS. 



board will look well if finished with )-in. 
or 1-in. plu«h roll. For the diiplay ol 
china and small curios it will be necesstry 
to provide one or two shelves, which should 
be I in. thick, and fitted with clips, to 
enable them to be fixed at various distances. 
The shelves should be covered with plush, 
as shown in Fig. 1141, the fancy edging 
being glued to the slip which fits into the 
groove on the under side of the shelf. 

Cupboard nnd Drawers for Reccn. 

Figs. 1142 to 1145 show a recess with 
drawers in the lower portion and a cup- 
board above them. The recess illustrated 
is 6 f» 6 in. high, 2 ft. 10 in. wide. The 
illustrations show fully the principal parts of 
the construction, and will serve the purpose 
better than a lengthy description. In the 
following will be found the miin features. 
The first part to construct will he the frame- 
work for the drawers, comprising the lower 
portion. The two stiles A and B (Fig. 
114-i), and the bottom and two intermediate 
rails, are housed together as illustrated at c, 
(Fig. 1146), whereas the joint at B (Fig. 
1112), between the top rail and side, should 
be dovetailed together as shown at Fig. 
1147. The runners e (Pigs. 1146 and 1148) 
should tenon into the front rails v ; and if it 
is desired to have panels to separate the 
spaces between the drawers, the runners 
and rails should be ploughed. Next, the 
rails and stiles should be fixed togetlier and 
then fastened temporarily to the sides of 
the recess. Fillets o (Fig. 1148), about 
I in. thick and 3 in. wide, should be pre- 
pared and cut so as to fit close against the 
back wall. The runners should next be 
cut ofi true to length, and to the l)ack edges 
of these the fillets should be nailed. Now 
the front should be taken out, the runners 
attached to it, and the whole pushed into 
the recess. The runners should be care- 
fully adjusted so that they are quite hori- 
zontal, and the fillet may be nailed to the 
wall. After this the front should be fixed 
to the sideii i>f the recess. To make a good 
job, two brick joints on each side should 
be found, and small plugs driven in. To find 
the joints without damaging the plastering, 
drive in a moderately fine bradawl. The 
top of the drawers, which also forms the 



Imttom of the cupboard, has a rounded 
edge ; it should next be prepared and fixed. 
The material for the drawers should be 
got ready, the fronts being carefully fitted 
to the case. Then the sides and back are 
prepared and set out for dovetailing, 
which should be done in the usual manner. 
There is a lap-dovetailed joint between the 
front and side. After the drawers are fitted, 
guide strip 1 should bo prepared to go 
between the runner and fillet as shown in 
Fig. 1148, and a piece of skirting or plinth 
should be fixed to the bottom. The con- 
struction of the upper frame to receive the 
doors is quite simple. The joint between the 
head piece and stile is shown at Fig. 1149, the 
head piece serving as a top member to the 
cornice. The appearance of this framing 
will be much improved if a bead is worked 
on so as to break the joint between it and 
the doors. This framing should be fixed 
to the sides of the recess in a similar manner 
to the lower framing. A piece of suitable 
moulding should be fixed so as to form a 
cornice, and fillets K, L, and M (Fig. 1144) 
should be prepared and nailed to the sides 
of the recess to receive the shelves ; for the 
doors, the stiles and rails require mortising 
and tenoning together. The stiles and 
rails should next be ploughed for the 
panels ; then, when these are prepared, 
the parts should be fitted together. The 
joints should be glued, cramped, and 
wedged ; and after the glue is dry, the stiles 
and rails should be planed flush. The 
appearance of the doors will be improved 
if a small panel moulding is mitered and 
bradded in. Next, rebate the doors together 
as shown in Fig. 1142, and fit th m in the 
opening, hanging them with 3-in. wrought- 
iron butt hinges. Finally, suitable drop 
handles and locks should be fixed on the 
drav/ers, and also a knob, lock, and bolt 
to the doors. 

Collapsible Cupboard. 

A collapsible cupboard, opened out for use 
as shown Ijy Figs. 1150 and 1151, occupies 
a space of about 3 ft. 4 in. by 1 ft. lOJ in. by 
1 ft. 3 in. ; then, when closed up, as illus- 
trated at Figs. 1152 and 1153, it occupies 
a space of 3 ft. 4 in. by I ft. luj in. by 5 in. 
The thickness of the wood shown in the 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



illuittatiom i« 1 in. ftnishwl, except the panel, 
which would be about j in. It will be leen 
that the front, (idea, and back ate hiagnl 
and fitted together with rebatea and alao 
beadi to break jointa and improve the ap- 
pearance. The top and bottom ate houaed. 



and rebated at the back edn, lo that the 
front, aides, and back fit into them ; and thus, 
when the several parts are opened out and 
fitted together and secured by a few hooks 
and eyes or similar fastenings (or even a few 
screws) fixed on the inside, the whole is 



lii 




Fifffl. liM to IIM.— Front EltTation, 

Horliontal Section, and Vertical 

Section of Cupboard and 

Draven for Beceii. 



CUPBOABDB. 



.-HI 




m. lt««.— ltU>, rnat Ball, ud aumar of 
Oapboard Fltnaat. 





ni. lUT.-DoraUUid Jdat at D (Fl|. liaa). r^. ii4B._a«und Tlaw st Cupboard i 

Diann tor Koeaaa. 




Pig. 1148.— BtUe. Front Bail, Bonner, and Fillet 
of Cupboard Fltmont. 



Fig. IIM.— Jolntt in Uppor Framing of 
Cupboard Fitment round Doort. 



333 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBV. 




Flf. UM.-<MI>pilbl< Cspboud whin in Dn. 




Pig. 1151. -Jut HotiionUl tketlon of ColU|Mibl> Ouplmml. 



CtTPBOARDB. 



»a 



Krmly hekl togathrr. Tho rab>tn and 
houni<K> alw nrrvf to nuke tha rupbiMnl 
more iliut-proof. Tbe objert of the Allet 
markxcl A (Figi. ll.V), 1154. and l|.">). 
aM will he leen, ia to allow o( the top and 
bottom folding back thrauRh an angle of 
L'70 degreea. The aiiea, of coune, have 



to be varietl to auit prrticular rirruiii- 
itancfR, and the partirular kind of wood 
to )m* uaeil in largelv a matter of rhotre. 
Portable abelvei could l>e made to lit into 
thf <^uphoanl in auch a way that they could 
be taken out. or ntiaed or lowered aa re* 
quired ; the ahelvea would reat upon amall 




n|. nil.— Fnnt Tiaw of CeUapalbla Capboard Fix. lUS.- Baak Tiaw el OcUapalbla Capboaid 



(raldad). 



I.FoMtd). 




..r 



rii. 11B4. 



Fl(. lltD. 




Tign. IIH and IIBB.— Fart Saetlona throosh Back, 

Top. aad Baagmg Filllt of CoUapUUa Fig- 110».-Part Horiioiiial Btclion ol Collapallila 

Cupboard. Capboard (FoUod). 



II 



334 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



turned buttoni, in holes bored in the sidei, 

; ;] BB in bookshelf work. Pig. 1151 shows an 

] i 1 enlarged part of horizontal section (opened), 

■ ? and Fig. 1186 an enlarged part of horiiontal 

! j section (folded). 

1 1 Linen Cupboard. 

!,. If Linen cupboards tboold be made of good 

, [ ! I yellow deal, sound, dry, and free &om 

4 large knots and shakes and other defects. 

' >; The shelves are of Christiania white deal. 



of good quality. Pigs. 1167 to 1161 are 
phins and elevations of a linen cupboard. 
Set out on a rod, full sins, the width of 
the f.-ont (see Pig. 10S8), and the height as 
shown in Pig. 1160; and set out on the 
same side of the rod, parallel with the 
front, the width o{ the division t» the 
cupboard. The rod having been oarefolly 
set out, take off the quantity of material 
required, namely : Stile frame, two 9 ft. 2 in. 
by 4J in. by 2 in. ; one 9 ft. 2 in. by 6 in. 



: 






i 
i 
i 

i 



Tig. 11B7. 



^'1 I '" I L "J — T"— 

innr 

-I— ,_ 




Fig iim. 



Figs. HIT to use.— Fnat Bavation, 
Horixonttl Section, ind Side 
Eleratloii of Lintn Cupboard. 



Fig. list. 



■et:^ f 



CDPBOABDS. 



835 




Fig. IIM.— LangitndtauU Vaitical Section of 
Linen Cupboard on Line AB (Fig. llM). 



Fig. IIM.— Enlarged 

Part Horiiontal 8eo- 

tion of Cnpboerd (eee 

F, Fig. IIM). 



Fig. 1161.— Croea Vertical Ueetion of Linen 
Cupboard on Line C D (Fig. 1169). 





—Angle Joint in Linen Onpboard 
(iee E. Fig. IIM). 



Fig. 1110.- -flection ol 

Hook RaU (eee L, 

Fig. lieo). 



Fig. 1169._DetaU of 
Linen Cupboard 
Cotnice (eee M, 
Fig. HOT). 



IH 



il 



33H 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



U 



IK 

58 



[ :}■ 



by 2 in. Door, four 8 ft. 10 in. by Sf in. by 
2 in. Framing for door, two 2 ft. (i in. by 
^ in by 2 in. Top rails of frame, one 5 ft. 
J in. by 3i in. by 1 J in. Top rails of doors, 
two 2 ft. S in. by 3} in. by 2 in. Prieie 
rails, two 2 ft. r, in. by Ij in. by 2 in. Rails 




fig. use.— Cron gMUoa 

of Linsn Copboord OonUu 

(»• J, Flj. 1160). 




H«T.— T«Uo«l 
of Llntn 
Cnpboard Framing 
(••» K, Pig. iieo). 



which is taken to the outter-out, who gets 
out the material required, which is then 
marked, brought to the saw to be cut to the 
required size, then taken on to the phining 
machine to be faced and edged, then on 
to the three-cutter machine to bo thick- 
nessed and taken to width. The material 
with the quantity sheet, should then be 
placed in a convenient position for the setter- 
out. It is only necessary to- set out one 
rail or muntitt of each length. In large 
and busy mills it is usual to face-mark 
each piece of wood, adding in each case the 
number of the job, otherwise the stuff 
might get mixed. The rails are then taken 
on (» the tenon machine. The mortices 
for the muntins are marked after the 
rails have been shouldered and tenoned 
One rail of each kind should then be marked 
for haunching They are usually cut with 
the handsaw, on the table of which a fence 
IS fixed, to obviate the necessity of marking 
each rail separately. Set out the stiles 
for mortising, and gauge each stile, mark- 
ing on each the number of the job, and the 
sight-Une of the rails. The job is then 
taken to the spindle for moulding and 
grooving. The position of the stop on the 
stile should be marked as shown in F'g. 11 (i2 
Then trace off the n. . -r details of the 
work from which the machin •■ pre 

pare the cutters for the mooloings and 
beads, and mark also the position of fh<- 



ri»- iissi— Fnmt 

of Angle of Uoen 

Cupboard. 




rif llM.-»art ■oriiotal 



of doors, four •> ft. r, in. by ii in. by 2 in. Top 
rail framing, two 2 ft. 5 in. by 4} in. by 
2 in. Bottom rail framing, two 2 ft. 5 in. hy 
ii in. by 2 in. Muutius, four 2 ft by 4i in 
by 2 in. ; (»o 1 ft. 8 in. by 4} in. by 2 in • 
two 1 ft. .-, in. by 4} in. by 2 in. Panel,s, eight 
1 it. 9 m. by « in. by J in. ; four I ft. .3 in 
by 9 in. by j in. ; four 1 ft. ,5 in. by 9 in 
by j in. Cornice, one 17 ft. by ,-iJ in. bv 2 in 
These quantities are set out on a 'sheeti 



»«««• 1 Uh> Smtoaid Dom. ste. 

(■•• O, Fig. 1188). 

grooves for panels. The work, havinu 
been milled, is ready for the joiner to pnf 
together. The doors, end framing, an.l 
division, should be put together and allow,,! 
to stand for a time to dry. Each panel 
should be left i in. wider than the full 
dimension required. The panels of fhp 
framing in the linen cupboard are Hush 
inside as shewn >. Pigs. IIB.3 and illM. 
I he shelves m the linen cupboard should 




'tKu'. 



t- 1 




!J », 



'-;•:*■' 



W^' 



i:z^^j>:r£: 



CUPBOARDS. 



337 



be framed to the nize of the opening, and 
fixed on 2-in. by 1^-in. chamfered bearers, 
as shown in Fig. 1158 by dotted lines, and 
in FigA. 1160 and 1161. The rail for the 
hooks in the hanging cupboard is shown 
in Fig. 1165. It is screwed on to the divi- 
sion and end, the screws being arranged 
80 as to be hidden under the hooks. After 
the work has stood for a time, the framing 
for the front ends and division is glued up. 
The |-in. panels in doors and framing 
should be I in. narrower than the required 
width, while the l|-in. panels in the hang- 
ing cupboard are got to the exact length 
and width, allowing ^V in. all round for the 
tongue, as shown in Fig. 1164. Glue up 
the frame of the cupboard, and fix a stretcher 
at the bottom. Screw on the inside of 
the cupboard, the exact width of the open* 
ing at the top, and glue in the frame tongue 
as shown in Fig. 1166. Level ofi the doors, 
framing, and dinslon. The doors and 



framing should be reltated as shown in 
Figs. lUi:J and 1167. Fix in the two 
top framings, and fix the bead on the 
bottom edge of the rail, and mitre it into 
the frame stile. Qlue and brad on as shown 
in Fig. 1 1 67. The two doors should then be 
fitted ami hung with 3j-in. wrought-iron 
butt hinges, as shown in Fig. 116.'i. In 
gluing up the end framing it is advisable to 
glue a block about 6 in. long on each stile, 
opposite each rail, to take the shoe of the 
cramp or cleat, and to screw each tenon from 
inside the framing. After the doors are 
hung and the end is fitted on, the edge 
of the division being shot straight and 
fitted into the groove as shown in Fig. 1164, 
the work is primed, knotted, and stopped. 
OiUy the edges of the shelves should be 
painted. It may be said that Fig. 116H 
IS an enlarged detail at g (Fig. 1158), and 
that Fig. 1169 is a detail of the moulding 
on the angle. 



I 



BRACKETS. 




0«k Wall BrackM. «''• Tli« mouldings a and b (see section 

Fios. 1170 and 1171 «re fm„t »„H .ij. *' '^^ "' '"'K*'" »' ordinary gold 
Views „, a wan .^J^^^^l:^ ^^ITZ^r^''^^^ -f^- 




Fl(. IITO. 



Tig. 117J. 
Flgi 1170 and 117:,-7.<n.t and Sido ElmUnu of Oak W.U BraokM. 



BXACXXTS. 



3i» 



ordinary fUt goM tliin. The bmclcpt nidcs 
•M 81 in. by 2} in. by J in. Wlwn (miiiheil, 
they are secured to two pieces oj oak at the 
front and back, aa ahown at Pigs. U72 
and 117.3, the Utter being an underneath 
plan ; these pieces are 2i in. wide, and of 
any suitable thickness. The fretted front, 
which is vV in. thick, should be cut to the 
pattern shown in Fig. 1170. After this 
has been bradded in position, the j-in. wide 
gold slip should be cut and fitted to form 
a diamond, inaidc of which is a turned 
centre ornament (see also Figs. 1171 and 
U72). The top of the bracket is 7 in. 
by 4) in. by 1 in., and is cut away at the 
comers as shown in Fig. 1172, a rebate 
I in. wide and deep being then cut around 
the bottom edges. In this rebate the J-in. 
moulding is secured, after being correctly 
jointed. Screw the top in position, letting 
the screw-heads down J in. and plugging 
the holes. Then mitre and fix the j-in. 
moulding around under the top, as shown. 
Next fix a mitersd strip of oak Jin. thick by 
I in. wide close up under the moulding 
so as to protect it. Cut the flower-shaped 
side ornaments from ,',-in. stuff, and brad 
in position; then turn the IJ-in. bosses 
to go on them, and the finials under the 
front, 1 in. in diameter, the front centre 
boss, 1 in. in diameter, and the tour VV'"- 
front buttons. A small pin is tunsed 
underneath each boss and knob, thus 
enablingjthem to be aecured by gluing in 




rig. I17«.-V«rtlcal 8«»liiii cf 
Oak WaU Braokst 




ng. liu— OadsniaMh Plan of Oak Wall Bracket 



■ill 



CABINE'mOKK AND JOINERY. 




H 



BBAOXETS. 



.:M1 



holes bored to wc«ve them. Now raitie 
and fix the J-in. wide gold dip arron 
the lower part of the front and aidea. Pii. 
1173 ahowa how the joints of the mouldini 
are to be cut. A thin coat of ahellau 
apint Tamiah brushed over the gold mould- 
ings and slipa, after flxiug them, will pro- 
tect them from wear in cleaning the bracket. 
It should be said, though, that varnish 
tends to make gilding look brassy. 

Wall Bracket with Mirrors and 
Revolving Qlaas CablncU. 

The wall brocket shown in front elevation 
by Fig. 1174 can be ni«de of anv suitable 
dark hardwood ; if mi ". of .American pine 
it would l)e best stained a dark colour. 
Pig. 1173 is 3 side elevation with the re- 
volving cabinet partly broken away to show 
the pillar, and Fig. 117(i a horizontal sec- 
tion. The body is made of 2-in. by J-in. 
st^ff, and is 2 ft. 9 in. wide and 1 ft. i in. 
deep, with two pieces fixed 7J in. ^om 
the outside ends. To these a centre 
rail is secured, forming divisions for four 
mirrors. All the inside parts of the 
body should be rebated i in. back and 
i m. deep to take the mirrors (see the 
horiiontal section. Fig. 1176). The outside 
edges can be beaded with ,',-in. bead if 
desired. The top and bottom shelves are 
■?. ft. 9 in. by 7J in. by i in., cut to the shape 
sho-vn in Fig. 117(i. The centre shelf is 
shorter than the others, namely, 1 ft. 6 in. 
by 'i in. by J in., being cut ofl to the 
lines * A (Fig. 1 17B). Holes J in. in diameter 
must he made for the pillar ends, and the 
top and bottom shelves are recessed J in. 
deep, 1} in. in diameter, with a j-in. hole 
for the dowel plate. The turned pillars 
are lij in. long, tapered from IJ in. to 1 in. 
in diameter. The end of one pillar is 
turned j in. in diameter, 1 in. long, to 
pass through the centre shelf into the 
top of the other pillar. The other eud« 
are J in. in diameter for a distance of 
J in. The four turned pilla; tops or knobs 
are then secured with fine cabinet screws. 
The shelves can bo fastened to the body 
with screws from the back. A suitable 
top B (Fig. 1174) can be fast*.,ed to the 
body if desired. 



Revolving Cabinets.— The dowel and socket 
joints for the rcvclving cabinets are of 
brass. The flanne is 1) in. in diameter and 
i in. thi'k, with holes for the screwa to 
secure them in position; the dowel is 
1 in. in diameter and } in. long. The 



rif. IITT. Ttt. liu. 

Fifs. IHT aid llTt.— Dswil and Seekst Joint 
for RevolTiiig Cabfnsti of Braokst 




Pig. 1179.— fart Borlsontal SacUoa of Brackot 
CaUnot. 





Fl(. IMO. 



Fits, luc and 1181.— 

Datails of Upright aad 

Sholvei for Bracket 

CaUaat. 



333 



Fig. lias.- Sinliig 
Catch for Door of 
Brackot Cabinet 



socket is recessed to take the dowel (see 
Figs. 1177 and 117S). The two cabinets 
are J in. shorter than the distance between 
the top and the bottom shelves. The 
tops and the IwtUims of the cabinets are 
7 in. in diameter, J in. thick, and rebated 
back i in. deep to forma hexagon, and .'ij in. 
across the slips (see Fig. 11711). The four 



l:'l' 



i 



Mi 



upngliUi ,« I ft. ij in. |o„ ,^ ^ 
»ct«.n (F.g U7»); two upright, for 
tli.door .n Ift. IJiB,, nude to th. Motion 
D, th. ends being nKJiitd by a mortico. 
•nd-tonon joint. Hu two dMlm an 



CABINET^'OBK AKD joineby. 



cabinet, and an held in poiition by bwdinc 
i in. bv vV in. Th. tMxat door iillt: 
0| m. by 3i in. i th. taib bong of J-in. 
Jy .*>• "«*• Tl" gl«» bt Moh door i> 
Sit u. by 2f in. The door raib thoiOd be 




equal distances apart, and 5} in. acioss the 
slips hemgonal in shape, and 4 in. Aick, a 
suitable rebate being nwde in the up- 
rights (see Figs. 1180 and 1181). Secure 
the shelves to the uprights before fixing 
the cabinets together. Five pieces of glass, 
1 tt. oj in. by 2| in., are required for each 



beve led to fit against the uprights. Two 
small hinges, a knob } in. in diameter and 
I in. lo^ from centre rail, and a small brass 
catch (Fig. 1182) let in the rail, will com- 
plete the door. The brass sockeU for 
revolving the cabinets are secured to the 
tops and bottoms of the cabinets. 



BKAOKZTB 



,-.|. 



■--w^' 




Tit. IIW.— BMtlon of 

Front Eil(a of Bnektt Tit- 118<.— SwAlos > -X 
Support. of Brsokot Bar. 



11 ' 



n 



Flf. IIM.— L/vpteto for Bimokot 



MKROCOPT IBOLUTKM TIST CHART 

(AhtSI and ISO TEST CHART No. 2) 



i.l 



ISIU 


|M 


mj"— 


B^* 


mtii 


■ 2.2 


Sl» 


■■■ 


S L£ 1 


■ 2.0 



111^ 1^^ 



/IPPLIED M/CE Inc 

1651 Eait l*]ifi SIrMi 

BochBitBr. Htm rork H609 USA 

(716) *8I - 0300 - Phon* 

(716) 188- 5MB -Fo. 



■ut 



CABIXETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



Mirror..--lh<! two centre mirrors are 
1 ft. 2 j in. by o J in., pnd the two end mirrors 
behind the cabinets are 1 ft. oj in. by « in 
I how can be held in position by picture 
backing or with strips j in. hy Jin as 
shown in Fig. 11711. 



smooth the edges, then along the front edge 
J ."uY *""""' »' '•■own in Fig. llHr, 
and shghtly round the outer comers. These- 
supports are carved on each side, a simple 
pattern being traced on and carv»d out 4 in 
<" ,', m. deep, the wood between the pat- 




Fig. ii«i. 



Ornamental Bracket with Pillars and 
Carved Supports. 

Fig. 1183 is a part front elevation of a 
bracket from which it will be seen that s, the 
upper part or shelf, is 2 ft. 6 in. by 9 in. bv 
1 m the edges being beaded to relieve the 
thickness ; this also gives an ornamental 
finish. Having prepared this piece, cut 
out two supports (Fig. 1184), which will be 
best done with a band-saw : clean up and 



Pigl list to 1191.— Ftont and 

Side Slevationi, and Plan 

of Fancy Wall-cupboard 

Bnelcet. 



tern bemg cut away and left to form a 
moulding following the shape of the sup- 
port (see Fig. 1184). The shelf is screwrf 
to the supports with Ij-in. No. 10 screws, 
the screw-heads being well countersunk 
and the holes afterwards filled in Two 
bars B B (Fig. 118.1), i ft. ,3} in. by IJ in 
by i in., pass along the back, and are let 
in flush with the back of the supports (see 
B Fig. 1184) Fig. 118« shows a s^ectioil of 
the bar. These bars have .i j-in. be-ad 



BRACKETS 





PIf. U9«.— Part HotisosUl Sactijii of WaU-eupbmird Bnoket 



Fl(. lUS.— Baction of 
Braokst Fenm Bali 




■f ->l 
Fig. 119«.— SMtlot of Bnoint Onir BtUt. 




Flf. IIM.— Altmutlm Onlgii tar Flllir of Bnekot 



346 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



run along each edge, and a baud of 
carving IJ in. wide run along the face ; 
the pattern may be the same as illua- 
trated, or any pattern could be introduced 
which might be more in accordance with 
the maker s taste. A very good substitute 
would be a bar of carved moulding, which 
could be obtained from dealers in carved 
woodwork, the price of the width here 
shown being about 5d. per foot. Along the 




Tig. im.— Brulnt Frame for ThrM 
Fhotographt. 




the black cases in which stuffed birds 
etc., are usuaUy placed. Four strong brass 
eye-plates (Fig. 118») are used to flu the 
bracket upon the wall ; these are screwed 
to the shelf and bottom bar with j-in. No. 10 
screws, using brass screws throughout. 

Fancy Wall-cupboard Bracket. 

Figs. 1189, 1190, and 1191 illustrate 
respectively, front elevation, end eleva- 



Fif. IIM.— Bracket Frame for Hve Small 
Photsgraplir. 

inner edge of the bars, bore a row of J-in 
holes at IJ-m. centres, to receive the 
dowel ends of the pillars. The bracket 
pillars are turned with dowel ends d 
(see Fig. 1187), and should be glued 
in the two bars of carving before beir^ 
hxed to the supi^orts. The bracket mav 
be made from j,ood dry mahogany or 
walnut, either ^t which will have a hand- 
some appearance when polished, but maho- 
gany would show a better contrast against 




Tig. lI9».~-Conier Bracket for 
Photograplu. 

tion, and plan of a small cupboard bracket, 
made in white wood, stained or enamelled 
or pamied and varnished. It is suitable 
for a drawing-room, and the front panel 
should be embellished with a large floral 
scroll of a running design. The back 
piece B p (Fig. 1192) shouM be made first. 
It consists of j-in. stuff running from 
top to bottom, the two side edges being 
ploughed to fit corresponding grooves in 
the end pieces e p (Fig. 1192). The ends 
are next fitted, using j-in. stuff, with 
plonghed back edge. The top and bottom 



BRACKETS. 



347 



are screwed on, the screw heads lieing 
stopped np and cleaned with glass-paper. 
As shown at Fig. 1191, the top and bottom 
pieces project 3^ ir beyond the ca e, the 
corners being rounded and the edges beaded, 
similar to the fence rail, seen in section (Fig. 
1193). The door is now put together 
by foaming up some 2-in. by |-in. stuff, 
using tenoned joints. A panel |-in. thick 



and one narrow flap, the wide flap reaching 
on to the case, the narrow one taking the 
door. This is nece^itated by the moulding 
not being sufficiently strong for the screws. 
If any difficulty is experienced in pur- 
chasing this type of hinge, get a wide 
hinge, and cut down one flap to the required 
width. A row of holes is now bored along 
the top and bottom, ^ in. diameter, f in. 




Tig. 1200.— BraclMt Fraiu for Thrte 
Photographi. 




Fig. ISOl.— Mlddls Ban of 

bradut Txvaa (im 

Tig. 11*7). 




Fig. ia02. Section of Ltnr«r Part of Corner 
Bracket (see Fig. 1199). 



Tig. laoS.—Part Horixontal 

a«otlons of Corner Bracket, 

showing Top ud Lower 

Shelvei. 




Fig. ISOt.— Joints, 

etc.. In Bracket 

Frame (lee 

Fig. 1300). 



is ploughed in, the surrounding moulding 
being worked on the edges of the stiles 
and rails {see Fig. 1194). The two stiles 
are also beaded, so as to give a finish to 
the end molding when the door is closed. 
When the door has been hung, the ends 
are panelled with a IJ-in. by J-in. moulding 
M (Fig. 1192). This moulding projects 
beyond the front edge the thickness of the 
door, namely, f in, In hanging the door it 
is necessary to use hinges having one wide 



deep, and 1 in. on from the face edges, at 
2-in. centres. These are for the dowel endi 
of the pillars forming the fences. These 
pillars may be similar to the designs given 
in Figs. 1195 and 119G, and can be pur* 
chased ready turned. Glue them in position^ 
and, when dry, touch the re/erse dowel 
end with some paint, and, while this is 
wet, gently lay on the fence rail. By this 
method the exact position for ihc- dnwe! 
holes in the fences will be obtained. As 



'ir^~: 



f|f-r 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



the fence rsila arc only 1 in. by J in it 
i» aihisaWe to have them bent to nha'pe 
which could be done at a trifling cost by 
a bent-umber mtrchant. Should it be 
decided, however, to saw them out the 
best plan will be to get a board, and first 
mark out and bore the dowel holes ; next 



making of the cupboard, which is now 
ready for decorating. A few vases and 
plaques will stand upon the top, and a 
small bowl with a fern growing looks pretty 
on the bottom comer brackets. Use brass 
eye-plates or screws driven through the back 
into wooden wall plugs, to fli it. By in- 




Tig. 1205. -Wall Brackel with Copper FusL 



cut the outside tweep and bead the edge : 
alter it is cleaned up and practically finished 
the inside sweep may be cut. After it is 
cut, the fence must be ver>- gently handled : 
the grain runmng short icross the comers 
renders it hable to be easily broken One 
or two shelves are fitted inside, the dis- 
tance between them being arranged to 
suit rc^mrejnents. This compieles the 



serting a glass panel in the cupboard door 
a cabinet for the exhibition of a few pieces 
of antique china is obtained. 

Photograph Brackets. 

Figs. 1197 to 1200 show designs for photo- 
graph frames with shelves attached That 
I hown by Fig. 1197 is made from fkt'mould- 
mg, and m figured oak looks well when left 



BRACKETS. 



:m 



in the natural colour. If preferred, stained 
or enamelled pine may be usfl. The frame 
is 1 ft. 8 in. wide by HJ in. hinh, and the 
shelf is 3 in. above the 4ame and 2 ft. 1 in. 
by .^J in. wide by J in. thick. The vertical 



of the shelf are secured by screws inserted 
from the back of the frame. The frames 
of th<! comer bracket (Fig. 119ii) are 1 ft. 
10 in. long and lU} in. wide, and arc kept 
in position b/ *he top shelf and the bottom 




Pig. 1307.— aiielf 

Support for 

Bracket. 



Fig. 1309.— Shelf of Bracket (see Fig. iao8). 



bars are 1 ft. 1 in. long, with small terminals 
dowelled and glued to the lower ends. If 
any difficulty is found in rebating the 
middle bars, make them as shown in Fig. 
1201, where a shows a strip of deal let in 
flush with the part of the rebate on which 
the glass bears, and b a thin strip 1 iii. wide 
glued to A. The trusses for the support 



bracket. The screws are driven from the 
inside of the frames, as shown in Figs. 
1202 and 120.^ The wood for the shelves 
should not be leas than J in. thick and 1 ft. 
wide. The frame shown by Fig. 1198 is 1 ft. 
8 in. long, the shelf being 2 ft. 1 in. long 
by 3 in. wide and f in. thick, with a J-in. bead 
round the edges. The height of the frame 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




IS II m. ; IJ-in. moulding is used. The 
pediment it 1 ft. 10} in. long snd .1 in. deep 
in the centre curves. The frame at Pig 
1200 M designed to use short pieces of pic- 
ture moulding. It is 1 ft. 3} in. by 91 in., 
and the shelf is 1} in. above the frame and 
14J in. by 2} in. by J in. thick. The 
mouldmg attached to the front of the shelf 
IB i in. thick. The trusses are 1ft 2 in 
high and 3} in. wide where they join the 
shelf. No gkss is required for this frame. 
Iho mount may be cut from ti-in. or J-in. 
board, and covered with plush or Japanese 
wall-paper. The woodwork may be stained 
and varnished, or enamelled in colours to 
harmonise with the moulding used. The 
method of constructing the frame and 
linng the party is shown bv the sections 
in Fig. 1204. 

Wall BrackeU with Copper Panete. 

The brackets illustrated by Figs. 1"0j 
to 1211 should be made from well-seasoned 
wood, oak being most suitable ; it could 
be stained green, or oiled, as either result 
would harmonise with the copper panels 
As dimensions for the brackets, the follow- 



ing I wr ^ T '■''''' •-^" *^'8«- 12M. 1200, 
and 1207, the back may be lOJ in. br loj in. 
by i in. ; the shelf, (i in. bv 2} in. by 1 in ■ 
and the stay, 1} in. by IJ in.ly } in.* For 
Rgs. 1208, 120y. and I210, the back n«y 

M m. by 2J in. by,} Jn. • and the .tay, 
4}ra.byl}m.by}m. These dimensions are 
taken at the wid«it parts, but the tenons 
on the shelves and stays ate not included, 
fhe outaides of the bevel shown in Figs 
120u and 1208 will be the shape of the 
copper panels, but the ho'-s in the back, 
will be to the inner lines. The panels can 
be made from thm copper in the following 

"'i' 'TVt'^ ""f '»"" ""^ on •he MPPer! 
and sketch m the design. Then go roind 
It with a tracing wheel, and put it on a 
cushion or something soft, and rub it up 
from behind with a modelling tool until 
It IS hke the design. The plate can then 
be pohshed up and fixed at the back (see 
Rg. 1311) and fastened by small pin points, 
after which pUster must be put in to stigen 
It. The bevel can be put on the front 
with a carving chisel, and the rest of the 
bracket msy then be put together. 



WAITERS AND TRAYS. 




Dumb Walter. 

Thk dumb waiter shown in elevation by 
Fig. 1212 should be made in oak or walnut, 
to be in keeping with the furniture of the 
room in which it is to be used. The dimen- 
sions are as follows : Main shelf, 1 ft. 10 in. 
in diameter ; upper shelf, 7 in. ; base. 11 in. 
Height to main shelf, <)| in. ; to upper shelf, 



1 ft. IJ in. Tl'e whdii f the parts atcturneil 
in the lathe. The upper and lower pillars 
are separate, and are jointe<l as shown in the 
enlarged, section (Pig. 12I."J). This joint must 
be perfectly true, and the shoulders turned 
equally true, with just sufficient play between, 
when pulled up tight with the bolt, to allow 
the main shelf to revolve easily. Recesses 
are hollowed in the pillars to receive the 




Tig. 191S. — Frmit Eltvatioii of Dunb Walter. 



Tig. i313.~EiiUrged Vtrtioitl Stctlon 
of Dumb Waiter. 



fig. iai4.— Half Flan of Satcom 
of Dmnb Waiter. 




3M 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINERY. 



' 



head of the bolt and the nut as ahowD. 
The nut ol the bolt ihould be tightened 
up with a box-ipanner. The upper ihelf 
It fixed on the pillnt with glue after the 
lower part haa bpcn put together. A half 
plan of the bottfira ia given at Fig, 1214, 
and a plan of the top pilhir at Fig. 121.-i. 
The base of the lower pillar should be covered 
with baiie to prevent scratching the table. 
The work should be frenchpolished in the 
lathe. The material required is as follows : 
One piece II in. bjr 11 in. by 8J in. ; one 
piece 7 in. by 4 in. by 4 in. ; one piece 1 ft. 
10 in. by 1 ft. 10 in, by IJ in, ; one piece 
7 in. by 7 in, by 1 in, ; one J-in, bolt, 
10 in. betweer iiead and nut. 




Ht. int,-Oak Tray with Copper nttlnii. 

Oak Tray with Copper Fittings. 

The tray shown by Figa, 1216 to 1218 
can be made of any hardwood, oak for pre- 
ference. The size can be varied to meet re- 
quirements, the one illustrated being medium 
Bjie, A section of the moulding for the 
sides is shown in Fig. 1219, and is easily 
made. It should be planed out of one 
length, if pu„sible, and then mitered and 
glued. Each comer can be further secured 
with a nail or screw, which is hidden by 
the copper comer plates. At a distance of 
2J in. from each end, the top of the moulding 
should be rounded on each edge as shown. 
The base, which is a piece of J-in. thick 
figured oak fictwoid, already planed, should 
be neatly rounded on the edges. It projects 
i in. from the sides ail round, and is screwed 
to the sides from underneath. It should 



bo stained or fumed a rich brown, and then 
wax polished. The copper corner pktes 
<?« fm- 12*». which is a half development) 
should be cut from sheet copper ,,'i in. thick 
and look well if hammered all over with the 
ball pene of a small hammer; or they 
can be left pUin. a (Fig. 1221) shows the 
hnished shape of the handles, and B and c 
(Fig. 1221) give sections, the half develop- 
ment being shown by d. These handles are 
s. I. thick, and theyshould be well annealeil 
belore being lient. ThI,* can easilv be 
done by hand, after which they can be 
hollowed over a smooth 1-in, round rod 
held in the vice, or on the handle of a Hat' 
iron, the ears being bent to fit the moulding. 
The fittings should then be pohshed 
and lacquered, and securml to the tray 
with small brass snap-headed screws. 
Figs. 1217 and 121S are reproduced 
to a scale of 3 in. to a foot, and 
Figs. 1219 to 1221 are half site. 

Set of Walters or Trays 
In Oak. 

Figs. 1222 and 1223 show respec- 
tively part plan and elevation of a 
very useful waiter t. at will be found 
much more durable, than japanned 
iron trays. The wood employed, oak. 
must be dry, straight-gr. ined, well 
seasoned, and free from knots ■ od shakes. 
The baseboard B (Figs, 1222, 1-" 1, and 1224) 
is first built up with 4-in, widths of J-in, 
thick stuS, The boards are arranged as 
shown in Fig. 1223, with the grain of each 
board ranning in the reverse direction to ita 
neighbour; the reason for this being that 
the shrinkage of a board is less at the 
butt end than at the branch end, and 
placing the boards as illustrated equaUses 
the shrinkage and prevents splitting and 
twisting. The joints are shot square and 
true, and glued ; they may be further 
strengthened by inserting small dowels 
before the gluing is done. The base-board 
now requires squaring to 2 ft. fi in. long by 
1 ft. 8 in. wide ; a moulding is then worked 
on each edge, a section of which is seen at M 
(Fig. 1224). The fence mouldings are next 
prepared. Two designs for these are given 
in Figs. 1226 and 1227. Each one is worked 
out of stuff H in. square. The timber for 



WAITERS AND TRAYS. 




SET 



J^'J. 



I' 



L (. Mil. 




Fi(. 1317. 
Flgi. ISIT and 191S.— PlKS ud Elevation of Oak Tray vlth Copper Flttlnfi. 




Tig. lait.— Beotion of Moulding 
for Oak Tray. 



Fig. laao.- Half of Conin Plata 
for Oak Tnj. 



\^ 




Fig. 12S1.— ElATation (A), Stctioni (B and C). 

and Half Dartlopmsnt (0) of Tray 

Hat>dl«. 



■JU 



CABINETWOBK AND JOWEBt. 





WAITEB8 AND TRAYS. 



au 




lif. 1134— €toh B«etloil and Put Eltntion of Tnj Hudl«^ 




Tig. .318 — BoATtU for Tn.j onansod in Narrow 
Wldtiia and BoTonod Qxain. 







Tig. 1236.— SmUoq of Fenott Moaldlnf 
for Tray. 



350 



these must be even grained, or difficulty 
will anse in getting out the moulding. 
The fence raouldinga are fixed in position 
^L^X ^^■^^, ^y fi"t gluing them, 
then they are further secured with screws 
driven from the under side (see s. Fig 
1- ). Corner feet pieces are fixed to 
«• the board J in. above the dead level 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



will be the brass supports Ba (Pig r>->4) 
for the handles. A piece of brass rod i in' 
diameter 18 first heated and cooled ; it mav 
wf .u""' "J" ' *•'"• "^°J«' with eas^. 
Zt^ . . ™* ""''*'• '' ■»>■»' 1» Mativ 
fitted to form the eye or ring, and after'- 

nn^L fi?- ^'" °* "■" '»«"' f« 'he 
upnglit and hammer out the flap f (Pig. 1224) 




•>'S<- 

'*- - ■ -■- If— « 

Rg. 12a7.-AltKiiatlT« Seetign 
Iter FenM Naildiiig tor Tray. 



Fig. UM. - Plan. Cation, .m g„u„„ „, j,,^, £,„„„ ^^^ 




««. U»».-BMtion of Itay Handlg and Knob. 



These are shown at Pig. I*>8. Along the 
top outside edge of each a J-in. bend i» 
worked to break the joint ; the corners are 
mitered, and the ends finished with a sweep 
Ihese pieces are glued and screwed to the 
under side of the base-board Jin. in from 
the edges; a piece of thick cloth or felt 
IS afterwards glued to them to prevent 
scratches when moving the waiter on a 
table, etc. The ne.irt part to take in hand 



for the screw holes, which will finish about 
i in. by ^\ m. The brass, having been 
properly annealed, will hammer out told 
without fracturing, but during this opera- 
tion it will probably work hard; the con- 
stant hammering has a hardening efiect 
owing ,j the consolidation of the particles 
of metal. This is remedied by again heat- 
ing, and cooliug til! fini..hr.d. The screw 
holes in the flap must be accurately drilled 



WAITEBS AND TRAYS. 



and countersunk to fit the screw heads, a 
loose fit b-^ing dangerous to the security 
of articles that are carried upon the tray. 
The brass supports, before being fixed, mv-st 
be well pohsbed, or, if preferred, a coat of 
black lacquer may be applied. In fixing 
them use 1-in. No. 8 screws, and let the 
flaps into the moulding flush with the top 
»urface. The handle h (Fig. 1224) is a 
piece of ebony or oak turned to give a 
good grip for the hand. It tapers from 
1 in. diameter in the middle to J in. diameter 
at each end, and is shouldered and reduced 
to ^ in. diameter to fit the hole in the brass 
•upport, the knob (k, Fig. 1224) being 



glued in after the handle is fixed in the 
support. The method of turning and fixing 
this knob is clearly seen in Fig. 1229, in 
which K is the knob, h the handle, and d the 
dowel turned on the knob. A convenient 
set of trays will be : one 2 ft. 6 in. long by 
20 in. wide ; one 2 ft, long by ID in. wide, and 
one 1 ft. (> in. long by 12 in. wide. In the 
smaller ones the base-boards may be about 
^ in. thick, and the fence mouldings re- 
duced to I in. and } in. high, the thickness 
to correspond. The trays should now be 
cleaned oil and rubbed over with two or 
three coats of linseed oil, and the polishing 
may then be proceeded with. 




CHESTS. 



Oak Linen Chest. 

■The Mnen chest shown in conventional 
view by F,g. 1230 should be constructed 
in wainscot oak, fumed. A plan of the 




ng. U80,_o«k Uin ciMt 

.chest is given at Fig. lL>ai, and various 
details are shown m Figs. :232 to 12.34 The 
dimensions are as follows :— Length out- 
side angle posts, 5 ft. ; width of ends, 1 ft 
lOin. ; height from floor to top, 3 ft ■ depth 
inside of chest, 2 ft. OJ in. The angle posts 
are .) in square, tapering below the bottom 
of the chest to form the feet (see elevation 
J-ig. 12.i4). The inner edges are moulded 
and grooved t- receive the panels, forming 
a stile for both the front and return framing 
I he back posts are the same size as the 
front posts, but are moulded, etc., on one 
edge only, to receive the return end framing ■ 
the back being solid, and flush with the 
face, the back posts will require grooving 
only on the inner edges (see Fig. 1 231 ). The 
mouldings and grooves will roquire to be 
stopped at the lower ends, to enable a 



ntft^^t""'''",''' ^ '<"""'"> "'■' "« tenon 
of the bottom rail ; otherwise the leg would 
diminish the depth of the moulding, which 
s not desirable. The framing berwecn 
ttie posts s 1} in. thick, and%omprirs 
bottom rails ^ in. wide, top rails 3J in 
wide and muntms 3 in. wide; the pLels 

moulded and grooved for the panel on the 

the bottom of -he chest on the lower edge 
thj bottom being 1 in. thick. The tS 
rails are moulded and grooved on one edge 
only, to receive the panel, the muntiis 
being grooved on both edges. The panels 

r/r 'ri"* " 'r" '°™'*-'« « worked 
on the solid round the raised parts. The 
who e of the framing should be propel 
mortised and tenoned together, fhe^o 
outer faces of the front posts, and ^e 
return faces of the back posts, have a 
shallow sinking formed in them, as shown 




Tig. IMl.— Plan of LiMn Ohesl. 

in Figs. 1232 and 1234. The top of the 
ehest IS formed of 1-in. wainscot, and pro- 
jects 1 in. over the front and ends. It is 
framed togethfr, the muntins being tenoned 
into the fruut and back rails. The front 
tack, and end rails are mitered together 



CHESTS. 



at the angles. The joints are feather- 
tongned, and have in addition in each 
joint two Ta'i'^- double nut screwB, the nuts 
being let in and turned from the under side. 
The inner edges of the framing are grooved 



to receive the tongue on the panels, which 
are flush-framed, with beaded joints. The 
front and return edges of the top are moulded 
as shown. The back of the chest is 1 in. 
thick. The ends are tenoned and haunched 




Fig. 1S89.— Vertical Section 

through Front of Linen 

Chest. 



Fig. 1283.— Horiiontal Section 

through ^0*^ and Framing of 

Linen Clieit. 



Fig. 1384. 



Fig. 1384.— Elevation of Foot 
of Linen Chest 





So. 


Length, 
ft. In. 


Widtl,. 


TUIcknex*. 




ft. 111- 


ill. 


Pets 


4 


3 


3 




HaU. 


■i 


5 




li 


RniU 


4 


1 9 




Rail. 


•i 


a 3 


3! 




EaUi 




2 


31 




Muntiu ... 


■I 


1 11 


3 


1* 


Muntins ... 


2 


1 10 






PftneH 


3 


1 « 






Panel. 




1 8 


1 51 




Panels 


J 


1 .5 




OJ 


Back 


I 


5 II 


2 




Bottom 


1 


4 11 


1 il 


0! 



ri,.a!H»acket>. - 

3 wrought-iroa cheat hiogei. 

1 wrought-irou chest lock and key. 



to fit into the mortice and groove in the 
angle posts. The bottom also is solid, 
and tongued all round. The brackets 
are o£ wainscot A in. by 3 in. by 1 in. thick 
(see Figs. 1234 and 12.14). The materials 
required are given in the table opposite, 
all the wood being dry wainscot. 

Clothes Chest. 

Fig. 1235 is a perspective view of 
clothes chest of a convenient size for us' 
when travolUng, Figs. 12.M and 1237 showing 
spctinns of the chest. The internal arrange- 
ment consists of a shelf a (Fig. 1237), 9J in. 
wide by \ in. thick, supported on two fillets 



360 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



B screwed to the ends of the chest. The 
aliclf should be made to elide easily from 
side to side. Another shelf c, 11 in. wide, 
placed in an opposite direction to the shelf 
A, is supported in the same manner. In the 
right-hand top comer is a small fixed trav 
suitable for small articles. This will lie 
a convenient arrangement for the inside, 
preventing the crowding together of the 
contents of the chest. Good yellow pine 
should be used for constructing the chest. 
First plane and square up the two sides 
to 2 ft. Sin. in length by 1 ft. 4} in. wide 
by f in. thick. Next prepare the two ends, 
1 ft. 5 in. long, and the same mdth and thick- 
ness as the sides. The four pieces should 



deep, cut in the sides of the chest (see 
Fig. lii'J). The tray lid is shown in section 
by Fig. 1240. A short pin is cut on each 
end of the lid and inserted in the hole H 
(Fig. 12,!9), thus forming a hinge for the 
lid. ' he tray must be inserted while the 
body of the chest is being g', ,„d up. The 
hd of the chest should be } in. thick, with 
a projecting piece IJ in. wide, and rounded 
on the outside edge, shaped as shown at j 
(Fig. l-J;iM). At the back edge it is J in. 
thicker to allow for the hinge. The inside 
would look well if stained and varnished, 
while the outside should Iw given a coat 
of red-lead, .\fter puttj-ing up the nail 
holes, the chest should have two coats 




ng. U3B,— Clothn Chsst. 



then be dovetailed together. The bottom 
should be of J-in. hning, tongued and 
grooved and nailed to the edges, laying it 
across from back to f.ont. Fillets 2 in. 
by i in. are nailed along the bottom and 
flush with the outside edges (see F, Fig 
12.-!8). When the body of the chest is 
planed np and glass-papered, the plinth 
D (Fig. 1238), which is 2i in. wide by } in. 
thick, can be nailed on. It should be 
mitered at the comers, and a sash mould- 
ing is run on the top edge. The mouldng e 
(Fig. 123S) should now be nailed round the 
top edge, keeping it J in. below the edge of 
the chest. The fillets supporting the shelves 
are IJ i-. wide by J in. thick, and are 
fixed to the sidei with screws. The tray 
should be of j-in. stuff, the inside measure- 
ments being 4 in. wide by 3 in. deep. The 
front and bottom are let into grooves ^ in. 



of paint, smoothing between the coats 
with glass-paper. Japanned iron handles 
should be screwed to the ends. The lid 
18 hinged with a pair of .l-in. brass butts, 
a suitable brass lock completing the 
fittings. 

Another Clothes Chest. 

Pig. 1241 is a view of the finished chest 
whilst Fig. 1242 is a broken longitudinal 
section showing the details. The material 
should be good quality vellow pine, per- 
fectly dry and free from' knots or shakes. 
A suitable length for a chest is 2 ft. 10 in. 
outside measurement, and the width 
1 ft. o in. The height given is 1 ft. SJ in., 
but this may be varied slightly to suit the 
width of stuff obtainable. ,as it is advisable 
to have the sides and ends in whole pieces. 
The box, which should not be any thicker 



CHESTS. 



:inl 



than } in., in dovetailed together and glued. 
The Imttom is formed of feather-and-grooved 
lining, nailed to the under edge. Fillets r 
are carried all round the outside edges of 
the bottom to keep the box out of the damp. 
These fillets are nailed to the lining, but 
one or two screws should also pass right 
into the under edge of the box itself, so 



are shown by Fig. 124:). A rim t is mitered 
at the comers and nailed around the lid, the 
Imttom edge projecting down } in. below 
the frame. The lower facing is fixed on 
to keep the lid a httlc clear of the top edge 
of the box. Brass butt hinges and a good 
lock as well a.i good handles, should he used. 
n the frame of the lid inside is veneered 




Tit- i»' 




Figs, lue and m7.-lojijitudliuU and Cnn VsrUcal Smuoiu of 



Fig. 123T. 




Fig. ina.— Fart VsrUcal 

Section tbrongh Back of 

ChoBt 




mMa 



Fig. ISM.— Stotton of Tny 
Lid of Clotliei ChHt. 



Fig. 12S9.— Detail of < 
ChBrt Tray. 



as to bind the bottom firmly on. The 
skirting s may be dovetailed at the comers, 
but mitre joints will do as well. It must 
not, however, be in contact with the floor, 
and for this reason is kept up \ in. The 
lid is formed of |-in, stuff, with 3-in. pieces 
clamped to each end. These pieces, being 
i in. thicker than the central portion, neces- 
sitate the ptanting-on of pieces of pine the 
same widlii aa the cross ends, and flush with 
them, to form a mock frame, into which 
is planted a sunk moulding. These pieces 



with mahogany and the panel with bird's- 
eye mapie, with a mahogany moulding 
planted in and the whole polished, it will 
give the interior of the box a very rich 
appearance. At one end of the box. as 
shown by Figs. 1242 and 12i:j, there is a 
till with secret recess, and having drawers 
below. Resting on a projection of the 
till at one end and on a fillet at the other 
end of the box is a tray, having a smaller 
tray inside. The bottom recess is intended 
for dresa-shirts, collars, etc. ; the top one 



362 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 







Fig. im-lo.,st,uiiB.i Vrtld 8«rtlon of Cloth.. Ch..t 



rate, tie two L.e.. The ^bTesTe iX^ SX i» "h^ Vh^tut'^ 



CHESTS. 



3A3 



caw is acrawed to the sides o( the box. A 
small stiSeniiig block is inserted into the 
tecesa immediately above the drawer divi- 
sion. The drawer bottoms are checked 



to facilitate lilting them out and in. Fig. 
1244 is a broken plan of the interior of the 
box, having the till flap removed. If the 
inside of the hd is polished, it would be aa 




H» 1HS.-Fait Cross BtMm of Clothsi Ch«t oo Une A B (Fl». H«). 




Fig. 13M.— FUm aliowliig Interior of Clothaa Chait 



into the front, and nailed to the front and 
andcr edgea of tlie sides and back. The 
trays are dovetailed together and the top 
edges rounded. Holes are cut in both trays 



well to have a mahogany flap on the till. 
The outside of the bo.v should be painted 
with good oil paint, and the interior should 
be left plain. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKT. 



Sea Chnt. 

Moit an cherts in a cabin or forecastle 
are Mually found considerably larger at 
t lie base than above, with the idea, no 
doubt, that such a form prevents them 
nom rolling over in bad weather. But 
this is quite unnecessary ; chests slide 
across a cabin long before they capsiie 
and if lashed they do neither. It is neces- 
sary that the chest be watertight, as several 
inches of water, and sometimes enough to 



with brass screws, all joints and the inside* 
of comer iron angles being painted before 
putting together. For the handles make 
two grommets of l|in. or 2-in. rope : these 
are secured to the ends of the cheat by a 
pair of oak or teak cleats (Fig. lalfi) the 
edges of the groove being rounded off to 
prevent cutting the grommet. Brass hinges 
and lock are well worth the small extra 
cost. The till B is indispensable; let it 
be made of fin. stuff, outside measurement 
Iftj in. by li in. by (i in. This will just fit 




Hj. 1247.— Interior AzTaagemant of 8ea Chest 
(TiU Bemoved). 

float the chest, continually wash to and fro 
over the cabin deck in bad weather; for 
which reason soft woods are better than 
hard, ihe latter being more liable to crack, 
while the former receive only a harmless 
dent from a blow. The wood should be 
1 in. thick, free from knots, the comers being 
dovetailed and iron bound (see Fig. 1245). 
On the bottom two dunnage battens of 
teak or oak a a must be fixed with brass 
screws, and in their cent-es a groove cut 
to admit the chest lashing, thus preserving 
it from chafe and the chest from a wet 
deck. The top and ^bottom are fixed 



n». llM-OlMt to ttaulni Otonmst 
Baadlo to Sta Chut 




Fig. !««.— Part Sactloa of a« Chest, 
i!-i-wtag Till, Partition Btrips, eta 

across the chest at one end, resting on the 
strips p D (Figs. 1247 and 1248), which are 
nailed in such a position as will allow the 
chest lid to close over the projecting part 
o£ the till. The strips E and p are now 
nailed as shown in Fig. 124S ; the partition 
a slides between them, and can be removed 
if desired when the till is lifted, c. is 
another partition, which may be made in 
two parts, to slide between the strips h h 
in the same manner. The whole of the 
inside must now receive two co.at« of aood 
copal yamieh, and the outside three coats 
of paint. A canvas cover should also 



CHESTS. 



be made, 3 (t. 2J in. by 1 ft. "ilin.. with 
edges 4 in. doep to cover the hd joint ; 
this may lie painted black or white, or kept 
scrubbed ; its use is to keep rain, or any 
other liquid, from running inside at the 
lid joint, and it is for many reasons better 
than a rebate Dimensions not given in the 
text are shown on the illustrations. 

Steward's Sea Chest. 

Figs. 1249 and 12j(J show one method 
of arranging a cheat for holding a steward's 
outfit. There are two trays, which divide 
it into three spaces, so as to keep the various 
items separate. The bottom space is in- 
tended for trousers ; the middle one (which 
is divided into three spaces by the raggUng 
of two divisions into the sides) i^ for shirts 
and collars ; and the top one for uniforms. 
The cheat is made out of |-in. yellow pine, 
dovetailed together, with a Jin. bottom 
nailed on, and JJ*in. by l-in. pieces screwed 
to the bottom to keep it off the deck. The 
end and side wood at the bottom ia covered 
by a baae, which is mitered at the comers 
and nailed on. The lid is made of J-in. 
wood, with 3-in. cross-ends mortised and 
tenoned to it. There are two arrangements 
shown for the lid. a shows the ordinary 
arrangement for good chests, with ono facing 
nailed to the lid and resting on the other, 
which is nailed to the box, and kept down 
i in. from the top edge, b shows a throiit- 
ing cut out of the top edge of the cheat, and 
a small bead fastened to the lid to drip off 
any water which may find its way in. This 
throating would require to be extended 
to the outside of the chest to run the water 
off. The trays are dovetailed together, 
and a grip-hole is cut out at each end, and 
nicely rounded. The tray bottoms, which are 
feathered and grooved together, having the 
giain running the short way, are screwed 
to the under side of the trays. Small 
pieces are put in at the bottom of the box 
to carry the bottom tray, the top tray 
reiting on the bottom one. The top edges 
of the trays are rounded, and should be 
mitered at the comers, the divisions being 
mitered to the middle of the round. The 
base is only shown on one part of the 
illustration, but it is intended to be carried 
all round. 



;.-.h.. 



Wi'^-' t j c-M 



¥= 





ti 




sw 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



LMd-lliMd Tra-chMt. 

U made piefenbly ot nahoginy, and i. 
divided into two compartmenU. Theinude. 
01 there are Uned with lead, inch aa ia 
K^" ^V '"•ol'e.ta. Thi. lead can be 
bonght at any grocer', ior a imall aum. Kg. 
V • \»''P»«dinal lection of the box 
allowing the oonitroction ; Pig. 1202 beini a 
aeotion on a b, Rg. 125I. The body of tie 
box » «Mret dovetailed, and the moulding 
on the top dowelled to the edge of it. Before 
fiang the moulding, . gauge Une ia run 
round the box where it ha. to bo cut to 
form the hd. Alter the moulding i. glued 
on, the top can be fixed with glue and 




the bottom can be lepUced. The under 

S^lf ,h' 1*^ "^' "^ *" •'«• """"l 
w>th the e«l. The turned ball feet .hown 

m the illuatration. are acrewed to the 

bottom with thin Krewa. Two bead, are 

•hown at the lid joint, one on each edge, 

Thi ?3° "u""? i"" *» d»P«>>«d with, 
rhe Ud 1. hinged, but it i. not intended to 
have a lock. If one ia wanted, the divinon 
will require to be ahifted clear of the centre 
and one apace made larger than the other ; 
or the box mu.t be conatructod of auf&cient 
width to juatify two divinona. 

Travellcr'i Samph Ca**. 

01 a traveller a umple mm, 36 in. by 18 in. by 



rHa U»l and U51-U.^tadiaal am On.. TerttaU 




jmaU brad. The box can then be cut to 
the gauge Ime, and the division glued in 
a ahaUow groove which i, cut for it 
before glmng the box up, after which the 
b? .„? "t^Jt^ ??""^ ™- The aiet. y, 

up. Tie lUustnition. Aow them fixed 
M^U brad. w,ll n,.ke a .tron| enou^ 

{^,,1^ .J"'' '" """ fi««J. the hole, 
bored m the centre, and the tiined knob, 
glued m A small moulding is mitered 
and glued to the inside of the Ud The 

tocks. To make the job easier, a pencil 
Ime can be drawn all round the inside o 
t?„ t"f"?' Tl.^'"' '*"*°'" unscrewed and 
v™ ?i,*'.°'''l "?• ^*^' ^e lead ha. 
edge of the box to the (op edge of the fillets. 



n*. lui. 

of Uad-lhud TM-ohMt. 



2*in., to contain .uch thing, a. leather 
^.. Good red-deal, birch, beech, or 
other BimiUr hardwood, } in. to 1 in. thick 
may be umd, according to strength and 
other requirement.. Tie angle, should 
be dovetailed together, and the board. 

Fr^,-,.''^,."""'"''"'^'"'' " 'hown at 
■ *• 'l^''- T" prevent duat, etc., gettine 
m, a fillet about IJ in. by i in. should bl 
nailed round so a. to project into the lid 
when closed (see Fig. 1253). If the staple, 
are made as shown at Fig. 1257, they can 
be screwed to the front of the rim of the 
iv- *?>-,v^° returned piece shown at a 
(*ig. Iiu7) can be let in and screwed to 
the under .,de of the lid ; this will prevent 
It bemg broken off. The eye and pUte 
can be made so that the eye passes through 
the front, the plate being screwM to the 
mside ; it is thu. not likely to be broken 
OH or unscrewed from the outside. Two 



CHESTS. 



.187 




x^i 



^uM 




CABISETWOBK AND JOINBBY. 

ri 




n». ItH. Bniftiaau'i ObNi "** "" "* '»»-*• *»y of DnnAlauui'i 





If. iNa 



Pill, liu to mi^TartlMU iMtlm. 

Bor; vul iMUo^ Md PUa of 

OnBfheunaa'i ChMt 



Of. »«. 

I ChMt 



Fl(. UU. 



np. ISM .=d ,MT -LoTOT Ttaj et Driojit.- Kffi. i2« ud ises—ioddl. Tntr of Dtauhu- 



CHCSTb. 



Mdlocln Buty b* awd, or • rod *Dd one 
lotk, M •ho«a. For oijiuiy purpoMt, on 
•tople, tyt, and lock wouU bo rafl'cint. 

DraugkUimn'f Chcit. 

Tlui cbnt •hown in Fig, I3M it dnigsed 
to Uke ratioiu >rticlM tlut coali! not be 
got into the dnughtniuii'ii instnimeat 
rate. The wood ■hown i< {-in. pine (but 
|-in. would be better), dovetailed at the 
comera, and lightly itained and vamiahed. 
The enda of the trays are ) in. thiik, and the 
■idea and iKitloma are J in. thick, finger- 
holea being bored in the enda for lifting. 
Figa. 1259 and I2liU ate aectiona on A n and 
CD (Fig. 12111) reapectively. Fig. lini being 
a pUn of the box bebw the third tray, 
while Figa. 1262 to 12)i7 give plana and 
•lerationa of the three large trayj. The 



r6cka akowB in Fi^i. 12ilO and I2iil are for 
krge aet-aqiurea, the two end traya above 
are lor iik, cokiur laucera, pIc, and below 
ale two diviaiona, with movable partitiona, 
one (or a Urge tponge and a water glaaa, 
and the other for a caie of railway curvea. 
The well between takea the instrument 
caae. The top tray Ukea leveral beam-coin, 
paaa latha of diflerent Icngtha, a 1-ft. il-in. 
rolling parallel ruler, and a 1-ft, (l-in. 
hand level. The largpit apace to the right 
containa the pocket caie for a B-in. pro- 
portional compaaa, and the other divinoni 
are devoted to ape.ial purpoaea. and the 
middle ipace to general uae. The aecond 
tray ia wholly devoted to curvea, and the 
lower tray hokla a apeed indicator in caae, 
a squeegee for uae in mounting plana, a 

fair of clampa, and variuua odda and enda, 
f necesaary, a hick and key can be added. 





SCREENS. 




Hall Screen with Fretwork and 
Leaded Lights. 

Toe hall screen illustrated Jiy Fig. 12G8 
may be successfully introduced in a dwelling- 



house, private hotel, or similar building. A 
good position for the screen is about 4 ft. 
or 5 ft. back from the drawing-room and 
dining-room doors. Care should be taken 
to arrange the cornice, span rail, and dado 




Fig. litfiS.— Hail Bcrten vilh Pretvork and Leaded Lights. 




Tig. 1271. 

riffi. 1369 to 13TI.— Horisontal SwUoni of Hall Screen on Udm A B, 
G D, ind E F (Fig. 1273). 




gff! 



3" 



;s==43 



Fig. 1376.— End of Span Ball 
of Hall Screen. 






=3-^4=^ 



Lciii'il- 







"^^ 
y 



Fig. 12T4.— Lower Fart of Column and Skirting of 
Hall Screen. 



fe 






«E 



If 



KE^5 



feivH'' 



a 



/ ^// 






1 

Si 



Fig. 137B. -Double Tenon Joint! for Hall Screen 
(lee Fig. 1370). 





L^' 



[Ml; 



Pig. 1373. -Vertical 

Section of Hall 

Screen on Line Q H 

(Fig. 1368). 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



rail mouldings in line with and also o£ the 
same section as any existing details of 
the sort, otherwise the screen will appear 
to be disconnected from the original 
architecture of the house. Fig. 1269 is a 
section on A B ; Fig. 1270, section on c d ; 
Fig. 1271 section through E », and Fig. 1273 
a vertical section through o b. The dimen- 
sions are as follow ; Height, 8 ft. 10 in. ; 
width, (i ft. in. ; height from floor to under 
side of span rail, li ft. 2 in. The screen 
is intended to be constructed of hardwood 
with leaded light on each side ; two small 
panels are shown in the dado, but a single 
larger panel would look as well, and would 
lessen the labour. The upper framework 
may be of soft wood stainnl and varnished 
to match. The frame is divided by a centre 
span (the inner and outer radius are, re- 
spectively, 1 ft. 8i in. and 1 ft. UJ in.), 
surmounted by a small frieze band and 
cornice. Cut-through ornament is intro- 
duced in the divisions formed by the framing, 
but leaded lights of suitable design could 
be introduced with equally good effect if 
desired. The three parts of the screen 
may be framed up in the shop ready for 
erecting. It will be noticed from Fig. 
12(>9 that the frame ic sunk into the column 
its full width, owing to the irregular shape 
of the columns. It will be seen that the 
dado and bottom rails are tenoned to the 
inner column (Fig. 127.i), so that the mould- 
ing and skirting boards shall hide the 
joints (see Figs. 1274 and 1275). The 
two sides may be fixed first. The upper 
framework and the span rail (see Fig. 127(>) 
(the latter being mortised to receive stump 
tenons from the wall and inner stilea or 
columns) having been removed, the wall 
should be plugged in positions where the 
screws for fixing will bo covered by the 
attached mouldings ; while the floor may 
be mortised to receive tenons from the 
columns (not shown in illustration), which 
are further secured by screws driven through 
the bottom rail before the skirting board is 
fixed. The span rail and the upper wall 
stiles are now placed in position. The 
frame (Fig. 1277) is tongued to the span 
rail and rebated to the upper wall stiles 
as shown by Fig. 1278. A rebate is worked 
round the frame to receive the fretwork. 



which is kept in position by a quarter- 
round slip, the top band of the fret being 
retained by slips attached on each side. 
The cornice moulding is attached to a 
batten fixed to the ceihng, the lower part 
abutting on the fretted band (see Fiu. 
1279). 

Ornamental Idins Screen. 

Fig. 1280 illustiaus a screen suitable 
for dividing a long room into two parts, or 
for fitting across a recessed window opening. 
Mahoginy and walnut are suitable for 
use if the general tone of the room is dark ; 
but 1 it is light, whitewood should be 
chosen and enamelled in art colours. The 
pilUrs are about 4 in. square at the base, 
with turned shafts, finished by orna- 
mental capitals, and above these the pillars 
are reduced to 2f in. or 3 in. square, and 
carried up through the frieze to the ceiling. 
The pillars against the wall are of half- 
round and half-square sections, and can 
be made from one whole pillar sawn down 
the centre. ' he several rails are mor- 
tised into the' pillars, and the finishing 
mouldings mi':ered and carried round the 
pillars. The side bottom panels are fitted 
with a circuUr span rail J in. thick, cut to 
form two arches, and supported by a shaft 
li in. or IJ in. square. This shaft is 
slotted at the upper portion, as seen in 
Fig. 1281, to fit the span rail. The bottom 
rails are moulded on each side (see Fig. 
1282) and round the pillars to form a 
finish, the design corresponding with the 
room skirting. The pillar capitals are 
obtained by pinning and gluing on a piece 
of stuff IJ in. square, and then carving the 
design at the top of the capital. The centres 
from which the middle arch span rail is 
struck are shown in diagram form in Fig. 
128;j, together with the centres for the 
edging. Above the arch span rail a heavy 
moulding m (Fig. 1284) is fixed for mor- 
tising into the pillars. The under side is 
grooved to receive the arch span rail, and 
the top side grooved for the first frieze f. 
This frieze is J in. thick, and the floral 
wreath work is carved in wood and screwed 
on, or lincrusta decoTfttion can with advan- 
tage be used. Above this a rail of square 
section is placej to carry the moulding 



SCREENS. 



X, and also the bottom edge of the second 
frieze a. This frieze is J in. thick, and is 
planted flush over the pillars on each side, 
and here again lincrusta decoration makes 
a very suitable finish. Overhanging this is a 
heav}' moulding fitting close to the ceiling, 
and it is desirable to carry this round the 
room as a cornice. The pillars should, 
if possible, be let into the floor for support ; 
but where this cannot be done, screw them 
to the floor before putting on the base 
mouldings. The tops of the pillars .re 
tightly fixed with double wedges at the 
ceiling, the bearing being arranged under a 



Vestibule Screen with Folding Doors. 

The screen illustrated by Fig. ViHit is 
intended to be executed in Italian or 
American walnut, and french- polished. 
Fig. 128<> shows an interior elevation of the 
screen, Fig. 1287 a plan, while Figs. 1288 
and r281> show respectively vertical sections 
through doors, etc., and side framings. 
The screen is 10 ft. high from floor to ceiling, 
and there is a moulded and carved walnut 
cornice all round the vestibule and hall. 
The four jambs shown on the plan at Fig. 
1287, and in the detan Figs. 1290 to 1295, 




Fiff. ia78.~S*cUoiL of Hall 

Sorean's Fimmv and Upptr 

Wall 8tUe. 




Tig. 1ST9.— Comioa HoulcUnc of 
Hall ScrMn. 




Tig. ISTT.— Hall SarMu Frame carrying Frotwork. 



joist and the wedges secured from move- 
ment. For this purpose the top frieze 
and moulding are fixed after the structure 
is in position ; the side pillars are fixed to 
the walls, and where two vertical walls 
form the boundar}', clearance must be left 
to allow for fitting. The pillars are then 
packed, and an angle moulding is used to 
cover the clearance. Brackets for flower 
bowls as shown in plan in Fig. 1285 are 
screwed on the rails r (Fig. 1280) above 
the small arches. In designing this screen, 
it has been borne in mind that d. aperies of 
plush curtains, etc., will be hung and looped 
in the archways in order to give the necessary 
softening finish. Loop them with heavy 
cords and tassels, and choose the colour to 
harmonise with the prevaiUng tone or colour 
scheme of the immediate surroundings. 



are made out of 4-in. by 4-in stufi rebated, 
grooved, beaded, * ic-. The transom is 
continuous and of the same thickness as the 
door and framings, and the jambs and 
transom are framed together in the ordinary 
manner. The jambs do not run up beyond 
the transom, and the framing above, which 
is 2J in. thick, forms an independent sash 
or fanlight. The head is cut to an ellip- 
tical shape, and marginal bars are cut 
to correspond. The head- or top-rail 
must be wide enough to take the moulded 
cornice on both sides. The spandril piece 
on each side of the exterior portion is sunk 
and carved with a fan or other pattern. 
The fanlight sash should be firmly fixed 
to the brickwork and the ceiling joJHt"., 
and to the plaster at each end. The 
centre part below the transom is filled 



\M 



374 





CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



m with a pair o£ 2i-iii. foldine doors, each 
havng thr«e panel.; the fower mneU 
are raised and mitered, and have bolection 
moulding on the ontaide and ordinary mould- 
ing on the inside, and the centre panels 



dmded mto squares, with marginal bar 
to follow the elliptical rail of the door, and 
are filled in with clear bevelled plate gUss 
as before. The frieze rail is provided on 




rig. laoo. -Onuunmtal Dirtiiliig Screen, 



are tilled in with leaded lights. T.be ulass 
IS painted and burnt, and%he centrepiece 
has a shield pattern in clear bevelled polished 
British p ate-glass ; the whole being held in 
position by brass saddle-bars, turned up at 

nt'o'th • rf «■?<» "i"" »"«=«. passing 
mto the rebate of the donr. Th. "!aiiii» 
mouldings or beads are notched and'fitted 



the outside with a moulding having a dentil 
course, and on the inside with a sunk mould- 
mg, as shown at Fig. 12M ; moulding 
and apron hning are fi.ved on the middle 
ran. The framing on each side of the door 
IS earned up to the transom, and i., fixed 
m the cemre of the jamb, the part below 
the middle rail oeing flush framed on the 



SCREENS. 





Fig. 13S1. Bottom 

Bill and Sklnlxg 

of BantjL 



^O \ I / /A- 



\\ i / 

\- 1/ 




\ 1 




. 13«3.— CratrtB 
Bcretn Ardi. 


tor 





Fig. 1285.- r:-iii of Flower Bracket 
for Screen. 



Fig. 1384.— Section of Upper Vouldings and 
Frieie of Screen. 



37« 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINERY. 




Fl|. 19U. 



ni . iMT. 

Hff. 1390.— HorixoDtal Bm- 
tlon Umugh Lover gida 
rrMUni of Vmtibulo 

SOIMB. 




■/ rif. ««!.— Horlioitel s«i«lm 

tbrosgh Vaitlbulo Sonoa at 
Side Table LoTel. 




Tig. IMS, 

Plgi. ia»a aad U»8.— Horitontu SmUobi of TertltnU* Bentn thmuh Cratr* and ITimer 

Parta of Door ud Sldi Fnunlngi. 




Fig. 1396.— Veitloal SecUon 

through Door ud Tnuiiom 

of TMtibtUi Seroon. 



Fig. laM.—Verticai Seefcion 

through Lower Side Framing 

of Toitibol* Bcraeu. 




i 



sra 



CAUINETWORK AXD JOINEKV. 



outside, two moulded panels which carry 
the line of truss being sunk on the face ; on 
the inside the panel stands back J in. from 
the face of the framing, and in the centre there 
is a false muntin framed at eadi end with a 



and at the face of the framing. The 
centre part on each side is formed into a base 
for the shaft of the truss, the latter being 
turned as shown, and a carved lion's head 
planted and fixed on the face. Over the 



li[i!^#m^&JfcMic+I5»^!^*iJ^ 




Fig. 1296. 



Fig. 1397. 




Figs. 1396 to 1398.— Front and 
Sida Elovatlons and Part Plan 
of Entraneo Hall and Staircaaa 

Scmn. 



Fig. 1298. 



barefaced tenon. These panels are moulded 
as shown. The upper puuel is filled in 
with leaded lights, the glass part painted 
and burnt, and the remainder fitted with 
cathedral glass of rich tints. On the face of 
thr j^mbs are pihstti^, rucdcd or fiuted uud 
panelled, with moulded bases and neckings. 
The skirting is broken round these pilasters 



truss there is a shaped and moulded table 
or shelf, which is intended to carry a vase 
for plants or flow^ers. The side part of 
the table, which runs over the face of the 
jamb, also serves as a base for the pilaster 
above. A moulded cornice having a dentil 
course is fixed on the face of the transom, 
and is broken round the pilasters, for which 



SCREENS. 



Hf. liM.-BnIinttI l«tl« 
thieof h NtWfl Poit on 

Uu T T (m. IMO). 




38U 



CABmETWOBK AND JOINERY. 




It fonn. . cap. The two i-ratre iamba 
tave turniKl tenniiul., Mwwn which a 
iituiped and mouldwl pnliment ia flxwl. 
The intenar port of the iipiwn is designed 




FK. IKH. 

n(i. IWI u4 lM<.-noat ElnaUai ud ?Ua of 
Batm betwMii Two Booau. 




•lightly differently from the exterior, the 
upper apandril curving *nd the dentil 
'•<>ui«' in the mouliling along the tmnsom 
heing omitted. The two linen ahowing 

lielo» the floor level indicate the cement 

concrete and mn<iaic floor. 

Entrance Hall and Stalrcaw 
Screen. 

Front and side elevations of an en- 
trance hall ind staircase screen arc 
presented by Figs, laoti and 1297. The 
part plan of the hall and staircase given 
tiy Fig. 129H shows the conditions which 
the screen has to fulfil. An enlarged 
part elevation of the newel post (a, Fig. 
129B) is shown by Fig. 129!). This post 
helps to support the screen, as shown 
in the enlarged part elevation (Fig. 
I.IOO). Horiiontal sections of the post 
at X X and of the screen and part of 
post at Y y are presented by Figs. 1301 
and 1302. "^ 

Screen between Two Roomi. 

The screen ebout to be de- 
scribed is 10 ft. ride by » ft. 
high. lUustrationa of it are 
presented by Figs. 1303 to 1313. 
It is ornamental in character, 
and of an unconventional type. 
It is divided into three 



and 1306.-- 
Details of Upper Fart 
of SoreoD. 



Fl(. isot. 




SCREENS. 



•■«I 



•whm, the cratre openinit Wng 4 ft. (1 in. 
wide, thi' nmaimlc-r ilivid«l eqiully. Tho 
punoUiiiK Iwtwwn the two niile archml 
oppninnH is amingn) to carry the Mine line 
a> the dado or chair rail roimd the room. 
If deaired, the panelling may be entirely 
omitted without spoiling the design. The 
shafts ol the column on each side of the 




central oprmngs are .i in. .quare. with u 
hase to each 1) in. deep, Ih.MIv moiildnl at 
top, with milered angles : the proicitinn of 
the Use beyond the shaft lie^ig 1 in. making 
the lull site u in. by .-. in. by .-, in. («., 
Fig. l»>i)- In the same (igure is shown 
the cap to the lower shaft, formed in the 
solid, sunk.^and nioiilile.1 ami mifered 




nt- im.-Paasl n». UIL-Ottau 

OB maft of showing SmUoi of 

Arch Bib of 
Bortoa. 



Fig. 1313.— Bstimi 

Fac< of IntwmsiUata 

Shaft of acreon. 



Fig. 1307. Tig. tsot. 

Figs. 1307 to 1310.— Beratioa of Parts of Scraen 
Enlargod Scale. 



I 



i 



m 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEBY. 



i ! 






■t miglef. Th« flat member o( the mouU- 
ittg ii enriched hy circuUr nnkiiigi. The 

Crt of the thaft between the cap und the 
H u sunk and moulded to form a panel 
on each face; the return face having a itanel 
with a iemioircular head (Fig, MIU). That 
portion of the ihaft above the lower cap it 
part aqoare and fluted, and part nhaped 
m square form with a acroll-ihapotl und 
carved tttae ; and immediately below the 
intermediate cap it i« icrolled, and has an 
omnmental carved Mwag falling from the 
volutes (see Fig. 130B). The return face of 
the intermediate ithaft is shown in Fig. 
l;iU to be sunk moulded, the sinking being 
carried down and Htopped, diminishing to 
one-third the distance of its length. The 
intermediate cap previously mentioned is 
formed by mitering round the shaft a bold 
moulding as shown. Springing from the 
latter cap ia a shaped 'russ, moulded on 
the edge, the faces being sunk and incited. 
The truss supports a moulded and denticu* 
lated cap, which in turn carrier the shaped 
rib forming the centre arch (see Fig. 1312). 
The outer pillars are constructed similarly 
to those already described, but on the 
face are two-thirds of the thickness of 
the centre ones. The rib forming the semi- 
circular arch at the side opening is 2 in. 
thick, square on the edge, and with a lace 
moulding planted on each side (see Fig. 
IS^'d). A small key block is formed at the 
crown (Fig. 1306), over which runs a double 
moulding cut between the square fluted 
shafts. £ach end of the moulding has a 
projection forming an internal and external 
mitre, which in turn supports the shaped 
panel piece with square vertical bars (see 
Fig. 1.313). A bold moulding ia fixed under 
the head lining of the opening, forming a 
cornice which is broken round the square 
part of the shafts. 

Room Screen. 

The screen illustrated by Fig. 1314 is 
preferably made in mahogany or of the 
same wood as the furniture in the room 
where the screen may be used. Fig. l."U."j 
shows a design leas claliorate in the fretwork 
panel, but with more variety in tiie sasii i)ar. 
The scT-een may be two- or three-fold. The 
screen measures 5 ft. 1 in. froui the base 



to the top of the fret panel* and about 2 ft. 
a in. in width. Prepare two lengths for the 
■tiles, i ft. 1> .J, by 1} in. by 1 in. ; two 
lengths, each 2 ft, 3 in. br 3 in. by 1 in., 
for the middle and lower rail ; and oae length, 
2 ft. 3 in. by 2 in. by I in., for the top rail, 
which has a groove ^\ in. by j in. deep. 
This groove secures the fretwork, which 
is inserted from the top af^'ir framing up. 
The panel ia prepared fn m ^-in. stuff, 
reduced to |V in. Make a full-siie drawing 
of the fretwork, and trace it on the wood. 
Use a centre-bit ior removing the largest 
spaces, taking care not to cut into the lines, 
and as soon as the centre of tht- bit is felt 
through the wood, withdraw it and finish cut- 
ting the hole from the back. This method 
prevents tearing the edges of the hole. 
Finish with a keyhole saw. and cut out- 
tide the linrs, trimming off with a file and 
glasspaper. Cramp the two sriles together, 
and square of! the lengths of the mortices 
and their widths with the marking gauge. 
The rails are stump-tenoned 1^ in. deep, 
the tenon on the bottom rail being cut as 
shown in Fig. 131li. The sash ba<-n are |in. 
by 1 in., and are ^tted vo t*. • ;op ond 
middle rails before these are framed to the 
stiles (see Fig. 1317). In the screen shown 
by Fig. 1315, the joints of the bars are 
mitered and glued, with the exception 
of the large square, which should be mitered 
at the comer joints b, and stump-tenoned 
as shown in Fig. 1318. A slip, of the 
section show- in Fig. 1319, is glued to the 
stile at A (bi^. 1311), and a similar sH" is 
glued to the bars to keep the glass in positio ,. 
Glass of a pale greenish-yellow colour, similar 
to that used in stained-glass windows, has 
a pleasing effect. Fig. 132<) shows an 
enlarged view of fretwork panel. The lower 
panel is made by stretching tapestry with 
a reversible design. It nhould be one thot 
harmonises in colour with the upholstery 
in the room. Cut it so an to bring the pat- 
tern even in the frame, allowing enough 
for turning down and securing with tacks, 
working from opposite centres alternately, 
and finishing at the corners. Fix thin 
wood strips on each side with fine brads 
as shown in the section, Pig. i-iL'l. Another 
way is to stretch fine cauvati across and 
paste Japanese wallpaper on both sides. 



SCBEEK8. 



10|1 



Two inuU finiaU dowetlod on the 
of the ititn will complete the Krren, 

Drawlnr-room Thrac-fold Plrt- 
•crMii. 

In the three*fold screen ihown hy Fif[. 
lH'i'i the paneU are of clear, plain* glam*. 



lievelled on both tide*. The \nvf are 
.') ft. It in., 5 ft, and 4 ft. (( in. in height 
renpectivel;)', and I ft. H in. wide. The 
Urge leaf ii shown much the plainest (aee 
FigM. 1:^.1 and 13:24), and it a luggeation for 
thoAf who may not care to exeiute the 
rii-her deeigna given on the other leavni in 





rig. 13K.— Joiats la SoTMn 
Framing. 



Tig. 1319.— 8«ctloo ibowlag 

Bar and Blip attached to 

BtUe of Bcraen. 



tS^I. 

Fig. lS17.~Ban and Top and * t.tf. ^ 

Mlddls BalU of Borera. Fig. isao. -Fretwork Fan«l for Screen. 



Fig. 1331.— Method of 

SeeuriDg Tapait^ to 

BcTMn Frame, 



3H1 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




Fig. Vy2-2 and in Fig. l-'W.""). Polished 
walnut or mahogany could be used, or, 
possibly, onamelled muhogany might by 
preferred. The centre leaf represents the 
effect of a painting on the plain oval of the 
Iwttom panel. In Fig. l.'W.'J the haunchings 
and tenons of the stiles are shown by dotted 
lines. As mentioned, another design for 
the top Hiils i.s given in Fig. l-i2-'). The 
construction of the bottom part of the 



ovolo moulding, rebated, and mortised] 
and tenoned together. The glass is fixedf 
by heads cut and mitered into the rebate- 
of the frames. The stiles arc '2^ in. wide,J 
the top rails are 7} in. wide, and the bottou^ 
rails are 10 in. wide. j 

Three- or Four-fold Screens. | 

Figs. l.'JiiH and l;i21) illustrate a|I folding 
BtTeen with three leaves, each - leaf Iwing' 




Fig. 1S33.— Front Elavatiou of Drawing-room Three-fold Fire-screan. 



framing is indicated in Fig. l.'J2it, which 
also shows the carving in the bottom rail. 
The carving in each case can bo finished 
before the frames are glued up, but the 
bottom should be shaped with a fret saw 
before the screen is put together, and 
cleaned up afterwards. Fig. I,'i27 is a hori- 
zontal section through the centre of each 
leaf. The whole o! the framing is prepared 
from 1-in. stuff, moulded with a small 



of the same pattern. If desired, anothe^ 
leaf may be added, making a four-fol^ 
screen. Other designs foi the leaves artj 
illustrated by Figs. '..-J.'^" and l-'Wl. Th« 
framework of the soi ^i .nay be of pine;^ 
painted and enamelled v.'hite ' any light 
tint. If for use in rroms other than th^ 
drawing-room, mahogai y or walnut, french* 
polished, will be more suitable. The four 
square panels in the upper part of iiOf 




red, another 




a foui-fold 




e leaves are 




1.%*J1. The 


I 


be of pine. 


,■■■■ 


' any light 




ior than the 




ibut, french- 


r 


e. The four 




part of ;ue 





m 



«''■. width,"! ft;,r;;l"!'Xr„t;T,t' 



Fig. 1333. 



SCREENS. 






ns. 1334. 




'"■ "«— AIKmiativ. c,^,d Top of 
Hre-icreen. 



Fig. 1327.-P.rt Hortamw S«Mon „, R,,^ 
■creen. 




J« 



bottom rail il a'^.^We " Thfrib'r' ^ .'\^ 
With the pra^j;:r^--/eW, 



Fig. 133.._0.„.d Lower lUU „, p^^^ 



tl.e glass panels are halved wheie they cross 

tLl .V *'"<''™esae3 of veneer glued 
together, the middle piece being the or,™ 



am 



] 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



posts and rails. This is clearly shown in 
the section (Fig. 1332). 

Blind-frame, etc. — The lower panels k, 
to make a foundation for the covering, will 
require what is called a bUnd-frame. This 
is made of J-in. stuff, the stiles and rails 
being about .JJ in. or 4 in. wide, and halved 
togfther. CaUco or print stntf should be 



first tacked on the frame, and afterwards the 
outer covering. This frame also is secured 
with beads, a section of which is shown in 
Fig. 1333. In securing the span-rails d, 
a portion of the beads will have to be 
cut away to receive them. The beads on 
one side of the screws should be first fixed 
and mitered at the corners; then the 



aygSYm y^ 




Fig. no. 
Pigs. 13SS and 132».— Eeyatim and Plan of TlirM-fold Scratn. 



SOBEENS. 




Fig. 198>. 



Fig. 1333. 



Figa. 1332 ud 133S — 
^ I ^ SoctioM of Scrwn Framing, 
S^ -~ ahovliig BMding of Faneli. 




. 1330.— First Aitomativo 
Design for ScrssQ. 



Fig. 1334.— Half Elsvation 

of Screen Pediment 

(see Fig. 1388). 






Fig. 1333.— Panel for Screen (see Fig. 1331). 




Fig. 1336.— Half Hevatlon of Screen Pediment 
(see Fig. 1331, above). 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEHY. 






panels are put in, and next the beads 
to secure them. Should the screen 
be used for hiding any portion of a 
room, coloured "cathedral" glass may be 
substituted for the plain glass, or wood 
panels covered with plain silk or other suit- 
able material may be used An enlarge- 
ment of half the pediment is shown in 
Kg. 1334. To make a clean job, the 
frame and beads should be enamelled or 
french-polished before the panels are finally 
fixed. 

Hingeing Screen.— The leaves are joined 
together with 3-in. brass butt hinges, one 
being 6 in. from the top, another the same 
distance from the ground, and the tliird 
h»lf-v.(iy between the two. The hingeing 
arrangement is shown in the plan (Pig. 
1329). If the screen is to be draught-proof, 
bands of fabric or leather binding, about 
2 in. *ide, must be tacked to the edges 
where hinged ; this is best done when the 
leaves are folded together. 

AltematiTe Patterns of Screens. — A screen 
with leaves ot the kind shown in Fig. l^W 
is of the same dimensions as the one already 
described, with the following exceptions. 
The height is 6 it. 3 in. at the sides, and 
6 ft. 8 in. at the centre over all ; the top 
rail r is 4 in. lower than the top of ''•» side 
posts, and the rail G is 4 ft. from the floor. 
The upper and lower panels will require 
blind-frames. There are several ways of 
forming the margin at h. Close brass-head 
studs or nails may be inserted. Gimp, 
with a plain mat, rial for the borders, and a 
figured material for the centre of the panels, 
would look well ; or tinted paper for the 
borders and figured wall-paper for the 
centre, with narrow gold beading sepa- 
rating the border and filUng ; or, as an alter- 
native to tL.) beading, a gilded line, about 
i in. wide, of gold paint or leaf. The 
leaves are hinged in the same way as in the 
other screen. The dimensions with leaves 
as shown by Fig. 1331 are : Height to rail j, 
5 ft. 10 in. ; rail K, 2 ft. 9 in. from the floor ; 
sight size of papel L (shown enlarged in Fig. 
1335), 5 in. ; height of pediment, 9 in. ; 
terminals of side posts, li in. high. The 
terminals are shaped on each side as shown 
in the enlarged hali view of the pediment 
in Fig. 1338. The ornament in the pedi- 



ment is cut through with a fret-saw The 
desipi of the panel l (see Figs. 1,«1 and 
13,JB) IS cut out of very thin wood or veneer 
and glued on the face of the panel ; the sunk 
IJortions are then roughened by tapping with 
a semi-blunted point of iron, thus giving 
a granulated efiect. The panels may be 
covered with material as suggested for 
those in Fig. 1330. TL?re is a great variety 
of suitable materials available, such as 
Lincrusta-AValton, Anaglypta, etc. 



Window Screens. 

The three window screens illustrated bv 
Pigs. 1337, 1338, and 1339 are designed to 
allow of expansion or contraction to suit 
the different sizes oi windows without 
spoiling the general effect ; while the side 
portions of Pigs. 1337 and 1339 are also 
adaptable for bay windows. A suitable 
wood for making is pine, painted and 
enamelled white or some art shade to 
match the decoration of the room. If the 
scheme of decoration is dark, a:; a dining- 
room would be, the screen would look well 
m mahogany or walnut, finished with 
frenoh poUsh. Before making the screen, it 
13 advisable to prepare a full-size drawing 
of half the design. To get the right pro- 
portions, construct a scale as follows : 
Divide the design into as many parts as 
the desired height of the screen in inches 
—say 2 ft. 9 in. =33 parts— caUing 13 
parts 1 ft. The various details may then 
be measured from the design, and trans- 
ferred to the working drawing. The con- 
struction of the screen shown at Fig. 1337 
will be described first. The framing of this 
should finish as thick as 1-in. stuff will 
allow when planed up. The side posts A 
are 1} in. wide ; bottom rail b, 2 j in. wide ; 
top rail and middle rail d, which is in 
three pieces, 1 in. wide ; inner posts E, 
1 in. wide. The cross rails b and c are 
tenoned into the side posts. The inner posts 
E are connected in the same way to the rails 
B and c, the three cross rails d being 
stump-tenoned into the uprights. The 
balusters are | in. square, and are sunk 
J in. deep into the rails b and D. As an 
alternative, the balusters may be of brass 
cased tubing } in. in diameter. To facihtate 
cleaning, these should be made removable. 



SCBEENB. 



To do thi», let the lower ends re»t in holes 
bored J in. deep in the bottom pail, and bore 
holes i in. deep in the rail above. Then, if 
the rods are cut to } in. longer than the 
space between the rails, they can be pushed 
up into the upper holes and allowed to 
ilrop into the lower on ,, their removal 
thus being an easy matter. The shaped 
out-through panels are of }-in. stuff, and 
grooves i in. deep are made in the posts 
and pails to receive them. In marking 
the tenons and mortices to the rails and 
posts, duo regard must be paid to the 
grooring, as this will take away a part 
of the tenon (see Fig. 1310). A }-in. 
mortice chisel will be a suitable tool to 
uie. If the screens are made of hardwood. 
It will be desirable to fix the panels with 
beading, as the polishing can be done 
better and more conveniently when the 
panels are out. A section showing this 
method of fixing the panels is given at 
Fig. I.-;41, while Fig. 1343 shows the re- 
bating of the posts and pails to receive 
the panels and heads. The pediment 
IS of j-in. stuff, screwed or nailed to the 
top rail; if of hardwood, it should be 
dowelled. 

Alternative Designs.— The construction 
of Fig. 13,»3 is similar to that of Fig. 1337. 
The oblong panel in the centre is made 
separaiely. The side posts are IJ in. wide ; 
Ijottom rail, 2 in. wide ; other pails, 1 in. 
wide. The stiles and pails of the centre 
framing are IJ in. wide, and are dovetailed 
togethep, the inner edges being grooved 
to receive the J-in. stui! panel. The frame 
should be glued together with the panel 
inserted ; and when dpy, the grooves on the 
outer edges, to receive the foup shaped 
panels surrounding it, should be made. 
The two short centre stiles and side pails 
are stump-tenoned into the frame. The 
ends of the pediment f (Fig. 1338) are 
housed ,V in. deep into the side posts, 
and the lower edge is connected to the top 
rail by means of dowels. In the screen shown 
at Fig. 1339 the posts and rails are mor- 
tised and tenoned as described for the first 
screen. The outer and innep posts are li 
in. wide ; bottom rail. 2^ in. wide ; Tai!= g 
and H, 1 in. wide. The shaped balustepa 
J are | in. thick, the ends being sunk J in. 



deep. The side cut-through panels are of 
J-in. stuff, inserted in grooves in the same 
way as those previously described. The 
centre portion of the screen has two small 
silk op mushn curtains, which may be drawn 
apart if desired. The suppo.ting pod for 
the curtains may be of bpass cased tubing 
of J m. diameter, and should be remov- 
able, so that the curtains may be taken 
off for cleaning. Bore holes in the innep 
posts to receive the rod, which should 
be Im. longer than the sight mea.^ure, 
making the hole in one side deeper than the 
other, as described for the brass balusters 
in Fig. 1337. Rings of J in. diameter ape 
sewn to the cnptaiu. The two side pediments 
are } in. thick, and may be &xed with screws 
dnven from the under side of the top rails. 
The shaped span-rail ovep the curtain pail 
may be fixed in the same way, but it should 
also be housed ,'„ in. deep into the innep 
posts. 

Fixing Window Screens.— The screens 
may be fi.xed to the window fpames with 
small brass glass-pUtes, or by means of 
dowels in the under edge of the bottom 
rails, and small brass sliding bolts fixed on 
the face of the top rails. 

Carved Fire-screens. 

Oak Screen with Cathedral Glass Panel.— 

The fire-screens about to be described 
are useful and ornamental. The screen 
shown in front and end elevations and 
plan by Figs. 1343, 1344, and 1345 is suit- 
able for the dining-room, library, or study 
and IS constructed of oak, with a panel 
of tinted " cathedpal " glass. The colour of 
the glass should be in harmony with the 
general colour scheme of the room in 
which the scpeen is phced. The measure- 
ments over all are 2 ft. 4 in. high, 2 ft. 3J in. 
wide, and SJ in. across the feet. The 
material required is as follows : Two stiles 
2 ft. 4 m. by 3 in. by 1 in. ; top rail, 1 ft. 
4 in. b^ 3} in. by 1 in. ; bottom rail, 1 ft. 
i;j in. by I in. ; two beads, 1 ft. B in. by » in. 
by i in. ; two beads, 1 ft. 4J in. by | in. 
by i in.; and fop the feet, two pieces 
8i in. by 2 in. by IJ in., and two pieces 6 in. 
by 2 ui. by IJ in. The brackets, and the 
small fpet attached to the middle of the 
bottom pail, are cut from one piece of j-in 



CABINETVVOKK AND JOINEBY. 






Fig. 1331. 
np. IS8T ud ISJl-mmtlMl. of Wliulaw SOIWIII. 



SCREENS. 



stuff. Alter th» timber is planed up 
square and true, the frame should be set out, 
and the ^ttern of the carving traced on. 
The carving should be done before the mor- 
tising ; if the mortising were done first, the 



The feet are halved together as shown in 
Fig. 1M-, which is an underneath new. 
The brackets and the small fret are cut 
with a band or bow saw, cleaned up with 
a spokeshave, files, and glass-paper, and 








Fl(. 1341.— 

Section tiiovtng 

Screen Panel 

secured witb 

Beading. 



Fig. 1840.— Oroovlng Screen Sails 
and Posts for Panels. 



Fig. 1342.— Screen Post and Bail 
Bebated for Beaded Pansli. 



carver's gouges would be driven through 
into the mortices. The carving is a full 
I in. in relief, and very simple in character, 
as shown by Fig. 1346. The frame is 
stop-rebated at the top and the bottom 
for the glabu. A tennn on the ends of the 
stiles runs through the feet and is wedged. 



fixed with dowels (see Figs. 1348 and 1349). 
Care should be exercised, when marking the 
pattern of the brackets on the board, to en- 
sure that the straight grain will follow the 
general line of the bracket, as indicitj^ in 
Fig. 1348. Fig. I.IW is an enlarged section 
taken at a {Fig. 1343), showing how the 



CABINETWOBK AKD JCINEBY. 





Rf. IM4. 

np. IMS to H4B.-EltT»tloil. ud Flu of 
"■"•il rirMmta with 01«n Pud. 



n*. IHI. 




H^it,. 



n«. im-Om«, Top Ud PW rt nprijht Of Pir..««i, 




vn^ 



Fig. ISBO,— 

Section of Fln- 

icreen 0prif bt at 

A (Fig. 18«). 



Fly. W47.-Uiideniwith ^.w of Flw-i 
Feet. 




SCBEENS. 




nc. 13U 



rigi. l»l to 1SM.-E1«.U0M u4 Flu of nrM<ir.ei. 
•Itk Utdid aiau PuiL 




Flf. 13M.-«««M or riri-Mma 
fmm. 




ng. UM— D«uil of Folding 
Tin-Mcnn. 




Rg. lug.-HaU Elantioi of 
Tin-nenm Fiwne 
17' 



Flgi. 1SB7 ud ISSS—EIoTatlon ud Han of 
Folding Fln-ionon. 



Pig. IS»9.— Mothod of Cutting Hro-rerMn 
Btllei. 



1 



DM 





CABEfETWOBK AND JOIKEBY. 



gl«H i« Mcund with bndi. Whra the 
tcnta U glued np and cleaned. i« ihouU 
be finiahnl with No. 1) ilan-nper, snd then 
fumiipttod iind wax.poliiiheil. 

Wtlnut Screen with Lewlad Gtui Puel.— 
Figi. I.'UI, J.'IS" and l.'I.VI are retpectiveljr 



•tiles, which alio form the outeide {eet, 
are 2 It. 2| in. I>y 0) in. : the top nil ia 
1 ft. U in. by 4| in. ; and the bottcra roil is 
1 (t. 41 in. by 4 in. by IJ in. The (rama 
i» monlded with a l-in. otoIo, rebated, 
mitered. mortiaed and tenoned togpt' 




Fig. 13«4.~IpaDdrtt for 
Carved Arrb. 



Fig. Hai. pij. ,„i 

Flgi. ISSl and ««».— EhTaUoa and Enlarged Tertloal Section of Oarrad Aroh for Corridor. 




front and end [elevations and plans of a 
drawing-room screen in polished walnut. 
It is 2 ft. 4 in. high, 2 ft. wide, and 9j in. 
across the middle feet. This screen, with 
the eiception of the heads, is prep-arrti 
entirely from IJ-in. walnut. The two 



shown in Figs. 1354 and 1355, the latter 
figure also giving in detail the carved orna- 
ment. The cross feet of this screen are 
in the middle, and are dovetailed into the 
bottom rail as ahona in Fig. 1156. The 
leaded-glass panel is made up of simple 



tomu of rolouml (ku. A tnilb ol kUih 
i« luggntcd lor tha centre circle, 

lUhocuir FoUUnt Sctotn.— Fig, 1.137 
•how* u elevation of a three-fnid dnwing- 



SCBEEN8. 




l>y 'H in, ; bottom nil, in. by 2| in. Pot 
the ouliida fr-nie., two hanging utile.. 
' "■ j" '"• '<>■ U in. . one piece for the 
•taped itilea ol tlw ontiide fnmee (we 




rif. 13«T.— Kej-blook for Cured 
Arch. 




rig. ists.— D.IUU ef Opper Put 
of Aicb. 



Fie. 1311. 



Fig. lS6ti. 



ngi 1SI6 u<l ls«e.-EIeT.Uon ud VerUoU SKtlon of Cund Aioh .Itli Eloctrlc 
Uglit Pendftnt. 



room fire-screen of mahogany, stained 
dark and polished, Fig, 1358 showing 
the plan of the screen partly folded. It 
18 2 ft. 9 in. wide, 2 ft. Ugh, and is pre- 
pared from 1-in. rtsff. The quaiitities 
are: Two stiles for the middle frame, 
1 ft. lOJ in. by H in. by 1 in. ; top rail, 9 in. 



Fig. 1359), 1 ft. 11 in. by 5 in. by 1 in. ; 
two top rails. 7J in. by 3 in. ; two bottom 
mils, 7} in. by 2 in. When the stufi is 
planed up, the frames should be set out, 
cut to the required shapes, and cleaned with 
spokeshave and glass-paper. The rebating 
should be done if possible on a vertical 



39« CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 

r^y ^r^tlr ^t^ tr z »™"~-'" ^"'■^ '•' ^.y w,„d.w.. 

cut to the curves with a fret saw. A tem- Corridor*, etc. 

plate the full 8i» of the glass should be care- The openings of bay windows may be 
fully drawn before the leaded lights are greatly enriched by the formation of arches, 

which can be designed in such a manner 
as not to exclude the light. Long narrow 
corridors may also be beautified with a 
few pretty arches. The designs about to 
be described will be found particuhirly 
useful and suitable for the decoration of 
restaurants and lounges. 




Fig. 1869. 



Fig. 1370. 



Figs. 136ft ud 13T0.— Elflvation and Vertical 

Section of Arch with Stained Olan 

Spandrili. 

made, to insure the lines of the leaves 
following on easily and truly from the 
centre panel to the outside panels. An 
enlarged section and detail of the construc- 
tion is given at Fig. 1360. This screen is 
hung with l|-iD. brass butts. 




Fig. 1371.— Kay-block for 
Arch. 



Fig. 1379.— Detail of Upper Fart of Arch. 

Carved Arch for Corridor.—Fig. 1361 
would look welt in fumed oak, and a 
good position for it would be the end of a 
corridor leading from the hall. It is a semi- 
circular arch, prepared from 4-in. stuff, and 
is rebated to receive the carved spandrils, 
and tenoned into the key-block. Illus- 
trations of the shield and spandril are pre- 
sented by Figs. 1363 and 1364. The 
lower part of the key-block is covered by 
the carved shield (see Fig. 1362, which 
represents an enlarged vertical section 
taken through the middle of the arch), 
and the upper part has a cornice mitered 
round it. The construction is clearly shown 
in the illustration. The head runs through 
the key-block. A handsome design for 
the caps is shown in elevation, together 
with the stops at the top and bottom of 
the flutes on the pilaster and the base 
moulding. 



SCREENS. 



Carved Arch'with Electric Light Pendant. 
—A very pretty arch, with an electric light 
pendant, i> shown by Figs. 1365 and 1366, 
Fig. 1367 representing a profile view of the 
key-block and Fig. 1368 a detail showing 




i 

Fig. 137S. Fig. 1874. 

FigB. 137S and 1374.— Eleration and V«rtloal 
Seotitm of Ligbtly Conitrnotod Arch. 



trating the manner in which the ohsmien 
are cut to leave a £ancy edge. 

Arch with Stained Glau Spandrilf. — ^A 
novel idea for an arch is Fig. 1369, Fig. 
1370 being a vertical section at K (Fig. 1369). 




Fig. 1370.— Elevation of Stveroly Designed 
Arcb. 




Fig. 1376. -Arch for Opening of Bay in Drawing-room. 



the construction, while E (Fig. 13(55) is a hori- 
zontal section. The carving on the span- 
(iril represents a lily and foliage ; and the 
pendant, which may be of armour-bright 
steel, copper, or brass, is in keeping with 
the carving. Fig. 1366 represents a ver- 
tical section taken at F (Rg. 1365) and an 
elevation of the intrados of the urcb, iiiua- 



This arch should be of 4-in. oak. Stained 
glass is used for the spandrila, and an electric 
fight is fixed between the two glass panels 
on each side, ensuring a very pretty effect at 
night when the light is switched on. The 
position of these lights is shown in the illus- 
tration of the framework. A profile view of 
the key-biock is given at Fig. 1371 ; a detail 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINERY. 



i 



f 




rig. 1877. Hg. 1J7,. 

Hp. 1877 ml 1878.— EtoiraMon mud Vertloal 
StcUon of anotliir Ughtly CoMtruotwl Aroh. 

showing the construction at Fig. 1372- 
Fig. 1360 includes a horizontal section at j.' 



Lightly Conitructnl Arch. — Fig. 1373 
shows a deaign for a lighter and less expen- 
sive arch, to he prepared from IJ-in. stuff, 
with a horijontal section at l; Fig 1374 
being a vertical section through the centre 
of Fig. 1373. 

Severely Designed Arches.— For an arch 
on somewhat severe hues Fig. 1375 will be 
found a useful design. This should be in 
4-in. oak ; m is an enlarged vertical section. 
Fig. 1370 represents a good design for 
the opemng of a bay in a drawing-room 
with a horizontal section at s. 

Another UghUy Constructed Arch.— An- 
other design for a Ught arch is repro- 
duced at Pig. 1377, with a horizontal section 
at o. Fig 1378 being a vertical section 
through the centre of Fig. 1377. 

Arch for Restaurant or Lounge.— A very 
nch arch, for a restaurant or lounge, is 
! ustrated at Fig. 1379, with an enlarged 
Illustration of the carving (Fig. 1,380) a 
detail elevation q, and vertical sections R 
and 8. This should be prepared from 3-in. 
stuff, which will allow good relief for the 
carvmg on both sides. 




Fig. la7».-El«Tatloii of Arch Ibr Kntanrant or Lotugt. 



PLANT, FLOWER, AND LAMP STANDS. 



Hardwood Palm Stand. 

The palm stand shown in general view 
by Fig. 1381, and in front elevation hy 
Fig. 1382, may be made of almost any 
kind of hardwood. The legs are I J in. 
square at the top, tapering to | in. square 
at the bottom. The top is | in. thick, and 
should be moulded round the edge to the 
section shown in Fig. 1383. The shelf also 
is f in. thick, and should li<.ve a hollow 
worked round the edge, as shown at Fig. 
1384. The comers of the shelf should be 
fit out on the slant, so as to fit round the 
legs. 

Fntted Rails.— To set out the fretted rails 
under the top (see Fig. 1385), proceed is 
follows : Draw the centre line a b, and a<^ross 
this draw the lines c and d, with a space 
of 5 in. between them. Mark the portions 
of the legs as indicated by the dotted lines, 
and then, by drawing lines parallel to the 
iiisides of the legs and ^ in. away, the sloping 
ends of the rail are obtained. From the 
point where D cuts a b, measure ^ in. up, 
this being the rise of the are which forms the 
bottom edge of the rail. Join this point 
to E by a straight line, and bisect it, and 
continue the line obtained till it cuts 
A B prolonged ; the point of intersection is 
the centre for the curve of the arc. Draw 
another arc | in. above and parallel to this 
one. Next, from the line c, and "-n a b, 
mark a point 3^ in. down, and with this point 
as centre, and a radius of 2| in., draw the 
semicircle. Bisect the radius on hne A b, and 
draw the horizontal line p ; then, with 
centres o o, and a radius of 5} in., draw 
the two arcs, and round ofE the comers as 
shown. The rail below the shcU (sec Fig. 
1386) can be set out in a similar way. 



Top, Shelf, etc.— The top of the stand is 
secured to the legs by means of four short 
dowels, one in each leg (see section. Fig. 
1387). Two housings, 5 in. long bv ^ in. 
wide by J in. deep, are cut on the tops of the 
legs to take the ends of the rails. The top, 
legs, and rails shot 1 be well glued together 
and blocked in the angles underneath as 
shown. A good method of seciiring the 
shelf and rails to the legs is shown at Figs. 
1388 and 1389. The small blocks h are cut 
to the slmpo shown, and screwed to the under 
side of the shelf. The leg is notched out 
directly under the shelf, as shown in Fig. 
1389. The back of the block should be cut 
a trifle short, to ensure the whole being 
brought up tight together when the screws 
are inserted in the legs. The shelf and rails 
should also be glued and blocked undemeath. 

Flower Stand with Shelf and 
Splayed Legs, 

The flower stand illustrated by Fig. 1390 
is suitable for a bay window, 'the height 
from the floor to the top of the stand being 
3 ft. 3 in. Any of the hardwoods, thor- 
oughly seasoned and free from defects, may 
be selected in preference to deal, pine, or 
whitewood. The legs splay outwards diag- 
onally. 80 a full-size template must lie 
madf ' m thin stuff for marking them out 
economically on the plank. The original 
size will be 2J in. square in section when 
cut by the band saw ; but as the facets will 
stand the wrong way for the rails, the angles 
must be worked down to form facets going 
parallel to the sides of the stand. This 
will be more readily understood by referring 
to the dotted lines in Fig. 1391. The 
finished size sliuuld be 1^ in. from the top 
down to the lower shelf, where they are 



! 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



1. I 



ii 



gradually rounded and tapered, widening 
out again at the feet. On reference to A 
in the section (Kg. 1392) it will be seen that 
a rail supports the lower shelf, there being 
another on the other side also ; and in the 
fronts, facing the window and room, the 
shaped brackets take the place of the rails. 
Both the top and the lower side rails are 
stub-tenoned to the legs in the usual rfay ; 
but the top front rails are dovetailed to the 



sufficiently to clear the shelf and drop in its 
proper groove; by this method the top 
rails may all be mortised and tenoned as 
shown in Fig. 1394. The top is of stufl 1 in. 
thick, framed and rebated to receive tiles 
(see Figs. 1395 and 1396). A aiet runs 
across to support the tiles in the centre joint. 
The tiles are fixed with glazier's putty, and 
the rails are pinned to the legs with brass 
wire, the holes being stopped with either 





Fig. 1S8S.— Section throagh Top and 
BaU of Palm Stand. 



rig. 18»4.— 

Section of Palm Stand 

Skeif. 




Fig. Uai.— Hardwood Palm 
Stand. 



legs as shown in Figs. 1391 and 1393, this 
method allowing the fretted panel to be 
placed in its groove in the shelf while the rail 
above is drop^>ed to its position. The side 
shelves are continuous, or in one piece, 
screwed to the rails A (Fig. 1392), and grooved 
to fit over the shaped brackets, which are in 
turn haunched and tenoned to the legs ; 
the mortices should alternate or break 
joint with the mortices on the opposite side 
of the leg. The fretted panels are housed 
about I in. to the shelf and i in. to the rails, 
or the rails may be grooved about i in. 
deep and the panel pushed up in the groove 



Fig. MM. 

Elevation of Hardwood Palm 

Stand. 

coloured hard stopping or wood-dust and 
glue. All screws should be secretly driven. 
The method of fixing the top is shown in 
Fig. 1392. 

Lamp Pedestal or Fern Stand. 

The stand illustrated by Fig. 1397 may be 
utiUsed as a himp pedestal or as a fem stand ; 
«nd if the top were made to hinge, the gallen- 
could be silk-lined to form a lady's work- 
table. Of course, in the bttet case, thv 
height should not exceed 2 ft, 8 in., whi!i> 
the width may be conveniently increased 
by 3 in. or 4 in. For either of the first- 



PLANT, FLOWEB, AND LAMP STANDS. 



401 



named atticlm, the height should be bora 
3 ft. 3 in. to 3 ft. 6 in., and the legs IJ in. 
square at the top, tapering to 1 in. square 
at the bottom. The legs are 7 in. apart 
where the shoulders of the top rails abut, 
and 1 ft. 2 in. apart at the base. Set out 
half-size on a board, and get the bevel 
for the shoulders of the rails and mortices. 
The mortices for the middle rails should be 




from j-in. stuff. The le^ may be slackened 
back off the tenons while the shelves are 
being fitted. Square off the dowel boles 
for the turned balusters in the shelf and 
top rails ; remove, and bore holes in the 
shelf and rails ; also counterbore and 
bore holes for screws at the angle shown 
in Fig. 1399 for securing the top, which 
is 1 ft. square by J in. thick. These holes 



Tig. I8«6.— Lowsr KaU of Palm stand. 



He. ISSB.— Upper Ball of Hardwood Palm Stand. 





Pi». ISST.— Plan of Comer 

of Palm Stand, diowiiig 

DowoL 



Fig. 1888.— Soctioiltliroogli 

Palm Stiad Leg and 

Bails andor Shelf. 




set off 10 m. from the top, and the mortices 
for the lower rails 1 ft. 6 in. from the bottom 
hne. The rails are IJ in. by IJ in. wide. 
Cut the tenons and mortices and try to- 
gether, making adjustments as necessary 
to the shoulders to obta^i a fair bearing. 
The top rails are dropped in, being housed 
i m. at the top edge of the rail to nothing 
at the lower edge on account of the splay 
of the legs (see Fig. 1398). The mortices 
jitt open-ended. The dimensions can now 
be obtained for the shelves, which are made 



Fig. 1389.— Honaing in Palm 
Stand Leg for Slielf Baili. 



should afterwards be stopped. To give a 
finish to the stand, beaded or reeded edges 
may be worked round the shelves and rails 
with a hand-beading tool (see Figs. 1400 
to 1404). The work may be poHshed in 
parts, but care should be taken when joint- 
ing-np to wipe off the surplus glue before 
it has time to set properly. All the rails 
may be pinned from the inside, as shown 
in Fig. 1394 (p. 402). The turned balusters 
are tapered at their dowel ends, and are 
fitted in the second shelf first ; the top rails 



I 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 




PLANT, FLOWEE, AND LAMP STANDS. 



•re then placed in poiitian over them, and 
pinned on tenoni, and finally the top is 
•ecured by aonva driven up through the 
rails Jrom outside as in Pig. 1399. 




Tig. Uli''.— Ump PadMtal or Fm Staid. 



[I 



Fig. 1400.— Beading for Lamp PedMtal 
BaUa 

Plant Stand with Decorative Panels. 

The plant stand illustiated at Fig. 1405 
may be made of almost any hardwood. The 
panel spaces lend ihemselves to a variety 
of treatment, such as carving, repousse work, 
fretwork, or inlaying ; or ornamental tiles 



may be used. A full'siibd section should 
be prepared before starting the work, the 
leat&ng dimensions being given in the iUus- 
trationa. Fig. 140<> is an enlarged part 




Fig. 1404. 



FigB. 1401 to 1404.— 
Houldingi for Lamp 
Pedestal Shelves, etc 



Fig. 1399.— Part 

Vertical Section of 

Lamp Pedestal 



vertical section through the centre. The 
posts are IJ in. square, and are mortised 
and stop-rebated on the insides (see Fig. 
1407) to receive the rails and panels. The 
rails should have the edges rebated, the 
tenons cut on the ends, and be fitted to 
the posts, before being shaped. The two 



i 



if- ( 



iM 



■ 




OABINETWOBK AND JOINEBT, 



Plf. 14M.— Plut Btsnd mth DMontin 




Hg. lUT.— Shapad Btlll bad to Foita of 
Flint StamL 




Fl{. 1406.— Tortbia iMtlai of 
Plant Stand. 




Tig, MOt.— Joint of Plant Stand'! 
towoT Balla 



PLANT. FLOWER. AND LAMP STANDS. 



illl 




Fl(. 14M.— Altnuttn Shape 

(U Top of PUBt (taiul 

Pott 




Ttg. Mio. -Oarrod Pmol for PUmt BtaaiL 




Fig. M19. 
nga l«l anil 1413.— Bapoiu<< Paul for Plant Staad. 




Fig. lus.— Borinntai Saction 

tlmagh Plant Stand'! Poit 

and Wooden Panela 




Fig. Itic-Horiiontal Section 

tlmnigli Plant Stand'! Poit 

and Wooden Panel! 

{AlteraatiTs Design}. 



«M 



!■! 



towor raik are tenonixl into the prnti (h» 
Fig. U0«) the top edge, being lot C 
th. gronnd. The ,h.ped op6m rail * i, 
connected to the lower rail, by Up-dov." 
««ling It mto the under »ide o< the raiU,7. 
•»»»■■ at Fig. im. Por .upporting thj 



OABIKXTWOBX AND JODfEBY. 




fifJu'' J*"! .?"»"« !»«« »« obtained 
fromWocfc. „< he „n., ««,, ..^ ^^ Jf^ 

•MTOd with dowel, let into the bh>ck. 

and poit. about | in. and 1 in. ropoctivelv 

^alternative methM of treating the top. 

of the pott. I. ,hown at Kg. 1400 jj joi. 



Pig. I41»._p«im Stud or Jardlaltee », ■ 
Sbapnl Lag.. 

tray on which the flower vase or pot is to 
stand, three laths, 9 in. by 1 in. ^ 1 in. 
are notched mto two of. the rails, and screwed 
at each end (see Figs. 1406 and 1407) 
The moulded blocks for the feet are 21 in 
square by 1 in. thick, and should be Led 
with j-m birch dowels about 2 in. long, 
the dowel holes being bored right throng 




Kg, l«e.-P»!jn Stud or JaitUnUrt with 
Flaix Lagi. 

in this way, the posts will have to be cut 
1 m. longer Fig. 1410 is a daffodil design 
for a carved wood panel. It will be ad- 
visable to have some of the flowers, or a 
good photograph of them, close at hand 
.',^ c«rrag. The iin» ruled across the 
outhned half of the demgn are to be i in 
apart ; this also applies to Fig. 1411. The 



PLANT, FLOWEB, AND LAMP STANDS. 



urving ihouU be dost in biiljr bold nlief, 
the ground being, Mjr, ^\ in. deep. The 
flowen end bulbi il;ould be the moit pro- 
minent parti, and the kavee ihould be 
kept faiilj' fl»t. Theie peneli ihouId be 
Mcured with snull beading (lee Fip. 1406 and 
1413). The boriiontal beads an mitered 




rif. 141T. TnrUtei tor Pain llaad Ufi. 




Flf. X41S.— Crou SeotloB through BaUi and 
Panel! of Palm Stand. 




*»7 

at the angtet, and are fixed before the 
ongle beada, which may require Kribing 
a little at the ends to ma'lcc them tit nicely. 
Fig. 1411 ii an alternative deiign lor a 
tepouaii panel. The lection of the railed 
portion! ihould follow the conne of an 
ellipie rather than the arc of a circle. The 




Plf. 14M.~ Jolat for Inntr Bottom BaUi of 
Palm Itaad. 







iF! 



Pl(. liai.— Final of Palm Stand. 



Pit. 14H.— Part Vortical Section of Palm Stand. 



f 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



• 








s 


i 


a 


I 


r 


i 


1 




1 

! 
* , 

i 
i- 
i 
i ' 


} 
I 

i 

i 



copper pUtt ihould h» Wind np with * 

*■ i J"^ •""*' '*" ''K- "")• ■«™«' 
with brading in the arnne way m the carved 
wood iMnela. Pig. 1412 ihowi s lection 
through the iwpoiun^ panel on the line x x 
(Fig. HU). The metal tmy or pon ahould 
he of auch * aiw aa to enable it to be con- 
veniently withdrawn at any time. It 
ahonid he provided on the inaide with two 
drop ringa for Ufting purpoaea, and after- 
warda painted with two co«ta ol enamel. 
The woodwork of the itand may Im finiihetl 
by atsining, or polishing, aa deiired. 

Palm SUnds or JardlnMrci. 

Figa. 1415 and 1416 ahow perapective 
viewa of palm aUnda conatructed of hord- 
wood. The stand ahown by Fig. 141B has 
ornamental panels which may bo carved in 
wood, hammered in repouasi, or orna- 
mented with gesso. The four panelai are 
not necessarily olifcc, and the aeoondarv- 
pancU in Fig. 1415 have heart-shaped omo'- 
ment in low relief. In Fig. 141(i, carved 
ornament is dispensed with, *he panels 
being centre-beaded, but a lower shelf 
and curved rails are introduced and relieve 
the squareness. Well-seasoned American 
whitewDod, or satin wahiut, may he xaed, 
both being unusually free from knots and 
eosy to work; also they take stain and 
polish readily. For Fig. 1415, prepare 
the material as follows : Four legs, 3 ft. 
long, 1} in. square in the rough ; the ll}-in. 
plain part is 1} in. square ; the thick part 
of the cabriole is 11-in. square section. 
Draw the curve for the legs on cardboard, 
and cut out with a sharp knife, thus making 
a plus-and-minus template (Fig. 1417). 
Trim the wood up square and set off the 
vertical distances, then fix the lower tem- 
plate (Fig. 1117) to the legs with a couple of 
drawing pins, and mark the cur\-ea on the 
four sides of each leg with a pencil, care- 
fully working away the surplus wood. 
While finishing, try the upper template on 
the curves, this greatly assisting in getting 
them all aUke. Where the bottom rails 
are mortised, the legs are 1 in. square, 
tapering to J in. and spreading to 1 J in. for 
the feet. The fiuiak arc dowcUed on, 
and are IJ in. square in the largest part 
Cut the mortices in the legs to receive 



stamp-tenons from the nils; the tenant 
thottU only fit hand-tight, at drinng it 
Uable to tplit the legi ; rebate the rail, and 
legs on the intide to receive the panels, which 
are aeoured with bradded slips (see Fias 
1418 tad 1419). The dielfl. pB,p.^ 
from board U in. by t in., and rests on 
fillets secured to the rails (see Rg. 1410). 
Fig. 1420 shows the joint for the inner 
bottom rails. These are half-dovetailed 
to the outer rails, and stopped | in. from 
the top Mlge ; use the glue thin and very hot 
when jointing up. In Fig. 1416 the legs 
are parallel except hek>w the lower shelf, 
where they taper to ^^; in. square and swell 
out agam for the feet. The finiolt arc cut 
from separate pieces of wood, 2 in. high and 
1} in. square, and are dowellcd to the legs. 
The upper and middle raiU are | in. thick 
by 2 m. deep, and the bottom rails sup- 
porting the shelf are } in. thick by 2 in. 
deep, the top and bottom shelves being pre- 
pared from 11-in. byj-in. and 12-in. by l-in 
stuff respectively. Fig. 1421 represents a 



panel design. 

Coiumnar Palm Stand. 

The palm stand shown in front elevation 
and sectional plan by Figs. 1422 and 1423 
is of somewhat novel design, ond may be 
made of any suitable hardwood. 'The 
top measures lOJ in. sqimre over the mould- 
ings, and is formed by uttiiching mouldings 
A (see Figs. 1424 and 1423). mitered at the 
comers, to a piece B. which is about 4 in. 
thick. Immediately below a, four moulded 
pieces c, mitered at the comers, are attached, 
and in order to secure a lighter appearance 
are cut away, as at d (Fig. 1422), to a curve 
which balances the contour of the moulding. 
Screwed to the pieces o are four columns e 
(Fig. 1424), fitted close up to which are angle 
blocks F, as shown in the inverted plan 
(Fig. 1425). The parts o (Fig. 1424) arc short 
pieces of mitered moulding. The columns, 
which are 2 ft. 2 in. long and of l}-in. square 
-ection at the largest part, are attached 
to the base as shown in Fig. 1426. The 
square pieces H have tongues along each 
edge, fitting in grooves in the mitered 
mouldings j. At each comer the pieces H 
are cut away (see Fig. 1427), and screws 
moy be used to connect the columns firmly 



PLANT, FLOWEB* AND L.VJIP STANDS. 




Flgi. 1423 and 1438.— ElaTfttion ud HoiiionUl Tig. 143S.— Vntioa Saetloit of BaM of Ci^anuur 
BtetioB of ColtUDBu- Palm Stand. BUnd. 

1« 



is;ir 



410 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



to these pieces. The (om- curved base 
piece. K (Fig. I42.i) are fastened to the 
ports alwve with screws. 

Table Plant Stand. 

hJr P'??' '*»'^« f" th" table are shown 
by Figs. 1428 and 1429. The stand showt 




in Fig. 1428 may be nude in any wood 
to accoid with the fumitnxe of the room. 
It It IS to be pohshed, use oak, mahoaanv 
or wabut ; ,f stained and varnished, S 
pine; li enamelled, white or red deal, or 
kaun wood. The material should be thor- 
oughly dry, a, the article when finished 




Pig. im-AltMnatlv. Ornament f»r Top of 
Tablo Flut stud. 



Fig. Mtt-Frout ElevaUon of Tablo Plant 
Stasil. 




Hg. MM. -Part Horiiontal 

Bootloa of Table PUnt 

Skand (mo Pig. 1438). 




Hg. l«..-Pro«t Elo^tlon of Mor. Elabo^t, Tau, PUnt g,aB4 



PLANT, FtOWER, AND LAMP STANDS. 







^T ''r"'«d. The base should be of 
thoroughly seasoned wood, cut out to the 
»hape_^sh„„„atPig. im It is to be 7}.. 
1 in hvT"' ^''"IK.the e«ended comers 

fil k u r ?""" """ "'>'<•'' the tiles 

imttom of the base. A groove i in. deen 
hould be cut in the base*as shotn at Kg^ 
Uio. to take the tiles. The top must 



„ "^' "»• Tig. 143.. 

Hg» MM «.d .4M._Part HortioM., g„u„, ^ 

PlMt stand (m He. Mas. * 




and i m. thick, moulded round the edge 
«nd nutered at the comers. The corned 
knobs may have either a pin or a screw 
which passing through this top moulding," 
s fastened to the pillars. The Mn. square 
tdes should be slid into pbco before th^ 
npper moulding is fixed together. The 
ornament on top of the upper moulding may 

of the ma^cr. It is cut out in fretwork 

™?tl /!L- '"^ 8"'*' "> alternative 
pattern for this ornament. Fig. 1429 shows 
he elevation o a pknt stand slightly 
more ornamental m design than the one 



Hg. 1MI-D«»ll, of Comer of 
Plant Stand. 



be of the same shape and size as the base 
but 14 m wide, and is grooved on the mS 
side to take the 6-in. square tiles The 
comer pdlars may be d'owelled Tnto The 
top. The ornamental pillars at the extended 
comers are tamed, and are fixed by pSs „ 
screws as shown at Fig 1435 a ^ ?, 
pUin nioulding should be fitted on the Zer 

side of the base round the tiles, and if?t is 

be'^'^'/r^l':'"''' fr^'-o'k Bcrols may 
be fixed to this stand with good effect 

I?f t • "' f/*"^ '" ""^"' st*ndfXuld bo 
quiet m pattern and colour ; or really natoal 
paintings of flowers wovld Wk well 



# 



JEWEL BOXES. 



.' I 



Jewel Casket with Combination Loclc. 

The casket illustrated by Fig. I43(i (p. 4U) 
is intended for holding jewellery, private 
papers or correspondence, and' personal 
nicknaclcs. Fig. H.Kishowsasideelevation ; 
Fig. 1437 part plan; Fig. 1438 an end 
elevation ; Fig. I43il part section throukh 
side of casket; Figs. 1440 and 1441 re- 
duced vertical and horizontal sections ; Fig. 
1442 shows an enlarged detail o£ spoon 
moulding A (Fig. 1438) ; Fig. 1443 enlarged 
section of moulding B (Fig. 14.38) ; Fig. 1444 
lock pkte ; and Figs. 144.5 and 144(i plan 
and section of lock in position. The casket 
is made of mahogany overlaid with fretted 
oak, and ordinary carved oak picture- 
frame moulding, combined with gold spoon 
picture moulding, is used in its ornamenta- 
tion. It is fitted with a five-dial number 
lock of simple construction. As the 
casket cannot be opened until all the indi- 
cator hands are pointing to the correct 
figures, it is impossible for anyone not 
knowing the combination to open it, espe- 
cially if it is well fitted without shake or 
play. 

The Box.— The box measures 1 ft. 8 in. 
by llj in. by llj in. high over all, the body, 
cover, and bottom being of J-in. mahogany' 
The body is 1 ft. ."ij in, long bv <JJ in, wide 
by 9 in. deep, and should be dovetailed 
together for greater strength, blind dove- 
tails not being necessarj-, as the bo.x ends 
will be covered by the fretwork overlav. 
The cover and bottom each measure 1 ft. 
8 in. by llj in., and must be well rounded 
on all edges, as shown iu the elevation 
views and in the section of the box side. 
it is best to fix the bottom in position with 



fine screws from the inside, the heads being 
let into th. sides flush. A piece of mahogany 
A in. thick is required to fit nicely inside 
the bo-v ; its grain should cross that of the 
cover, to which it should lie glued and 
screwed centmlly each wa,, thus stiffen- 
ing the cover and enabUng the lock to catch 
the box front some little way down from 
the top edge. 

Fretwork.— .Some oak fretwood, of ^'.-in. 
or J-in. thickness, will next be required for 
the fretted side, end, and cover pieces. 
The side and end pieces should be prepared 
the full depth of the box sides, and should 
be fitted in place with mitre joints before 
the pattern is marked out and cut. Cut 
out the cover piece 1 ft. 7| in. by llJ in., 
and well round the edges on one side only, 
as shown in the elevations and in the section 
of the side. Next mark out the fretwork 
designs on them all, these being enlarged 
from the drawing by an ordinary panto- 
graph. Only half of the top is shown in 
the plan (Fig. 1437). the other half being 
the same with the exception of the centre 
where the lock-face comes. In the other half 
this space is filled in by another ornamental 
circle, making five on that side. The end 
pieces have a j-in. space allowed all round 
the plates of the brass drop-hundles ; this 
should be marked out to suit the pattern 
of handles to be used ; these, of lourse. 
should be bought beforehand, and may be 
of brass or gun-metal. 

Moulding!.— After fret-cutting all the 
designs, the pieces should be secured in 
position with joiner's fine brads, punched in. 
and the holes filled in with putty ; but screws 
should be used in the p.trfs to be covered 
kter by the mouldings. IVhen they are all 



JEWEL BOXES. 



fixed some J-m. gold spoon moulding should 
have the back pa-t forming the rebate cut 
awac as mdicated by the dotted line across 
the enlarged sectional view (Fig. 1442) 
After being mitered at tho corners, this 
sh juld be filed to the top and bottom edges 
of the box aU round, the top mouldings fiush 
with the upper edges of the box, and the 
lower pieces in the angle formed by the 
juaction of the bottom and sides. A J-in. 
gold spoon moulding should also have a 
rebate cut away in a simiUr manner, end 
should bo mitered and fixed m the outside 
of the cover, J in. back from the edges of 
the netted top, as shown in the phin and 
elevations. A shp of mahogany Jin. thick 
and J in. wide, having its outside edge well 
rounded, should next be mitered and fixed 
on the inside edges i i the gold spoon mould- 
ing on the sides to protect it, as shown in 
the section of the side and in the elevations 
Some li-in. carved oak mouHing, of any 
suitable pattern, is now required, and the 
backing of this is also cut away as shown by 
the dotted line in the enlarged sectional 
view of the oak moulding (see Fig. 1443) 
If the remaining carved front is now over 
t m. thick, it should be planed down to this 
thickness, care being taken not to injure 
the pattern. Then mitre-joint the ends, 
and brad in position next to the mahogany 
sUps on the sides, and all round inside the 
spoon moulding on the cover. Those mould- 
ings, if nicely fitted, will give a handsome 
appearance to the jewel casket at very shizht 
expense. 

Cover Hinges.— The cover should next 
be hmged, butt-hinges. If in. wide, being 
used ; these will be of suflicient width to 
reach across the spoon moulding and the top 
edge of the box back, thus adding to the 
stabihty. 

Combination Lock.— The five-dial lock 
(Figs. 1444 to 1446) is of simple design 
and, if weU fitted, very effective in working, 
ft 18 a job for a metalworker, who can easily 
work from the following instructions. The 
mam bolt is 5| in. long by 3i in. wide by 
k "".'j I ■ '*■ ""hoginy pattern of it 
should be made sUghtly larger, to allow for 
contraction and fiUng ; i in. longer and a 
^ I'.T m. wider will be suilideul. It 
should be cast in good tough gun-metal 



413 

and after being cleaned sh ,uld be finished 
all over with a fine file. The rive brass rollers 
I J .'"' '^'i"' "■"• '""«<!, or may be 
IMrted off a sohd bar in the lathe. Thev 
should be IJ in. m diameter, J in. thick, with 
T.-in. centre holes. The diaU and hands 
should be cut from stout sheet brass. Tho 
dials should be turned IJ in. diameter, with 
Ti-in. centre holes; and the hands should 
J m'j •"■ ,^' "'"' T.-in. centre holes 

ttr^lil",""""-- •'^" '^'"^ •'"k" »'«"'ld bB " 
tight fit for a piece of ,V-in. diameter brass 
wire. A few inches of brass tubing, to loim 
lushes for the central pins, will be necessary. 
The wire should fit the tube exactly If 
this size tubmg cannot be conveuientiv 
obtained the bushes may be bored and 
turned from a small bras.^ rod in the lathe. 

VhTt uT 'Hu'°*' '" ■'« ™"™ '» take 
the bolt lugs. They should be i in. deep 
and accurately fitted. When ready, the 
bolt and rollers should be assembled in their 
correct positions on the inside of the cover. 
I he two outsioe holding lugs of the bolt are 
iJaced just level with the outside front 
edge of the cover stiBening piece, as shown 
in the view of the lock (Fig. 1440), the 
toller lugs bemg in position for openinn 
the box-that IS, slid into the roller slots 
When all 18 ready, file off one end of the brass 
wire qmte square, dip it into some colourinir 
matter and carefully mark off the centre 
holes of the rollers by passing down the wire 
and turmng round in the holes. This done 
marK the centre of each e.^ctly, and care- 
fully bore holes through the cover to fit 
the bush tubing tight, the holes to be 
oored through exactly square. Next plug 
these holes outside the cover with hardwood 
and, with a centre-bit to fit them, let in the 
dial plates flush with the niohogany surface 
leaving the oak fret cover with its U-in' 
holes for dials to protect the brass hands 
when fixed. The dials should have the 
figures engraved or stamped on them with 
small steel stamps. Fix the dials in their 
recesses by hammering them home, after 
coating the backs with some shellac cement • 
then cut smtable lengths off the bush tubing 
and dnye them from inside the cover to meet 
the dial plates, takins care not to «hift tho 
plates, and using the same kind of cement as 
liefore. Next cut the centre pins to length 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEEY. 




u 



is 
1 1 
Si 

il 




JEWEL BOXES. 




Fl(. 1440. 




ng. 1441. 



ri». I4»».— Ttrtl(!«I Baetlon thnragli L 
■U" of Jtml C(ukot 




nji 1440 and I441.-T.rtlcal ud Bori«aitol Button. 
" J«nl Oadtat. 




Tig. 1448. -Vertical Sactioa of Jewal Caikat 
iHKSk In FodtloD. 



PlJ. 144».-Plan of Jeval Caikat Lock 
in FoaitloiL 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEHY. 



abont IJ in. and solder one into each roller 
Hugh with the ends; then pa,, the pin, 

1 ?.• "" '""'""' ''>'° ">« <^'>ver, and 
atter fihng to the correct length, mlder on 
each hand in it, allotted pUce when the 
bo t 1, in the opening position. Two braw 
hold-down chp, are then bent to fit over 
the straight centre shank of the bolt as 
snown in the view of the lock (Fig. lUi) 
hole, being drilled and the bolt screwed on. 
A hole i in. m diameter should be drilled 
in the bolt in the position indicated by the 
dotted circle, and a piece of brass wire should 



c^osingthe be- otherwiseafailure of memory 
may necessitate forcingthe box open. 8h"ttU 

t Z,U rr '"'^r'y "> «°™ the box. 
in7Jil ^ 'f " '» ^"^^ -I*- "■« bottom 
and afterwards make a new one 

be htted inside with four drawers at one 

J440), the remainder of the box being 
^rtly occupied by a top till filling the re- 

tills to slide to and fro on the runners. Thus 




Hi. 1«t.-J.w«I Case with 8,^^ 
Drawers. 



be soldered m this flush on the bottom 
projectmgon top about IJin. to reach through 
the cover and project a Uttle a, shown in 
the section of the lock (Fig. U4C), and on 
the plan (Fig. H45). This is for drawing 
back or shooting the bolt from outside. The 
hole m the cover to take this wire should 
allow of J-m. movement-jnat enough, in 
fact, to allow the bolt C to clear the 
rollers when the box is locked. A brass pUte 
■Hm. long by IJ in. wide is required with 
holes cut ,V in. down to take the two holding 
lugs of the bolt ; it should be let in flush with 
the inside of the box front, and screwed in 

m^ ^iii> T" "' **"'' P'''*" » «'»<> given 
(*ig. 1444) A strip of mahogany | ii. by 
J in. should be got out and fi.Tcd round three 
sides of the lock as shown, so that a -'--in 
piece of mahogany screwed over all will 'just 
clear the lock .clips and cover all in It 
would be safer to make a private note of the 



H«. lM».-lI«aumUm of J.w«l 
Cose with Seerst Orawars. 



a considerable space is left below for larger 
article,. The small end drawers Zl 
countersunk drop-handles in their fronts, 

K fitte^'tV T5™'J''r'*'''-''^'^''must 

total width of the drawers. These interior 
fittmgs need not be of mahogany; some 
cheaper and hghter material may be used 

r^:, •,/■"■ 'T '™'«'«»«y feet are 
turned 1# m.m diameter and J in. long, 
with a f-m. pin f in. long on each. Holes 

^L ^ "^ 1° "' *'"'''^' »"<• """le thick 
glue w^U secure them in pUce. The box may 
be left with the material in a natural state, 
or finished in the ordinary way with french 
polish as desired. 

Jewel Case with Secret Drawers. 

A jevvcl case with secret drawers, the size 
being about lain, by 10 in. by 8 in., i.. 



joints. The front or flap » mitre-cUmped 
.nd veneered on the £ace ; the four drawm 
which the caae containa are all hidden. The 
front A B (F.g. 1447) i. made in two parts 
|md represent, the front, of five dTwS, a 
being made the height of dtawe« c d'e 
whilst B ,. the height of drawer , anS trav 
o Thebottomofoisafiiture,asare-U'o 
the division, between drawers f e, e d d c 
the front A 18 made as shown, with two 
jcratoh bead, at equal distance. The 

to It are fixed two steel fork,, which fit 



JEWEL BOXES. 



417 
Another Box with Secret Drawer. 

Jin''«l;i'' ™'T" '''■ ?«■ "■•" « ■""d" ot 
Pi^es il in 1 ^''^j '" prt-terence. Two 
pieces I) in. long and 4} in. wide «r« >» 

jnor^th"' 'i?"' f^ °'" »'- ^ An. "y 
4 in. for the end ; the other end, beiiw the 
slide IS only , m ,fci,k . ,^,, , ^^^Z^^^ 
are i m.. and the moulding i, 1 i„ .leeiT 

at the other, | in. from the end. cut a gtoove 
* m. wide and { in. deep ; a pie«rT ;„ 

into this, and the ends cut as ,h,. k; i„ 
section (Pig. ,4.,i,. jj ™ ,ut te J-ii" 





Fig. 14,0.-Bm wIU, s«a« D„,„. 



Hi. l«,._r„ Hotiwntal S«»toa 
rf Box with B«r« Orawsr. 



into the square mortices (Fig. 1448) ; the two 
drawer kno^ kk (Fig. 1449) haie a small 
squarespindle attached, over which the 
steel oA passes, and fixed on the end of the 
spmdle « an iron tongue and a nut fo™ „« 

Md fixL^l? ILf^*^- *■" ''^^ " « dropped 
and fixes the front a, ««1, until Ufted Se 
Utter cannot be moved. Dowels x x are 
fitted mto the bottom of the case; th" 
front B IS made to work on pivot, j i and 
18 nxed by spring, h h (Fig. 1449) Thew 
»pnngs «re hidden by the silk hn^g „f th^ 
tay, and, until released, the front* a wU 
not move; when the springs are released 
the front wiU fall on the'^S.nf^ a 
giving acces, to the bead m. In a sSow 
»« It will be necessary to form the movable 
knob at n n or the *"t'- i - ■■• - 

out sufliciently to reW the"^nTA.'™" 



piece to sUde into the end Before fitt,„„ 
together, however, 1 in. from the "^ 
the sides cut out „ groove i in. wide and Tin 
deep to take the false bottom, and then 
fasten on the top and bottom, he mould" 
ing hidmg the joint,. A line i, now Zde 
round the box 1 in. from the top rfge^ud 
the box 1, cut m two along th£ hue wS 
atenonsaw. Withdraw thelide, and cut out 
II^ru-T '^ '"P ''""K '1'" dotted line 
mitered p«.ce into it, place to corre,pond 
t itn off t.'°r- * P'""^" '^'" ^^'o 

,„ -.^ .1? ,"'" l'^"* »"' ""^h with the 
inside of the box, the sUde apparently bei4 
i in. thick. The drawer i,'^'made of i i? 

stufi, and 1, I in. deep- it rannft l 

taken out without the-b'ox bein|'^ne^'^ 
Division, are made in the box if desiS 




WORKBOXES AND OTHER BOXES. 



Ornamental Workbox. 

SLr'''"*^^ of.workboies are plain 
exfemally, .and it i> only when thev are 
opened that the eye is relieved by the >ilk 

rated. Fig. Uoi ,a a part elevation, and 



exiept that ,f aceeM can be had to a .pindle 
machme a great deal o< time and fabour 
will he saved The bottom part of the 
box IS .eeret dovetailed ; the moulding, on 
the upner part forming the lid being mTrelv 
miterea and glued.and then one tier of mould- 
ing8 screwed to the tier above. The bottom 



nn 




Uki - . 



Rg. 1453 a part vertical section throueh 
the centre of a box which is of good aS? 
pearance outside as well as inside. t£ 
box IS a mass of mouldings screwed and 
hmged together, mahogany of a good fiZe 
being vcty suitable for it. Nottog n^d 
be said on the running of the mouldings 



418 



L cJ™t ? Shown, and the feet, which 
are cut out on two sides to the shape given 
«re glued and screwed to the bottom with a 

and held ,n place hy tie rebate of the l„, 
moulding, IS a photographic view (p C 
14oJ) momited on glass, with a piece of thin 



WORKBOXES AND OTHER BOXES. 





^^^^^ 






n«. «M.-ft,t Com for 
Workboi Lid. 




FIj. 1M6.-Dimgnmi of ng. l««».-F„t D„|p„ 

Workbox Tray. for OtBtnJ Oorw of 

Workbox. 



1 " 

r 



420 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEEY. 



W 




Workboi with Stmt ComptrtmMit 




Hi. I«l.-V«tl(al Criw Sntlon of Workboi 



with 8«nt Compartmaiv 



pine w helmr it. The view ibould be 
OTocmd bebre proceeding to nuke tbe 
tnx, to get tbe bgbt liw ol the top mould- 
ing. On the inside ot tbe lid, mting in a 
retate tnd kept in pUce by a moaldinii ii 
> fret bolder r (Fig.. 1453, 1451 und 1455) 
Iwving . .maU pi«:e of mirror plate o 
in the centre. A iniall piece of pine i, 
glued to the back of the fret tb form a 
rebate for tbe gUu, and a imall screw used 
to draw the mitered moulding bard up 



W0BKB0XE8 AND OTHER BOXES. 




rif. U«>.-Fait Loatltadiul iHtioa of 
Bottom Book of Worklm. 



o 


Q 


3 


o 


1 




Oe 


1 — ^^^~ 


==;-;^= 




|i 


-III 




■HH 


^ 


9 


Q 





3 



Pif. 1M7.-Dla»ram of Workbox Tray. 



to tbe face of the fret and glass. This is 
«bowu m Fig. 14,54, „hicb is a longitudinal 
section of the gUss. Fig. 14.55 is a part 
plan of tbe inside of the lid, and shows a 
rannmg design for the fret border, which 
can be vancd according to taste. Fig. 1456 
18 a bne diagram of tbe tray, showing the 
divisions, tbe letters denoting where the 
"pace u intended to be covered by a fret » 
cushion 0, or left open as shown by' the letter 
?i-., r'l™ "' *''' *^y '« ^liown in Fig. 
tioj, which shows the blocks B for supporting 
the cushion cover, as also the blocks which 
arc gitted t„ tbe comers of the box to support 
the tray. The bottom is screwed to the 
under edge of tbe outer portion of tbe tray 



•nd bradded to tbe divisions. The frame 
of the tray « dovetailed, and the round 
on the top edge mitered. The division, 
are rebated mto and mitered to the frame 
andto each other. This is shown in Fig. 
145,, which la a pprtpUn of one of the 
comeri of tbe tray, fbe middle pan „f 
the tray i, an ellipse, with four diagonal 
pieces rebated and mitered to it The 
ellipse IS not essential, and either a circle or 
a square may be substituted. These central 




Tit. lMS.-Onis leotloa Ihroifk Workbox ) 
Backs (U Tit. IMl). 




Pit. i4«». n,. „^ 

Pits. 14M and lM<.-IloiddUi(i os Worklwz LU. 




pipoes are kept low enough to a! ,>• the 
toj> of the fret to come in with tb. Iwttoni 
edge of the round. Fig. 14.58 is a design 
for the fretwork cover of the comer spaces 

t.^ ?' ".; ^' '" ^* "■■'». "re different 
tretwork designs for the centre of tl 
tray. Holes are bored in tbe centre of the 
Sets, and small turned knobs are glued in. 
the intenor of the box and tray is covered 
with either velvet or plush. A piece of pink 
silk ' stretched and glued to tbe top ride 
of the fret border. This gives it a good 
appearance, .tnd also hides the interior of 
the bd from view. Tbe inside sizes are 
given m Fig. 1453, but the site can vary 
with requirements. 



f='ff 



% 



tiS 



CABIKITWOBK AND JOINERY. 




f\l 



Workbox with SMrat Compvtnwnt. 

Th« box iihown in Fig. I4ili) ii cob- 
•tructed in tho imitation book form, lad 
cominiiM tk. workbox proper ind > Mcrtt 
r«cept«cl« br p«iim .t th. bottom. It i, 
iBt<tndi>d to b« Anished in lurdwood. .nd 
potehod. The conntruction ii nthn (•om- 
plicated, and tequim careful .tudy before it 
can b. undentood. The croM-Mction (Fig. 
Kill) ihowi It M plainly ai ii pouible with- 
out giving Mwtiona of every detail, which ia 
unnecewary. In Fig. 14«1, a a i, a box, 
•ecret dovetailed, with a yellow pine bottom 
» glued and bradded into a rebate. If it i. 
determined not to cover the iniide of the 
box with any material, the bottom ehould be 
mahogany. The front o and the two aidea 
ol the top ahould be Kent dovetailed 
together at the front, and the aideii fitted 
to the back D, which .hould be .unk parallel 
with the round in imitation of the binding 
of a book, a> .hown in Fig. U60. It can 
then be lap dovetailed, ao a> to ahow aide 
wood right into the margin. Thia, when 
glued up forma the frame of the top book 
or hd of the workbox. A atrip of yeUow 
pine « to which haa been chmped a thin 
"tnp of mahogany, ia then glued to the 
back. After thia haa been allowed to 
get hard and then aushed ofl on both aidea 
narrow etripe, fiush on the inside of the lid' 
are mitered at the front ond butted againat 
the back on the lower aide, and screwed, 
ineao form the mock binding of the book 
There are different methods which may 
be adqjted to secure a good finish on the 
top. The fimsh shown in Fig. 140O ia com- 
posed of a central piece, to which a mitered 
border has been feathered and glued, 
lae central portion, which may be a light- 
coloured wood, has been enriched by the 
f^- ,^„,°>' ? "''"' ^"'P'- The section 
i ,5j t°''' """e^". 'howa a raised and 
fielded frame of a different coloured wood 
preferably dark, glued down to the top' 
After the t«p p has been cleaned all over. 
It should be glued down with thin hot 
glue to the top edge of the frame, and kept 
in close contact, either with hand-screws or 
thumb-acrews, until the glue has thoroughly 
set. It may now be laid ««id» until thi 
bottom book has been finished. The bottom 



book is a leciet receptacle, and it ia neeea- 
"^ to exerriw gnat care in fitting the 

" '*1l "*"'"'• *' "»' " "i'l "•■"«" 
a aniiet. The wood, in all such work aa 
thia, mnat be thoroughly dry to begin with ; 
otherwise, when it begins to shrink, the 
nuBner of opening becomes plain to all 
who kok at .1. fhe back a move« ak>ng 
f«r enough to allow of one of the end. 
aUding out. The other end is »K:nt dove- 
Uited to the front h, simikr to the top book 
and lap dovetailed at the back to the piece 
K. The top and bottom of this liook al» 
grooved at one end to carry the sUding 
piece. Kg. H«2 i. a p.„ longitudinal 
section through one end of the bottom 
book, shov.,ng the end sliding in the groove, 
and the slot cut in the piece K for the screw 
to travel in for sliding the back. The 
sliding end is mitered to the front, and abuta 
againat the back o. Before Bxing either 
the top or bottom, two slots shoukl lie cut 
in the top at each end, to allow the bottom 
book to slide back on the screws, which are 
ttxed to the Iwttom B through the sh>ts. 
Ihe slots and icrews are shown dotted. 
tzLr^ " ™™'*d with one of tho 
V " "'lici imitation book backa 
t. There is a dovetailed piece glued to the 
back of It and a raggle cut in the boi a. 
rhis raggle has a slight draw on it, so that 
the back L tightens as it comes up. and it is 
to aUow this to drop down clear of the key- 
hole that the bottom book is required to slide 
back. Fig. UB3 is a cross-section through 
part of the workbox, showing the dove- 
tail on the back i. Fig. 14(14 is an eleva- 
tion showing the position of kevhole and 
raggle for dovetailed piec^. After the 
slots are cut in the top of the bottom book 
It may be screwed to the top edge of the 
franie. The book backs L may now be 
glued on the middle, one being dovetailed 
The screws can now be inserted into the 
bottom B, and then the^ bottom h can be 
screwed on. The top should now be fitted 
down to the top of the box and hinged, 
and the lock fitted. It should then be taken 
°rA ... """Wings planted in the inside 
. u, !"*• ^'"' ™™" moulding is fitted 
to blocks, which are glued to the comers. 
A small bovc! pUte iiurror, kept in place 
by a small moulding, is used to relieve the 



.uri.«. Fig.. 14(13 ud UiM .n mU™.. 
mmti ol the ' mauldiiiKi. The iid njiy 
sow U whingRl. itnd th. lock not into 
gno.1 workiiM order. Th. tt,y, »|,i,.h mt, 
on Kiiull blorin .t thr comw., mav next 
be proceeded with. Fig. 1407 is ', lim. 



WORKBO.XE8 AND OTHER BOXES. 



^nd not inclndinn the plinth, are :_Leii«ih 
7 in. ; width, 4 in. : an.) height, 4 in. at th.' 
«lge., r.„nj( to 4J in. at the crown. It i. 
"Iiown made in (he M,lid. out of ,',.in 

nul.oga.u-. mlaid with ».tinwo,Kl, or lac" 

. ni'ght be uied tor the inhv with 

The »r..,.t drawer is concealed 

portion of whicS 

ran the <lrawpr 

<t off and fixnl 

"% as ithowa in 

■ Jwle, and the 

Mwer iit mitered 

' "..i.^tmct the box, 
•ndn lather full to the 
" "ly planed the wood 




Wf. »«•».— Umple Workboz. 



duigram ol the tray, .bowing the diviaioni., 
which are raggled into one another. The 
space, are covered with lids, the central 
one being padded and lilted out with a 
small piece of nbbon at each end. 

Simple Workbox. 

. An ordinary form of workbox (Fie 14lWl 
« of -octangular ahapc, and ha. nothing 
in ts con.truct.on which the cabinetmalcel 
will not understand at a glance. Fig 14«9 
'9 a vertical section showing the tray.' 
Inlaid Fancy Box with Secret 
Drawer. 

fitt^^wY.l" ''""" ^^^Wd fancy workbox 
fitted with a »c.r.t. dwww which k par- 
tiaUy opcn^ The outside dimension, of the 
box Illustrated by Figs. 1471 and 147-' 



Wovkboi. 

.T""' '5?v*'?*"?.*'' ♦'^<''°"»- Then gauge 
to a width the .Ides up to the junction with 
fbe top a. shown in Fig. 147;), and the 
ends wide enough to .each the crowu. The 
end piece at the right hand may, if desired, 
h« .mailer by the depth of the square plinth. 
Mark thj! mitres on the edge., squarj over 
the inwde, and groove or rebate. Three 
methods of forming the angle joints are 
shown, the one at a (Fig. 147.1) being the 

n»odc. If the jomt at B (Fig. 1173) i. chosen, 
the hp may 1» hradded, the brads being 
driven m the Kat of the inlay. Hough 
or saw a i-m. groove in the two side, and 
one end to receive the fnlm. bottom Work 
a small tongue on the top edges of the 
sides as shown in Fig. 1473, and cut the 
ends to the sweep. Then make a rebated 
mitre on the inside of the emlj on »h. 
top edge, as shown in Fig. 1476, and prepare 
the mitres at the angles. The mitre at the 
drawer end of the box must be stopped 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINEET. 





WORKBOXES AND OTHER BOXES. 



I 
i 



i 



m line with the pUnth, and the end 
brought out square, as shown in Fig 1470 
An rasier, but less worlcraanUke, method 
would be to shoot the mitre right through 
and afterwards fill in these pieces flush 
with the face of the box. \Vhen ready 
g.ue and brad together temporary blocks', 
to which the hand-screws can be fixed. Next 
prepare the top, as shown in outline in Fig 
1«7, i in. wider than the finished siie. 
Shoot parallel and plough the grooves, 
rhen mark the inside sweep with a template 
and work it out with a round plane. Next 
set a bevel to an angle of 4-5°, and working 
off the top, shoot the ends to fit, trying it 
into the opening in the box. When this ii 
htted accurately, glue it in and fix with 
handscrews until dry, when the top can be 
cleaned off to the sweep of the ends, as 
shown by the dotted hne in Fig. 1477 

Fall* Bottom.— Ne.tt fit and slide in the 
false bottom. Bore a J-in. hole in the 
middle of the right-hand end up through 
the thickness sufficiently to take the bolt 
88 shown in Figs. 1473 and 1474. To avoid 
makmg a separate illustration of the interior 
of this, end, the bolt is shown in the section 
(Fig. 1474) ; but it is fixed inside the other 
end. Next bi;ad on the true bottom, and 
clean off flush all round. At this stage gauge 
hnes may be run round from the bottom 
edge for the straight sides of the inlav and 
for the joint of the Ud. Also gaugi! the 
return lines on the ends and round the lid ; 
use a sharp cutting gauge. Next make 
and fit m the diawer. This is too slight 
to be dovetailed, as the sides are of J-in. 
stuff. They are simply glued and bradded 
on two j-in. pieces, as shown in Figs. 1470 
and 1474. The bottom may be made 
of tin-plate or two-ply veneer glued together 
tTossways, as shown in Fig. 1473 The 
drawer should be fitted to shde rather 
tightly, so that to rattling occurs. If it 
nioyes stiffly, a httle powdered French 
chalk rubbed all over the moving parts will 
correct this. Clean the drawer flush with 
the box, and prepare and fix the pUnth. A 
small scratch tool will be suitable for work- 
ing the moulding. The pUnth should be 
mitered up all round, the solid end fixed 
first, then the sides, and lastly the drawer 
end. This piece must have the moulding 



425 

cut off with a fine saw, and fixed on the box 
between the side pieces. Then the square 




Pig. 1474.— Crosi Stction of Inlaid Fancy 
nox. 



Kt. UTS.— Joint for Anglos 
of Fancy Box. 




Fig. U78.— Thumb 
Notch fop Dnwor 
of Box. 



Fig. I47S.— a«stioB 

of Ormvor End of 

Eoz. 



Fig. 1477.— Hctliod of Preparing Box Lid. 



part is fixed on the drawer front, the top 
edge of the drawer and the butt ends of 
the box being greased or oiled to prevent 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



f^. 



any glue stickmg, which would prevent the 
drawer being withdrawn. 

Completing Fancj Box Next cut the Hd 

along the gauge lines with a fine saw, and 
clean uj. the edges. Fit the hinges, IJ-in. 
cast brass butts, and again remove the lid 
previous to inUying. Prepare paper pat- 
terns of the inlaying which are all in the 
nature of "repeats," and paste them on the 
veneer or metal, whichever is employed. C>it 
them out with a fret-saw, mitre up, and Uy 



f,?'?? "f tl™ baiie glued over the bottom 
wiu hide the thumb slot (see Pig. U78) 
and It wiU be impossible to open the drawer 
without first opening the box. 

Ladles' Hat- and Bonnet- Box. 

A ladies' hat- and bonnet>box, such as 
18 shown in front elevation by Pig. 1479, mav 
be made from ahnost any kind of wood, and 
pamted, stained, and varnished clear 
varnished, or polUhed according to taste 




n» un. 
"«•• 147» and l«M.-p«nt Elmtioi ud Cim, g«itoB .f 



Tit- MM. 

>' Hat- and Bonatt-bn. 




Us- 1«U.— Boriieiitia BMtIa 
<f Ul aad Balls of Bex. 



rH- m«.— «Mtlo« If Bottom 
Moiildla( of ■«■. 




m position to the gauge lines. Mark round 
the outhne with a hard, sharp pencil, having 
first chalked the wrface of the box, and 
cut m the outhne with gouges and 
chlseU ; or better, if any suitably shaped 
tempUtes are at hand, run in the outUne 
with a sharp penknife, chop up the core 
with chisels, and carefully remove. Level 
off the sinking with a router, fill in with 
clear glue, and rub in the veneer. If metal 
IS employed, scratch the under side with a 
bradawl and mix a little gold-size with the 
glue ; clean off with hot water. Next fit in 
the bolt rehang the lid, and fit in the lock 
when the box will be ready for polishing 



;■ IMS.— SoetioB of Top and 
Hoalas of Box. 



For fimshing in pamt, dry yellow pine diould 
be used but for a stained and vamishad 
finish -.■hite wood is preferable. For simply 
clear Yarmshing, pitchpine or Oregon pin'e 
might be employed ; while for poUshing oak 
mahogany, or wahmt may be used The 
legs A (Pig. 1480) are shaped and mortised c 
showing the inside of the end rails, and the 
iiue of tenons mortised into the legs The 
front and back rails B are framed into the 
^Ss at nght angles. The thickness of the 
tront and end raiU is first gauged on to 
the face side and face edge of the leg, and 
trom the hnes the widths of the mortice, 
should be set back, and the mortice gauge 




'"^^mm 



set accordingly. Af.er the legs have been 
set out careluUy in pair., thef are g,^ 
and mortiaed to receive the front, baT 

fni^ *K ""i^** ""^ «'""* '""^ """"P*! together 
and the box squared, and the Vhole again 
jUowed to dry. Neit cut and fix „„ th" 
bottom, and clean oil and rub down with 
^■TOper, working in the direction ol the 
pain If the wood is to be varnished. H the 

N.vf '!Lr""^'v'' °"y ^ c«»,-rubbed. 
next mitre on the moulding (Kg. 1482) to 
cover the joint, and plant oi the moild^ 
m " (Rg- 1483), as shown m Fig. 1479 
^ng the top with 2J.i». bras, butt^ aBow-' 
mg the front and .«h ,» p,„j^t 5 , j^ 



WOKKBOXES AND OTHEB BOXES. 



427 

beyond the outside of the box. Then on 
tlie under side of the lid mark carefully 
with a fine pencil the line of the outside 
ot the box, dlscornect the Ud, work on the 
tongue, just leaving in the line ; mitre on 
the nming, and when the wood is drj-, clean 
oflandfimsh. The top is J in. thick. The 
dimensions of the several pieces required 
are as follows :— Four leg,, each 1 ft. 9 in 
J in. square ; two rails, each J ft. in by 1 ft ' 
W ?• '. *."'' "^ "''»• '"rf' ' ft- li in. bv 
: !'■ ^y.* ',"• • »« '""torn. •■' ft. 7 in. bv 
i Jt. t> IB. by i in., or made up to the 
reqmred width ; one top, 3 ft 7 » bv 

pi'iL'?- ^Jj "".- ■ '' "■ ■>* ""^Mtog to 
Fig. 1482 ; 7 ft. of nnsing to c (Fi« 148.5) 
and U ft. of molding ^ If ,he™nds are 
twated » the same way as the front, 
additional moulding will be required The 
bi should be provided with a strong lock 



i 



frit 



ar- ■B MM .WIffU' 



wmmmpmf^ 



CURIO CASES AND TABLES. 



Curio Case. 

?if- ^^ »>« il'Mtrated in Figs. 1484 and 

It stands 3 ft. high, the upper 1 ft. 6 in. being 
taken up by the case itself, and the re- 
inamder by its legs. The actual case has a 



The hinder legs range parallel with the wall 
as 18 shown m section in Fig. 1487, and the 
iront legs are set diagonally. In Fig. 1486 
the dotted hue at a indicates where the legs 
are held together by the false top; the 
lines at b show where they are grasped by 
the case bottom, and those at c where thcv 




i-4i 



Tig. IMS. 
Hgi. 14a4 sad 1MB 



Tig. 1M4. 
Front and End EtevaUoo, of Curio Ou. 



Fig. 1«6.— Log of 
Cnrio Case. 



nl f /w- * '"• ""^ " ■'•^P* fro"- tack 

to front of 1 ft. 3 m. If, as is recommended, 
the wood employed is of a soft kind for 
ebomsmg the leg, (Pig. 14«C) should be 
cut from l-m board. They are 2 ft. llj in 
long, and each wiU cut into a 4J.in. width, 
tnough, as usual, material may be saved 
by sawing two leg, or more from one board 



arc held by the ornamental diagonal braces, 
fig. 1487 show» the under side of the falsi- 
top and the adjacent pieces. The faUr 
top IS of J-in. board, 1 ft. 8 in. long by 1 ft 
■ji m. wide Cut, at r. and e are made for 
the tops of the legs, which are strongli 
screwed in place, thus bracing the upSer 
part of the case firmly together. The 







m'i>wmii.^%''y.'^k-ssm^m:^^<s^isismsmA ' 



bottom of the ewe i, a board ol the same 

way hoM. the leg, together at their middle/ 
Lower down, 3J in. from the gro Jd Sne' 
they are again held together by the diagonal 
ta.ce, (Rg 1488) Thew are%ut witf fte 
frame-saw from fin. stufi, and are, of 

?!S7?- . ? .*x>»"ling of the back o (Fig. 
"ontally, and are together 1 ft. 7 in. by 
Ih^J '"•; ?''"1 *''«' <^nds are fijed inti 
rebate, cut m the leg,. The case i, still 

uS^ 1, "Tf ''■ "' '^'"^ » J'i*'- 1*84 and 
iva, by the ornamental strips, which are 



CUBIO CASES AND TABLES. 



4a» 

groove, L must be cut to receive the gUss. 

to brush the wood with hnseed oil; this 
makes the putty .tick better. A convinient 
th^^»" "'%«'r '"»" "» ^ » in- from 
be puttied mto, a ,tnp of wood feed for 
that purpose to the back. Thi. shelf mav 
be as long as the case will admit (1 ft. 71 in i 
and Its breadth will be 1 ft. At the*front 
ite two ends wdl rest and be puttied into 

erf;';' ^"'"'^ '""'''*'"""•'" 

i^'g. UM) IS hung and locked against two 
wooden tnangular strips ji and n 
screwed to the diagonal legs (see 
Fig. 1487). The width of both 
'"1 in. at sight, but M, to 
which the door locks, i, | i„. 




Hg. 1M7. Ondsmeath View of Mm Top 
Curio Case. 

"f i-in Iward a in. wide, their endK being 
splayed to fit the diagonal legs t„ which 
they an. screwed; the shorter strips ar. 
attached to the b«,k l^s by short ^eces 
screwed to the legs brfiind them. Thrtnie 
top indicated by th» dotted lines h (Kg 

n 1 ft. 4 in. wide. Mi overhangs the case 
by 1 in. at the front »d ends. It, edges 
and front com«8 are rounded, and it is (iwd 
m place by screws drive, into it throngh 

lie false top, the edges of whieh are hiddTn 
»^e "°'''<''''« ^- i «■ "Jeep by J in. 

effS!^"^''^'"' *'!"™8 "' ""<■ «<*•"» is 
e«ectedbytix.£.g,tniMK. f in. bylin iin 
from the edge. „£ ,l,c false top, of the bottom', 
and of the back logs. In the front lem 



Fig. IM.. -Diagonal Braces for Curio 
Cue Legs. 

wider than x, to give room l„r a rel.;it.. 
"1 which the door mav close. In like 
inanner, for the support of the door J-in 
stnps o are li.x«l to the fate top and to the' 
bottom i m. from their front edges The 
door IS framed in eight strip, of j-in. board 
deposed in two layers. The foii strips of 
the mucr layer are 1} in. wide, the upright 

"^.T «"• "t '"• '""«■ ""d «"' "osrones 
»re 1 ft. 2J m. long. In the outer layer the 
strips are i in. wide, and are, as i^gard, 
the uprights, 1 ft. IJ in. long, and as 
regards the cwss pieces. 1 ft. D in. feng. 
Jllus, when these are srrewed together at 
le comers, the J-in. rebate formed for tlie 
glass IS on the inner ride. The illustrations 
are 1 m. to the foot, except Tig. 1487 

Wii-e;: in 1 1 in. 



ill 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINERT. 



Sheraton Pattern Curio Table. 

The curio table shown by Fig. 1489 ia 
intended for the reception of smaU chin* 
onwments, coins, medab, etc., the ahelf 
underneath being useful for plants in 
antique va.es. The extreme height, in- 
duing the top, is 2 ft. 3} in. ; the length 
of the top IS 2 ft. 4} in., and the width 1 ft. 
7J in. The following material, which should 
be ol mahogany, will be required, all the 
figures given being finished sizes -Top a ■ 
Two pieces 2 ft. 4J in. by 3 in. by J in. • 



r«at c»i« IS exercised in the selection of the 
timber. The top is made up of fonr pieces of 
wood jointed together to form a framework 
the centre being gUied, preferably with a 
piece of bevelled plate. The sides of the 
case are also glaicd, sheet-glass being u od 
for these. To make the side frames, cut the 
sixteen pieces required, and pUne them up 
to the dimensions given above. Take the 
2-ft. 2-in. pieces, and on each end mark 
ofi 2 m. for the tenons. Divide the thick- 
ness of the wood into three, which gives 4 in 
as the thickness of the tenons. The depth 




Ffe 1419.— Iluraton Pattern Carlo TabU. 



and two pieces 1 ft. 3J in. by 3 in. by } in 
Legs B : Four pieces 2 ft. 3 in. by IJ in. I,v 
li in. Side frames : Pour pieces 2 ft. 2 in 
by IJ m. by j in. ; four pieces 1 ft. 5 in. by 
H in. by J in. ; and eight pieces in. by 14 in 
by i in. Bottom c : One piece 2 ft. 2 in 
Jy 1 '♦■ 5,i"- by i in. Shelf d : One piece 
2 ft. 2 m. by 1 ft. D in. by J in. The exact 
ilimensioM of the shelf, however, should be 
detennined by leg.to-leg measurements. 
1 he four frames which constitute the sides 
of the case are connected to the taper legs 
by means of mortice-and-tenon joints, and 
the bottom shelf holds the legs lirmly in 
position, thus preventing the warping of tte 
wood, which is very likely to happen unkss 



shouH be arranged by cutting away the wood 
at the top of the rail which is on the upper 
part of the case, and from the bottom of Se 
rail at the lower part, as shown in Fig 1490 
(^n-end mortices are cut in the stiles 
of the same size as the tenons, which pro- 
ject through to a distance of J in The two 
short sides or ends of the case are framed 
up m exactly the same way. Bun a l-in 
satinwood banding along the bottom of 
each frame, making it dash with the edge 
and aU round the inside opening at »' 
distance of i in. in, run a /,-in. boxwood 
stnnging. The arrangement of these inlays 
IS shown in Fig. 14S1. 
Legs.— The legs may now be taken in 



CURIO CASES AND TABLES. 



hand. FUne all four up to 1^ in. sqwrr, 
and murk a line (i in. from the lop of eaeh, 
this section being kept square to receive 
the side frames. The legs are tapered to 
j in. square at the bottom. .Mortices will 
have to be cut on the insides of the legs to 
receive the projecting tenons of the side 
frames, the tenons being recessed J in. 
The two outside faces of each leg are inUid 
with .»,-in. boxwood stringing, as shown in 
Fig. 1492. Glue the sides in position, 
cramp up, and set aside to dry. 



on the insi'le edge run a ,\-in. boxwood 
stnnging | m. from the bividing. In each 
of the four comers a 2-in. fun maybe inUid, 
this greatly improving the appearance of the 
mushed article. 

Lower Shelf.— To obtain the exact measure- 
njents of the lower shelf, mark on the leg 
the height at which it is desired to fix it, and 
carefully measure the distance between each 
inside comer, and in cutting allow 4 in less 
all round. Band the top edge of the shelf 
with }-iu. satinwooil banding, and let in a 




Fig. 14M.— Joint of Curio 
Table's Sldo Framing. 



rig. IMJ.— Lsg of Cmiio 
Tabu. 



Top or Lid.— Next cut the pieces for the 
top or lid, and pUne up to finished siies. The 
length of the short rails allows 3 in. on 
each end for the tenons, which should be 
- in, in breadth and J in. in thickness ; the 
inch reduction in breadth from that of the 
jctual wood is made from the outside. 
Cut corresponding mortices in the long rails 
and glue up the framework. When dry, the 
mleving can be done. On the edge of the top 
11 fancy banding can be used, such as oblique 
<l«>ny and boxwood (see Pig. UM), or 
•iny fancy banding. pro\Tded it is black and 
white. On the top of the lid, >m >h« outside 
«lge, ru8 a j-in. satinwood bandjag, «nd 



Pig. l4M.~-Comar of Top of Curio 
Tkbla. 

fan or shell in the centre. The shelf is 
fixed by means of brackets, the screwed ends 
of which are screwed into the leg, the plate 
being fixed to the under side of the shelf 
with short screws. 

Glaaing, etc.— A beading will have to be 
run all round the inside edge of the table 
top, to form a rebate for the glass, a small 
flat bead being also put all round e.-ich of 
the side frames. The glazing of the sides 
can be done with ordinary sheet-frlass free 
from blemishes, that tor the top being for 
preference a piece of bevelled plate. Ul 
the glass can be fixed by pinning a small 
flat bead round the inside of the apertures 
The top IS connected by means of two ai-in 
brass butt hinges, a lock and key beint 
fitted to the opposite side. The bottom of the 
show case, which should be Uoed with plush 
of a colour snitabk t« harseaiK witt the 



4 






«» 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 





lit 




iili. 



pnTent them uiowiiig. 

AnotlMr Curio Table. 

Rg. 14W ii . p«n»ctiT. view of . curio 

•qiui. >t the top, tapering from the mil 



OUHIO CASES AND TABLES 



riw. u Uid on the teb.t« thiu formed, and 

<l^i.Mi^'i"'5 '?'''•■ The moulding 
^g. UW) u g)»«l .long ,he bottom of th. 

■pngi. The leg near the bottom baa a 

nuterrf (»e Fig. U98). Alter the table 
k ~<"> mmed up, the bottom, i in. thick 

on the bottom raiU, and aprigged in. The 






"^'z.-^ts^ST" '^■-•^ijs:"""^ 



down to the foot, where it measures i in 
The top rails A (Fig. 14%) are j in. wide by 
i m. thick. The leg, are mortised to 
receive the tenons, which are rebated on the 
top edges The bottom rails b (Fig. 14%) 
should be li m deep, showing J in. ^eep on 
the face after the small moulding o is iiied 
on. The inside edges of the bottom rails 
?? .""I'f"'' '" ">« '><"«on>. of pine i in 
thick. The inside comers of the legs are 
rebated at e (Kg. 1497) ilush with the inside 
?1mw "'■»■ Tie smaU moulding d (Fig. 
1498) 1, glued and sprigged to the edges if 
the rails, and mitered at the comers. The 



rif. UM.— rwt of Curie 
Vsble U(. 



rif 14M.— Part isMtm ^ 
Carlo Table LU. 



lid IS framed up hke a door, the mortices 
bemg m the front and back rails, and the 
tenons on the short rails. Fig. 1499 shows 
a section of the lid. The moulding r ia 
glued and mitered to the inside edge of the 
lid, and the glass beaded in from the inside. 
The ogee moulding is run on the outside 
edges after the lid is framed up. A pair of 
li-in. brass butt hinges is required to hinge 
the hd to the top rail. The table may be 
of mahogany and french - polished. The 
bottom, on which the curios will be laid, 
should be covered with plush or velvet of 
a suitable colour. 




II 

'I 



^ 



"Ktoooinr MsoumaN mr oun 

(»NS1 and ISO ItST CHAUT No. 2) 



1.0 



u 



ltt|2£ |2J 

1^2 



m la 130 



l^l^l 



IJ.8 



1.6 



^ xIPPLIED MHGE Inc 



'653 Eoll U... 

Rochtilar, N** Ynrt 14 
(716) ♦«2 - 0300 - Pfwn 

(Me) 2a8-ue9-F<» 



ii 


j. 


ii 


1* 


i 


n 


1 j ■ 


■ 


H 




I 


fl 




»'•-% 

d 


i 




'i 



SEATS, COSY CORNcRS, AND SETTEES. 

Indoor Recess Seat. ""'* '" » «!™m. The seat is made of oak 

Figs. 1500 to 1508 show a desiim with ^LIl^^'^^^' /?'*■, ^^ ^--stniction, as 
din.e.ionsandco.t.ctio„a. dtX ^ J '^Z^l^l':^^^'^^^^ :^l: 




Hb, 1600. • 
ngi. 1100 uid UOL-EImtion and Vertical 8e£ 
434 



2 3- 
Flg. 1001. 
:-tioii of Indoor Bocou Boat 



I 



■'.T 






SEATS, COSY COBNERS, Am SETTEES. 



"f";?"''' .°°'l «"' be arranged accorfing 
nttwl. The seat la hollowed out as shown in 



anf M .r '^ '." '^.^"''^ Figs. 1500 

soak of i;''f ',''1"™™»K figures to the 
soale of 2 m. to 1 ft. This fitment affords 




Fig. ISOJ. -SmUoh tlmragh Canopy 
of Indoor Bocew s«at 




Pig. 1J03,— Bracket of 
Beceaa Seat Canopy. 



Pig. 1005.— Vortical 
Section at Bade 
of Seat showing 
Moulding at A 

(Fig, isoo). 



Fig. IBOl-Brackot for Shelf above 
PaneUiQg of Reoeu Seat 



Fig. lBO«.-aoriionlaI Section at 
Back of Seat ihowiag Moulding 

at B (Pig. ijoo). pjg y 





—Moulded End of Reeeia Seat 



Pig. 1008.— 

Moulded Skirting of 

Becen Seat 



the detail (Pig. 1D07). The work, if the cost of 
const^cfng .t in „ak j, t„„ expensive, ly 

iLZ u- '^ '^'5' "■"* P"-"^ white with 
he mouldings and panel, picked out in a 

would" t l£:f " '^'^■' • ""» *» ««»' 
would be greatly improved if haadpainted 



a, good deal of scope for artistic treatment. 
Carving or poker-work could be introduced 
with eiceUent effect. Ornamentation might 
be apphed to the panels by means of trans- 
fers; or neat tiles could be substituted for 
the top row of smaU panels. 



43S 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



Ingle Nook for Drawlnr-room or 
Boudoir. 

A general view of an ingle nook suitable 
for a drawing-room or boudoir is pre- 
sented by Fig. 1509. Vertical section, half- 
elevation, and half horiiontal section are 
shown by Figs. 1510 to 1512. An enlarged 
detail of the plinth is illustrated by Fig. 
1513; an enlarged section through the 



cornice by Fig. 15H ; and an enlarged 
section through the end paneffing by Fig. 

Cosy Corner Settee. 

A settee of the form shown by Fig. 1516 
commonly described as a cosy comer, is 
particularly adaptable to Urge rooms. 
It will look well if made in mahogany 
upholstered in plain crimson velvet or 




Tig. H09.— Ingls Hook for Drawing-room or Boudoir. 



SEATS, COSY COBNERS, AND SETTEES. 



I 



m ji 




Fig", mo to 1BH.-VMUC.1 gMtlon <m Un, AA, HUf 

HTOtion, ud HiUf Horlmntal S.c(ion on Ua, b b of 

Ingle Nook. 



11 




the frame may be entirely of birch and 
white enamelled. Walnut with blue velvet 
and oak with green velvet, are also suitable. 
Ihe overall dimensions are 4 ft. by 4 ft bv 
4 ft. 6 ,n. high. Fig. 1517 shows the frame- 
work, and gives the necessary dimensions. 
Supposing mahogany to be the material 
chosen all the woodwork that shows should 
be made in that wood, but birch may bo 
ujed for the remainder. The various parts 
should be got out to the following flmshed 
sizes :— One comer upright, 4 ft. 3 in. ; two 
back uprights, 3 ft. 2 in. ; two front up- 
rights, 1 ft. 10 in. ; one leg, U in. ; two 
top upnghts, 1 ft. 2 in. , two end arm 
ra ,s, 1 ft.. in.-oU H in. square ; two end 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINERY. 




ihown by Fig. 1S19. These end fran-Ti 
are then connected to the back comer 
upright and front leg by the six long rails, 
which must be put together in one opera- 
tion Fig. 1520 shows the patterT of 
the top rails, which should be cut before 
being dowelled in place; they are fixed 
flush with the top ends of the comer and 
short top uprights, and i in. from the front 
side. The cross rails are intended to g.vo 
strength to the frame, and support the 
upholstered seat ; they are let J in. into 
the front and back rails, being glued in 
and nailed from the top edge. To make 
It still more rigid, braces of hardwood may 
be fitted and glued and screwed in place 
at the comers (see Fig. 1521). 

Bracketj.-The next thing will be to 
make eight brackets to the patterns shown 
by Fig. 1522 ; these are fitted under the 




Fig. ISIS.— Ssetloa 

of Ingle Hook 

FUntli. 



Fig. lU4.~8ecti<m 

of Ingle Rook 

Cornice. 



seat rails 1 ft. 6 in. by 3 in. by IJ in. ; two 
back seat rails, 3 ft. 9 in. by 3 in. by U in • 
two front seat rails, 2 ft. 4 in. by 3 i. by 
li in ; four cross seat rails, 1 ft. 6i in. by 
J in by 1 m. ; two upper back rails, 3 ft. 9 in. 
by 2 in. by 1^ m. ; two top rails. 2 ft. 6 in 
by 3i in. by 1 in. All the uprights and the 
arm rails should be of solid mahogany ; the 
front and end seat rails, and the upper back 
and top rails, wiU do in birch faced with 
i-in. mahogany ; and the cross and back 
seat rails msy be of solid birch. It is 
important that the ends of the rails shall 
be squared tme. The dowelled joint is 
employed m putting the framework together 
as in Fig. 1518, which shows the joint of 
the seat rail and upright. 

End FrMnes.-The two end frames should 
be made first. These must have the three 
ornamental pieces, of 3-in. by J-in. mahogany, 
put in at the same time, in the manner 



Fig. 1«1».— Bonlon through End Fajulliig of 
Ingle Nco^. 

seat rails and a.-e Icpt J in, b,ck from the 
front. They are of J-in. mahogany, 5 in. by 
5 in., with the grain running as in the 
diagram Besides improving the appearance, 
they add to the strength of the settee if 
neatjy fitted, sprigged, and well glued 
m pUce. Fig. 1623 is the pattern fo? the 
upper brackets, which are also of }-in 
matenal. These may be glued and hghtly 
sprigged, and small blocks fixed behind 

Shelf for Top.-The shelf for the top is 
of l-,n. board (see Pig. 1524), mitre-jointed 
as shown m Fig. 1525, and afterwards 
moulded on the under front edge to a flat 
ogee (see Fig. 1526); it is screwed flush 
with the back of the upri jhts. The front 
upnghts are crowned with pieces 31 in 
square by 1 in. thick, which are moulded all 
round on the under side and dowelled to the 
upnghts (see Fig. 1527). The ornaments 
01 the back upnghts are 3 in. by 2J in. in 
section, and of vertical grain. To make 
these, two blocks are required 3i in. long 
by 3 m. square, j in. of the length being 



SEATS, cosy CORNERS, AND SETTEES. 



turned to a pin for ftting (see Fig. 152ti). 
Tho omament itsell will require to be carved 
to the shape. 

Completinc the Woodwork.— The work 
IS now ready for polishing. To do this, it is 
first necessary to clean it up with glasspapcr ; 
and the sharp comers of the uprights und 
rails should he slightly rubbed down. After 
polishing, ascertain that the six legs are 
quite level. Thij is easily done by stretch- 
ing a string tightly over tho extreme ends 



tin 

dowelled to the left-hand end rail und tho 
other back rail, with the cross roil about 
midway Mween ; then the other front und 
end raik may be joini 1 on. For the back 
frames the fclliiwing are required : Four 
rails, ;i ft. •■; iu. ; four stiles, 2 ft. ; and two 
stibs, 1 ft. (i in. The rails are dowelled to the 
long stiles, with the short ones midway. Tho 
seat frame may now be fitted in place, allow- 
ing about }-in. play at the ends and tho back 
corner, and about Jin. from the surface of the 




Fig. 1616.— Cosy Corasr Settte. 



of two back legs, and comparing with the 
others. Square rim castors are then fitted 
to the legs, and the woodwork portion is 
complete. 

Upholstering Cosy Comer.— The up- 
holstering of the settee is perfectly straight- 
forward. A frame for the seat and two 
back frames are required ; these are made 
in sound deal, of 3 in. by 1 in. section. For 
the seat frame will be required : Two back 
rails, one 3 ft. 3} in., and the other 3 ft. 6} in • 
two front rails, one 3 ft. 3J in., and the other 
' ft. lOJ in. ; one cross rail, 1 ft. 2 in. long • 
and two end rails, each 1 ft. 8 in. These 
are the finished siics when the ends have 
been squared up ready for jointing. The 
3-ft. ^-ia.. back and front rails must first be 



front rails ; it should rest on the back rails 
about J in. When in its exact position, it can 
be temporarily fixed with a few nails ; then 
four holes should be bored with a J-in. dowel 
bit, at points about li in. from the ends and 
from the front comer, and j in. from the front 
edge. They should go right through the 
frame, and about 1 in. deep into the scat 
rails. The frame may then be removed, 
and dowels, slightly pointed, glued in the 
seat rails, to stand up about } in. These 
will keep the upholstered seat in place. 
Pieces of wood of 1 in. square section are 
screw-ed on the upper side, flush with 
the front edces, as shown in Fig, l.fi^ll 
which is a plan of the seat frame, showig 
the webbing on the under aide and the 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 





Tit. HI'.— Pr«m«work of Ooiy Comer SottM. 



Hg. nn._ 
Ornamental Piece 
In End Frame of 

Coay Comer 
Settee. 





rig. 1M0.-P,rt of Top Ball of Coey Comer Settee. 
1 



Kg. l»H.^Joint of Ball to Leg of Ooe; 
Comer Settee. 





Fig. !»»».— Joint of Slielf in Coey Comer SettM, 



Fig. len.— 
Tig. mi.— Filing Bracliet for Legb 

Brace to Seat Ealla of Coey Comer 

of Coiy Comer Settee. 

Settee. 



Fig. IBS*.— Half Plan of Top Shelf of Cosy 



Comer Settee. 




Fig. l»aa.— Back Bracket of Coey Comer Settee. 



SEATS, COSY CORNERS, AND SETTEES. 



Ml 



n» ISM.— aMUon gf shiir of 

Oo«y Oonur lattM. 




"»• »»"• tit. IHl 

PI«i 1M7 ud m«._Top OnunMU of Front ud B«k 

Dpiighti of Coqr Comr SntM. 




Fig. 1B8X.— Soctlon of Seat of 
Cosy Cornar Sottoo. 



Tig. Ifi33.— Fart Oouide 

Tiov of Back of Coo; 

Comor Sottto. 




Fig, 1810.— Part Undonuatli 

Vlaw of Scat Ftame of Coiy 

Corner Settee. 



Fig. 1»S3.— Method of Fixing 
Backa of Coey Comer 

Settee. 



Fig. 1835.— Plan of Ann 
Pad. 



Fig. 1836. 



Fig. 1837. 



Flge. 1836 and 1837. -Part 
Bide Elevation and Section of 



ii 



Ui 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINKKV. 




poution of the •prisgi. The webe tbould 
be itntohed u tight u pouible, and Mcuwd 
with l-in. large-headed taclu. The fpringa 
are ititched in u slinwii in Kg. 1530, each 
ipnng being died with a knot at thne 
pointe. They an then Uced down evenly 
with atrong twine, fint crouwiae, then 
lengthwiie. Thia ia done by partly driving 
a tack into the back rail directly behind the 



apnnga, Wing on the atring and driving 
home. The ■'.ling ia twice alip-knotted to 
the top coil of the aprings, which con then 
be drawn down to the required level, the 
twine being wwured with a tack at the 
front edge (.ee Fig. 1531). They are treated 
. lengthwue in the same manner. To pad 
the front of the aeat, a atrip of canvaa about 
8 in. wide muat flrat be Ucked along, then a 




Fig. l»a».— rjoBt EliTatlra of Diawlac-rMai lettoi. 



1 




=:.i* 






II 



BEATS, COSY COBNEHS, AND SETTEES. 

.m'^ ,T). 



443 




rif. 1»41.- ?nrt ?lw of Orof BiUli of Onwlif. 
ro' -n lottM. 




Hg. IMO.— End EloraUon of Dnwlig-room 
SottM. 





riji I u »d IMJ. Balutwi of SrtUl. 



^ E 



n*. iMa.— FiiiB( 
Xaatr Ltf« of 

SottM. 



rig. lM4.^Ioliitlii( Croii 
Ball to Ur of SattM. 




ri». IMT.— OroM Bail Senmd to log of gottao. 



w 



^ 



^3J 



H». IMS.— Diagimm of Br.^ Spu-nll. 




rig. IMS.— DUgnm of SMtn Top Ball. 



k 



M 



•trin^ ,ho»l,l 1« .in-Uhed along th. l„p ,i,i, 
kL^n i"' '^H^ ™"'" •»» midway to 
umlcr It. Haip or film ia gBncraliriuod 

(OP at t,hmg th,.n Hock. It ,t„M be put 
on to be about 1 in. higher when the can™. 

«ne It firmnoM and .bape. A good itpong 
nujvn, mu,t ho put over the .>ring, "nd 
piMldrng, .tretehed tight, „„d atitch'd , 
of bl *"■ T'e »tumng, whieh m..y ^ 
' luir or wool flock, can now Ik di.tri- 

>"go of bghtn™, and keepa »,rt mu-h long," 
hut It M more expensive. There are cheapc^ 
;i'»"«»' ^» " n."lium wool flock i.X 
fjmWe ; the cotton flock i. mostly u.Ld'^^or 
cheap work and ia very heavy. A covorinK 

^ut „T' J," ''«'" '''--)"!^-"™ i« then' 
put o^ep, and any unovenncM in tho .ban. 
put nght w,th a regulator or a .tecl S! 
TIT"- y .•'■f'" "' "'"''«"8 will further 
mo<l.fy«ny.l,ghtlumpinca,intheapp«arnce 
put o^^'^b*"" *';," ^-'^=' ooveri'n^nS;'^ 
put on. This will require to be joined at 
the mitre, and ia tack.il on the un£ front 

noceasary, by atitching black Unen on the 
back edge. It muat be tee from anv 
Wneaa or wrinklca. A black Unen com 
^a? C tw"""" """ ^"'P'''™ -h" 

S ^i^T ^""S^'' flWed to allow 
atout , ,n. all round for the stuff. They 
are kept in place by ^-ia. dowels let into 
the upper back rails, four to each to atLnd 
ou^ about 1 in., these fittiog ?mo "or^ 
spondmg holes in the fr„me (see Fig. S 
They are webbed on the front side aid 

Tft'.^""'' "'"''™»; then string a°e 
stretched on tacks from comer to Smer 

fwS tl i, r, ""^ '™" ^ '««■ '"d should 
wTvul tf°"i u* '"■ •''8'' «" "hout half 
3 in. high for the top ij i„. ; this is when 
the scrim covering is on They will reqS 
some regulating before the wadd ngTnd 
vdvet are put on and when this is donf they 
are ready tor buttoning. The buttoning 
.8 necessary to keep the stuffing in pCf 
and preserve the shape, he,ides i^.prortng 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



Anotb.^11 ' •'"• "P"* '"'» "^h »"•" 
Another ^w I, put 7 in. lower, directly 

lUldCT, and the other, between Th. 

qtuckest way i.fi„t to mark Them ;i: 

ll ?■. u"''' "' '■'""'! •I'-" »■>" needl. 
and stitohing t,i„„, having » knot tied 

the back coming out at tho mark ; it S 
I«.sed through the button, enrrng „1" 
« bout 3 ,„. from the fir,t piercing, and «, ™ 

"■ ry*s; ''Tt' tb*""^' ;''"'"'i""' •» *™™"' 

>try tight. It then hii, the apiR-urance 
.H hown by the two lower line, in Kg. S 
When the „,t button is p„t i„, „ .^p.',,;;;- 

a She"" \ '"' •"" ""^ "»■» ">e last Up 
a leather tuft put under, and the string 
drawn tight ancf secured ; and »o on, h^ck 

hnen is put on, the Wck. are slippe,! i^ 
place and screwjd to tho back edge Vf the 
-eat frame sec Fig. 1534). Two arm pad! 
ate required, for which two piece, of w^ 
must be got out 1 ft. by 2* in by jT 
They are stuffed about 2 il aJoJethTwU' 
^L "T ""y'""!!. ""d stitched al 
round as shown in plan by Fig. IMS and 
in part side view by Fig. 153(i A bttl. 
""■> ""«!"« niust I aSde^ Lished iff 
with waddmg, then th. veIve^. Before it^ 

Tb,^ w • "" '•"""'^'■S "»"« <» don 
Three button, to each arm will be 
enough, and they are put in by I^Lg 
he string with a tack at the side, paS 
the needle up through and out at the to? 
centre through the button, to the othe? 
«.de, drawing tight and fiiig with a tack 
see Fig. 1,W7). The velvet^i. tacked to 
he mider side of the wood, the p^i being 
then secured with screws driven though Z 

rod IS fitted under the arm rails behind the 
ornamental piece, to take curtains of sUk 
plush, and others under the top back rail 



Drawing-room Settee. 

in^FirT™ "°! f "^"^'^ " illustrated 
in Fig. 15J8 upholstering is avoided, as 
the seat ic detached, beiug known as a 
squab ^at. The settee wiS look we^ if 
made of Jiiahogany, french-poUshed, or it 



SEAT* COSY COBNEHS. AND SETTEES. 






nwy Ix) paintnl md fini-hod with whitr 

Si '".u"", '""•' ""'- '■'""■■Kn'in.Kl 
hircb lo. Ihe leg. u mcmmi-ndwl, and 
k,,un p[„e or birch for the othor part.. 
The tnat MevaiioB (Fig. 15.i'.)), end ilevo- 
>i"n (Fig. 1.>1(I), and half i,l„ii (Fig. 1011) 
.r« drawn to a «.ale ol 1 i„. ,„ ,he\m>. J, 
tnat Iho meaiuronOTiU ol tin. vnriouj parts 
can be taken from tho drawings. However 
to ovoid miltake,, tho citrrme length h 
;'„"■', '"■'«"' '™'n fliof to woml neat A 
(Fig. 1.J.TO), 1 (t. 2 in. ; height „( l„ek at 

from front to Imrk of .eat, 1 ft. « in • 
thicke.t part, of leg,, 2 in. .quare, tapering 
to 1) m. square at tho liottoms. The baik 
rans 3 in. „ut of the ;)erpendicular, and 
the perforated baluster, (see enlargements 
Fig». IM and lo4;)) and tho straight or 
.haped baluster, b and o (Fig. lD.iU), which 
are ttlterniitive patterns, are of l-in. stuff 
planed up a. thick as they will carry. The 
shaped span-rail, below the »nt are of 
}»"'."■ ''"?• finwhing when planed up about 
li in full, and standing back ,», in. from 

fS° ^^',.,°' *}" ^'f- ■'''"> ""«> ■•""• B 
Figs. 15,TO and 1541) are of l-in. stuff and 
1| in wide. The seat a (Fig. 1539) should 
be got out of 1-m. stuff, and when planed 
up It wil finish about J in. thick. The top 
tail K (Fig. 153!)) and the .eat rail » are 
of IJ-in. .tuff. It will be seen that the 
portion, of the front and the back legs above 
the seat are reduced in thicknes., say to 
about li m. at the top, and tapering to 14 
m. near the .eat. The seat ends with the 
arm. should be first taken in hand the 
»d rail o (Fig. 1640) being tenoned into 
the front and the bock legs, and also the 
shaped span-iail bueath. Next the back 
ports of the orms arc tenoned into the back 
legs, the front parts of the arms having 
the mortices, and the top of the front 
legs the tenons. The end balusters H are 
tenoned into the soot rail as shown in Fig 
1j44. The front shoped spon-rails below 
tne seat are cut out in one length, and tho 
outer ends j (Fig. 1539) are tenoned into 
tie end legs. ..he inner legs are cut away 
lorming a continuous mortice, as shown 
in Fig. 1545. The inner legs can be further 
aaengihened by dnvng screws through 
the back parts of the legs ond into the 



•pon-rail.. The ero«i rails » (K.gs. I.Wi 
«nd I.',41) ore halved where ihev , r„«, 
In connecting the rails with the l',.g», the 
Jitter are eut owoy as in Fig, lolli. thus 
forming o receM to re.eive the butt ends 
of the rails. When linallv putting the 
(taming togi'ther, ,|,„. .oiHuleralinn must 
l-e glv,.„ I,, K,,„j„„ ,|„. , „,„ ^,j|^ .^^^ 

[KiKilliiii. Ihe litter are further wciired 
by slanting scrc^ws driven from the uiuler 
Biile nf tho rail, as shown in Fig. I.'ir As 
an allimilivo to having the rail, n'(Kig 
I.).IJ) crn.,,mg, they can !«■ carried straight 
from leg to leg. The seat A (Fig. I.-,I1) i, 
itteil against the back roil r ond lietween 
the ends. To support the seat at the back 
aid the ends, strip, of wo.«l almut I J in 
wiilo by 1 in. thick are screwed to the bock 
r Ml and the inside, of the ends. Tho front 
«lge of the sent is roundi-d. Tho lower 
ends of the bolustors in the tiock ate tenonwl 
into the bock roil r (Fig. 13.1!.), „nd the 
uppw end. into top rail e. In fixing tho 
top roil K, the mortice, are cut in tho latter 
ond the tenon, on tho top e- Is of the bock 
•eg>- Fig. 1548 is on enl 1 view (set 
out in squores for reprou on) of the 
shoped spanrail., and Fig. .549 i, an 
enlargement of the centre portion of the 
top rail with the cut-through ornament. 
Ibe loose or squab seat should be alwut 
-i in. thick. Horsehair is alwut the best 
material for stuffing; but .hnuld this be too 
c-Mieiisive cheoper materials are fibre or 
flocks. The covering con be of tapestry 
or rep the design and colouring to accord 
with the rest of the furniture. 

Farmhouse Settle. 

A farmhouM Kttle i. shown in elevation 
ond sections by Figs. 1550 to 1552. A list 
of the piece, of wood necesMry will be 
Tf: ,\ ■ '""^' "^ required, 6 ft. by 

2 ft. IJ m by 2 in. thick ; the seat is 8 ft. 
10 in. by 1 ft. 9 in. by li in.; the top i. 
9 ft. 5 in. by 1 ft. OJ in. by IJ in. ; the 
moulding 1, 14 ft. in. by 2} in. by 1* in. ; 
the bock 18 4 ft. 6 m. by 6 in. by IJ in., with 
four piece, each 4 ft. 6 in. by 8 in. by 1 J in • 
two piece, eoch 4 ft. 6 in. by 41 in. by l| in' ' 
!iiti./.n pi«ces each 3 ft. 3 in. by Ci in. by 1 in.' 
sixteeii piece. 7 in. by Gi in. by 1 in. ; seven^ 
teen pieces 1 ft.'G in. by GJ in. by 1 in ■ 



i i; 

I t 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




I " I J 



i !J ^ I 
s I ? s 

^0 1 





I . i 



SEATS, COSY COBNERS, AND SETTEES. 



one piece 9 ft. by 2 in. by 2 in. ; one piece 
» ft. by 1} in. by IJ in. ; end one piece 8 ft. 
10 in. by 6 in. by 1 in. For the drawers 
have two pieces each 4 ft. 6 in. by IJ in. by 
Uin. ; two pieces 4 ft. 6 in. by 2in. by IJin • 



by 4J in. by 3J in. ; and two pieces 10 in 
by 2J in. by IJ in. ; with six drawer knobs 
and SIX drawer loclts. The above is a 
complete list of the pieces req'iired. Fig. 
1553 is a section on ab (Fig. 1550); Fig! 




Fig. 1SS4. 

FIgi. isss ud I»M.-Horlioirtal Sections of 

Sottlo Back 09 LInoi A B and D 

(Fig. igsoj miwctlTil;. 




Tig. 1B87.— Front of Sottlo Boat 



fonr pieces 1 ft. 9 in. by 3 in. by 11 in. ; four 
pieces 1 ft. 9 in. by 3 in. by 1 in. ; four 
pieces 8 in. by 2 in. by IJ in. ; one piece 
1 ft. 7 m. by 1 ft. 10 in. by 2 in. ; six pieces 

1 "■ r .™' il S •"• }'^ '^ '"■ ' '"^'^ P^'^ 
iin. ; six pieces 1ft. 
; six pieces 1 ft. 5 in. 



1 tt. in. by 5J in. by IJ ib. , iweive piecei 
I ft. 7 in. by 6} in. by i in. ; six pieces 1 ft. 
5 in. by 41 in. by J in. ; six pieces 1 ft. 5 in. 
by 1 ft. 6 in. by i in. ; two pieces 1 ft. 9 in. 



Fig. lB5».-Crois Section of Settle Arm. 



lo54 18 a section on c d (Fig. 1530) • Fig 
1oj5 a cation of the top ; Fig. 155(i a section 
on o H (Fig. 1552) ; and Pig. 1357 a section 
on JK (Fig. 1530). Large settles are a 
common feature in farmhouse kitchens, but 
the above, Khi.'h is 9 tt. (i in. long over 
alJ, may be reduced in size by altering the 
dimensions to suit any room. 



I 




MIRROR FRAMES AND PICTURE FRAMES. 

Wall Mirror. pieoe in a parlour or drawing-room. It 

The mirror iUustrated in Fies 1558 and T-J j " • '^ P*'"" " ei^meUed white 
1559 is aui^b,. for Hanging o^r i^^nlt Titl'!! S-J^l^Tl tf^ 




Fig. 188a 



ngiL 1888 «id 1889.-Pront «,d Bid. H.y.Uon. of WUI Mirror. 




Pig. I860.— Part Sictioa of 
WaU Hltror Fraino. 



Fig. I88ff. 



Pig. 18«l.-aidjEl.«Uon Pig. I8,j.-«ld, H„au„. 

448 



of Mirror Pediment 



MIBHOE FKAME8 AND PICTUKE FRAMES. 



The fomidahon-fcame i, oj li-m. .tuff, 
the side .tile, being 2 ft. Jl} in. by 71 in 
wide The top rail is 11 m. 'wide aid 3 ft.' 

and the bottom rail i. oi the wme length 
and 9 in. in width. The rail, are tenTd 



stile 4 being the inside edge of the frame, 
which 1. cut to .hape with a fret- or bow- 

and glued on the face, and form the rebate 
for glass, the width at the narrow part 




ny. lHs.~rr<mt Umtim of Frett^ Oak Frama for 
Oil Faiatliig. 




Pig. 1.64.— Fiotwork of Framo 
■liown Enlarged. 




Fig. lie..— Back Coragr of 
Frettott Fiame (h« Fig. 1663). 



Fig. 1666.-Part HorUontal Section of Fietted Fi» 16» P.,t n ^ . ■ » 

Fran. (m. Hg. 1666) ^' ""— •^' HoriiontU Section of Frttt«l 

«™n« (■•• Pig. 1667). 




Fig. 1667.— Front Elevatios of Frettod Waliint Pram.. 



490 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. net.— J 




-Front EI«r»tioii of Mirror with Side 
Braekots, 




Pig. 1571.— Part PIiui of 
Hirror Cornice. 





Pij. 1117a.— Part HorlMntal Soctlon 

of Mirror Framo abovo 

Braclceti. 

Fig. 1870 

Enlarged Verticil 
Section of Miixcr. 



being 2f m. A small hollow ii worked on 
the inside edge. At each end of the strip, 
are pieces 5J in. by IJ in., jointed and glued 
to the out, r edges to support the mouldinra 
where they break outwards at the comera. 
Ihe mou ungs are worked- in uitable 
lengths with rebate and hollow planes 
and are then fixed with glue and naib 
to the lacing b. The cornice and side 
pediment mouldings (see Fig. 1561) are 
of 1-in. stuff 11 in. wide; they are 
worked and mitered round the ends of 
the frame. The side pediments are filed 
on the face of the frame, and the return 
ends D (Fig. 1658) are carved with chisels and 
pages, as these cannot be mitered and yet 
keep the fillets vertical. The moulding e 
on the centre of the pediment is 1 in. wide 

of the frame and mitered round the ends 
(see Fig. 1562). The curved lines of the 
scrolls are carved with a small gouge 
or parting tool. To make a good job 
the silvered glass should have a U-in 
bevel. The glass is filed by small 
wedge-shaped blocks about 2 in. long 
and placed at intervals as in Fig 156o' 
These blocks may be used as a support 
fo- the }-m. back, which is secured with 
smaU screws driven on the slant into the 
frame For filing to the wall, brass plates 
—that is, brass plates with three holes 
lor screws— are screwed to the back of 
the frame, and the wall is drilled and plugged 
to receive screws which pass through the 
puites. 

Frames for Oil Paintings. 

The frames about to be described aSord 
some vanety and originahty not usually 
associated with those made entirely from 
stock mouldings, which are iu manv cases 
but crude, over-coloured, and gaudy pro- 
ductions. The wood used should be selected 
with care, as the finish is cither brown or 
art green stam, and french polish. There- 
fore those woods having a beantiful natural 
gram will give the best results when finished. 
Ihe frame shown in Fig. 1563 is suitable 
lot an oil paintmg or any highly coloured 
picture. There is, of course, a Umit to 
the size m which a frame of this design 
wiU look best; probably any size over 



MIBHOB FKAMES AND PIOTUBE FRAMES. 



2 ft. 6 in. wide will appear the reverse of 
pleasing. In the present case the propor- 
tionate sizes are as follows : Size o{ picture 
accommodated, 1 ft. 6 in. by 1 ft. ; Iborder 
moulding, I| in. wide ; outer fretted boards 
in. wide by i in. thick. The stuii for the 
outer frame is first planed up smooth and 
cut oS in lengths 1 in. longer than finished 



rnitres can now be glued and cramped up 

joints at the angl., being halved and glued 
together. Thi. fame is made i in. l?rg« 
than the mside edge of the «,k frame, so as 
to form a rebate for the glass and picture 
as shown m Fig 15G3. It is secured with 





Tig. 1877. Quarter 
Plao thowins Method 
or Striking Out Saucer 

of Candltt Sconce. 



lig. 1876.— Development of Scroll In Candle Sconce. 



Fig. 1S7S.— Side Elevation 
of Candle Sconce. 



size. The outer edges are shaped to the 
curves as shown, and mitres are marked 
oS, cut, and trued up. The four parts are 
then tned together to ascertain the fit of 
the mitres. Next sketch the fretted design 
(see Fig. 1564) on cartridge paper, cut 
out the design hke a stencil plate, and 
mark it through on the wood with a soft lead 
pencil. Cut out with a fret-saw machine 
for preference. Finish off with a file and 
glass-paper. A sharp, well-defined outline 
IS essential with this class of design. The 



screws from the back, or with screws driven 
from the front face as shown in Pig. 1,566, 
the border moulding in this instance'.iust 
covering the screw head. The inner frame 
IS also glued as well as screwed, and greatly 
strengthens the oak frame. The latter is 
also further secured at the outer angles 
by making a saw cut on the extreme edge 
of the mitres, running it down about IJ in., 
and then inserting a glued slip or feather.' 
The nail shown by dotted hnes in Fig. 1568 
IS only recommended when soft woods 



4S2 



CABINETWORK AND JOINKB^. 




Fig. 1»7». 



"^^S\J^fe''~*^^^ fig. IMO. 
Pig- »r. «d ...o.-.0™n„u. p™... witk Bolitag, „d oval Op«i^ 



MIBBOE FRAMES AND PIOTCBE FBAMES. 



vsa 




«t- IUl.-BMturiUr Fruni wUh cIiouIk Otiumut 
In Padimtat 



rig. IBM.— Mlund Joint nHd in 

fimmfi (iM rigi. 1>T> and 

UK). 



Hg. lua. Hj. i,„, 

Hg» liu and 1M7.— SMtlona of OnUr 

■onldingi of Fnunn iliown by Fip. l»7« 

•nd U8II mpMtinly. 





Fig. ISBO.— 

Frettod Pedimrat 

of Prams ahovn 

by Fig. ma. 



Fig. ma.— TbroMponlng Framo witli Prottod 
Podiment, 



Fig. 1U9.— SecUon of Carvod 

'Pediment {m« Rga. 2=^1 

and IMS) 



Fig. wn.— Shelf fop Tiree- 
opwUng Fnune. 




Fig. U93.— Braokat for Tbna. 
openiag Frame. 



M 



4H 



, :. Kg. 1367 giT« the de.ign o< b framo on 

If. I .im.Ur Ime.. but with SWr.1 d,»tCu™ 

ij: J features a, compand with Kg. IBflS. Th. 

I; fop ra,l onl^ ,. fetted, while the lower rail 

A? "'■?«,'"'• °" °' independent design 

Also a boleotion moulding is used for the 

mner border. This i, shown in the enlarged 

! «e<!tional view (Fig. 1668). '""'g«« 



tABINETTiroRK AND JOINEBy. 



i -i 



1_ 



Mirror with Side Bracl<cts. 

Pig. 1869 gives a front elevation of a 
miTTOT tome or overmantel of unique design. 
Any hardwood ,B suitable for its coistmction 
*f°/, »'».«»' tie bevel-edge mirror is 
1 ft. 2 in. wide by 1 ft. 6 in. high. The 
top and bottom rails are 4 in. wide by J in 
thick the stiles are Sf in. wide at the topi 
and diminuh below the curves to a width 
of 2}m. The rails and stiles have mortice, 
and-tenon joints, the rebates for the gUss 
etc. bemg worked out of the soUd. The 
border moulding is worked, mitered, and 
glued on and then two pieces are wrought 
and moulded and screwed to the bottom 

tarved brackets are also secured to the 
stUcs and base, giving a pleasing effect to the 
wl?" '''.*\^,'?«- On the top rail, a 
on the front edge, and returned at the ends 
18 next secured, and above this a cornice 
mould la attached as shown in the enlarged 

(Fg. 1571). Fig. 1572 is a horizontal 

detail section just above the carved bracket. 

Mirror witli Candle Sconces. 

Fig. 1573 is a design for a mirror frame 
with wrought-metal caudle sconces The 
frame is simple in character, the decorative 
features beii ; the sconces and the sunk 
ornament m the top rail. The rails and 
stiles are bevelled on the front inner edge and 
also rebated. The thickness of t^^fl 
used can vary from j in. to 1 in., according 
' the size of the frame. The rails and 

tJ;'i!Ji, ^" A™'",'^ ■""* »t™P-tenoned 
together. An enlarged view of the tenon 

at Fig. 1574, which is a rear view, also 
showmg the set-back for the moulded cd™ 
of the rebate to mitre together properiy. 



The stites should be left square on th. 

»t ^» ^' ^"' !^"y «'"«• "P and 
set, when the projections can be trimmed 
off to suit the curve on the rail. Pig. 1S75 
itZtV *''^'»«' ™rtical seotion tlrough 

sconce. The inner edge of the bottom 
rail 1. curved a. shown. It will b, bert 
to carry the rebate for the ghis, at the 

boTSi.'T' "V-.' "T'- ParaL wifh the 
bottom edge of the frame, and not follow 
the inner curve of the rail. ThM an 

used and save the trouble o! shaping it 

t ^^M''"^ ^^' ™''^'° «onces*can 
be made from sheet bras, or copper. The 
btter metal is more suitable for an oak 
. T„ '*Ji! "^\^' "otal should be about 
, . in. thick. The front sc.oU is bifuroaVed. 
its development being shown by Fig 1570 

cnft'n ^ r*"' ■"" ''"■' ■"""«' out and 

«roU Th J";^ """ **"' ""^ 'o 'o™ a 
bin i. . t"^" »' *•" •>"='' "ith 'be 

a pitch block or a block of hardwood or 
lead 80 as to give the scrolls tht romided 
or repousse appearance shown in Figs 

ported by a shorter one riveted at the 
upper end, and abo to the back pUte. The 

to fb' 'L"^ "7-i"J '<'™- '"^ » attached 
to the frame with three smaU round-headed 
screws. The method of marking out the 
aucer « shown in quarter pUn by Fig 
lo77. The can.:'e holder is cut from a 
piece of ikt sheet, and consists of four 
rL.7 P|*?'» projecting at equal distances 
round a fin. diameter circle struck on the 
sheet metal. When the surplus metal 
has been cut and filed away round the petals 
the latter are bent up to form the holde^ 

method of marking out on the flat is similar 
J V t..'"'™'' "" ^'8- 1377. The saucer 
and holder are fixed to the scroll either 
with a small copper rivet or a brass screw 
ana nut. 

More Ornamenul Picture Frames. 

Esamples ul cabinetwork frames are shown 
by Figa. 1578 to 1582. They may be made 



MIBBOB FBAMES AND PIOTUBE FBAUES. 






ta almott .ny knd ol wood-mahogany 
•tauMd dart, Amenoan walnut, oak £umi- 
gited or (tamed in imitation ot old oak or 
American aih stained green, each Win! 
finiihed with frenoh poU.h. The dimen- 
•ions will be regulated by the liie of the 
pictures or engravings to be framed. In 
making the frame illustrated by Fig 1578 
first get out the top and bottom and side- 
piwes of i-iu. or i-in. stnfl, with the top 
and bottom rails mortised into the side 
•tiles, and work a hollow moulding on the 
mside edgM, as shown at a in Fig. 1583 
The trolhs pattern is drawn on the wood 
and then cut through with a fret-saw ; the 
openings are cleaned up with a file and zlas - 
paper. The ornamental raised border ,s 
got out of j-in. stu8, the joins being made 
wherever the small scrolls come together. 
Tracmgs should be made of the wveral 
portions, and pasted on the l-in. stuff 
and then cut out with a bow- or fret-saw.' 
Ihe neit operation U to carve them to 
the section shown at b (Fig, 1583) The 
terminal scrolls are rounded on the face as 
Shown m F,g 1584, with the addition 
01 a small leif where shown in Fig 1578 

^ «•?'!."?* '* '' '''"to'Mry to carve 
and finish oB the ornamental border before 
Smlly gluing It to the frame, as then the 
Irame and the carving can be aoUshed 
separately, thus ensuring a clean job with- 
out any sticky comers in the polishing. 
For convemence of carving, the section 
are temporarily glued to a board, paper 
bemg mserted where glued, to enabirthe 
Mr™g to be stripped off afterwards with a 
taufe. The finished carving is glued to the 
frame and when set the outside edges are 
^tTi »«»"<'. 8'«»»Wered and then 
polished. The picture may be fixed in 
the usual way with thin back-boarding 

he dust. The frame iUustrated by Fig 
1^79 18 made of j-in. stuff, mitered at 
the corners ; the edges are grooved, and a 
loose tongue inserted, as shown in Fig 
lo8o, and then glued. A hollow and a 

R» ^^f T^- ""^^ *" "^'^ «» in 
"g. 1583. A section of the outer mould- 
s' J5 T" '" ^'8- 13Sd. The small 
shaped pediment is of J-in. stuff, and 
may be fitted after the frame has l^en 



put together j small nails driven in from 
the top will secure it. Th. frame shown 
by Fig. 1380 IS miterod together in the 
mme way as Fig. 1379; the thickness 
IS the same, but the shaped portions 
surrounding the moulding form part of 
the frame. To secure the moulding to the 
frame, the pieces may be screwed from 
tfie back. A section of this mouldini is 
shown m Fig. 1387. The design given 
m Pig. 1381 is for a long frame, whiJh is 
constructed in the same way as Fig. 157!) 
the section of moulding surrounding the 
picture also being the same. Half the 
oireuUr ornament in the pediment is shown 
enUrged in Pig. 1588, and a section of the 
petals in Fig. 1589. The frame shown in 
Mg. 1083 IS suitable for small engraviniN 
or photographs, and the shelves provide 
accommodation for small ornaments The 
thickness of the wood is } in. or 1 in and 
to prevent the frame from warping it should 
be made like a drawing-board, by clamping 
the end-pieces as indicated by the grain of 
the wood in Fig. 1583. The openings for the 
pictures wUl have to be cut out with a fret- 
saw, and the hollow moulding and rebate 
Ciirved with a gouge and chisel. The orna- 
ment m the pediment (shown enUrged in 
Fig. 1590) 18 cut through with a fret-saw. 
The top shelf may be of |-in. stuff about 

fJ"- Tim', ^"i'^V^ •>« '" the half.phin 
(Fig. Iu91). Three Lm.dl brackets, shaped 
as m Fig. 1392, will be required to sup^ 
port the shelves. The lower shelf is semi- 
circular in pkn. The shelves are fixed 
with screws driven in from the back of the 
frame. The scrolls and ornamental lines 
at the bottom of this frame may be cr-ved 
with a small gouge or parting tool. 



Horseshoe Mirror with Qlove-box. 

The mirror illustrated by Fig. 1593 j, 
so designed that hat and coat pegs may if 
desired, be screwed to the upright bars 
It IS made preferably of good sound dry 
watout, and is finished by polishing. Full 
details are shown in Figs. 1094 to 1599. The 
upnght and cross-bars of the framework 
are dovetail-halved together. The ends of 
each bar are cut circular, and relieved by 
carving as shown in Fig. 1597. The mirror 
frame is made from a block of wood, cut to 



M 



hfl 



CABINETWORK AND JOUfKKV. 



Sli! 



'he nqointe mhtpt •nd thra woiktd out to 
tto MotioB •hown in Fig. IBM. After 
«ta raptetentative luili hara been drives in 
«ke n-onotony of the .unk pert i. reUeved 
bjr being jliAtlv Koied. The mirror phte 
hM beveUed edgee, and nuT be obfauned 
r~dy_ cnt end bevelled .t » gU» mer- 
chant!. It it kept in poeition by the 
becking board fitting fliuh over the gUia 
end on to the edgee oi the frame, to which 



bnuh«t. etc. It tuy b. leen torn th 

?Sr"'..'^„\'^.'"*''»^ Avation {Kg, 
IS94 and IBM) that the front and eiS 
ere nutered and tongned together, and thi 
. £?"**.'"«<' "■• ""ek piece, which i, 
of nfflcient length and width to fit int( 
• nbate in the adjoining bar., to whid 
■' » •V^i ^ pM and icrewi. Th. 
bottom u rebated In, and the box from 
fiaiihed with a narrow, deep - chamfered 




n». mj.-Hoiie.lioe Klinr with Oloro-boi. 



it " screwed (see Rg. 1596). The whole i. 
nxed to the bar frame by eorews pawinir 
through the cross-bars. The stud nails 
(Fig. 1599) are out out of solid pieces of 
braw, a hole being driUed through the centre 
to receive a brase-headed nail. Another 
method of making them would be to cnt 
them out of wood and glue in position, after- 
wards oovermg them with gold leaf As 
may be seen in Fig. 1593, these naili are 
placea at the parte where the bars intersect 
each other. Below the bottom cross-bar 
and between tt,« two upright bars is fixed 
a boi, smtable for the reception of glovee 



moulding. The Ud is left pUin, with the 
exception of a deep chamfer round the 
face edges. The front panel of the bo.^ 
may, if desired, be embellished with carvinc. 
The mirror is fixed to the waU with four 
stroi^ eypplates screwed to the cross-bari 
(see Pig. 1593). The wall should be pro- 
perly plugged to receive the nails or screw.. 
All the necessary dimensions may bo ol- 
tamed from the illustrations, in which 
the front elevation is reproduced to a 
scale of 1 in. to the foot, the remainder 
being reproduced to a scale of 4 in. to th.; 
foot. 



MIBBOB FHAME8 AND PICTURE FRAMES. 



ComMiMd Mirror and Ptctisri 
Pranw. 

The comWned minor .nd picture fr,„, 
•hown by K,g,. „ioo ,„ um iVof .n OTM. 
mental .ham, ter, intend«l .» h. con.tn.ctM 

Uken on the line a a (Fig. KKio). ,nd Fig. 



=^^:^^^,ln:rnX•;l4i: 

by J in. : ,ric '.nciM. .bov e.hdl, ',? „ 

aj m. hy .,} „. hy I in ^ ^ 
porting the ,h„U, sj in, hy 4, ;„ ,„. ,'»P, 




Hg. im-stud RaU for HonnhM Minor. 



lOM ,8 a section taltea at b b. The frame 
» 1 ft. 11 m. wide and 1 ft. 8 in. high from 
the top of the 8he._ to the top of the cornice 
raould. Most of the framing is 1 i„ 
on the face by J in. thick, the widths of 
the top and middle rails only being in- 
creased to allow for fiing the cornice and 

are a, follows : Shelf, 2 ft. 11 in. by 5 in. 
oy I in. (giving 6 in. projection at each end 



Hj. IUT.-Z14 of Bar in Horrahoo Mirror. 



shaped spandrel piece between under shelf 
1 ft UJ m by 5i in. by J in. ; turned pen^ 
dants to stiles of frame, 2J in. by 1 in in 
diameter; small spindles in frieze, 2 in 
(between shoulders) by J in. in diameter 
and with fm. pms J in. long. The centra 
mirror is of bevelled plate, 1 ft br SJ in 
with a i-in. backboard. The two picture', 
should be mounted on cardboard, filed in 
J-in. gilt frames (without glass), backed 



f 



M 



4.V< 




It . 



with thin b«„l, ,aa th-n »l.c«l hodily 

Thi. IMtm«l U cut out, pUlwd to lilF, ,Bd 

m«k«l out .ccu«t.ly L joi.t., ,5»?« 



CABINKTWOM AND JOINEBY. 



•tvk, hollowM one .1.1. to koW Ihe glu. 
fully uul quickly inwrt into tb« hole., with- 




-^ ^_ „, J Hf. 1101. 

r.. »» . i.,.-^« -- --L-^— ~ - -«.. 



housings and bor.ng for spindles. Mortices 
are cut first (so as not to p„a through t' 
the seen edges), the reedSg being done 

?^er'"'TK7"' " -«"»«>" or a hand 
reeder. The tenons are then formed, the 
rebates and housings worked for the glass 
brackets and shelf, and the holes Cd 

and glued up, commencing with the top 



tnll ?f * ""J/'"" "" "« ""■'• Oentlv 
Knock the spmdles into one piece, turn 
bodily over, and insert into the other piece 
and cramp up square. Allow this to set, 
and durmg this time prepare other parts 
«uch as moulds, brackets" pediment, etc. 
^en g.ue op th. whok- fame, cramp .„,, 
set as|de. Complete the remainder ot 
the parts whilst setting. Next clean ofT 



MIBBOK FHAUES AND PICTCKE FRAMES. 



«Im h»m». (it th« iheK. anil nenw Inm th.> 

1 I "".. '" ""•■ ''"'""" ™i'- Then (it 
•Bd hx •11 Iha bnclwti hiuI ■p.mln-I, mitre 
the cornice aiul necking moulda (Fig 



Tlf. lMI.-l«tiM et Mmer 
"•■• oa Uu AA 

(Hf. IMOJ, 



'V- 



1- 




L'J 

If. lM<.-f<e<loa tt Wmr llf. IM*- 
FraiM uui Ibelf la Uu B B OendM of 
(Rf. MM). OonUaed 

Mirror ud 
lokoroFrmao. 




Fix. uos.-iJoliit In Frame 
•I (Flj. 1100'. 

1006 and 1607), fijting with glue only, 
nnaiiy dowel on the jjediment and lix tiie 
tnmed pendants (Fig. 1608). The joint 
at (Fig. 1600) is shown enlarged at Fig 



I am, Th. fnin.e mu.( now !«. poli.hed. 

II » (intil,.. jol, I. ,l™i„^, i„„,„,, „, 
Hung .11 pnrt., .imply (it the .h..|(, brarket, 
•paiidre. pediment, and pendant, in n<>.i. 
non^ •al'e apart poli.h, and, when , „ii„ 
hard, cowhilly Hx together, ,„i„g „ '„,(, 
tlo h and avoid handling a. m„,.h at no., 
•ible. .Uy ,|,gh, mark, canned by the 
warmth of the hand ran be .pirited off 

Irame. with their gla.., then the minir and 
baekb«Ki and lini-h od by backing the 
part of the frame containing the mirror 

•Iretched. and glued on. Vile whole can 
be hung by mean, of mirror plate, and 

Hai.sinc Mirror* wld Candle 
SconctB, 

Hanging mirror, of the kind iUusttated 
by Fig.. 1610 and 1611 .re .uitable f„ 

te* .°ll' """f- "■?' "• inaufficiently 
lighted, the combmcmn of bevelled clau 
and lighted candle, inauring , gSteSJ 
and bright efiect. They I. T^ 
"'/"y, »« 'h" ""ual hardv .d«. freneh! 
polished ; or of "nt, pointed and enamelled 
white or any light .had. of colour to mateh 
the furniture or decoration of the room. 

:„J k M I """"V "* '"''y obtaiMble, 
and shouM be in huid befori making the 

urn'- ^Y. T" '~"" »>«""■ » Kg 
IblO may be about 2 ft. 6 in. long, and 
proportionately high. To insure ™rlSt 
proportions, a fu!l-M» drawing of half 
the desig,, should be prepared, the length 

.h^?l I"''^ "P°" *"*• Half the desU 
should Ihen be set out to the «.me number 
ot petpendicuar spaces as shown at Fig 
IblO; next the horizontal lines, the same 
distance apart, to form the squares The 
shaped portion of the design in each square 
can then be filled in. The dimensions "" 
^e various nieces of wood can be obtained 
irom the full-size drawing. The tliick- 
ness of framing should be about I in. 
The top and bottom tails are tenoned, and 
the side pieces mortised ■ receive them 
as shown in F,g. l.!i;. .f,, ^ouWuu, a' 
(Fig. 1«10), and those forming the r^t* 
angle, are about 1 in, wide by J in thick 
with a hollow worked on each edge Xe 



iil 



MO 



■houd finish i ,„. thlct-this will allow 
a i-in. rebate for the bUss The anol. 
r,b» are fitted to the top, ttm, and sS 
of the frame, as shown in Fig. 1614 and 

w rt 1"°™ *•"= '"""^tion. To pro- 
tect the silvenng of the glass plates a S 
mnst be provided, fittilg flJsh withihe 

fo-^b^V"'- '""!!■. '''■^ "•>» mult thert! 
fore be less m width than the thickness of 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEHI. 



the frame (ko Fig. 1613, which shows a 

When tb ,"" ^'^ ," »■«> "' *''« "•» B) 
VVhen the frame is glued together, and the 
ribs are fixed and glued, the out^r shap^ 
edges may be cut with the bow sawlnd 
cfeaned up with a fUc and gUss-pape^Ncxt 
the face of the frame should bV levellM 
with he plane, and glass-papered. The S 

louows . Fit the top, bottom, and sides 
mitenngthematthecomers,and tempoS 
secure them with screws driven from "he 




rig. 1610. 
Pig.. laio .ad i.i,._p^, „, 3„. ^,^^^ ^ j^^ ^^ 

Centre, 

^A 





Hf. 1611. 
Sconces ud ZHunond 




rig. 1612.— Conter Joint of 
Frame. 



Fig. 1613.— Section of Face 

Moulding. Eibi, and Back 

of Frame. 




"N^ 




rig. i«14.-r!xing Blbi to Mirror 
Frame. 



■Mtm^ 



• 



MIREOE FRAMES AND PICTURE FRAMES. 



Mder side of the frame. Next fit the angle 

umicated m the enlargement at Pie. i«ig 
The mtersect on of the diamond centai 
« the mort difficult part of the job, hene" 

Knes o tr/"'™«..<"'°™« "" «S 
anes of the frame, nbs, and facine) shouW 
be ve,y carefully prepared. The S 
bemg small, can be pa«d to shape ^t^ 




•Ifll 

,fwn^y.«7„Tf.''.-tit™: 

o/^s,'plLststei^t^t1o-Th^ 
extends from r, to . (Fi^rranJX 



Tig. iai9. 



fl;. 1S30. 



Pig., leis u,d I620.-S«tlon. of MouMlng. 
for Huigfng Mirror. 



rig. U23.— OMticin of Klrror Itame 
and Face Mouldliig. 



"«■»"• Fig.mT. - 

""«!;V"*.f '"■~'^' •^ ""• B.T.Uon. Of 
With C«.dl. aoono.. and Clrda, Oni«„,„ 

P^diineiit. 

chisel. The shelf, which is semicircular 
a bracket (see end elevation, Fig lllH) and 

and under the shelf are cut through. To 
obtain the best eflect, bevelled „k,s 
hould be used; but to lessen the cost 
the bevelbngmay be dispensed with! The 
sconces should be fixed JIfter the frame k 
vail S; T f'^""^ "" """"^ °° the 
"the frame"'"" "^ "'^""^ '<" *>«= ''«k 




Mirror Pig. leaL-SMtloa Pig. leas-cirratar 
«■ of Minor Onmaent ia Mirror 

T«W«t Podlmeat 

moulding,, p, o, and h are planted on the 
tace of the frame, and returned at the 
Sjdes as shown m the end view (Fig 16181 
the corrnrs being mitered. A section of 
the mouldings G and H is shown at Fie 1019 
The shaped part of the pediment is made 
separate from the frame ; and the angle sil 

Rg. 11.20). The five tablets on the frie«^ 
are about. | „. thi.k at the highest point, 
and taper down to J in. at the edges (see 

TvT'imf'- '"",'• '''"' ■""-Wfngs* K 
(rig. ildlT; see also section, Fig. 1622) 



462 



Z?^^ *^° «■"'! '"' ?'""« »° «li» face 
and a back « .naerted a, fqr the other mirror 
Jhe circular ornament in the pediment 
8hown. enlarged at Fig. U;-23, i, carved wTth 
smtable gouges and chisels 
Third Example.--The dimensions of the 

as for that shown at Pig. Ifin. The frame. 

SSJ '■ r^ "■= '"^ mouldings are 
planted on (see section, Fig. IS"*) T„ 
mitenng the various pieces of moulding 
begin by fitting the top, bottom" and 

p thenU^'i' 't" '*" ""'de uprights 
P, then the two short rails in each oiter 
division and last the two short rails n«t 
the panel. The mouldings may be naiS 
on, if for pamting; but for polished hard- 
wood they must be glued, and held d^wn 
with wooden handsorews or iron clarips" 

the back of the frame. If ckm™ =Z 
not available, the moulding^' J^T h"d 

men this bemg allowed to remain on t," 
the glue has set. The pediment moulding 
IS panted on the face of the frame, JS 

ftee e'nH™r" ??■* 'f"'"'"^ »' ">» »Wes 
r,i'^'"*, ™*> ^'«- 1625). the mouldings 
K (Pigs. 1624 and 1027) being treated in the 
fame way. The pedimenT and sLed 
^S "^uT""^ *"» *■>» '"me, and are 
cuwT;^'' "^T''- *''* "«»» '" ^-h being 
Z T V *.'"' ^'"- Tk^ "itre panel 
on which the sconces are fiited, shown 
enlarged at Fig. 1628, is } i„. thick. lie 
ornamental hnes are hollow in section, and 

of fiS^fk"',,"' ^-^^ ^"•'Se. The method 
of fiang the hanging mirrors to the wall is 
the same in each case. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEEY. 



Inlaid Frame. 

tJTr'^^Vf '".** ''""' ^" front and 
full sectional elevations of an inlaid frame 

ttee '1,T'"'e»r ""d constructed to hold 
6if,?l'^ J !"" '"«" O"" "t * (4i m- bv 
-t m.). The grounds of all inlays are 
silver grey the brackets and uprigto 
bemg banded outside with mahogany^ The 
photos should have a matt surface.^and he 

siblc the colour of the grey veneer. When 



making an inUid article, all inlays shoul 
where possible be laid first to alL the 
to sink properly and to avoid waitin, 
always remembering, when doing so, to ^* 
pale, clean glue, spreading it even y o7e 
the surface to be lai." n tnd not over th, 
veneer. A few fine inet-make,^' held 
less pins o keep the ,.ueer in place, and < 
piece of clean paper to cover the intay (t 

oe at hand , the handscrews opened ready 

Lrlch ^"Irt- '"? " well-hS 
caul .>„ich should be appUed quickly and 
eveny to the inlay. cSt out'Sy t^ 
«ze the following pieces of wood for veL^ 

Zut Mt r™ f "'"'*7'">d for the frieze, 
about 1 ft. 4 m. long and IJ in. wide, planed 
to 1 m. ; one piece of whitewood fcr the 

fo, ,). i I \ '"" P'cces of soft mahogany 
for the brackets the grain running fori- 
«>ntal), I in. thick; "two pieced ?f soft 

^TnT"^ '°f ,* ' "P"8'"» «. about 1 fe 
3 in. long and In. thick (these will be 1 in 
square when finished); two pieces of J 

h^iT/t" ^V,'' "P"8'"'' "bout 6^ 
long and J in. thick (these will be i in 

?rr"* ^'|f\fi»'»l'ed). With a fine pW 
iron, tooth the face side of «U the nfeces 
^d coat with thin glue, and when dr? The 
inbys may be held down by meanZof a 
hot caul and handscrews. After the iiJays 
bave st»d m the handscrews about twelve 
hours they may be taken out and sit 
aside to sink until required, when the pawr 
mi^t be toothed off. and the inlay scS 
and fmally gUss-papered. The centre K 
reiSi„°i 7^'«r'^..tl'» top and two sS 
Snni? 'A"- Ki'"- and mortised and 
tenoned together, the bottom rail being 1 1" 
wider to take the base D, which is 1 ft "ll k' 
by lOj m. (see Fig. 1630). The two sms^i 
tames Bare of f-in. by fin. stuff (see F^' 
1631), and are put together in the sa„«. 

ZTlL'l f" T'"', "'"' "«' ^^ception 

Tndli .^L"- ^ * '";'■ When made, tooth ' 
and size the face sides for veneering with 
mahogany. Cut out sufficient st„V I! 
mahogany veneer for all three frames, Mo.- 

lut all frames in hand at once, as th. 
work requires following up. Get ready a caul 



MIEROB FRAMES AND PICTURE FRAMES. 



olose to the wood where the mitres wili"h^' n."":r'' ""■ '"<= "»= be a shade ahov. 

from the bottom edge. PUce a piece „, e,Th ^ afed"" r " ""H * '"• ''°«> 

rage ail roimd. Gauges should always 



463 

o'h™ef r^^ ^°T ■ *''™ "i"- «'«• «W of a 
h ed "'P- .'"^ P'r^' '"■" "-e veneer round 

roo^efr^thfeeSr-f^t'-TV-' 

the surfa^l ,1' ""=.''"= '"' « '■'"d" above 
tTa^^fl'f i"^' •K" below. Take care 




w™ ftam. wlU, OMtr. P™, ..d 0«.dl. iZ^ 



Tig. i«aj.. 



e Paul for Hlmr 
Ftams. 

be kept for this work, as different sijes are 
often used. Turn round the point „( an 
ordinary marking gauge and file it to cut 
a p^ove the ci« of the hne to be inlaid, 
so that ,t fits tight enough to be pressed 
m with a hammer. MTien the lidnc Z 
mitre, are cut" on theTtilT^SLa "rraSs ^"^'u^"' *t- T^ ■"'■*" '"d PoUsh^he 
■oay be veneered. The nuS or,hese X '^"«'.' ""'«''™W be done before fixing 
must bo eut before layW lettt. the ^1^ »"""' '",°,"''''' ''™'i'»' arebitravf, 
veneer lap over «»-h side^before W ^ '"'""" """'^ " '^^ »• b^ If in.) are al> 
flfng. ptt a pin ateaeh end to te'p o on™^ '" *'"' '"'i^' '^ »'«> ■»- 'he 'mould 
the mitres weU up. When the veneeriS the^.^w J ^'^ 7™ f""= "P ^'''l »»™Pe 
.. completed, allow the work to stlTf^? t^^T^^Mt^ ^^;^'li 



hardwood with a straightedge exactly on 

J the 1 J^ »aw, keeping the saw well up 

take off ?f "?'^-- ^'""'- "^ « ohisel^ 
take off the waste piece of veneer, which 

anil ^r^.l*^ r''^' "» *•■« 8'»« « not dlT 



k 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




Figs. 1639 and 1630.— 
Half Front Elavatlon 
and Vertical Ctmi 
Section of Inlaid 
Frame. 



MIRROR FRAMES AXD PICTURE FRAMES. 



485 



the piece (or the pediment and the four 
bracket pieces before cutting to shape. 
Tooth and scrape the three framoa, and 
all may be finely glass-papered. Then tut 
the brackets to shape, and finish. Bichro- 
aiate all mahogany parts, and when dry 
finely paper again and polish, using a white 
polish for the grey inlays. PoliBh and 
oil especially must be kept a certain dis- 
tance from the edges that are to be glued. 
When all the parts are polished, dow*>l in 
two places, and glue the uprights c to the 
centre frame. "HUxk a line across the back 
of the uprights always where brackets, etc., 
are dowelled to the other side, or they may be 
W^ ~i drilled out when boring for the other dowels. 

base D ahorJd next be mitered and fixed 
wi.u glue {». Fig. 1632), and when dry, 
s«v off the ends of the uprights. Plane 
the bottom edge, do,vel the mould f to 
the centre frame in three places, and fix 
with glue. Glue and screw the architrave 
to the centre frame and the upright o, and 
mitre and glue the frieze and cornice moulds. 
Dowel in two places, and glue the wing 
frames e to the upright c, keeping them 
central from the top of the base d and 
the bottom of the architrave. Dowel in 
two places and glue the end uprights to 
the frame and neatly saw aS the ends. 
Glue and screw the four moulds g to the 
frames e, then dowel each of the brackets 
in two places to the uprights c, as this is 
the end grain of the brackets, and glue to 
uprights and moulds o (see Fig. 1631). A 
fine pin may be driven through the scroll 
end of the bracket into the mould a, which 
is ,V in. deep, to keep the bracket in place, 
or it may be skew-screwed at the back. 
Marking out on paper the exact size of 
pediment, take out the thickness of top 
mould from the top sides, and cut the 
paper to shape ; place it over the inlaid 
piece for the pediment, murk round, and 
cut the wood to the line ; plane the edges, 
cut the centre mitre of the top mould, 
and glue to the top edge of the pediment, 
allowing the ends to lap a little. When 
dry, saw ofi the ends, plane the bottom 
edge level, dowel in tw:^ places, and glue 
to the top of the cornice. Mitre and fix 
the various moulds with glue. Fig. 1633 
shows a sectional plan of the end upright 



with its base moulding. After n final 
touch up with polish the frame is completed. 
The ornamental moulding inside the centre 
frame is IJ in. by 1 in., the glass Wing 
held in position with J-in. by ,''„-in. bead- 
ing. The outer glasses are held with 
beading | in. deep (see Fig. 1631). 

Oval Mirror. 

A mirror frame as shown in Fig. 1634 
may be made of hardwood, such as mahog- 
any, walnut, oak, or ash, stained green and 




Tig. lesa.— Horiiontal SeoUu 

tbrottffh Upright of Inlaid 

Fnun*. 



Fig. l«sa.— Horltoattl BmUob 

through End Upright of Inlaid 

Frame. 



Fig. 16S1.— Tertioal Crou SecUon 
through Side QUh of Inlaid 
Frame. 
Fig. 1631. 

fcench-polifahed, or of {Hne, painted and 
enamelled. An effective size would be 
about 2 ft. high by 1 ft. 6 in. wide, with 
the framing about 2j in. wide. The oval 
may be set out with the aid of a piece of 
string, two nails or piiu, and a pencil as 
follows : Draw the centre lines through 
the height and width. Next, from a point 
at the extreme side of the oval, describe an 
arc with a radius equal to half the height 
of the oval. Where the arc cuts the pt - 
pendicular centre line, place the two nails. 
Now tie the string, wh'ch should be of 
sufficient length to reach ihe top or bottom 
of the oval, round the nails. The oval 
may be drawn by making the pencil travel 
right round the figure, and the inner line 
by shortening the string the widih of 
the framing. The under portion of the 
frame is made by lapping two thicknesses 
of j-in. stut! m sections, the jomts of one 



:'^ 



Mti 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINEEY. 



layer being pUced in the middle o{ the 
other layRr, aa in Pig. 1635. Theae aectiona 
are J in. lesa in width than the sight aiie 
of the tame, thus allowing a i-in. rebate 
for the glaaa (see section, Fig. 16u(l). The 



1634, and in the enlarged detail of the 
frame (Pig. 1637). The gUss is secured 
with small wedges about 1} in. long, pUcad 
at intervals of about 2 in., and a thin pine 
back A (Fig. 1630) is fitted in at the 4ck 




Fig. issi— Two Thlokssisss Uppwl to form 
ntamt. 




Fl(. ISii.— Oral UiiTor. 



frammg having been planed up true, the 
face portion may be planted on. Of course, 
the various sections will require giuing 
together, and the addition of screws, as 
in Fig. 1635, will help to secure them. A 
hollow is worked round the outer and inner 
edges of the frame, and pateras and flutes 
are carved on the face, as shown in Fig. 



Pig. H37.— Ealsiged OMaU of Oral Itams. 

of the frame and resting on the wedges. 
The back is then secured by driving thin 
screws in a slanting direction into the 
frame (es clearly shown in the sectional 
view. Fig. 1636). Two or more brass 
hanging plates, with three holes for screws, 
will be required for fixing the mirror to 
the wall. 



f 




SHAVING CABINETS AND MIRRORS. 



simple Shaving Mirror. illustrated in Fig». 1638 and 1639, hut it 

n._ „ . .1. i J , . should not he less than } in. thick. The 

fof JLr^k .!! hardwood may be used joint, at the comers are 'made with hard! 

for making the frame of the shaving mirror wood dowels. The top and bottom piece. 




Hg. MM: 



Pigi. 183. to 1640.— Front Elava- 

Uon, Vertical Section, and Bholf 

Flan ^nndomeatli) of Bimplo 

Sbaving Mirror. 



CABlNEfWORK AND JOINERY. 



nuy be «haped, and the rebate at the back 
and the cavetto moulding at the front 
made before framing together ; but at Br»t 
It will bo best to defer these operations on 
the side pieces. As the cavetto moulding 
i» shaped from the solid, the comers must 
be mitered back. The frame, being dowelled 
together, but not glued, may be faced 
over with the pUne (back and front) and 



(Fig. 1039), which is connected to the shelf 
by means of a housing joint. The minor, 
which need not necessarily have bevelled 
edges, may be fixed in pUce with a thin 
wooden back as in framing a picture 
but It is desirable to protect the back of 
the minor from possible injury by interpos- 
ing a few thicknesses of blotting paper. A 
rather neater method of fixing is shown 




Tig. 1643.— Shavliit sad ToUst CaUaet 



tte shape of the side pieces marked out 
•it pieces are more conveniently shaped 
It the frame is taken apart, but flats should 
be left at the top and bottom to form abut- 
•nents for cramping when the frame is glued 
up. The flat abutments are, of course 
shaped afterwards. The projecting piece 
A (Fig. 1638) at the bottom may be cut 
out separately and glued on. The shelf 
(Fig. 1640) may be attached either by 
wooden dowels or by screws inserted from 
the Kwk, aa also may the small bracket b 



in Fig. 1641, which is a horizontal section 
through one of the side pieces. Two 
rebates are shown, one to receive the minor 
and another to receive a narrow strip c' 
which projects over the wooden backing and 
IS screwed down in place. The circular 
piece; d (Fig. 1638) are provided in order 
that two candle brackets (not shown), such 
as are fixed to pianos, may be screwed 
to the frame. These brackets are a very 
desirable adjunct to a mirror intended tn he 
used when shaving. Fig. 1642 is a section 



8RATIN0 CABINETS AND MIHH0R8. 




470 



CABnreTWOMt AND JOINEBT, 




rut. iMT.— udt «f 

Ska«li(ud Tolbt 



ng. UM.— Mitn Jolat 

for Minor Tnu*- 

woA. 




Hg. 16»0.— Joint of Bracket (B, Ttg. im8) to 
Door Stile of Cabinet 



For .tUohmont to th« will, two ey,- 

Shavlnt and Tolht CaMnct. 

Tho Mbinot, ot which * ceneral view ii 
P5.«nted by FiK. 1043, i, . S?„12.,fom.ri 
piece of worlc. Fig. 1M4 i. . %„ bo"t 
•levation, P,g. 1M5 a front elevitioa^th 
door and mirror removed, and Pig 1646 is 
• vertical cron Motion, showing clearly the 
constructional details. An inSer view of 
a side piece showing the grooves for shelves 
etc., IS prcMnted by Fig. 1647. Fig. 1648 
i^""' » detail of the mirror framinT 
F^. 1649 the mitered joint of the mini; 
tanung,- and Fig. 1660 the connection of 

dMr \hiJ" ■ * **" '"^ ""* '"*' *» ">• 

Shavlnc SUnd with Mirror. 

The shaving stand illustrated in front 
and side elevations by Pig,. 1651 and 16S2 

with the furniture of the room in which it is 
to be pUced. The stand is divideii nto two 
portions, the cupboard or table and the 
mirror and it. support.. Pour legs are re- 
quired, each measuring 3 ft. 3 in. lone bv 

the bottom 1 ft. from the end, the width 
and breadth being reduced to 1 in. as far 
as 3 in. from the end ; they are then curved 
out to the full thickness (see Fig. 1653) 
If preferred, the legs may be left straight 
or tapermg all along. The back and sides 
fit into grooves worked in the legs, and 
the rails at the top and bottom and between 
the drawer and oupboard are mortised into 
them. The grooves, which are cut 4 in 
from the outer edges, are J in. in depth 
and width, and e«end 2 ft. 4i in. from a 

leg. The front legs have groove, on the 
rear face only. The mortices for the side 
rails are J m. deep, i in. wide, and » in 
broad, the width being the horizontal 
measurement. Those at the top of the 
legs are flush with the end, and are there- 
fore open. The lower mortices are 2 ft. 
JJ in. below those above. End all aru a in 
from the outer edge. Those for the back 



SHAVING CABINETS AND UIKBOBB. 




and front raila un liniilurlv pl,ic«l ; 

but they «» I| in. deop. ' fhr two 

morticM bring on th« minp level. 

'hey open ino each other. ThoK> 

••king the drawer rail are li in. Mow 

the onei above. Fig. I(in4 ihowi the 

upper and lower raorticen of the left 

wont leg. The rail, are all } in. 

thick, and, with the exception of 

that beneath the drawer, which ia 

I m., are 1} in. wide. The three front 

and two back rails are 1 ft. a in long 

and the side rail. IIJ in. The tenina 

have an outer shoulder of } in. and 

an inner shoulder of | in. ; the drawer 

rail, of couise, has no inner shoulder. 

The back and front tenons are I in. 

long and the side tenons | in. All the 

•ido and lack rails are grooved to 

take the sid.! and back lioards ; these 

grooves form a continuation of the 



nia IMl aad im.-Ttmt and Sid. ElsTaUon. 
Shaviai (tand with Mirror. 




Pl». U5B.— Drawer Ball of IhavlBi Htaad. 

D 





Fig. 16BS— Foot Fig. U54. Jortloe 

of SliaTiii- stand la BiaTiLg Suuid 




Fig. lus.— Mirror 
Support for SluLTing 



Fig. Uil.—EnA of 

Sbe'f of S!ia?!B|; 

Stand. 



474 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



leg groovvr, and txttmd ) in. over the tenona. 
The Iwck Ijoard meaaurei 2 ft. 4| in. by 
1 It. .'H in. Iij- I in. ; the tide bwtdi i ft. 4* 
m. hy l(i| in. l.y | in. All m rebated i in. 
on the outiide. The vnriom parta are 
Ulued tonether. Two aide mila, raoaaiiring 
1 ft. OJ in. hy } in. by ) in., are wanted for 
the drawer to alide on. A atrip of J-in. atufi 
1 ft. lonu by IJ in. wide ia nailed, ^ in. fmm 
the front end, to what ia to be the outer 
l-in. face. Fig. JtiM ahowa theae detaila. 
The rail ia irrewed to the back and front 
leg". The top of the atand ia 2 ft. by 1 ft. 
a in. by } in., the edgm of which may be 
worked or left aquare aa preferred. It ia 
fixed by acrewa inaerted through the top 
raila. The cupboard bottom conaiata of 
a piece of J-in. boaid 1 ft. 4{ in. by UJ in., 
having rertangular piecea J in. aquare cut 
from ita comera to fit the lega. It reata 
upon and ia glued to the lower raila. Twa 
|-in. aquare raila, 11 in. long, are aecured 
to the under aurface of the top juat above 
the drawer aide reila, to prevent the drawer 
tilting when it ia drawn out. 

Cupboard Door.— The cupboard door is 
made up of two thickneaaea of |-in. material 
each 1 ft. ii in. by 1 ft. 3 in., the grain of 
the inner piece running acroaa the length, 
and that of the outer piece with the 
length. Theae are glued together, and 
a projecting panel of f-in. atufl (see Fig. 
ICJl) la -lued to the outaide. It ahould 
measure i in. leaa than the door each way, 
and the edgea ahould be bevelled. Two 
butt-hinges and a drop handle will complete 
the door. 

Drawer — For the drawer, saw out a piece 
of material 1 ft. .1 in. by (i in. by ) in., and 
dovetail to the ends two pieces (the sides) 
11 in. by 6 in. by i in. TheWk is 1 ft. 3J in. 
by i>i m. by f in., and is nailed and glued 
between the sides. The bottom measures 
1 ft. al in. by lOJ in. by } in., and is glued 
to fillets j in. m section fastened to the 



front and two aidea of the drawer ^fluah 
with the lower nur^ina ; it is alao nailed 
to the luck edge, '.o cover the doveUiling, 
a piece of |-in. material is glued over the 
front, ami to thia a panel ia aecured (see 
Fig. l(i.-.l). 

Mirror and Fram*.— The mirror and (nnw 
are aupported by two uprights (Fig. IIKJO), 
cut from |-in. atuH, and unitei; with a 
ahelf and a back board. The il'.iutntion 
gives all necessary measurements. The 
back board is 1 ft. 11 in. by tl in. by J in. 
Aa the back ol the mirroi will not be aeen, 
thia back honTd may be acrewed to the up- 
righta in the recess made for it. The aheH, 
which ia 4} in. wide by ) in. thick, ia housed 
in the uprights to a depth of J in., except at 
one point, where ^ in., at a distance of { in., 
from the front edge, ia houaed to i in. depth 
(uw Fig. 1U57, in which the dotted linea indi- 
cate the upright). The length, including 
the tenon, is llj in. One or two dowels 
or double-pointed nails make a firm union 
with the back. The mirror support is 
either dowelled or screwed to the top of the 
staiul, the back board being 1 •n. '. -n 
the rear edge. The mirroi, wh' i maj De 
bevelled, measures 1 ft. by 8 in., and if phun 
will coat about a ahilling. It i< framed 
with IJ-in. picture moulding, the sides 
being 1 ft. 2 in. long and the ends 10 in. 
Cut the ends at an angle of 45° in the 
mitre block, and glue and nail the lengtha 
together. When the moulding has set, 
inaert the mirror ; is is backed with thin 
wood or stout pasteboard, sprigged in 
pUce to keep the gUss in contact with 
the rebates. A piece of J-in. material 1 ft. 
1} in. by 9J in. is then screwed to the back 
of the frame. Finally, fix a pair of ordinary 
glass swivels to the frame and uprights, 
screwing the pins to the middle of the 
side lengths of the framing, and the sockets 
to the back of the uprights at the top (see 
Figs. 11)52 and lii5:j). 



.11' *' 




OVERDOORS. 



Decorative Overdoor. 

ILI.V9TIIATI0XS of II dproriltivo ovmloor 
ore prewntwl by Figs, lil.vt to liiTU. Thin 
htment in intpmletl a^ a ilerorativo pieci* of 
furniture for fittinc over a doorway. If it 
is to Iw fixed in a dmwing-room. it ulioulil 
be made from whitcwood, and finislied with 
ename], of a colour harmonioing with the 
general tone of the room. For a dining- 
room it is best if made from mahogany or 
walnut, and ])oli»heil. Choose good, well- 
seasoned, and stniight-graiiuil limber Tli.i 
sides of the supporting bracKts are slightly 
panelled and scored. The panels are ob- 
tained by cutting away the surface wood, 
as clearly shown in the section (Fig. 16(i2). 
The top edge of each bracket B should be 
first inarked square and set off with a dip 
of i in. to the back edge, thus giving a 
better support for the fitment. The brackets 
are fixed to the architrave moulding m 
with a screw of sufficient length to enter 
the door-frame post r, as shown in Fig. KilW. 
The shelf s has moulded front and end 
edges, and is screwed to the bracket. Two 
corner pillars c, with half pillars against the 
wall w, are tenoned into the shelf. The 
pillars should have square tops and bottoms, 
with rounded shafts, or can be left square. 
The bottom ornamental pieces, shown in 
Fig. Kijit, are cut from |-in. stuff and 
grooved i in. deep into the pillars, and 
bradded from the back side to the shelf. 
This forms a protection for ornaments, etc. 
D is the door. Before cutting the centre 
trefoil ornament, a piece of coarse canva-t 
should bo stretched over the back of the 
board and fixed with glue. Wlcn the glue 



i« dry the ornament can lie cut. and will lie 
much stronger by this methisl. The top 
rails TH are dovetoiled into the iiirner 
pillars, as shown. The wall should W 
plugged as at r in Pig. liiiit, to secure a 
brass strap plate round the half pillars, 
and along the end rails, fi.TO| with No. H 
screws. This plate should be fixed in 
p<isition before the front rail is put in. 
The rail moulding n is mitered at the 
comers and screwed to the pillars, the rails 
being bradded to it. A canopy piece, cut 
fr<.m j-in. stuff, i.. !, :,aded on top of the 
rail moulding and surrounded with a 
finishing moulding grooved on its top 
edges. The canopy is fixed by the ends of 
this moulding, being well secured, for 
which purpose the ends may be tenoned 
into the rail moulding. The top trefoil 
ornaments are cut with a fret-sow, and 
glued and bradded in position. To make 
these, get two pieces of wood ,»„ in. thick, 
glue together, with the grain running at 
nght angles to each other, and when dry 
cut to shape ; this prevents warping. The 
over-all dimensions across the Htment 
depend upon the width of the door. 

Overdoors with Carved Pediments. 

The over shown in front and end 

elevations by figs. Ili71 and IU72, and in 
plan by Fig. ll>7;i, is vcrj- easily constructed, 
and may be of walnut or mahoganv if it i.s 
to be polished ; but if it is to lie 'painted. 
American pine or v hiiewood mav lie usetl. 
It is J ft. Sin. wide, K>| in. high.'and L'j in. 
from buck to frntif, (Inly five piccL-s „£ 
timber arc required for building up this 
overdoor— namely, one piece for the back. 




474 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




1 


FT'in 


Jj tn^ 


m 


B 


1 


S 


4-^- 


vHf 


^M 


■•■.>■.■' 


i 


;'/■.•". 


2 


: .■■'■'/^ 


1 


'.;]:. 



tit. >•»■ 



I e 

1%. mi.-PillM' of OTOTllKir. 



I • 




Tig. ma.— Horiimlil Section of 0«rdoor 
Bndnt. 



Pij. isso.— Purt of OTudoor Top Bail. 



FIff. 1668. -FrtEt of Ovwdoor Sbflf. 



i^n 


li!''-' 




i' . ■ .'. 


■■•.■,-■,:,'. 


,"/■•". 


::■'!// 




Fig. 1667.— Moulding 
for Top of Orardoor 
Pediment. 



Flff. 1664.— Brail Strap and WaU Plngi for 
OrordooT. 




Ftg. 1666.— Section of Onrdoor TUlar and Rail 
Endi. 




riff. leTO.—Trefoil Gmament for ovirdoor. 







Moulding. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




Pig. 1«73. 
Pig.. I67I to l«73.-Proat ..d End El.«tlon., ^ Pl„ ., 



Pig. I«T». 



Ovirdoor witli Cirnd Fadlmut, 




Pig. I67».— o«r»iiig of Onrdoor Padlmnt 



Pig. 167»,— BeoUon 
of Curved P«rt of 
Overdoor Pediment 
«t A (Pig. 167B). 




Pig. 1<77.— Honlding of 
Overdoor Pediment 



Pig. M74.— Enlarged 
Vertical Section of 
Overdoor Pediment. 




Pig 1»79.— Oarved Bracket 

of Overdoo*-. 



OVEKDOOBS 



ft. 8 in by \ii in. by J in. ; two pieces 
lor scrolls and egg-and-tongue moulding. 

1 ft. 8J m. by .ii in. by 2 in. ; one piece for 
yackct, 7 in. by 7 in. by 11 in. ; and one 

piece for centre shelf or capping, ."ij in bv 
■ii m. by li in. The J-in. back covers 
the whole e.xcept the small piece of capping 
as IS clearly shown in the enlarged section 
tig. 1(j74, which is taken through the ceatre 



the spmdle .s not available, the mouldings 
n.ay be cut altogether with gouges, and the 
ovolo moulding carved as illustrated by 
rig. 11)11. A section taken at n (Fig 1077) 
18 reproduced at Fig. 1(178. The bracket 
18 then cut to shape and carved. A suitable 
design for this is enlarged at Fig. I(i7y The 
border turns out into a scroll over the ground- 
work on each side. The pediment and 




Fig. ItSL 



Til. in". 

Fig.. IMO f ies3.-rron. ^ End El.««.„, PUn, and V^oal g.cUoa rf Op-fHlat. 
Onrdoor. 




Fig. H««.— Carrlng of Orenloor. 



Fig. less.— 

Sid« EltvatioQ of 

Overdo r Bracket. 



of Pig. 1671. The back should be cut out 
with a bow or handsaw. An enlarged illus- 
tration of halt the back is given at Fig. 1(37.5, 
showing the holes through which the screws 
are driven to secure the scrolls and the 
bracket, also an enlarged detail of the carving, 
which is about i in. relief, and should be 
freely cut. Fig. 167(i represents a section 
taken at a (Fig. 1675). The pediment is 
now cut out and cleaned up. The mouldings 
are wofkcd up to the scrolls with a vertical 
spmdle, and finished with gouges ; or, if 



bracket may now be screwed on to the 
back, and the back cleanet'. up with a spoke- 
shave and gouges to the shape of the scrolls 
and mouldings. The capping is then screwed 
or bradded on to the bracket and back in the 
centre, and the overdoor poUshed or painted. 
Figs. 1680 and 1681 represent front and 
end elevations of an up-to-date overdoor, 
tig. 1682 being the plan and Fig. 1683 a 
section through the centre. The Jin back 
runs behind all except tne shaped pieces o 
(*ig. 1()80), which are bradded on after the 



^i 



k 



47S 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



back is cut out with a saw, cleaned up and 
carved. An enlarged illustration of the 
carving is given at Fig. 1684. It is a J-in, 
relief, cut into the j-in. back. If the carving 
presents any difficulty, it may be left out. 



or with a machine. If hardwood is used, 
this j-in. shelf may be prepared in two 
pieces and jointed in the centre, as illustrated 
in Fig. 1680 ; but if whitewood is used, it 
may be prepared in one piece. The section 




Fig. 1S«T. 



Tig. lest. 



Fig. 1««6 to 168t. -Plain Orardoors. 



and another small shelf can be fixed in the 
centre. The shelves are made hghter in 
appearance by being perforated as shown 
in the plan of the overdoor (Fig. 1082). 
The brackets (see Fig. 1085) are shaped, 
dovetailed into the shelves, and screwed on 
to the |-in. piece, which is shaped with a 
handsaw, and moulded with a small gouge, 



through the middle of Fig. 1080 (see Pig. 
1683) shows the mouldings, etc., screwed on 
from the back. 

Plain Overdoors. — Four plain designs are 
presented by Figs. 1680 to 108'J, the Brst 
being suitable for execution in mahogany 
and satinwood, tho second in deal, and the 
third and fourth iu walnut. 



PRESSES. 



Cabinet Trousers Press. 

Fios. lO'JO to 1093 show a troiwers press 
which will accommodate several pairs at 
one time. The press is operated bv two 
j-in. diameter square thread joiner's "bench 
screws. In the carcase are fitted two drawers 
of equal size, and at each end drop leaves are 
attached, which are supported with hinged 
brackets. If desired, the press could be 
made in a dwarf or table form ; that is, the 
drawers and drop leaves being dispensed with, 
the posts need only be 4 in. to (i in. below 
the top of the carcase, which would simpHfv 



the construction com dcrbly The most Td th^T' °""„S' ^.^''«''* " .'"^l*""' 
suitable wood is one of the ha^woods. S ™?. '^ ' " ..Frr^^tl »"r ">«' fa-. 



suitable wood is one of the hardwoods, such 
as oak, teak, or ash, and next in favour 
comes pitchpine. Fig. IBilO is a front 
elevation of the cabinet with the leading 
dimensions. The following are some of 
the principal sizes of material. The posts 
are 3 ft. 7 in. long by 1 J in. by 2 in. in section, 
and tapered at their lower extremities as 
shown in Figs. 1090. to UiK. Al\ the sizes 
given are to be taken as the finished sizes 
of material, therefore allowance must be 
added for cutting and planing. The front 
and back rails are 1 ft. in. long between 
the shoulders, and IJ in. bv 1} in. in section • 
the bottom rails are IJ in. thick by IJ in. 
wide. Fig. 1091 is a vertical cross section of 
the press near the centre, but showing the 
carcase with the drawers removed. The 
side rails are 1 ft. 2 in. between the shoulders 
and of the same section as the front rails. 
Prepare the cross pieces a (Figs. I(i90 and 
1091), which are 1 ft. li in, long from the 
laces of the shoulders, 3 in. deep by 2j in. 
thick at the centre, and diminishing to 



2i in. thick at each end. Lay the posts on 
the bench, and mark the positions for the 
mortices which are to receive the tenons of 
the various rails. Commence with the lower 
mortice at 1 ft. « in. from the floor end of 
the posts. Next measiire up a distance of 
1 ft. 4J in. for the top lace of the top rail ; 
then midway Ijetween these mortices, ant 
out a mortice (on the front posts only) for 
the reception of the patting rail between 
the drawers. This rail is J in. thick by 
If in. wide. The measurement having 
been marked ofi on one post first, the re- 
maining posts can be brought close together. 



479 



with a try square. The rails can then he 
turned over, and the mortices for the end 
rails set out in the same way. This will 
economise time and give true results, 
providing the posts are planwl u" true 
and square. Then cut the mortices, shapo 
the tenons as shown at Figs. 1094, 109.5, 
and 1690, and fix them all together tem- 
porarily. 

Top of Carcase.— Next prepare the top 
of the carcase from boards OJ in. wide by 
IJ in. thick, or 1 in. if hanlwood is used. 
The boards can be grooved and tongued, 
jointed or dowelled, as preferred, the einla 
being rlamped in the usual wav. At the 
centre under side of the carcase top a 
batten, 2 in. wide by IJ in. thick, is screwed 
to the boards and also notched to the front 
and back top rails as shown at Fig. 1097. 

Nut and Screw.— Next bore the holes in 
the top cross pieces A for the reception of the 
nut and screw ; a 1-iu. hole should be bond 
for a |-in. diameter screw, while the hole 
for the nut should be of such diameter that 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 



1 
! : i 
i '; 




M 



't will stand driving in. If the nut is pro- 
fidiid with ribs as shown in Fig, Ki'JO, 
corresponding grooves must be cut in the 
cross pieces to receive them. The nut is 
kept in position and prevented from dropping 
out (in the event of the wood shrinking) by 
a Ught metal plate fixed with two screws. 
The square thread screws are 10 in. long, the 
lower ends being shouldered down, as indi- 
cated in Fig. MIX, to receive a metal plate 



i in. thick and of similar shape to that shown 
in the pUn at Fig. Um. The part projecting 
through this plate is also shouWered down 
to receive a suitable washer, and flnally this 
end is riveted over. The reduced part on 
which the metal plate fits should be about 
,V in. longer than the thickness of the plate. 
To ensure the screw worHng freely after 
the washer has been riveted over, the screws 
with the plates attached and drilled for the 




Figs, uta to IBM.— Front Devitlon. 
VerU««I Section, and Part Plan 
and Boriiontal Section of 
Cabinet TroaBors Fron. 



Fig. U92. 




that Bhown 
t projecting 
lered down 

finally this 
pd part on 
Id be about 
i the plate, 
freely after 

the screws 
lied for the 




* I 



_i 



t 



•r.' 




PBESSEa. 



Th.n th. drawer rui,™ .„H ■n.'S* K 5.1!°° ^^^ "'"'^''. '"PPort. tli. top dr.w«. 



Tt.„ .1. J """••; "•uifi lo me po«t». 
Then the drawer ruimen and guide fillets 
and .tops can be fixed. Abo, the carcase 
ends and bacfang, cut from atufl > in. thick, 
can be fitted and blocM in, as'shown m 
rig. lt>92. 
Drop Leara— The drop leara are 7J ,„. 



Th«« mil". "■ '"PP?"« •'"■ top drawer. 

ihese fiUets project slightlv beyond the 
outer face, „( ,he p„,?,. " The Ckets 
which support the leaV« are cut wi h ,hc 

formed on each end nearest to the carcase 
ftt into holes bored in the top project'ng 



•1 





Hf. l«»4._B»us <a rnu JolatMt 
W Porta 



«.. I....-0..™! v.„ ., c„a« TreuMT. Pr». "'^ "''oi^^rj^r^^ " 




Fli. UH.— Blaliii Tep aiil Ciaw- 
ptooe of Prni. 



Flf. un.— Dotall of 
Careaso Top of 




u= 



Fig. 16M.-AttMliii»iit of 
Soraw to Pnt 



K 



482 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



11^ 




Plgi. 16» to 1701— rront Elcntlmi. Vertiol BscUos Fig. ITOa.— L^ DoTeuil Joint of I 
on Una X X, uid Half PUn ud Horisntal SMtloi on Frm (in PIb 170»). 

Lino T T of Unin Fron. • ■» ^ 



FKESSE8. 




Til. lT(H.-joUiu IB Urn 
Pmm at I, r, ud o (Pit. 

KM). 




Hi. 170<.— Lown Eld of 
LUmh tnm Scnv (B, 



Tig 1703 -OtmnJ Vi.w of llnon Pr,„ 




Tig. 170S.— Joint In LiMi p„,, 
Blili(-ud-faIUii( Ttbli. 



Tig. 1708 — Joint In Lbun 
Preti >t A (Fig. UM). 

Figs. 1707 ind 1708.— Dnd«nn.Oi 
J ■'*"'' J'rM'lioiird ramoTed) 
•nd Elevation at Lonr End of 
Linon Pnn gonw. 




Pis:. 1708. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



Hllft and to Ihi- top edRr) of the lowri rail 
rmpectivoly Next lit and lirad tlie imail 
aliapnt anftie liracketi undrt tlii- lower raila 
anil prnjertinH endi of the top. For the 



?"*'''"• ^n"^ '"">'• "te rut from itull | in. 
of J-in. 



thicit, and the aidei and bailc are 
•tuH, while the bottoms are j in. thii-k. 
Knol» of wood or rurlhenwun'. or drop 
liamll.>« iinil li«l<«, con lie tiltwi an deaircii 
RiH-and-Fall Top.— The ri».-and-fall ton 
of the prem in niade up aimilar to the top 
of the curcane. Three board* are planed 
up true both on the facca and the itl^es. 
and are either grooved and tonifued or 
aecured with dowels. The two end« are 
chimped and wlged, then the ribs arif 
secured to the rising top to stiffen it when 
in use, and also to distribute the pressure 
of the screws more uniformlv over the top 
of the press. The central rib is i ft. fi in. 
long by 3 in. deep and 11 in. thick, and is 
notched to (it tightly over the four cross 
ribs. All the ribs are secured with counter- 
sunk screws driven from the under face of 
the press (see Kig. Ki'JO). The screws are 
attached to the rising top by the oval plates 
already mentioned. Therefore it follows 
that the top is raised and lowered with the 



screws, the pressure being taken Rrst on the 
oval phites, which should lie preferably 
of sheet liKM. A little trench chalk can 
l>e ttse<l on the screws, and wilt W cleane- 
than oil or any other kind of lubricant 
The Woodwork can ho lUined and wied 
and varmsh.d. or fil|e<l up and polished 
accunlmg to iiiHtc, 

Linen Prcw. 

The linen press shown by Figs. Kilili to 
Kill is complete with cuplmard and drawer 
the last-named Iwing made with dovcfuii 
joint.. Fig. 17l« shows the lap dovetail 
jomt at c (Fig. I7INI). Fig. I7CI» pren-nts 
a general view <d the press. Three joints 
— n'sjiectivc'ly at e, r, and 0-are shown in 
rill. 17(14. Fig. I7(ir> shows the joint at li 
I Fig. 17(i."> in the ri»ing-and-falling table. 
The lower end of the screw at n(Fig. l(i»9) i.. 
showu separately by Fig. I70ti. The fixing 
of the screw to the rising-and-falling tabic 
la shown by Figs. 1707 and 17(W, the former 
figure being an underneath view with the 
pressboard j (Fig. 17l>8) removed. Finally. 
Fig. 1711!) shows in detail the mortice ond 
tenon joint at A (Fig. IflWSI). 




CHURCH FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



Notice Board. 

,V' "'" "",''"; ' "' "I"'*" l>v KiK. I7IO 

-ft. -m. by a ft. .1 in, Kig. I7|| .|„„", . 
swtiou .m lino A B (Kg. 1710). Th.. fr.im'.. 

the t.,p „„,! i„„„„„ j„i„„ „, ^^„„.,_ .^_ j,.^_^ 



I- and 1,1.,. ami h Bro„v.,l ,.„ ,|,„ i„„„ 

■"."M fi,u»l, ; ,„. ,|,„k. Tl,,. Kro„vc, 
» lou , not tun ihrouRh from ..nil l„ en,!, hut 
-ImuM 1». ,to|.p,| „t the halWnxs „n tl,.. tH„ 
"M.> pieces, an,l Wlween the inorti,,., „„ 
■e top ,,„.,.,. I„ ,,„„i„^ tnp.th,.r the 
(■aminu. III.' Lcttoui ami Hide pi,.,,,,, »houW 




nji. 1710 aad mi.-ftoBt ElntUni ud 
TnUina itctloa of NoUc« Board. 



Fin. I71J and 17ia.-jol.t, In HoUc Bwinl 

rramlng at C mnd D (rif , iTio). 

Pip. 17H uid 17is,-g«,rt«i Joist in Notlco 

"oard Port, and Undormrand Btrnttlni. 



k 




CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



1716.— Onuuuntal NoUn Board. 



c -• •- 



i!5~ja 



nt. iTiT. 



Fi(. ina. 




i.n 
HfK iTlT uid ins.-a>lf Front Etentlos ud 
Vntioal Eaotion of notlM Boud. 





'~~1j 



Fig. 1T20.— Undorgroimd StmUliiff of 
Hotioo Board Foit. 



Ft». 17»«.— DotaUi of 

OmamoDt on Rotico Board 

PoBt (IM B, rijt. 1717). 



ri«. 1719.— BUiifod Vortical 
SocHon of Notio Board. 




ni. 171L— Uottod Battaa of Fa»l 
Baaxd. 



CHURCH FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



be knocked together, the panel being inserted 
in the grooves, and the head knocked on 
•nd wed^ and pinned. The panel is then 
me in the grooves to expand or contract. 
I he framed panel is mounted on a 4-in 
by 4-m. upright post, which runs up under 
the capping being cut away and fitted to 
the back of the framing as shown in Fig. 1711 
The cappmgis formed of two pieces of 7-in. 
by l-in. Btufl, mitered and screwed to the 
top of the framing, which is beveUed on 
each aide to receive it, and is further sup- 
ported with brackets, which should be 
housed in i in. to the face of the framing, 
which a surmounted by a roll over which 
tne lead or nnc covering is dressed. The 
two brackets under the framing should be 



487 

o£ the capping is turned up at the eaves to 
form a small gutter to prevent the wet finding 
Its way between thecoveringand the capping. 
The capping piece is cut as shown in Fig. 
1710, and soklered to the side pieces, which 
are secured to the capping under the cap- 
ping piece. The height from the ground 
to the under side of the framing is i ft., but 
of course, this may be varied to suit the 
position of the notice board. Figs. 1710 
and 1711 are reproduced to the scale of 
J in. to 1 ft., and Figs. 1712 t.> j715 to the 
scale of J in. to 1 ft. 

Ornamental NoUce Boards. 

First Btample._Fig8. 1716 to 1724 illus- 
trate a design for an ornamental notice 



Fi(. int. 




n(.iTM. 



.» 1»M and 17M.-H«.d Baa. Of NoUc. Board (M. m. im). 



jpt out of IJ-in. board, and housed i in 
mto post and framing. The two small 
brackets under the head of the framing are 
J in. thick, and should also be housed into 
the framing. If desired, the post could be 
scarfed as at Fig. 1714, and secured with 
two J-m. flat-headed bolts. The board 
couJd then be removed for re-lettering, etc 
without much trouble. The frame is secured 
to the post with two }-in. flat-headed bolts 
through the top and bottom rails. If the 
frame is to be painted, it should be nade 
from good yellow deal, and the panel from 
yellow pmc carefully jointed with secret 
screws. The post should be of Enghsh 
oak, and the parts that go under ground 
(see Fig. 1718) should be given two or three 
coats of hot carboUneum. All joints, before 
being put together, should be carefully 
pamted with good red-lead paint. If 
however, the frame is to be varnished, teak 
would be found to be a handsome and 
durable material. The lead or nnc covering 



board which is intended to bo used for a 
permanent notice. Either good red deal 
or yellow pine, would be suitable for the 
construction. The principal dimensions are 
given on the illustrations, which show clearly 
also the details of construction. The posts 
for Fig. 1716 are 4 in. by 4 in., and about 
11 ft. long, 3 ft. of this length being below 
the ground. The rails and posts are stub- 
tenoned and mortised together, and draw- 
bore pinned. The inside edges of the rails 
and the portion of the posts between them 

'rj'""/'^ "' ""^ '" ">» enlarged section 
at Fig. 1719. The groove in the lower rail 
IS not so wide as that in the posts and top 
rail respectively. The bottom edge of the 
panel board is therefore rebated as shown 
thus forming a shoulder, as a preventive 
apinst rain getting into the groove. The 
rails are chamfered on the top edges, to 
throw ofi the water. The panel is formed 
of about four hM^d^ groo^-ed and tougued 
together. Two battens, each 2 ft. » in 




488 



by 3J m. by 1 m., are screwed to the back 
M mdicated by the dotted lines in Fig 
1/1(, and are slotted as seen at Fie 1721 
This allows the screws to move freely, and 
prevents the joints being drawn apart in 
the event of any contraction of the boards, 
iwo pieces each 9 in. square and U in. 
thick, bevel ed as shown, form the caps for 
the tops of the posts. The surmountine 
balls are ;. m. m diameter, and are dowelled 
through tie caps and into the tops of the 
posts The best method would be to make 
the balls and dowels in one piece while 
turning them in the lathe. The pierced 
rai s are shown to an enlarged scale at Figs 
1 .1'3 and 1724 ; the Knes ruled acress being 
m the actual work 1 in. apart. The piecis 
A A (Rg. 1717) are ii in. wide at the bottom 
tapermgtolin.atthetop. They are glued 
and nailed in position as indicated. The 
pieces BB (Fig. 1717 ; for enlarged detail, see > 
J'lg. 1/22) are also glued and nailed to the 
posts, and, besides being a decorative feature 
they also cover the pins used for holding 
the jomta tightly together. A scotia mould- 
ing (see enlarged section at Fig. 1719) is 
nailed to the posts and top rail ab seen. It 
IS mitered at the rciuers, and the lower ends 
are cut on the slant to fit against the chamfer 
on the bottom rail. The feet of the posts 
are treated as shown in Fig 1720 A 
moulds piece, 3J in. by IJ in., is screwed to 
the under side of the cross rail as shown at o 
(Fig. 1,19). The ends of the moulded 
nosing are returned, and are cut to fit 
round the posts. The ends of the piereed 
rails are housed into the posts, ind skew- 
nailed to the cross rails. A plain moulding 
IS mitered round the back of the panel a! 
seen, and a piece is also nailed on the top 
and to the pierced rail. A couple of braces 
may be used at the back of the board, to 
add to Its rigidity, and thev need not 
detract in any way from the appearance 
of the design. 

Second Example.— The smaller board 
shown by Figs. 1723 to 17.30 is for the re- 
ception of bills, etc. Its general construc- 
tion differs very little from that illustrated 
by Kg. 1716, and only a short description 
need be given. The posts are 3 in. thick 
and 3 in. wide at the top, tapering to « in. 
at the ground lire, Thev o,in easily be cut 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



rl.1' »?■'»■,?'«'''' V »«"i»g through its 
length obliquely and reversing the ends The 
posts are about 9 ft. 3 in. long, of which length 
- ft. 9 m should be buried in cement con- 
crete well rammed. If the board is in a 
much exposed position, where greater rigiditv 
18 reqmred, the feet of the posts may require 
to be treated as shown in Fig. 1720 The 
cross rails, moulded and chamfered as shown 
are secural to the posts by stub-tenons and 
mortices drawbore pinned (see Fig. 1728) 
The cross rails and posts are grooved to 
receive the panel, and two holes are bored 
in the bottom rail (as shown by the dotted 
hues m Fig. 1727) to allow of the escape of 
any water that may find its way intothe 
groove. The panel is made up of three wide 
boards, each 1 in. thick, which are grooved 
and tongned together. The top rail is in 
one piece, and the moulded capping is 
nailed on as shown in section at Fig 1727 
The capping is spUyed on the top edge,' 
and the ends are cut to fit round the posts 
as shown at Fig. 1728. A moulding is nailed 
to the frame round the front of the panel as 
seen, and a bead secured round the back. 
Iwo blocks are carved to the scroU pattern 
shown at Fig. 1730. The ground iVsunk 
about im. deep, and is matted as shown. 
Ihe blocks are shghtly housed into the posts 
and well screwed into the positions indicated 
at Pig. 1725. An enlarged detail of the 
turned caps is given at Fig. 1729. A J-in 
dowel IS turned on the ends and sunk well 
into the tops of the posts. All the parts 
to go below ground are well tarred. The 
mortices and tenons, and all joints, are 
well coated with red-lead paint before being 
put together. The woodwork is carefully 
knotted and stopped, then painted with 
three coats of plain colour, and varnished. 
Ihe board shown by Fig. 1716 would look 
well finished in white, whilst that illustrated 
by Fig. 1725 may be oak-grained. 



Gothic Notice Board. 

The church notice board shown at Pig 
17J1 IS of Gothic design, and is about 6 ft 
wide hy ft. 4 in. high without the standards. 
Ihe ,»«rd IS suitable for attachment to the 
wall of the church, or may be mounted on 
standards as illustrated. The standards are 
r, m. try i m. in section, tenoned and wedged 



CHURCH FURNITUHE AND FITMENTS. 



to cross pieces and braced at the base, 
which IS sunk and weU rammed into the 
fT"^ » ^»t?nce of 3 ft. 6 in. The sill of 
the boaid is about 4 ft. from the ground Une 
S' ^l temg reduced to receive it (se^ 

rig. 17J1); he remaining portion of the 
jr* « ™med up 3 ft. 2 in. farther to support 
the back of the board. Well-seasoned 




48!) 

ftraight.grained stuff, IJ in. thick, free from 

taiot, and other defects, should be usedfoT 

he panelhng. The joints are grooved and 

&°fi; ''°1'!«"««1 with battem. at the 

SJ^* ^ "'""'"«* *» th^ "ill and 
jointed to a rail connecting the top ends of 

3 ,„ w'^'!'' " ^^'J^^- Slopinlbattcns, 
3 in. by 2 m., are fored to this top rail, to 
form a support for the upper portion of the 




Fig. 1795. 



ng. lias. 



rig. 17«T.-Ealarg«l 

Vertical iKtiim of 

Notloa Boud, 



ngi. 17» aad 17Je.— Pnmt Eleratioa sad Tsrtloal 
Section of Smaller Omameatal Notice Boud. 








m 






SFI" I 
B F 



CABINETWOHK AND JOINERY. 




Rf- iin.-lMtlim ol 

OatUo HotlM Board 

»t A (Hf. mi). 




np. ITU ud ITM.-lwUou of OotUe BoUn 
B0Md.tBmdO(n».l7Jl). 



CHUECH FUBNITUEE AND FITMENTS. 



UoRotln 



notKe board (^ Fig. 1733. which is a «Ktion 

then Mwn in hal™, .fte, „hich they are 
pamted, and bradd«l to the front face^ 



*»1 




Thrw.pMel Notice Board for 
Chapel. 



fit iTM.-(MtiiHi cr 

Voildliic <m Notice Boaid 
("• D, Tit ITSB). 




rig. 17»T.-BeoUea Onath 

BtUe ud PuMl of Rotbo 

BoaM. 



* 1TS» — Section of 

DaatlUed MoaUiiif of 

Notice Boaid. 



"I. ITJl-rront Eleratloa of Thrw-paael NoUo, Bo^ 




the panels. The oolumna are made in two 

Sl.tl'Jf"""'' ^'«- "^'' «''= b«»ea also 
tKmg tumrf up separately in three pieces 
"■"> ™' ??d -nit^Md ; the joints shoSld S 

bradOmg. The cusped ornament, and trefoil 
centre are also pamted and brodded on. 



are for the name of the chapel and pastor 
respectively, the centre panel beine for the 
usual notices. This board is 4 ft 10 in 
wide by 5 ft. 6 in. high, including top and 
bottom honzontat rails; the triangular 
pediment adds another 1 ft. 9 in. to the 



height. The stiles 



are 6 ft. hgh, and 



^ 



4fl2 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



■•i in. by 1 in. in section at the lower end, 
being reduced lit D to 5 in. by 3 in. (>ee sec- 
tion Fig. 17,58). The sembUnce of » raised 
panel is worked out of the soUd on the face 
ot the stiles, which are mortised to receive 
the rails and rebated for the panel boarding 
(see section, Fig. 1737). The cusped orna- 
ment 18 cut from j-in. stuff, and bradded to 
the pediment and centre panel boards A 
section of the dentilled moulding attacheil 




ng. 17«.— Fmnt Elsntlon of B;iim Board. 



Fig. 1744. -Spring at 
Back of Hymn Board 
l>oor (sse Figs. 1741 and 

1749). 



Fig. 274S Part ^'"^' ii"^ 

Tntical Soctlon of Fig. 174«.-Ptaii of End 

Bjmi Board (im of Spring (mo Figs. 1741 

Fig. 1740). „a „„,. 

to the second rail is shown at Fig. 1738 ; 
the other mouldings are mitered at the angle 
and bradded to the rails and stiles. This 
notice board is intended to be fixed against 
the wall of the building, resting upon wood 
brackets built into the wall (see section 
Pig. 1739). 

Hymn Boards. 

Hymn boards are illustrated by Figs 
1740 to 174(i. They may be executed in 
pitchpme, or, better, in oak. The board 
shown in Fig. 1740 should be cunstiucted as 
follows ; The pilbrs at the sides should be 



octagona and pUin, with the top and bottom 
fimal. .hghtly carved. The piUars .re 
connected at the top and bottom ly moulded 
pieces mortised into them. The quatrefoil 
ornament should be carefully and geometric- 
ally cut out, and the comer carved panels 
htted as illustrated. The board on which 
the numbers are dispUyed is fixed into the 
centre of the ornament, and is made with 
moulded edge and divided into three spaces 




Fig. 1741. 



Fig. 1741. 



Flgi. 1741 and 174a.- Front Elovatlon and 

Vonical SocUon of Hjiui Board with 

QotUc Cresting. 



Fig. 2749.— Soctlon ot Hymn Board 
Back Box. 

by moulded ribs, with Ihit back edge on 
which the printed or painted tickets rest 
see Fig. 1741). A door is hinged to the 
bottom edge of the back of the panel and 
fastened at the top by a spring clip. At 
the back of the door (see Fig. 1742) fix three 
springs as shown ; these will keep the printed 
cards flat against the moulded front. The 
tickets on which the names "Hymn," 
' Chant," " Anthem," etc., and the numbeis 
are printed or painted should be of stiff card 
Ihe door being opened, the cards can h.. 
allered as required, and when the door is 
closed and fastened with the spring it will 



CHURCH FUKNITUHE AND FITMENTS. 



keep them in the required position. It pre- 
ferred, the open spaces in the ornamental 
portion of the board may be filled in with 
wood covered with cloth of red or blue colour 
and thus a rich effect will be produced. Fig. 
1741 shows a different design. The pillars 
at the ends are square, and the mouldings, 
top and bottom, are carried through and 
returned at the ends. A carved cresting 
of Gothic design crowns the top moulding 



483 

Fig. 1745, with a long slot hole at each end 
88 shown in Fig. 174li, and commanded in 
the centre by a Tcnob. On pulling this knob 
tack the spnng will come flat and allow 
the cards to pass. On releasing the knob 
sufficient pressure is given by the spring to 
keep the cards in place. The ornamental 
portions of these boards raav be altered 
to suit the ornamental work 'of the choir 
seats or other woodwork near which they 




Fig. 1T4T.— Onsnil view of Alms Box. 



Figi. 



and a cresting of simpler character is also 
affixed to the bottom moulding. These 
ornamental portions may be altered or not 
used at all. The hymn board occupies the 
whole oblong space, and is divided into three 
compartments by moulded ribs as before 
descnbed. The back is closed in bv a flat 
board, as shown in Figs. 1744 and 1745, the 
ends being open so that the cards containing 
the names nr mimbers may be passed into 
position from either end. These cards are 
kept in position by a spring, as shown in 



"*• ""■ Pig. 17«. 

17M and 17«.— Prout Qovatlon aid Voitioal 
Section of Alms Box. 

are to l>e used. For instance, a wrought- 
iron or a brass cresting may be substituted 
for the carving on Fig. 1741, but this must 
be left to the taste of the maker. 

Alms Box. 

Fig. 1747 is a general view of an alms box 
for a church, Fig, 1748 being a front eleva- 
tion and Fig. 1749 a vertical section. If 
the tup 18 in two pieces on the incline, with 
an opemng between them as shown, the box 
allows two or three persons to drop in their 



te 



CABINKTWORK AND JOINEBY. 








!*■, "»•—»•'•«<« Md »Ua of 
»»M«I Ainto of TMtxy OapbowT 



Flff- 1794.— loildo TUv 



T-trr Copbowd for Book. ttfo.Tnl^''™' 



It. ITU.-BooUon 




Bsd Bobig. 



TortiT OopboMd. ^* »™«--SooUoB th»n,h Vwtry 
»">»"■ Onpboud ConUot. 



oflminp «t the ume time. The oiec. a 
<y il"). ?"«■>»• -roue pig^ t 

«tie 18 hinged (or opening, and this door 
will require . lock, which^y be Vrei^^.^ 

t'^ J'""i'J«.fr»»*."nd bottom ,ho^J 
be grooved and tongued together, and the 

.^t« rtT^ """mg through the front and 
nto the Mdes a chamfered fillet may be oked 
^ the mtemal angle., aa ahown^.tte* 
Wtb?i'™- u"""^ ■' " ""*«We wood," 
«n J .w"" ""^^ """"trarted of any othe^ 

ITie leading dimensiona are figured in Km 
and of the other parts | in. ' 



CHUBCH FUBNITUKE AlfD FITMENTS. 



*K 




lit iTn.-oap- 

plac of CkaiMI 



Pit. 17«.— 

■otdd OB Edge 
of rramiag of 




Ilf . JTSl.-ioHiag Oat " 
rou-ooalond Aroliu. 




Hg. 1T»T. 



iaifei 



«f. "»e to ni*.-T«M Horatio^ Bori«atal IkAIo.. 



UMI Tortloal gootloa of Cbaneel BaUi. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERT. 




CHIHCH FUBNITURE AND FITMEXT8. 



V«»|ry CuptMrd tor Book* and Robm. 

The ciipboud shown hy Fig. I'Sl » 
lor the accommwliitian of boclu and clfrm- 
ro!»« in the ve trj- of b church, and can, of 
courw, be ailaptrd for a variety of purpoiM 
and situations. Pig. 1731 gives the eleva- 
tion of the front, with doors hung folded. 
The front is framed up 1) in. thick, with 
angle posts. The moulding shown liy 
F'g. 1752 is shaped t-. the section front .1 in. 
by .1 in., and is tongued on to the frame and 
sides, and stoppe<l at the top ami Imttom 




«(. ITte.— Part of SttlUag Ed|S of Door In 
Dwarf Ckaaool Seroott. 

of the cupboard frame. The top moulding 
(Fig. 1753) is worked the full length required, 
cut back out of the solid, mitercd round, 
and fixed with dowels to the top of the case. 
Fig. 1754 shows the elevation of the inside 
of the cupboard, with the upright standard 
keyed through fop and bottom. On the 
one side, notched fillets are fixed for shelving, 
with two ll-in. drawers at the bottom. On 
the other side there is a single shelf with 
brass dress-hooks fixed for hanging surplices. 
The back is framed up with 1-in. pine framing 
and panels. The doors are hinged in four 
leaves, and filled in with V-jointed diagonal 
panels, fitted with brass flush bolts on the 
edges at top and bottom. Fig. ITW shows 
8 section through the drawer side of the 



cupUiard, the handles of the drawers being 
tumni or sunk on the drawer fronta. 

Chanctl Ralta. 

The chancel— that part of the choir where 
the altar stands— was in earlier times 
enclowd hy lattices or crosslwrs, hut is 
now generally enclosed by rails of a design 
suiteil to the anhitecture of the church. 
Of the design atmat to be notetl, Fig. I7.'ni 



'?^fH->i ^r— -- — ^ 




Fig. 1T6II — Plaa of JolaU u Hanilat SUlo la 
Dwarf SorooB. 




Flf. ITOT — Plan of Joint is Capping of Dwarf 
Seroaa. 

is part elevation, Fig. 1757 horizonte! sec- 
tion, and Fig. 17.W vertical section. The rail 
here shown should preferably be made of 
oak. The width of the opening of the 
chancel should Iw divided into a convenient 
number of bays, and the centre bay be 
made to open as shown in Fig. 1757. This 
bay should be hung with three 4-in. strong 
brass butt hinges, and should be provided 
with a small brass bolt on the inside to 
hold it in its p'ace when dotad up. The 
rail is 2t> in. high from the floor to the top 
of the capping, and the width between the 
pilaistcrs that is, between the bays — is 
2')J in. The capping, which is moulded 






4iW 



OABINETWOWC AND JOINEBf. 



Ill 







CHVBCH FCRNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 




rif. m« -Km. 
Oappbf, (to. 



Flf. ITTl. 



rin int. 



Tigs, 17T3 aad 17T4. — Sttlftt tad AltnnsOTs Swign fu 
SMt Esds to Oholr Bt4lli. 



% 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHT, 



Hi 



iiii 



on both edges and grooved on the under 
side for the top rail of the framing, is 4} in. 
riy :i m., as shown by the enlarged detail 
(Fig. 1759). The shaped pilasters shown in 
section (Fig. 17.58) are 2 in. wide and IJ in. 
thick. The framing is sunk J in. deep to 
receive these. The framing is cf 2}-in. 
stuff, and consists of 3J-in. by 2J-in. bottom 
rails. 6j-m. by 2j-in. shaped top raiU, .l-in 
by 2J-in. wall stiles, Sj-in. by 2J-in. muntins, 
j-i-in. by 2J-in. hanging stiles, and If in. 
Iiy 2J-in. bars. The bottom rails are cham- 
fered, and the mould on the stiles and 
muntin is continued down to cut on to the 
(hamfer. The mould on the edges of the 
framing is shown on enlarged detail (Fig. 
n«l). The top rails are shaped in the 
manner known as the four-centered arch 
and the spandrils filled in on both sides of 
the framing, with very deeply sunk carving 
of Howers, fruit, wheat, acorns, leaves, etc., 
and no two panels should be alike. The 
method shown at Fig. 17B1 of setting out 
the four-centered arches will be found suffi- 
ciently simple. The width A B is divided 
into four equal parts as A D o E B. With 
radius DO describe arc AC. With radius 
E describe arc b c. From B, with radius 
A B, describe a g. From a, with radius a b, 
describe B p. From a through d draw a 
line to cut the arc at i. From r draw a line 
through E to cut the arc at h. With radii 
F H and o I complete the drawing. The 
framing should be fixed to the floor with 
strong brass screws through the bottom 
rail, their heads being sunk suflioiently 
deep to allow the screw-hole to be filled up 
with a pellet of oak. The capping should 
be dowelled on to the framing. The work 
should be left in its bare state, or just 
stained to suit any adjoining work. 



framng m section, and the capping and 
plinths in plan, with their respective joints. 
The framing is of 2-in. stuff, moulded in 
the soUd, with cavetto and sunk fillets. 
The mitres are scribed, the bottom rail is 
chamfered, and the top rail worked with 
a double flute and fillet, stopped at the 
shoulders. The panels are carved; the 
oute.- plinth is made of two pieces, the upper 



Dwarf Chancel Screen. 

The dwarf screen here described is suitable 
for a church in the fifteenth-century style, 
and should be executed in oak. The eleva- 
tion (Fig. 1702) shows the outside of a 
portion of the screen, with a door 2 ft. in. 
wide. The capping and plinth extend 
across continuously, and the method of 
fixing them is shown in Fig. 1763, which is a 
vertical section through the centre of a 
panel in the framing. Fig. 1764 shows the 



piece being sunk in the rail and screwed 

the back side. When this has been done, 
the back or inner phnth is fixed in its sinking 
by screws inserted from the front. Tapered 
dovetaile<i keys, fitting into corresponding 
grooves in the skirting, are fixed to the face 
of the rail at short intervals for the purpose 
of fixing the lower members of the face phnth. 
The skirting is driven on and secured with 
screws at the bottom edge, and should be 
fixed drj-, in order that it may be removed 
for scribing to the floor. A filUng-in piece 
to match the plinth should be inserted at 
the ends, as shown in Fig. 1 7liO. The capping 
is double-tongued and glued on, the tongues 
and grooves being stopped J in. from the 
ends, in the doorway and on the door. It 
IS fixed after the door has been hung. The 
hinge is sunk flush with the outside bead, 
and the door opens out at right angles. 
Figs. 17(i3, 1766 and 1767 (p. •ll)7) illustrate 
enlarged details of the joints in the plinth 
and capping. Fig. 1786 is a plan of the 
pUnth with the door open to its fullest 
extent, the dotted hnes indicating its position 
when closed. The interaections of the various 
members give the points from which the 
radial paths of each are drawn. For marking 
the ends of the plinth, moulds of thin 
material are used, struck from the common 
centre of the hinge. The position of the 
moulds on the fi.\ed piece a is found by first 
hanging the door, then securing the piece a 
temporarily in place, opening the door at 
nght angles, and sliding the door piece 
agamst the fixed piece, and scribing its 
profile with the marking awl. The respec- 
tive edge moulds should now be appUed and 
the superfluous stufi cut away with gouges 
until the moulds fit neatly when held against 
the door, and work easily when the latter is 
turned. Recesses will have to be cut, to 
the same sweep, in the bottom end of the 
hanging »iile ol the frame, as indicated by 



CHURCH FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



the dotted lines in Fig. ITtiik In the case 
of the chief piece b (Fig. ITiiO) thin path is 
cut right through the stile and into the plinth 
behind. This recess is shown by a full line 
in Fig. 176fi, and is confined to the piece 
B, the flat below requiring a much smaller 
recess. The door piece may next be placed 
in position, and its end scribed with the 
compass to fit the recesses in the fixed piece. 
The compass is kept wide enough to allow 
for the sweep at the back, and the material 



grained portion indicates the fixed part of 
the capping ; the mould for this is made 
of thicker stuff, and cut accurately square 
at the end. The cut on the moulding is 
marked with a lialf pencil round the curve. 
the position at which to apply the mould 
being found by opening the door (see Fig. 
1707). The fixed piece is cut first, and then 
the other fitted to it. Figs. 1 "(>:.' to I'tit 
are drawn to the scale of IJ in. to the foot, 
and Figs. 1705 to 1707. -i in. to the foot. 





1784.— Seo- 
of Oomiu 
and Oallerj of 
CbolrStaUa. 



^^S1~T^3 Tig. 1782.- 

Hg. 1781.- Part CrMtlng ud Top 

Plan of Oonicr R*il of Choir 
of Choir Stalls Btalli. 

Qallorjr. 



Fig. 1780.— End 

Eloration of 

Choir Stallt 

Canopy. 





Fig. 1783.— Canopy and Oallery of 
Choir Stalls. 



Fig. 1778.— Hliororo End of 
Choir Stalls. 



cut away to the marks, the end being, 
however, shaped to the plan curves drawn 
with the moulds. The piece is cut off at 
first rather longer than required, to ensure 
a good fit. When the end is fitted so that 
it works easily, and fits close when shut, 
the opposite end is marked and cut off to 
a bevel, sUghtly longer outside, and fixed. 
The inner joints should i>e sUghtly bevelled, 
as shown in Fig. 1704. The remaining pieces 
of the phnth are then fixed at the striking 
end. A similar joint is made in the capping, 
although, in thas case, a pair of moulds 
should be made, as shown in Fig. ITfiT , The 



Fig. 1700 .shows the door wide open, with a 
portion of the fixed plinths, part of the 
bottom rail, and the hanging stile. 

Choir SUIIs. 

The choir stalls illustrated by Figa. 1708 
to 1784 conform to the Perpendicular style 
of Gothic architecture, and include front 
framing, an ordinary bench or seat, and at 
the back a row of misereres or subselHa, us 
they are variously called. Fig. 1708 re- 
presents a part front eleva*^ion. Fig. 1709 
a section, and Fig. 1770 a i)iirt pl-i <, and on 
refcrring to thcsp it wi!! >>e seen that the 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




1 



front framing and firet tsett are elevated 
3 in. above the church floor, and the misereres 
<> in. This elevated floor is composed of 
li-in. narrow grooved and tongaed boards 
laid on 3-in. joists pUced 12 in. apart, with 
an oak curb mitered round. The bench ends 
are tenoned into these curbs. The front 
framing is 2 in. thick, and is 2 ft. 7 in. high 
from the raised floor to the top of the capping. 
It consists of an 8-in. by 2J-in. moulded top 
rail, with a trefoil design sunk and moulded 
as shown in Pigs. 170« and 1771. The 
fcamiug is divided into panels by ,)-in. 
muntins, every alternate muntin being 
moulded on its face, while the other muntins 
are left plain. A shaped pilaster or buttress 
projects in front. A geometrical moulded 
pattern is sunk in the faces of the panels 
which are IJ in. thick. The bottom rail] 
which is 4J in. by 2 in., has a moulded top 
edge. The ends to the framing are 8J in. 
wide and 3 in. thick, and are shaped as 
shown by Kg. 1772, with carved sunk panels 
on the outer face, the front edge being shaped 
as a buttress. The capping or desk board 
IS 7 in. by IJin., and its front edge is moulded. 
The book-board is 4 in. by IJ in. ; this also 
has a moulded edge, and is supported on 
shaped brackets at a height of 1 ft. 81 in. 
above the raised floor. 

Seats.— The seats are 2 ft. lOJ in. high to 
the tops of the backs, which consist of 2-in. 
framing, having a 4J-in. by 2-in. moulded 
top rail, 5-in. by 2-in. bottom rail, .3-in. by 
2-in. muntin, with IJ-in. panels sunk and 
carved to the design shown in Kg. 1768. 
The seat, 13 in. wide by IJ in. thick is 
tongued into the bottom rail. The front 
of the seat, down to the floor, is filled in 
with 3-in. by 1-in. matchboarding nailed 
to IJ-in. by 1-in. fillets nailed to seat and 
floor. The seat-ends are 4 ft. 3 in. high 
above the raised floor, and are 2 ft. wide by 
3 in. thick. The edges are moulded (see 
Figs. 1773, 1774, and 1775), the moulds 
being stopped by the carving in front and 
diminished out on the back edge, and gradu- 
ally diminished on the front edge, as in 
Fig. 1773. The front edge beneath the 
carved boss or carved head is shaped as an 
engaged pillar. The seat-ends are finished 
with a carved flnial terminating in a poppy- 
head. The outer faces of the .irat-cnds are 



divided into sunk, moulded, and carved 
panels, as shown in Figs. 1773 and 1774. 
The sinking and carving of the ends is 
vaned in design, and two designs may be 
made alternate, as shown by Figs. 1573 and 
1774 ; but the profile should be kept to one 
pattern. The carved heads may be of 
grotesque design, or may represent nota- 
bihties connected with the Ciureh. Only 
one seat is shown here between the front 
framing and the misereres, but there may 
be as many rows as the size of the choir 
demands. Each seat, however, should rise 
3 in. higher than its front neighbour. 

Seat Bracket or Rest.— The bracket or 
rest under the seat should be in one solid 
piece. It is carved and moulded, and is 
11 in. by 9 in. by H in. In old work these 
brackets were carved very grotesquely, one 
notable example being preserved in Wells 
Cathedral, where the bracket is foroed by 
a carved representation of a cat plavinir 
a fiddle. ' ' * 

Misereres or SubselUas.— The misereres 
are each 2 ft. 7 in. long, with a seat 
i It. 2} in. wide by IJ in. thick. Fig. 177(i 
shows an elevation of the under side of 
miserere seat when turned up, and Fig 
1777 a section of seat and back framing 
This seat is hung on pivots, or on sohd 
pms formed on the seat, and has a bracket 
on the under side, and this bracket, when 
the seat is turned up, forms a rest for the 
occupant to lean upon when in a standing 
position. The ends and divisions of the 
misereres have a sinking } in. deep on their 
inner surfaces, to allow the seats to open 
back; the seats, when down, rest in the 
smkmg. The backs of the misereres re- 
chne, and are composed of a top rail 
8 in. by 2 in., with sunk and moulded 
quatrefoils, and bottom rail 5J in. by 3 in., 
with its fpce hoUowed out to receive the 
seat (Kg. 1777). Panels, IJ in. thick, are 
tongued into the framing. The framing, 
ends, and divisions are surmounted by a 
solid top, 4 in. thick, with a shaped and 
moulded edge, as in Pigs. 17(i9, 1770, and 
1778. The miserere ends are sunk, moulded 
and carved as shown in Fig. 1779, and may 
be vaned alternately. The opening beneath 
the seats is matchboarded to the floor 
boards being nailed to IJ-in. by 1-in. fillets 



CHURCH FURNITUEE AND FITMENTS. 



Will Lininc, etc.— Above the misereres 
or suhselliaa is a panelled wall lining, 8 ft. 
10 in. high above the door, with a canopy 
and gallery (see Figs. 1780 and 17«1). 
This lining consists ol 4-in. by 3-in. posts 
i ft. 2 in. long, 4-in. by 2-in. chamfered 
bottom rails, and 4in. by 3J-in. moulded 
top rails with carved otnaments at intervals 
in the sunk moulding. Over the top rail 
is a carved cresting, .•) in. high (see Fig. 1782). 
Tongued into the framing are IJ-in. panels, 
witii I-in. thick tracery work in front of 
them. On the face of the posts are shaped 
and moulded buttresses, 2| in. thick, with 
carved iinials. 

Canopy, Cornice, Gallery, etc.— The canopy 
is supported by ribs J in. thick, with their 
edges perforated, moulded, and traceried, 
and terminating in a l|-in. square carved 
drop (sec Figs. 17HI*, 17li!l, and 17a'i). 
The end ribs have, in addition, a moulded 
sinking on their outer faces (see Fig. 17(10). 
These ribs are covered with 1-in. grooved 
and tongued narrow boards, sUghtly V- 
jointed, these boards being secured to 2-in. 
shaped deal bracket-pieces tenoned into 
posts (see Fig. 17<ii)). T:.<m. brackets also 
support the carved cornice mould and gallery. 
Fig. '784 shows a section of cornice and 
gallery. The cornice is .5} in. by H in., 
with flowers and stems carved in relief upon 
it (see Fig. 178.i). Above this is a .I-in. 
by 2-in. mould, surmounted by the gallery. 
The gallery is composed of a 5|-in. by 1-in. 
board pierced with moulded quatrefoils, 
with a 2-in. by 2-in. crenellated capping. 
At intervals a group of three carved finials, 
each group consisting of two IJ-in. by IJ-in. 
outer posts, with a j-in. sunt, shaped, 
pierced, and moulded panel, with a carved 
finial in the centre (see Figs. 171)8, 1780, 1781, 
and 1783). The stalls should be executed 
in oak, not polished or varnished, but left 
in its natural state. 

Communion Rails. 

The panels and balusters of the oak 
communion rail shown in elevation by 
Fig. 178.5 are enriched with carvings of 
the vine and wheat, symbolical of the wine 
and bread. The rail is 17 ft. « in. long, 
and 2 ft. 6J in. high through the middle of 
the gate, which rises 2} in. higher than the 



S(XI 

Iwndrail on each side, while the greatest 
thickness, measured across the handrail 
above the balusters, is 9} in. The rail 
breaks back over the carved panels IJ it 
on each side, as shown in the plan (Pig. 
17811). The handrail is prepared from 4-in. 
stufl, cut to shape with a band-saw, moulded 
as much as possible with a vertical spindle, 
and the mitres finished with carver's gouges! 
The top rail of the gate is also worked iii 
the same manner. The bottom rail is from 
2i-in. oak, 8 in. wide below the balusters, and 
•51 in. wide below the pe nela. An enlarged 
detail of one length of the rail is given at 
Fig. 1787. The panels are from 2J-in. oak, 
perforated, and stump-tenoned into the top 
and bottom rails as shown by dotted lines. 
The balusters are 7i in. square across the 
thickest parts, and are richly ornamented 
with wheat. Fig. 1788 reprejents a section 
taken at a (Fig. 1787), showing more elf- ly 
the bold treatment of the carving. A secvion 
taken at b (Fig. 1787) is reproduced in Fig. 
1789, in which it will be noticed that the 
panels are set forward so that they project 
within about 1 in. of the front edge of the 
bottom rail. Fig. 1790 represents a part 
section at c (Fig. 1787). The tenons go 
nght through the rail, and are wedged. 
The gate is constructed in a similar way to 
the rail, the top being in one piece. The 
letters I H 8 are introduced in the top of 
this panel, and they are also stump-tenoned 
into the top rail. The gate is hung with 
brass parliament or shutter hinges, one hinge 
bemg on the bottom rail and the other on 
the baluster (see Fig. 1791). The centre 
cf th» knuckles of the hinges must be on a 
line vith the greatest projection of the 
mouldings. The hanging baluster of the 
gate is cut through at right angles, but the 
shutting baluster is cut sufficiently bevelling 
to allow the gate to swing clear. When 
closed, the gate is held fast bv a small 
automatic bnll-catch. The communion rail 
is screw-slotted " to secure it in position 
at each end. Figs. 1792, 179.1, and 1794 
show this effectual and secret method of 
fixing. Fig. 1792 represents a piece of 
deal with a hole bored large enough to take 
the head of a stout screw, and a slot cot to 
receive the plain part of Ihc screw, lei in 
flush with and nailed to the wall ; then the 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



i^A> 



If 



I I -5 







CHURCH FUENITUHE AND FITMENTS. 



."Mfo 



screws (aee Fig. 1793) that have been driven 
into the end of the conununion rail are 
slipped into the circular hole and driven 
down the slot, as in Fig. 1794, until tho 
bottom rail touches hard on the floor. The 
bottom rail drops on to iron dowels that 
are leaded into the stone floor. The com' 
munion rail is fumed and wax-polished. 

Simpler Design. — Fig. 1795 shows a much 
simpler design for inexpensive communion 
rails. Fifcchpine, as shown, is very suitable 
for this class of work. A crimson cord is 
used instead of a gate. The extreme length, 



held in position with brass rings on each end, 
and hooks fixed to the rails, horn which the 
cord is easily detached. 

Lectern. 

Before constructing the lectern shown by 
Figs. 1798 to 1808, a very careful selection 
of oak should be made. This class of work 
calls for specially good craftsmanship, as 
church furniture of this description occupies 
a prominent position, in full view of all 
comers. Unfortunately, good dry and sound 
Knghsh oak is difficult to obtain ; but care- 




Flff. 1TB9. 



ng. 17R8.— 'Horltonbal Section through Communion Btili at IotoI of A 
(Fig. 17«7). 




1790.— Fart Bm- 
tiont of Ban of 
Communion Bails 
at B and C (Fig. 
1787). 



Fig. 1799. Fig. 1793. Fig. 1794. 

Figa 1793 to 1794.— Dotalla of fixing Ends 
of Commnnion Bails. 




Fig. 1791.— Sootion of Bail 
iboving Top Hlngo. 



including the cord, is 18 ft. 3 in., and the 
height 2 ft. 4 in. The handrail is 4 in. by 
3 in., and moulded as^hown in the enlarged 
detail (Fig. 1796), which also ircludes a sec- 
tion of the bottom rail, 3 in. by 2^ in., and 
section and front elevation of the balusters, 
which are prepared from 1-in. stufi, tenoned 
through the bottom rail, and wedged. The 
rail is secured to the wall at the ends in 
the same way as Fig. 1785, and the bottom 
rail is nailed to a wood floor. The rail should 
be prepared for varnishing, with two coats 
of size, the second being put on after the 
first has been rubbed down with glass- 
paper^ then finished with elastic oak varnish. 
Fig. 2797 Teptesents a plan of the inside 
ends of the ^"ails, howing how the coid is 



fully selected Riga oak makes an efficient 
substitute ; and, when possible, the timber 
should be cut out to the sizes required and 
left for a few weeks before the work is put 
in hand. Fig. 1798 shows a front elevation 
of the lectern, and Fig. 1799 a side view. 
The heights given are those that are gener- 
ally found suitable. An error of construction 
that is often committed is that of giving too 
much slope to the desk, causing the book to 
overlap the bottom edge and throwing it 
out of shape. A slighter slope, as shown, 
is much preferable. The base is formed of 
two chamfered pieces of 3J-in. by 3-in. 
stufi, halved, and secured with a coach screw, 
and let into the column. In Fig. 1801 the 
dotted Unes indicate the desk, and the 



h 



N 



^^^ i 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 




I «« 





CHURCH FCBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



bmcketa above the cap. The octagonal 
cohmn is in one piece, running from the 
b8«e up to the under nde of the desk. The 
bottom brackets ate cut from 2-in. stuff, 
shaped, chamfered, and housed into the 
base and the octagonal column. Cnsped 
brackets, with open panels of the same 
thickness, are also fitted underneath the 
desk. Figs. 1800 and 1801 show various 
plans, and Figs. 1802 and 1803 several 
details, while Fig. 1804 represents an eleva- 
tion of the tracery panel in front of the desk. 
The desk is framed up as shown in Pig. 
1805, and is cut out of l}-in. stuff, with 
brackets fitted below as before described. 
Cutting the front tracery panel right through 
IS much easier than cutting it out of the soUd. 
A thin board screwed in from the back as 
shown in Fig. 1805 gives the appearance 
of a solid tracery panel. A cheaper method 
can be adapted for this lectern by making 
up the moulded octagonal cap and base in 
sectional pieces with mitered angles as shown 
by the hatched portions and sectional plan 
(see Figs. 1806 to 1808). This would do 
away with cutting the octagonal cap and 
base in the solid ; and if it is decided to 
make them up as described, the central 
column should be in one piece and cut back 
to receive the moulded and mitered cap 
and base as shown. The finish of the wood 
is a matter of taste. It could be left clean, 
or beeswaxed, polished, oiled, or fumed, as 
required. 

RcvolvinK Lectern Top. 

There will now be given details of a double 
desk lectern to suimeunt a similar pedestal 
stand to that just described. Kgs. 1809 
and 1810 show respectively a side elevation 
and a front elevation. The de«k for receiving 
thebookislft. lOin. byl ft. 6in. Alterna- 
tive methods are shown for the mouMed stop 
at the end of the sloping book-board. The 
arrangement of the fittings forming the 
revolving top is shown in Fig. 18H, and 
consists of a central pivot riveted to an 
octagonal-shaped plate, the latter being 
secured to the top of the column by means 
of screws, while a second plate is fixed to 
the bottom board of the desk as shown. 
The lower pivoted plate should be filed 
slightly above the level of the curved 



.107 

brackets, so that the bottom board of the 
lectern will just clear them. To make this 
central pivot rigid, it can be run through a 
block of wood A, about 4 in. by 4 in. by 
5 in., which is aecuroly screwed from the 
board underneath, the pivot being finished 
on top with a largo washer and screw. Fig. 
1812 shows the detail of the end tracery 
panel, which can be cut out of j-in. stuff, 
and pierced right through. Fig. 181.) shows 
an enlarged detail through trocory panel 
on lino X x (Fig. 1812), and Fig. 1814 an 
enlarged detail through line Y Y (Fig. 1812). 
A J-in. backboard is screwed to the tracery, 
a small moulding being planted on to stop 
the joint. The panel can therefore be taken 
out at any time, in order that the fittings 
to the revolving top may bo attended to. 
Good dry English oak should bo used, but 
carefully selected American wainscot oak 
would make a good substitute. 

Alternative Design (or Lectern. 

Figs. 1815 and 1816 show side and front 
elevations of another lectern. Fig. 1817 
being a section on hue a b (Fig. 1816), and 
Fig. 1818 an enlarged section on line OD 
(Fig. 1816). The tracery panels are IJ in. 
thick, and after being cut out should have 
the back panels inserted as shown in detail. 
This is a much easier method than carving 
the tracery from the solid. The central 
shaft is quatrefoil in shape, and should run 
from the under side of the book-rest to the 
floor below. The mouldings to the base 
may be either solid or mitered at the angles, 
and planted on ; but the lower part of the 
base must be in the solid, as the other parts 
of the lectern will be built up from this. 
The wood must be chosen very carefully. 
It must be perfectly dry, and free from all 
knots and shakes. English oak or teak 
would be ver} suitable. 

Lectern of Substantial Construction. 

The elevation (Fig. 1819) and the section 
(Fig. 1820) of the lectern about to be noted 
are reproduced to the scale of 1 in. to 1 ft. 
Fig. 1820 shows the general construction of 
the framing, which should be of the following 
dimcusioiia :— The top, IJ in thick, moulded 
on all edges, and mitrc-clamped at ends ; 
the side standards, 2J in thick ; and the 






M8 



CABINETWOKK AND JOINEHV. 
-4 ".. 




H». ITM. p^ „„ 

PIgl ItM ud 17M._rtonl ud Bid. n«,UM:. 
of LKtna. 



I^a 



Vis- IWH). — EorliootAl 

SMtltm of Lootorn at 

A A (Fig. UM). 



rig. imi.— BoiiKmUl 

SmtiOQ of Lfctern at 

B B (Fix. 1799) 




nt. 1>0>. 



n»i. isoa and I90S.— EaUrgnl Dotail 

Tnat Elaratlon and Seetloni of 

Uotam wltlioat Oitk. 



CHURCH FUBMTURE AND FITMENTS. 



MO 



■luped bnclosta at th« top, in {ront of the 
lida •tandards, 2 in. thick ; the main filling 
to the front elevation, 2J in. thick, the upper 
part having two pointed arch alupingi cut 
into it, and trefoil AlUng pieces, | in. thick, 
tongued to the soffit. ITie main pilaiters 
«re 3J in. by 2} in. in lection, cut and fitted 
at heck to the main standards. The smaller 
pilasters may be worked out of 3-in. by 3-in. 
itno. The atiles and mnllion to the lower 
portion are worked from 3-in. by 3-in. 




'■l' l*M'— T^aeeij Paad la Oask of LMten. 




nt. IMS.— Tsitloal laotlra ef Tyscaij Paul in 
Laoten « Uas C C (Fig. 1804). 

atuff, notched out to receive the pilasters. 
The small rose-shaped enrichments to the 
front elevation may be sunk from the face 
to a depth of j in. The perforations to the 
two lower panek give a rich and solid appear- 
ance to the lower portion. To obtain the 
beat effect, the mouldings should be deeply 
undercut. In the illustrations, the base i's 
formed by a projection in the curb to the 
platform adjoining, but this portion of the 
Josign could easily be altered to suit apeciAl 
requirements and circumstances. The wood 
used should be well-seasoned, carefully 
wiected oak or pitchpine. 



Seat to Lectern or Readlnjc-Desk. 

The side elevation (Pig. l»-ll) and the 
front elevation (Fig. 1822) of the seat to 
lectern or reading-desk are reproduced to 
the scale of J in. to 1 ft. Fig. 1822 shows 
the general construction. The dotted lines 




Fit. MM. 



Tig. ISOT. 



ni^. M«< to isos.— Ealaixad Detafla of Isetata 
Cap aad Baia. 



«10 



CABINETWOSK AND JOINERY. 



mdicato the powtion of tha Hat, the aeat 

back, and the V-jointed boarding under 
The aeat itaelf, which ii 1} in. thick, ia 
tmgued in at the lack to the aeat-back. 
The two ends are hollaed into the atnndaidr, 
and the front edge ia moulded. The aeat- 
hMlc la 1» in. thick, honaed in at the cnda 
to the aide atandatda, moulded on the top 



^H 1 


'm 




il 


1 


1 




; 


ijl 


1 




> j 

1 

i 


■1... 


t) 




edge, and tongued and ouwlded on the 
bottom edge, while the ahaped perforationa 
shown in the front elevation are aunk in 
from the aoUd. The J-in. matched and 
V-iouted boarding under the aeat givea a 
auUtantial appearance to the lower part. 
The aide rtandaida are worked from 2-ia. 
■tuff, carefully jointed, cruaa-tongucd, and 



rif. MU.— rart aarlioalal 

ll»lm of Ltetan Traenj 

PaMl ea Uae ZZ (Fit. 

liUX 



Fi(. 1810. 

Plia 1«» aad leio.-81d. ui Froat DaraUon. of KtrolTtaa 
Laetini Top. 




Pl». laiL— runt of PlTOt of 
SaTolTlat Ltetam Tcp. 




Hg. uu.-Tr«»r7 J*»tl at Ends of Uetora Tip. 



rig. Ult-PMt Seetioa of 

IiMtom Ttop ott Lisa TT 

(Tit. U19). 



OBUHOR FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



Ml 




Fi;. 1818.— B«tloil of Lectern Deik on Lino C D 
(Fig. 1818). 



Fl». 18ir. 

Hgi. 1818 to 1817.— Bide and FWnt 

EltTttioni and Horiiontal Boctlon 

on Lino A B of Altornatlvo Doiign 

of Lootoro. 



Ill 





m 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEHt. 



glutd up The |»r(ontiou to tha kwcr 
portion ihonld be ctnlaih lunk, and tka 
.«foil.h«d«l «lUng.ln piim t<;«gi!ri i^ 
bttore the orenUr colnmii u fixed in the 
centre ; the ehapnl duldnp above nuy b* 
•onk to the wotion iIiowd, thii giving . 



leotern itiell u deM-ribed in the pnvioiu 
puignph (pp. SOI ami HOB). 

Utany OMk. 

rip. 1823 and 1834 aho* front and 
Motional elavationa o( a litany deak, lig. 




'*•"'» nr.m,. 

FI... m. a.d:..».-P,„, E..™.te. aad v.rt..U S..U,. ., ueten. « ..uuatui Cn^^^ 



veiy pleasing cflecf. Alter the standards 
have been notched in front, the circular 
column having square cap and base, should 
be carefully fitted and fixed. The standards 
on each side are tongued to a Sj-in. by 2i-in. 
chamfered bottom rail, which, in its turn 
may be screwed to the floor. The material 
"scd and the general finish of the work, 
ihottld accord with iLose specified for the 



1825 ehowmg the plan. This desk is naualli- 
placed m the middle of the chancel, and 
close to the tatrance steps. The base ia 
formed of 3-m. by 3-in. oak, with chamfered 
ed^s and returned angles. At the back 
portion a kneeling-board o, 8 in. by 6 in. 
by I in„ IS screwed to the base. On thia 
board can be placed a small carpet or cashio:. 
for kneeling. The sides forming the desk 



OHUEOH rUBNITCllE AND FITMEKT8. 



"• •• I»j»- •»■« («» Kg. 1824), cat. 
•upM, and clumlBnd, and tcnoiwd *iid 
"""TJ '■*" *'»'»• "hJ "Muwd with oak 
pap. Th. puiaUtd front («• Kg. 1823) u 
m«l« up M followi:_Th« nuin frnming 
toiming tk. p.nel i, ij in. thiek, koumd 
into the udra, hue, etc., u ihown. Thi» 
pnrt oj th« pansUing u chamfered and 
goovri to receive the 1-io. tracery panel. 
Kg. 1824 repreeenti a Mctional elevation of 
llw dnk, ahowing the main panel housed 
mto the top of ba«o of the dck. A moulde.1 
nil u fitted up under the top of the dctk 



thick ikaleton framing under the book board 
u aupportcd by ihapcd bracketa at ground 
tevel, and kouied into alandarda at eml*. 
rfco three-quarter piliintera on the front, 
and the ahaped bracket., ihould lie carefully 
fctted and lorowod, th.. heailj of acrews, of 
course, being let in and pelleted in grain. 
The .h»p«l hatchings to the trefoil filling 



EiecM at the top, 
Dttom, ai sbowi 
perforationa ; ai i 
worked, they git I 
■nee of the Ku-. ; 




the panela at the 

atiott, indicate 

w« ar .Tofully 

i'-:H> I'l-.' M :!;- .cap. 
r» piksf.T „, 'Im 




!1 n 



FI|:Mn. 
rifs. Ull and »».— Uda 



and Front Ebratiou of isat to Uoten. 



pving a neat finish to the panelled front. 
Fig. 182ti is an enlarged diagram showing 
setting-out lines (or front tracery panels- 
Fig. 1827 is an enlarged plan through front 
tracery panel on line a b (Pig. 1823). 

Choir Book-rest. 

The choir book-rest shown in Figs. 1828 
and 1829 is drawn to the scale of J in. to 
1 ft. Pig. 1828, which represents a section 
taken through the centre of one bay, shows 
the general conatmction of the rest. The 
book board, } in. thick and 7J in. wide, has 
a clear width of ej in.— sufficient to support 
My onimaty-siied book— and should be 
Doused in al the ends to the end standards 
{finished siie, 8 in. by 2 J in.). The IJ-in. 



foot of the end standards are circular, and 
may have their bases circular and formed in 
the same piece of stuff, and the whole length 
need simply have a sttaight joint, with the 
standard at the back; or, instead, the 
pilasters may have their bases square, the 
lowest portion, including the chamfer, being 
formed solid in the standard, and the pilaster 
carefully fitted into the notching prepared 
for it. Fig. 1829 represents two hava only ; 
the total length of book-rest will, of course, 
vary according to the number of choristeia 
to be accommodated ; but in any case it 
will be found that two bays will give ample 
width for each person. The mat^riab 
used and the style of finishing of thia 
book-rest should match those described in 



Ill 



5U 



OABINETWOEK AND JOINEEY. 



:|!' 



iS 




Kg. UIB. 

ngi. lias to laas.— Fmt BmUm, Tntioal 
SmUo^ ud ?Iu of Idtuy DaA. 



Flf. isaa.— Tnmt Tnonj ?«a«l of Lituj 
Dwk. 



CHUECH FCBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



the Biwciflcation for the lectorn illustrated 
by Figs. 1819 and 1820 (p. 512). 

Pulpit. 

W Kg". 1830 and 1831 represent front and 
side elevations of a pulpit, standing partly on 



515 

S-iii- by |-in. moulds (see detail. Fig. 1&34). 
This plinth is fastened to the lower portion 
of the pnlpit, which consists of l}-in. fram- 
ing, secured to and supported by 4-in. by 
3-in. rough framed and braced scantlings 
shown in section (Fig. 1833). The panels in 




'/^ 



f 



Fig. isar— BMtlen thnngh TraMrjr Putl of Utany DsA. 



the floor of the church and partly on that of 
the choir. The measurement from the choir 
floor to the top of the pulpit is 5 ft. 10 in., 
the internal width and depth is 3 ft. 6 in., 
and the measurement from the choir floor 
to the floor of the pulpit 2 ft. 10 in. The 
pulpit is provided with a movable reading 
board, which can be adjusted to any height 
to suit the convenience of the preacher, 
and with a seat, which is necessary if the 
pulpit is intended for a chapel, but may be 
dispensed with for a church. Two small 
shelves are shown (see plan. Fig. 1832), 
which are convenient for standing a glass 
or books on. From the choir floor the 
pulpit is reached by a short flight of stairs, 
the lowest step having rounded tread and 
riser at both ends (see fig. 1832). Two 4-in. 
by 4-in. turned newels, i ft. 10 in. high, 
with octagon-shaped terminals, and a ball 
as finial, support the strings and handrail as 
shown in Figs. 1830 and 1833. Under the 
strings ofthestairisshownan open perforated 
spandiiloflj-in. stufi. The strings are made 
of IJ-in. stuff, with a perforated and panelled 
piece of framing IJ in. thick on the face. 
T]^ handrail is of a roll pattern, out of 
3-in. by 3-in. stuff. Around the front and 
on one side of the base of the pulpit is fixed 
a 6-in. by f-in. plinth to |-in. V-jointed 
matchboards, which cover up the 4-in. by 
3-in. framing that supports the choir floor. 
The choir floor is reached by one step, and 
the nosing of this floor is carried round 
the front and side of the pulpit. Above 
this nosing is a 2i-in. by 1 J-in. curb, fastened 
to a plinth composed of 8-in. by J-in. and 



this lower portion arc i in. thick, screwed 
to the framing from the back, and incised 
to a pattern as shown on elevation (Fig. 1830). 
-Attached to this lower framing is an 8-in. 
by J-in. shaped and perforated corbel ;able. 




Tie- 18»8. Hg. 1,,,. ^ 

Pigs, isas and ism— Vsrtiol Ssctiim and Part 
Elevation of Choir Book-reit. 

crowned with a mould made up of 3J-in. by 
J-in. and 3-in. by 2J-in. moulds, shown on 
enlarged detail (Fig. 1836). The upper por- 
tion of the pulpit, which commences above 
this mould, consists of 2-in. flaming, with 
1-in. perforated panels, }-in. panels being 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEKY. 



Ill' 



screwed to the back, as shown by section 
CFig 1833) and enlarged detail (Fig. 1836). 
Ihis top feanu-ig is surmounted by a Si-in 
by 3-in. deeply carved cornice. Kg. 1836 



pooved and tongued boards, laid on 4-in 
by 2-m. bearers. The back of ihe puli. t 
fornw the seat back ; it ig fixed lecUninK 
and consists of IJ-in. framing with Tin. 




Tig. lMO.-rront EI.T.tloa of Pnlplt (ftom ohureh F oor). 



shows an enlarged detail of the cornice 
^ud Fig 1837 displays the carving. Under 
the carved cornice is a 6-in. by i-in. dog- 
tooth moulding (see Figs. 1830 and 1836-). 
Ihe floor of the pulpit consists of Ifin 



y- and flash one side panels. The top rail 
IS moulded and the middle rail ploughed to 
receive a 14-in. hy IJ-in. round-edged seat 
supportad at one end by a shaped bracket 
(see section, Fig, 1833). It will be noticed 



I J" SXthmKTMMi 



OHUECH FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



that the design of the centre pands is 
different from that of the side paneb (see 
Pig. 1830). All rails have a return bead 
worked on the lower edge, and a deep chamfer 
on the top edge. The stiles are stop-cham- 
fered ; for detail of stop, see Fig. 1836. 
Around the centre rail of the upper framing 



elevation, plan, and section of a pulpit in 
the Perpendicular style of Gothic architec- 
ture. The pulpit is octagonal in shape, and 
the portion above the pulpit Boor, which is 
supported by eight trusses, projects over the 
lower portion. The floor of the pulpit is 
i ft. from the base, and is approached by a 




BsvaUai tf VDfK ataM Okm* Floori. 



is a IJ-in. by j-in. rstl moulding, tonMed inf. 
tue rail (Fig. 1833). 

Piripit in PerpeiMkular Styie. 

The ancient woodon pulpw- in Engiaud 
were usually polygonal, with their panels 
nchly adorned with (gathering, tracery, 
and mouldings. The pulpits of Coutiasntai 
churches are usually very large, and elabor- 
ately adorned with carved ornaments. 
Figs. 1838, 1839, and 1840 show, respe<jtively. 



ftdlit of five steps. These steps are IJ in. 
thi. Ic, with IJ-in. risers, and are 2 ft. 2 in. 
wide between tic strin§i. The afrings an 
11 in by 2 m., with lower «igc double 
moulded as shown by the enlarged detail 
(jKg. 1841), and with a moulded sinking to 
the ooter face, as shewn on elevation (Fig. 
18-')*). The stringR are hnoeed arid tenoned 
inte two 7-in. by 7-in. bottom newels, each 
5 ft. 7 in. high above the floor, to the top of 
the finial. Jbch of these two newels ha- 



» 



S18 



•i i 



moulded Binking., with trefoil heads on 
three faces and a moulded and carved finial 
as shown on elevation (Pig. 1838), and bv 
the enlarged detail (Fig. 1842). The two 
top newels ore each 5 in. by 5 in., and reach 
faom the base hne to 13 in. above the capping. 
The lower portion of these newels has a 
moulded smkiiig, with trefoil head on one 
face only. IT,e tops of these newels are 

doweUed to the lower portion, and have a 
moulded quatrefoil sinking on each face. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



(Rg. 1843), and two trusses, each a in. wide 
by J m. thick, not shaped or moulded, but 
with square edges. These two last, being 
under the steps, are not seen. Four trusses 
are connected together at their tops with 
two 41.m. by 3-in. deal floor joists, halved 
together at their intersections; and the 
other four trusses are connected to each 
other with two similar joists, 4J in. lower 
down than the previous joists, but halved 
together at their interseotiona in a similar 
manner. Upon these two hist-named joists 




and a castellated mould at the crown It 
wiU be noticed on the plan that these two 
newels are cut away between the cappine 
and stringing course to form an abutment 
for the framing of the top portion of the 
pulpit, but above the capping and below 
the springing these ncweb are square. 
The handrail is ^ in. by .Ji in., and is 
tenoned and housed into the newels (see 
*^g. 1841). Between the handrail and the 
o-in. by a-in. capping is a traceried panel 
(sec Figs 1838 and 1841). Forming the 
base of the pulpit are six shaped tiisses. 
each 14 m wide by 3 in, thick, with double 
moulded edges, as shown on enlarged detail 



Pl». 1»8J.— Horlwatal gntloa of Pulpll. 



are laid IJ-in. by 3-in. packing pieces, u. 
form a bearing level with the two first 
mentioned joists to receive the IJ-in. oak 
floorboards laid in narrow widths Tlu 
space between the trusses is filled in willi 
2-in. moulded framing, with raised carvwl 
panels, as shown in Figs. 1838 and 18Jt 
Ihis frammg is supported by a 4-in. by 3-iii 
chamfered curb, ttnoncd into trusses. 
Around the base is a plinth, 1 ft 2} in 
wide made up of three moulds, the lowen 
of which IS 7J in. by 2 J in., the middl" 
mould being 3J in. by 1| in., and the toi. 
mould 3i m. by IJ in. The soffit of tho 
lower part of the pulpit is formed of 7}-in. 



M£3a%:.:-:-M: 





CHUECH FURNITUEE AND FITMENTS. 



rif. 1U4.— laottra of Curb 

and; ■••• Koiildi of Fulitlt 

on ChoToh Floor. 




Tig. 18SB.— SmUoii of MotUdi 

and FnuBlBg at Lsvel of 

PnlpH Floor. 





Pl(. IMS.— Vertioal Soetlw of Polpll. 




"— Cairlng' 



01 i>alptt. 



520 



tn,.t ^^^' ""PPJted by the top. of the 
tra^», and rebated to receive tC floor- 
board,. The upper mrface of this plank 

STn/T"- ".rK"^ "*'«■" «° «>e floor 
round the m„de of the pulpit, fa order to 
break the joint between the aoffit and the 
lower framing, « 2-in. by 2-in. mould 7, 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



ahown by Pig. 1845, i, emplovBd. The ton 
portim oonaiat. of a 4-in. tfecfc mouMed and 
rebated .keleton frame, oompoaed of 6-in. 
by -J-m. bevelled and rebated curb or atrins 
4-in. by 3j.in. moulded and rebated t»p nS 
and 4-m. by .%in. double moulded and rekted 
angle-bar.. The top raU and .tring are 



III 




ng. lM«.-El.T.tton of Filplt to P.rp.adlouIar ttth. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINEBY. 



mit«re<! at th« anglet of tha ooUgoa ; «Mh 
thoit length of top tail u nut moulded 
throughout iti length, but is left in its iquare 
■tate at each end, and the aii.-;:e-haa an 
butt-jointed to thii iquan po^ ion, while 
the mould on the angle-bars is carried forward 
on the square ends of the top rail until the 
different members of the mould intersect 
with the corresponding members worked on 



the top rail, in the same manner that a mason 
ioins the mullion of a window to a moulded 
nead. In each bajr of this skeleton framing 
is fixed 2-in. framed and moulded punelUng, 
consisting of 2-in. hy l{-in. moulded stiles 
and top rails, 3]-in. hj 2-in. chamfered 
bottom rails, 4i-in. by l|-in. middle mil. 
The middle rail has a mou'ded traceried 
sinking on its face, and is intersected by a 




ng. 1S43.— SMtlon of Top Faatls, rramlaf, 
ani Menlds « Ed(H of Tlussss ol 

Falplt 




Fig. ls«g.-loat Mould aad Lowor 
TiaiQliif of Pulpit. 




Fig. ISU.— Framed 
FaDoUiag la Lover 
Portion of Pulpit. 



Fig. ls<i6.— Framed Paneiliug 

In Top Portion of 

Pulpit. 



Fig. 1S4«.— Pulpit Book- 



«^1| 



CBUBOB FUBNITVBE AND FITMENTS. 




r* lU0.-lid> SltraUoa ud P«rt IwUa of 
fvlpit on Ctronlur OolamBj, 




ng. IMS.— p»rt Vortical BoctiOB of PiMt 
•t (Pit. IBM). 




Hg. 1»M.— Ptrt Pka ud Borlnntia Sootlon 
of Pnlpit at A (Plj. UM). 



Pig. 18S1.— Half Plan of Pulpit Baw 
and Balf Hoiiiontal Bootlon at B 

(Pig. U50> 





^. 



m 



Fig. 18M.— SI ^g- ISM.— 8oc- ,„ 

l>l.TrfP,ini» n. .... . ^, . tlon of FiUo. of «g.l"»7.— Section of Pig. km,— 

Bottom Slop, Pnljdt Cojujc. Fis. 1950). ' Stifai, and Soffit of Pulpit 



# 



JU4 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINERY. 



i 




Flf. IMO. 



Fig. law. 
Plgt lan uul isac-Part ElnaUox mul VKtiial SkUoh of Iterailoi. 



CHVRCH FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



l-in. muatin. The mouUed tnumiad lutdi 
lo tl» topt ef Mch W an wotlnd out of 
■ boaM is one piece, } in. thick, end carved 
• to the pattern aa in the enlarpid elevation 
(Fig. 1846). The npper panel to each bay 
« railed in the centre, as in Fig«. 1843 and 
1846. The lower panel in each bay hu a 
l-in. ainlcing. with trefoil headi. 

Capplnf.— The capping (Rg. 1847) in 
here shown built up m two pieces, but may 
be built up in a greater number if desired. 
It is 7} in. wide by 5} in. thick, made up 
of a ^■m. by SJ-in. front portion and 5-in. 
by 4-in. back portion, tongned together. 
The front portion has a deep cove worked 
in it, and at intervals in this cove are raised 
and carved paterie, while above these are 
curved dentils (see Pigs. 1838, 1847, and 
1848). These dentils should not be pUnted 
on, but carved out of the solid material. 

Book-board.— The book-bootd is 18 in. 
long, 17 in. wide, and 2 in. thick. Under- 
neath it, at the two front comers, are square 
drops with octogonal terminals. Between 
these drops is a shaped board, with carved 
cusps and moulded sinkings on the face. 
It is moulded on the shaped edges as shown 
by Fig. 1849. The book-board should be 
n»d at only a slight inclination. The 
elevation (Kg. 1838) is parallel to the stairs, 
and is not a front elevation. It will bo 
noticed that the panels adjoining the newels 
are single, whereas all the other bays are 
double. The pulpit should be made of oak 
left in its natural state. 

Pulpit on Circular Columns. 

The pulpit with staircase represented by 
Fig. 18S0 is octagonal in shape, and is 
supported by circular columns set at each 
comer of an octagonal base. Kne is used 
throughout, except for the columns and for 
the plain backs behind the fretwork panels, 
the columns and panels being prepared 
from teak, the dark wood contrasting well 
with the lighter. From the main floor to 
the top of the comice is 7 ft. 9 in., and to the 
top of the pulpit floor 4 ft. 6 in., while the 
extreme width of the comice is 6 ft. 11 in. 
and that of the base 5 ft. 9 in. The fret- 
work comice, panels, and balusters make a 
nch and inexpensive decoration, while the 
newels are uncommon in form, and are well 



suited to th« lines of the other decorative 
parU. The top newels an prepared from 
11-in. by 2|-in. atult, and the bottom from 
7-in. by 2i-in., and the balusters from 7-in. 
by |-in. Bracketed carriage pieces are used 
for the construction of the stairs (see Fig 
1880). The strings are of U-in. by IJ-in. 
pme. Fig. IMl represents a part plan and 
section at a (Fig. 1850), with port of the 
4-ui. by l-in. grooved and tongued floor- 
boards removed to show in plan the timbers 
used for building up the heavily moulded 




n*. IHl.— Hofiioatal leoUoa 

ttarearli Bnttrtu aad Itainlnf 

of Bersdos. 





Flf. 1SS4.— Oarrsd 
nalalof Bersdos. 



Tit. Itsi. — SseUoa 
tbroofh Top BaU of 
Bsredoi 0«t« Wlafi. 



Fix. IHS.-Isotloa of 
Monldod Capplag to 
Coalrs ?art of Barodoc 



portion of the pulpit above the columns. 
Fig. 1852 shows a section at b (Fig. 1850), 
and a half-plan of the moulded base. The 
frame and brackets keep the moulding in 
position. The frame is from 9-in. by 3-in. 
stuff, tenoned and pinned together, with 
bmcketa nailed on. The bottom parts of 
the columns are bolted to the frame. An- 
other view of this is given in the part section 
(Fig. 1853) taken at c (Fig. 1851), together 
with a section of another octagonal frame of 
4-in. by 2-in. stuff, halved together and 
pinned, and resting on the columns, and to 
which the top parts of the columns are bolted. 
This frame also supports brackets, which are 
tenoned int/> it and into the 5-in. by l-in. 



Midocopr nsouniON tbt chait 

(ANSI <,n<< ISO TEST CHART No. J) 



1.0 



m 



L25 i 1.4 



|M 



12.2 



S2.0 



1.8 



1^1 



1.6 



A APPLIED IK/HGE In. 

"B^ 'SS3 Eoll Uain SIfhI 
l^r Rocnmvr. Nn rork U60B USA 
^B {716} *82 - 0300 - Phon* 

(7tE) jaa-Mss -ran 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINEHY. 




joists of the floor above. These joists are un- 
usually large, on accouot of the two brackets 
at each corner being tenoned into them. A 
section of the reading desk with a small 
shelf underneath is also given in Pig. 1853 
as well as a section through the panelling! 
Fig. 1854 shows a plan of the shaped bottom 
step and newels, while Fig. 1855 represents 
an enlarged section of the cornice mouldings 
and detail of the perforated member. Fig. 
1856 shows an enlarged section of the stiles 
at A (Fig. 1850), and Fig. 1867 gives sections 
of the string, handrail, and soffit, which is 
plain panelled. Fig. 1858 shows more clearly 
the detail of the carved caps of the columns. 
The pulpit looks well with the Ughter wood 
sized and varnished, and the teak dull 
poUshed. 



Reredos. 

A reredos, dorael, or lardrose, has been 
defined as " the wall or screen at the back 
of an altar, seat, etc." Formerly, the reredos 
was usually ornamented with panelhng, 
etc., especially behind an altar, and some- 
times was enriched with a profusion of 
niches, buttresses, pinnacles, statues, and 
other decorations, which were often painted 
with brilliant colours. A reredos of this 
kind not infrequently extended across the 
whole breadth of the church, and was some- 
times carried up nearly to the ceiUng, as at 
St. Albans Abbey. In village churches 
they were generally very simple in design. 
The reredos of which Fig. 1859 shows a part 
elevation should preferably be made of oak. 
Pig. 1860 shows a section. The reredos 
illustrated is 11 ft. 6 in. wide and 12 ft. high 
to the top of the finial, but could be modified 



to suit any width or height by altering the 
number or size of the panels. The two 
centre buttresses are 10 ft. i in. high, the 
two end buttresses 8 ft. high. These are all 
got out of 8-in. by 4-in. stuff, and are rebated 
out on the back edges to receive the 2-in. 
framing as shown on the enlarged detail 
(Fig. 1861). AU ir buttresses have sunk 
and chamfered pa: Is on the face, and are 
shaped as shown ,n section (Fig. 1860). 
The two centre buttresses have a necking 
mould mitered round, and all four buttresses 
have a small moulded capping, with small 
carved cross or ornament to form a finial. 
The 2-in. framing consists of SJ-in. by 2-in. 
stiles, 3J-in. by 2-in. muntins, 9-in. by 2-in. 
bottom and top rails, SJ-in. by 2-in. inter- 
mediate rails. This framing is chamfered 
at the front and rebated out at the back 
to receive the 1-in. perforated and chamfered 
panelling. This 1-in. panelling is backed 
by fin. boards, which are screwed to the 
2-in. framing, and secure the 1-in. panelhng. 
The stiles of the framing are stop-chamfered 
as shown on Fig. 1862. All the under edges 
of the rails have a return bead worked on 
them, and all the top edges have a deep 
chamfer worked on. Arou \d the base of the 
reredos is mitered a 9-in. by l}-in. moulded 
skirting, but in between the buttresses on 
the two outer wings of the reredos is fixed 
a 5-m. by 4-in. mould, and fixed on this at 
intervals are 5-in. by 2-in. moulded blocks, 
which give a castellated appearance. Details 
of these are shown in Fig. 1862. Fig. 1863 
shows a detail of mould 4 in. by 2 in. fixed 
on the top edge of centre part of reredos. 
Fig. 1864 13 an enlarged detail of the carved 
nnial to the centre part. 



SHIP FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



Saloon Framing:, 

The saloon side-frttminE about to bo 
desonbed is intended to be employed 
with hung windows. Fig. 1865 shows an 
elevation and Pig. 1860 a section through 
the middle frame and pediment, and shows 
the beam sole cuiving down to the top of 
the truss T. The three frames shown in 
Fig. 1865 are made separate and jointed 
with a sKp-feather, the small frame having 
a, bead on each stile to break the joint 
The abacus of the trass is carried all round 
as shown, having a carved moulding below 
it. The pediment is formed by a dentil 
and an ogee moulding. The cornice is 
Jormed by a cove resting against the beam 
aide, and attached to a ground at the top 
A moulding is planted on after the ceiling 
panel is up, and covers the deficiency 
Thus the panel at any time can be taken 
down without interfering with the cornice 
This cove can be covered with Japanese 
paper, or it can be painted white. Apart 
from the designing of the framing, a great 
dial of the beauty depends upon the contrast 
of the ooloura in which the side and ceiling 
are finished. If this framing were dark- 
coloured, the flat portions on each side of 
the pediments, as well as the co'. ^ce and 
ceiling, could be finished in white ai Ueved 
with gold. The colours in the cencils 
should be vanegated as much as possible, 
to give the saloon a pleasing and gay effect' 
thus taking away the idea of its being a' 
study m black and white. 

Oiling Panels.— Figs. 1867 and 1868 show 
two simple methods of dealing with the ceil- 
ing panels, and are intended to be used 



where the beam space is broken up with 
mock fore and aft beams. Fig. 1867 has 
a circular piece in the centre, to which the 
straight pieces are scribed. This circular 
piece can be used to carry either an electric 
or a swinging oil lamp. Fig. 1869 is a method 
which can be used on a panel which is not 
divided, as Figs. 1867 and 1868, though 
owing to the labour connected with the 
circular mouldings, it is more expensive. 
Ihese are some of the methods of work- 
ing patterns with surface mjuldings some 
vaneties of which are shown by Figs 1870 



Fittings for an Officer's Cabin. 

u''^''?o,^^ ''™' ='«"'" '■> elevation in 
■11 I " ""^ "''''='' ™y ^ applied to 
either the chief engineer's or chief officer's 
rooms, the finish of the inferior officer's 
lurmture bemg generally of a plainer descrip- 
tion. There are two features of special 
note m the bed here illustrated. These are 
a shding wnting flap and a swing washstand. 
Ihe amount of space that can be allotted to 
omcera cabins, even on board the finest v< ssels 
nHoat ,8 of necf8s:ty strictly hmited; and 
therefore it is usually found expedient to ren- 
der compact and portable the various articles 
required m the cabin. An additional amount 
of ornamentation is here introduced, which 
makes the bed a more pleasing feature in 
the room. Fig. 1878 is a vertical section on 
the Ime a b, and Fig, 1879 a section on the 
bne c D. Fig. 1880 is a plan showing the 
sliding flap and also the top of the basin stand 
Fig. 1881 bemg a section of part of the stand 
Himwmg the method adopted lo support it 
Ihe leeboard A and drawer stretchers B as 



^^^^^^^^■' 


; 


w 


i 


^^^HiIt : 


: 


m 








liii 




^^BmHI 


i 

i 



528 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 








1 

8 

I 

I 

•a 

9 

s 

6, 
s 




SHIP FUBNITVBE AND FITMENTa 




mo 



OABmETWORK AJTD JOINEBY. 



I 




^4M^^^ 




SHIP FUHNITCHE AND FITMENTS. 



i 

I 

•» 

t 



well sa the bottom rail o, ate tenoned to the 
left-hand haffli; the montin D ia tenoned 
to the bottom nil and top atretchet, and 
mortued on the edge to receive the abort 
stretchers, the rest of the rails being fixed 
to the nght-hand bafflt as shown in Fig. 
1877. The short stretchers are aUo tenoned 
to the yellow pine gables at each end. 
The short muntin between the two top 
drawers ia raggle-dovetailed to the two 
stretchera. The drawers ate dovetailed 
together m the usual manner, but the sides 
and front, instead of being grooved to leceive 
the bottom, have grooved pieces glued and 
bradded to them. The writing ilan as 
shown at Pig. 1880, ia about 16 in. broad 
but the cross-ends, which are mitered at 
the front, are allowed to go right back and 
act as levers when the flap is drawn out for 
the purpose of writing upon. Kecea are 
screwed to the orosa-enda at such a position 
that they atop the flap from coming out too 
far, and alao prevent it going back further 
than to show the fin. ainkage all round. 
An examination of the phn (Fig. 1880) and 
the sections (Figs. 1878 and 1879) will show 
the method on which the swing basin stand 
IS constructed. Two gables ate required 
one of which is acrewed to the back of the 
door, and the other one well screwed to the 
fdge of It, with the addition of three or four 
iron angles in the inside. The shelves are 
taggled to the gables, the uppermost shelf 
being cut to receive the basin, which is 
covered round the edges with a broad coping. 
On the flying gable, as shown at Figs. 18S0 
and 1881, 18 fixed an iron rod, having a 
cross-head on the upper portion of it 
traveUmg on the top of two iron quadrants. 
Ihis supports the stand and takes the strain 
oB the door. The door is planted with a 
good moulding, and a thin fielded panel of 
^ jte shown in Fig. 1877 is glued and 
btadded to the pUm panel. Two reeds are 
ran on the face of the leeboard, and the top 
edge IS roimded. However weU fitted a 
cabin may be, there will be Uttle comfort 
tor Its occupant unless it is watertight and 
well ventilated. * 

Ship's Sideboard. 

Details of a ship's sideboard with storm 
tloots ate shown by Figs. 1883 to 1887. 




&12 



OABINETWOHK AND JOINEKY. 



Thii ii a itylt oi lidtboatd whioli ii rateir 
UMd, owing, probably, to the cxtn labour 
and axpenn iiwumd in it* conatruction. 
The naual height of a lideboaid ia about 3 ft., 
and the length to nnit requirementa and the 
•pace available. Fig. 1882 ia a vertioal 
Mction through one of the doon, Kg. 1883 
a horisontal section or plan, and Fig. 
1884 a front elevation. The sideboard is 
made in several parts. The base is formed 



into these upright pieces, and carry tha top, 
which ia someumes a marble slab inatead (if 
hardwood. The top part is dowelled and 
screwed to the shelf caroasei. Fig. 188J 
shows the shape of the drawer front, and iit 
kept inaide the Suah of the gables and centre, 
piece. The height of the doors is also sevn 
m Fig. 1882. Fig. 1883 ahows the position 
of the drawer carcases, and also the two 
outside gables which tire dowelled to tn<> 







a 



nt iMi. 

Hi. ISM. 



ni. 1M4. 



FIf. IMS.— Hlnisd 

Pilaster of SUp's 

■Usbeanl 



Tig. US7. 
Kft. im and 

1S87.— Brass for 
Flzinf on Side- 
board Door. 



ii 










1 


1^ 










i 


^ 








fii 


0— 


'^ ' '^i 



Fig. IBSS. 
FiKi- 1S88 to 1884.— Vertical SMtion, Horiiontal Bactlon, and EleraUoii of SUp'i 81d«board. 



of pieces of pine dovetailed together, having 
Ii n hardwood clamped to the top aide as shown, 

ll I; and the haiJ^rood base mitered at the 

comers and '"screwed to it. The two drawer 
carcases, shown in plan, are of pine dovetailed 
together, and blocked and screwed to the 
bwe. The top part is formed of two gables 
raggled into a pine sole, having hardwood 
clamped to the face edge and b jth ends. A 
centre drawer division is also raggled into 
this sole. Stretchers, the front one of which 
is clamped with hardwood, are dovetailed 



base and top part. The space which is left 
between the outside gables and the pinr^ 
carcase must be fully the thickness of the 
door ; and if boleotion or raised mouldings 
are used, allowance must be made for theni. 
The two outside pilasters with blocks are 
hinged to stand clear of this space, and tlie 
method of hingeing is shown in Fig. 1885. 
The method of sliding the door is clearly 
seen in Fig. 1883. A piece of brass, with a pin 
on it. is screwed to the top and bnttom rail-. 
of the door ; and the pin, being the centre 



8HIP FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 533 

ol Sr^°±,r:i I? T ""."v"" ^^^ "»» *• «»«iP«»d with th. pin, .» •o»w«d 
o« th. door from Ihedg, of th. .til.. Th. to th. b.» .nftop r«t, bet^M tt,3. 




Figr. 189S.— 
?art Section of 
8td«board Door. 



Tig. 1S94. rig. isee. 

Figs. I8M ud 1896.— Shtlf 
In ContM Part of Bldeboard. 



nhape of this fcrasa is shown in Vif*s. 1886 
and 1887. Kecea of brass, with a slot in 



Flffl. iu« to 18f L—Btlf 

Txmt Eloratlon, Vw- 
tloal iMtloni, and H«lf 
BiiTliOBtat BmUob of 
Shlp'i 
Sideboard. 



le and the pine carcase. A flush ring 
may he sunk into the edge of the door stile, 
to allow of thQ door being easily halved out 
from the recesp The pilasters, when closed, 
are kept in place with small circular spring 
pins. It will be seen from the plan and 
elevation (Fig. 1884) the*^ the door stile, 
which is covered by the pilaster, is made 
broader to show the same margin outside. 
The pilaster is half-checked and screwed to 
the capital and base block. The end gables 
are framed to show the same as the door. 
Tho small gablea on the top part of the side- 
board could be of the same shape as the 
drawer fronts, and would therefore give it 
a heavier appearance. 



<M 



nil 



1 <■ 



CABINETWOBS AND JOINEHY. 



Ship's SMond-clau SMcboard. 

Th« Hcond-cUM Mloon (idebMrdi on 
bMrd a itMmet ire gmtrally plainer than 
th« fint-claH, and an therr{orr eaiiet to 
dangn. but atill a little taate ia nqnitFd to 



mala a plain and compatativaly chra| 
attiolt look pmantabk. Fig. 1M8 ia a 
faoDt elevation of bait oi a atdebo4id, which 
if divided into three nrta. On each aid* atr 
loclcen, cloied in with doon, and between 
them i* an open apace with a drawer below. 




1 




iS^Si^^SS 


^k 








J 










\.\iA] 




1 


^ 


y~ 


P*i., 




^ 




7 






/' 











Fig. 1897. 
I ft] 

Wasbstand aad Toilet Back. 



ng. 1898. 

Wuhitaiid'i ToUet Back. 



8HJP FVBNITVBE AND HTMENTS. 



> hile »loiigtlie top m jitaid thnt ilullow 
'Iniw.M, lHg. 1889 U . vertid Mction 
ehtough ono of the lodnn, »jd ihowt the 
gviipnl coutruotion. The thelvee f ue 
mg)iie<lovrt«iled to the giblet, the bottom 
•hell being aUo iMtheied end grooved to 
the bottom ail, A iraill baliuter rail ia 
TJ Ueo to the top of the middle iheii to prevent 

V •niclei rolling ofl, u ihown in Fig. 1890, 

V which it t vertical eection through the central 
y, pert ol thi lideboetd ihowiog the central 

J I !<*","'l <>PP«' d»wer ipaoe and drawer. 
" ■ It will be teen by Fig. 1891 that the gablei 
/ I ^l'" '"*'' *'"' ""^ °ot«de of the poett b, 
Z '" rebated to receive the doon. 
The bottom nil o (Fig. 1889) and the 
1 I "*" etretohers D are tenoned to the out- 
"liil I tide potts. The central poiti (tee Fig. 1891) 
are tenoned to the bottom ml, and are carried 
right up, the lower drawer itretcher being 
carried over the face of them. The upper 
drawer itretcher, abutting againtt the poiti 
with a iquare thoolder, is dovetailed down 
to them. The back atretchera c (Fig. 1889), 
which are of yellow pine, are dovetailed to 
the gables, though not brought through to 
the face. Fig. 1892 it an enUrged lection 
of part of the top, ahowing the general finitl 
more clearly. The top drawer stretcher d 
IS made thick to carry the moulding, but is 
checked inaide to reduce the weight. Fig. 
1893 is a section through the door top rail, 
showing the flush and bead panel and mould- 
ing on the face. Fig. 1894 ahowt an enlarged 
section of part of the middle shelf and drawer 
front, and alto shows the baluster rail, a 
vertical lectiou being given at Fig. 1895. 

Ship's Washitand and Toilet Rack. 

Pigs. 1896 to 1898 show a washstand and 
toilet rack made in the example illustrated, of 
cypress, and stained a rich mahogany colour. 
The front is framed up out of J-in. wood, not 
allowing the mortices to come through the 
stiles ; the rails are advanced to mitre the 
bead, which is run on the inaide edge. The 
front, after having been cleaned ofl, ia 
stripped on both edges with the trying 
plane, and then grooved to receive the 
gables. The gables are squared on the top 
end, and raggled to receive the shelves as 
shown iu Pig. 1898, and then a feather is 
wrought on the face edge to fit the groove 



on the front. They an tfa«a glud together, 
and the ihelvet inserted. A piece of i llnw 
pine, rebated on the top edge to t«»ive toe 
basin (which m this case ia a iqutn Atlantic 
rimmed one), ia flxed to the hack edge of 
the top shell (Fig. 1897), and to a leUto in 
the gables. A fillet is abo screwed to the 
gablea and front, to carry the front and sides 
of the basin. After the basin it fitted and 
the diachurge hole cut, the cope shouhl be 
mitered and screwed down on top of the 
w"**"*' ^'"' **P '' entailed between two 
ha (fits and a back rail, which ate mortised and 
tenoned together, and screwed down to the 
cope, the holes being dowelled up. Small 
cross ends are also mortised and tenoned 
to the flap. The basin plug is attached to 
the under side of the flap with a brass chain. 
Two mouldings are run on the top nil of the 
front to break up the broad suiiace. As will 
be SMU m Figs. 1896 and 1897, the door stUet 
and tails have a bead run on them, close to 
the inside edge. This is a very simple way 
of abohahing the moulding, and it looks very 
well. The receiver immediately below the 
basm, and the water jug on the bottom shell, 
are made of linc, and kept in pi ■•> by filleta 
naued to the shelf. Fig. 1899 vertical 

section through another necest item in 
the furnishing of a room— nam -.j, a toilet 
rack. These racks are generally made of 
teak or mahogany. The bottom shelf is for 
comb and brush, and the two upper ones 
Me for a water bottle and two tumblere. 
Kg. 1900 is a part plan of the top shelf, 
uiowing the shape and arrangement of the 
holes. The middle shelf is solid, and is the 
same shape as the top one. As the portion 
outside the hole for the decanter is very 
weak, a baluster is inserted to stiBen it. 
The shelves are raggled to the gables, and 
glued. The small feather on the bottom 
shelf is also glued in. 

Ships' Lite-seats. 

There have been many discussions as to 
the best means of saving hfe in the case of 
an Occident on board a vessel, more especially 
a passenger steamer. With seats that 
are lashed to the deck by small rope, all 
that 18 necessary is to cut tll.^ lashing and 
lower the seat overboard, there being no 
fear of its capsizing, A life-seat comprises 



OABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



an ordimuy sparred deck-seat with the 
addition o{ watertight tanks, usually made 
of copper, and a life-line, drawn through 
lashing eyes, is carried all round the seat. 



front rails e. The legs are turned with a 
round pin at the bottom, and are rebated on 
the face side to receive the front rail. 
Bearers B (Fig. 1901) are carried across the 



fig. itoi, 



Tig. 1903. 




Fig. lua. 



Fig. 1904 



Pigs. l»Ol to 190«.-HUf VmUmI Section, Half End Eloyttlon, P«rt Horiiontal Baction, 
and Part Plan of Sbip's Ufe-soat. 



Tho^seats should not exceed 8 ft. in length, 
as beyond that they are unwieldy. The 
seat ihown in Figs. 1901 and 1902 is made 
up of grounds o (Figs. 1901 and 1903), the 
end ones being mortised and tenoned into 
the end legs, and the intermediate bniokets 
or grounds being raggle-dovetailed to the 



whole width of the seat, and have holes 
bored at each end to correspond with the 
pins at the bottom ends of the legs. The 
beare s are also shapedoutonthe under side 
as shown. The front rails are screwed to 
the legs, and the bolcB dowelled up. After 
the grounds, legs, front rails, and bearers 



SHIP FURNITURE AND FITMENTS. 



have been put together, the frames can be 
turned upside down and the fillets f (Figs. 
1901 and 1903) foi receiving the tanks can 
be screwed on. The frame would then be 
turned on its feet again, the sparring fixed 
in place, and the beads for covering up the 
grounds bradded on. The ends would then 
be flushed, and the facing a (Figs. 1902, 190.'3, 
and 1904) fixed on. This facing has a bead 
on the under edge. A box is made for cover- 
ing the tanks, and the length of the longest 
piece is the length of the seat outside the 



lashing carried from one to the other. 
Fig. 190^5 is a part section on the line x x 
(Figs. 1901 and 1902). 

Ornamental Cover for a Ship's 
Ventilator. 

In the case of large steamships in which 
the saloons, either first or second class, are 
scattered all over the deck, it sometimes 
occurs that a ventilator passes through some 
of them, and it is difficult to design a cover 
in keeping with the remainder of the wood in 




Fig. 1908.— OmamBEtal Ventilator Cover in Ship's SaIoou. 



J-in. facin{^ at each end. The length of the 
end pieces is the size over the outside fillets, 
plus the thickness of the two long pieces. 
A bead is run on the bottom edge of the end 
pieces, and the pins are divided so as to allow 
the bead to run through to the front. The 
pins are put on the sides, so that the ends 
can be taken ofi to ship the tanks, as shown 
in Fig. 1901. The top cope c (Pigs. 1901 
and 1903) is fixed to the top ends of the 
grounds and allowed to project a little over 
the end facings and rounded off. The lashing 
eyes e (Figs. 1901 and 1904) for carrying the 
life lines are fixed at about 14-in. centres. 
A ring-and-plate is screwed to the facings 
nbnut nnc-third of the height from the top, 
and another is fixed to the deck, and a thin 



the saloon. Fig. 1905 is an illustration^'of 
a ventilator cover and the framing of the 
saloon. The sofa seat is carried along the 
athwartfliiip bulkhead, and above the seat 
is the side framing, the design and construc- 
tion of which are simple and yet effective. 
It is formed by planting mouldings of different 
curves on to a jointed panel which is set 
into a frame. In the centre of these mould- 
ings a square- or diamond-shaped fielded 
panel is fixed, the square panel being carved 
and the others left plain. In the corners 
of the frame containing the carved panel 
a carved leaf ornament is nailed on. The 
pilaster is fluted and has a carved capital 
uud n uiuuldcd block bciow. The sofa breast 
is plain ; th? cant on which it sits is covered 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 



a- 



:M 




Fl(. 1908.— Roriioiitil Swtion of SUp'o ToitUator Cow. 



Rg. 1006.— VarUnl SoeUoi of Shlp'i 
VmfcUator Cover. 




Pl«. mo.— HouMlsifor Hg. Mu.-g«tioii 



Floldod PumL 



aius FuuL 



tliroagh 



Fig. 1909.— SooUoi 
ofFMdnlFutllii 
Ventilator Cover. 



Fig. 1911.— Seotloa of Houlded FaneL 





Fig. 1907.— Belt Pig. 191S.— 

Ball of VantUator HonMiag to Secure "*■ "'*' ">' ""- 

OoTor. aiaai. Flga I9l« and 19U.-8Mtioib of Dado HonUinga 



SHIP FUBNITUBE AND FITMENTS. 



M» 




FI». l916.-rront Elantlon gf ■blp't Salooa Boh. 



Tig. 1>19 



Fip. ma ud 1930.- 
AltmuUn DMigni HHg. 1990. 
for Sob Btliuttn. 




FIj. 1917.— V«tIo«I SmUoi of Sofiu 



Fig. 1919.— End Elmtion of Sofa. 



■VtU 



CABINETTVOBK AND JOINEEY. 




by a polished base. The ceiling panel 
18 framed with a muntin in the centre. 
Fi g. 1 U06 represents a vertical section through 
the cover, a denotes the rant screwed to 
the lower deck, b the stringer screwed to the 
deck above. The ceiling ground and frame 
are also shown. Qroimds o are fixed to the 
cover in order to carry a beam side and beam 
sole with neck moulding below. Fig. 1907 
reprecents the belt rail of the frame. Dado 
mouldings are planted on the belt rail, the 
top one being kept the same height as the 
moulding above the sofa. Below the belt 
the panels are shown fielded, but above the 
belt on every alternate frame is a mirror. 
On the rest of the frames are ornamental 
panels as shown. Fig. 1908 is the pkn or 
horizontal section showing the method of 
fixing the cover, o o denote the grounds 
fixed to the cant below and the stringer 
above. The cover is shown as if solid, 
which is sometimes the case in cheap work' 
mouldings being planted on to form imita- 
tion frames. The frames are screwed at 
the top and bottom to the stringer and cant, 
and to the ground at the back of the dado 
mouldings, which are then nailed on and 
the holes puttied. Fig. 1909 is an enlarged 
section of part of a bottom rail showing a 
design for a fielded iianel ; an enlargement 
of the moulding is shown at Fig. 1910. 
Fig. 1911 is another moulded panel with 
square stiles. Fig. 1912 is a section through 
one of the glass panels. The frame is rebated 
to receive the moulding on the face and the 
wood panel on the back. The back is fixed 
in, after which strips of felt are secured to 
it m order to form a soft I ed for the glass. 




which is kept in place by the moulding, an 
enlarged section of which is shown at Fii 
1913. Figs. 1914and 1915repro8entenUirgrd 
sections of dado mouldings other than that 
previously shown, but which are very com- 
monly used. 

Ship's Saloon Sota 

The style of sofa tends to restrict the 
design for a saloon finish, but it must be 
remembered that a finish which looks well 
is arrived at by the use of as Uttle wood 
as possible. The general construction and 
design of a good type of sofa seat is shown 
by Figs. 1916 to 1921. Brackets are framed 
up and fixed to the groundwork at the back 
and to the coaming at the bottom. The 
seat and back are then covered up by J-in. 
feather-and-grooved boards. Sometimes holes 
are cut in the seat, and lids fitted to 
them, so that the space below may be 
utilised as a steward's locker. The ship's 
skin is then framed up and the mountini; 
put on. The design of the framing in this 
case is left to individual taste and require- 
ments. The sofa breast is solid, and is 
fixed to the bearers at the back and the 
coaming. The pieces are butted on the 
vertical legs of the bearers, and the joint 
covered by a truss as shown. The sofa 
imishes at a doorway, and an elbow is re- 
quired to stop all mouldings, etc., connected 
with the sofa. The end elevation (Fig. lyis) 
gives the shape of the elbow ; this is framed 
up and a single turned and carved baluster 
is placed in the centre of the space above 
the cushions. Figs. 1919 and 1920 are 
alternative designs for the baluster. 



MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FURNITURE. 



Newspaper Rack. 

The newspaper rack and book-holder, of 
which Pigs. 1921 and 1922 show respectively 
front elevation and vertical section, Fig. 
1923 giving a general view, may be made in 
oak oi mahogany. The two wings are made to 
fall to an angle as shown, forming receptacles 
for papers or music, and when not i" use 
may be folded back against the triangular 
centre-piece. The shelf underneath may be 
used as a convenient place for keeping books. 
For the two shaped ends,' two pieces 2 ft. 
3 in. by 11 in. by | in. are required, the ;3hape 
of the ends and the fretted design being 
shown by Fig. 1922. Grooves are cut at 
A A, 5J in. long by J in. deep, to receive the 
sides of the bookshelf, which is f in. thick ; 
the shelf is housed into the sides and screwed 
from the outside. Round-headed brass 
screws may be used, two in each side, or 
ordinary screws sunk below the flush and 
the b''.eB plugged with wood. The joint of 
the anelf is glued and bradded. Fig. 1924 
shows the method of fixing the top shelf to 
the shaped ends. It is 7 in. wide by f in. 
thick, bevelled on the edges, and lap-dove- 
tailed to the ends. A |-in. piece b (Fig. 
1925), 4J in. wide, is glued to the top of the 
shelf, t in. from the ends. This forms the 
base of the triangle. For the two sides c, 
two pieces of |-in. stuff, 1 ft, 1 in. wide and 
the same length as the base, are planed up 
for Lue sides of the triangle, the edges being 
bevelled where they meet at the top. The 
bottom edges are fitted to b, and glued, the 
joint being secured with a few brads. The 
ends of the triangle are left open, and the 
space is utilised for the reception of prints, 

fi41 



stationery, etc. The two hinged wings are 
framed up, a mortice-and-tenon joint being 
used. The stiles and rails are 2 in. by g in., 
with a 4-in. rebate on the outside edges. 
There are five shaped straps, f in. thick ; 
these have a small tenon on each end, and 
are mortised to the rails. The shaped 
strap is shown in detail by Fig. 1926. The 
wings, when framed together, are 2 ft, in 
length by 1 ft, 2J in. wide, and are hung 
with brass butt hinges as shown in Fig. 1927. 
It will be seen that the edge of the top shelf 
stops the wing and keeps it at the proper 
angle. 

Lady's Workstand. 

The lady's workstand shown in side and 
end elevation by Figs. 1928 and 1929 can 
be made in polished mahogany, walnut, or 
rosewood, and finished with glass lids and 
copper mountings. Fig. 19;30 shows a 
plan of the lids. The box should be +he 
part made first, and has sides and ends 
dovetailed together and grooved for the 
bottom, as shown in Figs, 1931 and 1932. 
The two Hds have glass panels carried in 
a framing of stufE 1 in, wide by J in. tliick, 
mitered and keyed and glued together, and 
rebated for the panel. A small bolection 
moulding finishes the face of the framing, 
after which the panel is inserted and secured 
by moulded glazing fillets. A dividing 
piece 2 in. wide is screwed to each side, and 
placed between the lids ; they close on it. 
The lids are hinged to the box ends with 
IJ-in. butt hinges, and furnished with a 
cnT]pI(^ nf small knobs. The box part is 
mounted on four legs, 1 in. square at the top, 
tapering to | in, at the bottom, and cut to 



S4i 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBY. 



the7»hape bLowii in Figs. 1928 and 1929 
The upper portion of each leg hu the inude 
comer cut awsy to form a leoeas, in which 
the box is fitted (lee Fig. 1933), and then 
screwed from the inner side, the dovetails 



in Fig.ll933, the aide of the box .tanda i in 
back from the face of the leg. Thia admits 
of the aidr being panelled as illustrated 
Blue on a chamfered moulding 1 in. wide 
by 1 in. thick, and on the top part of the 




ng. 1911. 
Hgs. IMl ud IMJ.— Pnmt ElevatloB 

of the box thus being hidden. At 7 in. 
trom the ground level, mortise a raU, 1 in. 
wide by I m. thick, to the legs, and on this 
place a she f i m. thick. Fig. 1934 shows a 
"cotion of the rail and shelf ; the latter has a 
projecting rounded edge, and ii out into each 
leg on the comer, as shown in Fig. 1935 
Glue the shelf to the rail, and strengthen 
tte »ngle-]omt with a number of ilued 
blocks, as Illustrated in Fig. 1934. M shown 



Tig. HJl l,-3i:* 

and TtPtloal Section of Newipaper Back. 

box the moulding projects upwards } in. to 
fonn a folding rebate in which the lids fall 
and fit (see Kg. 1932). At 3i in. from the 
bottom of the box (inside), two fillets arc 
gued to snpport a loose tray, shown in 
plan m Fig. 1936. This tiay is of stuff A in. 
thick. The bottom is first cut and olSied 
to size and the edging. 1 in deep, with 
mitered comers, is glued and pinned to it 
Divisions are f)rmed for cottons, buttons 



MISOELIANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FUBNITUBE. 



U3 




M 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 

etc., by «xiDg .tript i in. thick, scroM the appUed cold. The tmy en .Uo be lined both 
tmy. J-hey are Bxed to each other and the innde and out in a umiUr manner. If thin 




TIgt. 19M to KSO Side and End 

ElavatiOM and Ud Plan of Lady'i 
WorkBtand. 



Fig. 1930. 



tray side, by V-jranting.fsnd need only is done, the bcttct plan irill be to line ti,.- 

• J' i' 11 S^' interior of the box interior before the strips are fixed, and tn 

with pale blue silk, fixed with stiff paste cover each of the strips separately and then 



MI80ELU»BOU8 EXAMPLES OF FUBNITUKE. 




nd End 
Lady'i 



:o line tin- 
m1, and to 
■ and then 




Fig. itSS.— iMtloB thronih 

Top of Woritttand 

Uff. 




T\g. 1»U.— SHtlOB of 

Workrtud Bail and 

Rlwlf. 




WoTkBtand out to noilTo 



Tnj : 



546 



CABINETWOBK AND JOINEBT. 



fix than. The bandit coiuitU o{ > tnnud 
length, ouiM in two Utwy luppottt, cut 
Jrom itifl poluhri tluwt ooppet, ud tcmrtd 
to the udei. It ii cnnked to fit the chimfcr 
moulding, ud two tntned knobe, with 
•orewed end*, «n paited through tha mount- 
ing into the end of the tnrned handle to 



Ulnncr-gong SUnd. 

Figi. 1937 and 1938 illuatrate, in bont 
and Bide elevation, a dinner-gong stand 



moulding above top rail, 4 ft. bjr { in. In- 
I in. ; Ua the entablature, 1 ft. 6 in. I>y 
3iin.b^)in.; 1 ft. 9 in. by 4} in. by | in. 
1 ft. 2 m. by 2{ in. by { in. ; I ft. 8 in. Iiy 
3| is. br { in., and 2 ft. 6 in. by I in. t^ t in. ' 
drumaticlc, 1 ft. 2 in. by | in. ^ } in. The 
pillara (lee Fip. 1939 to 1941) are of Mnarr 
wctian,with panelled aides above the captala. 
as shown in Kg. 1939. The capital is 
carved in low relief, the cap moulding being 
worked separately, and glued and pinned on : 
Fig. 1942 is a section of this moulding. 




Fit. SMT. 
ngs. UST aad UM.— Froat and B 

made in polished walnut, oak, or mahogany, 
the choice of wood depending on the 
fumituie with which it is to be placed. 
The following quantities are required : — 
For pillar feet, 2 ft. by 4 in. by 1 in., and 
1 ft. 4| in. by 2 in. by | in. ; pillars 4 ft. 
by 2 in. by 2 in. ; capital moulding, 2 ft. 
by i in. by I in. ; pillar and scroll supports, 
1 ft. 6 in. by 2i in. by J in. ; bottom rail. 
1 ft. 2 in. by 1| in. by | in. ; bottom rail 
mouldings, 3 ft. 8 in. by ,*, in. by ,', in. ; 
tup rail, 1 ft. 2 in. by 5| is. by 1| is. ; top 
rail mouldings, 5 ft. 3 in, by ,«j in. by »V in. ; 



Flf. issa 
le Eleratloas of DJaoer-gong Stand. 

The shaft is fluted on each side as in Fig. 

1940, and the base of the pillar as in Fig. 

1941. The feet are made of 4-in. by 1-in. 
stufi, and finished as shown in Fig. 1943, 
with a moulding which is returned at the 
ends. The pillars arc mortised and wedged 
mto the feet, a detail of this being given 
by Figs. 1943 and 1944. The feet are further 
supported by two scrolls (see Fig. 1938), 
made of J-in. stufl, with panelled sides, and 
fixed with dowels and wrews. The bottom 
rail is of Ifin. by |-in. stufi, mortised and 
secret-wedged into each pilUr; the top and 




inSOBUAKSOUS EXAUPLES OF FURNITUBB. 



M7 



rii. UM iMiin of Dln»(ai( 

nUw ud OapUtl Moildlat. 



Flf. uw.— Bottom a<U ud ■ooUlBfi 
of IMaaor-gOBff Btaad. 




Tig, 1H6. — Boctlon of Dbmtr-fong 
Fuu], otc. 





rig. int. 

nt.iNi. 

n*!. INt to lMl.-OnM lootlou or DIuor- 
!•■( MItr. 





Fig. 1947.— SoctloB of lMimor.goDs Entoblatnro. 



•MH 



OABWBTWOBX iXD JOIin»T. 



bottom bcM oi tlw na M* bwidtd, uid th« 
•idn pcncUfd *bcnt A is- deop ; u indt- 
ptndent ovolo monldiiig ,« in. by ,V in. 
ranouidi thf puwl. fh* ciimlM endi at 
the mooMing an worktd ia the lolid, and 



uul itUM, ud th* nhctiBf plo«(k«d ont. 
A HotioB oi th* puwl iM monldbg U 
ami bjr Kg. 1946. A pioM of tts> 3) in. 
bj { in. with iqiund adcM ii fltttd am the 
top nil, and th* dnitil pi«« ghid 










:i(.itu. 


J 




1^ II 

'it 






1 






EDBKnEif 


rfc^^'i 


'k i 


-TTTr-r- 


fe=^-^^ 




-^^ 


_^- 


^■e=i,^ 





Fi|. IMt. 

Fill. IMI to 1N«.— 

t^mt ud BUt Otntleu 

ftad TIu of Clock Cuo. 



Fig. itso. 



jointod to the straight lengths. Fig. 1946 
is "a sectional view of the rail with these 
mouldings on both sides. The top rail is 
cut from 5|-in. b^ l^-in. stnfi, and finished 
with open panels as in Fig. 1937. The re- 
btiteg for the mouldings round tlie openings 
can.be cut out with a router and chisel, or 
the rail may be framed together with rails 



Underneath this pi> 3 a moulding } in. by 
I in. is fixed to hide the ioint, as shown iu 
Fig. 1947. The lower part'of the entablatore 
is got out from a piece oi stnfi 4{ in. by } in., 
grooved along the centre toreceivethetongue 
of the carved friew. psTOl. This panel is 
} in. thick and of conventional design, 
carved in low relief ; it is kept in position by 



mISCBLLANIOUB KXAMPLBS of rUBNITUIE. 



M» 



tilt flzini «f tha coniiu mouUiag. Pic, 
IMT giTM » datatl Metion of the'fgO dmth 
o( th* MtiiUttnn, Th* oooim monldiiif 
it voikad bom ^■in. hy {-is. itofl, ud U 
gmond OTot tk* faint p*n«l ; tk« ndi fit 
tqun into Uw knru put, to which thojr its 
•cMwad. The gong cu> ho piuchued bom 
a hmiishiiig ironmongn. Mid it nuMndad 
from t«o plattd cdinV • twiitod tilk cord. 
Th* hwtM (m t^. 19S7) ia tnnad from 
l-in. aquata atofl, the hall being bottod with 
cloth and ooTeied with waahleathet. 

Clock Cf. 

Figi. 1M8 to 19S0 repnnent front eleva- 
tion, aide elevation, ana horizontal eection 
reipeotively of a oloclc caae made in walnut, 
and finished dull, with ebony mountings, 
which are shown black. Thf carcase is 11| 
in. high, 10} in. wide, and 4) in. from front 
to hack. It is made of stuff } in. thick, 
and e back is framed together to receive 
a door a (Fig. 11151), giving access to the 
clock movements. This door is made of 
rails and stiles 1} in. wide by \ in. thick, 
mitered and keyed together, ..ud rebated 
for a panel J in. thick, as shown in Fig. 1952. 
The carcase is grooved and glued into the 
foundation mouldings (see Fig. 1951). 
The mouldings are 2} in. thick, and project 
2} in. beyond each side (see Fig. 1948) and 
the same distance at the front (see Fig. 1949). 
After setting out the mouldings, glue and 
dowel the piece on a backing of deal, the 
nuder side of which is rebat*^ 1 in. on by 
I in. deep to take the bottom filling of the 
carcase, as in Fig. 19M. The founi^tion is 
mitered and keyed at each omer, and 
measures over aU 1 ft. 3 in. long by % in, 
'ide across the back. A bar 2 in. wide by 
about \ in. thick is screwed to tie the ends. 
Four ebony feet turned with dowel ends raise 
the whole i in. The front door of the case is 
framed from stuff } in. thick (see Fig. 1951). 
Cut the top rail semicircnlat, and chamfer 
the inside face comers of the n,ils and stiles, 
working a }-in. rebate on the inside to take 
the bevel plate glass, which is fixed with 
small nosing fillets pinned to the framing. 
The door is ornamented with ebony mount- 
ings aiid a column (Fig. 055) half-round in 
section, at each side of the glass opening. 
Each column has rectangular bases A (Fig. 




rif. »M.- ran Itcika 

•f laak Dear aa4 

Oonsar af Oleek 




Df. ItU.- 

9t dcdt Oass, 




Tit- IWl. -Cross leotleD oi Clock Osae. 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




Tig. liH. 




Ilj* KM >» l.M.-F™«t ud ttdci Ele /.Uoni ud TmUo.1 s.cMoa of 



Onndfatlur Oloek OiM. 




MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FURNITTJHE, 



Ml 



^■^'^*^--'^'-'-^^-'-"' 



FI(. IWT— Rorinmtal SaoUoii of Orud' 
fkthw Oook Oua at A (Fig, IMS). 





througli Clock Cuo Bm. Fnmu of Top CtM. MowtooBt 




Fig. 1163. —Vortical Boction 

through Centra of Top of 

Clock CaM. 



Fig. »6I. 

FlgJ. 19M and WSB.-Horisonbil Scctiom tiuoiigli Clock 

Caio at D and E (Fig. mi). 



OABINETWOHK AND JOINEHY. 




IJl'J) and capitals b, and the two columns 
can be turned as one piece, which is then 
carefully .awn down the centre. The portions 
shown in Fig. 1948 as ebony are st^ed in 
■nutation. Below this door a rail, 1} in 
deep, « housed into the carcase, and the 
tase of the column is buUt over the joint 
Between the base and mouMings fit an 
ebony veneer cut as shown in Fig 1948 
the panel below being pricked with a bradawi 
or cairera punch. The door hangs flush 
over the carcase sides, and folds under the 
cormce and over the rail. Use IJ-in. brass 
bott hinges, and close the door with a spring 
knrt. The cornice mouldings, illustrated 
m Fig. 1951, are J in. thick, and overhang 
H m. Immediately below the cornice fil 
a smaU moulding to hide the joint, and in- 
crease the cornice to If in. in thickness, 
ihe moulded dome finish is built on the 
cormce mouldings, and each of the various 
members composing it is separately worked 
and glued to the preceding member, the 
amount of set-back being scaled from Fig 
1951. The lowest member is 1^', in high 
worked on stuff If in. thick ; the neit mem- 
ber is i m. thick, and has a small bead run 
along the face, and on this is fixed a panelled 
piece, 1 m. high, on which, at the front, is 
an ebony veneer (see Fig. 1948) showing a 
pncked panel, but at the sides it is left plain 
This IS covered by a moulded piece ,> in 
thick, with an overhang of ^\- in., and on 
this a cavetto moulding is placed, capped by 
a small overhanging piece. The top cap is . 
A in. thick, and carries the turned finials 
The back of the dome portion is filled with 
a deal board cut to fit between the various 
mouldings, and fiied with brads to small 
comer blocks glued inside the carcase. The 
fneze panel is | in. thick, and receives a 
mouldmg. On each side of the frieze is 
pbced a block IJ in. high by IJ in. square, 
which has a boss or patera carved in 
wabut or ebony at the front. Finials of a 
similar design to the dome finial are dowelled 
to the blocks, and in each case a tight fit 
IS all that should hold them, so that they can 
be readily removed for packing purposes. 
The clock movements are carried on a rail 
i in. thick, fixed on blocks glued and screwed 
to the carcase. For the dial face house two 
uprights into the carcase top und bollom. 



and glue them to the sides. These pieo 
are not shown, as their position mustH 
governed by the style of &ce and movemei 
fitted. Fin»lly, the deal parts are staine 
walnut. 



Qrandfather Clock Case. 

The grandfather ok case shown in fron 
and end elevation • Figs, 1954 and 19B 
IS of good proporuuus, and is fairly simpl 
in construction. Fig. 1956 is a vertica 
section. It is 6 ft. 9 in. high, 1 ft. 8J in 
wide, and 10 in. from back to front, am 
would look well in polished mahogany o 
fu .al oak. The top case is constructet 
apart from the body, and is made to slidi 
on easily from the front, thus enabhng it U 
be removed without much trouble when th( 
clock is out of repair. The first part to bi 
built up IS the middle case, or body, as mosi 
of the other framing is fitted to this. Thf 
pieces required for this portion are : Two foi 
the sides, 3 ft. 6 in. by 7 in. by J in. ; two 
for the stiles, 3 ft. 6 in. by li in. by J in • 
one for the ( .p rail, 1 ft. OJ in. by 7i ii! 
by J m. ; and one for the bottom rail 
1 ft. Oi in. by 5 in. by J in. These are mortised 
and tenoned together, and fitted into the 
rebate on the front edge of the sides, on the 
front edge of which a bead is glued to break 
the jomt; this is shown in the enlarged 
section {Fig. 1957) taken at a (Fig. 1955) 
together with the rebated edge which re- 
ceives the back. Dry pine an^e blocks are 
fixed inside to secure the joints. 

Bottom Case or Base — ^The pieces necessary 
for the bottom case, or base, are : One for 
the front, 1 ft. 9 in. by 1 ft. 6i in. by * in 
and two for the ends, 1 ft. 9 in. by 9J in. by 
J m., halved, mitered, and blocked together, 
as shown in section by Fig. 1958. The 
bottom moulding for the base— two pieces 
10 in. by 3i in. by J in., and one piece 1 ft 
8J in. by 31 m. by J in.— is next cut to shape, 
mitered round, and fixed with screws driven 
from mside. The top moulding of the base 
IS prepared from 1-in. stuff, two pieces being 
9i m. long and one piece 1 ft. 6J in. long by 
4 in. wide, and is mitered and fitted into the 
grooved top edge. The section given at 
Fig. 1959 shows how it is blocked and 
screwed to the bodv. Fig. 1966 ia a 
section of the clock case taken at B (Fig. 



These pieces 
lition must] be 
and movement 
rte ate stained 



MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FUHNITCRE. 



So.1 



1951), and an end view o£ the interior 
of the top with the door, pediment, etc., 
removed ; a piece of |-in. stuff, 1 ft. 1 in. 
by .■}} in., is screwed on the top of the ends 
of the main framing to support the movement. 
A front elevation of the board is given hy 
Fig. 1960, which also shows the moulding 
that supports the top case, mitered round, 
blocked, and screwed from inside. 

Top Case. — The top case is made up of 
saveral frames constructed in various ways. 
Fig. 1961 is a back vijw of the case, and 
Fig. 1963 a plan of the bottom frame. 
For the bottom frame, vhich should be put 
together first, one pier t ft. 4J in. by IJ in., 
and two pieces 8J in. by l| in. by 1 in. 
ate required ; these are mortised, tenoned, 
and wedged together, and moulded on the 
outside edge with an ogee IJ in. by J in. 
The frame fits over the square of the moulding 
(Fig. 1960). Then the two ends of the 
case are stop-chamfered to the height of 
the columns, rebated to receive the Jin. 
back, and grooved inside for f-in. whitewood 
top and outside for the small moulding 
that rests on the top of the columns. The 
ends are screwed on to the bottom frame 
from underneath. Fig. 1963 is an enlarged 
vertical section through the centre of Fig. 
1961, giving in detail the base and capital 
of the column. Fig. 1964 is an enlarged 
horizontal section taken at d (Fig. 1961), 
showing a section of the i-in. thick frame 
(which presses close to the face of the clock), 
the door irame, columns, and half-colimmsi 
and the 1-ft. 2i-in. by ij-in. by j-in. pieces 
for the back of the half-columns. The 
columns are turned from 1-in. stuff, and the 
capitals and bases from Ij-in. stuff, and are 
dowelled into the frames at the top and 
bottom. The door frame is 1 ft. 2J in. 
square, the stiles and rails being 2 in. by J in., 
moulded as shown in Fig. 1964, rebated to 
receive glass and beads, and mortised and 
tenoned in the usual way. The door is hung 
with IJ-in. brass butts about i in. forward 
of the frou' edge of the ends (sec Pig. 1904). 
A 1-in. by j-in. shp is bradded round inside 
as a stop for the door, and the 2-in. by ^-in. 
frame is mitered and bradded on to the slip 
from inside, making the case dust-proof. 
Fig. 196.5 is ,1 srrfion taken at e [Fig. 1961), 
and shows the pediment mitered and halved 

H 



to the end pieces, blocked and screwed from 
inside. The scrolls are also txed with screws 
from the back, the ball in the centre being 
secured with a dowel. The J-in. whitewood 
back is next fitted and bradded into the 
rebate. The door (shown in section at 
Fig. 19.57) is moulded outside, rebated inside, 
fitted with a small cupboard lock and an 
escutcheon, and hung with 2-in. butts. 

Child's Movable Table. 

A taole such as is shown in Fig. 1966 is 
suitable for a child learning to valk, and 
afterwards as a means to prevent the child 
getting to the fire or into other mischief. 
It will be found a source of pleasure when 
the child is able to move about by itself. 
It may be made of any fight wood such 
as sound yellow pine for choice. The four 
legs A (Figs. 1967 to 1969) are IJ in. by 
IJ in. by 1 ft. 8 in. long, and the eight rails 
B are 2 in. by J in., two being 2 ft. 4 in. long, 
four 1 ft. 8 in. long, and two 1 ft. 2 in. long. 
These legs and rails are mortised and tenoned. 
The top is of }-in. stufi llj in. wide, and 
is in two pieces c and o' (Fig. 1969), each 1 ft. 
6 in. long. One (c') has a semicircular 
front, and is secured to the upper side rails 
with four 2-in. screws let in ^ in. to take 
plugs over the heads. A pieci lA American 
whitewood d (Fig. 1968), IJ in. by % in. by 
3 ft. 3 in. long, and with the upper edge 
rounded, is, after being steamed or boiled, 
bent round the front and secured with nine 
J-in. screws. If the wood shows signs oi 
splintering, a backing of the same material. 
IJ in. wide by J in. thick, is bent round 
with it, holes being bored through it krge 
enough to let the heads of the screws pass 
through and secure the inside piece. Two 
fillets of hard wood e (Fig. 1970), j in. by 
i in., are secured to the side upper rail, and 
the movable part of the top is fitted on the 
under side with two runners p, 1 ft. IJ in. 
long, so as to pass under the front piece 2 in. 
and hold it in p'ace. Or two small cabin 
hooks and eyes may be attached to the under 
parts and will hold the two parts together. 
The hole in the top is 6J in. by 6} in., half 
being cut out of each piece, and the comers 
and edges being weU rounded. Four small 
L-astoTS arc attached to the lower parts oi 
the legs. After the wood is cleaned off 



&r<4, 



CABINETWOEK AND JOINKBV. 



two coats of aiie and one coat of oak Tarnish 
will make a pwd finish. For a young child 
procure a piece of duck or some strong 
material, 1 ft. 6 in. long and 7 in. wide, with 
an oval hole 4 in. by 3 in. out out 3 in. from 
one end, as indioited in Figs, 1967 and 1968. 
This end is fastened to the front side of the 
hole by a small fillet at (Fig. 1969), and 
three eyelets are worked in the other end so 



as to pass over three small hooks in the 
movable piece at H (Fig. 1969) and form a 

secure seat. 

CaM Tables and Cliairs. 

Table. — Oak is the favourite material for 
this class of furniture. The table (Fig. 1971) 
is 2 ft. 4 in. high, the top being 1 ft; 8 in. 
square ; the dimensions may be varied, if 





Fl(. »M.— ChUd'l Herabls Table. 

(• — r. 0- 




Fig. IMT. 



Fl^ 196T to 1969.— End sad 

Side Elavatloiu and Plan of 

Child's Movabli Table. 



%;^oL^ 




T\g. 1970.— ?ut Stotloa of Table Top. 



tig. I9<9. 




MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FUBNITURE. 



desired-My 3 ft. by 2 ft.-„ithout it beine 
MceMary to moreose the strength of material 
Ihe legs are cut 2 ft. 4 in. long by U in 
square; this allows J in. at each end for 

TiS*- ?'■'"" """^ '"P ^ds should be 
shaped in the lathe. The square portion at 
the top ends of the legs is 6 in. fong; the 
rest of the leg is turned plain round 7s thick 
as the wood will aUow, tapering slightly to 
the foot, which IS turned to the full thickness. 
Ihe two spindles supporting the shelf arc 
i ft. long by 1 m. square; 11 in. of the 
centre must be left square, the ends being 
plain turned and having a pin J in. in lengtS 
by » full J in thick. The four span-rlils 
are planed and squared to 1 ft. 2 in long 
" -.»■ "'de 1'/ 1 in. thick ; the lower edw 
aj..aid be si iped as shown at Fig 1972 
ffl7% "" .^'"'?H»n't«d to the legs (see Pig.' 

thick, the edges being shaped to a flat round • 
it IS made to rest on the spindles, which are 
let mto holes m the legs 8 in. from the floor 
as shown at Fig. 1974, the square parte being 
cut to meet m the centre, and screwed to 
m° ,oL'>° 'SJ™ '" "" "ndemeath view 
(Fig 1975). The top is Ift. 8 in. squarl 
by I m thick. A l-ft. square is markli in 
the centre (see Fig. 1971), for covering with 
sixteen 3-in. square tUes (generally of plain 
peen tint) cemented on with plaster-of- 
Paris mixed with thin glue to a consistency 
of thick cream ; the tUes are surrounded 
with wood of the same thickness as the tiles 
mitored at the comers, the edges being 
rounded (see section, Fig. 1976). To make 
the stand more rigid, it may be comer- 
blocked; then each rail is bored for two 

than thumb-notching is to sink the surface 
with a 1-m. centre-bit, and then bore the 
screw holes, as m Fig. 1977. The top and 
stand havmg been screwed together, the 
table IS complete. 

Chair._The cafS chair (Fig. 1978) is of 
a pattern to mateh the table, and combines 
lightness with strength. First get out a 
template for marking the back uprights on 

^n^ ;?' ^i'^v "'■'' ^ "• '»»«• The sUght 
curve should begm just below the seat. 
When marking out on the board, kee^ the 
gram as straight as possible; but much 
labour wil! be saved by sending it to a saw- 



5S5 

mill to be out. For the front legs, pieces 

and for the front spindle 1 ft. U in. long bv 
1 in. square. All th-< plain spindles aA of 
i-ln square stufl ; the top side spindles 
are 1 ft. OJ in. long, the bottom 1 ft. U in 

vv.1}^ ^^ ' "• ""■" ™''» must taper 
sligbtly. The length of the spindles as 
given IS the finished size ; but J in. is aUowed 
over on the legs, the finished size of which 
IS 1 ft. 5 in., with } in. of pin at the top ends. 
1 he uprights must be cleaned up, and the top 

1979). The top rails are cut 1 ft. 2i in. by 
.1} m. by i in., with an oval-shaped hand 
Hole, and the top edge rounded ; they are 
mortised and tenoned to the uprights, this 
taking up 1 in. of each end, and the back 
spindles are let in 8 in. from the floor ; ut 
1 ft. 6 in. there must be a space of 11 in 
between the uprighto. The exact lenph of 
the lower back rail can now be ascertained • 
this IS of 2-in. by fin. stuff, shaped to mateh 
the table rails; it is fixed 3 in. above the 
seat. Between the rails are two plain bars 
of 1-m. by J-in. section, and another 2 in 
wide (shown enlarged at Fig. 1980), these 
bemg mortised and tenoned. The back 
frame is then glued up. The seat frame is 
I ft. 3 in. at the front, 1 ft. at the back, and 
1 It. 1 m. from buck to front, and is of 2}-in 
by 1-m. stuff, rebated on the inside edge on 
the top side j in. by i in. ; it is put together 
as shown at Fig. 1981, and is rounded on the 
front and sides. The back comers must be 
let into the uprighte and seemed with strong 
screws dnven from behind, the heads being 
sunk below the surface and the holes after- 
wards plugged with wood. Now the less 
should be connected by the front spindle 
and et into the comers; then the side 
spindles should be inserted, connecting tl j 
back and front. The whole should be glued 
up in one operation. Both the chairs and 
the tables are now read, for staining and 
pohshmg. For the stufied seata, a strong 
black canvas bottom cover should first be 
tacked m the rebate, stretohcd tight, and 
webbed, three each way, with No. 12 Enghsh 
"/i" /i" """^ "* "^nvas, and a 
stuffing of hair put on, then caUco. Cover 
finally with green leather, leather-ckth, or 
velvet, edged with copper studs 



CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 





Tig. ml— aaU Ptttini of <Mi Tabli 
B>U. 




Tl(. 19T3.-Leg of CaU TaUa domUnl 
to Ball. 



Tit. UTL— CaM Tabla. 




ngt. UTt— Fart ITadaraaath Flan of Shall 
and Splndlei. 



I 



I -.;■,-- J=P i 



Tig. 1«7S.— 8«tlon of Top of Caf« Talilo. 



Ift 



i 



Ttf. 1>T«.— Joint of Splndia to Ug 
of Cafa Tabla. 




Fi;. 1977.-Hatbad of Sciawing Cafe 
Tabla Top to Batta. 



i 



MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF FURNITtKE. 



S57 



Triple Set of Telescopic Tea Tables. 

Fig. 1982 gives a front view of a tea-table 
set which compiises three separate tables 
sliding one within the other, Fig. 1983 
being a plan of the top. Fig. 1984 is a side 
view of the same set of tables, with a dif- 
ferent top, of which Fig. 19815 is the plan. 
The rails between the legs across the front 




splay legs. Tables with splayed legs are 
not so hkely to be accidentally overturned 
as the others, but are liable to catch the 
foot someti-nes. The legs are mortised to 
receive the barefaced tenons of the sides, 
with the shoulders of the tenons inside 
and the inner faces of the side pieces flush 
to receive the runners, which are screwed 
to the inner faces of the side pieces, but cut 
back to enable the hinged front piece of 
the large table to fold down. Fig. 1994 
is a side view showing the flap raised and the 
smaller tables parti;' drawn out, and Fig. 




■ TH y 

Fig. U8I. -Part nan of OaM 

Chair Siat Frame. 



Til. H»9.-Flan of Caf< 
Chair Uplift 



Fil. 197a.— C>« Chair. 

of the two larger tables are lower than the 
side rails, to enable the inside tables to slide 
in and out. Figs. 1986 to 1989 show eleva- 
tions and plans of the smaller tables, repro- 
duced to the same scale as the large one. 
Figs. 1990 and 1991 show alternative designs 
for the sides and rails. The sliding principle 
can be applied to almost any square or 
rectangular table, as illustrated in eleva- 
fon and plan at Figs. 1992 and 199.t, where 
on the right-hand aide a square table with 
double splayed legs is shown, and on the 
left-hand side a square table with curved 



1993 a front view. Fig. 1996 is a sectional 
view, showing the position of the hinged 
flaps and the runner of the large table, 
Fig. 1997 being a front view. The flap, 
when down, should fit tight between the 
legs ; in the case of the splay-leg table 
it will require easing, owing to the double 
angle formed between the legs. The top 
of the large table may be shaped as desired, 
but the overhang of the tops of the smaller 
tables is necessarily limited. The rails 
and sides are mock-tenoned, as shown in 
Fig. 1998. The square table tops should 
have a iiat ovolo or lamb's-tongue mould 
run round the edges, but for the shaped ones 
reeded edges and a flat chamfer on the 



ssg 



OABINETWOHK AND JOINEBY. 



top would be more .uitable. Any of the 
Mual hardwood., poli.hed, nwy be lued 
Jor the construction oj the tablee. Birch 
with plenty ol nice flower in the table tope 
would look extremely weU, though unfolr- 
tunateIyh«bleto«howup«toin». Pig.. 1982 



to 1993 are reproduced to « acale oJ 1 in. to 
1 ft., and Fig.. 1994 to 1998, 2 in. to 1 ft. 

ReadinK-room Table. 

For a reading-room or a waiting-room, 
a table of ordmaiy oonitruction or deaign 




Fig. int.— Aluniatln Top 
for T>bl>. 



Fif. im. 




Fig. ltM.-Elile vim a 

TUnwpie Tu Tabla with 

DtArMit Top (ho Fig. 

lau). 



Ilg. ins. 

FIgi. ims and l<u.-Fn»it 

Elentlon ud Plan of Toluoopio 

Toa Table.. 






Fig. l«u. 



Fig. ino — Altonutin DuIeb 

tor Tea Table Side and 

BaUe. 




^'e- »»»■ ng. 1087. 

Fig.. KM to IMO.-Eleyatlon. ud Plane of BmaUer Toa 
Tabloi. 



anSCELLANEOUB EXAMPLES OF FUHNITUBE. 



» unsuitable, as strength and durability, as 
well as a good appearance, are necessary. 
The table shown by ^ig>> 1009 to 2001 is 
6 ft. long by 3 ft. wide, and 2 ft. 6 in. high ; 
bnt if required, it may be enlarged to 9 ft. by 



one piece of timber. These joints will 
require four dowels, placed 3 in. from the 
ends and dividing the space between, 
gauging from the top side. If the top is 
composed of three boards, two should be 




Tits. i»«6. Fig. w«7. 

Figi. 199S and lSb7.— Side and Front Eleratlons 
ibowliiK Hinged Flap, etc, of Tea 



Table. 

4 ft. without any alteration in the construc- 
tion, except perhaps an extra foot-rail. 
Oak is the best wood to use. For the top, 
three 1-in. boards 1 ft. wide, or four 9 in. 
wide, should be jointed lengthwise, and 
so put together that the grain of the wood 
may match as near as possible to represent 



Fig. IBSS. 

Flgi. 1992 and 1^93.— Half Elevationi 

and Half Plana of Splay-leg 

Teleaeoplo Tables. 



jointed first, and the other added when the 
joint is set ; but if of four boards, they 
may be joint«d in twos,' and the middle joint 
made afterwards. For the stand, of which 
Figs. 1039 and 2000 give the general Jesigu, 
four legs are required, of solid oak, 2 ft. 6 in. 
long by 3 in. square. About 3 in. of the 



MO 



ower end, m«.t W allowed for joining, 

.t the end., 2 ft. 4 in. long by i i„. by ;j i™ 
tho outer comer, of the« .re rounded 
olf, the top comer, chamfered, .nd the under 
..de. cut out flj in. from the end, ai^T^ 
dwp, the under comer, alw being rounded 

and tenoned to the ba,e piece. 2 in. Imm 
the end., but should not be fixed till the 
two end rail, are „cured to the top end. 
of the leg.. Thweare 2ft. Sin. bv 4 in. 

to a fUt ogee working 4 in. on the lenph 
•nd IJ in. on the width, to .how i in of 
.quare at the lower edge and 2J in at the 

.how. how the leg i, cut away to leave a 
•houlder for the end and «de rail., leaving 

1, "' 'H'"^ ^'^' ""'y- ^^" «W. i. 

done the baw joint, can be glued, and 
wedge, dnven into the ww-kcrf. of the 
tenon, from underneath. The two lonn 
rail, are 5 ft. 8 in. in length, and are made 
ejtactly the Mme a. the end rail., but cut 

S?? f ' "" °'^°"' ™"«"- When they are 
htted to connect the leg., the.tand will need 
joining at the bare, and this is done by a 
rail which 1. also intended a. a re.t for 
the feet. It i. 3 in. .quare in section, and 
the comers are chamfered and rounded off 
nice the base pieces, the end. being cut to a 
shoulder on the under side by taking out 31 in 
K J. I* 18 screwed from underneath. 

Ihe next thing is to make a piece 2 ft. 8 in 
by i in by IJ in. as a support across the 
centre of the top, to be let into the rails, 
and then the stand is ready for the top. The 
rails must be thumb-notched on the inside 
about tour on the long rails and three on 
the short ones, and the top should be laid 
face downwards on the bench or a pair of 
trestles ; the stand is lifted on upside 
down, and placed evenly to allow 2 in 
from the ends of the rails to the edges oi 
the top ; then the eight ends are bored with 
a }-in. bit about J in. deep, the holes being 
continued of a size to take screws 3 in 
long, with which thr-- top is scc-,ircd, other 
screws being inserted where the rails are 



CADIJfETWOBK AND JOINERY, 



Kg. JllOl) The moulding under tha top i. 
- in. by U in. in action, and i. flxed oIuh, 
againit th. end. of the rail., wcured with 
Krew. through the notche.. The Ubie i< 
now complete The p>,li,hing procew .hould 
™™iT "UH"" ,5""« "y «'»'"•«"« or 

!t ij •?!*• ».'■?««" »' the end nil. only 
Jhould be withdrarn ; the top can thej 
be hfted off with the long raif. attached 

remoted * "'' ""' ""■ '™' "" 



Invalid'* Foldins Chair. 

2003 to 2000 I. .trong, and i. eaaly aSd 
cheanly constructed, the folding joint, being 
.imply .wivelled on the .mall bolt, which 
hoU the frame together. The main thing 
to enaure the chair folding properlv i. to 
.pace and bore the bolt holeS in each pair 
of the framing exactly aUke. The ffont 
pair of wheel, are I ft. in diameter, fitted 
with i-in. wired-on tyre.. Th- back pair 
of wheels are 1 ft. 3 in. in di., leter, iL 
with wired-on tyre.. The axles are 1 ft 
7 in. between the shoulden of the hub 
bearing.. Probably for .trangth and dnra- 
biUty the be.t wood for making the chair 
« wund, .traight-grained, home-grown a.h. 
The KM of chair can be altered to meet 
special reqmrements, but the aiie. here 
pven are ample for the average adult. A 

2003. The arms a are bolted to the back 
leg. B and the front leg. o. The seat rails 

K ifr. •! '"' "'■" = "' respectively 
bolted to the jont and back legs as shown 
m Figs. 2003 and 2004. The bJluster raTl, 
are screwed on the back legs with round- 
headed 2i-in. screw nails. This makes a 
much stronger and stifler job than tenoning 
the baluster rails into the back leg Fig 
j-OOi) IS a Bide elevation of the chair folded 
together. 

Turned Work.-If necessary the chair 
can be ornamented by turning. The pieces 
of wood required for the turned work in- 
cbidmg the ends for cuttine off, are ■ Two 
pieces 2 ft. ^ in. long for the front lees 
(Fig. 2006), and two the same len^h for 



MIBCELLANCOUS KXAUPLES OF FUBKITURE. 



m 



th« foot nila (Fig. 2007) ; two piecoi 1 ft. 
7 in. for the amii (Pig. 2008) ; two pieces 
1 (t. tli in. long for the seat raili (Fig. 2b09) ; 
and two pieces 1 ft, 4 in. (or the leat rail 
itretchera (Fig. 2010). These pieces an 
all dressed up to 1| in. square before turn* 
ing. For the baluster rails (Fig. 2011). 
two pieces of stuff 1 ft. 8} in. by 1 in. are 
required, and five pieces 11 in, long by 1 in. 
for the balusters (Fig. 2012). ""Se baluster 



Bolt Hol«i, etc.— The bolt boles in the 
arms, seat rails, and foot nili are marked 
in the centres of the squares, and exactly 
1 ft. 4 in. between the bolt-hole centres. 
The bolt holes in the front legs and back 
le^ are marked 1 ft. 2 in. from the foot 
nil to the seat rail hole, and the arms 
are 10 in, from the seat. The holes are 
bored a tight fit for J-in. bolts. The holes 
r in the seat rail (Fig. -Jim) for the stretcher 




Tiff. tool. 

Ftgs. »9> to SOOL— Part Bids Elsvatloa and Fart 

Btetlon, End Elsratioa, and Part Undemtath 

Top View of BsadlBf-nMiB Tablt. 

rails, as well as the arms, legs, etc., are planed 
before they are turned, to make the facets 
on the ends square and in line, so as to 
form good pivot joints. The balusters being 
finished in the lathe do not require planing. 
After they arc planed, as a guide for the 
turner the squares are pencil lined, and the 
bolt holes are also marked and bored before 
beginning the lathe work, "^le squares at 
Ihe ends (and front leg se. -joint) are Ipft- 
1^ in. long, plus the allowance for cutting 
ofi in turning. 



Fig. SOOS.-FixlBg End BaU of TaUs 
to Ltg. 

tenons are 1 ft. 1^ in. between centres, and 
they are bored I in. deep with a |-in. centre- 
bit. The baluster rails are planed 1 in. 
square, the screw nail holes g {see dotted 
lines in Fig. 2011) are 1 ft. 4| in. between 
centres, aad bored at right angles to fhe 
holes for the balusters. These are equally 
spaced as shown, and bored with a iV**°- 
bit, and § in. deep. The five balusters are 
tiiraed 10 in. long witli tight -fitting tenons 
and finished as shown in Fig. 2012. The 
scat rails and stretchers are, of course, left 




CABINETWOHK AND JOINEBY. 




"«■ «M>»-root B>U of laraUd'i Chilr. 

Hfr. a(K)8.-Ann of IiiTalld'i (aur. 



IHIilf^iimiun,uliiHl.)^i| MfHiMm iJiB 
rig. aoia-Stntchtt for g„t lUUi of In«Ud'. chair. 



Plf. «00».-8eat Eau of InraUd'i Ohair. 



n». mi.-B»luit.r BaU of loTalid'a Obalr. 



VI80EI.I.ANEOU8 EXAMPLES OF TOBNITUKE. 



Sim 



untunud Mid iqiun, txctpting tha ind*, 
whii h >n rDnndiHt off in tlw Uth*. tta 
•trrtcherr (Pig. 2010) an 1 ft. 1) in. Inns 
betwMn tlw ahouliUin of the t«noiu, inj 



Imrd ■ (Fig. 2003). In finiihing tlw 
laming, all tho oonwn of tha inulT data 
or aauana ahould hara tha akarpneaa tainn 
off tnam. 



(If. NU.-laIaatar at tmiStt Okalr. 




Tit- WM.-la<k Up at 

lavalld'i Chair made tnm 
■alkait Malta. 





Hi. iOiT.— laok Wkaal lalt 
af bTalM'a Okalr. 



Kg- m(.-laat laU Mtad 
taladi lac. 




rif. Mia.— Baallac 

laakliHaaftaTaUd'a 

Ohalr. 




1%. sou.— Front 

WhMl Baltwl ta 

Foot Ball 



1 lata— AlttraaUTo Motbod of F<xii( BaaklWhtal of; 
InvaUd'i Chair. 



tho pins are turned a tight fit for the holes 

r (Pig. snnn), Tn taming the foot laii 



^ Back Lega.— The bacic legs (Fig. 2013) are 

- . J- fiianctj to IJ in. square, and ituttliied ulid 

(Fig. 2007) the top part ia left unturned bent all in one piece to the shape shown at 
and square to form the bed fop the loot- j (Fig. 2014) on moulds w:th a special 




CABINETWORK AND JOINERY. 




appliance. After bending, slabs of wood l 
are nailed across as shown at Fig. -MU to 
keep them in shape until thoroughlv dry. 
Ihe dotted line l shows where they are 
sawn across, and nothing but the cleanest 
straight-grained stuJ! is suitable for bend- 
ing, and even then there is often much 
loss by breakages in bending. If desired, 
these back legs can be procured from bent- 
timlwr merchants. The back legs being 
thicker than the usual stock sine for small 
trolly cans there may be some difficulty 
in ob'iming them. Therefore, a pair of 
ordinr.iy mailcart shafts may be utilised 
by cutting oS the top bends as shown bv 
the line M (Fig. 2015). These mailcart shafts 
are of Ifm. stuff, dressed and bent in 
breadths for two shafts. The back legs 
are cut to a reasonable length for wheeUng 
(J ft.), and the handle ends for about ti in 
should be nicely rounded with the spoke- 
shave and smoothed with glasspaper 

Putting Chair Together.— To fit the chair 
together, give the stretcher tenons a touch 
of glue and knock them into the seat rails 
and, having the edges of the rail and the 
stretcher square, drive a 1-in. wire nail 
through both to make fast. Fig. 2016 is 
an enlarged view of the scat rail bolted to 
the back leg. All the bolts are inserted 
from the inside of the joints, and a small 
iron washer is placed between each pivoted 
joint, BO that the joints may be tightly 
bolted together without undue friction 
of the woodwork in folding up. The seat 
rails and the foot rails are then bolted on 
inside the back and front legs ; the arms 
are bolted on the outside. The baluster 
rails and footboard can now be fixed. The 
balusters are knocked into the rails, measur- 
ing the distance at both ends to ensure 
the rails being parallel. The rails are 
screwed on the back legs 4 in. above the 
seat. To mark the holes for the screw- 
nails, insert the nails with the points pro- 
jecting through the rails, and place in posi- 
tion on the back legs. Give each nail a 



tap to centre-pop the hole, then bore and 
screw on the rails. The footboard is dressed 
»i m. wide by | in. thick and 1 ft. 3} in. 
long, the front being rounded off on the 
top edge. It is nailed on the foot rails witli 
half a dozen brass-headed stud nails, li, 
fixing on the footboard, care should be taken 
to have it square with the outer edges of the 
rails, otherwise there may be trouble in 
folding the chair. A three-ply perforated 
seat cut to size and fixed on with small brass- 
headed stud nails finishes the woodwork, 
but before fixing the seat it is best to do 
the varnishing. The chair looks very well 
stained dark walnut colour, finished with 
two or three coats of copal varnish. 

Wheels and Axles.— The wheels and 
axles can be obtained ready-made, but 
require painting and varnishing before fixing 
to the chair. The back wheels are bolted 
on the back legs as shown in Fig. 2017 ; 
the front wheels are bolted on underneath 
the foot rails, 3 in. from the front of the 
footboard, as in Fig. 2018. An alternative 
method of swivelling the rear wheel is 
shown in Figs. 2019 and 2020, Fig. 2019 
being the plan of the socket, and Fig. 202U 
an elevation of the wheel and socket. Should 
this method be adopted, a cross bar can be 
attached to the back legs and the socket 
fixed on it with J-in. bolts. 

Iron Stay.- To keep the chair rigid, 
a hinged iron stay (Fig. 2021) is fastened 
to the front and back leys with snap-headed 
screws, as shown in Fig. 2C03. One end 
of the stay forms a stop which fits into a 
notch in the other half of the hinge, and 
prevents it sagging downwards when straight- 
ened. The stay is made from ^-in. by 
J-m. iron, and the lengths of the two pieces 
are respectively 9 in. and 1 ft. 1 in. between 
the centre of the joint and the end holes. 
The shorter stay is fixed on the front leg 
(notched side upwards) 7i in. above the foot- 
rail joint, the long end being screwed on 
about 1 ft. 7i in. above the foot-rail joint 
of the back leg. 




Alms Boi, 493, 495 

Arch with Stained Glau, 397 

ArchM for Bay Windows, 396 

. Carved, 396, 397 

- — for Corrldorg, 396-398 
Armchair, Dlnlnj-room, 21 



B 

Bay Window Archea, 396, 397 
Bedpooiri Fumiiun. and Fitmpiita, 
1d5-Z1o 

19M95*"'"'' ^"'' Heaervoir, 

Bee*"" Cupboard, 321, 325. 

326 ' 

Bedjtead and Cablnet-bookcaw 
Oomblned, 204-209 

20^204 ^•'■•*''°'«' Combined, 

. Modern Dpsign of. 181, 182 

— - in Stained Wood. 169. 171 
Boards, Notice. 485-492 
Botiiiet and Hat Box, 426, 427 
Bookcase, Cabinet, KWe 

~t?ne7»!1S|'9 ""» "''^''' 

. Bectional, 82. 83 

, Simple, 80, 81 

~— Tables, 276-279 

fii'okcasea. 80-92 

Book.reit, Choir. 613, 515 

Box (fee also Workbox) i 

. Alma, 493, 495 I 

, Bonnet and Hat, 426. 427 i 

In^^SJy- ^*'h Secret Drawer, 

423-426 

, Jewel, 412.417 

. Knife, 312-315 

Ottoman, 113, 114 

-— , Spttee. 114-117 

Bracket with Copper Panels, 350 

, Oak, 338. 339 

. Ornamental, with Pillara 

and Carved Supports. 343. 344 
fe'',P''*'lT'y,'*'"' 348-360 

!.,F*"' ^"Ith Copper Pant'la. 



Cabinet. China, 94 

. Coal. 118, 123 

. Corner. 97-102 

■,(.?'■* '^'"'■"■oo™ Centri', 102- 

— — , Corner. 100.102 

, Uuaeum. 93, 94 

-^. Music. 124-131 

' "■_ ■ with Sninffinir 

Drawers, 131-134 * 

W ~Z; ^",^ Writing Table 

Combined, 134, 135 

, Shaving, 467-472 

- , Sheraton Corner. 97-100 
- TrouatTB Preaa, 479-481. 484 
^ .1 '^"^ JV";"*"* Table, 272-276 
Cabinets^ 93.106 
i 47^"" Mirrors, Shaving, 467- 

Caf* Tables and Chairs, 555, 556 
Carved Arches for Windows and 

OorHdors, 396-398 
~ ' t^'r, «?'■•*«"". 389, 391-396 

Hall Chair, 30 

— Overdoora, 473, 476, 477 
-— Panela for Sideboard, 48 
Case. Curio, 428-433 

•Jewel, with Secret Drawers, 
416, 417 
Casket, Jewel, 412-416 

52? mI"*'" ''"' ^^^^ Saloon, 
Chair, Caftf, 555. 556 

. Dining-room, 21-23 

-—■ , Baay. 23, 24 



China Cupboard. 327. 128 
I Cliiiir Book-rest. 513, 615 

--- Stalls, 498. 50I-S03 
I thureh Furniture, 485-526 

: Alms Box. 493, 495 

: Chanct't Haila. 495, 497 



500 



503 

~soV 



ooTi^i ■'^■'■*^°- °"«^'' 

; Choir Booh-rest, 513. 

: ■ Stalls. 498. 501- 

: Communion Raila, 503- 
Books 



350 

hTT' Mirrors and 

Cabinets. 341-344 

~— . , Cupboard. 346-348 

Brackets. 338-350 
Bureau. 238, 239 

239'24"°* ^'^'^ "''^'' ^'>*''^'"'' 



Cabin Fittings for Offleer. 527, 530. 

Cabinet Bookease. 83-86 

h)7i:i Sn'Anft "***'* ^*** Com- 
bined, 204-209 



-, caay. -a Z4 

• u°\^^Ji'J°'^ Invalid. 560 

! — , Hall. 25-30 

I - -. , Carved, 30 

— in Stained Wood, 170, 171 
i ;,r", ^**^^ 'or Office. 257 
I Chalra. 21<30 

Chancel Ralls. 495, 497 500 

— - Screen Dwarf. 496, 500. 501 
! Chest. Clothes. 359-363 

I , Dranghtsman'a, 368, 369 

■ . preasTng, 174-177 

! . Lead-lined Tea. 366 

: Oak Linen, 358, 359 

, Sea, 364. 365 

— . Steward's. 365 

~ mI"!?""'' "•"'"'■• '^'""■• 

rr-./ Tallboy." 182-166 

rin-Bti. 358-369 

Clumney-pkc... Drnnimt-room, 76- 

with Frrf Ornampnt, 66 67 

" 1,?,"'''6K6'"'"' "'"■ '"■»"'• 

— - and Overmantpi, 68. 69 72 

7475 "***' Cupfeoard. 

rv.T^'^ — ', ■ RpnafssaHce. 70-74 i 

55°7/"'^ ^" and Overmantels. I 
China Cabinet, 94-97 I 

fir,-) 



——: Cupboard for 

and Robes, 497 

— : Hymn Boards, 492. 493 

— — -: l.ecterna. 505, 507-509 
— -■ y^any Desk, 512, 515 

—-: Notice Boards, 485-492 

■: Pulpit. 515-517 

r,~7~' ^nlpit on Circular 

Columna, 523. 525. 526 
■ , — -: Pulpit in Perpendicu- 
lar Style. 517-522. 625 '^""*"^" 

: Reading-desk. 509-512 

^. — .~7r~- Rwredoi, 524. 526 
Clock Case. 548. 549 
^^Tli. — ;i, Grandfather. 550-553 
Clothea dhest. 359-363 ' " 

. Coal Cabinet, 123 

"""jljlWo Oupboa-'d, 329, 530. 
I Coinmoiie with Foldlni Armi, 195. 

Communion Rails. 503-505 

SIf •^"'°'" •" 0»k Tray. 352, 

- — Panelled Wall Bracket 350 
! '^°'^S;-ia^"""'«. Dra»i;i-'r,im. 

, r — (Sheraton, 97-100 

i J27 ''***"'■''■ Hanging. 322, 326. 

sSs'**" ^"P'^'""''' 315. 320. 

— - Settee, 436. 438-443 

— g.mbi-efia°8ta"d?*l'4il46 

- — ■ Washatand. J90, 192 
I i;orrldor Arches, Carved, 396-398 

Cnsy Corner Settee, 436. 438-443 
i r: .. r~7r ' .^PnolBterln" 439 

Couch, Cromwell, 108-112 

- — .Drum-head. 112. 113 
i Couches. Sofas, and Settees, 107- 

i 0<-08Bg-Ie»«ed Writing Table. 283. 

*^"P5«ard. Antique China, 327. 

32^6*"^ Bedroom Recess, 321, 325, 

7^ ^°2.^" "^n"* Hobes. 497 

. China, 327, 328 

, Collapsible, 329. 330. 332-334 



I 



Corner HanrlnK, 



Oapboard. 
126, si, 
■ i^J— fe<l"t«l. 319, 320, 323. 



— . urcH, lor 

3^1. 3Z6, 326 
— L ln»neinff Corner. 522, 



326. 



. Uarneii, 51M19 

, Kltotaen, 316 

, Unen, 3S4.537 

, PedeBtal. 319, 320, 323-326 

^i3?^™' "*''* Drawcri, 329- 

-— , Wan. 326, 328 

Curio CasM and Tables, -)28-433 

■ T.-i?i''°S£*'^ T**>l«i "32. ASS 

Table. Sheraton, 430, 431 



'**'3?Sju>'' ^*''°«" Cupboard, 
Oavei^rt with BJaing Top. 235- 

Deak. Knee-hole, 261-264 

■ Jjilany. 512. 513 

. Pedeital Wrlllng, 219-223 

'1,, • ?"h Drawer! and 

PiWOD-holei, 287-290 

' r~. for Offloe, 246-251 

. Portable. 251-256 

— -. ReadiDff. 609-S12 

. EegiBtered Pedeital. 224-229 

S29~' " "* ^^^^ Cupboard, 

~''nl'^%.2Tl^^ ^'""'^^ Co-- 
Dinlnr Table. Extending, 7-9 
Dioing-ropin Armchair, 21 

Chaira. 21-23 

r^— Ovwinantel, 55 
Nnner WaireoD. 64 
gtej;T«"5.,!i«'J?4 S46.S49 



INDEX. 

Piro Soreeoi, 383. 3S4 

~~ . Carvod. 389, 391-396 

™r — 'or , Drawisfr-room, 
Three- and Pour-fold. 303-388 

■ . Folding, 395. 396 

-, 01a»B-paneIlpd. 389, 391 
'^^ — • Mahogany Folding. 395, 

, Three-fold, 38", 384 

I ^', — .Walnut, with Leaded 

I Glaw Panel. 394, 395 ^*°™ 
: Pla^-front Writing beak, 243, 244, 

^^%?anWidf''"'"''^'""" 

Frame, Inlaid Photo, 462-465 

■. Picture, 454. 455 

^5M59*'"' ^^"°' Combined, 
Framea for Mirrori and Picture!. 
on Palntinga, 450, 451 



Kitchpn Oupboart 

DrcaBcr, 291-2'i-. 

_ — . Encloacd, 294-297 

—-Furniture, 291-315 
Kitchen Table, 1 

n — -TT' E»tcndine. 4-7 
Knee-hole Desk, 26W64 

~~mrn"i6T***"'' ''"• »■•"« 

^"231133""** ^"""* '*"• 
Knife fiozei, 312-315 



«!?!'• i^f^^'-J^'^ (s,'c also Mirror) 
455 Ise**"* Horae-ahoe MlrrSr' 
Oong Stand. 646-549 
Oothio Notice Board, 488-491 
Grandfather Clock Oaae, 650-653 



Lamp Pedeata), 400-403 

■ Standa, 400 

Urder, Portable, 305-305 

^^rTigJiSs'^"' "*"» «« 

7 — A JJ'^"]'%°'°-i 192 
r-ead-Uned Tea Cheat. 366 
Ijecterna, 505, 3U/-609 
Life-aeata. Shlp'a, 536-637 
Litany peak. Sl2, 613 
Linen Cheat, Oak, 358. 359 

Cupboard. 334-337 

Preaa. 482-484 



Dividing Settee, II7 

^*'^^ Si!'"'>». tor Dreaaer. 



295. 



298-300 

Sm*"'" ^^"■'able Table. 

- — C%eat, 368. 369 

*Sfc!o6°°° *'^"*'** *^»*>inct, 

Chimney-piece, 76-79 

■ wi??*" RS**!"^'' 100-102 

i^..Writing Table. 234, 286. 287 

Drenar, 291.294 

. BnoIoMd, 294-297 

with Hirror, 300, 301 

^ — Sliding Doors, 29£ 298- 

""ms*"™"" ""' S"'"". 383. 

lQ»le Xook. 456, 437 

-— 8«ttee, 444. J4S 

Drexiiu; (Ihct Modern. 174.177 

165 Stained *iKd. 165- 

""""■head Co., h. 112. 113 j 

Dumb Walter. ;jl. 35a " [ 



H 

Hall Chair,. 26-30 

I H6.*147 "'"■ """'' "'•a»er. 

tI'j'!;".!'';'' fretwork and 

Leadi-d Llffbta. 370-372 

^IT a.°.„S"te?'<U*^"'™. 380 
— 151 Cupboard, 147- 

TUed, with Mirror, 151- 



olsa 



^,^Standfl. 141-154 fapa 

„ Ombrelli stand.) ' - 

lie'sa"""' ""■"»'"■''• 322, 

^46M61l"' "'"' """'"'' Sconce,. 

~Mfe°J?if ""» <'l"="lar 
3°1M19°°'""''"'' Damp-proof. 
5™5°'n.'°°,°'J'»''' <26, 427 

"76. ^r- ° ^"'"'^ *»»'>• 
Hrmn 'Board!. 492. 493 



i M 

I "^"^MsTS^e *'°''*'"* *■*'» Scree 
Mantel' and Wardrobe Pixtur 

1 for Bedroom, 196, 198-201 
Mirror with Candle kconcea 45 
. Dreaaer with, 300, 301 

~^"o'n;S.°l59.462'""' """-' 

^is?"™'""' ""•' •»>'"'•>» 

, Oval. 465. 466 

i~bffel4'57°S?r "'■"'' <"" 

I Mirrora. having, 467-472 
! Museum Cabinet. 93, 94 

Mualo Cabinet. 124-131 

13M34 *^'^ SwiOBine Drawen 

-, — z, '"i* Writing Tabl 

Combined. 134, 135 

■ Stool. 135, 138, 139 

1^— ^^^^ Box Seat, 136, 137 

n"5 Klalng Seat. 139 

Furniture, 124-140 



,_„,„ *r ^ „ I JffWBpaper Rack, 541-543 

ingje ^Wook, Drawing-room, 436, ( ^^'^}^ Commode with Folding 



Eaay Chaira, 23. 24 
• Kitchen Table, 4-7 



PalUng-leaf Table. 10-12 
Farmhouee Settle, 445-447 



InvaUd'a Folding dudr, 660 



Jardini^rea, 408 

Jewel Boxea, 412-417 

i 4164W''"'' ^"'"'* DrawerB, 

'~~lSk^fl27ll''' ComblnaUon 



notice Boarda, 486-492 

, Oothic, 488-491 

. Ornamental, 487, 488 

4917^92^"*"*"°*'' ''*'■ ^'"'P*^ 



Oak Fir© Screen, 389, 391 

l-laen Oheat. 368, 359 

— ^362 ^3 "**^ Copper Plttlnga, 



loaed, 2g4-297 
>. 291.515 



:. 26M64 

ftblo tor Dr«Qcbt«- 

Turned Le^i. 229, 

12-3! 5 



le, 303-305 

■oom. with Beaer- 

.. 192 
ChCBt, 366 
U/-509 
a. 635-637 



lag Fire Screen, 

irdrobe Plxturea 
.196 198-201 
idle Sconcea, 454 
h. 300, 501 

with Candle 
162 
with OloTc-boz. 

;& 

■e Frame Com- 

Tacketa, 454 

, 467.472 
93, 94 
!4-131 
ringing Drawora, 

WrUing Table 

», 139 

« Seat, 136, 137. 

■Ing Seat. ]39, 

Z4-140 



541-543 
with Folding 

U492 
408-491 
ntal, 487. 488 
.nel, forOhape], 



», 391 

368, 359 

ipper Fittlnga, 



Oak Wr' 554-367 

-— - Wii it. 338, 339 

Octagonal 16, 16 

Ufflce Ohalr b uoI. 257 

r— Deak (tee Deak) 

Ottoman. Box. 113, 114 

r— , Settee. Box. 114-117 

Oval Mirror. 466; 466 

Overdoora. 473 ,78 

. Carved. 473. 476. 477 

^476 477*''^''"'* Pcdimcnta. 473, 

- — , Plain. 478 

6"'69!*'72 *"^ Cbimney-piece, 

y^^ with Cnpboard, 

~~ Zni "XT'' Reoaiaaa-ce. 72 

Ing! 61.64™" Mirror. Hang- 

— - Cupboard. Ohimnev- 

piece and. 74. 76 ^"»™ney 

■. DiDlnB-room, 55 

ror "Si** ^^'^^'^""'ar Uir- 

~~Pma5a! T'''' ""^ '''"■•'*"* 
"ssIts"**''" '^^'^ Chimney-piecpB, 



INDEX. 



Rack with Bruah Drawer, 146. 147 

, Newapaper, 541.543 

-—, Plate, 362. S04 
Jtaila, Chancel, 495. 497, 500 
Reading Dwalt, 509. 612 
Keadlng-room Table, 568, 561 
Rea^ng Table with RevolTing 
„ Bookahelf, 89-92 "'»'*«"">» 
^"1^^ Cupboard with Drawera, 
- — Seat. Indoor, 434, 435 

"m.?*""* . Overmantel and 

'""p.'l,°f..feS""' """> '°'°'" 



^''SSl"" ""• ''""OM tor, 450, 

■""stJl.?^ "" "" «'■« 

— . Columnar, 408, 409 

r — ^ , Hardwood, 399 

Pap.rr-Bafe. Ship'a, 307J09 311 

— for Office, 246-251 

. Shaving, 213-218 

■ S^?^*'"'*. ''3-4f 

Writlng-deak, 219-223 

■ , Begiatered, 224-229 

~b^d."^' '"'*' «■'*'' Cup. 



Safe, Cold, 310-312 

) . Portable, 303-306 

i • ?r?^,'"'oo- 305, 306 

alTi,; o" ' ?»">■■'•, 307-309, 311 
HalooD Framing, ahip'.. 527 
r — Sofa, Ship's, 539, 540 
Sample Cage, Traveller'a, 366. 367 

I Screen Carved Fire, 389, 391-396 
■ Ef".?""'' ■•". 500. sbi 

I 573 ^^^*' O'^oamcDtal. 372, 

~Flreri^?Sr°' ™'«-'0W 

. Plre, Carved, 359. 391-396 

• , Folding, 395, 396 

ZZ' • ?i'','-B»°';l'<'''. 389, 391 

io7~Sit "'""' <"'"> Walnut, 



394. sis 

isTlgi"*'' "'"■ '"'" ■'•°'''- 

■ — — ■ '^'fo-toli, 383, 384 

ni = "ainnt, wltb Leaded 

Olasa Panel. 394, 395 '*•"«-« 

X!.'& ??,"","j5 59.0™.for V,..- 



Shlp Furniture and Fitment. ■ 
OeJIlnff Panel.. 527, 529 ' 

■ '-'ie-Beata, 535-537 

~S^S30°53f "•''""° •'""'"• 

~toTS,;vt"!jT°63S' ^'°""" 
5^^ — : Saloon Framlnff, 527, 

■; — Sofa. S39, 540 

531535 ''"''''"■ sideboard. 

: Sideboard. 531-635 

~ESr,'5T5'"'""'°'' """ ™i« 
Sblp'. Pantry Safe, 307-309 311 
Showca.e Tatle, Oiirto 432 433 
Sideboard with O.rvid taoel, 
*?4 ?"t'- 1, Mirror?, 4e-So ' 

, Early EnffU.h, 50-54 

. Pedestal. 43-48 

Sideboarda. 31.64 
Sofa. Parlour. 107, 108 
Htnircaao Screen. 380 

te; geVi:-4or*i°'-=" 

~47dWt?99,?fo'' '-' 

. Palm, 399, 408 

pUS!' 403-70"" »»<"»<1- 

=:CUrSra''ff,''a°li'^! „d 
ondpmbrella Standi) * '"" 

Steward'! Sea Ohe.t 365" 

Stool, Mu.lo 135. 138, 139 

ij"^ """ Bo> Seat, 136, 138, 



-, Office, 256, 257 



_. warn, ajiy 

""fi7.dT"?^-S59"°'' """" Co- 
45^"*°™' **™*"<^"tftl. 454, 

Piant*°«.?jl7°'j'i?'°'a' <«8-«6 

*P.n.?.*J?5.40t"' »«»«"« 
. Hardwood, 399 

~L5r 393 W" "^ ^'"•""' 

rr— *or Table. 4io, 4li 

rr- Standa. 599-411 ' '* 
SlSi! ??"*• 302. 304 
PPMa, Linen. 482-484 

pK;°6V¥i';-*"'"' 

^626? 626"°'" "o'""""". W. 

6M ,?f tsoMonlar style, 617- 



""ISe-isS"' "''"' °' "'•»"«'•. 



! tlbule, 373 374, 376-378 

ir^K ,V\!' Protwork and 

Leaded UBbta. 370-372 

l^luTdS'teS^?" 
'=:S!!i!Sf3Si:Si""°'''"''" 

, Stalrcaae, 380 

■ S!;"''''^'''''' ^'ro. S83, 384 

iaSIjea"' °'' '^'"■'old screen.. 

fet'« .'"•, T»o Kooma, 380-382 

i05**'''i'"' ""It Poldine 

Door., 373, 374, 376-378 ' 

■ fff'5"'. 3«, 395 

- — . Window. 388, 389 

Sereena, 370J*8 
I Sea Cheat. 364, 365 
I ^~7, -z—s Steward'., 365 
I s^h I"^oor Receaa, 434, 435 
I Settee^ Box Ottoman, 1(4.117 

, Coay Corner, 436, 438.443 

— Im^idlS'lT"""""*' "' 

— -. Drawing-room, 444, 445 
' ah ]?' f^'rmnouae, 445-447 

«7572''""°''" "^ '"'™"- 

i Sl^'^'l 213-218 

I fiS'tjr^J'h""' 470-472 

S^,JJ°; ^""t Cabinet, 469. 470 
I Sheraton Corner Cabinet, 97-100 ' 

— - Curio Table, 430, 431 

saTSo"""" *°'' fl'menta. 



Table. Bookeaae, 276-279 

, Oaf«, 565, 556 

, Curio, 428.433 

ZStSm "'"' ^""lled Corner, 

-, Dlnlnff. 7-9 
no™""*' "'°' Adjuatable, 

J^Scre'w??.',-' "'"'■"■ »"!■ 
, -■ :^~r. Kitchen. 4-7 

' S*?y,''»-'eaf, 10-12 

, Folding, 19. 20 

=:. ^^iLYr''- "■" 

■ 'i;~' Extending. 4-7 

j , Movable, for Child, 553. 664 

. Octagonal. 15. 16 

j- Plant Stand, 410. 4Jl 

i~"&Vh'?S:895'2"' ""»"'- 

. Reading-room. 658. 561 

' 5.^^**58™'*'' Side. 1. 3 

with Round Top, 12. 13 

! . Sheraton Curio. 430 431 

^Z' Zt,V'S"^ °°i?o. 432. 433 

, with Square Top, 13-15 

'■^U^SWpf^T *"" ^> 
"■ "^fl^SP^" Tea, 567 

i ~^lelJ?1o-T2""'^ **»■■ '*»•"»■ 

' . Work. 16-19 

I 276 *"** *'***"«', 272- 

i "' ■■ Oroaa-legged, 283. 286 

. : Davenport, 233-238 



Dm wing. 
Draw 



£68 



T«b|p. Writlnjr, for 
room. 284. m, 287 

■■ Tn'lil3r'..'iK?®"*'o'<'' 229, 232 233 
m' ChMt or DnirSi: 182. 
l!f„P'>"t, I-rail-lliird, 366 
TIM Hall stand „l,h Mirror. ISI. 
Toilet GIa«. 218 

T7o"7r '° «•'»«' Wood, 
Tw°'o.'k' wW;5 "«•». 366. 367 

Trayi, Oak, 3S4.357 

r— ■ and Waltera.^ 351-357 

Tronjjr. Pre... iablnot! 479-481. ' 



INDEX. 



V, nI»ator, Ship'.. Cover tor, S37, 
"■■■a, 3?3"j7"4.i?& '»"""' 



Cmbr^ Standj^Ojrner. l„.,« 
14~ ^'^ Turned Polls. Ill, 
CBholnerin. Co.y Corner Settee. 
Eaay chair, 24, 25 



E'RIon. Dinner, 54 

: "'"""■•■, Oak, 352, 354-357 
— - and Traya, 351-367 
I '^''%f'"""l »fth Copper Panel,. 

IZ:Z £"Phoard. 346-348 

' C^neSr34?344"'" •"" 

— ■ ;; — t Oak, 338. 339 

' r.'JSte"'? Bracket, 346-348 
- - Cupboards, 326. 32^ 
,.- ^. Mirror. 448-450 
Walnut Fire Screen, 394. 395 

■. Modern. 171-174 

- is stained Wood, 15S-163 I 

~r"^''if.'""'."'' «nd Cupboard 
Combination, 209-213 "»"""°' 



I naahitant , Corner, 190 
, Juratory 192 

, Simple. 188^189. 19- 

' in Stained Vooi,!- 

iJiite 8"eenB, 388. 389 
'i?,'.; Ornamenlii: 41 
~422."«3*""* """• 
iir*'. ^'^P'*. 423 
! JVorkboxes. 418-427 

545 ''■ '■'"''•■ 541, I 
Work-table, Lady's 16 1Q 
WriUn,Deik,pCC", 

, P.e(Ieital. 219-22; 

'23'i:S3'""' ""•■''"■ ' 

— Tabic and Cabinet 2: 

' ■ £''0'"-l«'Med, '28; 

: Davenport, 23i-S 

Knep^holp, 229. 232 STX 
— ..T'Wm and 6mce Purl 




r.,™,. „ c..„.t ..vo cce.^,, L..,„», L. 1,..„ 8..v»o=, lo»oc», EX. 



< , Corner, 190, 192 
itorr. I« 
prn 177-18i 

aiiii-rt Wood, i:j-i68 17rt 
ToiiPt Rack 4iiip'.7 535 
Irobe and Oupboard 
nation, 209-213 *^^*™' 
nrcenB. 388, 389 ! 

Ornaraentttl, 418. 4f4 ' 
J Secret Comparttnent. ] 
le, 423 
. 418-427 

. IJtdy'B, 641, 542. 544, 
. l-ady'i, 16-19 
• k, Flap.front. 243, 244. 

Ppdeitai, 219-223 

mh Shelvei, Bureau, 

and Cabinet. 272-276 
'roii-lented, 283, 286 

•rauffitinian'B Knee- 

l^th Pour Drawer». 

— Turned i,-.- 

''•' 229.^^2, 233 '■ 

and OIBce Furniture, 




P